LIBRARY OF CONGRESS DDDQ4535L.5D ifc < ' \^ *' ^.^ * ^V <&<< * <£ ^ *> ^^r:'A ^IJ-V^ .«; v Vr*;^ *\^* s v^.-^% <£><< 9* .v ft ^ o< ^?5 q< -^ ^ Oft i " ^ V ; .^ ° 0j * > $ %u \^ Q, v x s s ^ ^ <£ ^ ^ ^ ^0* tf> ^ \> ***** % • V .***°* % N> r * Y * ^ *% v * v* , -io-Kw. . 161 V. Verbs in -&» 162 VI. Verbs with Reduplication. 163 VII. Verbs whose Pure Stem- vowel a is strengthened by i 164 VIII. Verbs which assume e . . . . 165 Verbs which assume an e in form- ing the Tenses 166 Verbs whose Tenses are formed from different Roots 167 Conjugation of Verbs in -/it 168 Division of Verbs in -/tit 169 Characteristic- vowel and Strength- ening of the Stem of the Pres. \ 170 Mode-vowels 171 Personal-endings 172 Formation of the Tenses. . . 173, 174 Paradigms 175 Remarks on the Paradigms 176 Summary of Verbs in -/xi. . 172 — 190 I. Verbs in -fit which annex the Personal-endings immediate- ly to the Stem- vowel 177 (a) Verbs in -a 177 *??/u 178 Deponents 179 (b) Verbs in -e . ." 180 (c) Verbs ir -t : E?/it. — El/xl. . . 181 II. Verbs in -fit which annex vw or w to the Stem-vowel . . 182 Formation of the Tenses 182 Summary of this class of Verbs 183 - —188 A. Verbs whose Stem ends in a Vowel 183—186 (a) in -a 183 (b) in -e 184 (c) in-t.. 185 (d) in-o. 186 B. Verbs whose Stem ends in a Consonant 187,188 (a) in a Mute 187 (b) in a Liquid. ... .... 188 Inflection of Kelpou and ^ixat 189, 190 Verbs in -« analogous in Forma- tion to those in -/xi . . 191 — 196 I. Second Aor. Act. and Mid- dle 191, 192 II. Perf. and Plup. Act.. . 193, 194 OlSa and eoiKa 195 III. Present and Imperfect 196 Summary of Deponent Passives. 197 Summary of Active Verbs with a Mid. Fut 19S Chapt. VII. — Prepositions, Conjunctions and Interjections 199 PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS. A. Orthography. Digamma or Labial Breathing F. 200 Interchange of the Vowels 201 Interchange of the Consonants 202-204 Change of the Vowels 205-207 Contraction, Diaeresis 205 Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Par- agogic, Hiatus 206 Lengthening and Shortening of the Vowels. — Syncope. — Apo- cope 207 B Prothesis and Insertion of Vowels 207 Changes of Consonants 208 Quantity 209 B. Dialectic Forms. Declensions 210- 214 Homeric Suffix (pi or 251 Chapt. II.— -Attributive Construction. lipsis of the Substantive . (a) Attributive Adjective . ... 263 1 (b) Attributive Genitive . . . . . 264 | (c) Apposition . . 265 . . 266 Chapt. III. — Objective Construction. I. The Cases 268 Nominative and Vocative . . . 269 (1) Genitive 270 A. Local Relation 271 B. Causal Relation 272 (a) Active Genitive 273 (b) Causal Genitive 274 (c) Gen. denoting mutual re- lations 275 (2) Accusative 276 A. Local Relation 277 B. Causal Relation 278 (a) Ace. denoting effect ... 278 (b) Acc.of the Object on which the action is performed . 279 CONTENTS. XV Two Accusatives § 280 Remarks on the Ace. with the Passive 281 (3) Dative 282 A. Local Dative 283 B. Dative as a personal Object 284 C. Dative of the thing 285 II. Construction of Prepositions . 286 (1) Prepositions with the Gen. only § 287, 288 (2) With the Dative only .... 289 (3) With the Accusative only . 290 (4) With the Gen. and Ace. 291-294 (5) With the Gen., Dat. and Ace 295-299 Remarks on peculiarities of the Prepositions 300 Chapx. IV. — The Pronoun as Subjecx, Predicate, Axxribuxe Objecx. I. Personal Pronouns 302 II. Remaining: Pronouns 303 Prospective and Retrospective Use of the Pronoun 304 Chapi. V. The Infiniiive and L?arxiciple used as an Axxribuxe and Objecx. A. The Infinitive 305 (I) Inf. as an Object without the Article 306 Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. with the Inf. 307 (II) Inf. with the Article .... 308 B. The Participle 309 (I) The Part, as the Comple- ment of the Verb .... 310 Remarks on the Inter- change of the Part, and the Inf. 311 (II) Part, used to express Ad- verbial Subordinate Re- lations 312 Special Peculiarities in the Participial Construction 313 Chapx. VI. — The Adverbial Objecxive. A. Ay, Srjra, frf}v> Srj^ev, d-fjirov^ey, Sai 315 B. Confirmative Adverbs 316 C. Emphatic Suffixes, ye, irep, rol 317 D. Negative Particles SIS SECT. II. — SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. Chapx. VII. A. — Coordinaiion. Different Forms of Coordinate Sentences 320 I. Copulative Coordinate Sen- tences 321 II. Adversative Coordinate Sen- tences 322 III. Disjunctive Coordinate Sen- tences 323 IV. Causal Coordinate Sen- tences 324 Remarks on Asyndeton 325 Chapx. VIII. B. — Subordinaiion. Principal and Subordinate Sen- tences 326 Sequence of Subjunctive Tenses in Subordinate Sentences 327a Use of Modes in Subordinate Clauses 327b I. Substantive Clauses 328 A. Introduced by on or us, that 329 B. Introduced by "va, so that, etc. 330 II. Adjective Clauses 331 Agreement of the Rel. Pron. . . 332 Modes in Adjective Clauses . . 333 Connection of several Adjective Clauses 33* Interchange of the Subordinate Clause with the Adj. Clause 334 III. Adverbial Clauses 335 A. Adverbial Clauses of Place 336 B. Adverbial Clauses of Time 33? C. Causal Adv. Clauses . 338—340 XVI CONTENTS. I. Denoting Ground or Cause § 338 II. Denoting Condition 339, 340 III. Denoting Consequence or Effect 341 D. Adverbial Clauses denoting Manner and Quantity 342, 343 I. Comparative Adv.Clauses denoting Manner 342 II. Comparative Adv.Clauses denoting Quantity 343 Chapt. IX. — Interrogative Sentences. I. Interrogatives 344 II. Oblique Discourse 345 III. Special Peculiarities in the Construction of Words and Sen- tences 346, 347 Ellipsis, Brachylogy, Zeugma, Contraction, Pleonasm 346 Anacoluthon 347 Chapt. X. — Position op Words 348 Appendix A. — Versification Page 574 Appendix B. . Abbreviations in writing 587 Index of Subjects Page 589 Greek Index 602 Index for the Eoi*ms of Verbs 614 ABBREVIATIONS. Aesch. Aeschylus, Ag. Agamemnon, S. Septem adv. Th. — Ar. Aristophanes. — Dem. Demosthenes, 01. Olynth., Ph. Philipp., Cor. Corona, Chers. Chersones., Aph. Aphobus. — Eur. Euripides, M. Medea, C. Cyclops, H. Hecuba, 0. Orestes, H. F. Hercules Furens, Hipp. Hippolytus. — Her. Herodotus. — Isae. Isaeus. — Lys. Ly- sias. — PI. Plato, Cr. Onto, L. Leges, Th. Theages, Men. Meno, Soph. Sophista, Crat. Cratylus, Prot. Protagoras, Phil. Philebus, Kp. Respublica. — Soph. Sophch cles, O. C. Oedipus Coloneus, 0. P. Oedipus Rex, Ant. Antigone, Ph. Philoctetes, Aj. Ajax, El. Plectra. — X. Xenophon, C. Commentarii, An. Anabasis, H. Hellen ica, S. Symposium, P. Ath. Respublica Atheniens., R. L. Respubl. Lacedaem., O. Qeconomicus, Ag. Agesilaus, P. Equ. R. Equestris. GREEK GRAMMAR DIALECTS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 1. The Greek language was divided into numy different dialects, the most highly cultivated of which were the iEolic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic. The iEolic prevailed in Bceotia, Thessaly, and in the ^Eolian colonies in Asia Minor ; the Doric, throughout the Peloponnesus, and in the Dorian colonies in Asia Minor, Italy, and Sicily ; the Ionic, in the Ionian colonies in Asia Minor ; the Attic, in Attica. 2. The iEolic and Doric dialects are characterized by harshness and roughness, being the opposite of the Ionic, which is distinguished for delicacy and softness. The Attic dialect holds a beautiful medium between the two former and the Ionic, as it skilfully combines the soft and pleasant forms of the Ionic with the strong and full-toned forms of the Doric. 3. The Ionic dialect is divided into the Older and the Later Ionic. The older Ionic is the language of Hoitk and of his school, although these poets were not satisfied with their own dialect merely, but were able, in accordance with the true principles of art, to select, from all the dialects, those forms which corresponded to the nature of their poetry ; and to employ — since the regular laws of versification had much influence in forming the language 2 14 GREEK DIALECTS. — a peculiar and definite poetic language, called the Epic, or Homeric. This had a great effect on the language of all the Greek poets even to the latest times. We find the later Ionic in the works of the historian Herodotus, born 484 b. c, and of Hippocrates, b. 460 b. c. 4. The Attic dialect is drvided, in accordance with cer- tain peculiarities, into the Older, the Middle, and the Latei Attic. The older is used by Thucydides, b. 472 b. c. ; the tragic poets ; iEschylus, who died 456 b. c. ; Sophocles. b. 497 b. c, d. 405 b. c. ; Euripides, b. 480 b. c. ; and the more ancient comic writers, e. g. Aristophanes, d. 390 b. c. : by several orators, e. g. Antiphon, b. 479 b. c, and An- docides, b. 467 b. c. The middle Attic is used by Plato, b. 430 b. c. ; Xenophon, b. 447 b. c. ; and the orator Iso- crates. b. b. c. 436. The later Attic is employed by De- mosthenes, b. 385 b. c, and other orators, the later comic writers, and the prose authors in more recent times, who sought to preserve in their works the language of the earlier writers. 5. After the freedom of the Greeks had been destroyed by Philip, king of Macedon, the Attic dialect came to be the common written language. As it extended, not only over all Greece, but also over the Macedonian provinces of Syria and Egypt, it lost much of its peculiar stamp by the introduction of foreign forms and words, and it then received the name of the Common, or Hellenic language, r] kolvt], or - EWtjvl/ct] hdXe/cTos. It was used, e. g. by Apol- iodorus, Diodorus, and Plutarch. ETYMOLOGY SECTION I. CHAPTER I. Letters and Sounds of tie Language § 1. Alphab et. The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-four letters, Form. Sound. Name A a a "A\(j)a Alpha B $ b BrJTd Beta F 7 g rd/JLfia Gamma A 8 d Aikra Delta E 6 e short *E yjrZXov Epsllon Z e z ZfJTd Zeta H V elong *Hra Eta %d th Qyjra Theta I I i 'Icbra Iota K K k Kdirira Kappa A X ] AafJLJSha Lambda M p m MO Mu N V n Nv Nu S i X m Xi o short U jjbucpov Omikron n IT P m Pi p P r ( P ph l Phi X X ch XI Chi -¥ -V^" ps wz Psi a w o long ^12 fiija Omega. 16 SOUNDS OF PARTICULAR LETTERS. [$ % Remakk 1. Sigma at the end of a word takes the form s, e. g. eeia/xts, in most editions of the classics. This small s is also used in the middle of com- pound words, if the first part of the compound ends with Sigma, though such a usage is contrary to the authority of the manuscripts, e. g. Trposcpepw or irpofftptpw, dvsywfjs or Svffyevris. Rem. 2. When a and r come together, both letters may be expressed by one character, sr, Sti, or Stigma. Rem. 3. Besides their use as alphabetic characters, e and v were originally osed as mere marks of aspiration, the former for the spiritus asper (§ 6), for which in the earliest times H was also employed, the latter for the Digamma (§ 25) ; hence, as letters, they were called, in opposition to their use as aspirates, e tyi\6v and v if/tAov, i. e. unaspirated. Omicron and Omega (small and large o) derive their name from their relative size. Rem. 4. The principle on which most of the otters of the Greek alphabet are named, is entirely different from that adopted in this country and among the European nations, at the present day. We name each letter by the sound it represents, as a, b, c, adding a vowel to the consonants in order to vocalize them. But among the Orientals, from whom the Greek alphabet was derived, the name was not determined by the sound of the letter. They gave their letters the name of some familiar object, the first sound or syllable of which was the alphabetic character to be represented. For example, the Phoenicians and Hebrews called the first letter of the alphabet Aleph (Greek Alpha), which means an ox : now the first sound or syllable of Aleph is the character or element to be represented. The second letter was Beth (Greek Beta), a house, the first sound of which is the character to be represented. The third is Gimel ( Greek Gamma), a camel. This mode of naming letters, undoubtedly originated from the custom of designating those letters by the picture of the object from which they derived the name, instead of by the characters now used. Thus Aleph was represented by the picture of an ox, Beth by that of a house, etc. k 2a. Sounds of particular Letters. The sound of the letters is indicated by the Roman characters opposite tc them. The following remarks on particular letters are all that is needed in addition : — Remark. The sounds given to the following letters are those more usually adopted in pronouncing the Greek in New England; but the usage is not entirely uniform. A has the sound of a in fan, when it is followed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. x^^-k6s; the sound of a in fate, when it stands before a single consonant which is followed by two vowels, the first of which is e or t, e. g. avaa-rdaeoos, (TTpanuTris ; also, when it forms a syllable by itself, or ends a syllable not final, e. g. fiey-d-Xr], orrpa-rSs; it has the sound of a in father, when it is followed by a single p, in the same syllable, and also Avhen it ends a word; but a final in monosyllables has the sound of a in fate, e. g. Bap-fia-pos, ydp, kya&d, rd. $ 2b.] BRIEF HISTORY OF THE ALPHABET. 17 7, before 7, k, x» anc l !> has the sound of w/ in angle, or nasal n m ancle, e. g ^77eAos, ang-gslos ; K\ayyfi, clangor' ; 'Ayxicys, Anchises (Angchises) ; o-vynSirri, syncope ; \dpvyl-, larynx. 7 before vowels always has the hard sound, like g in get; also before consonants, except 7, k, x-> !> e - 8'- yh as - e has the sound of short e in met, when it is followed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. pey-as, [xer-d ; the sound of long e in me, when it ends a word or a syllable, or when it forms a syllable by itself, e. g. 76, S4-w, fiaatXr 7] has the sound of e in me, e. g. /.101/77. 3 has the sound of tit in £/mc/!:, e. g. Swcctos. j has the sound of i in mine, when it ends a word or syllable, or forms a syllable by itself, e. g. iXiri-ai, on, ired-l-ov ; the sound of i in pin, when it is followed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. irpiv, Kiv-dvvos. k always has the hard sound of Ic, and was expressed in Latin by c, e. g. KthiKia, Cilicia ; Ke/cpoi//, Cecrops ; Kinepeov, Cicero. I, at the beginning of a word or syllable, has the sound of 2, e. g. £eVos ; else- where, the sound of x, e. g. Sia^vco, irpa^is, av ty> a - This seems to be the most rational view of the formation of the Greek alphabet, though somewhat different from the common legendary account, which repre sents Cadmus as bringing only 16 letters into Greece, viz., a, /3, y, §, €, 1, fr, A, fly v, O, IT, p, 2 and X2, e. g. AI0EP (ulfrrip), EX0PON (ix&p&v), S2TXAI ($v%af), X2TN (£w). The alphabet is said to have been completed in the time of the Persian war, by Simonides, who added E, "*", and n, and changed the breathing H, to the long vowel tj. The Ionians first adopted the present full alphabet of 24 letters, and by them it was communicated to the Athenians. This full alphabet was first used in Attic inscriptions in the archonship of Euclidcs, B.C. 403, before this period only the old Attic alphabet is found in Attic inscriptions. 3. The early Greeks used the capital letters exclusively, and left no spaces between the words, e. g. METAAETOYTONEinEXEIPno*02, i. e. /xeTo. Se rod- tov et7T6 X<£iplcro(pos. The cursive, or small character, was not introduced till very late. A document has been found in Egypt written in the cursive char- acter, 104 b. c. But cursive writing was not in general use till long after that time. It is first found in manuscripts in the eighth century. 4. The early Greeks commonly wrote in the Oriental manner, i. e. from right to left, as may be seen in several inscriptions. Other inscriptions, how- ever, of equal antiquity, are written from left to right, proving that both modes were in use. A third method was from left to right and right to left alternate- ly. This was called fiovffrpo(p7]d6u i because it resembled the turning about of oxen in ploughing. Solon's laws were written in this way. But in the time of Herodotus, the Greeks wrote only from left to right. § 3. O rg ans of Sp eech. 1. The organs of speech, used in forming or articulating words, are the palate, the throat, the tongue, and the lips. 2. The sounds which are emitted almost without any action of the throat, tongue, and lips, and which proceed in the freest manner from the breast, are called Vowels; the rest, Conso- nants. f 4.J VOWELS. 19 M- Void els. 1. The Greek has seven vowels, a, i, v, which may be long or short, e and o, which are always short, rj and co which are always long. The character (") over one of the vowels a, t, v, shows that the vowel is short; (~) that it is tong ; (~) that it may be either long or short, e. g. a, a, a. Remark i a, i, and v are called the principal vowels, because they denote the principal sounds ; the other vowels are called subordinate, because their sounds are the intermediates of the principal sounds. Thus, the sound of e is intermediate between a and l, the sound of o is intermediate between a and v ; n is produced by lengthening e or a, co by lengthening o. The relation of these vowels may be illustrated by the following diagram : — 2. When two vowels are so combined as to form but one sound, the sound so produced is called a diphthong. When both the vowels are sounded, the diphthong is called proper ; when only one, improper. 3. The Greek diphthongs originate from the union of the vowels a, e> o, v, rj, co, with the vowels i and v, thus : — a -J- t = at, pronounced like ai in aisle, c. g. at'£, a -f- v = av, " " au in laud, " pads, e -f- i = ei, " " ei in sleight, " Beivo 7]-j-V = T]V r " " eu in feudal, eirAevcra, 7ju|o o -f i = oi, " " oi in oil, " kolu6s, o -f- v = ov, " " ou in sound, " ovpav6s, v -\- i = w, " " whi in whine, " vlos, a> -J- v = av, (only Ionic,) " " ou in sound, " cout6sj also the im- pi'oper diphthongs, o, y, co (i. e. a -f- i, rj -j- t, co -f- «) ; " alcrxpS, Kepa, rrj, red. Rem. 2. The pronunciation of the diphthongs a, ??, w is the same as that of the simple vowels d, 77, «, though the ancient Greeks probably gave the 1 a slight sound after the other vowel. Rem. 3. With capital letters, the Iota subscript of a, 77, co, is placed in a line with the voAvels, but is not pronounced, e. g. Tfll KAAflI= rep /eaA.<£, -nf A1877, but aSr?. 20 VOWELS. [$ 4. Rem. 4. The Iota subscript, which in the most nourishing period of the Greek language was always pronounced, at length became a silent letter, and was either omitted in writing, or was written under the vowel to which it belonged. It was first written under the vowel in the thirteenth century. Rem. 5. The following examples will show how the Romans sounded the diphthongs : ai is expressed by the diphthong ae, et by I and e, oi by oe, ov by m ; v was generally expressed by y, e. g. $cu8pos, Phaedrus ; Edpos, Eurus ; ©pa/ces, Thraces ; rA.au/cos, Glaucus ; Boiurla, Bceotia ; ©ppcrcro, Thressa ; NelXos, NIlus ; Movcra, Musa ; Tpaya>86s, tragoedus ; AvKe'iov, Lyceum ; EiAei&via, Ilithyia ; Kvpos, Cyrus. In words adopted later, the Romans expressed a> by o, as cidrj, ode. Rem. 6. When two vowels, which would regularly form a diphthong, are tc be pronounced separately, it is indicated by two points, called Diaeresis, placet, over the second vowel (i. v), e. g. atSot, for aldol, vis, frinrvos. If the acute accent is on the t or v, it is placed between the points ; if the circumflex, over them, as ai8r}s, K\e'idi, irpavs. Rem. 7. The pronunciation given under § 2a, as well as that given to the diphthongs above, is the one more generally adopted in New England. The original pronunciation of the Greek is lost. It is, therefore, the common, cus- tom for scholars (in each country) to pronounce it according to the analogy of their own language. This is the method proposed by Erasmus in the sixteenth century, and is generally adopted in Europe at the present day. The pronun- ciation defended by Reuchlin ' in the same century, corresponds nearly with the modern Greek. 1 For the benefit of those who may wish to compare the two modes, the fol- lowing explanation of the Reuchlinian is extracted from the Greek Grammar of Sophocles : " A is pronounced like a in father, far. fi, y, 5, like b, g hard, d; in later times, like Romaic J3, y, S. Before k, y, %» !> 7 na ^ the sound of ng in hang, e, like Romaic e, or Italian e. £ like z, but stronger. t\, like Erench c, as in ftte. &, like th in thin, ether, saith. t, like i in machine, k, like k. A, /x, like I, m, respectively, v, like n. At the end of a word it was often pro- nounced and written as if it were a part of the next word. |, in the Attic dialect, like £s ; in the other dialects, like ks. In later times, the sound ks pre- vailed, o, like Romaic o, or Italian o. tt, like p. p, like r. At the begin- ning of a word it was rolled ; when it was doubled, only the second one was rolled. It was rolled, also, after &, , like/ but stronger. x> l^ ce Romaic x> German ch, or Spanish j (x). ^, in the Attic dialect, like , like o in note, nearly. When a consonant was doubled in writing, it was doubled also in pronunciation. During the most flourishing period of the language, both the vowels of a diphthong were distinctly heard I 5.\ CONSONANTS. 21 § 5. Consonants. 1. The consonants are divided, first, according to the dif- ferent organs of speech, by which they are formed, into — Palatals, 7 /c % Linguals, $ t*& v\ p cr, Labials, /3 it cp jjl. Remark 1. The consonants, which are produced by the same organ of speech, are called cognate consonants ; thus y, k, % are cognate consonants. 2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater or the less influence of the organs of speech in their forma- tion, into breathings, liquids, and mutes. (a) The Breathings form a land of transition from the vowels to the consonants. There are three breath- ings : the lingual pos, ElcroKparris, yv/xva(reiapxr} were pronounced like a, 77, a, respectively." — Tit. 22 BREATHINGS. [»* (c) The Mutes are formed by the strongest exertion of the organs of speech ; they are, ^yS^fCTrr^^. 3. The Mutes are divided, (a) According to the organ of speech used in pronouncing them, into three Palatals, three Linguals, and three Labials ; (b) According to their names, .nto ujree Kappa, three Tau, and three Pi-mutes ; (c) According to the force of articulation, into three smooth, three medial, and three rough Mutes. Rem. 3. Hence each of the nine mutes may be considered in a threefold point of view, e. g. y may be called a palatal, a kappa-mute, or a medial, ac- cording as we wish to bring into view the organ by which it is pronounced, its name, or the force of articulation, a medial mute requiring less force to articu- late it than a rough mute. Palatals SMOOTH. MEDIAL. ROUGH. K 7 X Kappa-mutes Linguals T S $ Tau-mutes Labials tt P $ Pi-mutes Rem. 4. The consonants, which are produced by the same effort of the organs, are called coordinate, e. g. the smooth mutes, k, tt, t, are coordinate. 4. From the coalescence of the Mutes with the Breath- ing a, three double consonants originate, — ^ from tto- P KarriKi^ ( as K-6pa\ (ncr), Ae|w (ytr), ovv^ (x a ). £ is not, like \|/ and £, to be regarded as a sound compounded of two con- sonants, but as a soft hissing sound, to be pronounced like a soft z. Only in the adverbs in £e, is C to be considered as composed of (close), for (3v(T$7)v (from $vv4a>, to stop, Perf. PePvo-fiai). It may be regarded, perhaps, as a transposition of sounds, as when the iEolic and Doric dialects use, in the middle of a word, ad instead of (T, C. g. /xeXiadeTai for fibeKi^etau § G. Breathings . 1. Every word beginning with a vowel has a smooth or a rough Breathing; the former (Spiritus Lenis) is indi- to 7, 8 ] hiatus. 23 cated by the mark ( ' ) ; the latter (Spiritus Asper) by the mark ( r ). The rough breathing answers to the English and Latin h, e. g. Icrropla, historia, history. The smooth breathing is connected with every vowel which has not the rough ; but the smooth has no influence on the pronuncia- tion, e. g. ^AiroXKwv, Apollo. Remark 1. With diphthongs, the breathing is placed over the second vowel, e. g. oTos, ev&vs, avriKa. But when the improper diphthongs, a, y, a, are capital letters, the breathing is placed over the first vowel, as these three diphthongs are regarded, to a certain extent, as simple vowels, e. g. "AiStjs (^5rjs) ; ^Hi, ^rii Rem. 2. Originally, the Greeks had no mark for the smooth breathing. The rough breathing was at first denoted by E or H. But when H came to be used as a vowel, Aristophanes of Byzantium, about 200 years b. c, divided it into two characters I- and i, the former as the sign of the rough breathing, the latter of the smooth. Later, these became ( r ) and ( ), and at last ( ' ) and ( ' ). Rem. 3. The liquid p at the beginning of words has the rough breathing, e. g. pdfiSos. When two p's come together, the first has the smooth breathing, the last the rough, e. g. Tlvppos, Pyrrhus ; but some editors omit both breath- ings, e. g. Tlvppos. Rem. 4. At the beginning of a word, v always has the rough breathing, except in the .ZEolic dialect. CHANGES OF LETTERS. § 7. General Remark. Both the vowels and consonants are subject to a variety of changes. These changes result from the tendency of the language to euphony, from their grammatical significance, and from the difference of dialects. The last will be considered in treating of the Dialects. I. Changes of the Vowels. S 8. Hiatus. The concurrence of two vowels in two successive sylla- bles or words, occasions a harshness in the pronunciation, 24 EUPHONIC CONTRACTION OF VOWELS. [| 9. called Hiatus. Thk is avoided by Contraction, Crasis, Synizesis, and Elision. Remark 1. The poets, particularly the Attic, were decidedly averse to the Hiatus of two vowels in two successive words ; among the prose-writers, the orators sought most carefully to avoid it. Rem. 2. In the Iambuses of the tragic poets, the Hiatus is allowed in Uie interrogative ri; what ? e. g. t'l ovv ; rl elires ; among the comic poets, its use is mostly confined to ri, on, ire pi, 3>, e.g. on is, on ovx'h Tepl v/xwv, also in ou5e (/x77§e) efs (eV), ne anus qiridem, to distinguish it from ovdeis, nullus. In addition to its use in the Iambic measure, the Hiatus is found frequently, even in the Tragedians, who endeavored to avoid it when possible ; still, it is mostly limited to special cases ; for example, it occurs with interjections and imperatives, e. g. 3>, vai, &va {up!), t&i, as foi, fth fioi ircu&v, Soph. Ph. 832; aK>C &ua, e| e5pa va>y, Aj. 194. On the Hiatus in the Epic dialect, see § 200. § 9. A. Contraction of Vowels. Contraction is the union of two successive vowels in the same word into one long syllable. These contractions arise either from the natural coalescence of two successive vowels, in accordance with the laws of euphony, or from grammatical principles. The first kind of contractions is called euphonic, the latter, grammatical. In the Common language, the follow- ing contractions occur : — I. Euphonic Contractions. (a) a +a = a as • (T€\aa = (re\a * +* = et 11 i\ee = l iropni = iroprl o -j- = ov " voos == vows (b)a-f-s ) . " ri/xae = Ti/id a +V > >; Tlp.a.7]T€ = TljJ.aTG «+i = a ' ; 7T7pai" = 777pa a+o } '" njj.a.0jj.£V = n/j.a>/xev a + « > ' ; TLfxdai/JLev = nfxci/xev «+« I " njxaeis = r:,uas o.+v i — ' " TLjxar,s = tijjlS.s a -\- oi = CO '' Tlfldoifll = Tlfl^fil a -\~ ov = CO " njxdov = Tiftco (c)e -f-d = 7J " Tei'xed == Teix^7 (Comp. No. II.) e -j- a = d " X°^d = X°" * + « = et " Tetxei' = ret'xei s + o = ou " ) = CO (w) " (plXeCO = (plXw, 0CTT60J = OffT^ 6 -j- a* = JJ " rvirreai = rvirrrt ♦ 9.J GRAMMATICAL CONTRACTIONS 25 e -f- et = et as cpiXeeis = cpiXeTs f +!? — # " " alS6a = cuSto (Comp. No. II.) o+e = ov " fiicr&oe = /j.icr&ov o +77 = CO cc fjo.crfr67iT€ = fucrfrcore *+< = 01 cc cdd6i = alSoT + CO (to) — w (v) " liicr&oto = [j.icr&to, ttXSco = 7rA

(only in Ace. of some Sub. of 0) + l = to " Xco'icrros = Xcparos. [3d Dec Remark 1 . The above contractions take place in accordance with the fol- lowing principles: (1) Both vowels are retained and form a diphthong, e. g. Te^xei* = Tetxei, ald6'i = aldou (2) Both vowels coalesce into a cognate long vowel or diphthong, e. g. Ti/xdopev == ri/xto/xev, alSoa = alSto. (3) A short vowel is absorbed by a diphthong or long vowel preceding or following it ; e. g. cpiXeco = cpiXto, cpiXeov = cpiXov, vX^ecrcra = vXTJcrcra. (4) The short vowels, a, t, v, absorb the following vowel and become long ; e. g. riuae = ri/xd, Ix&vas = tX&vs. (5) A short vowel coalesces with the first vowel of a diphthong, ac- cording to the preceding principles ; when the second vowel is t, it is subscribed with o, 77, w, but if it is any other vowel it is dropped ; e. g. ri/xdrjs = tc^os, TlfidoiflL = TlfAtofJU = Tt/XCXOU = Tl[Xto, TVTTTeai = TVTTTr). II. Grammatical Contractions. (ii) e + e = 77, particularly in the third Dec, e. g. rpi^pee = rpirjpr], yeuee = 761/77. (1>) c + o = d in the second Dec, e. g. oared = octtu, xpv°~* a = XP V0 & (PL), and elsewhere, if a vowel precedes, c g. TlepucXe-ea =~ UepiKXed, /cAe-ea = /cAed, vyi-ea = vyici ; in the Ace PL Pern, of Adjectives in -eos, -ea, -eov, e. g. xpvo~e-as = xp^craSj finally, in the Pern, of Adjectives in -eos, -4a, -eov, when these endings are pi-eceded by a vowel or p, e. g. epe-eos, e-€o, 6-eoi/ = ipeovs, epea, ipeovv, dpyvpeos, ea, eoy = ovs, a, ow. 3 26 crasis. [HO € -f- a = t\ in the Pern. Sing, of adjectives in -eos, not preceded by a vowel or p ; e. g. xP v, e. g. /cat aperrj = Kaperrj, & avSpwTrc = wv3po)7r€, w dya#e = uryaSe, a> dva£ = wra£ ; — (c) some- what often in eyw with oTSa and ot//,cu, e. g. iyu>8a, iyutpau; — (d) less often with the neuter relative 6 and a, as o eyw, a cyw = ovya), dyw; with rot, jxivroi, ovrot, particularly in connection $ 11.] MOST COMMON INSTANCES OF CRASIS. 27 with aV, apa, e. g. rav (seldom in prose), //.cvtoV; rapa and ovrapa (poetic) ; but seldom with 7rp6, e. g. irpovpyov for irpb 'dpyov ; fre- quently in composition with the augment e, as rrpovSioKa. 3. As the second word is the most important, it has properly a greater influence on the form of the Crasis, than the first ; on this principle it is to be explained, that the Iota subscript is used only when the t belongs to the last of the two vowels, e. g. Kat ctra = Kara, eya> oT8a = eya»oa ; on the contrary, Kat en-ci- ra = KaVciTa; at dya#at = aya&u, tw o^\w = tw^A.w. 4. When Crasis occurs with the article, and an a follows, the vowels of the article — even ov and o> — ■ are combined with the following a into a long a, and, if the article is aspirated, the aspirate is transferred to the long a, e. g. 6 av-qp = awjp, ol avopes = aVopes, to akirjSis = Ta\r)$£ as : 6 olvos = Svos o +v =V " to rjixirepov == Sfrj^repov (§ 17, Rem. 3.) CO -f" 6 = CO " TW C/ifp = TQO[X(^ co -f- o = co " tco 6(p&a\iA(£> = raxp^aX/xca oi -f- o = o iAco from c/xAeco, robpavov from tou ovpavov 5 but in Synizesis, it is made only in the pronunciation, both vowels or diphthongs being written out in full. 2. In the Attic poets, Synizesis occurs almost exclusively between two words, viz., with zttu, r), y, fJLrj, followed by «, ov, a, oi, e. g. C7r€t ou, r) ovScls (dis syllable), pirj ov (monosyllable), ^ aWoi, iyo) ov (dissyllable), and ey<6 elfii S. Ph. 577; also, in a few single words and forms, e. g. #eot (=&oi, monosyllable), kwpaKa (=o~tc, tire (not #rt), 7roT6 (with the compounds, as ofo-ore), t^t*, %ri, ovk4ti, /xiikcti ; e. g. aAA' avros, dp ovv, /xd\i(TT &V; (c) In forms of pronouns in a, o, e, as ravra, roiavra, oAAo, rlva\ Tr6repa more rare ; tovto, avrS, 4/x4, o~4, ad (never in t6, rd) ; also in nouns and adjectives of the second and third declensions, ending in o, as aixapr^fiaTa, etc.; dpiara, etc. ; epya, e. g. tout' ahrd, irdvT dya&d, XPW* 7 ' «s , olS' oVSpa, ikeyer' dv, hvirrovT &v, yei/on" 1 &v ; of the forms which admit the v Paragogic (§ 15), in prose, only io-rl often suffers elision ; (e) In certain familiar phrases, as vt] A'C ecprj. Rem. 3. The above elisions are most frequent in the orators, particularly Isocrates, much more seldom in the historians. Rem. 4. A smooth mute before an aspirate is changed into the correspond- ing rough, as vdv& Sera. Rem. 5. A vowel, followed by a punctuation-mark, cannot be elided. Hence, in words closely connected, as vf\ Af e^rj, the comma is omitted, for in such cases, without doubt, the ancients pronounced the words nn quick saccession. On accent in Elision, see § 31, III. § 14. Use of Elision in the Poets. 1. The use of Elision in poetry is very frequent, and much more extended than in prose ; yet the following points are to be noted : A word ending in u is never elided ; nor a, i, o in a monosyllable ; hence the article t6, and the pro- nouns rt and t/, are not elided ; and irepi in no case, — at least among the Attic poets, — nor on, fiexph &XPh nor substantive adverbs of place ending in &i {oSn excepted), and very rarely the Optative ending in eie. 2. The Elision of the t in the Dat. of the third Dec, particularly in the Sing., is ve;y rare in the Attic poets, and is even doubted by many. 3. The verbal endings, jxai, tcu, • VI loiron. $15. N Paragogic {Ze\Kvi; hence also to v6crL. Remark. The poets place the v Paragogic before a consonant, so as to make a short syllable long by position. In Attic prose, it stands regularly at the end of a book or section ; it is, also, sometimes found before the longer punctuation- marks, and sometimes elsewhere for the sake of a more emphatic pronun ciation. 2. The adverb ovrw? always retains its full form before a vowel, but drops the final s before a consonant, e. g. ovrois liroir^ crev, but ovTio ttolw ; still, ovtws may stand even before consonants, when it is to be made emphatic, e. g. ovtw? ye, Xen. C. 3. 6, 9. 3. So the Prep. i£ retains its full form before vowels and at the end of a sentence, but before consonants becomes oc, e. g. l£ cip7Jn/9, but iK Trjs dprjvrjs ; so also in composition, e. g. e&Xaw- J 16.J STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VOWELS. 31 vov, but cKreAetj/. It also has its full form when it stands aftei the word it governs, and is then accented, dp-qvqs eg. 4. So ovk has its full form before a vowel, e. g. ovk al ; in these, the stronger stem- vowels 1 and v are changed into the weaker e, e. g. ir&Kts, ttSXcws ; irrjxvs, Tvr)X e instead of do, e. g. 'iXecos, -uv, instead of 'Ix&os, -ov, Xeds instead of Ado's, yews instead of vdos, MeveAews instead of MeveXaos ; further, in the Attic dialect, fiajiXecos, fiaariXea instead of the Ionic fiao-iXTjos, -rja) so also, Tr6\cas, ?ri7X e «s> Attic, instead of ir6\ios, Trf)X V0S i e is weaker than t and v, see No. 2. 6. Variation, i. e. the change of the radical vowel e into o and a, for the formation of the tenses (§ 140) and derivatives (§ 231, 6); when et in the Present is lengthened from the radical i, it becomes oi in the second Perf, hut when from the radical e, it becomes o ; e. g. rpe^co, rerpocpa, irpa&ep), tcp&opa, iAo| ; Tpex«, rpoxos] rpecpoo, rpocp-f], rpocpevs, rpacpepSs. Comp. Germ, stehle, gestohlen, stahl, English, ring, rang, rung. The 77 is changed into », e. g. ap-fiyw, apayf). Remark 1. Whether the a is to be regarded as a variation, or rather as a euphonic change of e, introduced by a preceding or following Liquid, partic- ularly p and A, sometimes even p and v, may be doubted. Comp. erpairov, eTpdcprju, i(TTpd(pT]v, ifipaxw, iddprjv, ity&dpqv, i&TdXrjv, erapov, 4ktolvov with 4^4y7]v, irtkov. 7. Change of a vowel by the influence of another vowel or of a consonant. Here belong two special cases: — (a) The Attic writers change the Ionic t\ into a after the vowels e and t and the diphthongs ending with t, sometimes even after other vowels, and after the Liquid p, e. g. lS4a (Ion. iS4rj), 7?y, earat, instead of ea-exov. io-eTrSixyv, ifftrai. A striking example of Syncope is found in ^xStov instead of %XvS>ou, from 'EAEY0fl. Comp. § 155 ♦ 17.) 33 9. Apocope. See on the Dialects, § 207. 10. One of the vowels o, e, o is prefixed to several words, for the sake of euphony. This is called euphonic prothesis, e. g. affTepoiri] and trrepoTnft, aarcupis and aracpls, ex&es and x<^ es » eKeTvos and kuuos, i&4\u and £-eA«, oKpvoeis and Kpvos, oSvpo/ACU and dvpo/jLcu, o/ceAAw and /ceAAco, etc. Rem. 2. From these euphonic letters care must he taken to distinguish (1) a when it stands for air6, e. g. a-fiweiv, to avert, or when used instead of avd, e. g. a,mWeij/, to tear up, or instead of the a or a copulative with the meaning of a/xa, from which also a intensive has been formed ; (2) e, when it is used instead of e| or £v, e. g. iyetpew, to wake up, epevyew, eructare, ipe&eiy, irritare 5 (3) with the meaning of 6/j.ov, e. g. dfiix^-V' II. Changes of the Consonants $ 17. a. Mutes. 1. The changes of the consonants arise, in a great degree, from the tendency of language to assimilate different sounds. This assimilation is either a me*e resemblance in sounds, as when AAey-raris changed into AcAcktcu, the smooth r chang- ing the medial y into the smooth k ; or it is a complete identity : .n sounds, as when aw-pCima is changed into cruppi7rTw. — Sometimes, however, the language shuns a sameness in sound, and seeks to remove it by changing similar sounds into dissim- ilar, e. g. 7T€-(JiLA.r]Ka for e-L\r)i«x, 2w for ^a<£w. 2. A Pi-mute (tt /?) or a Kappa-mute (xy^) before a Tau- mute (t 8 #) must be coordinate with the Tau-mute, i. e. only a smooth Mute (tt k) can stand before the smooth t ; only a medial (/? 7) before the medial 8; only an aspirate ($ \) before the aspirate #; consequently, ttt and kt\ fi8 and yS; $ an X$, e. g. (from Tp£/8«) ypde'x«0 KU7TTO>) irAe/cco ) £pe'xw) 7re^7rco) TpijSco) irAe/ceo) £ before t into 7T as : (i <*> u T it 7T « ( 7 u T " K " ( X tc T " K " ( IT K 8 a /3 " ( * " 8 u " ( K (( 8 a 7 " ( X (( 8 a 7 " ( K a & (( <*> " ( 3 " £ " 4> " ( R u & " X " ( y u d » X " ( r4rpifi-rai = TtTpiirrai y4ypa = ir\eySr)i> Ppex-Sw = fSpeySrjv itrefjiir-frrit/ = iir4(.«p&7}v irpifi-frriv = eTpl x $), not only in inflec- tion and derivation, but also in two separate words, the rough breathing being transferred from the vowel to the smooth Mute ; but the medials (/2 y B) are thus changed only in the inflection of the verb ; elsewhere there is no change, hence : — air' ov = d(£' ov, iirfjficpos (from 4irl, Tj/J-epa) = 4), but ovdels (not ovfrels, from ovS" and tts) etAoy-a = eJfAoxa, but \4y 4r4pav (not Aex' kripav) Terpifi-a = TerpKpa, but rplf? ovtods (not rpTfi ovrws). Rem. 2. The negative ovk (ov) thus becomes ovx, e. g. ovx ySvs', yet this change does not occur before the aspirate />, e. g. ob piirTw. In some com- pounds, the smooth Mute is retained even in the Attic dialect, according to Ionic usage, e. g. cwnjAtwT^s (east wind, from airo and tj\ios), XevKnriros (one who rides a white horse, from \wk6s and 'fairos), KpcLrnnros, etc. Rem. 3. This change of the smooth Mute before the rough breathing takes place also in Crasis (§§ 10 and 11), e. g. ret erepa == frfrrepa, to IfxaTiov = bolfia.- riov, Kal erepos = x& Te P°Sj «<** oaa '6ffTis, onus = x&°~ a > X^ aTls ) X^ 7rft ' s ' Yet this Crasis is only poetic. When the smooth Mutes irr or kt precede the rough breathing, both must be changed into Aspirates (No. 2), e. g. 4w, Ba^o?, tlSStj, A££is: on the same principle, when p is doubled, the first Aspirate disappears, e. g. ILvppos, not Tlvppos. 5. A Tau-mute (t 8 #) before another Tau-mute is changed into o- (comp. claustrum from claudo) ; but it disappears before k (in Perf. and Plup. Act.), e. g. iiretb-frnv (from 7re&«) becomes eirelo-frrii/ ireifr-reos ( " ird&eo) " ireurrios 7]pei5-^riu ( " 4pelBw) " T)puo~frqv r4irei&-Ka ( u Tci&a>) " ireireiKa. I 18.J LIQUIDS. 35 6. The t, which, in the Attic dialect very often becomes i7raS-a. The same change, also, sometimes takes place in the third Pers. PL Perf. and Plup. Mid. and Pass, of mute and liquid verbs, which properly should end in -vrat and -vto (as in pure verbs, e. g. fieftovXev-vrai, ifiefiovXev-vro), e. g. rcrpt^axat, IreTpicfraTO, 7T€7rA.e)(aTa.i, Tcra^aTat, icrKevaoarou, Ke^coptSaTCU, k^Sdparai (instead of rirpt^vraiy IrirpifivTO, etc., from t/oi/3-9eip-u)). See § 116, 15. 2. N before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid, e. g. ufor6s ( " /j.6pos, mors) " 0por4s. 36 MUTES AND LIQUIDS. \\ iv $19 c. Mutes and Liquids. — Liquids and Muti s 1 . A Pi-mute (tt ft ) before ft is changed into //,, a Kappa-mute (k y x) " p " " y> a Tau-mute (r 8$) "ft " " -) Tau-mute: from rplfiw) ' Aefrrw) ' 7rAe/c«) ' Aeyw) ' dvuT« ) ' iptlSo) ) ' Trei&w ) • Kop.i£w) becomes reTpip.p.ai " AeAei/iiiat " yeypap.p.ai " 7re7rAe7/xai remains \4\eyp.at becomes fie&peypxu " tfvvv, etc. In some words, even ^ stands before p., instead of the original k or y, e. g. lwxp-6s from ic£/c«, vKo-xji6i from whence. The preposition ear, in composition, is not changed, e. g. e/ctiov- 2. The medial /? before v is changed into fx, e. g. aeP-v6s (from vefiopai) becomes ffvv-yiyvcoffK(a " cruyyt-yj/cSo-icft. ev-xos " Zpo\i\>xos ffvv-\ew " truy£ea> ; but (rvvTetvu), (TvfSeco, . Comp. i/niuo, imprimo. !!km. 2. The enclitics are not changed, e. g. oWep, -roVye, not oyirep, etc. Rem. 3. Also at the end of a word, v before a Pi-mute, as well as before ju, was, without doubt, pronounced like p., and before a Kappa-mute, like y ; and jo it is found in ancient inscriptions, e. g. TOMITATEPAKAITHMMHTEPa, rOrXPHMA«ri2MON (i. e. rhu irarepa nal ttjv p.r\repa, rhv xP y )i laTi(rUi ^ v )- So also V and , iu ~2.ap.ui) ♦ 20.1 THE SIBILANT O" WITH MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 37 $ 20. d. Use of the Sibilant ) with cr is changed into \J/, a Kappa-mute (k y x) with or is changed into £ a Tau-mute (t 8 #) disappears before ) •yp&fyco 0) Kappa-mute : -KXeKau) ( ' 7rAe/ca>) ir\4^ca \4ye'X w ) j3pe'{« (7) Tau-mute : avvTcra) ( ' az/uT«) avvcrw cpetScra? ( { epeiSai) ' epeicrca Tret&crco ( ' Trefoa) Trdtrat iX-rridcra ( ' €A7Tl£a>) eXirtcru,. Remark. 1 . Comp. duri, rerri, coxi ; from d uco, re^o, coguo. The Prep. eVt before , not il-c&crw. — In irovs, Gen. 7ro5-Js, and in the Perf. active Part, in -cos, Gen. -cn-os, after the Tau-mute disappears, the preceding vowel is lengthened. 2. N disappears before o-; but when v is joined with a Tau- mute, both disappear before cr, but the short vowel before o-, is lengthened : e into «, o into ov, a, X, v into a, I, v, Comp. Rem. 3, rvcp&4vT-cri becomes rvcp&elcri \4ovt-ci becomes \4ov8-arco " crireicrco e\[iiv&-cn " eXixlcri rtyavT-cri Tinpacri Sei/ciwr-ct " Seucvvn Sai/xov-cri " dai/xocri "S.evocpS>vT-cri " "Eevocpoocn. Rem. 2. Exceptions : 'Ev, e. g. ivcrireipw ; 7rav- before cr with another conso nant, e. g. irdvcrKoiros, in some words is assimilated ; e. g. irdtrcrocpos is used as well as irducrocpos, etc. (in ird\iv the usage varies) ; also in some inflective and derivative forms in -crai and -cris from verbs in -aivw, e. g. Tv4fa) ; but before cr followed by a consonant, or before & it disappears, e. g. aiv CTTj/xa becomes cricrTr}fj.a, , e. g. ayyeA-e-frw, ayyeXa). So too in the Nom. of the third Dec. the final Sigma is omitted, when v or p precedes, and the short vowel is lengthened, e. g. eiKdcv instead of €ik6v-s, iroip^v instead of ttoi/mpv-s, prjToop instead of pi\rop-s, alfrhp instead of al&ep-s. — T and , e. g. \4ovt-s becomes AeW, fSovAevovr-s becomes fiovXsvwv. Rem. 4. In epvvfu (instead of cff-vv/xi, ves-tio) the ) is changed into tre(piKt]Ka X^'X^ Ka ( " X* u ) " " nexvKa &4-&VKO, ( " 3vw) " t4&vk, frpeir-r-fip, (bpeit- fia) &pe}J.fia ; racp-fj, TA$-w, racprivai. (second Aor. Pass.), into &ctyo>, bdir-ro), (rebaT- ucu) TeSra/x/xai. (but third Pers. PL rerdcparcu, e. g. Her. 6, 103, with one of the better MSS. is to be lead instead of Tefrdcparcu) ; rpxxpos, TPT*-a) into frptyw, frpvir-Tco (re&pvir-fAat), Tefrpvpficu ; rpex-o into (dy>e/c-(TOjUc») ^pe^o/xai] — rpi%-6s into $pi£, &/»£tV; tox^s, in the comparative, becomes bdacrav. For the same reason, the future e£a>, from exco, to Aare, is the proper form, the aspiration of the x being transferred to the smooth breathing and making it rough. Remake 1. Teu|a> from revxa, and rpfya from rpvxv, remain unchanged. Kem. 2. Where the passive endings of the above verbs, Tp4), TPT*n (frpvirTw), begin with &, the aspiration of the two final conso- nants - 1 ^jt,.), Xyj/jL-pia (in- stead of X7J7r/j.a), KOfx-fxa (instead of KOirp.a), racr-cna or tcxt-toi (instead of ray-o-w), 770-ow or t]tto)v (instead of tjk-luv), fxaXXov (instead of pidX-Lov), aXXos (instead of aAtos, alius). 2. In the Common language, only the Liquids ; \, fx, v, p, the Sibilant a, and the Mute r, can be doubled ; yet tt and k are also doubled in single words, e. g. Ittttos, a horse ; kokkos, a berry. The Medial y is often doubled, but this letter thus doubled is softened in the pronunciation ($ 2). Two Aspirates are not doubled ($ 17, 4). 3. p is doubled when the augment is prefixed, e. g. eppcov, and in composition, when it is preceded by a short vowel, e. g. apprjKTos, fiaSvppoos ; but eiz-poocrros (from cv and pciWu/u) Remark. In imitation of Homer, the Tragic writers also double the or, yet much less frequently than Homer, e. g. t6 iEsch. Pers. 122 ; so also in the Dat. PL of the third Dec. eaa-t. $ 24. Strengthening and Addition of Consonants. 1. Consonants are frequently strengthened, in the inflection, by the addition of a corresponding consonant, namely : — (a) The Labials (;8 ir ), tvtt-t-w (instead of tvtt-w), piir-r-ca (instead of pi, Put. irfyu), the poetic 6crcro/xai, Put. tyo/iai ; in 5e'i//« (instead of Secpoo),

Att. &-f}T-T-w (instead of fifiX' *) 5 "pd-fa (instead of icpdy),Tpify (instead of rpiyw) ; a Kappa-mute with and dddfy; the strengthening t is found only ir irtKTO) and tIktc*}. (c) The Linguals (8t&) are strengthened by (instead of yap $-p6s (from yafx-e-p6s, ya.fj.p6s), a.v-5-pos (from avepos, avp6s). 3. N also is used to strengthen the Labials, especially in poetiy, so as to -make a syllable long by position, e. g. rvfj-ravov (from tu7t-t-&>), CTp6fj.f3os (from arpi- instead of irv^ofiai, friya, Aa£&>. On the change of u, see § 19, 3. On the v Paragogic, see § 15, 1. 4. 2 also is prefixed to some words, but mostly to such as begin with /x, e. g u<£5i£ and crixudi^, fxiKp6s and aixiKpos ; a strengthening o~ is also inserted before it and t in the Peif. Mid. or Pass., and before 3- in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. rereAe- a-fiai, TCT4\e-ar-Tai, iTe\4- o~Kap-&-fj.6s from cncaipa), irop-&-/j.6s from ire'ipa. $ 25. Expulsion and Omission of Consonants. 1. In inflection, v instead of yive-a-os, yei>4-o~-ow (comp. gene-r-is, gene-r-um). At the end of a word, and after Pi and Kappa-mutes, it is retained, e. g. yeVos, Tityw (=tiW«), 7rAe|co ( = -r\eK-cra>) , but after the Liquids, in inflection, as well as commonly at the end of a word, it is omitted, e. g. #77 e* Act (instead of tfyye\-cr-a) , ayyeAeo (instead of a.yye\-e-c~-ci>, ayyeA-e-w), p^rcop (instead of p-f}Top-s). Comp. § 20, Rem. 3. 2. The Digamma softened into the vowel v (§ 200) is omitted: (a) in the middle of the word between two vowels, e.g. w6v (uF6v), ovum, 6'is (&Fiy),ovis, al(t>u (alFwv), aevum, vios (ueFos), novus, CKai6s (o-kcuF6s), scaevus, f3o6s ((3oF6s), bovis ; &ea>, 7rAew, -rvea, i\dco instead of &4Fa, etc. ; (b) at the beginning of the word before vowels and p, e. g. divos (FoTvos), vinum, eap (Feap), ver, Is (Fls) vis, oIkos (FoTkos), vicus, lUeiv (FideTv), videre, io-^s (Fearfrfis), vestis, piiywfii (Fp^yvvfxi), frango. On the contrary, the Digamma (this softened v) is retained in connection with a preceding o, e, o, with which it then coalesces and forms a diphthong : (a) at the end of a word, e. g. fiov (instead of fioF), fiao-iXevi etc.; (&) before a consonant, e. g. fiovs (f36Fs, bovs, bos), vavs (vdFs)> J) avis, fiovv, f3ovai, f3aF-6s, Ix&vF-os. 4* 42 EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. [§ 25 3. Since the Greek language admits an accumulation of three consonants, only in composition, not in simple words, unless the first or the last is a Liquid, then, if in the inflection of the verb, a termination beginning with oft is appended to the consonant of the root, the ) becomes AeAei<££W (§ 17, 2.) \e\4y) " eixa (Gen. o-w/xar-os), instead of o-w/iar, ydXa (Gen. ydXaKT-os), instead of yaXaKr, x4wv (Gen. \4ovr-os), instead of x4ovt, 4(Zoi>\€vov instead of ejSouAeiwT ; — repas (Gen. r4paT~os), instead of repar, n4pas (Gen. Kepar-os), instead of K€par, fx4xi (Gen. ii4xit-os), instead of fUh.IT. H 2G, 27.] NATURE AND QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES- 43 CHAPTER II. Syllables. $26. Nature and Division of Syllables. 1. Every vowel, pronounced by itself, or in connection with one or more consonants, is called a syllable. 2. A word consists of one or more syllables. When a word consists of several syllables, a distinction is made between the stem-syllables and the syllables of inflection or derivation. The stem-syllables express the essential idea of the word, the syllables of inflection or derivation, the relations of the idea. Thus, e. g. in yi-ypa^-a, the middle syllable is the stem-syllable ; the two others, syllables of inflection : in Kpny-fia, the first is the stem-syllable ; the last, the syllable of derivation. $ 27. Quantity of Syllables. 1. A syllable is short or long, by nature, according as its vowel is short or long. 2. Every syllable is long which contains a diphthong, or a simple long vowel, or two vowels contracted into one, e. g. fiovXevw ; rjpios; "o.ko)v (from de/cooi/), fiorpvs (from fiorpvas). 3. A syllable with a short vowel becomes long by position, when two or three consonants, or a double consonant (£ £ ij/), follow the short vowel, e. g. o-tcAAw, tv^uvtcs, n6pa£ (KopaKos) rpairltp.. Remark 1. The pronunciation 1 of a syllable long by nature, and of one long by position, differs in this, that the former is pronounced long, but the latter not. When a syllable long by nature is also long by position, its pronun- ciation must be protracted. Hence a distinction is made in pronouncing such words as irparroi, irpa^is, irpayfMa (d), and toVtoj, Tet£is, rdyfxa (a). Rem. 2. But when a short vowel stands before a Mute and a Liquid (Positio debihs), it commonly remains short in the Attic dialect, because the sound of the Liquids, being less distinct than the Mutes, they are pronounced with more 1 The method of pronunciation stated in this remark is adopted in many of the German gymnasia, and in some of the schools in England and Scotland, but not to any extent in this country. — Te. *4 QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. [$ 2ft ease, e. g. dreKvos, &weir\os, 'atc/xt), fiorpvs, dldpaxpos, yet in two cases the posi- tion of the Mute and Liquid lengthens the short vowel : — a) in compounds, e. g. 'iKve/xw ; b) when one^ of the Medials (/3 7 8) stands before one of the three Liquids (a /j. v ), e. g. fiifixos, evod/xos, TreirXzyixai ; in tragic trimeter, &A also lengthen the preceding short vowel. It is obvious that a vowel long by nature cannot be shortened by a Mute and Liquid, e. g. jj.r)vvrpov. 4. A syllable, which contains one of the three doubtful vowels (a, 1, v), cannot, in the same word, be pronounced long and short, but must be either long or short. y 28. Quantity of the Penult. hi order to a correct pronunciation, the quantity of the three doubtful vowels, a, i, and v, in the penult of words of three 01 more syllables, must be determined. The following are the principal instances in which the penult is long. The quantity of the syllables of inflection is treated in connection with the Forms : — The penult is long, 1. In substantives in -aow (Gen. -aovos or -awvos), in substantives of two or more syllables in -iwv (Gen. -iovos; but -twv, Gen. -Xwvos), and in forms of the comparative in -low, -lov (Gen. -iovos), e. g. biraoav, -ovos, 6, r), companion, Uocrei- Sdatv, -wvos ; ictav, -ovos, r), pillar, fipayiwv, -ovos, 6, arm, 'Atupiwv, -ovos ; but AevKa\twv, -a>vos ; KaXktav, ndWIov, more beautiful. Exceptions. The two Oxytones, 7) rfi&v (l), shore, and generally r\ }#&#, snow. In Homer, the comparatives in -loov, iov, are always short, where the versifica- tion admits. 2. In oxytoned proper names in -av6s, and in the compounds in -ay6s (from &yw, to lead, and dyvvpn, to break), -avtop and -Kpavos, e. g. 'Aowcfc, \0xay6s, captain ; va.va.y6s, naufrdgus ; Biavap, hUpavos, having two horns. 3. In adjectives in -ays (Fern, -ais) derived from verbs- in -dw, in proper names in -arris, in substantives in -fr-ns (Fern. -Ins), and in those in -irr\s of the first Dec. (Fern, -vns), and in proper names in -fry, e. g. axpaf)s, untouched; EixboaTTis, MifrptiaTris, irohfr-ns, -ov, citizen (Fern. ttoXTtis) : irpe ■ivn, -Ova, in those in -ivos, when a does not precede the ending; in Pro $ 28. J QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. 45 Proparoxytones in -up a, and in adjectives in -vpos with a preceding long syllable, e. g. 'O '6fj.l\os, multitude; dcorTur], gift ; 6 kIvSvvos, danger; iredlXov, shoe; Atylva, yecpvpa, bridge; 7] Kct/xlvos, oven ; alo-xvvi)., shame : laxvpos, strong ; asKZvov., parsley ; &p.wa, defence; (but dxvpos and e'xtyxk), firm. Remark 1. The following may be added to the Proparoxytones in -ivos and -Op a, namely, 6 x a ^ y 6s, rein; 6 ipluos, wild fig-tree; and r) KoAAupa, coarse bread. Exceptions. E I Kairivn, feast, and compounds in -y v vo s (from yvvr), woman) e. g. avdp6yvpos, and Koptvn, club. 5. In substantives in -vtos, whose antepenult is long, and in compound adjectives in -tiaicpvTos and -rpvros (from SaKpva, rpva), and also in sub stantives in -vp.a, -vyi„ and -vyuv, and in adverbs in -vdov, e. g. 6 kwkvtSs, wailing ; &Tpvros, indestructible ; 6\o\vyr), ululatus ; aSdicpvTos, without tears ; 'ffipvfxa, -dros, seat; bXoXvy&v, ululatus, BoTpvSov, in clusters. Exception. Map/napvyrj, splendor. 6. In dissyllabic Oxytones in -ik6s, -Zp.6s, -li/6s, -los, -v\6s, -v/x6s, vv6s, and in Paroxytones in -i/iij, -tvn, e. g. $ix6s, bare ; r) plvos, skin ; 6 f>v[x.6s, pale ; £vv6s, common ; & x^Sifidder; 6 'los, dart; 6 Sv/x6s, mind; AujUt;, injury ; 6 \Ip.6s, hunger; 6 x^os, juice ; so, Sdvpios, etc.; nvvn, excti&s. Exceptions. BiSs (6), bow ; ir\vv6s (6), washing-trough. 7. In dissyllables in -tios, -dv6s (oxytoned), and in dissyllables in -ia 7 which b*>gin with two consonants, e. g. 6 va6s, temple ; , 'idccav Upiairos, 'Xdpdiris (Serapis), ^rv/xcpaXos, $dpo-&Aos. II. r. 'Aieplf$r)s, exact ; 4vtitf}, rebuke ; irap&evoirbrns, gallant. ty&Ifjios, strong; epl&os, day-laborer; rh rdplxos, pickled fish ; 6 r) x^ZSdv t swallow; 48 ACCENTS. J$ 29 it must have the circumflex, when the ultimate is short, e. g. reixos, TTpaTTc, but the acute, when the ultimate 1 is long, e. g t€l X ov^ Trpdrroi ; if the penult is short it has only the acute, e. g. rarrw, tottc. On the ultimate, either the acute or the circumflex stands, e. g. 7raTr}p, irarpo)v\ nominatives accented on the ulti- mate usually have the acute, e. g. whim's Trora/Aot, Srjp. Rem. 6. In the inflection-endings, -ai and -oj, and in the adverbs, irp6ira\ai and eKiraXai, the diphthongs, in respect to the accent, are considered short, e. g. rpdirefai, TinrreTcu, yXwcrffai, fofrpwiroi, x<*>P 01 ' The optative endings, -o i and -at, e. g. rifi-ficrai, e'/cXei7rot, AetVot, and the adverb oIkoi, domi, at home, are long; on the contrary, oIkoi, houses, from oTkos. Rem. 7. In the old Ionic and Attic declension, a is considered as short in respect to accent, having only half its usual length, as it takes the place of o, e.g. MeyeAecus, ayuyeoou; — Tr6\ea>s, ■n6Xeoov — ; '/Aecos, 'dyrjpcos, Gen. C /Ae&>, ayrjpco', but if adjectives like '/Aecos are declined according to the third Dec, they are accented regularly, e. g. s, cpiXoyeXaros ; so also in the Dat. Sing, and PI., as well as in the. Gen. and Dat. Dual, where the penult is long, e. g. 'dynpas, ayfipct), a.yt]pa>s, ay-fjpccy. Rem. 8. In the words, eftye, that, vaiyCh certainly, the penult has the acute, apparently contrary to the rule ; but these must be treated as separate words. The accentuation of the words efre, ovre, cbsirep, ^tis, rovsSe, etc., is to be explained on the ground, that they are compounded with Enclitics (§ 33), Rem. 9. According to the condition of the last syllable with respect to accent, words have the following names: — (a) Oxytones, when the ultimate has the acute, e. g. rervcpcis, ko.k6s, S-fip', (b) Paroxytones, when the penult has the acute, e. g. riir™ ; (c) Proparoxytones, when the antepenult has the acute, e. g. frvSpwiros, tvit- t6(A€VOS, &V&P0OTTOI, TVTTt6/JL€VOI] (d) Perispomena, when the ultimate has the circumflex, e. g. kukws ; (e) Properispomena, when the penult has the circumflex, e. g. irpay/xa, ^/° > an( i "Hpa, that the ultimate is long, otherwise the penult of these words must be circumflexed, 8; — from the acute on evya>, <£evye, Trparrc (but Tarre) ; (/3) a polysyllabic Paroxytone, whether the penult is long or short, becomes a Proparoxytone, e. g. fiovXeva), pov- Xevc. (c) By prefixing a syllable or syllables to a word, the accent is commonly removed towards the beginning of the word, e. g. evyo), cevyov ; so also in compounds, always in verbs, com- monly in substantives and adjectives, e. g. 686evye airocfievye. But when syllables are appended to a word, the accent is removed towards the end of the word, e. g. rvirroi, TV-n-TOfxcd^a, Tvc}i$7]cr6ixe$a. Remark 1. The particular cases of the change of accent by inflection, and the exceptions to the general rules here stated, will be seen below, under the accentuation of the several parts of speech. 2. The following principles apply in contraction : — (1) When neither of the two syllables to be contracted is accented, the contracted syllable also is unaccented ; and the syllable which had the accent previous to contraction, still retains it, e. g. (£iAee = <£iAa (but <£iA€a = <^\ei),yeWi = y«'ei (but yevecov = yevw). 5 59 CHANGE OF THE ACCENT. [$ 3l (2) But when one of the two syllables to be contracted is accented, the contracted syllable also is accented, (a) when the contracted syllable is the antepenult or penult, it takes the accent which, the general rules require, e. g. ayaTraojxai = aya.Tra>ij.ai (piXeS^vos = (pi\ovu.evos iaraSros = ecrruros op&Sovai = op&ovcri v\r}ecrv. Eem. 2. The prepositions, a/xcpi, avr'i, avd, did, and the poetic viral, inreip, dial, Trapai, do not admit Anastrophe. If the preposition stands between an adjective and a substantive, according to Aristarchus the Anastrophe is found only when the substantive stands first, e. g. "S,dv&a> eiri Ziv-qevrt (but Zivi)evri iir] Eoyd-w). Other Grammarians reject the Anastrophe in both cases. — In poetry, trepi is subject to Anastrophe only when it governs the Gen., but then very often, and even when the Gen. and irepi are separated by other words. See § 300, (c.) Eem. 3. Prepositions, moreover, admit Anastrophe, when they are used instead of abridged forms of the verb, e. g. ava instead of avdofrriTi 5 fxera, rrdpa, em, vrco, irepi, en, instead of the indicative present of etvai, compounded with these prepositions, e. g. eyw irdpa instead of irdpei/xi, irepi instead of ireplecrri', also, when the preposition is separated from the verb and placed after it, which is often the case in the Epic dialect, e. g. bKecras &iro irdvras eralpovs. But the accent of air6 is drawn back without any reason, in such phrases as airb &a\ds (as), el; but if ws follows the word which it should precede, it has the accent ; this position, however, is found only among the poets, e. g. kolkol w?, for o)s kolkol; (&) ov (ovk, ovx), not ; but at the end of a sentence and with the meaning No, it has the accent, ou (ovk). Comp. $ 15, Rem. 2. } 33. VI. Enclitics. Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, which, in connected discourse, are so closely joined, in particular cases, to the preceding word, that they either lose their tone or throw it back upon the preceding word, e. g. <£i'Ao? rts, tt6Xcjxoiu PL ?, for ws kclkol ; (d) ov (ovk, ovx), not; but at the end of a sentence and with the meaning No, it has the accent, ov (ovk). Comp. $ 15, Rem. 2. 5 33. VI. Enclitics. Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, which, in connected discourse, are so closely joined, in particular cases, to the preceding word, that they either lose their tone or throw it back upon the preceding word, e. g. l\os n?, 7toAc/aos tliv PL ccpiai (v) ot e, vlv ; (c) the indefinite pronouns, rls, r\, through all the cases and numbers, together with the abridged forms rod and tw, and the indefinite adverbs ireos, 7rc6, Try], irov, TTo&i, iro&4v, not, 7tot€ ; but the corresponding interrogative pro- nouns are always accented, e. g. rls, ri, irws, etc. 5 (d) the following particles in the Attic dialect, tc, toi, ye, vvv, irep (and in the Epic, /ce, KeV, vv, p&), and the inseparable particle 8e, § 34, Rem. 3. Remark. Several small words are combined with these enclitics, forming with them one word, with a meaning of its own, e. g. efre, oire, M^e, &sre, Crrrep, orris t etc. f 34.] INCLINATION OF THE ACCENT. 53 ? 34 . In c I i n ation of the Accent. 1. An Oxytone so unites with the following enclitic, that the accent, which is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence [h 31, I), again becomes acute, e. g. h-hp ris for &r)p ris kuXos eariv for KaXbs iffri* Kal rives " /cot rives Trora/xos 76 " irorafxbs ye KaXSs re " KaAbs re iroTa/ioi rives " irora/xol rives. 2. A Perispomenon unites with tne following enclitic without further change of the accent, e. g. s, icai, fxev, on, ttov, and the pronoun rovr, and also at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. loe?v eariv (licet videre), el eariv, ovk eariv, tovt eariv, eari &eos, etc.; the other forms of elfii which are capable of inclination, retain the usual accent on the ultimate, when they stand at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. elal &eoi. 2. The forms of (pr\fxi which are capable of inclination, retain the accent, when the} r stand at the beginning of a sentence, and also when they are sep- arated from the preceding word by a punctuation-mark, e. g. (p-niA ey&. — "Egtiv avrjp aya&6s, iros, av-Spla, but irepcp-Surjv. 7. Compounds are divided into their constituent parts, when the first part ends with a consonant ; hut if the first part ends with a vowel followed by a short syllable, the compound is divided, like a simple word; e.g. ck-jScuVw, ffvveK-(pd!)V7] / f)Trjs, not inrojj.o\6yr} mother. $ 40. J GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 59 3. The names of the letters, infinitives, all indeclinable words, and every word used as a mere symbol, are neuter, e. g. to \djjbf38a, rb TV7TTeiv, the striking ; to ^T-qp, the word mother. Rem. 2. The gender of the names of mountains is determined by their endings ; hence (a) masculine, 'EXIkwv, -£>vos, etc. ; those in -os, Gen. -ov, e. g. IIapuav, -ovos, 77 XaAK7j5c6V, -ovos, 7) Kapx7j8c6i/, -ovos (except 6 Olvewv and 6 Bpavpwv, -wvos, usually 6 MapaSrwv, -wvos; but commonly 77 ~2,ikvwv, -wvos) ; (c) i) Tpot£i)v, -r)vos. The gender of the others is determined by the endings. Hence, (a) All names of countries in -os, Gen. -ov (except those named above), are masculine, e. g. 6 B6o-7ropos, 'logo's, YlSvros, 'EWtjsttovtos, Alyia\6s ; all plural names of cities in -01, Gen. -wv, e. g. $i\nnroi ; names of cities in -ovs, Gen. -ovvTos, e. g. 6 'T^ovs (some of these are used both as masculine and feminine, e. g. Qikovs ; 'Afxa^rovs, KepaeroDs, 'Pa/xvovs, 2t5oCs, and Tpcnre&vs, are feminine only) ; those in -as, Gen. -avros, e. g. 6 Tapas ; those in -ens, Gen. -ecos, e. g. Qavorevs ; finally, 6 Macros, Gen. -tjtos; (b) All names of countries of the first Dec. and those of the third, which have feminine endings, are feminine (see § 66, II), e. g. r) 'EAei/cns, -tvos, 7) SaActjius, -Ivos, €tc. ; (c) All in -ov, Gen. -ov; plurals in -a, Gen. -wv, and those in -os, Gen. -ovs, are neuter, e. g. to "IAiov, to. AevKrpa, to "Apyos, Gen. -ovs. 4. The names of persons which have only one form for the Masc. and Fern, are of common gender, e. g. 6 i) Stos, god and goddess ; o y) 7rats, boy and girl. Rem. 4. Movable substantives are such as change their ending so as to indicate the natural gendei*, e. g. 6 fia land; lhia,form; cro<£ia, ivisdom ; ^da, utility ; ewoia, benevolence ; here also belong the contracts in a (see No. 2), e. g. pa ; some sub- stantives in a, e. g. aXaXd, ivar-cry, and some proper names, e. g 'AvSpofxiSa, ArjSa, TeXd, ^iXofx-qXa, Gen. -as, Dat. -a, Ace. -av. Remark 1. Th; following words whose stem ends in p, take the ending ?j instead of a: nSpr], maiden; KSpprj, cheek; Sep?, neclc; ahap-n, water-gruel; and some proper names introduced from the Ionic dialect, e. g. 'Evp-n ; the t\ then remains through all the cases of the Sing. — If any other vowel than e or i, precedes, the Nom. and all the cases of the Sing, have r\, e. g. ano-fj, color; cr6a, porch; yva, field; aiKva, gourd; kapva, walnut-tree ; ikaa, olive-tree ; aXwd, threshing-floor ; Navo-iKaa, all Gen. -as. (b) The Nom. ends in a, which remains only in the Ace. and Voc. ; but in the Gen. and Dat., it is changed into -q, if the a is preceded by A, XX, o-, o-cr (jt), £, $, \b. Rem. 2. The ending is commonly in a when v precedes, e. g. %x&va (so es- pecially in words in -aiva) ; but -n is often found, as is always the case in the suffix cvvn, e. g. eveppoo-vvrj, also boivq, Trpv/xva and irpv/xva, ireivn and iretva. Alaira is the only word ending in a preceded by a single t. (c) In other cases, the Nom. ends in -q, which remains throughout the singular. 6 62 NOUNS OF THE MASCULINE GENDER. [H4. 2. If a is preceded by e or a, -ea is contracted in most words into rj, and -da into a in all the Cases (comp. poppas, § 44, 3). The final syllable remains circumflexed in all the Cases. Rem. 3. The first Dec. is called the a declension, as its uninflected forms end in o, e. g. yvw^-n from the uninflected yvw/j.ea (comp. crvKea), veavias frorr^ the uninflected veavla, ttoAittjs from iroXirea; the second, the o declension, as its uninflected forms end in o, e. g. x6yos, uninflected form x6yo : the third, the consonant declension, as its uninflected forms end in a consonant, and the vowels and v, which originated from consonants. Paradigms. a) n through a 11 the cases. b) d through all the cases. c) d, Gen. 7js. Opinion. Fig-tree. Shadow. Land. Hammer. Lioness. s N. V yvw/x-q ffVK-(4a)r} (TKL-a Xupa. acpvpo. Xeaivd G. T7)S yVW/Ji7]S (TVK-7]S (TKl-aS Xwjods pd crcpvpa Xeaiva TCi.IV yvwfxaiv avK-aiu (TKI-O.LV X<*>pau> ccpvpaiv Xeaivaiv. Remark 1. On the form of the article tco instead of rd, see § 241, Rem. 10. On the declension of the article 77, see § 91. The t% standing before the singu- lar and plural Voc. is a mere exclamation. Rem. 2. On the contraction of -ea into -77, see § 9, II. (a) ; in the plural and dual of the first and second declensions, however, -ea is contracted into o. Comp. § 9, II. (b). Nouns in -aa are contracted as follows: N. fxvda, /jlvu (mina), G. jxvdas, [xvas, D. /xvda, [xva, A. /JLvdai , uvav) PI. "N. /jlvoi, etc. $44. II. Nouns of the Masculine Gender. 1. The Gen. cf masculine nouns ends in -ou; nouns in -as retain the a in the Dat., Ace, and Voc, and those in -i?? retain the r) in the Ace. and Dat. Sing. 2. The Voc. of* substantives in -779 ends in a : — (1) All in -TTjs, e. g. to^otyjc, Voc. rot-ora, Trpor)Tr}<; i Voc. Trpo^rj- ra; (2) all in --qq composed of a. substantive and a verb, e. g y<-o)(JL€Tpr)<;, Voc. yeoj/xerpa, (xvpon-ioXyji, a salve-seller, V.OC. fivpo 44. MASCULINE NOUNS. ■ FIRST DECLENSION. 63 7ra>Aa; (3) national names in -r/?, e. g. Ilepo-rjs, a Persian, Voc. Xlepora. — All other nouns in -r;s have the Voc. in 77, e. g. IT eparjs, Perses (the name of a man), Voc. Ilipo-q. 3. The remarks on contract feminine nouns ($ 43, 2), ap- ply to Masc. nouns contracted from -eas, e. g. 'Epfxyjc, poppas. In fiopeas, the ea is contracted into a, and not into tj, since p precedes, $ 43, 1 (a). The doubling of the p in fioppas is merely accidental. Remark 1. Contrary to § 43, I, compounds of fierpeco (to measure), as yecofisTpris, end in -rjs instead of -as ; on the contrary, several proper names, etc, as TleXotriSas and yevvadas, a noble, end in -as instead of -r/s. Rem. 2. Several masculine nouns in -as have the Doric Gen. in a, namc/y, iraTpakoias, firjTpaXotas, patricide, matricide; opvi&o&ripas, fowler; also several proper names, particularly those which are Doric or foreign, e. g. "TXas, Gen. 'TAd, ^.Koiras, -d, 'Avvifias, -d, ^vXXas, -a ; (the pure Greek, and also several of the celebrated Doric names, e. g. 'Apxvras, AeaviSas, Uav; (c) compounds consisting of a substantive and verb, or of a substantive compounded with another of the first Dec, e. g. *cw5oTpf/3»7S, Pl&XiottvXtis, apxeSticiis. 64 QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION. FIRST DEC. [§45 $45. Quantity and Accentuation of the First Declension. a. Quantity. 1. The Nom. ending a is short in all words, which have the Gen. in -77s [§ 43, I (b;] ; but long in those which have the Gen, in -as, e. g. irreXed, (tkioL, XP 01 ^ ir ^ a > '/M 6 V°' AtjSs, aXaka, etc. ; the same is true of the Fern, ending of adjectives in os, e. g. ihev&epti, ducaia. Exceptions . The following classes of words have a short in the Nom. : — (a) Dissyllables, and some Polysyllabic names of places in -aid, e.g. 'lariaia, HXaraia. (b) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -eia, e. g. aATjd-e/a, MTjSeta, fia rfj VTiGca T

X6y-e 3 VT](T€ 3 &eos &yyeAe 3) &VKOV P.N. oi x6y-oi al VTJaot ol &eoi &yyeXoi ra ffvKa G. r&v Xoy-oov rdv vrjcrwy rwy &e£>v ayyiXoiv rwv GVK03V D. ro7s Xoy-ois reus vr\(rois ro?s &eo?s ayyeXois rots ffvhois A. TOVS \6y-Qvs ras vrjerovs robs &eovs ayyeXovs ra. avKa V. 3 Xoy-oi 3 vr\ o^vKa 1). TW X6y-w ra vi](TO} t« Sect) ayyiXa) rui avKca roiv x6y-oiv roiv vi]aoiv toiv &eo?v ayyeXoiv row CVKOLV. Rem. 3. The Voc. of words in -os commonly ends in e, though. Dften in -os, e. g. 3) (ptxe, and 3> , Plato, Prot. 344, a; much oftener in adjectives, particularly neuters in oa, as to a.voa, erepS-rrXoa. On the contrac tion of ea a ill the PI see « y. II (h) » 48.. 4 9. J THE ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 67 §48. The Attic Second Declension. Several substantives and adjectives have the endings m (Masc. and Fern.) and wv (Neut.), instead of o? and ov; they retain the w through all the Cases instead of the common vowels and diphthongs of the second Dec. and subscribe / under co where the regular form has o> or ot ; thus, ov and a become w ; os, ov, and ous become cos, qiv, and ws ; ol, ols, and wv ; — w, w, and wv remain unchanged. The Voc. is the same as the Norn Paradigms Sing. N. G. D. A. V. People. 6 \e-cas Ae-w Ae-<5 Ae-ws Table. ^ Ks /caA-w - /caA-aj KClA-WJ' /caA-a>s Hare. 6 A \ay-(S Kay-clou Xay-cos Hall. to avcbys-Qov avcvye-ca avwye-co avaye-cov avcoye-cov Plar. N. G. D. A. V. Ae cp Xe-wv Ae-(ps Ae-c6s Ae- kciA-cp /caA-wv /coA-ws /caA-ws /cc^A-y Xay-ip Xay-av Xay-cps Xay-t&s Xay-cp ava>ye- of words in -oos, -coy, -eou, has the acute instead of the circumflex, e. g. ir\6ca = ir\d>, ocrrew = o(tt(*>, instead of ir\u, oarca; — (b) compounds and polysyllabic proper names, which retain the accent even on the penult^ when it would regularly stand as a cir- cumflex on the contracted syllable, e. g. irepnr\6-ov = irepiirXov (instead of wepnrXov), from irepiirKoos = irepiivXovs ; YIeipi&6-ov = lie ipidov (instead of Tleipi&ov), from Tleipl&oos = Uetpl&ovs ; also adjectives, e. g. ewJ-ou = e vvov (not tvvov), from ewoos = evvovs ; yet the accent is never removed to the antepenult \ thus, TreptirXoi, not irepnrXoi] ko.k6voi, not ko.kovol\ — (c) 7b Koiveou, basket, takes the circumflex on the ultimate, in the contract forms; hence ndveov = kolvovv (instead of navow) ; — (d) words in -8e6s = Sods denoting kindred, have the cir- cumflex instead of the acute on the ultimate, e. g. ab*€\vs (from xpwre-os). 4. In the Attic Dec, Proparoxytones retain the acute accent on the antepe- nult through all the cases and numbers. See § 29, Rem. 7. Oxytones in -As retain the acute accent in the Gen. Sing., contrary to § 45, 7 (aj, e. g. Aec6. ft here absorbs o, the inflection-vowel of the Gen. (e. g. \6yo-o = \6yov), which accounts for this unusual accentuation, thus A.e« instead of A.e<£-o. $ 50. Remarks on the Gender of the Ending os. Substantives in -os are regularly Masc. ; yet many are Fern. In addition to the names of countries, cities, and islands, mentioned under the general rule in § 40, the following exceptions occur, which may be divided into general classes • — (a) Substantives which denote certai;. products of trees and plants, e. g. 7) ukvXos, acorn ; 7) fidXavos, acorn ; t) fivo-cros, fine linen ; 7) 8ok6s, a beam ; 7) pdfitios, a staff; i) filfi\os, baric of the papyrus ; 7) ^ta^os, rush mat; (b) Such as denote stones and earths, e. g. 6 7) \ibos, a stone; 7) \l&os, partic- ularly a precious stone ; 7) \prjpa)> a f a tt° w Ji e ld> r) vtj, see § 40, Rem. 1. §51. Third Declension. The third Declension has the following Case-endings Singular. Plural. Dual. e oiv oiv e e Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. s Neut. — OS X v and Neut. — mostly as the Nom. ; Neut. — es ; Neut. d uv at (v) as; — d es ; — d. Remarks ok the Case-endings. $ 52. A. Nominative. 1. The Nom. of Masculine and Feminine nouns ends in s, e. g. 6 Kopa£ (instead of KopaK-s), i) XatXaij/ (instead of \a2\(nr~Ae'j3-s 0Aty(§2O,I) f \afnrdS-os yiyavr S3 " 6 yiyavT-s yiyas ($ 20, 2) ."» J yiydvT'OS 5e\(plu s 6 Se\(piv-s SeXxpis (§ 20, 2) § 8e\-os &6F (Pov, bov) a 6 h &6F-s (bdv-s) fiovs, bos ($ 25, 2) ° &o-6s [a:F 16 AtF-s Afs (§ 25, 2) I AUs 70 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 53 (b) The second class includes words, which in the Nom. reject the gender-sign <$, but, as a compensation, lengthen the short final vowel of the stem, e into tj, o into w ($$ 16, 3, and 20, Kern. 3), e. g. .. I" iroi/xev .. (o ttoi/x7]v mm ( iroi/xev-os fi j Xsovr g J 6 (A.eWr) A.ewi/ pj J \4ovt-os & | pTjTop o 1 § tf™p $ 1 prjjop-os [alSos [tj ald(as [(al86cr-os) al8o-os', (c) The third class includes words, which in the Nom. have the stem pure, since the stem neither assumes the gender-sign ?, nor lengthens its final vowel, e. g. .. ( &VP .. f o frfip (instead of frfip-s) .. ( frnp-os £ J alow g J o atw^ ( " " ataj'-s) c J alwv-os •2 j ripois o 1 6 fyjcos ( " " ^paxr-s) ^ | (^pwc-os) rjpu-os [ dafxapr ^ iv Zdp.ap ( " " bd/xapr-s, Sd/xapr) [ Sdfxapr-os. 3. Neuters exhibit the pure stem in the Nom. ; still, euphony does not permit a word to end in r (§ 25, 5). Hence, in this case, the t is either wholly rejected (as in the Masc. XeW, Gen. AeWos), or is changed into the corresponding o- ($ 25, 5), e. g. . . f Trzirep? . . f t2> ireirepX , . f Trewepi-os or e-os S J ceAas g J t& (/iaT) c&yux ^ j croj/xaT-os \ repair ^ [rb (repar) repas [repar-os. Remark. The stem irty is lengthened in the Nom., contrary to the rule : rb Trvp, Gen. izi>p-6s. § 53. B. The remaining Cases. 1. The remaining Cases (with a few exceptions, which will be specially treated), are formed by appending the endings to the stem, e. g Stem KopaK Nom. Kopa£ Gen. tc6pa.K-os PL Nom. K6pa.K-es. 2. In forming the Dat. PL by appending the syllable o-t to stems ending in a consonant, the same changes take place as have already been noticed hi regard to the Nom. of similar words [$ 52, 2 (a)], e. g. tpXefi-cri = (pAetyi Kopan-ari = nSpa^i XaiaraS-fft = Kajxirdot ylyavr-tri = yiyaA.€/3, (fiXeij/, <£Ae/?a — KopaK, Kopa$, KopaK-a — Xa/x,7rao\ A.a/X7ra5, Aa/X7raS-a. (b) Yet barytoned substantives in -is and -us, of two or more syllables, whose stems end with a Tau-mnte, in prose have only the form in v, e. g. Stem ept5 Nom. epis Acc. epa/ (poet. epi8-a ; in the dramatists epiv) bpv& ipvis 6puiv (poet. 6pv&-a) Kopvfr nSpvs Kopvv (poet. Kopvfr-a) X&PLT X°^P LS X^P IV (poet. xapiT-a). In prose there are hut few exceptions, e. g. Tepyt&a, X. H. 3. 1, 15, and else where (instead of Tepyw) from % Tepyis] x°-P lTa (instead of x<*-P lv )i lb- 3 - 5, ^ in constant use rpiiroSa, tripod. (X. An. 7. 3, 27, rairi5a is to he read instead of rdirida.) The goddess x<*P ls nas X«P iTct m tne Acc; still, in Luc. Deor. d. 15, 1 and 2, rfyv x&P w ' Kemakk 1. Oxy tones of one or more syllables have only the regular form in •%, e.g. (Trod) ttovs, Acc. iroS-a; (e'A7n5) iXiris, Acc. i\irtd-a] (x^ctfivd) x^ a ~ fivs, Acc. x^ a H-^- a - The monosyllable /cAeis, Gen. /cAei5-os, contrary to the rule, usually has the Acc. /cAety, instead of K\(u5-a. 4. The Voc. is like the stem, e. g. SaCfuav, Gen. Batfxov-os, Voc. BaifjLov. Still, euphony does not always allow the stem-form to appear. Hence the following points should be noted : — (1) The Voc. is like the stem in the following cases: — (a) When the final vowels of the stem, e and o, in the Nom. are lengthened into r/ and , &vep, 5aep. According to this analogy, even 'H/>a/cA( 677)77? (stem 'Hpa/cAees) is shortened in the Voc. by the later writers, into "Hpa.K\es. (b) Adjectives in -a?, Gen. -avos, and also adjectives (not participles, see Rem. 5), whose stems end in -vr, have in the Voc. a form like the neuter (or the stem) ; 7ras and its com- pounds are exceptions, e. g. /x4\ds, Gen. dv-os Neut. and Voc. [xeKav Xapteis, evT-os x a p' l * v (instead of x a p' l * VT > § 52, 3). So substantives in -a?, Gen. -avros, have the Voc. in -av (instead of -avr), § 52, 3, e. g. 7170s Gen. avT-os Voc. yiydv (instead of ylyavr) Koi\xas avT-os KaAxaV Aids avT-os Alav. Rem. 2. Some substantives of this class, with the t reject also the v, but as a compensation lengthen the short a, e. g. "ArXds, Gen. -avr-os, Voc. "At Ad, Ilo\vdat) ; fiacriXevs Voc. fiaaiXev ; /8ot)s Voc. /3o0. The word 7ra?s, Gen. 7rc«5-os, has 7ra? in the Voc, since, by rejecting the gender- sign s, the stem would end in S (raTS), a letter which cannot end a word, and must be dropped. Rem. 3. Substantives in -is, -vs, -ovs, whose stems end in a consonant, have the Voc. like the Nom., e. g. S> opvis, nopvs, irovs. Still, some substantives in -is, Gen. -ivos, have the Voc. like the stem, e. g. 5 SeA^iV (also SeA^is), from SeAf/ns, Gen. -Ivos. (d) The Voc. is like the stem in all words, which in the Nom have their stem pure, e. g. $rjp, alwv, etc.; but 'AttoWwv (Gen. -u>vo) ; from pa|; but in the solemn language of prayer: & dva (in Horn, and the Attic poets, e. g. Soph. 0. C. 1485 : ZeD dva, vd {instead of dvaKT, according to § 25, 5). 3. Substantives in -w and -ws, whose stems end in -o?, have tke Voc. neither hke the stem, nor the Nom., but, contrary to all analogy, in -ot, e. g. Stem tixos N. r/%^ & 7/x<£-os (instead of tjx^o-os) V. 7fx°* (instead of f/xo tvtttwv, rerv fpds, rvxpas, tv^wv, deiKvvs. "Apxw, Voc. dpxov, when a substantive, is an exception. 4- Words which in the Gen. have a consonant before the ending -OS, i. e. WORDS WHOSE stem ends in a consonant. $ 54. I. The Nom. adds iAra, &T00V, ual(v). The word rb repas, according to the rule of the ancient gram- marians, usually admits contraction in the plural, among the Attic writers, after the r is dropped: repd, repay (but X. C. 1. 4, 15. PL Phil. 14, e. Hipp 300, e. repara) ; — rb yepas, reward of honor ; rb yrjpas, old age; rb Kpeas, flesh, and rb Kepas, horn, reject r in all the Numbers, and then suffer contraction in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., and throughout the Dual and Plural (except the Dat. PL) 5 yet icep&s, besides these forms, has the regular form with r ; Thucyd. uses the contracted forms ; the uncontracted nipara occurs only in 5, 71. Kepws is uni- formly employed in the phrase eVt Kepcos, in column. When the a, contracted from act, is used by the poets as short, it must be considered a case of elision, not of contraction ; the same is true also of Neuters in -as, -aos, -os, -eos, e. g. tnctxa (fr. aiceTras) instead of v) upewu Kepa-) Kpea-(Ti(u) Dual. rtpar-e rspdr-oiv Kepar-e and /cepd (/cpeo-e) /fpe'd nepdr-oiv and Kepqv (icped-ow) Kpecpv. Rem. 5. To class (d) belong also the contracts in -(tas, Gen. -6evros = oOs, owtoj, e. g. 6 irKaKovs, cake, Gen. irAa/cotWos ; also in -^ety, Gen. -^euros = -j/s, -'/jj/tos, e. g. Ti/i^s, honorable, ri/jLrjuros. Rem. 6. For the irregular lengthening of the rowel in Krels, efs, /i4xd.s, and ra\as, see § 20, Rem. 2. $ 55. II. TVae Nom. rejects 9, &w£ lengthens the short final vowel of the stem t or o into rj or w ($ 16, 3). 1. The stem ends in -v, -vf, and -p. For the omission of v, and vr, before an, see $ 20, 2, and for the omission of r, in the Nom. of stems ending in vr, e. g. AeW, see $ 25, 5. 2. The following substantives in --qp: 6 7rarrjp, father ; rj firj- rqp, mother ; rj Svyanqp, daughter ; rj yaa-rrjp, belly ; fj Ayjfirjmqp, Demeter (Ceres), and 6 dvrjp, man, differ from those in the above paradigms only in rejecting « in the Gen. and Dat. Sing, and Dat. PL ($ 16, 8), and in inserting an a in the Dat PL before the ending o-t, to soften the pronunciation. The word avfip (stem av4p), rejects e in all Cases and Numbers, except the Voc. Sing., but inserts a 5 (§ 24, 2), thus: Gen. avdp6s, Dat. avSpi, Ace. fotya, Voc. &vep, PL &vdpes, avSpwv, av§pao-i{v), &v8pas, etc. Sing N. G. D. A. V. 6, Shepherd TTOlfi-flU TTOljx4v-OS TTOljx4u-L iroi(x4v-a TTOL{li\V . 0, Lion. \4(tiV \4oUT-OS \4ovr-t. \4ovr-a AeW 6, Orator. prircop pyrop-os pijrop-i prjrop-a prjrop 6, Father. irar-ftp Tcarp-6s irarp-i irar4p-a Trdrep rj, Daughter. frvydrrip frvyarpos frvyarpi frvyar4pa biyarep Plur. N. G. D. A. V. iroifi4v-es iroi/xeu-wv ■7TOl/x4-(Tl{y) Troifi4u-as ■KOl(l4v-SS \4our-es \e6vr-a)v \4ovcri{v) K4ovr-as Aeovr-es f>7]T0p-eS pr\r6p-a>v p7irop- hand, belongs to nouns of class No. 2, and differs from them only in not lengthening the c of the stem (xep) into if, but into ei, e. g. x*' l P instead of x*ps 5 it is irregular in retaining the ei in inflection, thus : x^'p, X €l P^ etc -> except in the Dat. PI. and the Gen. and Dat. Dual xep the short as well as the long form is used in all the Cases, as the necessities of the verse require, e. g. x ei P° s an d X e P& s i Xepolv and x^ l P°^ v i X € P°~' L an ^ x €l P e(Tl - Rem. 2. The following nouns in -uv, Gen. -ovos, reject the v in particular Cases, and suffer contraction : tj elK<&v, image, ehSvos, etKovi, elic6va, elic6vas, etc., together with the Ionic and poetic forms : Gen. et/cot/s, Ace. eiKca, Ace. PL eiKovs (the irregular accent is to be noted in €(«<£ and cIkovs) ; 77 arjdAv, nightingale. Gen. arfiSvos and arjdovs, Dat. a^Sot; ^ xcAtSwy, swallow, Gen. x^aiSJj/os, Dat X^AtSo?. Rem. 3. To class No. 2, belongs the obsolete Nom. 0, ^ 'APH'N, Za/n6; the Nom. of this is supplied by 6 t\ ay.v6s, Gen. apv6s, Dat. apvl, Ace. 'dpva, PL Nom. apj/es, Gen. apvuv, Dat. a/wac^y), Ace. dpvas; farther, the word 6 ao-T^p, -epos, star, though not syncopated like irar-fip, etc. belongs to this class on account of the assumed a in the Dat. PL ao-rpao-i(u). In substantives belonging to class No. 2, the accent of the Gen. and Dat. Sing, (and in the word avhp, also that of the Gen. PL and Gen. and Dat. Dual) is removed by syncope to the last syllable, and that of the Dat. PL to the penult, e. g. irarp6s, varpi, avSpwv, irarpav, A-fj/xriTpa, and also, on the contrary, iron-epos, Svyarepos, firjTepi. § 56. III. The Stem, of the Nom. is pure. s is omitted without changing the final vowel of the The stem. The stem ends in v, vt, p, and (only in Sd/xap, ivife) in pr. The Case-endings are appended to the Nom. without change. On the omission of r in stems ending in vt and pr, see k 25, 5 ; and on the omission of v, vt, before evov-wv "BevocpwvT-wv Sfr\p-S)v veKTdp-av D. iraia-o~i{v) aXS>-o~i(v) p,evov, penny- royal, Gen. -wvos, is found in Aristophanes. Rem. 2. All the Neuters belonging to this class end in -p (ap, op, up, vp), e. g. tJ) vtKTap, i\rop, ireXoop, irup (Gen. irvpSs). The word to Zap, spring, may also be contracted, e. g. r)p, Gen. tfpos. B. Words which hate a vowel before the ending -os in the Gen. $ 57. I. Words in -evs, ~av)(ov fio-wv, bo-um ypa-wv D. Pao-iXivai(v) Xoevo'i(i') Povai{v) ypavai(p) A. fiaaiXe-as (and e?s) x°{* a )as fiovs ypavs V. {Jaxri\eis Xoeis Po-es ypa-es Dual. j8a a measure, a mound, and 7) povs, vinegar-tree, are de- clined like fiovs ; but in the PI. both without contraction ; only 7) vavs [vaFs, navis), is declined like ypavs ; still, this noun is quite irregular; see § 68. §58. II. Words in -rjs, -es {Gen. -cos); -cos {Gen. -coos), -tos and -co {Gen. -oos^; -as {Gen. -aos), -os {Gen. -60s). The stem of words of this class ends in s. On the omission of cr, see k 25, 1. In the Dat. PL, a o- is omitted. $ 59. i x l) Words in -77s and -es. 1. The endings -77s and -es belong only to adjectives (the ending ->?s is Masc. and Fem., the ending -es neuter), and to prope" names, terminating like adjectives, in -dv7)/cpaTes (ilepiKAees) TlepiKXeis. Remark 1. On tlie contraction in the Dual of ee into tj (not into et), and in the Ace. PI. of -eas into -eis, see § 9, II. When a vowel precedes the endings -Tjs, -es, then -ea in proper names in -K\rjs is always contracted into -d, and commonly also in adjectives (§ 9, II.), e.g. ITepi/cAee-a = nept/cAed ; d/cAeifc. ivithout fame, d/cAeea == d/cAea, vyirjs, healthy, vyi4a = vyia, eVSe^s, poor, eVSe'ea = eVSea, vir€p (stem 7/xos), echo. G. (al56-os) alSovs (nx^-os) iixovs D. (alS6-'i) alSoT (vxt-'i) 7?x<" A. (cu&o-a) cu5<3 (r)xej/) kXswv KAee-(Tt(j/) Dual. (yeVe-e) (yej^e-oiy) (wAe'e-e) /cAer; (/cAee'-otj/) and of eo into a (instead of 7?), when a vowel precedes, see § 9, II. On the poetic shortening of the contracted d in /cAea, see $ 54, Rem. 4. Rem. 3. The uncontracted form of the Gen. PL is not unusual, e. g. opeW, iSeAeW, /cepSeW, and almost without exception d»/&€W; in PL Polit. 260, a., the uncontracted Dual in ee occurs : rovrco rw yeVee. In the lyric portions of the Attic tragedians, 7ro&ea, ax«t, etc. occur. III. Words in -is, -vs, -i, -v. $ 62. (1) Words in -Is, -vs. The substantives in -Is, -vs originally ended in -XFs, -vFs. See § 25, 2. Sing. N. 6 k7s, corn-worm. 7] CVS, SOW. 6 Ix&vs, fish. G. kX-6s o~v-6s iX&v-os D. Ki-i av-i Ix&v-'i A. KlV aw iX&bv V. Kt (TV i X M Plur. N. ici-es o~v-es t%dS-6S G. Ki-tav (TV-toV iX^v-cov D. Kt-ai(v) o-v-ai(v) iX^v-cri(v} A. ict-as av-as, Attic o~vs iX&v-as, Attic Ix&vs V. itf-es av-es Ix&v-es Dual. kU av-e f&SH&J IxM Kl-OtV ffV-OlV lx&v-ou>. Remark. The contracted Nom. PL at tyicvs occurs in X. Ven. 2, 9 ; 6, 2 10. 2, 19. 82 THIRD DECLENSION. [$63 $ 63. (2) Words in -Is, -i, -vs, -v. The stem of these substantives ends in X or v. The stem- vowels i and v remain only in the Ace. and Voc. Sing. ; in the other Cases they are changed into e ($ 16, 2). In the Gen. Sing, and PI., masculine and feminine substantives take the Attic form in -w? and -wv, in which the w has no influence on the accent (comp. § 29, Rem. 7). In the Dat. Sing, and in the Nom. and Ace. PL, contraction occurs. Sing. N. G. D. A. V. 7] TroXts, city. Tt6\€-0)S 7r6\€l TtoXl 6 irrjxvs, cubit. 7T7/xe-cw 7T77X" TVX VJ/ Trrjx v rh aivairi, mustard. (rnraTre-os aivdirei aivain to acrTu, city. affre-os ao~rei aarv dTs, 78pt, skilful, and some substantives in -"is, which are partly poetic, have the regular inflection : i-os, t-i, t-es, etc., or both forms together, e. g. i) firjvis, anger (also fir)i/i8os, etc.), 6 r) oh, sheep ; to weirepi (Gen. -epios and -eos), pepper; 5 t) ir6pTis, calf; 6 i) irSais, spouse (Gen. ir6aios, but Dat. always Troaei) ; i) rpoTTis, keel (also rpoiridos, etc.); r) rvpais, tower (G^n. rvpaios,X. An. 7. 8, 12. rvpffiv, ib. 13, but Plural rvpffeis, Tvpoeai, etc.) ; i) /xdyadis (Gen. -ios, Dat. /xaydol, X. An. 7. 3, 32) ; some proper names, e. g. 2ueWeAd£, clod, -olkos, t) iKirh, hope, -tSos. See fuller explanations in Larger Grammar, Part I. § 291. §65 Accentuation of the Third Declension. 1 . The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the laws of accentuation (§ 30) permit, e. g. to 7rpay/j.a, deed, 7rpdyfj.aros (but Trpay/xaTuv) , to ovo/xa, name, dvofxaros (but ovofxaTcuv), 6 7) xeAtSdJj/, swallow, xeXi§6vos, aevo- vtos, -upTeSy -(!)vtu>v. Particular exceptions have been noticed in the Paradigms. 2. Monosyllables are accented in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers on the final syllable ; the long syllable s, slave; 6 7) &cas, jackal ; rb KPA2, poet. (Gen. Kpar6s), head; to oSs (Gen. wt6s), ear; 6 7) ttcus, child; 6 ays, moth; 6 t\ Tpois, Trojan, Trojan woman; 7) s (Gen. oov, Kparcov, &twv, &roiv, ira'iSoiv, iralSoiv, reccv, Tpojwu, ), spring; K rjp (Epic from neap), heart; 6 Aas (from Aaas), stone; 6 irpcvv (from irp7}6v), hill, e. g. fjpos (rarer eapos), tfpi (rarer eapi), K?]pos, KTJpi, Aclos, Acu, Aawy, nrpcavos, irp&vt. Remark. The following contracts, on the other hand, follow the principal rule (No 2) : (neap = crrf/p, tallow ; crredros = 5£, Qpfil, Qp-fjiKos = QpaKos, and OpjjKos, ols, ol6s, oli, olc/oV) oiai(v). (c) Monosyllabic participles, as well as the pronoun rls ; quisf retain the accent, through all the Cases, on the stem-syllable ; but the pronoun iras and 6 Udu is an Oxytone in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. ; in the other Cases either a Paroxytone or a Properispomenon, according to the nature of the final syllable, C. g. (pus, (piuros, a>y, euros, ovn, ivrwv, ovai(v), ovroiv, tis, rlvos, rivi, etc. ; Ttas, ivayros, iravri, Trdyrcvy, rcdvroiv, irao-i(y), 6 Tldv, Tlavos, roh Tlao'i(y). 3. The following are accented, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, like monosyllabic substantives : — (a) 7) ywi\, wife (yuvaiKos, yvvaiKi, yvvaixolv, yvvaiKwv, yvvai^i(v) ; but yvvai- Ka, yvva7x.es, etc.) ; or) kvcov, dog (kvuos, kvv'i, kvvoIv, kvucop, kvo~i(v) ; but Kvva, nvves, etc.) ; (b) Syncopated substantives in -rjp, on which see § 55, 2 : (c) Compounds of els, units, in Gen. and Dat. Sing., e. g. ovdeis, ovSevos, ovdevi; but ovdevon; ovBecri(u), SO /j.7]5eis, fxydevos, etc.; (d) The Attic poetic forms, Sopos, Sopl, from 56pv. 4. For the accentuation of substantives in -is, -vs, Gen. -eus, see § 63 ; of those in -d (§ 60), the irregular accentuation of the Ace. Sing, of 7?x^ a — "hx** (instead of frx«), should be noted. 5. (a) In the Voc. of syncopated substantives (§ 55, 2) in -rip, the accent, contrary to the principal rule, is drawn hack as far as possible, e. g. 3> irdrep, Svyarep, A-hurjrep, dvep; so also (a) in the following substantives; 'AttoAAwj' (wvos), UocreiSwi' (cvvos), aarrip (rjpos), 'Aficpicau (iovos), 8afip (epos)', thus, 3) "AivoAXov, Tloo-eidov, acorep^AfjLcpioy, Saep ; — (b) in compound substantives in -cay, Gen. -ovos, in adjectives in -ccv, Gen. -ovos, whether simple or compound ; also in comparatives in -iwv, -a>v (in adjectives and comparatives, also, in the neuter gender), e. g. ' Ay d/xejuLuou from ' Ay afiefii/cav, ' Apiffr6yeirov from 'Apicrro- yelrcvy (but 'lacrov, TlaAaijxov, $i\ript.ov, etc. as simple) : d> and rb etidai/xoy, 3> and to e\ernxoy, 3 and rb ttaWiov ; (the following are exceptions : <5 AaKedaT/xoy from AaveSai/jLcay, compounds in -eppoov, e. g. S> AvKocppov from. AvuScppcioy, Ev&vcppoy from Eb&vrppeov, & and rb Sa'icppoy from daieppcay ;) — (c) in the compound Paroxytones in -77s, mentioned in § 59, e. g. ~2d>Kpares, AT)fji6 and rb ab'&ab'es from av&d- or)',, ArjS iravuAes, yedprjs ve&pes, tityiipris ^icpTjpes, 7) rpi7)p7)s rpiTjpes, Aid>p7)s 8) Aiwpes. (I») The Voc. of nouns in -aus, -evs, -ous, -cay and -ws is Perispomenon, e. g ypav, /ScwrtAeO, Bov, ~2,air(poi, cuSo?. ♦ 66.] THIRD DECLENSION. 85 $ 66. Gender of the Third Declension. The natural gender — the masculine and feminine — is distinguished in the third Declension, not by a special form, but partly by the signification, partly by the forms, and in part by usage alone. The following rules will aid in determining the gender : — I. Masculines: (A) all nouns whose Nom. and stem (which can be recognized by the Genitive) end in -av, Gen. -av-os ; -av, Gen. -ovt-os and -wvt-os ; -vv, Gen. -vv-os (only 6 /xoaaw, tower) ; -eis, Gen. -ev-os (only 6 ktcis, comb) ; -ay, Gen. -avr-os ; -ovs, Gen. -ovt-os, -owt-os, -o5-os (6 ttovs) ; -cap, Gen. -op-os] -evs, Gen, -eas ; -77s, Gen. (-e-os) -ovs ; -cos, Gen. -co-os ; (B) the following with exceptions : — (a) in -7]v, Gen. -tjvos ; but 6 77 %V> goose; — in -nv, Gen. -ev-os ; jut 6 77 ad-riv, gland, and 77 Gen. -u5-os and -v£--os; -c6 and -cos, Gen. - a sea- fish; — in -vs, Gen. -ews; but 6 TreAe/cus, axe; 6 ttt)xvs, cubit; (c) in -u>v, Gen. -ov-os ; but 6 frx/Aav, anvil; 6 irptwv, saw; 6 koih&v, rule; 6 &^cav, axle ; 6 aeio-uv. earthen-vessel ; 6 i-mcre'iav, flag ; 6 i) klcou, pillar ; 6 KAaScav and aKpe/xau, bough ; 6 Xaydiv, gulf; 6 nrXayydiv, doll ; 6 /xvp/j.r]dcau, anfs nest ; 6 i) aXenrpvcav, cock and hen. Remark 1. Nouns in -£ are partly masculine, partly feminine, except those in -a£ (Gen. -d/cos), which are masculine ; most of those in -£ are feminine; the larger part of those in -ty are masculine, but many are feminine, e. g. i) KaXav- po\p, -oiros, shepherd's crook; i) AcuAchJ/, tempest; i) 6\p (vox), ottos, voice; i) (rarely 6) &ty, uTTos,face; i) cpXety, (pXefios, vein; t) x^P VL ^t holy-water; r) KaTr)Xi\p, -icpos, upper story, etc. III. Neuters : (A) all in -a, Gen. -ar-os ; -r?, Gen. -tit-os (only to Kapt}) ; -i, Gen. -iT-os (only to /xeXi with its compounds) ; -vp, Gen. -vp-os (only to wvp, Gen. irvp-6s, fire) ; -ap, Gen. -aT-os or -rip, Gen. -vt-os ; -op, Gen. -op-os ; -as, Gen. -aT-os ; -os, Gen. (-e-oy) -ous ; -i, Gen. -eos ; -v, Gen. -u-os, and -eos, and -aT-os, § 68, 1 ; — (B) the following with exceptions: (a) -ap, Gen. -ap-os' : but 6 r dp, star- ling; (b) -as, Gen. -a-os ; but 6 ASs, stone; (c) -w/>, Gen. -ar-os (except 6 ax*** ) tX^/J, eoTTwp, 7]KeKToop, § 68, 15). Rem. 2. The following single words may be noted in addition : i) Sals, Gen. Zan-6s, feast ; to ctcus or ffTais, ctchto's, dough; to ows, Gen. wr-Js, ear. $ 67. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declension. All substantives, whose inflection differs from the rules and analogies above given, are included under the irregular substan- tives of the third Dec. All the anomalous forms of the third Dec. may be divided into three classes : — (a) The first class includes those substantives whose Nom. cannot be derived, according to general analogy, from the Genitive-stem, e. g. i) yvvr), ivife, Gen. yvvaiK-6s. (b) The second class incudes those substantives, which, with one Nom. form, have in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation ; both of these, however, may come, in accordance with the general rules, from one form of the Nom., e. g. 6 i) opvis, Gen. -I&os, bird, PL opvi&ss and opi/eis, as if from opuis, Gea. -ews. These substantives are called Heteroclites (i. e. of different declen- sions or irregularly declined). (c) The third class includes substantives, which, with one Nom. form, admit, in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation, one of which may be derived from the Nom. form in use, but the other supposes a different Nom. form, e. g. ^epdirccv, -ovtos, servant, Ace. drepdirovTa and poet. StepaTra, as if from bepaty. This formation is called Metaplasm (transformation), and the substan- tives included under it, Metaplasts. The Nom. form, presupposed in this case, is called the Theme. *68.] ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THIRD D£C. 87 $ 68. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declenion. 1. Vow (to, knee), and So pv (to, spear), see h 54 (c). In the tragic poets, the Epic forms, yovvara and yovva, yovuacri, occur , also in the Attic poets, the Gen. Sopos, Dat. dopi, and even S6pei, and PL dop f] instead of Sopara, are formed from dopv; and in the phrase, Sopl eAelV, to take a prisoner of war, this Dat. form is retained even by the Attic prose writers. 2. Ywrj (rj, woman), Gen. ywaiK-os (as if from ywai£), Dat. yvvaiK-c, Ace yvvcuK-a, Voc. yvroi; PL ywauces, yvvaiKwv, yvvai^C (v), ywatKas; on the accentuation, see § 65, 3 (a). 3. Aopv, see yow, No. 1. 4. Zev?, Gen. Aios, Dat. Au, Acc. Ata (as if from &ts), Voc. Zev. Poet, corresponding forms are Zt}v6s, Zrt\vi, Zrjva. 5. ®epa.7r(Dv (6, servant), -ovtos. In Eurip. Ace. Skpaira, PI. &ipa7T€s, § 67 (c). 6. Kdpa (to, head), an Epic and poetic word, Gen. Kpa.T-6<$, Dat. KparC and Kapa, Ace. to Kapa, to Kpara (tov Kpara, § 2 14) ; AcC. PL tovs KpaTa?, § 67 (c). 7. KAei? (17, key), Gen. kAciS-o?, Dat kXuS-l, Acc. kA.€«/ ($ 53, Rem. 1), later KAetoa; PL Nom. and Acc. /cActs, and kXciSc?, KkelSas, § 67 (b). Old Attic, K\ys, K\p86s, ./eApSt, K\rj8a. 8. Kv'(i)r (6, 17, dog")> Gen. kw-6<$, Dat. kwi, Acc. Kvva, Voc. ktW; PL KWCS, KiJVWV, kvo-l, Kvvas. 9. At7ra (to, oil, fatness), in the Epic dialect always in the phrases, dXeiif/aoS^ai AiV eXatw, ^otcrat and xpLaaoSaL AiV eAato>, and so also in the Attic prose, aAei<£ecr#at, xpUo-Sai AiVa ; AiVa is thus an abridged Dat. instead of Xurdi, AiVa, from to XC-rra, Gen. -aos, but tXaiov must be considered as an adjective from eAda, olive, so that AtVa ZXaiov means olive-oil. 10. Maprus (6, ivitness), Gen. p.dpTvpo%i8-o^o'ets and X ^ x ov Acc. x°«> Acc. PL x°«s> a s if from x o *v<;. The latter forms are preferred by the Attic writers ; xovs, with the meaning of mound, is inflected only like /3ov Xpo'h xp6 a > like cuStos. The Dat. xp it shaves close to tht ikin, it comes home, Soph. Aj. 786. §69. Defective Nouns of the Third Declension. Some nouns of the third Dec. are wanting in one or more of the Cases, and are, consequently, called Defectives. Existing forms, however, of such substan- tives, are found, for the most part, only in certain phrases, e. g. Xpiws (rb, debt), Ionic-Attic form for the Nom., Gen., and Acc; also rb Xptos, Gen. xp^ovs, PI. to. xp* a > Gen. XP™"': tne Dat. an( ^ Dual are wanting; ovap and virap (only as Nom. and Acc), in dreaming and waking ; 6 space; r) ox&>1 an( ^ <5 l^X^os, rising ground ; r\ dtya and to dtyos, thirst; r] vdir-q (the older form) and to vdiros, valley, etc. It should be observed further, that the word 6 irpeafivs, elder. has only Ace. irpeafiw, Voc. irpeafiv; these three forms are almost entirety poetic (irpeo-pvTepos and irpecrfivTaTos formed from this, are in frequent use) ; in the Common Language, 6 TrpeaPvrrjs, -ou, elder ; in the meaning of messenger, envoy, the Common Language uses in the Sing. 6 TrpeaPevr-ns, -ov ; but in the PL ol and tous irpeafieis, "irpeafiewv, irpeafieai ; also, to fidupvou and to Sdicpv tear. The latter and older form is retained in the poetic dialect ; still, the Dat. PI. daKpvo-L is found even in the Attic prose-writers (Thu. 7, 75; Dem. c. Onet. I. §32). §71. II. Heteroclites . Heteroclites [$ 67 (b)] have two modes of formation; they are either of the third Dec, which have been already presented together (§ 68), or of two different declensions. Those of dif- ferent declensions are, e. g. as follows : — A. Of the First and Third Declension. Several substantives in -77s are inflected, either in whole or in part, according to the first and third declensions : — (a) Some in -77s, Gen. -ov and -tjtos, through all the Cases according to both 8* 90 THIRD DEC. METAPLASTS. [$72. declensions : 6 ixvkt\s, mushroom, Gen. [xvkov and ixvktitos, and some proper names, e. g. Xdprjs. The name Qa\rjs, in the old Attic, has tha Ionic Gen. form 0aA.eo>, Dat. &a\fj, Ace. QaXyv] in the later writers, @a\ov and &d\7)Tos t QaKrjTL and 0oA?jTa. Observe that the accent is drawn back on ©aAew. (b) The proper names mentioned, § 59, Rem. 2, have rj as well as rju in the Ace. Sing. only. B. Of the Second and Third Declensions. (a) Of the Common second and third declensions : several substantives in -o?, as masculine, are inflected according to the second Dec, but as neuter, according to the third Dec, e. g. 6 and to oxps, chariot, rov oxpv and o^ovs, rbv o^ov and to 0^05 ; 6 and to 0- kotos, darkness. (b) Of the contract second and third declensions : - — ■npSxoos (7), watering-pot), Att. irpSxovs, Gen. nrpSxov, etc., Dat. PI. irfoxovai (like flovs, fiovcriv). OlSiirovs, Gen. OtStVoSoy and (poet.) OlSiirov, Dat. Oldiirodi, Ace. OldiTroda and OlZiirovv, Voc. OlStirov. (c) Of the Attic second and third declensions : — In the Ace. Sing., 6 ye\as, laughter, yeXwros, yiKwTi, Ace. yeAwTo and yi\wv, and the three following: irdTpas, patruus, ixi]rpus, avunculus, and Wiims, which, in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., are inflected according to the third Dec. and the Attic second Dec. ; in the other Cases, according to the third Dec. trdrpws, Gen. Trdrpw and irdrpotios, Dat. irarpcoi, Ace. "ndrpav and irdrpwa; Mtvws, Gen. MiV&> and Mivcaos, Dat. Mivm, Ace. Mfr/00 (§ 48, Eem. 1), Mirny and Mivooa. § 72 ]II. Metaplasts. Metaplasts [$ 67 (c)] like Heteroclites, have two modes of formation ; they are either of the third declension, which have been already presented together (68), or of two different declen- sions. Those of different declensions are, e. g. as follows : — (a) Of the Common second and third declensions: — AevSpov (rb, tree), Gen. SevSpov, etc.; but in the Dat. PI. among the Attic writers, 8eV5/>eves, rawaiv, etc., are used on account of their greater perspicuity. §73. Indeclinable and Defective Nouns. 1. Substantives which do not vary the termination, but retain in all the Cases the form of the Nom., are called indeclinable. Except foreign proper names, as 6 'A(3pad[A, rod 'AfipadfjL, and the indeclinable cardinal numbers, all indeclinable nouns are of the neuter gender. Here belong especially : — (a) The names of the letters, e. g. rb, rod, rip, &\vyas avrjp, r) (f)vya$ (46). Rem. 2. The declension of Adjectives and Participles differs only in a few points from that of the Substantive ; these will be noted hereafter. But it may be remarked here, as an essential deviation, that Participles always have the Voc. of the third Dec. like the Nom., § 53, Rem. 5. klb. Accentuation of Adjectives and Participles. The accentuation of Adjectives and Participles is like that of Substantives, with a few exceptions, which are now to be noted : — 1. The Fern, is accented on the same syllable as the Masc. through all the Cases, where the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. ko.\6s, /caA^, koXou\ Koxxpos, Kovcpri, Kovtpcv-j ^apt'eis, xapieffffa, x a P l€V 5 MeAas, ^Aaiva, fj.4\av ; ^(p^v, rcptiva, repeis ; fiapvs, /3ape7a, fiapv ; PovAevcas, ySouAeuo-dtra, jSouAeutray ' Tidfis t If 75.] ACCENTUATION OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 93 Remark 1. In adjectives in -os, --n, -oi>, or -os, -d, -ov, the Fern., on accoun\ of the length of the final syllable (77, d), must be a Paroxytone, when the Masc. is a Proparoxytone, or a Properispomenon, e. g. av&pcamvos, ay&pwirivri, av&pca- ttivov; iAev&epos, iAev&epa, iAevSepov ; novcpos, Koxxp-q, Kov v ; but, av&pwTrivos, -ivq, -tvov " a v & p a> it Iv a> v, as Masc, F., and N. ehev&epos, -epa, -epov " e Ae v&epuv, as Masc, P., and N. rvTrT6fievos, -evr], -evov " rvirrofievcov, as Masc, P., and N. Rem. 3. On the accentuation of the monosyllable vus, and of monosyllabic participles in the Gen. and Dat., see § 65, 2 (c). Rem. 4. On the accentuation of the Nominative of compound adjectives, the following things are to be noted : — (a) Those in -os, when the last part is formed of a substantive or adjective, follow the general rule [§ 30, 1, (c)], and are Proparoxytones, e. g. v, oyUwv (§ 75,4.) Nom. ypav Nom. Siicaios, tiiKaia, dinaiov, just, Gen. Sucaiov, Sucaias, SiKaiov Gen. PI SiKaiwv, dtnaicav, SiKaiwv Nom. iX^pos, exM. ix&p6v, hostile. Gen. 4x&pov, ix&pas, ix&pov Nom. a&poos, &&p6a, a&poov, full, Gen. a&p6ov, a&poas, a&p6ov Gen. PI. a&p6cav, a&p6av, a&powv. Most of the adjectives belong to this class. The Pem. ends in a, when pre- ceded by t or p, § 43, 1. Still, adjectives in -oos have -6a in the Pem., when p precedes o, otherwise, -6-n, e. g. khp6a, yet by$6v,. On the accentuation of adjectives in -os, -rj (d), -ov, see § 75. Adjectives in -eos, -4 a, -eov, which denote the material, e. g. xpvo~eos, golden ; apyvpeos, silver ; nepd/xeos, earthen ; and multiplicative adjectives in -60s, -6 7), -6ov, e. g. air\6os, single; Snr\6os, doable, are contracted. On the accentuation of those in -eos, -4a, -eov, see § 75, 3, and on the contraction of those in -ia into -S, -or) into -rj, and -6a into -a, see § 9, II. Xpvvo~a, 6v, produced, Gen. (pwros, X a p' ie(r(ra i X a p' iev i lovely, Gen. x a ?' iiVT0S i X a P l * J/ > x a P L * VT(av - For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d), the only difference being that the Dat. PL ends in -cart, not -e«n, e. g. xaptecn. — The Masc. and Neut. is in the Nom. a Paroxytone, in the Pern, a Proparoxytone ; yet the ancient grammarians prescribe that the Neut. of x a P' Lels should be accented on the antepenult, hence x*P lev - Rem. 3. Some of the adjectives in -r\eis, -f) e o- or a, -rj e v, and -oeu, -6t &- v, -over a, -6 v : Nom. eKc&v, eicovcra, en6v, willing, Gen. £k6vtos, eKovcr-ns, kic6vros Gen. PL kn.6vrav, eKOvaav, knovrav. Thus only the compound amav, commonly 'dicav, &K-ovcra, aKov. Por the declension, see § 54 (d). XTI. ■ail', -over a, -ov: Nom. Xeiirav, Xeiirovcra, Xeiirov, leaving, Gen. Xeiirovros, Xeiirovcr'ns, Xeiirovros Gen. PL Xeiir6vrav, Xeiirovcrav, Xziir6vrav. So also the Pres., Put., and second Aor. Act. Part., the last, however, with a different accentuation : -av, -ovcra, -6v, e. g. Xiira'v, -ovcra, -6v. For the declen- sion, see § 54 (d). In the same manner, the Present participles of contract verbs in -da, -©», and -6a, e. g. Nom. rifxav, -acra, -ay Nom. (piXav, -ovcra, ~ovv Gen. np-avros, -acn\s, *wvros Gen. PL cpiXovvrav, -ovcrav, -ovvrav. Gen. PL rifxavrav, -acrav, -wj/TOJt'. Nom. [xicr&av, -ovcra, -ovv Gen. PL fjucr&ovvrav, -overav, -ovvrav. The Put. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs is declined like ayaZ-fj aya§-$ (piXl-ca (piXi-a A. ayab-6v ay ah-'l]:' hyab-6v (piXi-ou (ptXi-av (piXi-oi V. ayaS-e aydb-oi aya^r-'f] aya^-ai ayad-oV dya^-a (plXi-e (piXi-a (piXi ov P.N. (piXi-oi (piXi-ai (piXi-a G. aya$-S>v aya^-av aya^-wv tyiXi-av (piXi-cov (piXl-cou D. aya<$--o?s aya$-a?s aya&-o?s (piXi-ois (piXt-ais Xpvcred Xpvo-a Xpvo-eca Xpvaoj aTrX6co arrXoo arrXoo. aTrXa ctTrXoco b.TTXS} Xpvcreoiv Xpvffdiv XpvGeaiv Xpvo~a?v Xpvcreoiv Xpvo~o7v c.ttX6oiv drrXoiv hirXoaiv a-rrXaiv airXSoiv airXo7v dpyvpeos apyvpovs apyvpeov apyvpov hpyvpea apyvpa dpyvpeas apyvpas apyvpeov, silver apyvpovv apyvpeov apyvpov rervepcos rervv Terv(p6o~i rervcpviais rerveporas rervepvias rervepora TeTvcpoTCoy Tervcpotri rervepora apyvpee apyvpea apyvpa apyvpeov apyvpovv rervcpSre rervepvia rerv(p6roiv rervtpviaiv rervepore rervcpSroiv ttoXvs iroXXov ■xnXX'2 it oXvv tt oXv ttoXXt) ttoXXtjs TTOXXfj ttoXXtju ttoXXt) ttoXv, much ttoXXov TTOXXcp 7T Xl) TTOXv jx eyas /xeydXov [xeydXoi jxeyav fj. eya fxeydXrj fieyaXrjs pieyaXy fAeydXrjv lieydXi) fiey a, great /xeyaXov {leydh w [xeya p.eya rroXXoi TTOXXUV TTOXXOLS TTOXXOVS TToXXoi TroXXai ttoXXoov TToXXaus ttoXXus TroXXai TTOXXd TTOXX&V TTOXXOLS TTOXXd TTOXXd /xeyaXoi fieydx&v fxeyaXoLS /xeyaXovs [xeydXoi fxeyaXai fxeyaXcov jxeyaXais [xeyaXas fxeyaXai fxeyaXa [xeyaXcov /xeyaXois [xeyaXa /xeyaXa [xeydXca fieydXatv /xeydXa /.leydXaiv fxeydXw /xeyaXotv ♦ 78.] ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 99 u.4Xas fx4Xaiva fj.4Xav, black iras iraGa irav, all peXavos fj.eXaivr)s lu.4Xa.vos ttovt6s TTaG7]S tto.vt6s fx4Xavi fxeXaivri fj.4Xa.vi iravTi 7raGT] TTaVTl fx4Xava fi4Xaivav fj.4Xav izavTa iraGav irav fj.4Xav fx.4Xa.iva fx4Xav iras iraGa irav fj.4Xaves fj.4Xaivai fj.4Xa.va irdvTes iraGai TrdvTa /xeXdvcov fj.eXa.ivwv fxeXavwv irdvTUV TTaGVV irdvTuv /ncXaGi fxeXa'ivais fx4XaGi iraGi iraGais TTUGl fi4Xavas ixeXaivas fj.4xava irdvTas iraGas iravTa fj,4Xaves fx4Xaivai fx4Xava irdvTes iraffat iravTa fx4Xave fxeXaiva fj.4Xave f iravTe irdGa. TTaVTS fxeXavoiv fxeXaivaiv fj.eXa.voiv. irdvTOiv irdGaiv TTaVTOlV. GTO.S (Traaa. GTav, standing Xnrdv XlTTOVGa Xitt6v, leaving aravTOS GTaGtjs GTavros Xittovtos XnrovGt)s Xittovtos (TTCLVTl ard.Gi £evyvvGais {evyvvGi (pavovvTas (pavovGds (pavovvTas {evyvvvTas fcvyvvGas {evyvvvTa (paVOVVTCS (pavovGai (pavodvTa £evyvi)VTes ^evyvvGai £evyvvvTa (pavovvre (pavovGa. (pavovvre £evyvvvTe £evyvvGa (evyvvvTe (pavowroiv cpavovGaiv (pavovvTotv. (evyvvvTOiv ^evyvvGaiv {evyvvvToiv. Kemark. All participles in -cis are declined like Xei, imepxpeco. Rem. 5. There are three endings to the simple adjective: — HXecos, 7rAea, irXicov, full, Gen. ttXcco, 7rAeas, irXico, PI. TrXew, ttXzcu, TvXia ; the compounds are either of two endings, e. g. 6 7) avdirXecos, rb avd-rrXecov, PI. ot at eKirXect) ('nnreTs eKirXecp X. Cy. 6. 2, 7. e/cTrAew Tpdirefai X. Hier. 1, 18), tc\ e/c7rAew X. Cy. 3, 1, 28. 1, 6, 7, and even the Nom. PI. tvx4cc, of the simple adjective is not seldom used for the Masc. and Pem., or they have (yet more seldom) f78.] ADJECTIVES OF "TWO ENDINGS. 101 three endings, e. g. avdirXtoos, avaitxia (PI. Phaedon 83, d.), avdirXzuv. Eur Ale. 730, has nvXeou, after the example of Homer, as Neuter Sing. So like* wise compounds, seldom in the Sing., e. g. rb ep.TrXeov, Soph., oftener in the PI.,- e. g. e/xirXeoi PI. Rp. 6. 505, e and very frequently in the Neuter, e.g. eCT\ f « X. Cy. 6. 2, 7, and 8. irep'nrXea 6. 2, 33. Also from i'Aews, Plato Phaedon 95, a. has t'Aea as Neut. PI. Rem. 6. 'O 77 v, salvus, is formed from the old word XA.02 by contraction. In addition to the Nom. aws, cwv, this word forms only the Ace. Sing, o~S>v, like the Attic second Dec. ; it has also the Ace. aooov. The form era (from tract), occurs as Fern. Sing, in Eurip. Fr. 629. (Dind.) and as Neut. PL in Plat. Critias, 111, e in the best MSS. The PI. consists of forms from aass of the second Dec. and of forms from the lengthened s (from craies), and ol ercoot, at crwat, N. a, rarely era. The Singular forms of (Twos are very rare in the Attic writers, e. g. cruos, X. An. 3. 1, 32. Rem. 7. The compounds of iczpas and yeXccs are partly like the Attic second Dec, partly like the third Dec, e. g. 6 % xpucrci/cepws, rb xp v(r ° K€ P a}l/ > Gen. xp v(r ^ K€ P ca an< i XP V(T0K ^P 0iTQS '■> & V s, etc. IX. -us, -u ; (a) N. 6 ^ ti.da.Kpvs., rb &5a/c/>u, tearless, So compounds of Sawpu ; yet these inflect only the Ace. Sing, like the third Dec, e. g. ti.da.Kpvv, Neut. tidaKpv. The other Cases are supplied by aSdKpvros, •oi', Gen. -ov, according to the second Dec. (b) N. 6 r) Mtttixvs, Tb 8'nrr)xv, two ells long, G. tov ttjs tov Sinr)x^os. Here belong the compounds of irrjxvs ', the declension is like jXvkvs, y\vic6 (§§ 76, II. and 77), except that the Neuter PI. in -ea is contracted into -77, like itTTT), e. g. 5nrr)xV' X -0 u s, -0 v ; N. 6 7] fiouddovs, Tb fxouoBoy, one-toothed, G. TOV TT)S TOV fl0v6d0VT0S. So the remaining compounds of odovs. Por the Dec, see § 54 (d). § 79. Paradigms. S.N. evdo^os evdoj-ov dlirovs Siirovv G. eV8d£ou eV5d|ou SIttoSos D. £p56£a> €V8d|w StTToSl A. ivdo^ov euSo^ou dtiroSa and Siirow Siirovv V. eV8o£e tvdol-ov diirov SlTTOVU P.N. QVQ~0%01 evdol-a b'liroo'es Siiroda G. eud6^ay iv56^uv SiirSSuv D. ivd6^ois evSo^ois SiTroffi A. eV5d|ous ei/§o£ous dlirodas SiiroSa V. ev8ol-oi ei/5o£a b'tTroo'es SiVoSa Dual. 6J/5d|&> iu56^co SiVoSe ivdo^oiv ivho^oiv. Snr6Soiu- §79.] PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. J 03 | S.N. evir\(o-os)ovs €vttX(o-ov)ovv lAews i'Aewv G. evirXov i'Aeco D. €virAq> i'Aeo) A. evirAovv lAecoy V. doubtful 'iXecos t'Aecwy P.N. e5?TAoz «wrAoa i'Aero i'Aew G. evirXccv YAeajp D. svirXois iXeqis A. evrrXovs gvttXoo. '/Ae&js tAew V. €§7rAot evirAoa tAeoj i'Aecu Dual. djirXca i'Aeaj evirXoiv. \ i'Ae&w. S.N. evdaifxccv evSaifj.ov e'x&iW %x&iov fxzifav fJ,e?£ov G. evSalp.ovos e%i8ri ovo s fiei^ovos d. evSaifxovi iX&iovi uel^ovi A. evdaifiova, evfiaifiov ex&iova-'uo Ix&Joy fj.el£ovm juei^co fJ-el^ov V. zvZaifiov eX^t©^ fj.ei(Qv P.N. evdai/j,oves ev'5al[J.ova eX&ioves ixSlova fxei^oves fj.ei(ova iX&ovs £x&' l(a fiei^ovs fJ-^C ^ G. evdaifJiSvwv iX&iv'vtov fJ.€l£6v(0V D. evdaiiAOGi(v) iX&io V. zvda.lfj.Qi/ts eiidaifAOva like the Nominative. like the Nominative. Dual. evdalfAOve eX&iove fjieiCove evdaifj6voiv. ix^ l ^voiv. fj.ei£6voiv. S.N. aXr}&r}S aATj&e's vyi-frs vyUs G. aXT}&(4-os)ovs jyi(4-os)ovs D. a\i)&(4-i)ei 1 jyi(4-'i)e? A. aXriSf ( e'-a ) t) a.Xri&4s vyi (« - a) a 2 vyUs Y. aX7]&4s i jyies P.N. aXr)fr(4-es)eis aX7]^r(4-a)rj uyz(e'-es)ei 5 vyi(4-a)a 2 G. a\7)&(4-cw)(tip l jyi(4-<>iv)a>v D. aXri&4xdpiv evx«pi airdropa &irarop V. €VX a P l i nrarop P.N. evxdpires ebxdpna aTrdropes aTraropa G. evxa-pt-Ttov ( XTraropcov D. evxapiai xirdropai A. ebxdpiTas evxdpcra airdTopas airaTopa V. evxdpires evxdpira evxdpire airdropts aTraropa Dual. ( 'nrdrope evxapir oiv ( maropoiv. 1 but a vvr\h4-o>v -■ - (rvvr&av, 6 S9. Rem. 4. 2 § 59. Pern. 1. , 104 ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. f$ S( $ 80. III. Adjectives of one Ending. Adjectives of one ending have no separate form for the Neu ter, partly because then meaning is of such a nature that the} generally occur in connection with persons, and partly because their formation admits of no separate neuter form. In poetry, however, these adjectives sometimes occur in those Cases in which the Neut. form is like that of the Masc. and Fern., i. e in the Gen. and Dat, even in connection with neuter substan- tives, e. g. /xaviacriv Xvcra-qfxacrtv, Eur. Or. 264. iv 7t£vy)tl crco/xart, la El. 375. They very seldom take a separate form for the Neut, e. g. hr-qkvs, i7rrj\v8a ed-yea, Her. 8, 73 ; a derivative aljective is commonly used, where the neuter is to be denoted. Endings. I. -as, Gen. -ov; 6 /xovias, Gen. /jlouiov, single (Paroxytone). II. -as, Gen. -avros: 6 r) aicdfias, Gen. -avros, unwearied (Paroxytone). III. -as, Gen. -ados: or) (pvyds, Gen. vv£, " -vxos, one-hoofed. XII. -^, Gen. -7ros : o ^ afyiAnp, Gen. -t7ros, ZiiV/A. XIII. Such as end in an unchanged substantive, e. g. facus, childless ; fiaKpS' X* l pi long-handed; abr6x^ip, done with one's own hand; /jLUKpaiwv, long-lived; uaKpavxWi long-necked • KevKao"iris, having a white shield. The declension of such adjectives is like that of the substantives, e. g. [xaKpavx^vos. On the compounds of irovs, however, comp. § 78, II. (b). $ 81. Comparison of Adjectives. 1. The quality expressed by an adjective may belong to an object in different degrees : — (a) When the quality belongs to one object in a higher degree than to another, the form is called the Comparative, e. g. Plato ivas more learned than Xenophon. (b) When the quality in the highest degree belongs to an object, the form is called the Superlative, e. g. Plato was the most learned of the disciples of Socrates, (c) The form of the adjective which expresses its simple meaning without any comparison, is called the Positive, e. g. Plato was learned. 2. Only the adjective and adverb are susceptible of com- parison ; the participle does not admit it, except in a few rare cases, where the participle has the meaning of an adjective, e. g. ippco/juevos, -earepos, -eararo^. 3. The Greek has two classes of terminations for the Comparative and Superlative. The first, and much the most common, is -repo?, -re pa, -repov, for the Compara- tive, and -raros, -rdrrj, -rarov, for the Superlative; the second is -(it)cdv, -(i)ov, or -cov, -ov, for the Comparative, and -(t)o-To?, -(I)o-tt], - (*) crrov, for the Superlative. The l is the union-vowel. 4. The first class of terminations is appended to the stem of the adjective by the connecting syllables o (&>), at, t?, e?; hence the general rule : In most adj&ctives, the usual end- ings are appended to the stem by means of the connecting syllable. ■*-••■•■- 106 ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. f$ 82 Remark. Instead of the single forms of the Comparative and Superlative, the Greek, like the Latin, can prefix /xaXXov (magis) and fidXia-ra (maximej to the Positive. This periphrasis is necessary in all adjectives, which, for the sake of euphony, have no Comparative form. $ 82. A. First Form of Comparison. Comparative, -repos, -rip a, -repov; Superlative, -raros, -rdrrj, -tcltov. These endings are appended to the stem of the adjective ; the stem is found by rejecting os in the Nom. of the second Dec, and the same syllable in the Gen. of the third Dec. I. Adjectives in -os, -rj (-a), -ov. (a) Most adjectives of this class annex the above endings to the stem by means of the union-vowel o or to ; the union-vowel is o, when a syllable long by nature or by position ($ 27, 3), pre- cedes, but co, when a short syllable precedes, — w being then used to prevent the concurrence of too many short syllables, e.g. Koiiip-os, light, Com. Kov-Tepos, " e%vp-w-TaTOS, &£i-os, worthy, " aj-i-w-repos, " agi-w-raros. Remark 1 . A mute and liquid here always make a syllable long by posi- tion, though the Attic poets, on account of the verse, sometimes consider such syllable as short, e. g. eureK^Ta-ros from evreKvos, Eur. Hec. 579. 618. (Pors.), dvsiroTfxctiTepa, Id. Ph. 1367. (b) Contracts in -eos = -ovs and -00s — -ovTepos = irop-Tepos airXo-eff-repos = anX-ovs-repos iropfpvp-ewTaTos = Tropcpvp-ca-raros airXo-ecr-Taros = anX-ova-raros. Here belong also contracts of two endings in -ovs and -ow, e. g. etiv-oos =» ttfv-ovs, Neut. zvv-oov = etfv-ow, Com. evvo-eff-rcpos = ew-ovs-repos, Sup. cwk©» 4ar-raros =» fvv-ova-raros. $82.] ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 107 Rem. 2. Adjectives in -oos take also the uncontracted forms of the Compara- tive and Superlative in -oarepos, -odiraros, e. g. evirvocoTepoi, X. R. Equ. 1, 10. evxpodrepos, X. 0. 10, 11. (c) The following adjectives in -a to s: yepcuos, old; n a A. a i- 09, ancient; irepalos, on the other side; vy^oXalo^ at leisure, assume -repos and -raros without a union-vowel, e. g. yepai-6s, Com. p/epat-repos, Sup. yepai-raros, naXat-os, " iraXai-repos, " 7raAcu-TaTos. Rem. 3. riaAaios and o"xoAatos have also the usual forms of Compari- son; iraXadrepos, axoXa^repos, so also yepai6izpos, Alitiph. 4, p. 125, 6. (d) The following adjectives in -09: cvSlos, calm; rjo-vxos, qzciet; 1810 s, peculiar ; 'Laos, equal; /x zeros, middle; opSpios, early; oij/ios, late; tt a p air \-qer cos, similar; and Trpwios, in the morning, assume the union-syllable TaTos ; (piXwrepos, TaTos. Tepov), and a-yos, eating alone ; 6 ij/o ay os, dainty ; and it r o> x 6 s, poor, drop os, and append the syllable is, e. g. AaA-os, Com. AaA-i'cr- repos, Sup. AaA-icr-raros ; tttcu^o? has also Sup. Trrco^oraTos. Rem. 7. These endings properly belong to adjectives in -rjs, Gen. -ov. II. Adjectives in -77?, Gen. -ov, and if/evSr^, -es. Gen. -e'os, drop -17s, and append the syllable -is, e.g. KAeVr-T/s (Gen. -ou), thievish, Com. K/\e7rr-to--Tepo?, Sup. KAe7rr-tcr-TaTos ; ij/evS-Lcr-Tepos, ij/evS-to-- raros. Exceptions. 'TfipiaTTjs, -ov, insolent, has vfipio-TSTepos, X. An. 5. 8, 3, vfipio-To- raros, X. An. 5. 8, 22. C. 1. 2, 12. From aKpar^s (Gen. -eos) is the Com. ctKpa- TLcrTepos, to distinguish it from atcpaTeo-TaTos, No. (e). III. Adjectives of the third Declension. The Comparison- endings are appended to the stem of the adjectives, either directly or by inserting the syllable -es (also -is). (1) Those in -vs, -eta, -v, 77s, -es (Gen. -eos = -oi;s), a?, -av, and the word //.a /cap, happy, append the endings of Com- parison directly to the pure stem, which appears in the Neuter form, e. g. yXvKvs, Neut. -v — yXvKv-repos yXvKv-raros c\X.r]^-)]S, Neut. -4s — aA.7j^eV-Te/3oy a\7i&eo~-Ta.Tos /j.e\as, Neut. -ay — /xsXdy-repos /xeXdy-Taros rd\as, Neut. -av — ra\dy-repos raXdv-raros fxaKap, — fxanap-Tepos jACUtdp-TaTOS. Rem. 8. The adjectives r)8vs, raxvs, and ttoXvs are compared in -lap and •w. See § 83, I. (2) Adjectives in -o>v, -ov (Gen. -ovos), assume -es, e. g. ehZdixoiv, Neut. evdai^oy, happy. Com. evScu/JLOV-ea-Tepos, Sip. €vSaifwv-4-T€pos, Sup. dirixapir u-iaros. 'Axup^re^s in Homer, comes from axapir-rtpos ; eomp. No. '4). $ 83. B. Second Form of Comparison . Comparative. -iW, Neut. -lov, or -a>v, Neut. -o»/. Superlative, -to-ros, -io-t^, -to-rov. Remark 1. On the quantity of t in -lav, -iov, see § 28, 1 ; on the declension, S 78, Rem. 9 ; and on the accent, § 65, 5 (a). This form of Comparison includes, I. Some adjectives in -vs, which drop -v"ros, irp4oiv ((peprepos, Poet.) KcuclwP X^ipwv 7Jffv fieiwv TrXelwv, or 7rAeW pawv ireTrairepos Triorepos Superlative. &OICTTOS 04\TL(TTOS (ySeATaTos, Poet.) KpaTHTTOS XwO~TOS {(pipraros, Aycrre. The poetic Superlative , irXeova, and 7rAei'w, are used indiscriminately ; PI. Nom. and Ace, usually irXelovs, also TrXeioves and TrXelovas (but not TrXeovs) ; TrXdco is much more frequent than irkiw ; irXeiovwu and 7r\eiWt are more frequent than irXeovw and irXioai. Finally, the shortened form of the Neut. Sing. irXeiv (formed from irXsiov), but limited to such phrases as ttXzlv •>) /xvpioi, should be mentioned as a special Atticism. Several adjectives, which express the idea of an order or series, have only the Comparative and Superlative forms, because, on account of their signification, Jiey cannot be used absolutely, but only in comparison. An adverb of place is usually the root of these forms of Comparison, e. g. v from Trp6). -n-porepos (prior), Trpwros (primus ), first. ( " &ua>), avdorepos (superior), aucararos (supremus). ( " vvep), inreprepos (superior), higher, xmipraros, Poet, viraros (supremus). ( " virol), varepos (posterior), later, vs evdaifiovccs Toxews from cos, e. g. xaAe7ra>Tepa>s, aXrifrearrepcos, /xox^vpo- repas, KaKXiouas, especially /j.ettfvccs, etc. The Neuter Singular is seldom used in the Superlative, and belongs mostly to poetry. 2. All original adverbs in -o>, e. g. aVoo, Karoo, e£a>, ccroo, etc., retain the ending -m regularly in the Comparative, and almost uniformly in the Superlative, e. g. a\va>, above, Ka.ru, below. Com. avwr4pca KaTUTepca Sup. avuraTco Ka.TOiTa.ra>. Ill like manner, most other original adverbs have the ending ►w in the Comparative and Superlative, e. g. ayx ov > near, nepa, ultra, rrjXov, far, eKas,far, lyyvs, near, Com. ayxorepco irepairepo> Tt]\orip(a eKaarepo) iyyvr ipta iyyirepov Sup. ay xoTa.ro> Sup. wanting T7]K0TO.T0> kKa.aTa.ra> iyyvrdro) and iyyvrara fyyip-ra (rarely). 9* 86, 87.] THE PRONOUNS eyw, (TV, OV, 113 CHAPTER III. The Pronoun $ 86. Nature and Division of Pronouns. 1. Pronouns do not, like substantives, express the idea of an object, but only the relation of an object to the speaker ; i. e. they show whether the object is the speaker himself (the first person), or the person or thing addressed (the second person), or the person or thing spoken of (the third person), e. g. I (the teacher) give to thee (the scholar) it (the book). 2. All pronouns are divided into five principal classes : (1) Personal, (2) Demonstrative, (3) Relative, (4) Interrog- ative, (5) Indefinite Pronouns. Pronouns are again di- vided, according to their signification and form, into (a) Substantive, (b) Adjective, and (c) Adverbial Pronouns, e. g. e'70) ravra iiroLTjaa] (a) J, thou, he, she, it; (b) my, thy, his; (c) here, there, thus. I. Personal Pronouns. A. Substantive Personal Pronouns. § 87. The simple iyw, ego, o-v, tu, ov, sui, Nom. Gen. Pat. Ace. N.A. G.D. 4y&, 1 jiov (fiov), ipod, of me /J.OL 1/j.oi), ifu.oi, to me fj.4 (/*€), ifx4, me Singular. (Tv, thou crov (crov), of thee vol (croi), to thee ), of himself etc. of (0:), to himself etc. e (e), himself, etc. o-4, Ace. (Poet.), them both acpoS'iv (aipcc'Cu), of them both, to you both to them both Plural. v/xels, ye (v) I ccpe7s, Neut. V, of its 'i]/jL?I/, to us il/uas, us 134 the reflexive pronouns ifxavTov, creavrov, tavrov. [$ 88 Remark 1. The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthesis, without any mark of accent. Comp. §§ 33 (b), and 35, 3. On the accentuation and use of the third Pers. of the Pronoun, see § 302, Rem. 3. The Vocative is here, as in the following paradigms, omitted, because, when it occurs, it is always like the Nominative. Rem. 2. The Gen. Sing, of these three pronouns, in imitation of Homer, often has, among the Attic poets, also the forms ifiefrev, ceSrev, e&ei/: these forms always retain their accent, except when e&ev is not used as a reflexive (sui), but as a pronoun of the third person (ejus). Comp. § 35, 3 (b). Rem. 3. The Ace. Sing, and PL of ov ha^ in Attic poetry also the form viv (viv) signifying him, her, it, PI. them, e. g. Soph. OR. 868. 1331, instead of avrovs and auras. See the Dialects, § 217. Rem. 4. The oblique Cases of ri/j.e?s and vpeTs, when not emphatic, some- times undergo a certain inclination among the poets, being written in the fol- lowing manner : %fx to them, Ace. i instead of crtyas, them. Both forms, a4Tepos, -Tepa, -Tepov, suus, -a, -inn, from trcpav (used in speaking of many ; when single persons or things are spoken of, Att. prose always uses the Gen. tavTov, -rjs). The Epic form, os, t\, ov, suus, -a, -am, also occurs in the Tragedians, though seldom. 91. II. Demonstrative Pronouns. Singular. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. the TOV TCp t6v 7] t6 TT/S TOV TJ) TCp tt\v TO hie OVTOS TOVTOV TOVTCO TOVTOV haec aVTT] Tainrjs TaVTt] TCtVTTJV hoc TOVTO TOVTOV TOVTCO TOVTO ipse ovt6s avTov WTcp avTd'v ipsa avTi) avTr)s OUTJ7 a.VTT]V ipsum o.vt6 avTov avTco cvt6 Plural. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. 01 TCOV al to\ TCOV TCOV OUTOl TOVTCOV ciutcu TOVTCOV TdVTa TOVTCOV avTol avTcov ainai avTcov aiiTcL avTcov TOVS TO.S TO. TOVTOVS TavTas TCtVTa avTovs avTcis avTti 1 Dual N. A. 1 G. D. T(t) TOIV [to.) tw TCUV Totv TOVTCO TOVTOLV (touto,) TOVTaiV TOVTCO TOVTOLV avTco avTolv avTct avTcxiv avTco avToiv. 1. The pronoun outos is composed of the article 6, r), to, and the pronoun wtos] where the article has o, co, or oi, they combine with the first syllable of auT(fc and make ov ; all other vowels of the article are absorbed by the ](V RELATIVE PUONOTJN. ff-92 first syllable of abros. Hence the first syllable of olros ends in ov where the article has o, «, or 01 : elsewhere in ov. The same rule holds when avros is compounded with an adjective pronoun, c. g. too-outos (from roaos and avr6s). Examples : 6 avros == ouros, rj avrr, = avrr], rb avro = rovro : rod avrov = rovrov, r?is avri]s == ravT7]5, etc.: SO tocos avros = rocrovros, i narj avri) = to oAAo, alius, alia, aliud, the neuter Sing, here also ending in o. Remark 1. The neuter form in o seems to have rejected a S, as may be inferred from the Latin, is, ea, id, ille, -a, -ud, alius, -a, -ud. — On the Dual forms, rd, raw, ravrd, ravraiv, see § 241, Rem. 10 (b). — Instead of IksIvos, the Ionic Ktivos is also used in Attic poetry ; this word occurs somewhat frequently, in Attic prose, but always after a long vowel or diphthong ; nence Aphaeresis (§ 14, 5) must be assumed here, as r) \dvces, PI. Rp. 2. 370, a. Singular. Plural. Xom. 1 roaovros roaavrrj roo~ovro{v) TOffovroi roaavrai roaavra Gen. \ roaovrov roaavrrjs roaovrov roaovroiv roaovruv roaovroiv Dat. 1 roaovrco roaavrr) roaovrco roaovrois roaavrais roaovrois Ace ! roaovrov roaavry\v roaovro(v) roaovrovs roaavras roaavra Dual. 1ST. A. 1 roaovra roaavra roaovrco G. D. | roaovroiv roaavraiv roaovroiv. \ Rem. 2. The article usually coalesces by Crasis (§ 10) with avr6s and forms one word, viz. avros (instead of 6 avros, idem), air i), tout 6, usually r av- rov (instead of to avro), r avrov, but rr)s avrrjs, r aired, ravrrj (to distinguish it from rairr;, this), but rbv avrov, r)]v avrr)v, airoi, airat, ravrd (instead of to outcc, to distinguish it from to~to, haec), but rcov avrwv, rois avro7s, etc. §92. III. Relative Pronoun. Singular. Plural. Dual. Nom. Gen. Dat. OS OV V VJ V OV & o'i £>v oTs a" wv aTs a wv cits olv oTv a aXv CUV » 5 otv oTv 1 r t v 1 §93.1 INDEFINITE AND INTERR0GA1IVE PRONOUNS 117 § 93. IV. Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns. The Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns are denoted by the same form, but are distinguished by the accent and position, the Indefinite being enclitic 33) and placed after some word or words, the Interrogative being always accented and placed before. "Remark 1. "When the interrogative pronouns stand in an indirect question, the relative o is placed before their stem, which, however (except in the case of osns), is not inflected, e. g. oirdios, oTr6o~os i oir6repos, etc. I Sing. N. rls, some one N. rl, some thing rls ; quis 1 ri ; quid ? G. nvos, or rov rivos, or rod I). rivi, or TCO rivi-, or toj A nvd N. rl riva rl P'u-. X. rives N. nvd and arra rives riva 1 G. nvuiv rivcov f 13 riai(v) ricri(v) A. nvds N. nvd and tirra rivas riva Dual N. A. rive rive [ 't nnd )). rivoiv rivoiv. -\ . osns, whoever ^ns o ri o'lnves drives anva, or arret OuTlVOS, 01' OTOV 7]STIV0S wvnvoov (rarely oroov) 1 *>• i A> Sr iv i, or or ca ynvi OVTIVa TjVTlVa Tl 6isri. 8. g. Th. 8, 24. X. Cy. 1. 6, 26. Vect. 4, 32. * 95.] LENGTHENING OF THE PRONOUN. 119 (b) Adverb ial Correlatives. Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative. Indirect Interrog. nod ; where ? irov, somewhere, av anting (hie, oo, ivhere. ottov, where. ubi? alicubi ibi) ubi ubi ir6&€v ; whence 1 ? ■Ko^reu, from some wanting (hinc, oSrev, whence, bitohev, unde 1 place, alicunde inde) unde whence,\mde tvol ; whither t iroi, to some place, wanting (eo) of, whither, oiroi,ichither. quo 1 aliquo quo quo irSre ; when ? Tvore, some time, t6t€, then, turn ore, ivhen, 5tt6t€, quando 1 aliquando quum when, quando TrrjVLKa ; quo wanting T7]Vl- *| hoc r]vlKa, when. owni/ina, temporis punc- KoSe 1 ipso Tt\vi- \ tem- quo ipso when, quo to ? quota ho- tempore ipso tem- ra? Kavra J pore pore ttcos ; how? ir&s, some how outco(s) £5e, so &s, now OTT00S, h0W irrj ; whither ? ir-fj, to some place, Tfjde ( hither, ravTT) \ or here rj, where, oirrj. where, how? thither, in some way whither whither. Rem. 2. The forms to express the idea of here, there (hie, ibi), wanting in the Common language, are supplied by ivrav&a, eVdxtSe, and the idea of hence, thence (hinc, inde), by iv&4v8e, ivrev&w, evSra and ev&eu in the old and poetic language have both a demonstrative and relative sense, but in prose only a relative sense, except in certain phrases, e. g. 4v&a plu — 4vba 5e, hie, illic, ev&ev Kai ev&ev, hinc, illinc, and. when the signification of place is changed to that of time, e. g. 4vfra \4yei, then he says, ev&ev, thereupon. The forms twj, thus, rrj, hither, here, are poetic ; &s (instead of ovtws), is also for the most part poetic •; in prose, it is confined almost wholly to certain phrases, e. g. ical &s, vel sic, ouS' (^5') Sis, ne sic quiclem, and in comparisons, as — #s, ut — sic, PI. Rp. 7. 530, d. Prot. 326, d. ; also &s ovu, so then, Th. 3, 37. $ 95. Lengthening of the Pronoun. Some small words are so appended to the pronouns, for the purpose of giving a particular turn to their signification, that they coalesce and form one word. They ai'e the following : — (a) The enclitic y4 is joined to the Personal pronouns of the first and second person, in order to make the person emphatic, by putting him in contrast with others, e. g. eyurye, I for my part. The pronoun iydo then draws back its accent in the Nom. and I)at. e.g. eycoye, i/xovye, efioiyt, ifi4ye, arvye. As y4 can be joined with any other word, so also with any other pronoun, but it does not form one word with the pronoun, e. g. ovr6s ye. (b) The particles S^ (most commonly S-fjnore), and ovv, are appended to relatives compounded of interrogatives or indefinites, as well as to oaos, in order to make the meaning general or indefinite, i. e. to extend it to everything embraced in the object denoted by the pronoun, e. g. ostisBt), dsTisdyTroTt, Sstis- §r)TTOTovv, osTtsovv, tjtlsovu, otiovv, ivhoevcr it be, I know not ivho, nescio quis, qui- cunque (Gen. ovtivosovv or orovovu, i]srivosovv, Dat. (priviovv or otg>ovv, etc.) ; — faooosSi), 6-n-ocrosovv, ocrosS^iroTe. quantuscunque ; — otttjAikosovv, however greats how old soever ; so also us-rrepovv [comp. (d)]. 120 NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. [$ 96. (c) The suffix 8 e is joined with some demonstratives for the purpose of strengthening their demonstrative relation, e. g. ode, '/fie, t6B5r from w5e ; ovrccai from outojs ; evTevSevi from evrev&ev ; iv&adt from ev&dde ; vvvi from vvv ; Sevpl from devpo. CHAPTER IV. The Numerals . $ 96. Nature and Division of Numerals. 1. Numerals express the relation of number and quantity. They are divided into the following classes, according to their signification : — (a) Cardinals, which express a definite number absolutely, and answer the question, lioiv many ? e. g. one, two, three. The first four Numerals and the round numbers from 200 (SuxkoVioi) to 10,000 (fjLvptot) and their compounds, are declined; but all the others are indeclinable. The thousands are expressed by adverbial Numerals, e. g. rpi^yikioi, 3000. (b) Ordinals, which denote a series, and answer the question, which one in the series 1 . All have the three endings of adjec- tives, -o?, -7], -ov, except Sevrepos, which has -os, -a, -ov. All up to 19, except 2, 7, 8, end in -tos and have the accent as near as possible to the beginning of the word. From 20 upwards they end in -o-tos. Remark 1. Adverbial Ordinals, which also denote a series, are expressed by the Xcut. Sing, or PI., with or without the article, but sometimes also with tho adverbial ending -cos, e. g. irpcoroy, to irpwrou, Trpwra, ra irpwra, TrpojTus, $ 96.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. 121 (c) Numeral adverbs, which express how often, or how many times anything has happened, and which answer the question, how many times ? They are formed, except the first three, from the ordinals with the ending -dias, e. g. Tren-aKi?, jive times {\ 98). (d) Multiples, which show the number of parts of which a whole is composed, and answer the question, /tow many fold? All are compounded of 7rXovTos, -t], -ov, primus, -a, -urn 2ff 8vo Sevrepos, -d, -ov 3 y' Tpeis, rpia TplTOS, -7], -OV 4 5' TeTrctpes, -o, or reacrapes , -a rerapros, -77, -ov 5 e' irevre TTe/jUTTOS, -7), -ov 6 V H €KTOS, -7], -ov U' €7TT(X e738ouos, -7], -ov 8 V 0/CTc6 oyfioos, -7], -ov 9S ewea ivaros, -7], -ov 10 i' 5e/ca Zmaros, -77, -ov 11 la eVSe/ca ivdeKaros, -7], -ov 12 iff 5c65e/c»- SwdinaTos, -77, -ov ^3 r> Tpe?s (Tpio) Kai BeKa 1 rpiros, -77, -ov Ka\ Se/coTos, -77- -ov 3 14 id' TeTTapes(a) «ol 8e/ca 2 TeVaproy, -77, -ov Kai 5e/caTos, -77, -ov 15 ie' ■7rei/Te/ccu5e/ca ire/xTTTOs, -77, -ov Ka\ Se/caTos, -77, -op 16 it' e/c/ccu5e/ca cktos, -77, -ov Kai deKaros, -77, -ov 17 tC e7rTaKCu8e/ca eySSopos, -77, -ov /cat Se/caros, -77, -ov 18 17]' o/crwKatSe/ca oydoos, -7), -ov Kai denaros, -77, -ov 19 !»' eVz/eaKcu5eKa zvaros, -77, -ov Kai StKaros, -tj, -ov 20 ic' e?K0(Tl(v) elKOGTOS, -Tj, -6v 1 The rare Attic form rpisKatdeKa is indeclinable. 2 The non- Attic form reo-crapaKaiSeKa is indeclinable. 3 The forms given from the 13th to the 19th are preferable to rpisKaiUKaros ccTTapaKcuSe/cctTos, 7rej/T€/cat8e/faTos, etc. *9S.] NUMERALS. 21 Kaf 30 A/ 40 // 50 v' 60 |' 70 o' 80 tt' 90 5' 100 // 200 v TreVre fxepSov to dvo [fiepy], or tu>v xeVre [fxepwv] to. dvo fiepr), twe parts of the Jive ; § is ruu 6kt£> {xoipuv ai irivTe [jtto?j0ot], or t&v o/ctw [fxoipwv] aJ dvo /xo?pai. But one half is expressed by compounds with rjfii, e. g. 7]/j.idapeiK6y, half a daric ; so in the PL Tpia, 7reWe rj/xiBapetKa, a daric and a half, two darics and a half. — Fractions are also expressed by an ordinal with /xopiov or /nepos, e. g. Tpnt\\i6piou or tp'itov /xepos = £, ire^-KTou jiepos = j ; a mixed number is also expressed by tj/xi preceded by a numeral, e. g. irevre r)fj.idapeiKa = 2^- darics, also by irri prefixed to an ordinal, e. g. inirpiTov = l£, 4iri7re/xirTou — 1 -§•. 6. The Cardinal numbers compounded with avv are equivalent to the Latin distributives, e. g. cvvdvo (bini), two together, two at a time, each two, avvrpeu (terni), a-v/jLireuTe (quini), etc. 1 Fifty years, wanting one. $ 100.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF THE ADVERB. 125 7. Declension of the first four Numerals : — Nora. els (xia ev dvo Gen. kv6s /xius kv6s Svo?v (very seldom 8ve?v) Pat. kvi [xiz kvi Svo?v (Svai[v] Ionic and Th. 8, 101.) Ace. kva /xiav hv dvo Nom. rpeTs Neut. rpia rerrapes, or res)ws (ffvvri&e-as) (Tvvr)&ws. Remark 1. On the accent of compounds in ->]Soos, and of the compound avrdpicws, see § 59, Rem. 4, also on the accent of ewus, instead of evuus, § 49, 3. On the comparison of Adverbs, see § 85. 2. In addition to the adverbs with the ending -cos, there are many which have the endings of the Gen., Dat, or Ace. (a) The Gen. ending appears in many adverbs in -rjs and -ov, e. g. e^s, £e£r)s, in order; k^airivr]% suddenly ; nov, alicubi; irov t ubi ? o7Tov, ov, ubi ; at-rov, ibi ; cv8ap.ov, noivhere. (b) The Dat., or an obsolete Abl. or Locative 1 ending, occurs in the following adverbs, (a) In adverbs with the ending -j, e. g. r)pi, in the morning, comp. rip, spring , acopt, unseasonably ; bktjti (Dor. e'/caTi), aeKriri, eicovTi, azKovri; in adverbs of manner in -el and -f, from adjectives in -qs and -t]s, and almost exclu- sively in adverbs compounded of a privatrve and iras cr avr6s, e. g. iravop/xei and iravop/it On the use of both forms, see Large Grammar, Part I, § 363 f/3). The Locative Case, is one which denotes the place where. $ 102.] CLASSES OF THE VERB. 127 (/8) In local adverbs in -01, commonly derived from substantives of the sec- ond Dec, e. g. , I(t&/j.o'i from 'laSf/j-Ss, Ilv&o? from TIv&d>, MeyapoT (tA Meyapa), Tltipcuo?, KiKVWot from 77 KiKvvva), of, ottoi, quo, whither, gXkoi, domi, from oTkgs. Rem. 2. Adverbs in -o?, derived from substantives, denote an indefinite where, but those derived from pronouns commonly denote the direction whither , ret sometimes the indefinite where. (y) In local adverbs in -at. This ending occurs only in a few forms, e. g. XW-U humi, ira\ai. To this form corresponds the PI. locative form -7] a i (*/), or where i precedes, -aatv, derived from substantives of the first Dec. ; this ending originally belonged to plural substantives only, but was transferred later to substantives in the singular number, e. g, ©-77)877- (Tt(u) from @TJ$ f of the sake of; irpoiKa, gratuitously. CHAPTER VI. The Verb. Nature and Division of the Verb. $ 102, Classes of the Verb. 1. The Verb expresses an action or state, which is af- firmed of a subject, e. g. the father writes, the rose blooms, the boy sleeps, God is loved. 2. Verbs are d'.vided into the following classes : — (1) Active verbs, which express an action, that the sub- ject itself performs or manifests, e. g. rypdo), to ivrite ; ^rdWo), to bloom (comp. § 248) ; (2) Middle or Reflexive verbs, which express an action that the subject performs on itself, the subject being, 128 VETIBS. TENSES. [$ 103 therefore, both agent and object, e. g. fiovXevofiaiy 1 advise myself, I deliberate ; (3) Passive verbs, which express an action that the sub- • ject receives from another object, e. g. rvirTOfxai viro twos, I am smitten by some one. 3. Verbs, which are used only in the middle form, are called Deponent. They have either a reflexive or intransi- tive meaning. They are divided into Middle Deponents, which have a middle form for their Aorist and Future, e. g. yapiCpyuai, gratificor, Aor. e^apiadfiriv, Fut. yapiovfiai ; and into Passive Deponents, which have a Passive form for their Aorist, but commonly a middle form for their Fut, e. g. iv^vfieofiat, mecum reputo, Aor. eve^v/jb^Tjv, mecum reputavi, Fut. iv^v^r}ao}xai, mecum reputabo. Comp. § 197. § 103. The Tenses. 1. The Tenses denote the time of the action of the verb. The Greek has the following Tenses : — I. (1) Present, (BovXevco, I advise, (2) Perfect, /3ej3ov\€v/ca, I have advised; II. (3) Imperfect, ifioiiXevov, I was advising; (4) Pluperfect, efSeftovkeviceiv, I had advised, (5) Aorist, e(3ov\evcra, I advised (indefinite) ; III. (6) Future, fiovXevcrco, I shall or will advise, (7) Future Perfect (almost exclusively in the mid- dle form), ftefiovXevcro/jLaL, I shall have advised my- self, or I shall have been advised. 2. All the Tenses may be divided into, a. Principal tenses : Present, Perfect, and Future ; b. Historical tenses : Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist. Remark. The Greek has two forms for the Perf. and Plvrperf. Act., two for the simple Fut. Pass., and two each for the Act., Pass., and Mid. Aorist ; these two forms may be distinguished as Primary and Secondary tenses ; i. e. the first Perfect is a primary tense, the second Perfect a secondary tense, etc. Still, only a very few verbs have both forms ; most verbs construct the above tenses with one or the other form, but not with both. No verb has all the M 104, 105.] VERBS. MODES. PARTICIPIALS. 129 tenses. Pure verbs (§ 108, 5) form, with very few exceptions, only the primary tenses. Mute and liquid verbs (§ 108, 5) may form both the primary and secondary tenses, but no verb has all the forms in use. The Fut. Pert'., which is found in but few verbs, is entirely wanting in liquid verbs. It is seldom found in verbs which have the temporal augment (§ 121), e. g. aipew, to take, TJp7} § 108. Stem, Augment, and Reduplication. — Char- acteristic. 1. Every verb is divided into the stem, which contains the ground-form of the verb, and into the syllables of formation, by which the relations of person, number, tense, etc. are denoted The stem is found in most verbs in -w by cutting off the ending of the first Pers. Ind. Pres., e. g. fiovXtv-w, Aey-w, Tpifi-o). H 109, llO.J VERBS. INFLECTION AND TENSE-ENDINGS. 131 2. The syllables of formation are either annexed as endings to the stem, and are then called inflection-endings, e. g. {3ov\ev-oj, fiovXcv-au), fiovXtv-o-ofAai, or are prefixed to the stem, and are then called Augment and Reduplication, e. g. i-fiov\evov, I was advising ; (3e-f3ov\€vi is the tense-ending of the Fut. The stem of the verb, together with the tense-characteristic and the augment or reduplication, is called the tense-stem. Thus, e. g. in i/Sov- Xeva-a, iBovXeua- is the tense-stem of the first Aor. Act. § 111. (b) Personal-endings and Mode-voivels. The personal-ending denotes the person of the verb, and takes a different form according to the different persons and numbers ; the mode-vowel connects the tense-stem and the personal-ending, and takes a different form according to the different modes, e. g. 1 Pers. Sing. Ind. Pres. M. fZovAev-o-ficu Subj. fSovAev-a>-/u.cu 3 " " " Fut. " )3ovAeu-o"-e-Tat Opt. fiovAeu-cr-oi-TO 1 " PI. " Pres. if f3ovAev-6-/xe&a Subj. (SovAev-6-/Ae&a 2 " " " " " fiovAev-e-a&e " fio-jAev-7]-o~&6 1 " Sing. " A. I. " i/3ouAeii-(T-d-iJ.T]y " /3ovAev-(T-ci}-pMi 3 " " " " " £j3ovAev-cr-a-TO Opt. PovAev-a-cu-ro. Remark. In the above forms, fSovAev is the verb-stem, and /3ouAev, ySoi/Aewr, and i&ovAevo- are the tense-stems, namely, of the Pres., Put., and first Aor, Mid: the endings -pai, -Tat, etc., are the personal-endings, and the vowels o, «, e. oi, 7] a, c», are the mode-vowels. The mode-vowels e and o of the Indie TOV 3. t^}V T6 3. Tcocrav Sing. 2. (cro) o 3. crhco Dual 2. o-frov 3. c&cov Plur. 2. a&e 3. cr&cocrav, c&wv D. Infinitive. D. Infinitive. j v Pres., Put., and Aor. II. vcu Pcrf. Act. and Aor. I. and II. Pass. i Aor. I. cr&cu E. Participle. E. Participle. Stem it, with exception of the Perf., wbose stem ends in -or. fievos, ftzvri, fievov ; /j.4vos, ptvT), fievov, Perf. 134 FERSONAL-ENJJ1NGS. [$114 Remark. The Personal-endings follow so directly the mode-vowel, and are so closely joined to it, that often the two do not appear separately, but are united together, e. g. fiovXeiHT-ys, instead of fiovXeva-rj-Ls, BovXev-r), instead of 8ovXev-e-cu (a and e coalescing and i being subscribed). $ 114. Difference between the Personal-endings tn the Principal and the Historical Tenses. 1. The difference between the Principal and Historical tenses is important. The Principal tenses (Pres., Perf., and Put.) form the second and third Pers. Dual with the same ending -ov, e. g. BovXev-erov BovXev-e-rou ; PovXev-e-o&op BovAev-e-a&ov ; the Historical tenses also form the second Pers. Dual in -o v, but the third in -tj v, e. g. £f$ov\ev-e-T o v ifSovXev-e-Trjv, ifiovAev-e-cr&ov £BovX€v-e-o~&r)v. 2. The Principal tenses form the third Pers. PI. Act. in --o~i{v) BovXevo-vra " fiovXeva-vrai 1 Sing. " •' Bovtevo-fiai " BovXsvco-nai 2 '• " " /3ouAeu-?7 " BovAev-rj 3 " " " BovXeie-rai " fiovXevrj-T a t 2 and 3 Du. " Impf.e/3ouAeue-Toi', -4-ttju Opt. BovXevoi-rov, -ol-njv £BovXeve-(r&ov, -4-o-&t}v " BovXtvoi-o-frov, -oi-a$T\v 3 PL " '• £fiovXevo-v " BovXevoi-ev £BovXevo-VT o " BovXevoi-uro 1 Sing." " £BovX€vo-/jlt] v " BovXevol-/AT)v 2 « " " (eBovXeve-ao) £BovXev-ov " (BovXevoi-aro) /3ooAe<5oi-o 3 " « 11 iBovXeve-TO " BovXevoi-TO. < 115.] CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -(O. 136 § 115. Conj ligation of the Regular Verb in -o> Preliminary Remarks. 1. Since pure verbs do not form the secondary tenses (§ 103, Rem.) these tenses are supplied in the Paradigm from two mute verbs and one liquid verb (rpifi-co, AetV-co, stem AIIT, ^aiv-co, $AN), so as to exhibit a full Conju- gation. 2. In learning the table, we are to note, (1) That the Greek forms may always be resolved into, (a) Personal-ending, (b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-characteristic, (d) Tense-stem, (e) Verb-stem, (f ) Augment, or Reduplication. (2) The spaced forms, e. g. )8ouAeu-e to u y fiovAev-rjTov, third Pers. Du. Ind. and Subj. Pres., may direct attention to the difference between the Historical tenses in the Ind. and Opt., and the Principal tenses. (3) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are distinguished by a star (*). The learner should compare these together, e. g. i8ouAev* I may advise, BovXev-ff-ys BovXev-ff-y * BovA€v--eTa>, let him ad. eiv, fZovAev-erov, ye two ad. to fiovAev-erav, let them advise, both advise, ySoi/Aeu-ere,* do ye ad. fiovAev-eTOMrav, usually fiovAev-Si/Tovv,* let ther, Pe-ftovAzv-K-oijAi, 1 mig. have a. fie-ffovAevic-ois fSe-(iov\ev-K-oi f&e-$ov\ev-K-oiTOP fie-fiovAev-K-o irr]V Ps-fiovAev-K-oinei/ j3e-/3ov\cv-K-oiTe /3e-/3ouAeu-«:-o L 6 l' Tre-cpriv-oiiiu, I might appear, ffovXev-cr-aifjU, I might advise, fiovAev-cr-ais, or -etas j8oi»Aeu--/c-£i!st f3e-fiovAev-K-v?d\ Pe-{iovAev-K-6s'\ G. -k-6tos, -k- vtas, having advised. ire-cprjv-ds^ /3ovA(v-(T-ds fSovAev-a-aca fiovAev-(r-au'\ Genitive : fiovAev-(r-avTOS fiovAev-Aeu-oj/TO S. 1. fSe-fiovXev-fxai, I have deliberated, fie-fiovAev-fxevos, 8), I may 2. /3e-j8ovAeu- ^t [(indefinite) fiovAev-cr-r) * [/derate, Aorist I., 3. e-/3ojuAeu-tT-aTO &ovAev-v* Xnr-oifj.riv,Imight remain, like Opt. Impf. Anrou,t -eVdw, like Pres. Imp. Anr-eVi^att Xnr-6fi€vos, -o- /U6J/77, -ofievou BovXev-a-oi/Li-nv,! m. have deliberatedJikeOpt.Inrp. BovXei- , I may have been rub'd, rpL$-fjs, etc., like the first Aor. Subj. Pass. Fut. 11. Tpifi-Ji-cr-o/Acu, I shall be rubbed, rpij3-v-7j,ui, to say ; ij, e. g. Traioiv-a /jll, Trai5evo--ai-/.u- : but the ending -77 v in the first and second Aor. Pass., according to the analogy of verbs in -fit. This 77 remains through all the per- sons and numbei-s, though it is often dropped in the Dual and PI., especially in the third Pers. PI. and then, dr]/j.eu = ufxev, enjTe = elYe, eiricrav = etej/, e. g TratSeu&eiTijUej/ and irai^v^reip.^v, fivrjar^eiTjTe and -fretre, ) ; still, not gen erally in compounds, e. g. irapdax 01 ^ 1 - 9. The forms of the first Aoi*. Opt. Act. in -etas, -ete (v), -eiav, instead of •ais, -at, -aiv, have passed from the JEolic Opt. in -eia, -eias, etc., into com- mon use in all the dialects, and are employed by the Attic writers more fre- quently than the regular forms, e. g. fiov\evr Pres. Mid. BovXeveoftwcrav " BovXevea&wv Aor. " (TKt-tydcr&waav " (TKetyda&uiv. The Aor. Pass, ending -iviuv or -titcou, abridged from -rjTwcrau, is found in PI. Legg. 856, d. ireix^evrwv, and lb. 737, e. diavenrjfrfiTwv (according to several MSS.). $ 1 17- j VERBS. ATTIC FUTURE. 143 13. Besides the simple form of the Subj. Perf. and the Opt. Plup. Act., a periphrasis, formed by the Perf. Part, and the Subj. or Opt. of elvai (to be), &, e'l-qv, is very frequent, e. g. ireiraib'evKcius &, educaverim ; ireiraideuK^s efyv, educa- vissem. Yet this form seems to denote a circumstance or condition, more than a simple completed action ; comp. PI. Hipp. M. 302, a. el neK/xti/cds ri, '/) Terpco- uepos, >i) ireirX'nyjxevos, 3) &XX' otiovv ireirov&QJS eKarepos 7]/j.wv e'fr], ov kcu aixKoi X. An. 5. 7, 26., KaTaXeXoiiroiev X. H. 3. 2, 8., aTroKex u py KOi ib. 5, 23., vTrriperiiKoi ib. 5. 2, 3., ireiroii\Koi Th. 8, 108., es&efiX-riKoiev ib. 2, 48. — The Imp. Perf. docs not often occur in the Act., e. g. yiyuve, Eur. Or. 1220. 14. The Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, append the personal-endings to the tense-stem without a mode-vowel, and hence they cannot form the Subj. and Opt. (with few exceptions, which will be further treated below, § 154, 9), but must also be expressed periphrastically by means of the Participle and eivcu, e. g. Treiraidevfievos do, e1r]v, educatus sim, essem. 15. The third Pers. Ind. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, of pure verbs ends in -vrai, -vto, e. g. fSefiovXewTai, efiefiovXevvTo ; but in mute and liquid verbs, this formation is not possible. Hence the Attic writers usually express this person periphrastically, by means of the Perf. Part, and elffi(v), sunt, %, to arrange, re-Tay-fxcu " rerdxarai ( " rerayvTai) eTera.xo.TO XwplC-ca, to separate, Ke-x&pio-pcu " /ce%wpiSaTat ( " Kex^p^vrai) eKex^ptMro , to finish; itaAeia, to call; and, though seldom, aXeto, to grind; — (b) all verbs in -i£a> (character. $) j — ( c ) a f ew verbs in -0.(00, very generally fiifidfa ; — (d) of verbs in -/xi, all in -dvvv /j.i and also a/xcp ievvi> fit, to clothe (a/jupies, -tels, etc.). A few exceptions to this Fut. are found even in the Attic dialect, e. g. ixdaoo X. Cy. 1. 4, 20., «=Aa- csvtols X. An. 7. 7, 55., reXeaovatv Cy. 8. 6, 3., /caAecets 2. 3, 22., vo/ii KaTacrx^f-^v, ima-ircc, iiriairris (but avafico, airocrTco, SiaSw, 7rapaSw, avafioipev, etc., on account of the contraction, avafidw, ava.pdo0fj.ev, etc.). Still, this rule has the following exceptions: (a) the accent cannot go back beyond the syllable of the preceding word, which before the composition, had the accent, e. g. aw6Sos [air6 the preceding word being accented on the ultimate), ov ; yet the accent is drawn back, when the verb is compounded with a dissyllabic preposition, e. g. airSBov, Kard&ov, dnr^ou; but in the Dual and PI. of the second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all cases drawn back, e. g. e/c/3aAe3-eis (Gen. -evros), rvireis (Gen. -eVros), terras (Gen. -dvTOs), ti&sls (Gen. -eVros), SiSois (Gen. -6vros), deixvvs (Gen. -vvtos), SiacrTas, e/c^ets, irpodovs, Gen. diaardvros, in&evros, irpodSuros. Rem. 2. The first Aor. Act. Part., which is always paroxytone, is an excep- tion, e. g. iraideixras, Gen. ircudevcravTos. (d) In the Sing, of the first and second Aor. Subj. Pass, as circumflex, e. g. Bov\ev&oo, Tptfia) (w being contracted from -ecu). 4. The accent is on the penult in the following forms : — (a) In the Inf. of Perf. Mid. or Pass., of first Aor. Act. and second Aor. Mid. ; also in all infinitives in -vcu, hence in all active infinitives according to the formation in -fit, as well as in the Inf. of first and second Aor. Pass, and of the first and second Perf. Act. of all verbs, e. g. Terixpfrai, PefiovAeva&ai, T€Ti/j.rja^aL, ireQiArjcr&cu, ixeiucrdrGxr&ai; — (pvXa^ai, fiovAevcrcu, TifjL?i3-i£cu, Impf. £w&i£ov = &Si£oj/. When the verb begins with e, the augment e is sometimes contracted with this into et, e. g. e?x 0J/ > instead of ^xov. 121, 121.] VERBS. TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 147 only in the lyric parts of the tragedies, and here not often ; in the dramatic portions it is rarely omitted, and only in the speeches of the messengers (pr)fXlK4]KilV V " v, " wc« " "vfipiCov " "vfipitca " 'vfSpltcuv ai " V> " alp4, ou, and et, do not admit the augment, e. g. ^ttoo^oi, to be overcome, Impf. TjTT^fiijp, Perf. ^Trrj/xat, Plup. 7}TT-{][JLr)v ; 'iir6a, to p*ess, Aor. "lirwcra; 'virv6a>, to lull to sleep, Aor. "t/7n/a>,to wound, Impf. ovia&v ; effcw, to ?/ze/c?, Impf. el/Co*/, Aor. eT|a ; et/cci^w, to fo'&ew, is an exception, which among the Attic writers, though seldom, is augmented, e. g. cha^ou, e?Ka), to ri/s/t, take the augment, e.g. ■fjeiSoi' (prose p&w), iji£a (Att. ?J|a) ; o'wfxai, to believe, cp6fj.r]y, etc. does not belong here, since the o following oi, is not a pai't of the stem. 148 VERBS. REDUPLICATION. [$ 123 2. Some verbs also beginning with oi and followed by a consonant, do not take the augment, e. g. olnovpeo), to guard the house, Aor. oiKovprjo-a] olvi^w, to smell of wine, Impf. oivi^ov ; olv 6oi, to intoxicate, Pcrf. Mid. or Pass. o\voi\>.ivos. and (Zvtojxtvos ; olar pdoo, to make furious, Aor. o'larprjaa. 3. The twelve following verbs, beginning with e, have et instead of 77 for the augment, viz. ido), to permit, Impf. efav, Aor. e 5 /a, to creep, to go ; ear id 00, to entertain ; e^ &>, to ftaye (on the Epic eTjuat, see § 230). 4. The six following verbs take the syllabic, instead of the temporal, augment : — &yvvfxi, to break, Aor. ea|a, etc. (§ 187, I). aXianopiai, capior, Perf. eaAw/ca and ^Aw/co, captus sum (§ 161, 1). h.v Sdvca, to please (Ion. and poet.), Impf. kdvdavov, Perf. e&da, Aor. eadov ('§ 230.) ov pea, mingere, iovpovv, iovprjica. a>3-€0», to push, ico&ow, etc. (sometimes without the augment, e. g. Sico&owTo, Th. 2, 84; i^wa^aav, X. H. 4. 3, 12 ; &Sei, PI. Charm. 155, c). wv 4ofj.au, to buy, Impf. Zoovovpuriv {oovovpn^v, Lys. Purg. Sacril. 108. §4; e£«- j/otWo, Aeschin. c. Ctes. c. 33; avroivCi.ro, Andoc. p. 122.), Aor. koivnad- fxrjv (see however § 179, 6.), Perf. iojv-nfxcu. 5. The verb koprd^oo, to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the second syllable, Impf. kdopra^ov. The same is true of the following forms of the Plup. II.: — EIKfl, second Perf. Zouca, I am like, Plup. icpneiv. eXirofiai, to hope, second Perf. eoXwa, I hope, Plup. iojXTretv. ) „ EPm, to do, second Perf. eopya, Plup. iojpye tv. ) 6. The three following verbs take the temporal and syllabic augment at the same time, the Spiritus Asper of the stem being then transferred to the e of the augment : — dp da), to see, Impf. kdopwv, Perf. eojpcuca, kd>pa.p.ai. avotyco, to open, Impf. avewyov, Aor. aveoj^a (Inf. avol^ai), etc. ahicr Kop.ai, to be taken, Aor. kaXwv (Inf. aXwvcu, a), and 7'iXwv. § 123. Reduplication. 1. R,e duplication (§ 108, 4) is the repeating the first conso- nant of the stem with e. This implies a completed action, and hence is prefixed to the Perf., 1 e. g. Xi-XvKa, to the Fut. Perf., 1 Strictly, wc may say that the first letter of all verbs is repeated in the Perf., whether tbc verb begins with a vowel or a consonant. When the conso* f 123.] VERBS. REDUPLICATION. 149 e. g. Ke-Kocr/^o-o/xai (from Koa-jxiw), and to the Plup., which, as an historical tense, takes also the augment e before the reduplica- tion, e. g. Z-pc-fioAevKuv. This remains in all the modes, as well as in the Inf. and Part. 2. Those verbs only admit the reduplication, whose stem begins with a single consonant or with a mute and liquid ; but verbs beginning with p, yv, yX, fiX,* take only the simple aug- ment, except f3\a7TTOi /3e/3Aa<£a, f3\aa(f>r]jjLeoi) (3€J3\a(rcp\r]fJL7)Ka, and (3\ao-T&v, to fold, (Trpar-nyio), to be a general, Perf. i-0]XcaKa " e-£eVw/ca " e-\pa\Ka 1,1 i-GitapKa. " %-KTUta " e-7TTi»xa i-o~Tpa.Tr}yr)Ka Plup. i-grjXdoieeiv " i-tyd?uceiv " i-ffirdpneiv " 4-KTlK€lV " i-irrvxeiv " i-a-TparriyfiKeiv nant is repeated, e is joined with it in order to vocalize it. If the verb begins with a vowel, the vowel is doubled and the two coalesce, if the initial vowel is short, and thus form a long vowel ; but if the initial vowel is long, it absorbs the other, e. g. dyw, Perf. properly 'daxa — %X a eyeipca, " " 44yepKa = tfyepKa ot/ceco, " " 6oLK7]Ka = (j>K7]Ka. Sometimes when the verb bogins with e, the double e, instead of coalescing into -77, is contracted into -ei, e. g. ida, Perf. tfaica, instead of tfaKtz. 1 "Words beginning with these letters are excepted on account of the dini culty of repeating them. 3* 150 VERBS. ATTIC REDUPLICATION. [$124 Remark 1. The two verbs fx i fi v r) a k co (stem MNA), to remind, and ktolo- wot, to acquire, though their stem begins with two consonants, which are not a mute and a liquid, still take the reduplication, fj.4-fj.u-n/jun, Ke-KTnfxai, i-fj.e-fxvfjiJ.vv, i-Ke-KT-hn-nv. The regular form eKT-n/xai, is Ionic, but it is found also in Aesch. Prom. 79-2, and in Plato with Ke-KT-nfxai; likewise in Th. 2, 62. TrposeKrrjfxeva (as according to the MSS. it must probably be read, though elsewhere, Th always uses Kenrnixai). Perfects f jrmed by Metathesis or Syncope, are seem- ing exceptions to the rules of reduplication, e. g. Sed/x-nica, ireirrafxai, etc. (§§ 22, and 16, 8.) 4. Five verbs beginning with a liquid do not repeat this liquid, but take et for the augment : — Xaixfldvw, to take, Perf. etX-ncpa Plup. eix-f)pvkto, X. An. 7. 8, 14 ; so rjK-rjKoew, but somethnes aKijKoetv. 2. The verbs, which in the Attic dialect have tins reduplica- tion, are the following : — (a) Those whose second stem-syllable is short by nature : — aXeca, -w, to grind, ifiew, -a>, to vomit, [dX-i]XeKa) aX-i]Xecrfxai ifi-rifxeKa efj.--fjfJ.eo' fiat (aX-riXexeiv) aX-riXecr/x-nv efj.--nfxeK.eiv efx-infLea-fx-nv ap6(a, -£>, to plough, ixdu (eXavvu), to drive, (ap-7]poKa) ap-rjpofxai eX-i]XaKa eX-7]Xa/xai (ap-r]p6Keiv) ap-inpofx-nv eX-riXaneiv eX-7)Xa.fxr}v 'OMOfl, bfivvfxt, to swear, 'OAEfl, 6b\vfxi, to destroy, bfi-wfxoKa ofx-wfioafxai bX-d/Xena Perf. II. ftX-wXa ('OAO) lifx-(i}fx6Keiv dfx-wfxSo'fi-nv oXctiXexeiv Plup. II. oX-wXeiv k 125.J AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOUNDS. 151 i\eyX&, to convince, bpvrTw, to dig (eA.-77A.e7xa) iK-T)Keyp.ai op-wpvxa op-wpvy/xat and wpvyfiai (eA-TjAeyx 6 '*') eX-7)\eyfir}y op-wpu%eiv bp-wpvyjx-qv and wpvyp.r\v. Further: e\ljr ('OAH). to smell, o5-o>5a; cpepw ('ENEKCl), to carry, iv--f)yoxa, ev-f]veyfiai ; itrfrlw fEAfl), to eat, e'5-7j5o/ca, eS-rySeo-^a: ; ayai, to lead, Perf. usually r)x a i ^7770x0 (instead of 07-7770x0, so as to soften the pronunciation) is later, and is rejected by the Atticists as not Attic, though in I/ysias 5 but Perf. Mid. or Pass, always ?>y/j.ai. (b) Those which in the second stem-syllable have a vowel long by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduplication (except epetSco) : — a\el jrpo-efiefi\r)Keii/ rrpovfiefSX-tiKtiv crw-epplcpeiv iv-eyeyoveiv (rvv-ecrKevdneu/. (fv\-\4yo), to collect together, crvp-piiTTw, to throw together, iy-yiyvo[icu, to be in, 6/x-j8a\A»> to throw in, cfKoSo/xeov ue-fiv&oA6yr}Ku Thus 7rappr)(TidCo(xai (from Trapp-naria, and this from irav aril prjais), to speak openly, Aor. 4-Trappr}aiaadixr)v, Perf. ire-irapprjo-Laa/xaL. Rem. 2. 'OSo7roiew has the Perf. didoireirot'TicrSfai, X. An. 5. 3, I. Lycurg. c Leocr. § i39, has linroTCTpocp'nKei'. J 126. Remarks. 1. The six following words compounded with prepositions take the augment in both places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and before the preposi- tion : — $126.] VERBS. REMARKS 153 AfjiirexofJUU, to clothe one's self, Impf. 77 J u7retx 1 or o-fiireix- Aor. rjfnrea-x^V^ av4xofJ.at, to endure (not aj/e'x«), " ^veixo^w " -rjueax^W a.fJLp^ooalv-to, to show ; , iakt&v. § 128. Derivation of Tenses. All tenses are formed from the stem of the verb, the inflection-endings men- tioned above (§ 113), being appended to this. The Primary tenses only have a distinct tense-characteristic (§ 110); this is always wanting in the Pres. and Impf, the mode-vowels and personal-endings being sufficient; but the Pres. and Impf. very frequently strengthen or increase the pure stem, e. g. tuttt-o) (pure stem TTn), afxapT-dvco (pure stem 'AMAPT) ; the Secondary tenses never admit such an increase, but are formed from the pure stem, and without the tense-characteristic; yet, in certain cases (§ 140), they admit a change of 6 129 j FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS 155 the stem-vowel. Hence, certain tenses, which are formed from a common stem, may he distinguished from each other and classed hy themselves. Tenses, included in such a class, may he said to be derived from one another. The principal classes are the three following : — I. Tenses, which may strengthen the pure stem. These are the Pies, and Impf. Act., Mid., or Pass., e. g. (pure stem TTn) tvtt-t-w rvir-T-oficu e-TVTr-r-op i-TV7r-T-6(j.r]P. IT. Tenses, which have a tense-characteristic. These are the Primary tenses, e. g. (a) First Perf. and first Plup. Act., e. g. (ir4-AtVuH, etc. 156 TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. [§ 130 c into 77, e. g. ), to love, , to call out, jSotjcto^cu, ifiorjGa (like 078077 ). The two following imitate those in -edw, -Law, -pace, viz. nAoa-w, to strike, to thresh, old Att. Fut. dAos-trw ; but usually h\oi); atcpoa-ofiai, to hear, Fut. aKpodcro/uai, Aor. ^Kpodcrdfirju (like a&poa). Rem. 2. The verbs %pa&>, to give an oracle; x/>aoM ai > to use >' and tit pax to bore, though p precedes, lengthen d into 77, e. g. xp^op-ai, rpr,(ra. $ 130. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs ivith a short Characteristic-vowel. The following pure verbs, contrary to the rule [h 129, 2) re- tain the short characteristic-vowel, either in forming aU the tenses, or in particular tenses. Most of these verbs assume a or in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, and first Aor. Pass., and in the tenses derived from these, and also in the verbal adjectives; such verbs are designated by : Pass, with o-. (a) -ice. Xpice, to sting, Fut. xP" ra, > Aor. expfoa, Inf. xp^ra'- Pass, with (also old Att. dpuTa>), to c?ra?« water. Fut. apvcrw ; Aor. 7^piio-a. Pass, with o\ nyw(O), to close, e. g. ftta eyes, Fut. (jlv, Aor. eixxxra; but Perf. uifxvKa, to hi closed, to be silent. ktvlo (v), to spit, Fut. 7TTi5o-w, Aor. e7TTvo"a. Pass, with c (eVru-o'-iSTjj'), verbal adj. irTv-(T-r6s. 2 Tbe following dissyllables in -vw lengthen the short characteristic-vowel in the Fut and Aor. Act. and Mid. and in Fut. Perf. Mid., and Sva also in the Perf. and Flap. Act.; but they resume the short vcwel in the Perf. and Plup. $ 130.] TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. 157 Act. (except Suo>), Mid. or Pass., in the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and id verbal adjectives : — Si a, to wrap up, Put. Svcrco Aor. edixra Perf. Se'Swa 545vy.ai Aor Pass, idvfrnv & v o>, to sacrifice, " frbaca " e&vaa " tz&vko. T€&vfj.ai " " irvfrnv Avu, to loose, ' ; Xvcrci) " eAvca " AeAi/ca AeAvuoi " " eAu37j^. Rem. 2. The doubtful vowel u is commonly used as long in the Pres. and Inrpf. by the Attic poets ; but in prose it must be considered as short ; hence to be accented fxve, irrve, Ave, etc., and not juGe, irrve, Ave, etc. (c) -aw. Ye Ad a, to laugh, Put yeXatrofiai (seldom yeXacrw) ; Aor. 4y4\dffa. Pass. with or. e A da (usually iAawa), to drive, Fut. iAaau (Att. e'Aw), etc. See § 158, 3. &Aoa>, to bruise, 3-Aa, etc. Pass, with , to grind, to beat, aAe-cr-w, Att., yet seldom aAa ; Aor. ?7Aee'o>, to vomit, Put. e/xeVw, etc.: Perf. Act. e^/ie/ca 5 Perf. Mid. or Pass. i/x^/jLea- fiat (§ 124, 2). ffw, to 6o?7 (usually intrans., and (4vvvfju, usually trans.). Pass, with , to scrape. Pass with o\ — re\4a>, to accomplish. Pass, with , etc.; verbal adj. Tpe-cr-Tos. — x ea, > to P°ur. See § 154, Rem. 1. 2. The following have in some tenses the long, in others the short vowel: — alvito (in Attic prose eiraiveoo), to praise, Put. alu4-o-&yi') ; xp« w ) to 9* ve an oracle ^xpfi-cr-fxai, ixpv-C' bTjv, § 129, Rem. 2) ; XP' W > t° anoint [§ 130, (a)] ; ij/auco, to touch («tycu»-(r- i u.at, Hippocr.). J 131.] VERBS. AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE WITH CT. 15U 3. The following vary between the regular formation and that with a- : — y e v a, to cause to taste, Mid. to taste, to enjoy, Perf. Mid. or Pass, yeyev/xai (Eurip.); but Aor. Pass, probably iyev-ar-frnv. Comp. yev/ia, but yev-a-reoy. dpdu, to do, Fut. opdaw, etc.; Perf. Se'Spd/co; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Se'Spd/xcu and Sedpa-ar-fxai (Th.) ; Aor. Pass. iSpdaSyy (Th.). Verbal adjective Spa-, etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ydyn/xcu (y&rj-tr-fjLai doubt- ful) ; but Aor. Pass. £vi}-(T-Srr\v (Arrian). Verbal adjective vnr6s. vlw (collateral form vf)&o}),to spin, Perf. Mid. or Pass. v4v7]- [§ 130 (c)], alvew, aipea, Sea [§ 130 (d), 2]. apow [§ 130 (e)], x«o [§ 154, Rem. 1], , to excite ($ 230) 160 UNCONTRACTED AND CONTRACT VERBS. [$$ 132-134 Paradigms of Pure Verbs. A. Uncontracted Pure Verbs. $ 132. (a) ivithout o- in the Mid. and Pass. kwXvw, to hinder. ACTIVE. Pres. K(o\v-b) Perf. K€-KC0-\v-Ka Put. Kb}\v-\v-tra MIDDLE. Pres. KooKv-ofiai Perf. K€-K<&\v-fiaL Put. K-(T&e /ce-zceAeu-cfre 3. Ke-Ke\ev-(T-uevoi el in the Indicative and Subjunctive are the same ; contracts in -6co have the same form for the second and third Pers. Sing, in the Indie. Opt. and Subj. viz. -o?s, -c?. 3. The contracted Infinitive of verbs in -dw, which, in our editions of the classics, is more commonly written with an Iota Subscript, is without that letter in the ancient inscriptions, being contracted from -aev, e. g. Ti,uai/, not n/x^u. 4. If only one syllable follows the parenthesis in the paradigm, the termina- tion of the uncontracted form is the last syllable in the parenthesis, and the syllable after the parenthesis is the termination of the contracted form, e. g. rifx(a-(a)ca = Tijxdw, Tt/icD, ri/j.(d-eiy)au = ri/xdeiv, ri/xau) but if more than one syllable follows the parenthesis, the syllable, or syllables, after the last hyphen is the common ending of the contract and uncontracted forms, the uncontracted word embracing all the letters of the form except the vowel after the paren- thesis : the contract, all without the parenthesis 14* 178 PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. [* 13d $135. Paradigms of ACTIVE. m .2 Present. Characteristic o. Characteristic e. Characteristic o. Indica- tive, S. 1. 2. 3. D.l. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3. TLfx(d-u)S), to honor, rifj.(d-eis)§s Tiix{d-ei)3. t ifj.(d-e)a-r ov TLfi(d-e)a-TOU Ti/j.(d-o)w-/j.ev Ti i u(a-e)a-T6 Tiix(d-ov)u-(Ti(v) <$>i\{4-(a)S), to love, )<2 Ti/j.(d-r)s)as Tijx{d-ri)i$ Tl/J.(d-7))a-T0V Tl/J.(d-7j)a-T0V Tl/J.(d-(l})0J-fJ.€V Ti / u(a-77)a-T€ Tifj.{d-w)5s-(ri{v) , CD CD Si g_ 3" J 5 )u>-v ri/x(d-o)w-vros Tiii{a-ov)d>-)v)G>* (xi(T&{6-ov)ov-cra jAicr&(6-ov)ovv Iai(X&{6-o)ov-vtos (jLi(r&( o-ov)ov-i\(e-es)eis iriix(a-e)a etA(e-e)et eTLfj.(d-e)a-roy i\(4-e)e7-TOJ' iriix( a-4)d-T7)V £-imi TLfx{d-r))§ Tijj.{d-€)a-Tai Ti/j.(a-6)d!)-/j.e&oi/ Tifj.(d-e)a--urai Tifx(d-u)u-fjLai rin(d-r))q. Tl/J.(d-T))a-TCU rifj.(a-d!) ) (x>-/xe&oj/ Ti/j.(d-r))a-(r&ov Ti[x(d-y))a-aSov Ti/j.(a-d[>)(i>-/jLe&a Ti/j.(d-r))a-cr&€ TlfJ.(d-Ct))6o-VTCU TJjU(a-ou)< ri/x(a-4)d Tt,}i(d-s)a~ Ti(x(a-4)d- Tiju(a-e)a- tiix(ik(4-o)ov-/xai (pik(4-r))rj $tA(e-e jet-Tat (piA(e-6)ov-fAs&ov iA(e-e)et-o-3w C[)l\(€-6)0V-fA€&a (pi\(4-e)€?-z/ t A ( e-o ) ov-fi4vov /M-(r&oj' IJ.icr&(o--iJ.e&a IxktS{6-w)5>-vtcu fxi(r&(6-ov)ov [u-/j.e^ov eTifi(d-e)a--[j.e&a e(j)i\(e-6)ov-fJi.T}v i(pi\(4-ov)ov e0tA(e-6)et-TO 4(pi\(e-6)ov-H€&oi/ ips£rr)v \ i(pi\T}^r)v i/juoftdbfrr)!/ Verbal adjectives : TifiTi-reos, -Tea, -t4ov, -ixr)}/ Tt/jL-ftaoiAai cpcapdaofxai (piX-fiao/Acu fx.i(T^ci)(rofj.ai iTi/xrj(rdfj.r)v i-fiai iaTr(a-6)(i-firjv effira-a-fiat ia"rrd-cr-fji.r]u aTrdcrofiai ecrira(rd[jL'r)i' Characteristic e. Te?t.€-o)ov-fiai iT£k(e-6)ov-fir]v T€Te'A.e-cr-yuai eT€Te\4-(r-fji.7)P reXov/xai eVeA-ec-a^v Characteristic o. ap(6-o)ov-/j.ai i]p(o-6)ov-fir]v ap-"f]po[iat ap-7ip6fA7]V apSffoficu 7\pocrdfii]V SIVE. | Future. with a monosyllabic stem, e. g. 7rAew, to sail, irv4w, to blow, &4co, to run, etc. are uniformly uncontracted, except in the syllable -« (from -eet or -ee), e. g. Act. Pr. Ind. irX4w, 7rAe?s, 7rAe?, TrX4ofxev, 7rAe?Te, ttX4ovo'i (v), Subj. irX4w % irX4ys, irX4y, irX4wiiev, irX4r]Te, 7rAew) w, to hunger, Inf. Treii/Tjj', etc.; — St^- (a-co)cD, to ^/i/rst, Sii^j/s, etc. Inf. diiprjw. — Kv(a-)G>, to scratcli, Inf. kvt\v ; — o- i u(a-o)(S, to smear, Inf. o-^^; — i|/(a-a>)a>, torwfr, Inf. rf^j/; — xp (<*-°) w-fxai, to use, xPV-> XPWai, XPV^ca j s0 a-rroxp^H-ai, to have enough, aTToxpvcrScu ; — a-jroxpy (abridged from a-n-oxpy), it suffices, Inf. airoxpyv, Impf. air4xpv ; — xp(«- w ) 5 ) fo 9™ e an oracle, to prophesy, XPV S > XPV> XPW- b) -oo and -oe are contracted, as in the Ionic, into -w, instead of into -ov, and -6y into -£, instead of into -o?, e. g. /S t-y () eD, to freeze, Inf. pz7<£j» (Aristoph., but piyovv, X. Cy. 5. 1, 11), Part. G. piywuros (Aristoph., but piyoivTav, X. H. 4. 5, 4), and piyaxra (Simon, de mulier. 26), Subj. piyiZ (PL Gorg. 517, d.), Opt. piy(fV (Hippocr.). Remark 1. The Ionic verb l8p6a>,to sweat, corresponds in respect to con- traction with piy6a>, to freeze, though with an opposite meaning: Idpwcri, ihpcpr\v, ISpwffa, ISpwvTcs. $ 138.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF IMPURE VERBS. 167 4. The following things are to be noted on the use of the Attic forms of the Opt. in -t\v (§ 116, 8), viz. in the Sing., especially in the first and second person, of verbs in -e« and -6w, the form in -olnv is far more in use than the common form, and in verbs in -dca it is used almost exclusively ; but in the Dual and PL the common form is more in use. The third Pers. PL has always the shorter form, except that Aeschin., 2. § 108, Bekk., uses 5oKolnPAA ; and even by inserting an entire syllable, e. g. afiapr-dv-u, stem 'AMAPT ; (b) Or by lengthening the stem-vowel, e. g. Yr; A^-w, stem AA0 ;. T-fiK-ot, stem TAK ; (c) Or secondly there is a change of the stem-vowel in some of the tenses; this change may be called a Variation (§ 16, 6), e. g. k\4ttt-w, i-KXa-rr-qv, Ke-K\o(p-a ; comp. Eng. ring, rang, rung. 2. The original and simple stem is to be distinguished from the strengthened stem ; the first is called the pure stem, the last, the impure. The Pres. and Impf. commonly contain the impure stem ; the Secondary tenses, when such are formed, and specially the second Aor., contain the pure stem ; the remaining t enses may contain either the pure or the impure stem, e. g. Pres. tutt-t-w, to strike, Aor. II. Pass, i-rvir-nu Put. Act. Ttfyco (tv-k-gw) Aei7r-a>, to leave, , to kill, (palv- S e p - a. 168 IMPURE VERBS. STRENGTHENING OF THE STEM. [$ 13 f J 3. When a form of a verb cannot be derived from the Pres. tense in use, another Present is assumed ; this assumed Pres. may be termed the Theme (#e/xa), and is printed in capitals, to distinguish it from the Pres. in actual use ; thus, e. g. <£evyw is the Pres. in use, <£YrO is the assumed Pres., or the Theme, designed merely to form the second Aor., Z-cpvy-ov. \ 139. Strengthening of the Stem. 1. The stem is strengthened, first, by adding another conso- nant to the simple characteristic consonant of the stem, e. g. TU7TTC0 ( tvtt) , to strike, Aor. II. Pass, e - t v -k - 77 v tolttci} (ray), to arrange, " " i-ra.y-r}u Kpdfa (Kpay), to cry, " Act. %-Kpa.y-ov. 2. Yet the strengthened stem is found only in the Pres. and Impf. ; in the other tenses the simple stem appears, e. g. Pres. rvTTTO} Impf. irvmov Aor. II. Pass, irvirrjv Put. Ti>ipa> (Tvir) (paivca 6 " ci in liquid verbs, " ( X et in mute verbs, " (e-Xiir-oj/) Aenr» t " f in mute and liquid verbs, " (i-r ptfi-7)v) rptfia) v v in mute and liquid verbs, " (i-pvy-7)v) (ppvyco v eu in mute verbs, " (e-(pvy-ov) (pevycc. Rem. 2. This strengthening of the stem distinguishes the Impf. Ind. and Opt. from the same modes of the second Aor.; likewise the Pres. Subj. and Impf. from the same modes of the second Aor., e. g. %Kpa£ov ittpayov, Kpd(oi/j.i Kpayoi/xi, Kpd(ca updyw, Kpd£e Kpdye ; — (\enrov zKiirov, Xs'nroifxi \tjroifJU, \etV« Kt-TTO}, A.et7re AtTre. ? 140.] VERBS. CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEI. 169 $ 140. Change or Variation of the Stem-vowel 1. The change or variation of the stem-vowel [$ 138, 1 (c)], occurs only in the Secondary tenses, with the exception of a few first Perfects. 2. Most mute and all liquid verbs, with a monosyllabic stem, and with € as a stem-vowel, take the variable a in the second Aor., e. g. rpeir-w, to turn, Aor. II. Act. i-rpair-ov KAeV-T-oj, to steal, " Pass. i-KXair-Tju Tp4, to nourish. " " i-Tpa, to send, " £->) Ionic and Eur. Or. 1575 (ic\e(p&eis). A4pa, cire'ipoi, and (p&etpcc, have no first Aor. Pass. The variable a does not occur in polysyl- lables, e. g. tfyyeXov, 7jyy4Xr]v, HxpeXou, i]yep6fj.vv. Remark 1. As this variable vowel distinguishes the Impf. from the second Aor. Act., e. g. irpexov (Impf), eTpairou (Aor. II.), in some verbs of this class (2, above), whose second Aor. Act. is not in use, the variable vowel does not occur in the second Aor. Pass., because that tense cannot be mistaken for the Impf, see § 141, Rem., e. g. fixiirw, to see, Impf. e-f3\e-jr-ov, second Aor. Pass. £-f3\4ir- 7]u (first Aor. Pass, is wanting) ; \4ya>, to collect (in compounds), second Aor. Pass. KaTe-\4ynu, avv4\zyr}v (more seldom Aor. I. , TrXnyhcrofjai, Qz-TiXdy-nv, KsxTC-irXay-nv, iK-irXayfj- aoficu) (T777TW, to make rotten, and t^jkco, to melt (trans.), also have the variable a; hence Perf. Pf. e-craA-zca e-crraA-ucu Aor. i-ard\-^r}v (pd-dpa, to destroy. Put. , icpSrdp7jv. The variable a does not occur in polysyllables, e. g. ijyyeXKa, Tjyy4\frnv from b.yy4Wa>, ay7]y€pp.ai, T]y4pfrnv from ayeipcv. Comp. No 1. 4. Mute verbs, which have e in the final stem-syllable of the Pres., take the variable o in the second Perf. ; but those which have ei, take ot; liquid-verbs, which have e or et in this syllable, take o, e. g. d4pK0fj.cu (poet.), to see, Sedoprta d4pw, to flay, Sedopa rp€(po>, to nourish, rerpo; — 'EIAH, video, olda, I know; — 'EIKfl, fot/ca, to be Wee, to appear, Plup. ewKtiv;—* zXirco (poet.), to cause to hope, eo\ira, I hope, Plup. iaXireiv, I hoped ; — 'EPm, to do, eopya, Plup. iwpyeiv: — p-fiy-vv/ju, to break, efipcoya, I am broken (but on o-f]irw. see Bern. 2). 5. The following take the variable o in the first Perf. also, contrary to the rule in Xo. 1. k\4tttw, to steal, first Perf. /ce/cAo^a, but Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ke/cA e^u/Mit (very rare and only poet. KeKKajifuu). \4yw, to collect, first Perf. arweiXoxa, e|eiAoxa; but Perf. Mid. or Pass. owelXeyficu. venirw, to send, first Perf. it 4 it o ft

, to nourish, ' ; " ri^pafiixat, £&p4(pfrni'. On kA67ttc Z-, AA0-w ; or it retains the long vowel or diph- thong of the Pres., e. g. Tr4 Impf. eypacpov A. I. eypatya A. II. Act. want. A. II. P. eypucp-nv (A. I. P. does not occur in classical writers). kXTvu " eKXIuov " %K\lva " " A. II. P. iKXivnv (A. I. P. e/cA/f - - frnv in Aristoph). \pi>XM " Ztyvxov " €\j/v^a ' ; " " £\pvxw, Plat, (epvyqu Aristoph. Nub. 1 52 [with the variation \pvxzi-co, to write ; (b) Impure characteristic : twjtt-cd, to strike (pure char- acteristic it, pure stem TTII) ; pXairr-w, to injure (13, BAAB) ; piirr-co, to hurl (, e PI$). 2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute (k, j, x * J43.] MUTE VERBS. REMARKS ON THE CHARACTERISTIC. 173 pure characteristic ; era or Attic tt [§ 24, 1] impure characteristic), e. g. (a) Pure characteristic : ifkeic-w, to iveave ; ay-co, to lead; revx-a, to prepare; (b) Impure characteristic: fypiaa-u), Att. (pptrr-o), to shudder (pure characteristic k, pure stem $PIK) ; rdae-co, Att. rdrr-co, to arrange (y, TAT) ; (Brjacr-w, Att. ftrJTT-co, to cough (%, BHX). 3. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute (r, 8, ^, pure characteristic ; J [§ 24, 1] impure characteristic), e ' g * (a) Pure characteristic: avvr-co, to complete; a8-co, to sing ; 7ret^-o), to persuade ; (b) Impure characteristic : cj>pd^-co, to say (pure charac- teristic S, pure stem $PAA). § 143. Remarks on the Characteristic. L The following mute verbs in -tttw and -(raw (-tto>) form the Secondary tenses, especially the second Aor. Pass., and have for their characteristic : — 7r: /cA.e7TT-ctf, to steal; kSttt-w, to cut; riirr-a, to strike (second Aor. Passive e-K\air-r)v, etc.). /8: fiXaTTT-a), to injure, and Kpvirr-a, to conceal (second Aor. Pass. i-fiXa^-rjv and £fixd, to change (second Aor. Pass. aXXay-rjuai, first Aor. Pass. a\Aax&wah poetic), /xdaacc, to knead {jxay-rivat), opvaaco, to dig (opvy-rjuai and bpvx^wai), TrXyaaa, to strike (i-irX7)y-T]i/, e£e-'jrAd'y-7ji/), Trpaaaw, Att. TTpaTTw, to do {iri-irpay- a), acpdfa (Attic mostly acpaTTw), to kill (£-a(pay- i\v, rarely, and never in Attic prose, iacpdx&w), rdaaw, to arrange (-rfryefc, Eur., elsewhere erdx^-nv), (ppdaaw, to hedge round (£), to beget, Put. re^o/xai, second Aor. Act. ere/coi', second Perf reroKa. 3. The following verbs in -a aw, -ttw have a Tau-mute, not a Kappa mute, for the pure characteristic: apixSrTw (non-Attic ap/xoCw), to fit, Put. -6aw; — /3A/tt«, to take honey, Put. -law; — fipdaaw (non- Attic /3joa£o>), to shake; — £p4aaw, to row, Put. -4a, to husk, Put. -law ; — and Poet, l/xdaaw, to 15# 174 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. J$ 144 whip. Fut. -d(T, whose pure characteristic is a Tau-mute, commonly 8, there are only a few primitives, e.g. '4 ^o fiat, Poet., Ka&4£ofiat, prose, / seat myself, 7£a>, commonly ko&ICw, to seat; erxt^co, to separate; %e^&>, alvum dejie'ere; yet there are very many derivatives, namely, all in -d(ca and most in -i£w, e. g. i&i£w, elicdfa, etc. 6. Verbs in - (w, whose pure characteristic is a Kappa-mute, commonly y, are mostly Onomatopoetics, i. e. words whose sound corresponds to the sense ; the greater part of these denote a call, or sound, e. g. ald£w, to groan, Eut. edd^ca; aXaXa(w, to shout (avSd^aa^rat, to speak, Aor. wanting in Her.); ypvfa, to grunt; ko'c(w, to squeak, to grunt (like a swine), Fut. k£w, to caio, to croak; fiao-ri^w, to whip; 6?>d£w, to scratch ; olfiw £w, to lament, Fut. olfiw£ofiai ; bXoXv (w, to cry out, to shout ; pva- rd£w, to drag about; ard^w and araXa^w, to trickle; (TTevo^a, to sigh, orT7ipi£<»>, to make firm; ari^w, to mark, to p'ick ; crvpi^w, to whistle (Fut. cvpi^oixai, etc.; avpicw, etc., later, and not Attic) ; o-, and -ifa, e. g. /3i/3ct£ia, ^ u t- fiifi&ffco, fii$G>, -as, -a, -arov, -5>fxev, etc., KOfxlfa, Put. Ko/jucrcD, KOfuv, -ie?s, etc., see § 117. Rem. 3. When \x precedes a Pi-mute, which is the characteristic of the verb, e. g. in irefxir-w, the fx is rejected in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, before endings beginning with fi; thus, irefxir-w, to send, ire-ire fi-jxai (instead of ire-irefxir-fxai, ire- ire fxfj.-fj.ai), ireirefxtyai, ireirefiiTTai, etc., Inf. ireirefx i^eX-fiyy/xai), i£eX-qXey£ai, etc. Both the fx and y are here dropped to prevent the concurrence of three consonants 176 PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. [i 145 Paradigms of Mute Verbs. * 145. A. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Pi-mute (A *■* <£•) (a) Pure Characteristic, j3, -k ,

os' Ind. i-TpIfi-o/xriv Opt. rpI/3-olfji.riv Perf. Ind. S. 1. 2. 3. D 1. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3. (re-TpLfi-jAcu) re-rpi/x-fiai re-rpixpai Te-rpnr-Tcu re-rpifM-fxe^rou Te-Tpicp-frov Te-rpicpSov Te-Tpijx-iAe&a. t e-TpL(p-&6 Te-rpLu-fieuoi elcn(i') or T6-T pi Te-rpi Opt. Tptfi-eiriv Imp. rpifi-ri&i Inf. rpTjS- tjz/cu Part. Tp~ifi-eis Ind. Tp?P-7i-&7)v Put. (k6tT-(TCi)) KOlj/Cti KQ^IOfXai F. I. KO(p-frf}(TOfjl.CU Aor. I. 6-K0\pa i-Kotyd/j.r)v A. II. £-k.6it-7\v Put. Pf. K6-K6\pOfJ.CU P. II. K0TT-7j(r0/JM.l Verbal adjective : kott-tos, -1fJ, -6v, /C07T-T60S, -Tea, -T60J\ Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. icduir-T-ci), to bend down (/ce/ca^-^cu for K4Ka/j.^-/j.ai, § 144, Rem. 3). Ind. S. 1. KeKafifiai Imperative. Infinitive. 2. KCKapipai KeKa/x^/o iceicdfx&ai 3. D. 1. /ce/ca/rn-Tai KeKdn/j.c&Oi' KeKd[A* - V , -ou 3. KeKafjicp&ov K€Kdfj.. Taaraca, Att. tott&>, to arrange. ACTIVE. Pres. Perf. Put. P. Pf. 7rAe/c-tw (ire-ir\€K-a) ire-irAex-a (7rAeK-(T«) 7rAe|o> MIDDLE. irXzK-ojxai (iri-TrKeK-jiai) ire-TrXey-fiai ir\e£o/J.ai ACTIVE. TCMTC-GJ (Te-Tay-a) Te-Ta%-a (rdy-aco) Ta|co MEDDLE. rdffff- ojxai re-Tayfiai rd^o/Liai T6-to|ouoi PASSIVE. Aor. I. Put. I. A. II. F. II. (i-ir\4K-frnu) i-Tr\4x-&W irAex-d^ (TOfxai i-ir\dK-7]v and i-ir\4K-r]v ir\aK-^]crofiat ( i-rdy-hr\v) i-rdx-Srnv Tax-fryo-o/xai i-rdy-rfv Tay-r)o'ctv, i}. £-ypevS-6fxrjp e- Fut. (ipevB-au)) (\p€uS-(TOfj.ai) (evS-T tos) \|/€UCT'-TeOS, -T6 %, -t4ov ; (ppaff-rec )S, -Tea, -t4ov. '49.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 179 Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. Tnd. S. 1. 2. 3. D. 1. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3. eipev(r-(iat e\pev-aai e\pevcr-Tai erpev-o &ov ityevff-jxivoi el(ri(u) Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. i-ipev(r-/j.evos, -7], -ov Subjunctive. tyev-aSaxrav, or etf/ev-crdwj/] Remark. 2c6£«, to save, has in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, a-ea-cc-fiai from trdxa (Attic), and (reVcoo-jUcu, but Aor. iod>&7]u, verbal Adj. (rwcrreos. § 149. Form ati o n or the Tenses of Liquid Verbs. 1. Liquid verbs (§ 127, II. B.) form the Flit Act. and Mid. and the first Aor. Act. and Mid. without the tense- characteristic a (§20, 3) but the Perf. Act. with the tense- characteristic k, e. g. AA), Fut. cr(pah-G), first Aor. e-cr07jA-a, Perf. e-c, dX-\-co, re^i-v-w, /cpiv-co } ajjLvv-eo, tcreiv-w, aiv-(o (stems %$AA, TEM, KPIN(l), 9 AMTN(v), KTEN, $AN) ; but ph-to, vifi-to with a pure stem. 3. Except the Pres. and Impf. the tenses are formed from file pure stem, but the final vowel of the stem is lengthened in the first Aor. Act. and Mid. (see No. 5), e. g. a^dW-ai {%$AA), Fut. aaX-co, second Aor. Pass. e-a(j>d\-7]v, first Perf. Act. €-aaX-Ka, first Aor. Act. e-o-, to point out, rsK[xdp-u> i-TeKfj-Tjp-a (paiu-co, to show, ayyeW-a, to announce, ayye\-S> t iixv-bi, to cut, re/A-a ve/j.-a>, to divide, i/e^-cD KTe'lV-b), tO kill, KTfzV'U> lfieip-a, to desire, l/xep-w III. Class with i in the Future. tLA\-w, to pluck, TiA-w i-rZX-a Kpiv-o3, to separate, KpXv-w %-K.plv-a. IV. Class with v in the Future. ado-a, to draw, avp-co e-avp-a a/xvy-o}, to defend, a/xv v-u> tfjxvv-a. Rem. 2. The following verbs in -cuvw of the first class take u in the Aor. instead of 77, namely, laxvcdvca, to make emaciated (laxvo-va, icrxvauai) ; Kepdaivw, to (jain (itcepMva, KepSavai) ; KoiXaivw, to hollow out (inoiAava, KOiXavai) ; Xevxaivui. to whiten; hpydivw, to enrage; ireiraivca, to ripen; also all verbs in -paivw, e.g. ■rrepaipw, Fut. irepavw, Aor. eirepava, Inf. irepavai (except TeTpcuVw, to bore, irerprir va, rerprivai), and all in -icdvta, e. g. iriatvw, to make fat, iiriava, inavcu (except uiaivco, to stain, fiirjuai, rarely fjuavai). — The verbs , ehdp-nv, (p&ei- pco, areXXu, (paivw, fiaivca, kXivw, etc. § 150. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs. ayyeAAaj, to announce. ACTIVE. Pres. ayyeXXu Perf. I. tfyyeX-na Perf. II. e- Opt. ayyeXoifxi or ayyeXoirjv 2. ayyeX-eis ayy eXo?s " ayyeXoi-ns 3. ayyeX-e? ayyeXo? " ayyeXoir) 1). 2. ayyeX-etrov ayyeXcnrov '' ayyeXoir)rou 3. ayyeX-etrov ayyeXolr-nv " ayy eXoi4}Tnv P. 1. ayyeX-ovfxe > ayyeXoifiev " ayyeXolrjfieu 2. ayyeK-elre ayyeXolre " ayyeXoirjTe 3. ayyeX-ovcri{ ') ayy eXoiev " ayy eXoiev I J f. a->"\eXe?v Part, ayyehwu, -ovaa, -ovv Aor. I. tfyyeiX-a, ayyeiXw, ayyeiXaifu, dyyeiXou, ayye?Xai, ayyeiXas Aor. II Illd. ijyyeX-ov Sul ']. ayy eXco Opt. ayyeXoipn Imp. ayyeXe (rare) Inf. ay7eAeiz/ Part. a.yye\a>v, -ovcra, -6u. * 151.] PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 183 MIDDLE. Pcrf. Ind. S. 1. ^lyyeK-jxai Imperative. Infinitive. 2. ijyyeX-(rai tfyyeX-cro yyy4h-&ai 3. tfyyeX-rai j]yy4\-&(i) Participle. D. 1. i)yy€\-fu.&ov ^yyeA-ueVos o. tfyyeX-frov ¥iyye\-&ov Subjunctive 3. ijyye\-&ov T]yy4\-&u>i/ ^yyeX-fxevos £> P. 1. i]yy4\-fj.e^a 2. ^yyeA-fre tfyye\-&e 3. r]yy€\-fi4voi elffi(v) riyyet&axrav, or r/yyeA-frwi/] Plup. Ind. TjyyeA -fj-Wi ■< ro » " T0 5 -peSoy, -&ov, -&r)v, -iJ.€&a, -fre, riyye\jn4voi iicrav Eut. Ind. S. 1. ayyeX-ovfiai Opt. ayye\-oijxriv \ Infinitive. 2. ayyeX-rj, or -el ayye\-o7o yye\-e7[xcu Opt. ayye\-oi(j.riv Imp. (rare) ctyyeA-oD Inf. ayyeK-e %-W.v-d l ur)v 2 1 I shall appear, awocp., I shall affirm. 2 Prose airefy., it was affirmed by vie. PASSIVE. Aor. I. i-d\-frr)v (poet.) £-(pdi/-&7]v, I appeared, Fut. I. nea . Verbal adjective : ar(pa\-7eos, -rea, -reV, (pav-reos. 184 PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. [M 152,153 Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of (paiv-co, to show ; £-r)palp-w, to dry, and reip-w (§ 149, Rem. 3), to stretch. Ind. S. 1. 2. 3. D.l. 2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3. ir4- i-£ripp r4-ra-a^e Te-rd-(T&a(rap, or re-rd-a&wp Inf. Tre-(pdv-&ai i-^r)pdv-^ai Te-rd-a&ai Part. ire-(pa, to draw ; fxoXvp-u, to defile. Pres. r'iXX-00 atp-a (JLOXvP-h) Perf riXX-Ofxcu r4-riX-Ka avp-o/xai o-4-ffvp-K.a fxoXvp-o/xai (/xt-fx6Xvy-Ka) Fut. Aor. I. A. I. P. F. I. P. Aor r4-riX-p.ai riX-S} rXX-ovjxai e-rtX-a i-rlX-dfxrjp i-riX-&T)P riX-drtcrofxai . II. and Fut. II. P. ffe-o~vp-/xcu aijp-cc cvp-ovfxai %-evp-a i-avp-d/jrip i-crvp-^rjp o-vp-&r]o-ofxai s-o~iJp-7)p, o~vp-r;o~oixai fj.e-/x6Xvo'-/xai /xoXiip-u fxoXvp-ovjxai 4-jxoXvp-a i-ixoXvp-d/xyp £-jxoXvp-$rr)p fxoXvp-^Tjao/xai Verbal Adj. riX-r6s, riX-r4os, crvp-ros, cvp-r4os, /xoXvp-r6s, /xoXvp-r4os. Remark 1. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or P ass. of r4-nX-/xai, o-4-ffvp- fxai, is like jjyyeX-fxcu, and that of /xe-/x6Xvo--ixai like 71 ■4-, to shame), like i-£r)paix-fxcu. $ 154. PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. 185 (P) KXiu-Wy to bend down; irXvv-a, to wash, with v dropped (§ 149, 7). ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. Pres. Perf. Fut. Aor. I. KXiv-ca Ke-KX?-ica kX"iv-o!> e-nXlv-a KXTv-0/j.ai Ke-KXl-ficu KXiv-ovfAai i-KXlv-dfi7]i/ irXhv-u) iri-nXv-Ka irXvv-5) Z-irXiiv-a. TrXvv-oficu ire-TrXv-fxcu irXvv-oviJ.ai i-irXvv-dfj.r}v PASSIVE. Aor. I. Aor. II. i-KXi-&T]v Put. I. nXi-^a-o/xai i-KXiv-7)v Put. II. KXtu-yjaofxai £-irXvSriv TrXv-^7}, to yfou;, Fut. pevo-ofuu; Aor. eppevara; both forms extremely rare in the Attic, which uses instead of them pvrjo-ofxai, ippv-nv (§ 192, 7), and so also the Perf. ippvrjKa. Remake 1. The verb x^ (x e '^ w > X 6 ^ w )> to P our out i differs from the pre- ceding verbs: Put. %ew; Put. Mid. xeo/^at (see No. 4); Aor. ex €a > Subj. x«"> Inf. x e ' a '» Imp. x* 0,/ > X € " Ta, » etc 5 Aor. Mid. ix^d/xrjv (see No. 7); Perf. Act. Ke'xS/ca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Kexfy"" 5 Aor. Pass, exfohjj/; Put. Perf. x v ^I^o/j.m (§ 223, E. 2). The forms with eu belong only to the Epic; Put. x e ^5 ^ or - exewa. 3. The circumflexed Fut. in -ovjxat which properly belongs tc liquid verbs only, is used by the Doric writers with other verbs also, whose Future would regularly be in -o-co or -aojxai, e. g. rvij/w, -ets, -et, -ovjxev, -cire, -ovvrai ; TV^j/ovfiat, etc. ; this is called the Doric Fut. and is in common use in the following verbs, yet only in the Middle form, with the signification of the Fut. A.ct. : — (pevy-ca, to flee, Put. , Epic, usually eVd-ieo, to eat, Put. eS-o/iat; iriv-w (HID.), to drink, Put. it'v opal ; x e ' w > io P our out i ^ u t- X^* X e '*> X e *> etc - j Fut. Mid. x 6 ' /* " ( see Eem. 1 ), 5. Also two mute verbs take the Future form of liquid verbs in -ovfxai without o- : — fxdx-ofJ.cu, toflght, Put. f^ax-ovfj-ai (formed from the Ion. /xax-4(roixai). e^o/iai ('EAfl), to sit, Put. (ed-ov/xat) K *X ea ( see Rem. 1). Rem. 2. In the second Aor. sirea-ov, from IIET-w (ir'nrr-a), to fall, the a is not the tense-characteristic, but belongs to the stem, the r having here been changed into /j.o.i, -rj, -r\T. TriirToo, to fall, instead of -ki-tz4to}, stem nETfl. mirpd, to leap, Aor. %&opoy. KoAe'co, to call (Poet. KtKA-fjcr km, like Svr,, TMrpedvKO)), from irep&w (hence Put M 157, 15 R ' VERBS IN -co WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 189 irepaa-w) : Perf. 7r e ir p d k o, ir e tt p dfu. ; Aor. Pass, i-n-pd^ajy; Fut. Perf. we7r f /acro/.ta£. aropi-uvvjxi, to strcu, ; secondary form, gt pwvvi) pi (instead of crrpeouyv/xi) ; Put. arpd a- « ; Aor. Icrpoxra; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ea-rpcouai: Aor. Pass. £ &tjv. ireXafa, appropinquo, to bring to, ireXd&a), irAa&a; Aor. Pass. iireXaar&riv ; Poet. Att. e'7rAd3-77v; second Aor. Att. iirXafi-np; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Att. 7re7rAdjUo:. (b) The same holds also in the stem of the verb Sparra), to disturb (formed from rapdrru, rpadrrw), an Attic form of rapderffa)] Aor. t&pai;a. $ 157. Verbs in -co zy^A Z/^e Stem of the Present strengthened. 1. It has already been seen ($$ 138-140), that the stem of many verbs is strengthened in the Present ; but this strength- ening remains only in the Present and Imperfect. Besides the modes of strengthening already mentioned, by r (ttt, kt), (Kareouu)) has in the Pres., in the Fut oucrw and first Aor. Act. e'Svo-a, a transitive signification, to ivrap up, to immerse, 190 VERBS IN -w WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [\ 158 to sink; (so also Perf. in X. An. 5. 8, 23, airoMtivKtv ;) Aor Pass. iSv&rjv; Fut. Pass. 8v&q, -as, etc. poetic, yet also in X. Cy. 8. 3, 32. oureXa, Imp.) ; Fut. iXacrw (in later writers, though also X. An. 7. 7, 55. eAdWras), commonly Att. cAw, -as, a, Inf. iXSv ($ 117); Aor. rjXao-a; Pe:f. iXrjXaKa; Mid. to drive from me, Aor. rjXaadfjiTjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eA^Ad/xai ; Inf. eA.77- Xao-^at [$ 124, 2 (a)] ; Aor. Pass. rjXaSiqv [a in the tense-forma- tion, § 130 (c) ; without o-, § 131, 5]. — Verbal adjectives, cAoro's, iXarios (X. Hipparch. 2, 7). 4. &wa and &i5&> (poet.), to rage, Fut. &v(rw, etc.; second Aor. Part, frufxevos (fit), raging. 5. ttlvo), to drink, Fut. 7rfo/xat (§ 154, 4), among the later writers inov^ai, but also, in X. Symp. 4, 7. 7n.eia-#e ; second Aor. ariov, Inf. 7rteti/, Part. 7tiojv, Imp. 7ri^t ($ 191), poet., and seldom prose 7rU; HO- Perf. iriir^Ka ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7re7ro/tat; Aor. Pass, ctto'^v, Fut. Pass. Tro^o-opxi f$$ 130 (c), and 131, 5]. Verbal adjectives, 7totos, 7tot£os. C. rcat, Aor. Pass. iTiaSrjv ($ 131). Mid. jtvofj.at, to get pay from, to avenge, to punish, Ticro/tai, ei-Io-a- yu.?7i/. Verbal Adj. ncrrkov. In the Pres. and Impf. the penult is long in Epic, short in Attic ; in the other tenses, it is long in all the poets. Tico, to honor, riacc, erlcra, rcTi/xai, Poet. 7. cjiSava), to anticipate, Fut. (f>3r](TOfxcu, more rarely Jao-a>, e g. X. Cy. 5. 4, 38. 7. 1, 19; first. Aor. €<£#do-a, and (in prose more seldom) second Aor. ify&rp (/ju, § 191) ; Perf. e^aKa. In Pres and Impf. d in Epic, d in Attic. 8. (p&tuw (poet., rarely prose and only in the Pres., e. g. PI. Phaedr. 246, c. Symp 211, a.), to perish (seldom to consume), Fut. Fut. Pass. S^X"^ 7 ? " ^ 011 - 10. KajAvai, to labor, to be iveary, Aor. e/i£ofxai.; Aor. acfilKoixrp/, d<£tK£cr$ai ; Perf. dc/u/y/xai, dt)($ai ; Plup. diyfjLy]v, dcjfriKTO. Verb. Adj. uctos. 3. Kvv-4o), to kiss, Fut. kvo-w: Aor. eVvo-a [$ 130 (b)]. But 7rpos- Kvveo), to worship, Fut. TrposKvvrjcra) ; Aor. TrpostKvvrjo-a (also poetic 7rooseKi5cra, Inf. 7rposKvaat). 4 . vin(Tx~ v *- l xai (y7TL(rx-ofjLaL Ion.), strengthened form of v-n-exofxai, propeily, to hold one's self under, to promise, Aor. v-rrecrx'Oixrjv, Imp. vir6(rxov ; but Fut. VTrocrxfjcropLaL ; Perf. VTriax^^OLL. So, afXTriaxyoV' (xai or d/x7re)(o/xat, to clothe (from d/x7re)(w, to surround), Impf. d/x7ret- Xov, Fut. d/x<£e£co, Aor. r)inn.o~x ov > d/>wrKr)(6U', Fut. d/x^e^o/xat ; Aor. i)fA,7riorx°/ J 'l v &nd fji*Tre(TXQI x W 126, 1). 192 VERBS WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 1G0. $ 1G0. III. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and Imp/, by inserting the syllable av, more rarely aiv, be/ore the ending. a. a.v or aiv is inserted without any change. Preliminary Remark. All verbs of this kind form their tenses from a tnreefold stem, viz. the Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the second Aor. from the pure stem, the Fut. and Perf. from a third stem, consisting of a pure stem and an assumed e, which is changed in the inflection into 7? ; hence the Fut. and Perf. are formed like the same tenses of verbs in -£a>. — The a in the ending -dvco is also short in Epic (except in the three verbs, Ikovu, uu), to perceive, Aor. rjcrS-oiArjv, aio-$e), to increase, Fut. co^o-to; Aor. -qv&jcra; Perf. rpj^yjKo. ; Mid. and Pass, to thrive, Perf. ^v^fxai ; Fut. avfrfj- crofxai and av£r]d~q(rop.ai ; Aor. ypj^rj^rjv. 5. (Skacrravoj, to sprout, Aor. efiXaarGV (later IfiXdcrrrjcra) ; Fut, j3\.ao-~7](T(D ; Perf. ifiXdaTTjKa and fief3XdcrTr)Ka ($ 123, 2). G. SapS-avo), commonly in composition, KaraS., to sleep, Aor. KareSapS-ov ( KaTaSapSevra, Aristoph. Plut. 300) ; Fut. KaraSap^ao- fxai\ Perf. KaraSeSap^Ka. 7. i£avco and KaS^t^dvo), secondary form of t£w, ko&'&d. See $ 166, 16. 8. KXayydvoi, used of dogs, a secondary form of /o\.a£co, to cr?/ 0WZ, Fut. K\dy£a) (KeKXay^o/xat, Aristoph. Vesp. 930) ; Aor. eK\ay£a, acKayov, Eur. Ipli. T. 1062 ; Perf. KtKXayya (old form KeKXrjya). 9. cl&dvo), clSacvw (also olSdo), otSeo>), to si#e//, Fut. oiS^o-to ; Perf. todrjKa. 10. oA.to-^avw (oAto-^atVco used by later writers), to s/zp, Aor. wAio-#ov ; Fut. oAto-J^cra; ; Perf. wXCo-SirjKa (first Aor. wXio-Srjo-a later). $ 160.] VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 193 1 1. 6crpatvo/xat, to smell, Aor. oicrcf>p6p,rjv ; Fut. 6cr, to touch, Aor. ZSriyov; Fut. Stgofiai. 15. Xayxavco, to obtain by lot, Aor. oVa^ov; Fut. X^ojuat; Perf. etXrjxd (rarely AcA.oyx a from AErX-, comp. 7re7rov#a, 7raS-eLV, Trkv- Sos) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. dXrr/pai ($ 123, 4) ; Aor. Pass. iXrjx^v v - Verbal Adj. XrjKTtos. 16. Xaixfiava), to take, Aor. eXafiov, Imp. Xdfie and Attic Xafie [$ 118, 3 (a)] ; Fut. X^op-at; Perf. elXr}a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. tiXypLpuLi ($ 123, 4), (XiXrjpLOLL Aesch. Ag. 876) ; Aor. Mid. iXafiofx-qv ; Aor. Pass. iXr)€v£ofxa.i and -^ovfiai (§ 154, 3); Aor. evyov; Perf. 7T€&evya. Verb. Adj favKTos, -rios. 23. ^ai/Savco, fo hold, contain (spoken of vessels), Aor. e^aSov ; Perf. with a Pres. signification /ce^avSa; Fut. ^eio-o^ai (stem XENA-, comp. €7ra$ov, Tretcro/xat) . $ 161. IV. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the Pres. and Imp/, by annexing the two conso- nants, ), to spend, to consume, Impf. avrjXca-Kov (avdXow without Aug.) ; Fut. dvaAu>o-a> ; Aor. avyXuxra and ava- * 161.] VERBS IN -CO WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 195 \cocra, Karr/vaXtocra ; Perf. di/^XtoKa and draAtoKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. dv^ko)fxaL and avdXwjxat ; Aor. ava\ are used). 7. ycywv'HTKa (mostly Poet.), to call, to make known, Put. yeywvf}o, -<3ro ($ 154, 8) ; Fut. Perf. fxepLv^cro/xat, I shall be mindful (among the Tragedians also, I will mention) ; Aor. ZpLvrjorSrjv, I remembered (ifxvrjo-dfjLrjv Poet); Flit. fJLvr)cr$r)croiAai, I shall remember {o.tto^viq- o-ofjiai, Th. 1, 137). 18. Trdoyu* (formed from 7rd$, by transferring the aspiration of $ to k), to experience a sensation, to suffer, Aor. en-dSov , (IIEN0-) Fut. ireta-ofiai ; Perf. 7rc7rov£a. Verbal Adj. irafhfrm. 1 9. ttlttlo-ko), to give to drink, Fut. 7rto-to ; Aor. enicra. 20. Trnrpdo-Kio, to sell, rare in Pres. Act. (Fut. and Aor. in the Common language expressed by dTroSdjo-o/xat, d7re86p,r)v) ; Perf 7rc7rpa/ca ($ 156, Rem.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Trk-Kpa.p.o.1 (Inf. ircTrpaa- Scll, often instead of the Aor. ) ; Aor. £7rpd$-qv ; Fut. Perf. Trexpd- aopLCLL in the sense of the simple Fut. TrpaSrjo-ofjLai, which is rare and not Attic. Verbal Adj. Trparos, irparios. 21. c-TeptaKUi (seldom crrepew, dfrocrripovvra^, Isoc. 12, 243, according to the Ms. Urb.), to deprive of Fut. o-Teprjano ; Aor. ((rripyaa ; Perf. io-ripyjKa ; Mid. and Pass. o-TepLaKojxac, aTepov/xcu, privor; but crrepo/tat, lam deprived, Fat. a-Teprjcro/xai, rarer orep^- SrjaofJLai (tt7roo-repcto-^€, Andoc. My st. 149); Perf. io-reprjixai; Aor. Zo-TeprjSrjv. The simple occurs most frequently in the middle form ; in the Act., the compound dTroo-repto-Kw is more frequent §§ 162, 163.] verbs in -a> with strengthened stem. 197 22. rtrpcoo-Ka), to wound, Fut. rpwcro) ; Aor. erpwaa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, rerpoifjiai, Inf. TerpucrSai, Part. Tcrpoyiei/o? ; Aor. irp^S~r]V \ Flit. TpacrKov; Fut. ^cro; Aor. cetera. — (Pass. icpdarKCTO, S. Ph. 114). 24. x^o-ko), to gape (XAN-, among the later writers x^™), Aor. egavoy ; Fut. xavovficu ; Perf. icexrp/a, to stand open. Remark. In 5i8a ; Aor. iU- 5a|a; Perf. SediSaxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 5e8idayp.ai ; Aor. Pass. iStSdx^vv. Verb. Adj. 5t8a/cT, a\v, Aa. Several verbs, particularly in poetry, have secondary forms in -dw, e. g. (stem 'AAK) ; afjLvvo), to ward off, afivj/d&eiv, Impf. T)/xvua^ov ; — 8icS/c&>, to pursue, Stw/cci^etv, Impf. i8u&Ko&ov, also prose ; — eftcw, to yie/d, Impf. eif/ca&oj/, elicd&otp.i ; — efyryw, to s&itf wp, Impf. and Aor. etpyc&ov; — ex&j, to fatye, , -as, -a (still also Pipdo-wy X. An. 4, 8, 8. 5. 2, 10). Verbal Adj. pipcurrios. 2. yiyvopai (ytvopiai) instead of ytyevopLai ($ 155, 2), to become, to be, (TEN-) Aor. Iyc.v6p.rjv (late Attic iyevrjSrjv) ; Fut. yeyrjcropLou. (PL Parm. 141, e. yev^o-erat, fiet, and moreover yevc^rjo-crat, efficie- tur); Perf. yeyevrjp.a.1, I have become, f actus sum, exstiti, and yeyova with a present signification, lam, implying lam by birth; iyevo- urjv and yeyova are also used as preterites of tlpcc, to be. 3. 7TL7TTOJ (instead of 7rwrera), $ 155, 2), to fall, Imp. Triirrz', (HET-) Fut. 7T€o-oD/Aat ($ 154, 3) ; Aor. hrto-ov (very seldom first 17 # 19R VERBS IN -W WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [§$ 164, 163 Aor. e7rcs, ttctttiotos, Poet $ 194, 5). 4. TLTpdo), to bore, Fut. t/d^o-co; Aor. 'drprjaa. More usual the secondary form rerpaivw, Fut. rcrpuvw; Aor. ererp^va ($ 149, Rem. 2) ; Perf. TerprjKa, rerp^cu. Verbal Adj. rprjros. Several verbs of class IV (§ 161) belong here, as yiyvdtxnco), and several verbs in -/xi, as didw/AL. $ 164. VII. Fer&s, ivhose Pu e Stem-vowel a is strengthened in the Pres. and Impf. by i. Here belong the dialectic verbs, mostly Epic and poetic : ayaiofxcu, to be in- dignant; Scuco, to divide and burn ; uaio/j.ai, to rage; valeo, to dwell. See § 230. § 165. VIII. Verbs, whose Pure Stem assumes e in the Pres. and Impf. 1. yapLeu), to marry (of the man), Perf. yeya/x^/ca; but Fut. yafxu>; Aor. eyrjixa, yrj/xai (eya/x^o-a first in Menander, then in Lucian. ; yafirjaeias with the better reading ya/x^o-eias in X. Cy. 8. 4, 20). Mid. yap.ov^ai (with the Dat), to marry (of the woman, nubo), Fut. yapLovficu ; Aor. iyr)p.dpLT)v ; Perf. ytydp-ypLCU. Pass, hi matrimonium ducor, Aor. iyafirjSrjv, etc. [§ 130 (d), 2]. 2. yqSeoi, Poet., usually Perf. yiyrjSa (also prose), to rejoice, Fut. yy]$i)(rtj>. 3. Sokgco, fo seem, videor, to think, Fut. So'lw (SoK-^ao) poet.) ; Aor. e8o|a (iSoK-qo-a Poet.) ; Aor. Pass. KaraSox^cts, Antiph. 2. 116, 2; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Se8oyp,ou (SeSofo^cu, Ionic and Eurip.), visus sum. 4. KTvirib) (Poet.), to resound, Fut. -fjarw, etc. : second Aor. e/cnnroy (Epic and S. 0. C. 1450) ; first Aor. e'/cr^o-a (ib. 1606). 5. p.apTvp£a), to hear witness, Fut. p-aprvp-^ao), etc. But pLaprvpo- fjicu, Dep. Mid. fo ca# as witnesses. 6. £vpeu), to shear, to shave, Mid. £upo//.ai; Aor. k^vpdpvqv, but Perf. i£vp7]p:ai. 7. a)#€a), to ^>ws/£, Impf. €a>$ow; Fut. wcrw and a^o-oo; Aor. ccoo-a, wo-at ; Perf. tWa late, Plut. ; Fut. Mid. wo-c^at ; Aor. eooo-a- p.rjv; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ccooyxai; Aor. Pass, zwo-S-qv, Fut. Pass. ui WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 19 l J $ 166. Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and Imp/., but which assume an e in forming the tenses. This change has taken place in the formation of verbs in -ecu, partly from necessity, as is the case with verbs whose characteristic is |, ^ ; partly for the sake of perspicuity, that the root may not wholly disappear by the introduction of consonants, as in verbs whose characteristic is *"> k> X-> a ? al > € j 0i - The e is changed into 77 in inflection. Exceptions : jLido/j.a.1, &x&o[Aai, and /iaxo^cu [§ 130 (d)]. 1. cuSojxat, to feel shame, to fear (Pres. and Impf. old poetic, in the Common language alSeofiai), Impf. ald6/j.7}v without Aug.; Fut. alSetfo/jiai and --fjo-o/xai (iircude(r&7), eiAAto, i'AAo), also eiAeco, to press, to shut up, Flit. eiA^crw, Perf. Mid. or Pass. et'A^at; Aor. Pass. elXrjSrjv. 10. cAko), to diraw, Fut. e'A^w (which is preferred to the othei form cAkuo-w from 'EAKYO) ; Aor. eiA/oxra ($ 122, 3), cAkixtcu (more common than e!A£a) ; Perf. ciA/oka; Mid. to draiv to one's self, iXKvaofxac, dXKvo-dpaqv ; Aor. Pass., Fut. Pass., and Perf. Mid 01' Pass, only d\KvcrSr]v, £\KV and tr^cro) ; Perf. £(r^>y/ca; Aor. Mid. ecr^o/x^i/, Subj. (r^aj/>tat, Opt. cr^ot- p/^v, Imp. or^ou, -irapaoypv, Inf. crx^oSm, Trapacr^ecr^atj Part, cr^op:evos ; Fut. egopicu and o-^crop,ai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ecr^/iou ; Aor. Pass. i&, Fut. iij/rjo-oi (Flit. Mid. ixf^aofiai, Plat. Rp. 372, c.) ; Aor. yjij/rjo-a; Aor. Pass, rjxj/^rfv; Perf. Mid. or Pass, rji/^/xai. Verbal Adj. ecpSos, or e\f/r)TO), Fut. /xeX^o-ei; Aor. lfxiXyfo-e(y) ; Perf. fx€fiiXyfKi{v) ; Mid. fxiXofiai, commonly hnfxkXofLaL (and i-n-cfXiXovfxai, but Inf. probably iTrifxiXeo-Sai) ; Fut. €7nfxeXrfo-ofxaL (sometimes ZTnfAtXrfSrfo-ofxai) ; Perf. i7rifJL€fj.iXr}fxaL ; Aor. €ir€fxzXri$rfv. Verbal Adj. iTrifJLeXrfTeov. The compounds, e. g. /xeTa,u.4\€i, poenitet, are used as impersonals only ; sel- dom /j.eTa/x4\o(xai, to repent (Thuc), Aor. jueTe^ieA^Tji/ (late) ; fxeixr]\ ; Aor. contra (Perf. oSwSa with the meaning of the Pres. in Homer and the later writers, § 124, 2). 24. oiofxai and oTfxai,to think, second Pers. ol'et ($ 116, 11); Impf. (pofirfv and ^fxrjv ; Fut. olrj&opLai ; Aor. iprjSrfv, olr]$f)vai ; Perf. wanting. (Aug., $ 122, 1.) Verbal Adj. ofyreos. The abbreviated forms, ol/xat, yfi-nv, are used in prose as a mere paren- thetic expression, like the Lat. credo, and hence are often employed in an ironical sense; oiofxai, on the contrary, has such a sense, only when it is a governing verb ; still, this difference of usage is not fully observed even by the best Attic writers. 25. otxo/jtat, I am gone, have gone (with sense of Perf), abii, Impf. <*x°M v (sense of Aor., also Plup.), I went away, had gone , Fut. olxrjo-ofxai ; Perf. $xW aL > commonly as a compound, e. g 7rap(axr)fJLai, X. An. 2. 4, 1. in the best MSS., Ion. and Att. Poet 202 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 166 oJ^coKa (so originate, ot^a, oiK-ar^a, oi^-wKa, comp. the Epic oKcu^q from e X oi, § 230). 26. dfaikio, to oive, debeo, I ought, must, Put. ofaihqo-oi ; Aor. bifaCk-qaa ; Perf. w^eiX-^Ka ; second Aor. w^>eA.ov, -es, -e(v) (first and second Pers. PL not used), in forms expressing a wish, utinam. 27. 7rato), to strike, Put. 7raurco (Att. secondary form ttcu^cw in Aristoph.); Aor. en-aura; Perf. TriiraiKa (the simple late); Aor. Mid. €7rato-a^v; Pass, with o- ($ 131, 2) ; yet instead of 7re7raur- aat and eVaicr-S^v, iirXT^yrjv and 7ri7r\rryfj.m were commonly used Verbal Adj. muoreos. 28. TripSoi, usually 7r€o8o/x,ai, emitter e flatum, Aor. hrap&ov ; Fut. 7rapSrjcroixaL ; Perf. 7re7roo6a ($ 140, 4). 29. TrtTojAcu, to fly, Fut. (irerridoixat, Aristoph.) commonly tttt;- a-opai; Aor. commonly in prose and in the Comic writers, e7rro- /xryv, TTTcarSai (rarer iTrra.prqv ; errTrjv, tttw, 7TTai.y}V, Trrrjvac, 7rras, poet, and in the later writers ($ 192, 2) ; Perf. ^en-or^ai (Aristoph.). — Syncope ($ 155, 1). 30. o-KeAAw (or ), to dry, Aor. la-Kk-qv (§ 192, 4), and Perf. €(TK\r)Ka, and Fut. o-K\rjcrop.ai } intrans. fo c&"2/ up, to ivither. — Met- athesis, § 156, 2. 31. TV7TTO), to strike, Fut. Attic Twrnjon> (rvxf/a), Homer); (Aor. I. irvTrnja-a late; ervi^a, Horn. ; Aor. II. hmroVj Eur. Ion. 779; for the Aor. of this word, the Attics use en-dYa^a, en-aura ;) (Perf. T€TV7rrr)Ka, Pollux) ; Fut. Mid. rvn-Trja-ofjiaL, Aristoph. Nub. 1382. Pass, blows will be inflicted; Perf. reru/x/xai, Aesch. (rervirT'qp.ai. late); Aor. Pass. irv7rr]v {IrvTrrri^riv late). Verbal Adj. Tircrr^Teos. 32. -^atpo), to rejoice, Fut. x aL PV (T0> (x a PV (TO f JiaL late) ; Aor. c^apiyv (/At, $ 192, 8); Perf. Kexo-pV Ka (Aristoph. and Herod.), I have rejoiced, and K^ap^ai (poet.), lam glad. Verbal Adj. ^a/mfc. Remark 1. Of the preceding classes, there belong here verbs in -dva> (§ 160), and {nrurxvtonai, of those in § 159. Rem. 2. With these verbs several liquid verbs are classed (§ 149, 6) ; still, t ley form the Put. and the Aor. regularly, e. g. fieua, to remain, Put. /iei/w; Aor. e/iewa; Perf. fie/xzvriKa. Verbal Adj. fisverSs, fievereos. pffiw, to divide, Put. vefioi] Aor. euetfia; Perf. v€v4fn]Ka; Aor. Pass. ev€« nil&7)v. — Mid. vdfiofxai, Put. vefiovfiai ; Aor. iveifidfnjv ; Perf. Mid. of Pass, j/ e ye/x 77/x, at. Verbal A.dj. vefiTjreos. fr 167.] VERBS WITH TENSES FROM i IFFERENT ROOTS. 203 $ 167. Verbs, ivhose Tenses are formed from different Roots, and which are classed together only in respect to Signification. 1. aipioi, to take, to capture, e. g. a city, Impf. ypovv ; Ful ulprjo-a); Perf. rjpyjKa; Aor. (from e EA) elXov, iXelv; Aor. Pass. XlpiS-qv; Put. Pass. alptSrjo-oiAai [$ 130 (d)]. — Mid. to choose, Aor. elAop^i/ ; Fut. atpTJo-o/xat ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. rjp7)(j.ai; Fut. Perf. pp^o-o/xat, PL Prot. 338, "b. Verbal Adj. aipero's, -reos. 2. epxojxai, to go, to come (only the Indie, of the Pres in use in Attic, the remaining modes and the participials being borrowed from et/xi ($ 181) ; thus, epypixai, I'to, IS-l, Uvai, low), Impf. rjp^ofxrjVy commonly $W and rja, Opt. tot/xc; Fut. el/xt, I shall go (r/£w, I shall come ) ;_('eAEY®-) Perf. ZXjXvSa [$ 124, 2 (b)] ; Fut. eAeuVopm almost exclusively poetical and later prose, still also Lys. p. 165, §11; Aor. rjXSov, eX&o, &#oip,i, ZXSi [$ 118, 3 (a)], iXMv, l\$uv. Verbal Adj. /JLtTeXevareov. "Epxo/xai has in common the signification of to come and to go ; the idea of corning commonly belongs to the form from iT^teiu, and the idea of going to that of ejfii. But in compounds, each of these three verbs expresses both ideas, and only the preposition limits it to the one or to the other signification. 3. icrSia), to eat, Impf. tjctSloV, (e'Sco, Ep.) Fut. eSo/xou, ($ 154, 4) ; Perf. £8rj8oKa ; Aor. tyayov, <£ayeiv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eS^Seoyx-ai, ($ 124), 2; Aor. Pass. rjStoSrjv. Verbal Adj. eSecrros, eSeo-reos. 4. 6pdo), to see, Impf. iojpojv; Perf. ewpa/ca (Poet, also eopd/ca, Aug., § 122, 6) ; Aor. (from 1A-) elSov, tSoj, i'Soi/u, 184, $118, 3 (a), iSetv, iSojv. (On the second Perf. olSa, I know, see $ 195.) Fut. (from 'On) oxj/ofiat (2. Pers. ctyei, Hi 6, 11). — Mid. or Pass. 6pw- pu; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ewpd/xcu, or w/^/xat, wi/^ai, etc. ; Inf. S<££ai; Aor. Mid. eiSop/^v, iS«*#ai, tSoi) (and with the meaning ecce, iSou), as a simple only Poet. ; Aor. Pass. ui^S-qv, o^rjvat ; Fut. 6$r}(pQ) (only Pres. and Impf.), to bear, ('OI-) Fut. ol'o-w (Aor. Imp. oto-e, oio-crw, 6rm£\ in Aristoph., see $ 230, under <£epw) ; — 204 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -pi. U 16S (EYKQ, or 'ENErKfi) Aor. II. tyzyKov (rarer Aor. I. ^ica'), -e* -e(v), -opev, -ere, -ov (and -a/*ev, -are, -av), (f 124, Kem. 2), Opt. h/iyKoifu, etc. (rarer -cu^i, etc.), Inf. iveyKeiv, Part, eveyxcov (rarer ei/ey/cas), Imp. e/ey/ce, -era), etc. (and -ctrcu, etc.) ; — ('ENEK-) Perf. brqvoxa (j 124, 2) ; Mid. to cam/ o# c/z/r^ azray, w, Fut. oto-o- uat; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ivrjvcypai (-yfai, -y/crai, or eV^em-ai) ; Aor. Mid. rjveyKaprjv, eveyKOU, -aaSai, -dpevos; Pass, (a) to 6e 6orae, carried, (b) to 6mr owe's se^ to hasten; Aor. Pass. rjvix^W) Fut ivexSrjo-ofiat (rarer olrSrjcropai). Verb. Adj. oio-ros, otoreos (Poet. <£eproV). 7. <£??/« (§ 178), to say, Impf. £077v with the meaning of the Aor. also aviu and as ($ 178, Rem. 2);— ('En-) Aor. €wrov, ewro), znroipi, ciTre [$ 118, 3 (a)], (the other forms of the Imp. are rarely or never used, compound TrpoWe), ehrew, diruiv (first Aor. etTra, not very frequent in Attic writers, more frequent eiTras, very frequent enrare, rarely drrav, Imp. dirov rarely, very frequent ei7rara), ct7rarov, elirdrow, and always ct7rare ; all other forms want- ing in the Att). From the Epic Pres. eipa), come Fut. ipw, Perf. etpYjKa, Perf. Mid. or Pass, ctprjpat ($ 123, 4) ; — ('PE-) Aor. Pass. ipprjSrjv (ipp&hp appears not to be Attic), prj$r}vcu, poet's; Fut. Pass. pTjSrjaopicu and elprjo-opai. — Mid. only in compounds, Fut. airtpovpai, and first Aor. avei'ircur&ai, to efem/, to 5e wearied out, to give up, like ajrenruv. Verbal Adj. pyros, prp-eos. Instead of the Pres. s, I speak, ill of one, but avreiirov KtXK&s, § 168. Conjugation of Verbs in -pa. 1. Verbs in -pa, the number of which is small, differ from those in -co, principally in taking different personal-endings in the Pres. and Impf., several also in the second Aor. Act. and Mid. ; and also in omitting the mode-vowel in the Ind. of the above tenses. The formation of the remaining 1 The first Aor. is preferred to the second, in the first Pers. Sing. Indie, when the next word begins with a consonant ; also in the persons of the Imp. which 'nivo a: hence eueyice, but iueyKdrw. $ 169.] DIVISION OF VERBS IN -fXl. 205 tenses is like that of verbs in -g>, with a few exceptions. In omitting the mode-vowel, these verbs are analogous to those in -dco, -eco, and -oco. 2. In the Pres. and Impf., most verbs in -fu with a mono- syllabic stem, take a reduplication (§ 163) ; this consists in repeating the first consonant of the stem with i, when the stem begins with a simple consonant or a mute and liquid; but, when the stem begins with err, irr, or with an aspirated vowel, l with the rough breathing is prefixed to the stem. These verbs are the following : — 2TA 'l-ffTTj-jxi nPA irl-fi-* tr)-fx.i XPA KL-XPy-f" AE (U-dri-fii) Si84ourt(v) BA (pl-&7i-(ju} fiiPds 0E Tl-^rj-fii nTA "-Trra-fiai 'E '{-7]-/xi nAA irl-iJ.-Tr\r]-/xi AO Si-5w-/u. Remark. Most verbs in -/xi do not follow this conjugation throughout in the three tenses above named, but only in some particular forms ; four verbs, rt^rj/it, to put ; fornfttu, to place ; StSwjUi, to give, and 'Irj/xi, to send, have thia conjugation most full, though even these have forms in use borrowed from the conjugation in -w, together with several forms* of the inflection in -fit. See § 172, Rem. 8 § 169. Division of Verbs in -/ui. Verbs in -fit are divided into two principal classes : — 1. Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vowel. The stem of verbs of this class ends : — (a) in o, e. g. 'l-ffrr)-(xi, to place, Stem 2TA- (b) " e, " ri-frri-ni, to put, " 0E- (c) " o, " Si-dw-fii, to gire, " AO- (d) " i, " elfu, to go, " 'I- (e) " c, " el/xl, instead of i, ap-vii/xai) tial-vvfu " AAIT (comp. Sous, 5atr-6s) Kal-vvfiai " KAIA from KAA (comp. Perf. KeKad-fxcu, KeKcurfiat) KTcl-vv/xi " KTEIN from KTEN (Put. Krev-S>) ; but Sdn-vD/xi, eipy-vv/xi, £evy-vv/j.i, o'ly-vv/ju.. Rem. 2. Verbs of the second class, — those in -v/xi, — form only the Pres. and Impf. like verbs in /u, and even in these tenses, only a part of the forms are in -v/ii, the others in -too; in the Sing. Impf. the forms in -uw are predomi- nant, and in the Pres. Subj. and in the Impf. Opt., these are the regular forms. The verb a^e-wv-fxi, from the stem 2BE-, is the only verb of this class which forms the second Aor., namely, eexed immediately to the stem of the verb, e. g. 'i-crra- fj.ev e-Ti-S-e-jue;/ e-So-ftey i-arrd-fxefra 4-ri-&e-iJ.e&a i-pS-fieSra. 2. The Subj. has the mode-vowels <*> and rj, as in verbs in -o> ; but these vowels coalesce with the characteristic-vowel and form one syllable ; this coalescence differs from the contraction of verbs in - == Ti-i^w Tt-3-e-Tjs = Ti-frf}s ti-&4-(i)-/acu = ti-&£>-/acu 5t-8^-w = $i-S<£ 8t-So-7?s == 5f-8£s $i-d6-r) = 8i-8<£. Remark 1. This form of the Subj. of 'l, -77s, -77, from TU7T-TW, = Ti-frd-r)v ^ei-rjv Ti-frd-w 5t-5o-i-r)v — 5i-dol-r}v Soi-rjv 5i-doi-/Mrji/. Rem. 3. The Opt. of verbs in -e (t&ij/m) is like the Aorists Opt. Pass, of all verbs, e. g. a-ra-^ei-rju, rv<(>-&ei-nv, rvir-ei-rjv. Rem. 4. The Impf. Opt. of verbs in -v/xi, like the Subj. Pres., follows the form in -o>, e. g. SeiKvvoifMi. The few exceptions will be considered below. § 172. Personal-endings. 1. The following are the personal endings for the Act. .— (a) For the Indicative Present, Sing. 1. .p.1 'l-ffrri-fii 2. -5 (properly -Sri-Si, § 21, Rem. 3). In compounds of o-ttjSi and fir/Si, the ending -rjSi is often abbreviated into d, in the poet, dialect, e. g. Trapatrrd, anrScfTo., 7rpo/3d, Kardfia. (f ) The ending of the Pres. and second Aor. Inf. is -you. This is appended in the Pres. to the short characteristic- vowel ; but in the second Aor., to the lengthened vowel (a being lengthened into y, e into u, o into ov, § 170, 1) ; thus, Pres. l-crra-vat ri-S4-vai 81-86-vai deuc-vv-vai Second Aor. OTr\-va.i Sei-vai 8ov-vai. Rem. 6. The Inf. Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like -K-a. $174.] VERBS IN -fJLl. -FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 211 The forms of the first Aor. Act. 'dS-rjKa, rjKa, and eoWa, however, are usual only in the Ind., and generally only in the Sing. ; in the other persons, the Attic writers commonly used the forms of the second Aor. ; in the other modes and the participials. the forms of the second Aor. were always used. Examples of the first Aor. in the PL Ind. are : ifrfjicanev, X. C. 4. 2, 15 HAica/iev, X. An. 3. 2, 5. O. 9, 9. 10. eS^/care, Antiph. 138, 77. edooxav, X. Cy 4. 6, 12. ibriKau, H. 2. 3, 20. SuffiKav, Cy. 4. 5, 14. Also the forms of the second Aor. Mid. of rt^/xt, Irj^i, and oYSoo/u, are used by the Attic writers instead of the first Aor. ; f)K, retain the w through all the tenses, e. g. o-Tpw-wv-pa, ^-wv-pu, pu-wv-pu, Fut. a-TpM-ao), etc. But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, in form- ing some of the tenses, assume a Theme ending in a vowel, e. g. opL-vv-pu, Aor. w/x-o-o-a, from 'OMOQ. The second Aor. and the second Fut. Pass, occur only in 9 few verbs, e. g. ^vy-vv-pn See * 182 212 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fit. [* 173. $ 175. Paradigms of ACTIVE a w 14 ■a 111 2TA- to pface. ©E- to put. AO- to give. AEIK- to show. CD g * £ S. 1. !--/xi deiK-vv-fii l 2. e i-CTT7]-S ti-Stj-s di-Scc-s Sei/c-^u-s 3. 'l-(TTT)-) and di-dov-Te 3. L-(TTW-(ri{v) Ti-^a>-(n(v) St-Sw-o-^f) S.2. l-(TT7J 2 Tt-fret 2 Si'-Soi; 2 de'iK-yv ' 2 (from ttrrdSj) (from Ti^e^t) (from BtSo&i) (from Sei/cw^t) g 3. i-(TTa-Ta) Ti-iS-e-TO) 8t-5o-Tct> Sei/c-w-rw « D.2. C /-CTa-TOZ/ ri-&e-Tov Si-So-rov SeiK-vv-Tov 1 3. i-ara-ruy TI-&4-TOSV Si-S^-Tajy deiK-vv-rwv P. 2. i-ata-re TI-3-6-T6 8/-5o-Te deiK-vv-r* 3. l-(TTa.-Taxrav Tt-id-e-Toxrav Si-So-Taxrav SeiK-vv-Twcrav and l-aravrwi' and Ti-&evTwv and di-SovTew and SeiK-vvvTwv Injin. l-crrd-vai Ti-&e-vai St-So-j/cu hziK-vv-vai Part. l-crrds, aaa, ay Ti-freis, eicra, 4v 8i-8ous, oucra, 6v deuc-vvs, vara, tv G. 6.VTOS G. evros G. (Wo. 1 ? G. VVTOS S. 1. %-(TTT)-V i-ri-frnv i-Si-Sovy 3 i-SeiK-uvy 2. i-CTTTJ-S i-ri-freis 3 i-Si-Sovs a i-de'iK-vvs 3. t-CTr; e-ri'-frei 3 e-Si'-Sow 3 i-SeiK-vv | D.l. ? 2. i-crra-Toi/ i-Ti-&e-Tov e-5i-5o-Toi/ i-SeiK-uv-TOU a 3. i-crTa-Trji/ i-Ti-&4-rriv i-8i-86-rr)V i-deiK-vv-Tnv P. 1. 'l-aTa-fiev i-rl-Sre-fLev i-Si-do-fxey i-SeiK-vv-fiey ! ft. 2. 'i-ara-Te e-ri-id-e-Te e-8/-8o-Te i-de'iK-vv-Te 3. "-crra-aav i-ri-&e- -ov (§ 172, Rem. 8). 2 § 172. Rem. § 175.] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fXl. Verbs in -yn. 213 MIDDLE. 2TA- to place. 0E- to put. AO- to give. AEIK- to show. '{-ffTOL-fJUU ri-^e-fxai 8t-8o-jxai d€lK-VV-/J.CU '(- Ti-Sc-erfroj/ 8t-8o-o~&ov SeiK-vv-a&ov '(--(Ti8-o» l-ffTrt-crbov Ti-^rj-cr^ou 8i-8a>-o~&ov i-(TT<&-fie<$a Tt-&-vTai 8i-8w-vtcu 'i-ara-oo and rlSe-ao and Si-So-ao and SciK-vv-ffo 'l-GTW TI-&OV Si-Bov l-(TTa.-(T^03 Tl-&4-(T&0t St-S^-cfrw 8etK-vv-o~&w 'l- Ti-&4-o-&av 8i-86-o~&cov and deuc-vv-o'&ctiv 'l-cra-abai Ti-&€- used (e-8w-s) > used 3. t- 1 ft*- 1 Sw l 2. (TTtjS &i)-s 8^j-s w 3. err} *» 5<£ I D.l. 2. (TTrj-TOV &7J.-T0& Sco-toi/ S» 3. (TTTJ-TOU ^rq-rov Sw-toj/ ^0 P..1. (TTW-fieV &G)-/J.GJ/ Sco-fxep 2. CT7J-T6 &rj-Te Sca-re .* 3. <7Ta>-(Tl{v) &6>- 8o?-eu S. 2. (TT7?-&i 3 &es (fre'&t) 4 86s {86fri) 4 93 3. (TT7J-Ta) i^6-tw d6-T(a D.2. (T T 7} -TQV &6-T0V 86-rov g 3. CTTT) -TWV Sre-rau 86-TOOV 1 P. 2. (TTTJ-Te &e-re 86-re 3. | Sco- 8e£|a> e-(TT7j(ra, / e-&ri-Ka | e-S«-/ca e-5et|a [placed, Instead of these forms, the 2d Aor. is used in the Dual, PI. Ind. and in the other Modes and Participials, § 173, 2. P erfect. €-(TT7]-Ka, b sto, re-fret-zcci | Se-Sa>-Ka Se'-Setxa P J uperfect. e- -Keiv e-Se-Se^e"' ei-o-nrj-zceii/ Fut. Per/. e-o-n^wold Att.| wanting. wanting. wanting. , PAS ^1 jr. I, | i-ara-Snqv 1 e-r£-fri\v 9 j i-86-frr]u 1 i-tielx-byv ' The compounds, e. g. awoarco, e'/c^w, 8ia5<2, have the same accentuation as the simples, c. g. airoaruan, £k&tjtoi/, 5ia8a>/jLev. 2 See § 172, Rem. 3. 3 In composition, irapdcrr^i, irapAffTa ' air6(TT7]Sn, airScTTa, § 172, Rem. f>. * In composition, wepfoes, ev&es; anSSos, eVSos: irepi&e're, e/cSo-re, $118, Rem. 1 * See § 176,3. 6 ire^rfv and re^cTo/juii instead of telbriv and &efrf) place. 0E- to J9U*. AO- to give. AEIK- to s/iou;. (4-ard-fjLr]]/ does i-^re-fxrjv £-86-/j.r)v not occur, but e-3-ov (from e^ea-o ) e-dov (from e8o-fxat 7 occur, but irp'ua- &7) S<£ H-Tcu etc.) frde-fAedroj/ &7)--ar&e 8S)-VTai (aiai-jxrjv does not &0i-/J.7jV 8 doi-fx.7]v s occur, but irptat- 3-oT-o SoT-o fji.r}t/, -aio -euro, ^•or-To Soi-TO etc.) &o7-o~&oi/ &ot-(r&r)v &0?-VTO doi-fxe&oy 86l-0~&OI/ 8ol-(T&7)V So?-vro () &4-CT&00V &4-cr&irai, etc., d7roSw/xat, -a?, -wTat, etc. 8 See § 176, 2. 9 In composition, Kardfrov, airSfrov ; irepidov, aTTo'Sou ; /caTctfrea-fre, Trepldoar&e ; £j/&eo*- &e, Trp6do(T^€ . but fj'^Voj", f/\~ : irooSo? ;. <=V5W. $118. Rem .1 ,0 $ 1 54. 6. and $ 1 73. Rem 2 216 SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -[U. [$$ 176, 177 § 176. Remarks on the Paradigms . 1. The verbs Svixxfiai, tobe able; iiriarajxai, to know, and xpe^a^uat, to hang, have a different accentuation from c io-Ta/j.ai, in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., namely, Subj. o~vvuy.cu, iTriarw/xaL, -77, -t)tcu, -tjct&oi;, -T)a&€, -owtcu: Opt. 8vvalfir)v, eTTiaTai/j.r]u, -aio, -airo, -aicrfrov, -aur&e, -olivto; so also di/aifirjv, -aio, -ollto (§ 177, 4), and iirpid[XT}v (§ 179, 6). 2. The forms of the Opt. Mid. Impf. and second Aor. in -oi, viz. Ti^oi/xrjv, i^otuTji , "were preferred to those in -ei, viz. ri^ei/x^y, -e?o, -e?ro, etc., &ei[ir)v, -e?o, 'c7to, etc. In compounds, the accent remains as in simples ; thus, iv&oiurjv (iv&durjv), iv&o7o (eVfreib), etc. ; so also in compounds of Soi/ir}!/, e. g. 8ia8oiu.T)v, 8ia8o7o, etc. 3. On the abbreviated form of the Perf. and Plup. : e-o-rd-rov, e-o-ra-uej/, e-ara-Te, %-. Summary of Verbs in -p.i. 1. Verbs in -/xi which annex the Personal-endings immediately to the Stem-vowel. § 177. (a) Verbs in -a (t-a-Trj-fii; 5TA-): 1. KL-xprj-fu, to lend, to bestow (XPA-), Inf. Ktypavai, Fut. XPW *, Aor. exp-qaa. Mid. to borrow, Fut. xpw ^ - 1 - (Aor. ixprjcrdix-qv in this sense is avoided by the Attic writers.) To the same stem belong : — 2. XPV-, & 2S necessary, oportet (stem XPA- and XPE-), Subj. XPV> hif. XP*l val * Part, (to) xps&v (usually only Nom. and Ace); Impf. ixpy") or XPV V (with irregular accent), Opt. XP*' 17 ) (from XPE-) ; Put. xp?°" rat m Soph, (but not Xp7j a-TtoxpW, in Eurip., by contraction from xpaei*/. 3. air6xpy, it suffices, sufficit; the following also are formed regularly from XPAfl: aivoxp<*>o-i(v), Inf. arcoxpw; Part, airoxp^s, -wcra, -wv ; Impf. aTrexpV ; Put. o7roxpV 6i j Aor. d7rexp7j(re(y), etc. Mid. aTroxp&V-ai, to abuse, abutor, or consumo, Inf. diroxprjo-^ai, is inflected like xP^°P- a h § 129, Rem. 2. 4. ovivrjjxL (with Attic reduplication instead of ovovq^i), to ben- efit, ('ONA-) Inf. Svivavai; Impf. Act. wanting, <5<£e\ow being used for it ; Fut. ovqcrw ; Aor. uvqera, Inf. ovrjaau (for it ovqvai, like arrival, in PL Up. 600, d.). Mid. ovLvaix.a.1, to get benefit, be bene- fitted, Fut. ovrjo-ojAai ; Aor. (hv-q/jL-qv ((hvdfxrjv later, but also in Eur. wvaaSe), -rjao, -rjro, etc., Imp. ovqero, Part, ov^evos (Hom.), Opt. bva.ip.-qv, -cuo, -aero ($ 176, 1), Inf. ovaaftai; Aor. Pass. wv-qS-qv rarer 178.] SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -/it. 217 instead of wvrjpL-rjv. The remaining forms are supplied by kxpeXew. 5. TTL-fi-7rXr]-fXL, to Jill, (ELAA-) Inf. 7np.7rXavai ; Inipf. tTrlpvirX-qv ; Fut. irXrja-oi ; Perf. TrirrX-qKa ; Aor. hrXrjo-a ; Mid. to fill for one's self, 7rt(A7rXa[jLai, Inf. 7U/A7rAacr$ai ; Impf. lTrtp,7rXapvrjv ; Aor. eirXyjo-a.- {Lt]v\ Fut. 7rX^o-o/xat; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7re7rA^o-/xai ; Aor. Pass. i7rXr}rj-pLi, to say (stem 3>A-), has the following formation: — h 178. Present. ACTIVE. Imperfect. Indi- cative Subj." Imp. Inf. Part. S. 1. 2. 3. D.2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3. (py/xi " (p-ps (p-qo-i(v) (parou (pdr6v (pajxev (pari (pacri(v) Indi- cative S.l. 2. 3. D.2. 3. P. 1. 2. 3. %(pf]V €(pr)s, usually tyna&a tyn [(Mi6,2). e(pdrou iafj.ev G(pare e(pdcrav (pw t vrjordfjL7}v, which is not used by them, .$ 122, 4), Suhj. n-ptw/xat ($ 176, 1); Opt. .Tpiaipvrjv, -aio, -atro (§ 176, 1); Imp. irpioi) Part, n-piap-cvos. § 180. (b) Fer&s zw -e (r/-^-ftt, ©E-) I-17-/U (stem e E-), to smd. Many forms of this verb are found only in composition. ACTIVE Pres. Impf. Ind. '/fyjUt, i7?s, r /7j(Tt(i/) ; '/eToi'; le/nev, '/ere, m, fis, a, htyrjs, etc. Opt. eiV> e%y> e'tv] 'efroj/, acpe'iTOi/, ehrju] eftxej/, alrifu, see § 126, 3. Rem. 2, The form of the Impf. 'Lt\v is very doubtful, and the forms tys, '(i\ are very rare. The form 'Uiv has the ending of the Plup., like the Impf. of d/xi, to go ; it is Att. and Ion., a secondary form of 'low. 220 VERBS IN -{XL. [i 181 MIDDLE. Pres. Impf. Aor. II. lud. 'Ujjuxi, iWcu, tercet, etc. — Subj. iwjxai, acpicc/xaL, Ifj, oupifj, etc. Imp. 'Ucro, or 'lov. — Inf. tW&cu. — Part. Ufxevos, -77, -ov. Ufj.r]u, 'Uao, etc. — Opt. leifx-qv, Att. loI/jltju, tolb, acpiolo, etc. Ind. ei/j.r]v Subj. w/xai, acpu/xai, y, a, etc.). Inf. eVid-eu. — Part, e/xevos, -17, -ov. Perf. eT/xai, fi&e7fxcu ; Inf. elcrSai, f.ie&€7cr&ai. — Plup. elfxiqv, cio-o, acpeiao, etc. — Fut. Ifjtrofiai. — Aor. I. TjKdfxrjv (rare, § 173, 2). PASSIVE, A. I. e'l&yv, P. k&i)vai, etc. — Fut. efrfjo-o/icu. — Verb. Adj.eT Ind.l. elfxi, to go Subj. Xa> 2. el V s 2. el Xys 3. icrri(v) v 3. dffi{v) *v D. 2. 4ctt6v ■f\TOV D.2. Xtou Xt]TOV 3. icrrSv ■t\TOV 3. Xrov Xtjtov P.I. £o~fi4v Si/xev P. 1. Xfxev Xw/XGV 2. eVTe ^T€ 2. Xre Xf]TG 3. elo~l(v) S)O'l(v) 3. Xaffi(v) Xcaai(v) Imp. S. 2. fcr&i Inf. elvai Imp. £3ri, irpSsi&i Inf. I4vai 3. IVtco (seld. irpSset) D. 2. iffiov Part. &v, ovo~a, 3. %Tto Part. Idov, lov- 3. icTwv 6v D.2. Xtov, ivp6snov )cr&a(§ 116,2) dt\s 2. rjeis and rjeitT€ 3. ■t\. — The form of the first Pers. Impf. is often ^, among the Attic poets, and sometimes also in Plato ; the form ij/xrjv is rare (Lys. 7, 34, X. Cy. 6. 1, 9). — The form of the second Pers. Impf. %s is found frequently in the later writers, and rarely in lyric passages of the Attic poets. — The Dual forms with , > -e?s, -e? Aor. i-(TKe8a-(Ta e-Kope-tro e-ffrpw-ffa Mid. Pres. (XK^d-vvv-fxai. Kop4-j/uv-fiai arpdo-yyv-ixai Impf. i-(TKeSa-vvv-/j.r]v i-Kope-vvv-/j.r]v i-a-Tpco-vvv-firjv Perf. i-&ic48a-(r-fj.cu Ke-ic6pe-(r-[xai. e-crrpw-fiai Plup. i-CKeSd-a-firfu i-Ke-K0p4-(T-fJ.T]V i-ffrpco-firju Put. Kop4-(T-o[xai Aor. i-Kope-ff-dfirjV r.Pf. Aor. Ke-Kope-a-ofxai Pass. i-(TKefid- £-Kop4--frr)v ! Put; tr/ceSa-tr-fr^cro^ucu Kopz-fji.o-Ka ofi-dcfio-fiai § 124, 2. ('OMOn) Perf, II. oA-coA-a, perii, §124, 2. Plup. I. oA.-cwA.e-/reu/, perdideram, bfx-oix6-Keiv bfl-(HfX,6-fir\V Plup. II. oA-ct>A-eiv, perieram, Fut. oA-a>, -ety, -e? . ,1 oA-ovjxai, -et ofi-ovfjiai,, -et Aor. I. #Ae-cra | A. II. u\-6fn}v &fxo-ffa a)/j.o-(rdfn]u A. I. P. wfio-(T- f ^7jf (et wfx6frr\v) F. I. P. ojuo-cr-d '>lxyv-oy (always {]o~Qfx.ai, 3). i And oAAv-w, &AAv-ov — bfivv-w, & Remark. "OAAvfxi comes by assimilation from oA-vvfxi (§ 18, Rem.). For an example of a stem-ending with a mute, see UUviifxi above, under the para digms (§ 175). The Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass, of 6/xvv/xi is o/iw^ocr^eVos. The remaining forms of the Perf. and Plup. commonly omit the ; Aor. lK.ipo.aa) Perf. KeKpaKa; Mid. to mix for one's self, Aor. iKepaa-d/xrjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKpafxat (KCKepacr/xat, Anacr. 29, 13; Inf. K€Kepaieo-pu, rjfKpUa-ac, ^(ptWrat, etc., Inf. rjpLcpiio-Sau ; Fut. Mid. a/updo-ofim. (Aug. $$ 126, 3. and 230.) The vowel of the Prep, is not elided in the Common language, hence also i-micao-SaL, X. Cy. 6. 4, 6. 2. li-wv-fxi, to boil, Trans., Fut. ^eo-w; Aor. e£eo-a; Perf. Mid. or Pass, e^ecr/xac; Aor. Pass. i^ea-Srjv. — (£ew, on the contrary, is usually intransitive). 224 SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN fit. [§§ 185-187 S. Kope-vvv-fju, to satiate, Fut. Kopiam, Att. Kopco; Aor. eKopeo-a; Aor. Mid. iKopaadfxrjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ke/$7)v, crrpcoros (non- Att. ecrropecrp-at, icrTopioSrjv, and icrToprjSrjv) . See § 182. $ 185. (c) Fer&s ivhose Stem ends in i. Ti-vvv-fxi (TI-), to pay, to expiate, Mid. rl-wv-fiou, to get pay, to punish, to avenge, secondary Epic form of rhm and rtuo/xai. — In Attic poetry, the Mid. is often found, and with one v, rfvvficu. § 186. (d) Verbs in o, with the o lengthened into to. 1. tfli-wv-p-i, to gird, Fut. £<6ctcd; Perf. Z^wKa, Paus. ; Aor. e£ (Aug., § 122, 4). f 187.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -fU. 225 2. SetK-vv-fu, see § 175. 3. €Lpy-vv-fJLL (or etpyco), to s/m£ in, Fut. eip£ ; Aor. c^ef^a ; Mid. to join to or for one's , secondary form), Fut. /u'£(i>; Aor. c/xt^a, p,t£ai; Perf. /xe/xl^a (Polyb.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, aifuy/iaij fjLefjuxS-cu ; Aor. Pass, ifiixdyv, and ifuyrjv ; Fut. Pass. fii^^a-p/wi ; Fut. Perf. /A€/xi£opu. 6. oiy-vu-p-t, usually as a compound: (The Attic use of the form olyvvjxL is not certain) avotyvvfu, Siotyvv/xi (but instead, dvotyw, SioCyto, are more frequently used in the Pres. and aviwyov always in the Impf), to open, Fut. avoi^a ; Aor. wew^a, di>oi£ai (in X. Hell, ^votyov, rjvoi|a, signifying to put to sea, to weigh anchor) ; first Perf. dvea>^a, I have opened; second Perf. dvewya, J stand open, instead of which Att. dveuy/Mu; Impf. Mid. avewyoprp/ ; Aor. Pass, avetpxfhjv, avoL^qvai. (Aug. § 122, 6.) Verb. Adj. dvoiKrios. 7. 6fx6py-vv-fxi, to wipe off, Fut. dp,op|ya, Jra rm£ ($ 140, Rem. 3); Aor. Mid. ipprjidfjLrjv; Aor. Pass, ippayrjv (zpprjX^W rar ^) ; second Fut. payrj(rop.ai. 10. cppdy-vv-fxi (commonly pdo-o-u), (ftpdrroi, § 143, 1), to 6rea& Impf. typdyvvv (Thuc. 7, 74. S. Ant. 241); Fut. pd£a>; Aor. epa£a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7re$payp,ai ; Aor. Pass, lpdx$rp (typayrjv first used among the later writers). 226 verbs. -«— iceifuu ajnd rjfxai. [$$188, 189 $ 188. (b) Verbs ivhose Stem ends in a Liquid. 1. &p-vv-p.ai (Epic and also in Plato), to take, obtain, secondary form of atpo- fiat, and used only in particular phrases, to obtain, to acquire, namely, a reicard, spoils, etc. Impf. Tjpyvixrjy. The remaining forms come from cupo/xai. 2. KTtC-vv-fu, commonly written ktiWv/u in the MSS., to put to death, Att. prose secondary form of ktciVw, is used in the Pres. and Impf. The stem is KTEIN-, lengthened from KTEN-. The v of the stem is omitted on account of the diphthong ($ 169, Rem. 1). 3. SX-Xv-jxt (instead of SX-w-pu), to destroy. See h 182, B. In prose, only in compounds. 4. ojA-vv-fu, to sivear. See § 182, B. 5. op-vv-[u (poet), to rouse ($ 230). 6. crrop-vv-fJLL, to spread out. See crropevvvpu, § 184, 5. $ 189. Inflection of the tivo forms of the Perf. kci/acu and rjp.ai. Preliminary Remark. The two forms of the Perf. /cel>cu and Jj/iai, are so essentially different, in then- formation, from the other verbs in -ju t that they require to be treated by themselves. a. Kci/acu, to lie. Ket/xat, properly, I have laid myself down, hence I lie down; then Pass. I have been laid down, I am lying doivn (e. g. dvaKci- fuu, I am laid up, i. e. consecrated, avyKtvrai, it has been agreed upon, compositum est, constat, but o-wrc'^ctrat vtto twos, it has been agreed by some one) ; this verb is a Perf. without reduplica- tion, from the stem KEI- 'contracted from KEE-). Perf. Ind. k€?/mxi, ke?fj.ai, Key, Ke-nrai, etc. Imp. Ktiao, KeiaSw, etc. ; — Inf. /cetcr&cu ; — Part. Keifxevos. Impf. Ind. iKeifiTju, eKeuro, eitciTo, third Pers. PI. e/ceijro. Opt. Keol/xrjv, k£oio, kzoito, etc. Fut. KeiffOfxai. Compounds avdicei/xai, Kara/fciyuot, Kara/ceio-cu, etc. ; — Inf KaraKeic^ai ; — Imp KaT&Keuro, iyiceuro. M 190, 191.J VERBS IN -to WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -/U. 2'W $ 190. b. ^Rfjcai, to sit. 1. ^H/xai, properly, I have seated myself, I have been seated, hence, I sit (Ion. and poetic, also used of inanimate objects, instead of iSpu/xai, I have been fixed, established?) ; this verb is a Perf. of the poet. Aor. Act. eto-a, to set, to establish. The stem is e HA- (comp. ^tr-rat instead of ifS-rai, according to f 17, 5, and the Lat. sed-eo). Remark 1. The active Aorist-forms of zTcra are dialectic (§ 230) and poet., but the Mid. signifying to erect, to establish, belongs also to Attic prose, d(rdfir)v; Part, elcrdfxevos (Th. 3, 58, ecradfxeuos) ; Imp. ecrai, '4, 2BE-X1, , fifjs, Pfj l crfiw, fjs, f) ' yvw, yv£s, yy<$} Svw, rjs, y x D. firiTov (rfirjrov yvwrov 5vr)Tov P. $WUeV, 7JT€, crfiwfAej/, rjre, yuu/xev, aire, dvw/xeu. G)(Tl{v) S}(Tl(v) Opt. S. 1. fiairjv crfieirjv yvoin]v 2 2. fiairjs 3 crfir}&i, 'f)TW 2 yvw&i, dbrW* SCi^J, VTU 3 D. 1. firJTOv, rjruy afS7)TOV> rjTCtiP yVU>TOV, CtiTOW dvroy, vtuv P. 2. )8f)T€ crfirJTz yvune 8Dt6 3. firiToxrav and afi-r]TW(rav and yv&TwGav and ovToxxav et f}di>Tco>> (Xf&ivTWV yvovTM SvyTW^ Inf. fir)vai (rfirjvcu yvoivo.1 Svvai Part. fids, affa, av o-fieis, e7aa, ev yvovs, od, Spas, Spa, Sparov, Spco/xei/, Spare, Spwcri(v), Opt. Spair\v, Imp. Spa&i, -area, Inf. Spavai, Part. Spas, -avai, aha, -t\v (not f3toir]v, as yvoi-nv, to distinguish it from the Opt. Impf. fiioirjv), Inf. ^iwuai, Part. jStous [oi/o-a, ow] ; but the cases of fiiovs are supplied by the first Aor. Part. Pititxras. Tbus: avefiicav, I returned to life, from avafiidoffKOfiai (§ 161, 3). The Pres. and Impf. of fii6), to produce, second Aor. % t0 nave (§ 166, 14), and ir?frt of the second Aor. Ztnov from irlvw, to drink (§ 158, 5). $ 193. II. Perfect and Pluperfect. The A'ctic dialect, in imitation of the Epic, forms a few Per- fects of pure verbs immediately from the stem, e. g. AI-O, to 20 230 VERBS IN -CO LIKE VERBS IN -fll. [* 193 fear, Be-St-a, then rejecting the mode-vowel, in the Dual and PL Ind. Perf. and Plup., and to some extent hi the Inf., e. g. Se-St- fxeu instead of Se-SC-a-fiei/. In this way, these forms of the Perf and Plup. become wholly analogous to the Pres. and Impf. of verbs in -/u, e. g. t-o-ra-/xey. The stem- vowel remains short, e. g. SiSX/xeu, rirXafxev, rerXavai ; but in the third Pers. PI. Perf, the mode-vowel a is not rejected, e. g. Se-St-do-i; with verbs in -aco, however, a is contracted with the stem- vowel, e. g. Te-TAa-uo-i — re-rXa-cri. Remark 1. Except the forms of AIH and 'lar-nfii, all the Perfects of thi9 kind belong almost exclusively to poetry, particularly to the Epic. The Sing. SeSta is not Attic. Rem. 2. The Imp. of these Perfects is also in use, and, since it not only wants the mode-vowel, but takes the ending -d-i in the second Pers. Sing., it is wholly analogous to the forms in -/xt. So the Inf. Both append their termi- nations to the short stem-vowel ; SeSieVai is an exception. The Subj. Perf. and the Opt. Plup. of verbs whose stem-vowel is a, are formed like verbs in -p.i, since the Subj. Perf. admits the contraction of the stem-vowel with the termination, and the Opt. Plup. ends in -al-qv, e. g. kerrd-w, kerrw, -77s, etc., rerXai-nv. The Part, of verbs in -dec contracts the stem-vowel a with the ending -cos and -6s, e. g. terraces = kerrcos, eerra-6s = kerrcos and kerros, and also have a peculiar feminine form in -coera, e. g. kerrwera ; all the Cases retain the co, e. g. kcrranos, kerrcoer-ns, etc. Rem. 3. The form resolved by e is retained in some participles, in the Ionic dialect, e.g. kerrecos, standing firm; so from refrvnua, re&vews Cnever re&vcos) together with r&vnucos, is retained in the Attic dialect also. In these forms, « remains in all the Cases, e. g. kerrecos, kerrecoaa, kerrecos, Gen. eerrecoros, -(herns, re&vecbs, reSveccera, re&vecos, Gen. reSvecoros, -cberrjs. Befi-nKa and rerX-nKa never have this form of the participle. Perfect. Pluperfect. Perfect. Pluperfect. Ind. S. 1. Se-S/-a ihehteiv 'E-2TA-A - 2. oe-d?-as eSedteis 3. 8e-5i-e(j/) ededtei D. 2. Se'-Si-roi/ iSeSHrov e-erra-rov eerrarov 3. de-dt-roy e8eotrr)i' e-erra-rov eerrarov P. 1. de-^-fiev iSeSi/xet/ e-erra-fxev eerrajxev 2. 5e-e>X-re ededlre e-errd-re ear are 3. 5e-dt-deri(i/) eded"ierau (eSedieerav) k-erra-en(u) eerraaav Imp. Se-St-^t, Sedtrco, etc. e-erra-Si, etc., 3 Pers. PI. Subj. de-di-co, -77s, -rj, etc. eerrarcoerav an d -dvrcov Inf. oe-DX-euai e-erra-vai Part. deft-cos, -v?a, -6s, Gen. -6tos e-errcos, -coerce, -6s {-dsl) Gen. -cvTos, -C0CT7]S Subj. Pf. eerrco, 77s, -r}, etc. Opt. Plup. kerrai-nv, Dual earalrjrou and -cut etc., third Pers. PI. eerrcuev. ov, PI. eerralrn xev and -ai/xcv, ?$ 194, 195.] VERBS WITH A PERF. LIKE VERBS IN -/*«. 23 1 Rem, 4. The Opt. Plup. third Pers. Sing. StSienj, PI. Phaedr. 251, a. is re- stored according to traces in the MSS. The Plup. of iarript, in this form nevei takes the strengthened augment et. — The Imp. Perf. etrra&t, etc., and the Opt. Plup. €Toy ; Plup. etfe- 8a(j.ev, -ut€, -avav. These abridged forms are almost wholly poetic and dia- lectic (§ 230). 3. &j/t), though Isocr. aweiSrjcreis), I shall know or experience ; sometimes also ei'Sewu, et5«, clSeiriv, have the same meaning. — Verbal Adj. lvu> y ravvu, ipvw, ffevw, e5a>, o4ofxat, to think, iirtfj.4xofj.ai, § 166, 21. TrpoStvfj.4ofj.ai, to desire. Trpo&v/j.7}crofxai and rarer irpo&v- fj.r}Srr]crofxai. Both t](jofj.ai, to rejoice, arid the poetic epa/xai, to love, have a passive form for their Put.: Tj^b^ffofiai, ipaa&T}o-ofj.ai, § 179, 4. Rem. 2. All the other Deponents are Middle Deponents, or are used only in the Pres. and Impf. Rem. 3. Among the Deponent Passives, arc very many Active verbs, which in the Mid. express a reflexive or intransitive action, but have a Passive form for their Aorist ; on the contrary, a Middle form for their Future, e. g. ai, ireTraveia^ai, maturescere, to ripen; alcrx^veiv, to shame, alo , x vv &V val i alaxweloSrai (rarer alcrxvi'&iio'ecrSrai), to feel shame; ZXaTTovv, to make less, iXar- Tw&rjvai, iXXaTTcvaea&ai, to be inferior, to be conquered; xoXovv, to make angry, XoXw&qvai, x°^ < *> ~s Qp.ai ) ; — idpvw, — KiveTv, KXiveiv, noipJav, KOjxi^eiv (KO/j-io^rrjuaL, to travel, but KOjxicraa&ai, sibi recu- perare, to recover for one's self), npivtiv, KvXivdeiv; — Xtyeiv, Xeiireiv, Xveiv, Xviztiv; — {ie&vaAe?cr- Srai), (T&£siv (o-co&TJvca, to save one's self, but crwowd-at, to save for one's self sibi servare) ; — Tapdrrsiv, Tepireiv, Tpeireiv (rpaTrrjj/at,, toturn one's self to turn, rpeij/aa' &cu, to put to flight), rpecpeiv; — cpaiveiv (cpavrjvai, o{i7)&7)(re(r&cu) ; — \pev- 5eii/ (\pevafrrjvai, ipeva&'f}cro/j.ai, to deceive one's self, be deceived, but ^evaea^ai, ij/eu- aaa&ai, to lie) ; — x 6 "^ $ 198. Sit miliary a "AiSco (4'So>), to sing, olkovw, to hear, aXaXafa, to shout, hp-aprdvoi, to miss, diravrdw, to meet, airoXaixa, to enjoy, apirdfa, to seize, fia8i£a), to go, fiaiva), to go, Bioa, to live, Bxiirw, to see, Boda, to cry out, yeXaw, to laugh, ynpda-Kca, to grow old, yiyvwaKU, to know BaKUca, to bite, Zap&dvoo, to sleep, delo-cu, to fear, diairdw, to live, 8i8pd(TKU), to run away, Siuku), to pursue, iyKwpudfa, to priise, of the Active Ve Middle Future, el/j.1, to be, iiraivea, to praise, iofrtoo, to eat, &avfj.dfa, to wonder, &e&>, to run, Srnpdw, frripevoo, to hunt, Siyydvw, to touch, &j/7), to nod, oV$a, to know, olp.a>Coo, to lament, oAeA.v£», to howl, rbs most in use ivith § 154, 1. oixvvjxi, to swear, opdw, to see, ovpew, nrinam redere, Tral(w, to sport, 7ra, to suffer 7T7j5oco, to leap, ■nivoo, to drink, iriitTw, to fall, irXew, to sail, ro/ecv, to blow (but tv/a irveiffco), Trviya, to strangle, Tro&4a>, to desire, irposKvviia, to reverence, pew, to flow, po>, to gulp down, G-iydco, to be silent, o-ico7roco, to be silent, rpdya, to gnaw, >, pacpew, (TK&tttoo. tiktu, x co P* co - — toypdw, frripeva, Ko\d(co are also used with the middle form The following compounds of x<"P««> have an Active and Middle form in the Fut. : aTro-, suus ; ov, sui ; of, sibi ; eairepos, vesperus ; oIkos, vicus ; olvos, vinum, etc. ; this is obvious from the following facts : (a) words that have the Digamma cause no Hiatus, e. g. irpb e&ev (= irpb F&ev); — (b) hence also a vowel capable of Elision, when placed before a digammated word, cannot be elided, e. g. AiVev 8e 4 (= Se Fe), curb eo (= airb Fio) ; — (c) the paragogic v (§ 15) is wanting before words which have the Digamma, e. g. Sale ot (= Sate Foi) ; — (d) ov instead of ovk or oi>x, is found before the Digamma, e. g. eVel o& e&ev iiTTi xepetW (= ov F&ev) ; — (e) in compounds, neither Elision nor Crasis occurs, e. g. Siaenre/xev (= StaFenre/xej'), aayfjs ( = aFayrjs) ; — (f ) a digammated word with a preceding consonant, makes a vowel long by position, e. g. yap £&ev (where the p and the Digamma belonging to %&sv make a long by position) ; — (g) long vowels are not shortened before words that have the Digamma, e. g. /caAAef'Te o~Ti\f}wv teal el/xao-i (= icai Fei/xaari), II. ?, 392. § 201. Interchange of Vowels. Preliminary Remark. The dialectic peculiarities in the change of vow- els, as well as of consonants, never extend to all the words of a dialect, but are uniformly limited to certain words and forms. 1. The three vowels, e, 0, a, called (§ 140, 2 and 4) variable vowels (rpecpw, rtTpocpa, irpdcprju) undergo various changes in the dialects : — a is used instead of e (Ion.), e. g. Tpdwcc, rdfivaj, /j.4yc&os instead of rpeirco, rifivca, fieye&os ; so also Doric Tpdcpeo, o~Kiap6s, "Kprayns instead of Tpefyw, VKiepos, "ApTz/xis ; and in several particles, e. g. 3«a, roVa, irona. instead of cJt€, t6ts, Tr6re. e instead of a in the Ionic dialect, when followed by a Liquid, e. g. TeVtrepes, epo-rjv, v^Xos, fiip&pov (Ion.) instead of recro-apes, four, &pde7v instead of bppcodeiv. 2. The following cases are to be noted in addition : — The long a is a special peculiarity of the Doric dialect, and causes, in par- ticular, the so-called Plateiasm (i. e. the broad pronunciation) of the Dorians, e. g. o/xepa, Kairos, advs, Aa/xdrrip. The older and the later Ionic have softened this grave d into 77. The Attic uses both the Doric a and the softened 77, (§ 16, 7). Comp. Dor. a/xepa, Ion. rifxepa, Att. rifxepa (with the Ion. 77 and Doric a) ; Ion. cropa£. — So, also, in the diphthong av, among the Ionic writers a is changed into 77: v-qvs, ypi)vs y instead of vavs, ypavs; likewise in the diphthong at in the Dat. PI. of the first Dec, ris and 770-1 (Ion.) instead of ais and ai instead of ov is Dor., yet not in Pindar; the use of oi instead of. ov is iEolic and Pindaric, e. g. Ta> icpdfSa) instead of rod icpyfiov, Sw (also Ion. and Pindar.) instead of ovv, SaXos instead of SovXos, wpav6s instead of ovpav6s, fia>s instead of $ovs ; — rvir- toio-i[v) instead of tvittovo~i(v), rvirroicra instead of rvTrrovcra, os, £k€?j/os. ir instead of r (JEol. and Dor.), e. g. ire/nre instead of vivre. (b) The Medials and y, e. g. /3At7X wj/ (Att.), penny-royal, is in Ion. y\-r)x^v, fiXecpapov, eye-lash, is a male ; Kopcrr) and Kopprj, back; but pp remains where the augment is used, and in com- position. §204. II. Interchange of cognate Consonants. (a) The Palatals y and k, e. g. Kvacpevs, fuller, is preferred by the Att. writers to the other form, yvcvpetis. k and % in SeKop.at (Ion.) instead of Se'xo^at. (b) The Linguals 3- and t, e. g. avns (Ion. and Epic) instead of av&is, again. Remark. In some words a change of the aspiration, from one syllable to the other, occurs, e.g. Ki£rv (Ion.) instead of x iT( *> v -> wbavTa, hie, ev&evTev, hinc, (Ion.), instead of evrdv&a, evrev^ev; Kv&pr) (Ion.) instead of x^ T ? a -> P ot - cr and t, e. g. Uoreidau, eirerov, elKari, tv, t4 (Dor.) instead of Iloa-eidcav, ene- cov, etKO(ri, pit, are. The Attic forms tcvtXov, beet; Tr/Xia, sieve (from arjSrw), rvpfir) (from crvpa), turba ; rrip.epoy, to-day, and Tyres, this year (the two last only in the comedians, but in tragedians and in other Attic writers cr}p.epov, arjres), are in the Ion. and Common language arevrXou, o-rjXia, avpfir). co- and tt. Instead of a-a; employed in the older and the later Ionic, in old Attic and in most other dialects, — the new and often also the middle Attic in most words uses tt, e. g. Ta, yXuao-a ; but Att. tcittoj, yXwrra. (But when a-a- results from composition, it remains unchanged.) Yet the Ionic forms prevail, not only in the older Attic Writers, but are also found in other authors, some words always having ara; e. g. irda-ffca, to scatter; irT-fiaro-co, to crouch; fivaffos, a deep; irTio-acc, to husk; TrTvaacc, to fold; fipdaaoi, to shake; TTTwo-o-a), to cower; epeo-aw (epeTTco is rejected), etc. o- and v in the Dor. verb-ending -p.es, e. g. rvTrro/xes (instead of the common form TVTTTop.ev, see § 220, 6) ; also cues Dor. instead of alev. a8 instead of ( ( iEol., so also in Theoc.) but only in the middle of words, e. g. fxeXicrderai, p.eadwu instead of p-eXi^erai, fie£a)V or [xeifav, not at the beginning of words, nor if 3- precedes, or and tt, — the first Att., the last Ion., — e. g. aacpdpayos Att., aairdpayos Ion. So JEol. and Dor. tt, instead of , e. g. ij/e Dor. instead of a-tAoC ; 7rAeCpes from v\4oves ; 7rA7ipeCf tcs from irXrjpSovTes = ivX-qpovv res ; iducalev from idtKaloe = idiKalov ; elpdtrevv from elpwraov == eipdorccv ; *ye- AeCiro from •yeAc^ouo'a = *yeAci)o"a; 5tKateCo-t from StKatooCcrt = diKaiovcri. But commonly the Dorians contracted oe into w (instead of ov), e. g. rvpoevra — rup&yra instead of rvpovura, piyoov instead of piyovv. 2. Ao, aov, and aco are contracted in the Doric dialect into d (instead of w), namely, in verbs in -da, in genitives in -ao and -dW, in substantives in -dW, Gen. -dovos, and in proper names in -Aaoy, e. g. (pvcraures, x«^-«o"'> yeXav from (pvo'dovTes, %a\ctouo"t, yeXdow] — ray tcopuv from -rdW Kopdcov = twv Kopwv; — noo"et§a>, -avos, Att. Yloare&tov, -wvos; — Me^eAds, 'ApKeatXds, Gen. -a, Dat. -ot. 3. Ae and aei are contracted in the Dor. (but not in Pindar) into 77 and y instead of d and a, in verbs, e. g. i'i^au (from oKyvv/nt). 21 242 DIALECTS. [§ 206. $ 206. Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Paragogic, Hiatus. 1. In particular instances the Dialects differ from the laws of Crasis stated in §§ 10 and 11 ; namely, in the Ionic dialect and in Pindar and Theoc, the o of the Article coalesces with d and forms o>, and with at and forms q>, e. g. rb &yaX- ua = r&yaXjia ; so rwX7)&es, tcd'jto, wvr)p, uvdpes, (avSptoiroi, cp7r6Xot, from to dA7j- bes, rb avr6, 6 arf)p, ol &vdpes, ol 'av&posTrot, ol anr6\oi. In Herodot. occur, tiptaros, avr6s, 3>XXot, with the smooth insteao. of the rough breathing (from 6 apurroi, 6 avr6s, ol aXXot) ; Homer uses Crasis seldom, namely, only in &pto~ros, wvr6s, raXXa, oup.6s (instead of 6 ip.6s), rovueKa, ovveita (instead of ou eveita) ; Kaydo is doubtful. 2. Instances of Crasis in Doric are : r&Xyeos, r&vrpa> instead of rod &Xyeos, rep cturpa ; so o and e = go, at and e — 77, e. g. 6 eXa /cal e?7re = K??7re, /cat eaV or ^V = /ct>V, which last is also Ion. 3. Ionic writers admit the common Crasis in ov, in the Masc. and Neut. oi the Art. and in erepos, e. g. ovrepos, rovrepov. 4. The use of Synizesis (§ 12) is very frequent in the Homeric poems: — (a) In the middle of words, it is oftenest found in the following combination of vowels (the vowels over which the line is placed being pronounced as one syllable, whether consisting of two or more vowels) : ea, ea, eat, eas; so, eot, eou; eoo, eco; e. g. crrri&ea, r)p.eas, &eot, xpucreois, re&veSire ; much rarer in ae, ta, tat, itj, trj, to, e. g. ae&Xevoov, irthtas, 7r6Xtos; oo only in Sydoov) vot only in daKpuotat] r)t in StjIoio, drjiwv, drjioia., ijta; (b) Between two words in the following combination of vowels : 77 a, 77 e, 17 77, 7) et, 77 ov, ri 01] et ov; 00 a, , H. o, 245. and ot in the Nom. of the first Dec. in o£e? bdvvai, II. A, 272) ; (f ) The oi in fxoi, to me, and in the particle, roi. 6. The v paragogic (§ 15) is commonly rejected in Ion. prose, e. g. irao e\e£a. 7. The Hiatus (§ 8) is admitted by Homer in the following cases : — (a) In long vowels or diphthongs either in the Arsis of the verse, e. g. aj/Tt&e | w '05u I 0-77* ; or in the Thesis, in which case the long vowel or diphthong is considered short, e. g. oXkoi e | v ol | e£ eye | vovro \\ e\v\ /xeyd \ poici ye | ve&Aii, II. 6, 270 ; (e) In the metrical Diaeresis, 1 after the first and fourth foot of the verse, e. g„ e7X 6 ' 1 ' I 'Ido/xevrjos ayavov AevKaXidao, II. /x, 117. wefvpai eV 'ArpeiSri ' ' Ay ajJ.efj.voyi | ovXov 'Oveipov, II. /3, 6. Comp. £ 422 5 (f ) Where the first word has the apostrophe, e. g. SeVfye' e&aWev ; fg) Sometimes in proper names ; (h) Words, which have the digamma occasion no Hiatus (§ 203, 3), e. g. oi) I 5e ovs I iraidas e \ affxev (= ovde Fovs). $ 207. Lengthening and Shortening of Voivels. 1. The following vowels are lengthened : — A in Homer is sometimes lengthened into ai ; this occurs in aleros, ate/, 0701- o/xcu, instead of aer6s, etc. ; so also irapal (also Karaifiaial), in the tragedians dial, and analogous to these, viral, instead of irapd, did, vtt6. a into i\ in Homer, in riepebovrai, riyepefrovrai, i,ve/j.6eis in the Arsis, conse- quently on account of the metre. d into at before i) (Ion.) in rpavpa, Sav/ia and its derivatives : rpwvfxa, ^'vfia, &avfx.dCw ; and in pronouns compounded with avr6s into wv, e, g. ecovrov, v- rov, efiewvTov instead of eavTov, etc. ; so also tcovt6 instead of ravr6. E into et in the Ion. writers before a Liq. in a number of words, e. g. efre** (also in Attic prose), Keiv6s, £e7vos, areivSs, elpwrdw. Homer lengthens e intw* 1 Metrical Diaeresis, is Avhere a word and a foot end togethei . 244 DIALECTS. \j 207 ei according to the necessities of the verse, in other words, also, which in Ionic prose have e, e. g. etV, iireip, ire7pas, end, cppeiara (from (ppeap, a well) ; also befora vowels in adjectives in -eos, e. g. xpucretos j m substantives and pronouns, e. g crireios, 4fjie?o ; in verbs in -e«, e. g. reXelco, irveico, also in e'/ws instead of ews, «w^7; sometimes also in the Augment and Reduplication, e. g. elXTjXov&a, eloi- kvIcu, SeiSta, Set5e%aTOi. E into 7i (Horn, and Dor.), in the Dec. of substantives in -cJ?, e. g. fiacriXevs, Gen. -Tjoj, etc.; farther (also Ion.), in adjectives in -eios, e. g. PaanXrj'ios, royal; likewise in single woi'ds, e. g. KXif'is, KX-niSos (Ion.), etc., instead of K\ds, and in very many substantives in a of Dec. I., e. g. aX^xrrj'tri instead of aXrj^eia. H sometimes into en (iEol.), e. g. &val X*Ph from Xet/j, hand, so also Att. x e P°"'> X 6 / 50 " 1 '; a l so (I° n - and Dor.) before a vowel, in Proparoxytones in -eios, and in Properispomena in -e?a ; in Homer, only in a few Fern, adjectives in -vs, e. g. |207. 1 LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OF VOWELS. 245 iiriT-fjSeos, -677, -qov Ion. instead of -eios witea instead of a>Ke?a from wkvs reXeoSy -e'77, -eov " " -eios /3a&e?7 " fia&<-?a " fia&vs evperj from evpvs •'• " -e?a oa, o~ir4ppw % wreAAa, instead of Kreiveoj yUor a/j.fivd\rei. 8. Prothesis (§ 16, 10) occurs in Homer, in a (&eAa>), 4kzivos (kc7vos), ipvofxaL (pvofiai) ; Homer also often resolves the i^into the vowel €, namely, 44 pari, eeSj/a, 4eiKOO~i, e'icros, eenrov, 44Adofxai, 4epfx4uos. 9. Sometimes, for the sake of the metre, Homer inserts e, e. g. a.SeA(pe6s, K*ve6s, instead of aSeAcpos, news; so also in the Gen. PI. Fern. avr4wv, 7rpa>TeW. To prevent the accumulation of short syllables, he inserts in several compound words an 77 in place of the short vowel, e. g. TavriAey4os, 4Trr)fioAos, 4irrieTau6s 1 oA<77j7T€A€o>, iAa(prjfi6Aos, instead of towA., iirlp., e7rteT., oAiyoir., 4Aa/ree, oirdoiree, eco&ee. § 208. Change of Consonants. 1. In the Ion. dialect, the rough breathing has no effect on the preceding smooth mute, e. g. &7r' ou, iirrj/xepos, ovk ocriws, etc. 2. In the Horn., Ion., and Dor. dialects, a S or & "remains before fx in certain words and phrases (contrary to § 19, 1), e. g. od/xr] instead of 6/xa vp' epa \ to. irp6 | revvTa, II. /u. 283. frvyare \ pa f t v (= Frjv), II. A, 226. Rem. 3. A syllable in itself short, may be used as long or short in the same word, according as it is or is not, in the Arsis, e. g.^Apes "A | pes fiporo \ Xoiye; — avBpes rf i | aaariv and irXeiova \ ''iffacriv. 10. Not unfrequently in Homer, from the mere necessities of the verse, a short vowel is measured as long in the Thesis, when it stands between two long syllables. This occurs in the middle of a word, and oftenest with t, e. g. Z0-& vtto I Se|r | 77, II. 1, 73. rjert irpo \ Stv/jll \ yen, II. 3, 588 ; this is rarely the case at the end of a word, C. g. irvKva \ pcayaXz \ rji/, Od. p, 198. tj7 8' eirl | iikv Too I 701 BXoov I puirls | £(TTeL ( t/ )i KOLT ^ opeacpi(v), airb, Sia, e/c o~Tr}&eo~ becomes -co when a vowel or p precedes (still Alveieco, II. e, 534). Thus there occur in Homer, 'Ep/neias, Gen. 'Ep/ieiao and 'Epjxsico : BoperjS, Gen. Bopeao and Bopeco ; 'ATpeiSrjS, ArpeiSdo, and ^ArpeiSeco, iKerao and iKereco ] ivfxfx^xico, 'Acrtco. In Homer, then, the Gen. endings of nouns in -as or -77s, are -ao, -co, or -ecu (not -ov). The Gen. ending -eco, becomes, in the Ion. writers, the usual ending, e. g. iroXiTeco, 'ArpsiSew. 3. The Ace. Sing, and PL of masculines in -77s is commonly formed in the Ion. dialect like the third Dec., e. g. rbv SecnroTea, robs SzcnroTeas from Seo-Trorrjs, -ov, MiAridSea from MtA-ndS?^, -ov. 4. The Gen. PI. of all the endings was originally in -dcov ; -dcov was after- wards contracted into -3>v (Dor. in -av). Homer uses both the uncontracted and contracted forms, e. g. &edW and &e<£i/, irapeidcov and irapeicov. He can also, as in the Gen. Sing., again resolve, by means of e, the -wv originating from -dW; the ending thus becomes -eW, which is commonly pronounced with Synizesis, e. g. irvXicov, dvpicov, ayopecov. The Gen. ending -eW becomes in the Ion. writers, the common form, e. g. MovcreW, rifxecov. 5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in -aio~i(v) ; this ending is found in the Dor. writers, in the Att. poets, and even in the older Att. prose writers ; in the Ion. writers, -aio~i was changed into -riari(u) and -77s; and in the Att. and Common language, -aio-i was shortened in -cus. In Homer, the Dat. PL ends in -770-i, -ys, and -ats, yet the last is found only in beats and d/cra?s. 6. The Ace. PL, in -ZEoL, ends in -ais (as in the second Dec. in -01s instead of -ovs), and in Dor. in -as (as in the second Dec. in -os instead of -ovs), e. g. Tats Tip.ats (-ZEol.) instead of rc\s Tifxds (but Dat. PL rijxaio-i) ; iraaas Kovoas (Dor.) instead of 7rdcrds novpas. § 212. Second Declension. 1. Nominative Sing. Proper names in -Xaos are changed in the Dor. dialect 'litO -\as (Gen. d, Dat. a), e. g. MeveAds instead of Mevehaos, Ni/coAds, 'Apueai- Kas. 2. Genitive Sing. Homer uses both the common form in -ov, and that in -010 ; jhe tragedians, also, in the lyric passages, use the ending -010. Theocritus has the Dor. ending -co and -010. 3. Genitive Sing, and PL Some genitives are formed according to the analogy of the first Dec. (a) Herodotus has some Masc. proper names in -os with the ending -eco in the Gen. Sing., e. g. Bdrreco instead of Bdrrov, Kpoicrew, KAetyi/JpoVeco, Mefjifihidpeco, and some Masc. common nouns with the ending ♦ 213.] THIRD DECLENSION. 251 -eW in the Gen. PL, e. g. Tretro-eW; (b) The ending -dwv instead of tl e Ion, -eW belongs to the Dor. (comp. alyav instead of alydoov from a?£, § 213, 5). 4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect ends in -ouv instead of -oiv., e. g. &IXOUV instead of iopoiy (§ 207, 9). 5. The Dat. PL originally ended in -oiai{v). This form, as well as the abridged form in -ois is found in Homer and in all the poets, and in Ion. prose 6. The Ace. PL ends, in the Dor. writers (except Pindar) in -cos and in -os (like -os in the first Dec, § 211, 6), e. g. tois . 6/j.ws, v6y.os, so also rebs Kay6s, the hares ; JEol. in -ois, e. g. ivacraaXois instead of -ovs. 7. Attic Declension. The Gen. Sing, in the Epic dialect ends in -<2o, instead of -w, in Tlr}veXewo (II. £, 489 ; though most MSS. have Ur}ve\4oio) from nrjve- Keoos, and in Uerecoo from ileVews. — In yaAas, sister-in-law, "Abas and K<2s, the w originating by contraction, is resolved, in the Epic dialect, by means of o; hence yaXScos, 'A&ocos, k6ojs, Gen. -6o). On the words yeXcos, ISpws, epais, see $ 213, 7. 8. Contracted forms of the second Dec. are rare in Homer, namely, vovs only Od. k, 240 (elsewhere v6os), x^^dppovs, II. A, 493 (but v, 138. xei/iappoos) and X^appoi, II. 8, 452. also Tldv&ovs, ndV&ou, ndv&cp. Homer does not contract other words; in words in -eos, -eov, he either lengthens the e into et (§ 207, 1), or employs Synizesis, as the measure requires. $213. Third Declension. 1. In the Dor. uialect the long a here also takes the place of 77, e. g. u&v, fxavos instead of \x-r\v, fxrjvos, etc., "EAAdy, "EAAd^es, iroi/xau instead of iroi/xrii', Gen -4vos, veSras, -dros instead of vg6tt)s, -tjtos. Alfrfip, frhp, Sijpcs, and all names of persons in -r-fjp, are exceptions to this Dor. usage. 2. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, on the contrary, 77 commonly takes the place of the long a, as also elsewhere, e. g. &cfy>7j£, ofy£, '/p7?£ instead of 3-c6pd|, tepd£. 3. The Dat. PL in the Epic dialect, ends, according to the necessities of the measure, in -, instead of yeXcora and yeXcori, %pa> instead of epcori. 8. Words in -is, 1 Gen. -iSos. The Horn., Ion., and Dor. dialects often inflect these substantives, particularly proper names, in -ios, e. g. /xrjvios, Horn., Qe/xios, Herod., Qenos, Dat. Qerl, Horn. Those ending in -is, -idos, in the Epic dialect have the Dat. only in -i instead of -Si. Substantives in -77'f's, -rjidos, ai-e sometimes contracted in the inflection, by the poets, e. g. iraprjis, Trapjjdos (instead of iraprj'iSos), N^prj'/'s', NrjpfjSes. See § 54 (c). 9. Tbe Neut. ovs, aros, ear, is in Dor. 3>s, aros, etc, and in Horn, ovas, Gen ovcltos, PI. ovaTa ; tbe Neuters, areap,fat; ov&ap, udder, and irelpap, end, have -aTos in the Gen., namely, arearos, ov&ara, ireipara, ireipa.cn. In the words repas, Kepas, upeas, the Epic writers reject t, e. g. repaa, -doiv, -deaai(u) ; Kepq Dat.; PI. Kepa, xepdoov, -at(T(Ti(v), and -ao-i(v) ; PL Kpea, Kpedcov, Kpeuiu, and Kpeiajv, Kpeaai(i>). Among the Ionic writers these words, like fiperas, etc. (§61, Rem. 1), often change the a into e, e. g. K€psos, Kepea, /cepeW, to. repsa, Kpeecrcn(v). See § 54 (c). 10. In the words irarrip, \xt\ti)p, etc., Homer either retains or rejects the e through all the Cases, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. avepos and auSpos, avipi and avSpi, etc., but only apdpcoi/, avdpdat, and -ecrai] yaarrip, ya. See § 56, Pvcm. 1. 12. In -avs, -evs, -ovs. Of ypavs, there are found in Homer only the Nom yprjvs and yp-qvs, Dat. yprfi and the Voc yp-qv and yp-qv. In the Ion. dialect, also, the long a is changed to 77 ; thus, Gen. yprjos, PL yprjes ; this also appears in vavs, navis, see the Anomalies. — The word &ovs is regularly declined in Her., hence Nom. PL p6es, Ace. fiovs ; in the Ace PL Homer uses both $6as and fiovs. On the Epic Dat. fi6e XP '^ XP^ a - — The Ion. dialect fre- quently forms the Acc. Sing, in -ovv instead of -co, e. g. 'Ic£, 'low, tjcos, r\ovv. — The iEol. Gen. Sing, ends in -cos, e. g. aXZcos, ^dircpcos instead of aldovs, ~Xaircpovs , thus, in Moschus, ras 'Ax&s. See § 60. 17. In (a) -as, Gen. -00s. In Homer, the Dat. Sing, is either uncontracted or contracted, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. yfjpdt and yvpa, SeVa, o-eAa. But the Nom. and Acc. PI. is always contracted, e. g. Seira. — On those in -as, Gen. -eos, see § 61 (a), and Rem. 1. (b) In -os, Gen. -eo s. The Epic dialect, according to the necessities of the verse, has sometimes the uncontracted and sometimes the contract forms, except in the Gen. PL, which is always uncontracted. The Gen. Sing, is also uncontracted, except in some substantives which contract -eos, as in the Dor., into -evs ; thus, 'Epefievs, &dpo~evs, yevevs, &dp.f$evs, &epevs ; Dat. Sing. &epei" and bepei, /caAAei' and /caAAet. Nom. and Acc. Plurals in -ea, commonly remain uncontracted, but they must be pronounced with Synizesis, i. e. as one syllable, e. g. veUea, /3e'Aea. — The Ion. dialect is like the Epic. — In s; -vs and -v, Gen. -vos, Att. -ews: — (a) The words in -Is, Att. Gen. -ecus, in the Epic and Ionic dialect, retain 1 of the stem through all the Cases, and in the Dat. Sing, always suffer contrac- tion, and usually in the Ace. PL in the Ionic writers, and sometimes also in Homer (-« = -I, -las = -Is), e. g. ttSAis, tt6Aios, ttoAI, ttoAiv, iroAies, iroXicw, itSAkti, irSkias, and rroAIs. In the Dat. Sing, however, the ending -ei" and -et is found in Homer, e. g. irocrei and irSaei from iv6cris ; in some words, the 1 of the stem is changed into e in other Cases also, e. g. iirdx^eis instead of iiraA^ias, iTrd\£eV Dat. npacri(v) Ace. Kpdara " icdp-nva 3. A«as (6, sfo?ze, Horn., instead of Aas), Gen. Aaos, Dat. Aai', Ace. Aacw, Gen. PL Aoco//, Dat. \ae an ^ -eo"o"i(i') in Homer), x e 'p as « Remark 1. Metaplasm (§72) occurs in Homer in the following words aXu-ti, rj, strength, Dat. a\iATET2 ) j lec kt), r), pur- suit, Ace. tw/ca ('IHE) *, vcrfxivr], r), battle, Dat. vcrfxivi (verbis) ; — UarpoKXos, Gen na-rpo'/cAoi/ and -k\t)os, Ace. -kAo^ and -/cA^a, Voc. -/cAets (ITATPOKAH2) ; aW ttoSov, to, slave, Dat. PL cb'8pa7ro'o'ea'0'i(z>) 5 irposcoirov, to, ^/ace, PL irposccTrara Trposcoiratri; vtos, 6, son, has from 'TIET2 and 'TI2 the following forms : Gen uieos and ulos, Dat. vie? and uft, Ace. iuea and via ; Dual ufe ; Nom. PL wees and vle?s and ufes, Dat. vidtri, Ace. w'eas and uTas 5 — Old'nrovs, Gen. Oi5i7rd'8ao ( 5 OIAinOAH2). Rem. 2. The following are defective in Homer : Am Dat. and to. \?ra, linen ; \?s and \?v = AeW and Xeovra ; p-dari and ydcmv = pdcrriyi and -a ; o-Ti%^s, aTixes, (TTt'xas, row ; oWe, toj, Nom. and Ace. Dual, both eyes ; ocpeXos, advantage, and r)dos, pleasure, in the Nom. only; i)pa, something pleasing, and de/xas, form, in the Ace. only ; fjAeo's, infatuated, Voc. ^Ae' and rAee ; finally, 8<2, «/>?, *oA(pt, as Nom. and Ace. Sing., from which come the forms Sw/xa, house, Kp&ii, barley, &\ 443. 6. 'Epirjpes from ipi-npos, epvadpfiares and -as from ipvadpfiaros, are examples of Metaplastic forms of adjectives in Homer. § 216. Comparison. 1. In the Epic dialect, the endings -urepos and -c^Taros are used for the sake of the metre, even when the vowel of the preceding syllable is long, e. g. d'i£vpct)Tepos, 6'i£vpd!>TaTos, tcaiw^ewuTepos, Xapwruros. — 'Avrnp6s, troublesome, has the Comparative avi-npiarepov, Od. /3, 190, and dxapis, disagreeable, axapiarepos, Od. v, 392. Comp. § 82, Rem. 6. Adjectives in -vs and -pos, in the Homeric dialect, form the Comparative and Superlative in -low, -iov, and -taros, -tj, -ov, sometimes also regularly, e. g. iXaxvs, little, i\dxio"ros, y\vnvs yXvKicov, fla&vs, fid&icrTOS, Kvdpos, Kvdiaros, olnrpSs oIktictos and oiKTpoTaTos, iraxvs irdx^Tos, irpeafivs irpeafiio'Tos, wkvs wklo'tos. 2. Besides the anomalous forms of comparison mentioned under § 84, the following Epic and dialectic forms require to be noticed : — ay a^r 6 s, Comp. apeiwu, Xw'iwv, AauYepos (Ion. Kpio-ffuiv, Dor. Kappwv), Sup. KapTltfTOS. kcik6s, KaKcarepos, x ei poTepos, xepeuui/, %epei($repos (Dor. x e PV wv i Ion. 'iffffoov), Sup. ^kio-tos (II. i//, 531, with the variation i]Kiaros, which Spitzner prefers). 6\lyos, Comp. d\i(wv (6\i(oves faav, populi suberant statura minores, II. v ) always has the signification of the Compara- tive, less, baser, weaker. The PL 7rAees and (Ace.) 7rAeas are found in Homer from the Comp. ivxiwv. Rem. 2. In the Epic dialect, the forms of the Comparative and Superlative, in many instances, are derived from Substantives ; some of these forms have been transferred to the Common language: 6 fiaaiAevs fSaaiXevTepos] rb ic4p8os, gain, ic4p5iov, more lucrative, Kepditrros ; rb 'd\yos, pain, aKylwv, more painful, 'd\yi and (before a vow- v Epic ; eyw Mol. ; TvvTj Epic and eywv ^Eolic G. ifi4o, ifiev, fiev (fiev) ret) Dor.; cr4o (creo), eo (eo), eS (eu) Epic Epic and Ion. crev ( Epic «i> Epic Doric o-cpeiwv Epic D. fjfitv, rifJ.iv, r\fxiv Epic bfiiv, vfiiv, vfj.lv Epic dfifii(v) Mo\. and Ep. ; vfifii(v) Epic e)Epic(Il.T,265.) 5tible of inclination are a(r Dor., to7o and reu Epic, tcls Dor. ; Dat. tS. Dor. ; Ace. rdv Dor. ; PI. rot and rax Dor. and Epic ; Gen. rdcou Epic, rau Dor. ; Dat. to?o-j, tcwo-i, 7-7707, and ttJs Epic ; Ace. T(t>s, tos Dor. (b) o5e: Epic Dat. PI. TO?sSeo-i and ro7sdeo-(ri instead of roisde ; Epic Dat. roio-iSe instead of To?sSe is found also in the Tragedians. (c) ouros and clvtSs: an e stands before the long inflection-endings in the Ion. dialect (§ 207, 10), e. g. rovrdov, TavTzys, rovTea, rovreovs, avrdrj, avreow. (d) iiceivos is written in Ion. and also in Att. poetry kwos, iEol. ktjvos, Dor. rrjvos. (e) On the Ion. forms wvt6s, tcqvt6 instead of 6 avrSs, to clvt6, see §§ 206, 1, and 207, 1. 5. Relative pronouns : Dor. and Horn., instead of os ; ofo Ion. and Epic ; oov Epic seldom, erjs II. tt, 208 ; rj (rew), rep (rep) Epic and Ion. ; PI. &(Tcra Neut., G7r7ror &o-8dvu. 5. In Homer, the verbs oluoxoew and avMvoi, take at the same time both the syllabic and temporal augment, viz. iwvoxoei, II. 8, 3, yet more frequently cpvo- X.6ei ; e-nvdave and rivdave. 6. The reduplication of p is found in Homer, in pepvirwfievos, from pvirSa, to make dirty. On the contrary, the Epic and poetic Perfects, efx.fj.opa from fj.eipofj.ai and earo'vfj.ai from o-evw, are formed according to the analogy of those beginning with p, i. e. by Metathesis ; hence efj.fj.opa, etc., instead of fie/xopa. — The Epic and Ion. Perf. of KTaofiai is eKT7]fiai. A strengthened reduplication is found in the Horn, forms Seidexarai and SeiSe/cro. 7. In the Epic dialect, the second Aor. Act. and Mid. also often takes the reduplication, which remains through all the modes. In the Ind. the simple augment e is commonly omitted; thus, e. g. Kafivw, to grow weary, Subj. Aor. KeKd/j.EN,Q, to murder, eirecpvov, irecpvov; cppd£o>, to say, to she* ireeppadov, etre & grieve, Epic and Ion. aK-rix^^h at-dxw al 5 'ENEKX2 (cpepw), to carry, Ion. eV- rji/eiyfxai ; ipe'iira, to demolish, Poet, ip-rjpnra, Epic ip-epnrro : ipi^ai, to contend, Epic £p-7ipiiju, aydyw/xi, tvx^i, 'ikw/jli, i&eAoofju, X^ci}[xi. Comp. § 116, 1. 2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. In the Dor., and particularly in the iEol. and Ep. dialect, the lengthened form -trS-o is found (§ 116, 2). In the Ind., this belongs almost exclusively to the conjugation in -fj.i, e. g. ri^na^a, (pTJcr&a, Sidourfra, TraprjaSia. In Homer, this ending is frequent in the Subj., e. g. i&etya- &a, dirria&a, more seldom in the Opt., e. g. K\aloip7) (3). — The ending -eo in Homer is lengthened into - e 1 o, e. g. epeio, o-7re?o, and the ending -e'ecu is contracted into -e?ot, in verbs in -4a, e. g. fiv&elai, veiat. Homer sometimes drops cr in the second Pers. Sing. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, also, viz. /xe/xv-nai (and fie/Apy), BcfiATjai, icrffvo. 11. The Dual endings -riqv, -(T&rjv, and first Pers. Sing, -firiv, in the Doric are, -rdu, -cr&dv, -p.dv (§ 201, 2), e. g. 4(ppa(rd/xdv. In the later Doric, the change of 77 into d is found, though seldom, even in the Aor. Pass., e. g. irv-irdv instead of 4tvttt)v. 12. The personal-endings -fie&ov, -fiefra, in Epic, as well as in Doric, Ionie, and Attic poetry, often have the original forms -fxea-^rou, -/xeaba, e. g. rinrTo^tr- bov, TU7TTo7ieo-fra. 13. The third Pers. PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., in the Ionic and Epic dialect, very generally ends in -otcu, -aro, instead of -vrai, -vto, e. g. 7re7ref- Scltcu, TreiravaTai, ifiefiovAeva,To, iv instead of TVTrT4a&to(rav. 16. The long mode-vowels of the Subj., viz. u> and 77, are very frequently shortened in the Epic dialect into and e, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. tofiev instead of Ycc/xev; second Aor. Xafiriv, instead of x a ' l P* lv -> Xafietv. 20. The Inf. ending of the Aor. Pass. -r)[x.evat, -r)/j.ev, is abridged into i\v in the Doric writers, yet only after a preceding long syllable, e. g. y.e&vcr&riv instead of Si\vai. The Inf. ending of the Perf. Act. varies between -r/v and -etv in the Doric and JEolic writers, e. g. re^ecop-fjicriv, yeyoveiv instead of refreaf yuevcu, yryovdveu. §§ 221, 222. J CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION JN VERBS 263 21. Participle. The iEolic dialect has the diphthong oi instead of ov before tr in participles, and ai instead of a, e. g. Tvirrav, rvTrroicra, tvtttov, A-a/3o7era, Kiirciiaa instead of -ovo*a; Tv-tyais, -cucra, instead of rvxpas, -acra (§§ 201, 2, and 207, 1). The Epic dialect can lengthen the accented o into a in the oblique cases, e. g. (xefxaaros, irecpvuras. — The Perf. Act. Part., in the Doric dialect, sometimes takes the ending of the Pres., e. g. TrecppiKovres instead of -rrecppiKdres. § 221. Epic and Ionic Iterative form. 1. The Ionic and particularly the Epic dialect, and not unfrequently, in imitation of these, the Tragedians, have a special Impf. and Aor. form with the ending -ctkov, to denote an action often repeated, or continued. This is called the Iterative form. It is regularly without the augment. 2. It is generally found only in the Sing, and in the third Pens. PL Ind. of the Impf. and Aor., and is inflected like the Impf. ; for in the Impf. and second Aor. Act. and Mid., the endings -ctkov, -vices, to attack) 264 DIALECTS. 1$ 222. (2) In some words, o is changed into e, viz. peyoheov from ^vowdw, jjrrco* from avrdu, o>o'/cAeoj/ from 6/j.0K\da>. Comp. § 201, 1. (3) Instead of the uncontracted and contracted forms, the contracted syllable is resolved, as often as the measure requires it ; this is done by inserting a simi- lar vowel, commonly shorter, more seldom longer, before the vowel formed by contraction ; in this way, a is resolved into dd or dd, and a into oa or wot (§ 207, 2). The short vowel is used here, when the syllable preceding the contracted one is short, e. g. (6pa>) 6p6w ; but if this syllable is long, the long vowel must be used on account of the verse, e. g. yi&woocra. The resolution does not take place with the vowel d before a personal-ending beginning with t, e. g. Spa-rat, Spu-To. Thus : — (opdets) 6py.s 6 pacts (opdco) Spec Sp6co (opdtcr&at) bpao~Sat S paacr&at (opdovcra) Spcoaa dpouxra ( t uevoipdei) fxevoiva [j.ei/ot.vcLa (fiodovcrt) fioaxrt /3 o6w(Ti (idr;s) ias iotas [opdoLfju) bpapu SpScp/nt (ixvdecr&cu) /j.vacr&ai lxvo.acr&ai {hpaovai) dpcocri dpC&CO(T l. Remark 1. In Od. ij, 343, the form oprjat (from opdeat i occurs instead of tl bpriai, which Eustath. cites. In the following Dual forms, ae is contracted into 7j : Trposavd-fiTTiv, o~v\i\Tr)v, avvavT-nrrju, , see § 220, 18, and on the Epic-Ionic contraction of or\ into a, see § 205, 5. B. Verbs in -eco. To this conjugation belong also all Futures in -4 and -4o/xai, all second Persons in -eo, -ecu, and -tjcw, second Aor. Inf. Act. in -eew, and the Aor. Pass. Subj. in -4a and -eto>. (1) Contraction does not take place in all forms in which e is followed by the vowels a, a, 7}, 7), ot, and ov, e. g. (piAea/u.ev, ovTa, 4 above) ; or they become wholly analogous to verbs in -da, since they resolve -overt, (third Pers. PI. Pres.) into -6 a, fj.i has a double form, either the abridged form in -4v instead of -eiv, e. g. izotev instead of iroielv, or according to the analogy of verbs in -doo, a form in -rjv (from -ir\v), e. g. (pi\?iv instead of , c. g. enr6va(Ta instead of iir6i>ri, e. g. Kopeei, H. 3-, 379. nopeeis, H. v, 831. fiaxeovrai, H. j8, 366 ; — in verbs in - aw, after dropping , ipvovcri and ravvovai are found. 4. In the Doric dialect, all verbs in - ^0 take £ instead of , to smite. 6. Liquid verbs in -alvw, which in the Attic dialect form the Aor. with the ending -ava instead of -7)m (§ 149, Rem. 2), have d in the Doric, and t\ in the Epic and Ionic. The following liquid verbs, in the Epic and poetic dialect of all periods, form the Eut. and first Aor. with the ending -ceo and -, to crowd together (Zxcxcu) ; Kvpca, to meet, to fall upon; apapiaKw ('AP-H), to Jit ('fjpo-a, dpcrcu) ; op-vvfj.1, to excite (opera, dbpera) ; Siacp&eipco, to destroy (SLacp&epffai in Homer) ; Keipco, to shave (eicepaa in Homer, but first Aor. Mid. iKeipdfir]v) ; . 10. The exchange of the endings of the second Aor. with those of the first Aor. (§ 154, 7) is somewhat frequent in the Epic dialect, e.g. /3alvw, to go, ifi-f](T€To, Imp. /3^. op a 1 eo, tipcrev; (pepco, to bear, olae (olo-e is also Att.), oftreTe, olairu, olaovruv, olcrefiei/, olffepei/cu ', de/5«, to sing, Imp. oeiireo. 11. Several second Aorists, in Homer, are formed by a Metathesis of tne consonants (§ 156), in order to make a dactyle, e. g. ehpanov instead of edapKov (from h4pKop.ai), eirpa&ov (from ir4p&w), edpa&ov (from Sap&dvu), ^fiPporov (instead of ^fxaprov from afxaprdvoo). Eor the same reason Homer syncopates the Stem (§ 155), e. g. aypSfiePos from ayepeoftai (ayelpcc, to collect) ; eypero, eypeo (Imp.), eypoiro, eypeoftai (with the accent of the Pres.), iyp6/nevos from iyepeofircu (iyeipw, to wake) ; TTT6/xr}u, inrrdfiTiv, iTTeo'&cu, '/rrofieuos (ireTOfiai, to fly) ; 4k4k\€to, /ce/cAe-ro, K€K\6y.evos (k4\o(icu, to summon, excite) ; ir4, to Wow (IfyiVdij* and idpvfrnv, afnrvvv&i)). 13. Homer forms a first Perf. only from pure verbs, and such impure verbs as in the tense-formation assume an e (§ 166) or are subject to Metathesis (§ 156, 2), e. g. xaipw Kexdpr]Ka (from XAIPE-il), /3aAAo> ySe^ATj/ca (from BAA). Except these, he forms only second Perfects (which belong commonly to intransitive verbs, or have an intransitive signification) ; but even in pure verbs and in the impure verbs mentioned above, he rejects the k in certain persons and modes, and regularly in the Part. ; in this way, these forms become analo- gous to those of the second Perf. These participles either lengthen a and e into 77, e. g. PefSap-ndos, burdened (from BAPEH), Ketcopiqws, satisfied (from nopi-vvvfii), KeKOTrjws, enraged (from kot£w), rerirjcis, troubled (from TIEfl), tetXtjws, enduring (from TAAH), KeKacp-nws, gasping for breath (from KA$En), KeKfirjas, wearied (from Ka/AVto), 7reTTTT]u>s (from TTTr,, to shrink through fear), re&vncas, K£kt7]6ti, Ksx a ' D7]u)s (from x a ' l P a ) i — or ^ey retain, though more seldom, the stem-vowel without change, e. g. fie/Satis (from fiatvco, BAH), inyeyav7a (from yiyvo/icu, TAD.), Seddws (from 5t5a, AAA), ire), fiefiaicvTa (of fi€fir}KCt>s, from firjicdofiai.), re^rd\v7a (of refrnXcvs, from ftoAAw), AeAa/cuTa (of XeXrjKws, from Acmttcw). ireira&vut (from 7racrxco). Remark 1. The form resolved by e, in the Ionic dialect, has become the permanent one with some participles, e. g. iarews; so Te£h/ecfo (never tc&vws) and Te&j/7]Kc6s from refrvnKa, remains even in the Attic dialect. In these forms, the a> remains through all the cases, e. g. ecrrews, eareuaa, ecrredes, Gen. earearos, -d>ar]s renews, re&ve&ffa, re&vews, Gen. Te&ve&Tos, -uxtt]s. Be&7)Ka and rirXriKa never have these forms. Comp. § 193, Rem. 3. 14. Some verbs, which in the stem of the Pres. have the diphthong eu, shorten it in the Epic and poetic dialect into v. in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. vevfrofiai, to ask, ireirva- fiat ; rrevw, to shake, Mid. and Pass, to hasten, ea-av- fiat, first Aor. Pass, icravdr-nv: revxo) (poet.), paro, Perf. rervyfiai, Aor. iTvx&V "'i (pevyw, to flee, Perf. irecpvyfievos. Rem. 2. Xe'co (formed from x^ w i X e " w )> to pour out, follows the analogy of these verbs, in the forms Kexi>Ka, Ke'xfyxai, ix"^V v ; these forms have been trans- ferred to the Common language also (§ 154, Rem. 1). Contrary to the analogy $ 224. CONJUGATION IN -fit. 269 just stated, the v is long in the Homeric form ir4irvvfj.ai from irvsw {icviFw), to blow. Eem. 3. In Homer, Od. ; so /Aai " bi-oofxai, etc. Rem. 2. Here also the two Aorists of the Pass, of all verbs are like th& verb Ti^r)fj.i, e. g. tvttu), -fjs Ion. Tvireca, -eys, -ea/mey, -eriTe Sa,ua>, -ps " 8a/J.4a, -4rjs, -ew/jiev, -erjre evpe&a, -fjs " eupe&ea>, -e^s, etc. (c) Verbs in o (SiSw^t) ; the contracted second Aor. Subj. is "esolved in Homer by means of a, e. g. Sdwai instead of 8w, (TTeicc, /3eiO£U» 2. CTrjs arrjris 3. (Try ]7), i/xl3rjr), cri(y), irepiaTrjcacri, 11. p, 95. Sing. 1. &a &ew, 3-eioj, 8ap.ei(a 2. bits beys, fr-hys, and &elrjs 3. a$ Srer), 3-77??, avi)r], and /xcfreir) Dual. &7JT0V S-eieTov Plur. 1. frufAev frewfAev, SeiojAev 2. &TJT€ da/xeiere 3. &wcri(v) &4wcri{v), &€iwai(i/) Sing. 1. Ba 2. 8$s 3. 8$ 8ct>r)(n(v) and 8d>r) Plur. 1. Swfiev SdlOfJLeV 2. Sane 3. 8w(Tl(j/) 8a>(f}(Ti(v) Rem. 3. The resolution by means of e is found in verbs with the stem- vowels o or c; the e is commonly lengthened, (a) into ei before an o sound, (b) into 7) before 77 in verbs with the stem-vowel a; (c) sometimes into et, some- times into 77 before rj, in verbs with the stem-vowel e. Verbs with the stem- vowel are resolved by 00. 10. The Imiif. erid-Tjy, or commonly £tiSovv, has in the Ion. the form iri&ea (like eTeTvcpea Ion. instead of ireTvcpeii/, § 220, 8), eW&ees, -ee, etc. 11. In Homer, a shortened form of the first Aor. iarr\(ra.v, is found, namely, eoraaav, they placed, II. /x, 56. Od. 7, 182. o~eir. 225. Ei>i ('E3-), :o be. PRESENT S. 1. 9 Indicative, efifii ^Eol., instead of itr-fil ia-ai Epic, also Eur. Hel. 1250. eh Ion. evri Dor. elfieu Epic and Ion. icr4 regular ea Epic and Ion. er)(T&a Epic, las Ion. IV Ep. and Ion. tfrjv, l\ev, eo-Ke(v), Ep., tfs Dor. Tj'trTT]!/ Epic ^uej/ or -f] fx.es, elfxev or elfj.es Dor. eare Ion. eVaz/ (eireaav) Epic and Ion. 5 etsro (instead of rjUTo) Od. v, 106. Optative. eois eoi Epic and Ion. e?Te Epic elev Epic .Firf. effofxai. and eatrofiai, etc. Epic, according to the necessities of the verse, 2. eVeca. 3. ecrerai, eVerrai. § 226. ET/xt ('I-), to go. Pres. Ind. S. 2. eTcrS-a Epic, e?s Ion. Subj. Sing. 2. Pers. 'tyo-fra Epic /n£ 'ijxevai, ffxev Epic imjo/] The?, S. 1. f/ia (and pW) Epic and Ion., ^'i'oj/ Epic 2. ^'tes (and yeis), Yes Epic 3. ¥fie (and pet) Epic and Ion., rfie{v) Epic, ^e(v), fc(j') Epic 272 DIALECTS. [§ 227 P. 1. I rjofjiep 3. ij'iov Epic, ij'iiray and ytrav Epic and Ion., Kaav Epic D. 3. fr^ Epic Opt. S. 3. foi Epic, Uir) II. t, 209. (eV and ei^ II. o, 82. a, 139. Od. |, 496 come from ci/jlI}. Fut. and Aor. Mid. efooftai, eiVaTO, third Pers. Dual hicru, which in the Pres., Perf., and second Aor. Act. and Mid., follow the analogy of Verbs in -p.i. $ 227. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid. In addition to the Aor. forms mentioned (§§ 191, 192), the poetic and especially the Epic dialect has the following : — A. The Characteristic is a Vowel. (a) Stem-Vowel a {ifrqv, BA-) : jSaAAw, to throw. Epic second Aor. Act. (BAA-, e/3A7?j/) ^vpL^X-nr-nv, Od. U. 273 (b) Stem- Vowel e (&r0ip, 2BE-): AAA, Epic, stem of SiSaor/cw, to teach, second Aor. Act. (AAE-) iddrjv, I learned, Subj. Saw, Epic Saeico, Inf. Sa^vai, Epic da-fj/xevai. (c) Stem-Vowel :: , to consume and to vanish, Epic second Aor. Mid. icpSt/xriv, (pfriofrcu, X"^ vos ' B. The Characteristic is a Consonant. aAAo^tat, to leap, Epic and second Aor. Mid. a\» to w/uW, Epic eAeAi/CTO. iKveo/jLcu, to come, Epic f/cro, "kjasvos and 1lk(j.€vos, favorable. AEXX1, to Jte etoww, Epic iAey/xTju, eAe/cTo, to /ay one's self down (same sense as i\€^dfxr]j/), Imp. Ae|o. — Ae7«, to collect, to chouse, to count, Od. i, 335. £\ey/ji.i)p l I counted myself, Od. 5, 451. Ae/cro apibfiov, he counted the number. iwxivw, to soil, Epic (iidv&Tjv (third Pers. Dual, instead of ifj.idv-cr&'nu). uiffyo) (fxiyi/v/u), to mix, Epic [xikto. bpvvo) (6pi>v/xi), to excite, Epic S>pro, Inf. 6p&cu, Imp. opffo, t>p, to fear ; besides the forms mentioned (§ 193). the following Epic forms are to be noted: Setdi/xev, SeiSn-e; Inf. deidi/xev instead of Sedievai; Imp. SeiStSn, define; — Plup. iSeidifiev, idsiSiaav. EpxofJ-ai, to come, Perf. Epic elX-fiXov&a instead of eXiiXv&a, PI. elX'f)Xov&uev. bvr)s, Te&vquvla, Te&vrjxSs or re&veds (re&vewcra. Demosth. 40, 24), re&veas (Epic re&vr}cos, -cotos, -tjotos), Inf. reSrvavai (Aesch. reSrvavai from re&vaevai, Epic TeSrvdfxev, -dfxevai) : Plup. ere&vdcrav, Opt. re^va'ir\v. TAAfl, to endure (second Aor. erXrjv), Perf. TerXrjKa, TETAAA: Dual rerXdrov; PL TerXdfxev, TerXdre, reTXdai(v), Imp. TerXd&i, -area, etc., Subj. wanting, Inf. TerXavai (Epic rerXafxev), but Part. Epic rerXyjcos ; Plup. Dual ere-fXdrov, eTerX&TTjv, PL irerXajxev, ererXdre, ererXdaav, Opt. rerXairfV. MAil, to strive, Perf. /xe/xova; MEMAA : Epic /xe/xdfxev, -drov, -are, -ddai(f), Imp. fxefxaru), Pai't. fxe/xdws, Gen. fxe/xdu>7os and fj.ejxd.oTos, third Pers. PL Plup. Here belong the two participles of Bifipdo-Kw, to eat (second Aor. efipwv), Perf. BeBpccxa, poet. f3eBpws, Gen. -wtos; 7rnrTO>, to ^/aZ/, ireTrrcoKa, Epic 7re7rrec6s, Att. poet. ireirTws. (b) The Stem ends in a Consonant. It is to be observed in respect to the formation, that when the consonant of the stem comes before a personal-ending beginning with t, the t is changed into 3-, and thus these forms assume the appearance of a Mid. form, e. g. vetfrw, to persuade, ireiroi&a, to trust, Epic Plup. iireTri&jxev, Imp. in Aeschyl- Eum. 602, TreTreioSri (instead of ireTria&i). Remark. Thus the Epic form Treiroa^re, stem I1EN0 with the variable o (nON0), instead of TreirouSfare from ird(rx<» '-, from ireirov^are by dropping the connecting vowel a, comes ireVo^Te; and hence as a Tau-mute before another Tau-mute is changed into c (§ 17, 5, comp. 'Hi-re = tare), ireirov&Te becomes ireTra va&e, and as v is dropped before a, ire-noo-re ; finally, this form, as has been Been, assumed the appearance of the Mid. form (&e) and so became ireirov&e. Perf. Ind. S. D.2. 3. KeKpdya, -as, -e(v) (upafa, to bawl) Plup. eKenpayeiv, -eis, -ei neKpayaTov Kenpax^ov eKeupdyeiTOV etcexpaxSov nenpayarov fcenpax&ov eKeKpayeirrfv eKeKpdx&W $ 229.J VERBS IN -0) LIKE VERBS IN -/Xl. 275 P. 1. KeKpayay-eu KsKpayfxev iKefcpdyeifxev iiceKpayfiey 2. kg repay are Kenpax&e iKeupdyeire iictKpax&e 3. KeKpayaaiiv) iKeKpayeierav, -effav Imp. KeKpax&h -dx&<>>, -ax^ e > etc - I nr "- i^xpayivai. Part. KeKpaydbs. So the Epic Perf. ai/a>7a with the sense of the Pres. I command, dvooyas, dvaye, PL duay/xey: Imp. dvceye and Sywx&i, dvcoyeTco and ai/ct>x&a>, dvcayere and & z/ co % & e ; Subj. dvwyiy, Inf. dvcayefxev ; Plup. r]va>yea, rjvcoyei ; Opt. ayafyots. iyeipco, to awaken, Perf. iyprjyopa (stem 'ErEP with the variable 0), Jam awalce; from this, Homer has the forms: Imp. iyp-fiyopfre instead of iypriySpare, Inf. iypriyop&at. (as if from iyp^yopfxai) and ey/rjjy^pfrcur^j/) instead of iyprjySpa- ), Part. j5u?a Epic and elBvTa. Plup. 1. Pers. Sing. fjSea (hence the Att. rfSt}) Epic instead of rjdeiv 2. " " yeiSeis and ijdSrjs Epic instead of ijdeis 3. " " f?et5ei and 776/877, #5ee(j/), Epic instead of r^Set; — fciSe, Herod. 3. " PL icrav Epic instead of fjSecray. Eut. etSTjcw Epic and also efoofiai. ioiKa, lam like, Epic, eitcrcv (Dual), iiicrriv (Plup. Dual) ; hence in Plup. Mid. or Pass. ei'/cTo. $ 229. (3) Present and Imperfect. Finally, there are certain forms of the Pres. and Impf. mostly in the Epic dialect, which after the analogy of verbs in -fxi, take the personal-endings with- out the Mode-vowel. Thus : — duvca, to complete, in Theocritus: Impf. dvv-fi.es (instead of fjvvofiev), &vv-to (instead of ijvueTo). ravvoi, to stretch, to span, II. p, 393. rdvv-Tai (instead of ravverai). ipva, to draw, epvrai, ttpvTO, ipvro, epvao, pvcr&ai (§ 230). , to carry, Epic Imp. , and a (Ep.), to hear, only Pres. and Impf aar6s (d-daros). aiov. Comp. eVa'/'w. kyaiopcu., Epic and Ion. prose (§ 164) d/cax'C a ' (Epic), to trouble, stem 'AXH, and aydo/jLai (Ep.), to be angry at, and second Aor. jjnaxov, Fut. d/tax^o-co, in the Pres. Epic also to grudge, to first Aor. y\K.dxr\aa ; Mid. d/axxiCoM« £ ! e?2V?/, Fut. aydao/xai ; Aor. r\y, to /ead, Epic second Aor. Imp. comes from the Perf. Act. a|eTe, Inf. d\ep.€vtxi, d^e/xeu (§ 223, aKrideco, to neglect, Aor. a.Kide(Te(u}. 10) ; first Aor. Mid. a£a.(T&e, d\avro. dxdopai, to wander about. Ep. Perf. d\d- dei'Sco (prose d'8a>), to S2??<7, Epic second Xrjpcu (§ 219, 8), aXaX-fipevos, dxdx-qv Aor. Imp. daVeo (§ 223, 10). 3-ai (§ 223, Rem. 4). de/pco (prose aipca), to raise, Epic first dxSaivco, to make increase, Epic Aor. Aor. Act. azipa, Mid. deipapr) v, Pass. 7?A.5a^e(i/). depSrnv ; Epic second Aor. Mid. dpo- dXe£w, to &eep o/fj Epic second Aor. p-qu from aipa ; Epic Plup. dccpro rjXaXKou (§ 219, 7), (from 'AAKH) instead of tfpro with the variable dXaXKe?v, dXaXtcwv ; Fut. dXaXK^aco. vowel, and transposition of the aug- dXeopai and dXevopai (Epic), to shun, ment ; Epic Pres. T)epe&opcu (§ 162). Aor. ? nXevdp-nv, Subj. dXerjTai, Opt. 'AHMI, ('AE-.) to Wow; in Homer, are: dXecaro, Imp. dAeW&e, Inf. dAetW&a/ Part, dets, devjos; third Pers. Sing. and dXecur&ai (§ 223, 8). Impf. 07?, dei, Sidei fAEH) ; in the dA^tr/co), dAS-iV/cco (Ion. prose), to heal, other forms, the 17 remains contrary Fut. dA&e|o>, etc. to the analogy of riSripi (§ 224, 6): dAn-cuVo) (Epic and poet.), to sm, Fut. &r)Tov, dr\uai, di)pevai ; Mid. and Pass. dXiTrjcno ; Aor. ijXirov, dXLr6pr)U, aXi- d-npai, to blow, v6pevos teal dyixevos, recr^ai ; Perf. dXn-hpevos, sinful (§ 223, drenched with rain and beaten with the Rem. 4). wind; Impf. Mid. cnjTo. aXXopai, to spring, Epic second Aor. cuSopai and aldeopcu in Homer, to oe Mid. SAcro, etc. (§ 227, B). ashamed, to respect, Epic ald-^cropai, dXvKrew, to 6e zn trouble, Epic Perf. dAa- ??5eV^-77v and rfieadp-qv. XvKT-npai (§ 219, 8). aiuvpi (Ep.), to take (instead of a'l'ppvpcu, dXixTKai (Ep.), to escape, aXv£w, ^'Au|o. § 169, Rem. 1), only Pres. and Impf. aXcpaiva (Ep.), to find, Sec. Aor. dXcpeTu. alpeco, to take, Ion. Perf. dpaipr)Ka, dpai- dp-aprdveo, to miss, Epic Aor. jjpfiporov pnpai (§ 219, 8); Epic second Aor. (§§ 223, 11, and 208, 3). Mid. 7eVTo instead of eXero (§ 227, dp.irXa.Ki; Perf. edSa; Fut J 230. j LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 277 ad-fiffw. — Aug., § 219, 4, 5. In The- Mid. Trans., to lead, Zfaoa, ifiritrd- ocritus ed5e ; Ep. Aor. evador (§§ 219, ixt\v ; second Aor. Mid. ip-ho-ero, Imp. 4, and 207, 3). iirifirja-eo (§ 223, 10). Ep. secondary uvnvo&e, to spring up, Ep. Perf. with form : fiifido-fruv, to stalk, strength- Att. Reduplication and the variable ened secondary form from $aivyov and fieo/nai and fieio/xai, I will go, will live, di/ooyov; Eut. avdc^co ; Aor. ijucc^a. Ep. Eut. 0677, fie6p.e(r&a (§ 223, 7). famvpdo) (Epic), to to&e away, Impf. fiidofxai (Ep.) instead of /> i(op.ai, to dir-nvpwv, -as, -a ; first Aor. Act. Part. jforce, i^Lr,craro, fiefi(r]K5. dirovpas ; first Aor. Mid. dirnvparo, Pi/3ptib (Ep. and poet.), to 90, instead Mid. aird(poiTO. of juActJcr/cco (§ 18, 3), Aor. ep.oAov, airei\4co (Ep.), to threaten, aTveiX-hr-nv fioXeiy, jxoXuv (also X. An. 7. 1, 33, (§ 222, Rem. 1). /j.6\coo-iu) ; Perf. / ueV/8Aa>Ka( instead of a.ir6epo-e, an Ep. Aor., 7ie hurried off, fxefxeXcoKa) ; Eut. fiohovfiai. Subj. airoepa-n, Opt. diroepcreie. fSodw, to cry out, Ep. Aor. e/3axra instead dcttto), to j'om to, Ep. Aor. Pass. kd 322. third Pers. Sing, yeyui/e (also with dpw\iai, to gain (§ 188, 1 ). the sense of the Aor.), Part. yzyw&s, 'An, Ep., (a) to blow, see dr)p.i; (b) to Inf. yeycoi/efiw, Plup. iyeytopei. Erom s/eep, Aor. &ecra, &, p-hy, /3ei- Aor. y6ov. opei/ (§ 224, 9); first Aor. Act. and Aaivvpa (Ep.), to entertain, to feed (in 24 278 DIALECTS. |j 230. stead of dair-uv/xi, § 169, Rem. 1), ere, to await (e. g. an attack, a wild Fut. Sato-ca ; Mid. daiw/xai, to feast, to beast), in the following forms : 5ex a ~ consume, second Pers. Sing. Impf. Iud. tcu instead of dexovrcu (§ 220, 13), 5a ivv (Saivvo instead of etaivvao, II. fj., 147, Perf. Sedey/xai with the § 224, 5), third Pers. Sing. Opt. dcu- sense of the Pres., Put. 5e8e|o,ua£, vvto instead of -viro, third Pers. PI. excipiam, second Aor. Mid. eSe/rro, Scuvvaro; Aor. iSaicrdixr/v. etc. (§ 227, B) ; Perf. Mid. SeSo/crj.ue'- Scuct:, Ep., (a) to divide (§ 164), Fut. vos, awaiting, harking, II. o, 730. 5d (Ep.), to sound, Perf. 5e5ou7r, ede£a, ing, Od. v, 6, as if from iyp-nyopdw. etc.; Mid. deUvvpai in the Ep. dialect e8&> and eVd-w (Ep.), to eat (= eVd-uo), has also the sense, to //reef, to welcome, Inf. edpevai (§ 229) ; Impf. eSoi/ and to rfn'/it to ; so also in the Perf. del- edecrxov ; Perf. id-ndus ; Perf. Mid. or deypai with the sense of the Pres., Pass. iSrjBorai. deidexarat. third Pers. PI. ; Plup. dei- 'E0n, from which come the Ep. e&wis, Se/cro, to welcome, deidexa.ro. ivont, accustomed, and the Perf. efa&a depxopai, to see, Ep. second Aor. edpaxou (§ 140, Rem. 3). (§ 223, 11). 'EIAH, 'IAH, Aor. eldou, I saw, Ep. ?Sov, $4xo/j.ai, to receive, Ion. Se/co/wu; in Horn. Inf. Ideeiu, Subj. i'SwiUi ; Ep. Pres this verb signifies also, to take, excip- Mid. etSeTai, ?'f seems, el86p.evos, ap- $ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 279 pearing, making like; Fut. eftrojttcu ; eVeVw or tvviirco (Ep.), to say, to tell) first Aor. eladfiw and ieiad/xrjv, elad- Impf. with the sense of the Aor. fxevos and ieHrd/xei/os (§ 219, 4) ; sec- eueirov, evueirou, Aor. evurirov (comp. ond Aor. 186/xrjy, I saw. ea-TrS/xrjv from eVo/xcu), Imp. zviarirts, SIKH, third Pers. Sing. Impf. el/ce, it Subj. ii/io-rra, Opt. iylairoi/j.i, Inf. eViC- appeared, II. c, 520 ; Perf. tWa, I am irtlv, Put. eVtyco and ivio"irr)o~oo. like, Ep. third Pers. Dual %'Cktov and ivyvo&a, Ep. Perf. from 'EN@n or 'EN- Plup. 4iKT7]v (§ 228), Part, eoi/cws and E©n with the sense of the Pres. and II. (p, 254. ei/ccos, ei/cincc and II. , iviirru (Ep.), to chide, second Aor. eV- €t\\>ixai, third Pers. PI. elAvarai; from evlirov, -hv-TTrairep (§ 219, 7). eAuw comes Aor. Pass. 4\voSt)v. eWujtu, to clothe, Ep. and Ion. eiVu/xf ; e?Aa>, to press, to drive, from which in Ep. Put. eWco ; Aor. eWa and eVa, Horn, only ciXofxevos ; in the same kaad^v, eeWaTo, ccracd-at ; Perf. author, etAe'a, eetAeov ; the rest are effect, efecu (and eWcu), elrcu, etc., from 5 EA, e. g. eAa"cw, Inf. eAcrat and el/xevos : second Pers. Plup. eWo, ie\(rcu, Part. eAcras (§ 223, 6) ; eeAjuai, third Pers tWo and eeffro, third Pers. eeAjUeVos ; second Aor. Pass. id\r\v Dual eVdij> , third Pers. PL efaro ; — (from eAAa>), third Pers. PL ^Ae^, on leWa-ro, eWro, comp. § 219, 4. &A7]fcu and aXrifiv/ai, aAeis. eouca, lam like, § 228. Comp. 'EIKft. elfj.i, to be, § 225. eVa'/'cu, to understand, Aor. iirififfa (i), tl/u, to go, § 226. Herod, and Apollon. (§ 130, Rem. 1 ) ; etpyo, to shut out, Ep. Impf. epya&ov the poet, aiw is found only in Pres. (§ 162). Comp. ep70j. and Impf. elpojxat. (Ep. and Ion.), to ask, Impf. iiravpio-Ko/j.ai (Ep. and poet.), to receive e\p6/xr}v ; Fut. ilp-fiaofiai ; second Aor. advantage or injury from a thing, Aor. T}p6fJLr]V, Subj. epw/jLt&a, Opt. epoiro, iirr)vp6/xr)j/, iiravpeofirai (first Aor. en^u- Inf. epeofrat in Horn, with the accent pa^*/ in Aeschyl. and in the later of the Pres. ; — Ep. secondary forms writers ); Put. iTravp^ao/xai. Of the of the Pres. (a) ipeofxai, ipeear&cu; Act. in the sense to touch, to injure, Impf. ipeovro; (b) e'peco, Subj. ipecb- Homer uses, second Aor. Subj. eVau- fxev, Opt. ipioifxeu, Part, epeW. py, Inf. iiravpeTv, iiravpeixev. 'EIPTMI, see ipvw. i-jriaTa/xai, to know, second Pers. eTriVn?, eipw, Ep. and Ion., sero, to arrange in a Ion. poet. row, to string, first Aor. i£eipas, exse- eVco, as a simple, in Act. only Ep. in rens, Herod. 3, 87 ; Ep. Perf. Mid. or the sense tracto aliquid, to take care of Pass, eepficu, iepfi4uos (in Herod, ep- (II. (, 321); generally used as a fievos), Plup. eepTO. compound, e. g. irepieira:, die-iru, etc., etpw, to say, Pres. only Ep., Put. ep<2, second Aor. Act. iairov instead of Ep. epe'eo. e, Ep. icptyeis ; Mid. 'EA- (comp. sed-eo), Opt. av6o-i; Ep. Perf. e'A^jAa- irepiecp&TJvcu and 7repte^/eo'3ai instead /uej/os (§ 223, Rem. 4), third Pers. of Tripiecp^ffeoSfai. Sing. Plup. eATjAaSoTo (§ 220, Rem. ep7a>, commonly iepya, Ep., instead of 2) ; Ion. Perf. iK^Kao-jxai and Aor. e2p7«, to s/iw£ in and shut out, with the Pass. T]\do-3rnv. secondary forms iepyvv/xi, ipydfou, eAeAi£a>, to wAiW, Ep. second Aor. Mid. iepyd&w, Aor. ep|a; Perf. Mid. or e'Ae'Ai/cro (§ 227, B). Pass. tepy/j.ai, third Pers. PL epxarau 280 DIALECTS. [* 23^- third Pers. PL Plup. Upxo.ro and Attic Redup.) ; Ep. Plup. iirc&xaro epxa.ro ; Aor. Pass, ipx&eis. they were closed, II. /x, 340. epSoo and pefa (Ep.), to do, Fut. pe£«, t H/«m, to sit, eartu, earo (Ion.), and e"a- Aor. eppe^a and epe£a, or ep£a>, ep|a ; rai, e'/aro Ep., instead of ijvrai, fjvro. Perf. 4opya, Plup. iapyeiv (§ 140, ^uw (Ep.), to sink, Perf. vTrefxvf}fxvKe, to Rem. 3), Perf. Mid. or Pass, 4epy/x4- let the head sink, II. x-> 491. T lie vos, Aor. Pass, pex^is, fex&wcu. above form has the Att. reduplication epeiSco, to prop, Ep. Perf. iorfpedarai ifx-rjfxvKe (^ 219, 8), and is strength- (§219,8). enedby v (§ 208, 5). epeiVco (poet, and prose), to throw down, ©4po/xai (Ep.), to warm one's self, Fut. Ep. Plup. ipepiirro (§ 219, 8). &4p££&>, to j^Ai, Ep. 4pt£ofxai, Perf. Mid. S^Atjctw, etc. ; Perf. re^Aa (red-dAum ipr)pio-/Aai (§ 219, 8). Ep. § 223, 13) ; second Aor. 4&aAov. eppca, to wander about, Ep. Aor. epcrcu, to ©Hnft (Ep.), to staw, Perf. TeSuriwa ; hurry away (§ 223, 6). Plup. erefriiirea] second Aor. (from £pv&a,iv,Q) eracpov. ipvKco, to keep off, Ep. second Aor. Act. SrvrjaKw, to die, Perf. reSrvnica, PL re&va- Tipvuaicov, ipvKaKeeu/ (§ 219, 7). juey, etc. (§ 228). epuco and etpyco (Ion. and Ep.), to c?raw, frpd!>crK and there are the following forms : 4pvao, Impf. Tkov; Ep. Aor. l£ov (§ 223, 10) dpvro and epvro, which are to be arid Tkto, etc. (§ 227, B). regarded as syncopated forms of the 'IAHM1 (instead of 'IAA). to be merciful Impf. — The two following Mid. Of the Act, only the Ep. Imp. 'Ixy&t, secondary forms have also the sense be merciful (in addresses to the gods) of to guard: (a) Ep. 'EUTMI, Inf. instead of 1\o&i ($ 224, 6), as in eipvfxevai, Hes. Opp. 816, Mid. to Theoc. 15, 143, Subj. Ep. l\r)Kr)(ri ; guard, e'lpvarai instead of e'lpvvrai, Plup. Opt. Ep. iAtjkoi ; Mid. poet. Inf. epvo-&ai, e'tpvcr&cu ; — (b) Ep., r t\a/xai, to appease. poet, and, though very rare, Attic taafxi (Dor.), to know, Icr-ns, 'io-olti, foafxev, prose pvofxai, Inf. pvcr&ai instead of Part. 'iaas. pveabai; Impf. third Pers. Sing. Kaivvfxai (Ep.) instead of Kaiovvfxai epvro, was watched, Hesiod. Th. 304, (§ 169, Rem. 1) from the stem KAA, third Pers. PL pvar instead of ipvov- to excel, Perf. K4icao-fxai ; Plup. e/ce- ro (they protected) ; Aor. eppvo-dfXTjv ttdcrfx-qv. and Ep. pvcrdfxrjv (but II. 0, 29. pverd- Kaioo, to burn, Ep. Aor. tK-na (Trag. fxr]v). enea), Subj. K-hofxsv instead of -auev, epxofxcu, to go, Ep. Perf. €l\r)\ov&a, first Opt. third Pers. Sing. K-fjai, third Pers. PL elx-liAov&fxev] Epic Aor. Pers. PL Kfaiev, Inf. kyjcu (in the i]Av&ov. Odyss. also tce7ai, nelofxev, Keiavres) : €X«? to have, Ep. Aor. 4o-x&ov, cx4&ov Aor. Mid. eK-qd/x-nv, K-ndfxevos (in the and icrxov (\ 162) ; Ep. Perf. ox^Ka Odyss. Keid/xevos, neiavro) ; second (for oKwxa., k and % being trans- Aor. Act. iicdrjv (I burned, In trans,), posed, and the word having the Inf. /ca^erni. 9 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 281 vras) Kopevvvfii, to satisfy, Ep. Eut. /copeco and and Kepaiu (Imp. /cepcue), Ktpvdco (i, to 6au?Z, en/ oitf, poet. Perf. /ce/epd- Keufrco (Ep.), to conceal, Eut. Kevaw, Aor. 7a, Keicpayfj,ev, etc. (§ 228) ; Eut. /ce- eicevo-a ; Perf. Ke'/cevd-a ; second Aor. Kpd^ofiai, Aristoph. £kv&ov, kv&ov, Subj. KeKv&co (§ 219, Kpaivca (Ep. and poet.), to complete, ac- 7) ; Mid. only Pres. and Impf. complish, Ion. commonly Kpaiaivw, h rjdec, to make anxious, in the Act. only Impf. ixpaiaivov ; Ep. Eut. Kpavea: Ep. Eut. /ojStjo-co ; Perf. KeKrjda, I am Aor. eKprjva and Ep. eKp-^-qva, Imp. anxious ; Ep. Fut. Perf. KeKaS-f\o~ofj.ai, Kprjvov and Ep. Kp^vov, Inf. Kpr\vai II. fr, 353. and. Ep. Kp-qrjvai ; Ep. Perf. Pass. nib'vafj.ai, Ep. secondary form of <77ce8dV- KtKpdavTai (Eur. KeKpavrai) ; Ep. Fut. j/fjucu, to scatter, only Pres. and Impf. Mid.. Kpaviofiai. Kivvfxai (Ep.) instead of Kiveofxai, to stir KTeivw, to kill, Ep. Fut. urevea) (Ep. ewe's se//j to 6e moved, Pass. Kivv/xevos. Part. Kraveovra, KarraKTaviov(n{v) and Kipvdo) and Ktpvrjfii, Ep. secondary form KaTaKraveeaSe with the variable a ; of Kepdvvvfxi, to mix, from which comes Aor. Ep. and poet, eicravov ; Ep. the Part. Kipvds, Impf. iKipva and second Aor. Act. eKrav, etc. [§ 227, Kipj/77. A (a)] ; first Aor. Pass, third Pers. ffiX^w and Kixavofxai (Ep. and poet.), PI. eKTabev Ep., instead of e/crcftbj- to reac/i, meei wMA, Aor. eK/xov, Fut. ow. Kixho-ofxai, other forms not found in /cvpew, rarely /cupw (Ep. and poet.), to the Att. poets; but Ep. Impf. e/ct'xa- ./i«e/, to reach, Aor. eKvpaa (§ 223, 6), j/oj', second Pers. e/ax«s (from and more seldom iKvp-ncra, Fut. Kvpaa KIXE-) ; second Aor. Subj. «ix^ anc ^ an( ^ more seldom Kvp-^cru ; Perf. zce/cu- KixtM-i Opt- Kixeirjv, Inf. /ax^a^ p^/ca. Part. KiX e ' s an< ^ Mid. Kixyn-evos ; Aor. AayxdVw, fo partake, Ion. Fut. \d£ofj.ai. ; Mid. tKix'ho~a.TO. Ep. Aor. Subj. AeAax« (§ 219, 7), ria> (Ep.), to #0, only Pres. and Impf. Trans, to make partaker in the phrase The Part. kiwj/ is accented like ic6z/ ; &cwoVra 7rup and properly considered as a Pres. and eKX-f}$co, to caz/se to forget* Ep. Aor. Impf. eireX-naa; eKX4x5.§ov. fievoivdw, fievotveov, § 222, I, A (2). xdcrKco (Ep. and poet.), Aor. eXS.Kov, fx-nK.dojj.cu, to bleat, Ep. Perf. fj.4fj.7jKa with Ep. Perf. AeATj/ca (poet. AeAd/ca and the sense of the Pres., uefiaKvTa e/cAeAa/ca even in Demos.) with the (§ 223, 13); Aor. fiaKdvo-fj,ai writers). with the sense of the Pres. (§219, 8). fiaiofiai (Ep.), to seek, Fut. fidcrofiai olda, to know, § 228. (iirifidcro-eTai) ; Aor. efj.ao-dfiri v. oXouai, to think; Ep. oXw, o'iw, o'iouai, fjjzvdrdvco, to learn, Fut. in Theoc. flawed- w16, Epic 6p6w, Impf. first Aor. eirepcra (§ 223, 6) ; second wpeov-j Ep. second Pers. Sing. Pres. Aor. Zirpa&ov (§ 223, 11) ; Ep. second Mid. 6p?iai, third Pers. Sing. Impf. Aor. Mid. Inf. vep&ai (§ 227, B). dprjro ; Ion. Perf. oircoTra. tt€to[x.cu, to Jit/, second Aor. iTrrSfir)!/, etc. 'OPErNTMI, from which Ep. bpeyvvs, (§ 223, 11). stretching out ; bpeyw, to stretch; Mid. irev&ofiai (poet, instead of Trw&dyo/xai), to stretch one's self, to reach after, Ep. Ep. second Aor. Mid. Opt. ireTrv&oi- Perf. Mid. opt&peyfuu, third Pers. PI. to; Perf. Treirvcrfxai (§ 223, 14). dpccpexarcu (§ 219, 8), Plup. third iriepvov, iizztpvov, Ep. second Aor. Act. Pers. PI. opwpkxaro. of 4>ENH, to kill (§ 219, 7), Part, irecp- upuvjj.1 (poet.), to excite, Fut. oparv, Aor. vu>v with irregular accentuation ; Ep. dipo-a (§ 233, 6); Ep. Perf. Litrans. Perf. Pass. Trecparcu, irs(cc) ; from o-ao'co Fut. (ractxrw , e7re7Ti3-jU€z/ and TreVcio-^i (see § 228). Imp. Pres. Act. craco [§ 222, I, A T«Aa(w, to rfraiu near (Trag. 7reAa^o», (4)] ; third Pers. Sing. Impf. Act. 7rAa$-a>),Fut.7reAacrcu, poet, sometimes cdov and ccico instead of iadoe ; Aor. ireXcl> ; E]3. Aor. Pass. iiteXda^r)u, trrdcocra. ; Fut. Mid. aaacrojxai, Aor. poet. -Alt. i^a/jr]! , Mid. Ep. tirXiiix-qv, Pass. icradoS-qv ; from o-aS« Part, o-w- etc, Att. 'irAa/xjjr [§ 227, A (a)]; o^Tes and Impf. cwecr/coi/ ; from o-dw En. Parf. ir(:iv7^riiJ.4v n )S, Att. iriirXaixai. Subj. Pres. cot?, trdj;.?, trdoxn. Wpd« (poei.), «i »i violent motion 284 DIALECTS. [$ 230. Mid. to haste, Ep. Aor. iacreva and cpeiSo/xai, to spare, Ep. second Aor. Mid, aeva, ia(Tevd[jLT)v and w, to come before, anticipate, Epic TAm, Epic second Aor. reTaycav, (pfrd/Aevos [§ 227, A (a)]. seizing. (p&eipca, to destroy, Ion. Fut. diacp^apeo/xat TAAAH, to endure, Ep. Aor. irdkacra, instead of , to con- (§ 228), Fut. r\7)(To/j.a!.. sume, and sometimes to vanish, perish ravvca (poet.), to stretch, Ep. rdvvTcu (Ep. first Pers. long), Fut. (p&icru: (§229). Aor. ty&Io-a; Mid. to perish, Fut' Tupdaaw, to disturb, Ep. second Perf. (p&to-o/xcu ; Perf. ecpSfl/xai ; Plup. icpfri TerpT)xa, I am disturbed. /.trju; Ep. Aor. i, Aesch. Ag. 714); yet rervy/xcu (§ 223. 14), third Pers. PL Perf ire(pvp/j.ai, and in Aristoph. ire- Ep. TerevxaTcu, Inf. TSTi>x&ai ; Plup. (pvpafiai ; Fut. Perf. Trecpvpo-ecr&at ireTvyfxt]v, third Pers. PL Ep. ireTev- Pind., Epic and poet. ¥erf. with the sense of the ^aivcc, to show, Ep. cpaeivwv, enlightening ; Pres. /ce'xa^Sa; Fut. x*' L(T0 l xal ( com P Ep. Aor. Pass. z to F> w? " °"^ Ep., Fut. x € ^ w ! Aor irecpavrcu : Fut. irecp-hcrofxca ; second ex eua 5 second Aor. Mid. x^ to j X^e Aor. (pdveaneu, II. A, 64. vos [§ 227, A (e)]. $ 231.] FORMATION OF WORDS. 285 SECTION III. FORMATION OF WORDS. (231. Primitive words. — Stems. — Derivatives. 1. Words are formed, (a) by derivation, and (b) by composition, in accord- ance with certain laws. 2. Those words, from which other words are der ved, but which are them- selves underived, are called primitives (vocabula prwiitiva). Primitive words are either verbs (which constitute the greater part), substantives, adjectives, or pronouns. A primitive has two parts, the root and the inflection-ending, e. g. Tpe(p-a), ypds, -eia, -v), etc. ; (b) or Derivatives, i. e. such words as are formed either from primitives, or from stems, by assuming a special derivation-syllable with a special 1 sig- nification, e. g. xpva~-o-M, to make golden, to gild ; pfi-roop, orator ; ypa.) ; ahoicp-rj, salve (from aAei<£- a,); — (b) in dissyllabic Barytones of the second Dec, wbich denote what is done, or the result of an action, e. g. Xoyos, word (from \4y-co) ; EN-n, comp. eirecpvoit) ; vo/xos, a law (from v4/x-w) ; — (c) in dissyllabic Oxytones of the second Dec. in -fx6s, and in dissyllabic oxytone adjectives of the second Dec. in -os, which, for the most part, denote an active object and often have a substantive meaning, e. g. irXox-p-os, plait of hair (from "ita4k-u) ; o-ToA-fios, garment (from areAA-co) ; tto/att-os, attendant (from ire/xir-ca) ; aocp-os, wise (from 5E$-f2, sapio); rpocp-os, nourishing, nourisher (from rpecp-w) ; — (d) in monosyl- labic substantives of the third Dec, e. g. Ao£, flame (from ) ; dpo/x-ds, running (from APEM-H, comp. dpa/x-eTp) ; — (f ) in all derivatives of the forms mentioned, e. g. in substantives in -a/xos, adjectives in -i/xos, verbs in -die, -ea>, -oca, -euco, -t£iw, e. g. irAox-a/xos; rpScp-i/xos ; , which are mostly derived from substantives of the first Dec, and those in -Ifa which are derived from substantives and adjectives of all declensions, are partly transitive, partly intransitive, since they denote either a condition or the exercise cf agency or activity, e. g. roX/xda), to be bold, from T6X;xa, boldness ; %oAao>, to be angry, from x°^? gall; yodea, to weep, from y6os ; hindfa, to judge, from 81*17 J e\iri(w, to hope, from eA7rts ; 6pl(a>, io limit, from opos ; alrlfa, to beg, from curns, beggar ; sometimes those in -aw denote fulness, abundance, e. g. xoAaa>, to be full of bile, have much bile. — Verbs in -d£w and -i(a> formed from proper names, express the effort to resemble 6ingle individuals or whole nations, in custom, nature, language, sentiment. 5 233.] DERIVATION OF VERBS AND SUBSTANTIVES. 287 Such verbs are called Imitative verbs, e. g. Zapidfa, to be a Dorian, i. e. to speak or think as a Dorian, Aapievs ; kWrivifa, to personate the custom or language of a Greek, to be a Greek in custom, etc. ; fArjSifa, to be a Mede in sentiment. Remark 1. Verbs in -i(w often signify to make something into that which the root denotes. See (c). Rem. 2. Verbs in -6(a and -vfa are very rare, e. g. ap[x6(a, to Jit ; kpnvfa, to creep. — By the ending -d(w also, verbs are formed, which denote the repetition or strengthening of the idea expressed by the simple verb ; these are called Frequentative and Intensive verbs, e. g. pnrrdCa, to throw to and fro, jacto, from piirrw.jacio ; crrevdCa, to sigh much and deeply, from crrivco, to sigh ; eiicdfa, properly, to liken again and again, to compare on all sides ; hence to infer, conjecture. (b) Verbs in -ecu and -ei>co are derived from substantives and adjectives of all declensions, and commonly express the intransitive idea of the primitive, for the most part, the being in a condition, or the exercise of agency, the practising of that which is signified by the primitive ; but they are sometimes transitive also. "When the stem ends in -es, which is the case, e. g. in adjectives in -rjs, -es, the es is omitted, and when it ends in -ev, the eu is omitted before the ending -eva, e. g. (piXioi, to be a friend, to love, from Tr]s\ (Gen. -ov) (mostly Paroxytones), -rijp and -rap (Paroxytones) for the Masc, -rpid (Proparoxytones), -rpis, -rts, 288 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 233. and -is (Gen. -idos), -rsipa (Proparoxytone) for the Fem. ; -uv for the Masc, -aiva for the Fem.; -us for the Masc, -wis and -a'Cvri for the Fem., e. g. iepevs, priest, Fem. Uptia, from hpos; av\rjTr)s and -rip, flute-player, Fem. av\ri- rpia, avXrjrpis, from auAeco ; crcorrip, deliverer, ccoreipa, from o~a>(& ; woXlttis, citizen, tto\?tis, from ttoAis ; prjTcop, orator, from 'PE-fl ; Srepairwy, servant, &epa- iraiua, from &4pa\p ; 0i/ceT7js, a s/ave, from oucos ; Zruxor-ns, one of tlia people, from £77,1*05 ; oirXiTrjs, a hoplite, from oivXov ; GTpaTi&Tns, a soldier, from a-Tparid. (/3) With the ending -o's (Gen. -oO), seldom, and only from verbs with the variable vowel [§ 231, 6 (c)], e. g. Trofnros, attendant, from Tre/u.Trco ; 6 77 rpo ; Cipro's-, aw a//?/, from aprjyoo. b. They express the abstract idea of action, i. e. action or energy apart from the person who manifests it. These are abstract nouns : — (a) From verbs : (a) with the endings --X v1 \i 1 This form is used, when the syllable preceding the Patronymic ending is long, otherwise the word would not be adapted to hexameter verse, since one short syllable would stand between two long syllables ; thus, TlrjXfj'td^s^ 25 290 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 234 -ixviov only in TroXixvn, iro\lx viov from. ir6\is, KvXix^Vi K-oXixviou from kvXi1~\ — Xay-idevs, young hare, from Kayus ; aeT-i5eus-, young eagle, from aero's-. (cl) Designations of place, with the endings -iov (in connection with the preceding vowels -aiov, -eiov, -<£ov) and -eiov, which denote the abode of the person designated by the primitive word, or a place consecrated to a divinity or hero ; -uv (Gen. -uvos), seldom -edov, and -(avid, which denote the residence of persons or a place filled with plants, e. g. ipycurr-fip-iov, workshop, from ipyaar TT]p, and so others in -rrjpiov from -7-f]p or -r-ns ; sometimes also this ending is used with reference to vessels, e. g. Tror-fjpiov, drinking vessel; novpeTov, barber's shop, from Kovpevs, -4-us (several in -iov [-eiov] have another signification, c. g. rpocf>e7ov, wages of a nurse, from rptxpevs) ; OrjaeToy from Qrjaevs, -4-u.s, 'A&rjvouov, MovcreTov ; — avdpuv and yvvainuv, apartments for men and women; Iwirdv, stable for horses ; podwv and poduvid, bed of roses ; TrepiCTepedv and TrepicrTep&v, dove- cote. (e) Substantives which denote an instrument or a means of accomplishing some object, with the endings -rpov and -rpa, e. g ^varpa, curry-comb ; &.&a/c- rpov, tuition-money ; Xovrpov, water for washing ; Xovrpov, bath ; also to designate place, e. g. bpx'hfTTpa., dancing-room, instead of the ending -rv,piov. $ 234. III. Adjectives. 1. From verbs are derived adjectives with the following endings: — (a) "With the ending -os, which is annexed to the stem of the verb. These adjectives express the transitive, intransitive, or passive idea of the verb from which they are derived, e. g. fSe-fiovhev-Tcu jSouA.eu-To's, -t4os Ti/xd-ea re-Tt/iTj-Tcu Tifx-n-rSs tywpd-v Tre-(p(*>pa-Tcu (pupd-reos , e'ikz-Tov, ehe-r6s ; 'hifii, 4-tov (commonly efroj/), ct(p-e-Te'os, eV-e-To's; t'i^t]- ixi, 4-&e-Tov, fre-ros, -Teos; — some the form of the Pres. Act., e. g. \i4vw, fi4w €toi>, /J.eve-r6s, -t4os) 41/j.i, 'l-tov, 1-t4os; so cbr-euxe-TOs from 'ETXE-TON (e#x° /xai) ; 8vj/o.-t6s (8vvaf.uu) ; #77,111, os, -vtos) and -ik6s (which, when v precedes, becomes -k6s and when 1, often -cutis). These adjectives have a very great variety of mean ings. They frequently indicate the mode or manner of the adjective idea, often also in a very general manner, that which proceeds from an object and is connected with it or related to it, e. g. ovpdv-ios, heavenly, pertaining to heaven ; Ka&dp-ios, cleanly (but Ka&ap6s, clean); iAev&4pios, frank, liberal, liberalis (but eAeud-eoos, liber) ; ayopcuos, belonging to the market-place (ayopd) ; &4peios, summer- like [&4pos, -^-os), aldoTos (al8a>s, -6-os), fjpcSos and r,pwos ; rpvxiixvios ; SovAt/co's; &7}\vk6s, /J-aUldKOS. ' Rem. 2. In some words the ending -cuos also -icuos occurs, e. g. xepo"o?os, iTKOTaios and gkoticuos. In several words the ending -aios (§ 17, 6) is used in- stead of -T-ios, e. g. (piXoT-f](Tios ((pi\6rrfs, -tjtos), eKovatos (e/cwj/, -6vtos). 3. Adjectives are formed from substantives alone : — (a) With the ending -e 10 s (mostly Paroxytones), which are formed from words denoting persons, especially from proper names ; but in respect to their signification they are like adjectives in -u<6s, e. g. aj/Spelos, belonging to a man, manly, ywatnuos, av&pc&Treios, 'O/x^peios. 292 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 2S5. (b) With the endings -eos = -ovs and -"tuos, which denote the materia] of which anything is made, like the English ending -en, e. g. xpufi-a\eos, strong. Exceptions to those in -eis, are devdprjeis from SeVSpor, x a p' Leis from x°-P LS ' (e) With the ending -^pios, which have the transitive sense of verbal sub- stantives in -rip and -77s, e. g. awrripios, preserving, that preserves. (f) With the ending -c£8 77 s, Neut. -tides (formed from -o-efi-fis from eTSos, form, quality). These adjectives denote a quality or resemblance, but often also a fulness or abundance, e.g. (pAoycafiris, resembling flame, fiery ; ttoic&Stis, abounding in grass, grassy. (g) With the endings -los (Fern, -id), -k6s, -ikos (ifem, -k4\, -ikt}), -riv6s (Eem. -771/77), and when 1 or p precedes, -dv6s (Fem. -dv-i}), -luos (Fem. -tVrj) ; these are Gentile adjectives, which are also frequently used as substantives, particularly those in --nu6s, -dvos, -7uos, which are formed only from names of cities and countries out of Greece, e. g. Kopiu&-ios, -ia, 'ASrnvcuos, -ata, X?os (instead of -iios from Xios), 'ApyeTos (from"Ap-yos,-e-os) ; AaKeSaifiop-iKos ; Ku£i/c- tjv6s, -t]vr\ (Kv£ikos), ^,apSi-av6s, -avr) (SapSety, Ion. Gen. -i-wu), 'AyKvpav6s ("AyKvpa), Tapavr-tvos, -ivrj (Tapas, -avr-os). § 235. IV. Adverbs. 1. Adverbs are formed from verbs : — With the endings -8 77V or, when the primitive has the variable o,-dSrjy, which denote mode or manner, e. g. Kpvfih-nv, secretly (KpvTrra>) ; ypd&-dr)v, by writing, scribendo (ypd(pw) ; o-irop-dS-nu, scatteredly, sparsim. 2. From verbs and substantives : — With the ending - 5 6v or - a 8 6v, - 77 5 6 v (mostly from substantives). These also denote manner, or, when derived from substantives, the external form, e. g. avcKpavMv, openly, aperte ; ZiaKpiBou, distinctly; fiorpv56v, grape-like, in clusters ((SSrpvs), l\aS6v, in troops, catervatim ; ay e\r)S6u, in herds, gregatim ; Kvvr)86v, like a dog. 3. From substantives, pronouns, and adverbs, adverbs are foi'med to denote the three relations of place, viz., whence, whither, and where, by the endings -§ev, -8e {-(re), and -& 1, e. g. oi>pav6-&ev,from heaven ; ovpav6i/-8e, into or to heaven, ovpav6« &t, in heaven; &\\o-&ev, from another place, aliunde, 'd\\o- } 236.] DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 293 and -&i : (a) Dissyllables are either Paroxytones or Propeiispomena, e. g. wp6pav6&(=v, ovpav6Sn from ovpavos; exceptions: ofeo&ev, o?ko&i, tvSo&ev, evSo&i, irdvro&ev, tfAAo&ei', 4/cao-To^ei/, and some poetic words ; (c) polysyllables whose penult is long by position, are without exception Proparoxytones, e. g. evroa&ev, bxicr^ev ; (d) polysyllables whose penult is long by nature, are Proparoxytones, when the primitive was a Barytone, e. g. Qco&ev (e£a>), eTepw&ej/ (eVepos), 'Afrfjvn&ep ('A&TJvai) ; but Properispomena, when the primitive was an Oxytone, e. g. Tlv&w&ev (riw^w), ®pif)&ev (®pid). On the accent of those in -Se (-(re), see § 34, Rem. S. Remark 1. Words of the first Dec. retain their a or 77 before -&ev; those of the second, their ; and those of the third, the of the Gen. ending, e. g. *0\v(ATrld&ev, ^.irdpTq-^v, otico-bev, tiWo-bei' ; but the vowels a, 77, and o are often exchanged with each other, e. g. pi(6-&ev from, pifa: Meyap6&ev from Meyapa, rd. Rem. 2. Adverbs in -«, and also others, append the endings to the un- changed vowels, e. g. dvw-bev, Karw-frev, e^oo-bev, £ice?-&ev, iyyv-frt, eVSo-frej/, evdo-h-i. Some forms of the comparative in -repos lengthen into &>, e. g. afx(poTepa-&ev. In some of the above forms, co can be shortened into in poetry, and then rejected entirely, e. g. e£o-&ei/, Trpocr-frev (instead of e|«£rej/, irp6Sev), and in imitation of Doric usage, a is often omitted before $-, e. g. oiri&ev, e/cro- &ev (instead of omoSev, eKTocr&ev). Rem. 3. The ending -Se is commonly appended to substantives only, and to the unchanged form of the Ace, e. g. aAaSe, to or into the sea (d\s), nud-wSe (from Tlv&w), o!k6vS€ only Epic, elsewhere ofaaSe (from the stem 'OIH), as YE) instead of ^vyfjvSe which is not in use, 'EAevalvdde). In pronouns and adverbs, -5 the following word begins with a vowel, e. g. SaK-e-Srv/xos, tutt-o-tcikttjs and Xein o-TaKTns, repir-i-Kepavvos, iyep-crl-yeXoos, 0ep-eV-/3ios, rafj.-es, eAtf-€tri-7re7rAos, {.u^ofidpfiapos (= (j-iy-tfo-fi.), ptyaairis ( = p(Tr-o~-ao~7ris), iT\r,£nnros (= ivXi]y-(T- tTnros). 2. When the first part of the compound is a substantive or adjective, the declension-stem of the substantive generally remains unchanged, e. g. (first Dec.) vi>crj- together with the regular S-eoex&p'a s vav-vl-iropos. 3. When the first part of the compound is an adverb, only those changes take place, which arise from the general rules respecting the change of consonants. 4. Respecting the second part of the compound, it is to be noted, that the words begiuning with a, e, 0, in composition regularly lengthen these vowels (if the last part of the compound is a simple) into 77 and a>, e. g. (a) evrjve^os from 'dve/xos, CTpaTrjyos from aya, ev-qvap from awftp^ (e) Svs7ipeT/j.os from iper- /j.6s, SvsriAaTos from iAavuco ; (0) auco(pe\i)s from o^eAos, iravuiX&pos from oWvpa, auet>vvfj.os from 6vof.ia. 5. In relation to the end of the word, the following points should be noted : — A. In the Greek language, as has been seen (§ 236, 3), a verb can be com- pounded only with prepositions ; but if it is necessary to compound a verb with another part of speech, this is never done immediately, but by means of a derivation from a compound word either actually existing or assumed. Then the derivative-ending, commonly -ea>, is regularly appended to this compound word : e. g. from 'Iinrovs rpecpeiu, to keep horses, the derivative is not iTriroTpecpeLv, but by means of the compound substantive tinroTpocpos, it is !inroTpo(pea> ; so beoaefieco from freocrejSTjs, vav^ax^v from vavfxdxos, ei>Ti»x// , 296 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 237 (y) -r)s, - e s, commonly with a passive or intransitive signification, e. g, &eo Svsepccs, one who has an unhappy love, ev&eos = o rbv &ebv iv eavrct) ex&tj/, 'airoutos = 6 curb rov cXkov a>v, a-Kous = 6 noiSus ovk ex^v. In all these examples tbe form of the sub- stantive remains unchanged, 1 where the substantive has a form whicb is appro • priate for the Masc. or Fern, of the adjective, but where this is not the case, the substantive assumes a corresponding adjective-ending, viz. -os (Gen. -ou), -cos (Gen. -w),-7]s (Gen. -ovs), -is (Gen. -idos), -oov and (when it ends in -v) -s, e. g (TvvZenrvos {Seiirpov), a fellow-guest, ev&vdiicos (5i/c?j), 6,ti[mos [tijjlt]), dexv^pos (rj/xepa), (pi\oxpVH-aTOS (xp?lf-<-a, XP'hl x ' XTa )i olctto/jlos (ar6fxa), evyeoos (yv), having a fertile soil; Aenr6i/ea>s (vavs), one who deserts the ship ; auae\r]s (rb 6(pe\os), &va\- kls (aAfrij), axpi][J-(>}v, aSaKpvs, Gen. -vos (rb Sdapv). c. Or the second part is an adjective : — The adjective retains its form, except that those in -us commonly take the ending -7js ; the first part consists either of a substantive or an adverb, e. g. aaTvyetrau, near the city, urbi vicinus ; iravaocpos or irdaaocpos, -ov, very ivise; av6- fjioios, -ov, unlike ; Trp687}\os, -ov, a.r)5r)s from 7]8vs, irodwK7]s from ukvs. 1 For example, SeiCiScuVwy is an adjective of two endings, the ending -urn being both Masc. and Fern., therefore the substantive dal/j.oov is not changed in composition ; but avj/Senrvos takes a regular adjective termination, as the sub- stantive Seiirvov has neither a Masc. nor Fern, ending. SYNTAX SECTION I SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE CHAPTEE I. Parts of a Simple Sentence c \ 238. Nature of a Sentence. — Subject. — Predicate. 1. Syntax treats of sentences. A sentence is the ex- pression of a thought in words, e. g. To poBov ^raXkec) 6 av^pco7ros ^vtjtos iaTLv. The conceptions of the mind are related both to each other and to the speaker. The con- ceptions or ideas themselves are expressed by Essential words (§ 38, 4) ; their relations to each other, partly by inflection and partly by Formal words. Thus, e. g. in the sentence Tb Ka\bv p6Sov &d\\~et iv tgS rod irarp-bs K^tr-a, there are five essential words : Ka\6s, pSSov, &d\Aeiv, irar^p, ktjttos ; their rela- tions to each other are expressed partly hy their inflection and partly by the Formal words r6, eV, t<£, rod. 2. Every sentence must necessarily have two parts, a sub- ject and a predicate. The subject is that, of which some- thing is affirmed ; the predicate that, which is affirmed of the subject, e. g. in the sentences, to poBov^rdWec — 6 av^pcoiro^ St^to? eariv, to poBov and 6 av^pcoTros are the subjects, ^d\- \ei and ^vtjtos icrTiv, the predicates. 3. The predicate properly contains the substance of the sentence ; the subject is subordinate to it and can be 298 SYNTAX. [$ 23& expressed by a mere inflection-ending of the verb, e. g diSco-fiL, (J) give. 4. The subject is a substantive or a word used as a substantive, viz. a substantive pronoun or numeral; an adjective or participle used as a substantive ; an adverb which becomes a substantive by prefixing the article ; a preposition with its Case ; an infinitive ; finally, every word, tetter, syllable, and every combination of words can be con- sidered as a substantive, and with the neuter article com- monly agreeing with it, can be used as a subject. The subject is in the Nom. T b p 6 8 o v &aAAei. — 'Ey k ypdcpoo, a b ypd£) TO?s"EAA-n sc - Kaip6s, it is time, it is allowed, one can = licet, $ ktfii SUBJECT. PREDICATE. COPULa 299 e. ^ ler. 3, 73. rjfuv irape^ei avaadxTaffSui ttjv apxh v - * n tn i s wav tue w«i\v * &eos is very frequently omitted in certain phrases, e. g. wp ov.)- pal* i, sc. 6 &e6s ; irpoxope'i f*oi ( sc. to irpdyp-aTa), things prosper to me, I succeed, comp. Th- 1, 109. In such expressions as (p a tm tolovt wv (sc iraidcou) oiacpepow ; (e) With the third Pers. Sing, of the verb, in a subordinate clause containing a general idea, and in definitions, the indefinite pronoun t I s is sometimes omitted. PL Criton. 49, C. ovre avradiKelf Se?, ovt€ kolkSis Troie?i/ cvoiua av&p&irwv, ovo" hv otlovv it da XV " 7r ' avr£>v, not even if any one should suffer from them ; so often Avith 'the Inf. ; but if a participle stands in connection with the Inf., e. g. Eur. M. 1^18. Kovcpeos 4>4peiu xpv frvvrbv out a (ru/j.(popds, the participle must be c nsidered as the subject. Rem. 2. Such expressions as 8e?, xp~hi 8o/ce?, Trpexet, ^o-tl(v), eVSexerat (it is possible), KaAws, ev e'xe:, ex?J \6yov (consentaneum est), Xeyercu (it is said), etc., the Greek language always considers as personal, the following Inf. or substan- tive sentence being regarded as the subject of these verbs. 6. The predicate is a verb, an adjective, participle, ad- jective pronoun or j:umeral, or a substantive with the Formal word ehai ; elvai, in this relation, is usually called the copula, since it connects the adjective, substantive, etc. with the subject, and forms one thought, e. g. Tb pooov &d\\e„ — 'O frvfrpwius &v>it6s iariv. — 'A&dvar oi elaiv oi beol. — 'H apeTTj KaXi) scttiv. — 'Ay a &rj Trapaicpaais iarii/ eraioov. — Kvpos r)v j8as S> raXai- iro>p\ tfre lidcrxovr e.s rdSe ; Id. H. 117. i\v cnrevScov. Her. 3, 99. awap- ve6fxev6s e (XT i. Id. 9, 51. rj vrjaos icrri a-rrb rod 'Ao'cvirov SeKa (TTaSiovs airexovcra. PI. E. 860, e. el ravia ovrcos exovrd 4ariv. Dem. 01. 3. (v. 1.) 11, 7. raur av eyvtvK ore s i\vav, they would have been convinced of these, things. Rem. 6. The copula eTvai is sometimes omitted, though commonly only in the Ind. Pres. ; eTvai is sometimes omitted, even when it is not a copula, but properly a verb. This ellipsis is most frequent in the following cases : — (a) In general propositions, observations, and provei'bs. Eur. 0. 330. 6 fj.eyas oXf3os ov fj.6vi.ij.os iv f3poro7s. X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. arpanct yap 7] picTTt] (65os) raxio-TT] ; (b) Very often with verbal adjectives in -reos, as also with other expres- sions denoting necessity and duty, e. g. a v a yK-n, xpt&v, &e/xis, elicos, also with Ktxipos, &pa and the like. Dem. Ph. 3. 129, 70. rifiiv y virep T? t s eXev&eplas aycovLareov. Id. Cor. 296. 205. arifxias — iv dovXevovar) rf} ir6Aei cpepeiv dvdyicri] (c) Often with certain adjectives, e. g. eroijxos, irp6Srvfj.os, oTosre, Swa- t6s, padiov, x a ^- e7r of, StjXov, a£iov, etc. PI. Phaedr. 252, a. (rj ipvxb) SovXeveiv eroi/j.7}. Dem. Ph. 1. 48, 29. iyw irdo-x*w oriovv eroi- fxos. X. C. 1, 1, 5. drjXov ovv, on ovk av (Soj/cpaVr/s) irpoeXeyev, el fxrj iiricrTevev aX-nbevo-eiv. Comp. ib. 2, 34. Here belong also the expressions Savjxao-rbv baov, it is very wonderful (= mirum quantum), a^xavov ocrov, it is quite impossible, inconceivable (= immane quantum), see § 332, Rem. 10. On ovSels ostls ov (= nemo non), see § 332, Rem. 12. Rem. 7. The Ind. Impf. is but seldom omitted, e. g. Aeschin. Ctes. § 71, vb£ ev Lieaco (sc. -fjv) Kai Traprj/mev rfj varepaia els ttjv eKKXrjaiav ; the Ind. Pres. also is not very often omitted after conjunctions, e. g. SirSre, ivei (comp. X. C. 1, 46); on the contrary, very frequently after otl and ths (that), e. g. X. C. 1. 2. 52. Xeycav, as obSev ocpeXos. The subjunctive is but seldom omitted after the rela- tive bs av, and especially after conjunctions, e. g. PI. Rp. 370, e. £>v av avro7s Xptla (sc. fi). The ellipsis of the Opt. when av belongs to it is more frequent, e. g. X. Cy. 1.4, 12. ris yap 'av, ecpacrav, gov ye ixavwrepos Tveiaai (sc. elr]) ; Ib. 2. 3, 2. r)v fj.ev rjixels vLKafxev, SrjXov, otl o'l re iroXe/j.LOL av rifxerepoL (sc. eitfaav). The ellipsis of the Imp. is very rare, e. g. S. 0. C. 1480. "iXaos, 3> Sai/j-wv. X. An. 3. 3, 14. ro7s ovv &eo7s X®-P LS ( sc - eo~rco), otl ov crvv iroKkrj pco/j-v, aXXa o~vv oXiyois -TjASov. The participle is very often omitted, especially after verba intelligendi and declarandi, e. g. X. S. 3, 7. 5rjx6v ye, otl cpavXos (sc. wv) (pavovjxaL, but else- where also, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 15. droira Xeyeis Ka\ ovSafxcbs irpbs aov (sc. ovra), et nullo modo tibi convenientia ; even in such cases as Th. 4, 135. x eL l x ^ v0 ^ reXevTcvv- tos Kal -rrpbs tap %8r) (sc. ovtos). The Inf. is often omitted after 5oice7v, r)ye7o-- &cu, vopLL&LV and the like, e. g. Th. 7, 60. (3ovXevrea eSo/cet. X. Cy. 1. 6, 14. atviovra fxe ineXevaas ro7s o"t paTrjy lko7s (sc. eTvai) vo/xL^o/xevois avdpdcn diaXeyea- d-ai. $239. Comparison. — Attribute and Object. 1. When the predicate belongs to the subject in a higher oi lower degree than to another object, this relation is denoted by ae Comparative, e. g. 'O 7ra.Tr/p /ici(wv io-rlv. ?} 6 vi6<;. — 'O $ 239.J COMPARISON. ATTRIBUTE A«D OBJECT. 30 1 crocjibs fxaXXov \atp€i rfj apzrrj, t) rots )(pyp.acnv. And when the predicate belongs to the subject in the highest or lowest degree, as respects all other objects compared, the Superlative is used, and commonly takes with it a partitive Genitive, e. g. ~2,U)KpaT7)<; 7T0LVT0jV HWrjVOV (T O

T (XT O S T]V. O CTOnus ; (c) even by the Superlative: fxaXicTTa (7rAe to- top and /xdy lctt ov j oet.), e. g. S. 0. C. 743. trXelffT ov dv&pctnrccv kolklctos. Th. 7, 42. jj.dXicr -a tzivoraTos; (d) by the relative: as 1 (oiras), otl and ^, oTos (§ 343, Rem. 2), e.g.as Taxio-ra, quam celerrime, otl /xaXiffTa, fi &pio~rov, e. g. PI. Apol. 23, a. iroXXaX p.ev airex&eial fxoi yeyovcuri kolL oTai x a *-* 7Z & TaTa - 1 Ka ^ &apvTTaToi' ; (e) by els, unus, e. g. Her. 6, 127. ^A&e ~2jj.lv- dvpiSrjs ~XvfiapLTi]s, ts ewl irXeTirTov Stj x At <^s e ^ s avfyp airi/cero. X. An. 1. 9, 22. 5a>pa it X el lt to. els ye av^p cvv eXdfx^ave, he received the most gifts, at least considering the. fact that he was but a single individual (C. Tusc. 2. 26, 64. amplitu- dinem animi unam esse omnium rem pulcherrimam) : (f) a peculiar mode of strengthening the Superlative, is by joining iv to7s with it, in which case the Superlative must be repeated, e. g. 'O "Epcos iv to?s irpetr $vto.t6s etm (i. e. iv toIs irpeo-fivraTOLs oZctl), the oldest among those who are very old. Her. 7, 137. tovt6 /J.0L ev toIcl &ei6Ta.T ov cpaiveTm yeveaSraL. PI. Symp. 173, b. ~2.o3Kpa.Tovs ipaaTr]s &v ev to7s fidXuTTa tcvv TOTe. The construction with the Pern, is found only in Time, e. g. 3, 81. (o-toW) ev to7s TrpccT-n iyeveTo. lb. 17. ev to7s irXe?o~Tai vvjes. In such instances, to7s must be considered as Neut. In like manner, the expression o/xoia (6/j.o?a Ion.) to?s was used with the Superlative. Her. 3, 8. aefiovTaL 5e 'ApdfiLOL -k'httls av^pcairwv 6(xo?a t otcr l /xdXi(TT a (sc. cefiojxevoLs), Wee those who respect very much, ut qui maxime. Th. 1, 25. XR^H-dTcov hvvdfxei ovTes kclt iiceTvov tov xp^vov '6/j.oiu t o?s 'EXX-f]vccv it Xovcr icoTaT ols. The Superlative is also intensified by joining a positive with it, e. g. 'Aya&av iirirewv KpaTiaTos, the best among the good horsemen = the very best. Rem. 3. The Superlative relation is often expressed more emphatically by negative adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, preceded by ov (Litotes), instead of positive adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, e. g. oi>x tikio-to., not the leasts especially, ov naKio-Tos, ovk iXdxio-T~os, stronger than /xd< Xlo-tcl, $eXTL(TTos, /xeyiaTos. Sometimes, also, it is expressed antithetically, e. g oi>x ^\Ki(TTa, a A A a fidXicTTa. 1 'D.s, '6tl are not in themselves intensive particles, but merely connect some part of Svva/j.a.L understood, and in that way may be said to give intensity to the Superlative. Sometimes Svvafj.ai is expressed, e. g. aevoQwv avio-TaTou eaTaXfievos eirl ir6Xe/j.ov cos edvvaTO klxXXlltto.. 26 302 SYNTAX. f $ 24C 2. A sentence consisting of a subject and piedicate may ba extended by defining the subject and predicate more exactly. The word or words which define the subject more fully, is called an attribute, or attributive. The subject is more exactly described, therefore, (a) by the addition of an adjective (attrib- utive 1 adjective), e. g. to ky the Inf., (d) by an adverb, e. g. c O o-obs ttjv aperrjv dcr/cei. lie pi rrjs n-arptSos fxa^o/xed^a. 'A7rtevat e7rtS^vjxu). K a A. cos y/oa<£eis. $ 240. Agreement. 1. The finite verb agrees with the subject hi Person and Number; the adjective, participle, pronoun, and numeral, in Gender, Number, and Case. The substantive, as a predicate, agrees with the subject only in Case; in Gender, Number, and Case, only "when it denotes a person, and hence either has a particular form for the Masc. and Fern., or is of common gender. The same principle applies to substantives in apposition ($ 266, 1). But when the substantive denotes a thing, it agrees with the subject only in Case, e. g. 'E-yw ypd(p(t}, o~v ypdcpeis, ojtos ypdivos 8rvi)r6s iariu. — 'H apery Kakr) io~nv. — To irpdyixa alaxpov eo~riv. — Of "EXA^es Tro\e/xiKdi>TaTOL tfaav. — 'O Ka\bs irais, '(] aocpr) yvvr\, rb p.iKpbv tIkvov. — 'Eyevecrdvv rw dvdpe tovtco (Kpirias Kai 'AAKifiidSns) (pvcrei (piXoTijuLordrca irdvruu 'Afrrivaiwv, X. C. 1.2, 14, • — Kvpos ^u fixaiKevs. — Toixvpis i\v fiaaiAeia. — Kvpos, 6 fiao-tAevs, To/xvpis, r) fiaal Aeia. On the contrary, t$)v Svy ar epa, deiu6u ti KaWos kcu /J. eye &os, i^dycDV wSe elirev (his daughter a wonder in beauty and size), X. Cy. 5. 2, 7. 1 When the adjective merely ascribes some quality to the substantive with which it agrees, it is called an attributive adjective, but when it belongs to the predicate and is used in describing what is said of the subject, it is called a predicative adjective, e. g. in the expression 6 dya^bs dv-hp (the good man), dya- $6s is attributive, but in 6 dvi'ip etrri dya$6s (the man is good), it is predicative. { 240.] AGREEMENT. 303 2. The predicative adjective or substantive agrees with the subject as above stated, when the folloAving and other similar verbs, which do not of themselves express a complete predicate sense, have chiefly the force of the copula : — (a) The verb virdpxew, to be the cause of, to be, to exist ; (b) Verbs signifying to become, to increase, to groiv, e. g. yiyvo- fxai, ecpvv, av^dvo/xai ; (c) The verbs fxevw, to remain, and Kariarr-qv, to be established, appointed, to stand; (d) Verbs signifying to seem, appea- shoio one's self, e. g. eoiKa, (fiacvo/xai, SrjXovfxai ; (e) Verbs signifying to be named, e. g. KaAovpxi, oVo/x,a£o/x 84. cpiAe t4kuov (Hec- tor) ; but it is very common in prose with a Part, which stands in a remotci attributive relation, e. g. Th. 3, 79. iirl ttjv tt6Kiv iiriirKeov iv iroAAp rapaxy Kal ovTas. X. Cy. 7. 3, 8. S> aya&i] Kal tvicttt) fuxi otxv ^ c\tto\i- ttwv Tinas. X. H. 1. 4, 13. 6 4k tov dareos ox^os 7]&polcrfrn rrpbs Tas vavs> & avfid(ovTts Kal I8e?v fiov\6p.evoi tov 'KXKi^idZ-nv. It is very frequent with the pronouns, Th. 1, 136. (pevyet is Kep Kvpav chs avTwv (sc. KepKvpal ccv) evepyeTTjs. 4, 15. is tt\v ^irdpTTjv cos rjyyeT&n to. yeyeurj/xiva Trepl TlvXoy, eSo^ev avTols (sc. to7s 'ZirapTiaTais). X. Cy. 3. 3, 14. avyKaXiaas irav to ctt pw t i cot iko v e\e|e ivpbs avTovs ToidSe. Also with the relative pronoun ; see on adjective-sentences, § 332. 5. $241.] EXCEPTIONS TO THE E.ULES OF AGREEMENT. 302 Remark 1. When the suhject is expressed by the Neut. article t6 or 7 a in connection with a substantive in the Gen. PL, the predicate is commonly in the PL, being conformed to the attributive genitive ; the predicative adjective or par- ticiple takes the gender of the attributive genitive. S. Ph. 497. t a t a> v SiaicS- voiv rbu o"lkoS' fjireiyov crroXou (fjireiyov which has the Neut. PL rd for its subject would regularly have been in the Sing, according to No. 4, but is con- formed to the plurality in SiaK6uwv). PL Ep. 8. 563, c. rb rcav frypioov iXev&epdrepd iariu (the Sing, iariy is used on account of the Neut. PL iXev&epcoTepa, according to No. 4, while iXevSrepwrepa is conformed to the idea of fr-qpia contained in frnpiow). Rem. 2. Closely related to the construction just stated, is the following. When a substantive subject with an attributive substantive in the Gen. PL expresses periphrastically a substantive idea, as \pvxv Teipeaiao, the Participle which stands in a remoter attributive relation to the subject, agrees in Case with the subject, but in Gender and Number with the substantive in the Gen., which expresses the principal idea of the periphrasis. Od. A, 90. ^A&e 5' iirl ipvxv @7}fiaiov Teipeaiao xputreoj/ vKYjiTTpov e%coi/, the shade of the Theban Teiresias came, having a go/den sceptre (here %x av agrees in number with ^xh-, but in gender with Teipecrlao). 11. /3, 459, bpvi&aiv ireTerjcwi' e&rea iroXXd, ev&a Kal ev&a iroTuvrai ayaXXofievai trrepvyeaaiv. 2. When the subject is expressed, not as a special and defi- nite object, but as a general idea, the predicative adjective is put in the Neut. Sing, without reference to the gender and number of the subject. (The English sometimes uses the words thing, or something. Sometimes the pronoun t1, or the substantives xp?7/" a > Trpay/xa, are connected with the adjective. When the adjective is in the Superlative, the English uses the article the). II. /3, 204. ouk aya&bv iroXvKoipavi-r) (a multiplicity of rulers is not a gooa tiling): efs Koipavos £ fSia) tlkt€L eV. PL Rp. 4. 420, C. oi 6(p&aXfj.o i, KaXXiar ov ov, ovk offTpeico ivaX7]Xiixix4voi elffiv. Her. 3, 53. wpavph xPVP- a (era 1 Kal airoWvrai to. ot/ceta etcdcrrov. Eur. M. 618. Kanov yap di'b'pbs Swp' ovr,aiv ovk ex 61. Rem. 4. Also in adverbial participial phrases, a neuter plural is joined with a participle in the singular, e. g. oo^av ravr a, quum haec visa, decreta essent. X. An. 4. 1, 13. o6£av Se ravra, eKtipv^av ovtco iroieTv, when these things had been agreed upon, orders were given, etc. Yet, X. H. 3. 2, 19. oo^avra 8e rav- r a Kal rcepap&evra, ra /xev arparevfxara dirrjX&ei'. Rem. 5. There are some exceptions, however, to the rule just stated ; most of them may be referred to the following cases : — (a) When the subject in the Xeut. PI. denotes persons or living creatures, the verb is very often put in the PL in accordance with the Constructio Kara avveaiv. Th. 4, 88. rd reXrj (the magistrates) rS>v AaKeoi/xoviccy 6 /j.6a avr a Bpaaioav e£ eirf^ a v. 7, 57. roadoe jxera ^ASrqvaiwv e id- vn e ar par evov. PL Lach. 1 80, e. Ta jxe 1 p an 10. o laXeyo fie v 01 in 1 fie jj.vnvr ai ItCUKparous Kal a(poSpa eir aiv ova tv. (b) When the objects contained in the plural are to be lepresented individu- ally rather than collectively, or when the idea of plurality composed of several parts (which may also have relation to different times and places) is to be made prominent, 1 e. g. X. An. 1. 7, 17. ravrrj rfj rj/j-epa ovk e/xax^- aaro flaaiXevs, d\?C viroxwpovvT av (pavepd ^aav Kal 'imrcau Kal di/&pd>irav "iXVi\ TroWd (many tracks here and there). Cy. 5. 1, 14. rd fiox^VR^ avSp&iria iraaoov, olfxai, rcov eiri&vp.iuv d/cparr) iart, K&Treira epura alri- 1 It will often, therefore, depend upon the view in the speaker's mind, whether the SiDg. or PL is to be used. f241.J EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 307 uvn at, the singular iari is used here because mankind is referred to as a class, but the plural alri&vrai, to denote that each individual blames love, the charge being made too, in a different manner and at different times. Th. 5, 26. e|co (praeter) tovtojv irphs rbv MavriviKOV Kal 'E-rridavpiov iroXe/xov Kal is oAAa a/j.v avruv Seovrou Kal •>? yvv^ /cat 6 avrjp. The rule seems to be, that when the affirmation is made of each of the two separately, the Dual is used, but" when of both together, the Plural, e. g. Mi'vws kol AvKovpyos voftovs e'Jer^v (e:ich gave laws) ; fj&ovr} croi Kal Xvmq iv rrj 7roAa fiacnXevo-tTov. Rem. 7. The Dual is not used in all cases where two objects are spoken of, but only where two similar objects are mentioned, either naturally connected, e. g. iroSe, x 6 ^ e > ^ Te 5 or such as we conceive to stand in a close and reciprocal relation, e. g. two combatants, two friends, etc. Rem. 8. The Dual very often interchanges with the PL, especially in par- ticiples, e.g. II. X, 621. t oi ^ iSpa> air€^/vx°f ro X lTc ^ ua}J/ o~rdvr e irorl trvoir,v. PL Euthyd. 273, d. iyeXaadr -nv a(j.y/.iao- iv. PL Soph. 244, b. rcpos- ^pw/xevot dvo7v ovofiao- iv. PL Rep. 614, c. dvo x°- cr l jLaTa ^X /" 6 " vu> a. XXr) X o iv ; (b) The Duals rdi, ro7v, rcade, ro7vde, rovrcc, rovroiv, avrca, avro7v, w, oTv, in prose are used both as masculine and feminine (i. e. they are of common gender), e. g. &iA(pci> ra iroXee — rcb yvva7Ke — a/j-epco rovroi rw r^epa — to7i yeveaeotv — rovrw ra rexva — rovroiv ro7v Kivnaeoiv — rw 65u. The Fern ^08 syntax. 15 241 form of the article rd, is extuemely rare, e.g. ra 5' ovv i<6pa, S. Ant, 769 ; oftener the form. ra7v, X. H. 6, 4. 17. PL Tim. 79, d; so e* Talvde b* over a iv Trap&evoiv, S. 0. C. 445. Tavra occurs Av. Pac. 847, but t a v t a i v is more frequent, e.g. Tavra iv fxovaiv, S. 0. C. 859 ; e/c rav- raiv, 1149: ravraiv 8e t atv 8io&-iikcui>, Isae. 5, 15. Aura, S. Ant. 570. Besides the pronouns mentioned, sometimes other attributives also in the Dual are used as of common gender ; the participle but seldom. PL Phaedr. 237, d. rj/xav iv iKaarcp dvo rivi iarov Idea dpxovr e Kal ayovre, oTv kir6fj.e&a — ■ toiJtb 5e k. t. X. 6. When the predicate is a substantive connected to the subject by einu or any other verb having the character of a copula ($ 240, 2), the verb often agrees by means of attraction, as commonly in Latin, with the nearest predicative substantive. Her. 3, 60. to fxriKos tov 6pvy/j.aTos kirra or a 5 io'l elcri. 2, 15. ai 07j/3cu kXyvxTos i KaXier o. Th. 3, 112. icrrov Svw A 6 (pea 7] 'ldo/nivr) v^-nXu. 4, 102. rb xcapiov tovto, oirep TrpSrepov 'Ej/ye'a 65ol iKaXovvro. Isocr. Paneg. 51, b. eo~Ti a px^Kurar a rwv ibvSiv Kal [xeyio'Tas dwaareias ix ovTa 2/cud-cu Kal &pS.xes Kal Uepaai. So also in the participial construction, e. g. Th. 5, 4. KaTaXa/j.fidvovo~i Kal fipiKtvvias, ov epv/aa iv rfj Aeovrivr). PL L. 735, e. tovs fxiyiara i^fxapr-nKoras, avidrovs 5e ovras, /j.ey iorr)v Se oZaav fiXafi-nv ir6Xea>s, airaXXdrrziv tfwSev (instead of ovras). So also Her. 3, 108. r) Xeaiva, iov lcrx v poTaTov Kal frpacrvraTov, aira£ iv t<£ fiia> ti/ctci eV, instead of iovcra. Comp. No. 2. A similar attraction occurs sometimes in sentences denoting comparison, e. g. rav koivwv tl dpa dievoovjxrjv, wv ovdev o~b pLaXXov. ij tis aXXos exei, PL Theaet. 209. a. (e%ei here agreeing with rts instead of o~v). In Latin this is much more frequent. 7. A superlative connected with a partitive Gen. commonly takes the gender of the subject, more rarely that of the partitive Gen. II. , 253. (alerov) '6s& dfia KaprtarSs re Kal &kio~tos irereyvuv. x> 139. KipKos, iXacpp6raros irere-nvuv. Her. 4, 85. 6 Uovtos veXayewv airdvTwv ireepvKe Sruivfiaa iwraros. Menandr. p. 193. (Mein.) vocruv xaXf irwTaTos (p&6vos. X. C. 4. 7, 7. o IfjXios tov irdvra xP& vov ^dvroiv Xapnrp6- raros bv diafMevei. PL Tim. 29, a. 6 koct/ulos KaXXurros ru>v yeyovoroov. Plutarch. Consol. 102. c tj Xvir-n x«^ e7r& > TC ' T7 ? wt&cm On the contrary, Isocr. ad Nicocl. extr. o-bfxfSovXos aya&bs xP 7 } (XL f JL ^ raT0v Ka ^ TvpavviKco- raTov aTrdvTwv kttj fxdrwv iari (the Superlative here taking the gender of the partitive Gen. KTrifidrav). Eem. 11. When the idea of personality in general is to be expressed, the Masc. form may be used, referring to words denoting females; (in this and other similar irregularities, less regard is had to strict grammatical principles than to the general idea to be expressed,) e. g. ^weXrjXv^atriv ws e^e KaraXeXeifj.- fxevai aSeXcpai re Kal aSeXepiSa? Kal avetytal ToaavTai, S>sr dvai iv ttj ohcia T€ narpl rifiapoifiei/oi. Eem. 12. Sometimes the first Pers. PL, or the Pers. pi-onoun first Pers. PI is used, for the sake of modesty, instead of the Sing., the speaker representing his own views and actions as common to others. This usage, which is very frequent in Latin, is rarely found among the Greeks in the Common language. "*Q. 'A\Kifiid$ri, Kal r) fie is rrjAiKovToi ovres Sewol ra roiavra ^fiev (I also was at that age sharp in these matters). X. C. 1. 2, 46. 'Evi/oid not? 7ifi?v iyepero (the thought once occurred to me), Cy. 1. 1, 1. TJepl fiev ovv ru>v irpax&tvTuiv ev t<£ irap6vTi tout etx°l X€V etVeu/. Among the poets, particularly the Tragedians, this use of the PL is more frequent, and a transition from the Sing, to the PL often occurs, e. g. Eur. H. F. 858. "HAiov fxaprvp6fiea^a Spaxr, a dpau ob 0o6\ofiai. Hipp. 244. alSovfxeSa yap ra \e\eyfxeva fJtbi. Eem. 13. In an address directed to several persons, the Greek has several peculiar idioms : — (a) The Imp. Sing, e lire and some others, which denote an exhortation or animating call, e. g. &ye, tis cos rdxos, eK&cbv 5e Sdxovs rovsS', 'Lv oloovoo-Koirel, fiox^-ois rpiaivov tcavaT petyov efnraKiv, Kal — /xeSes. Comp. Larger Grammar, § 430, 2 (7). $ 242. Agreement when there are several subjects. 1. When there are two or more subjects connected together, there is a double relation to be distinguished : — (a) The subjects are regarded as expressing multitude, and the predicate is referred to all the subjects equally ; then the predicate is in the Plural, and when there are but two subjects, in the Dual or even in the Plural (comp. $ 241, 310 SYNTAX. [$ 242 5); the gender of the predicative adjective is determined according to the following rales : — (a) With words of like gender denoting persons, the adjective has the same gender; with words of dif- ferent gender denoting persons, the gender of the adjective is conformed to the masculine subject, rather than to the feminine or neuter, and to the feminine rather than the neuter; in both cases the adjective and verb are plural. (/5) With words of like gender denoting things, the adjective is either in the same gender and in the plural, or is in the neuter plural; with words of different gender denoting things, the adjective is in the neuter plural. (y) When words denoting persons and things stand in connection, the adjective is plural and takes the gender of the words denoting persons, when the persons are to be considered as the more prominent idea, or the things are to be viewed personally ; but when both are to be viewed merely as things, the adjective is in the neuter plural. Kai Xi)^rt] 8e Kai a&vfiia /cat SvsKoXia Kai /xay la iroWaKis ttoWoTs Sia r\)v tov (Tu>fiaTos Kax^iav eis t))v diduoiav £ fxirlirT ovo~ iv, X. C. 3. 12, 6. 2a>K/)a- Tei 6 fii\r]T a yevo/j.ei'U) Yip it las re Kai 'AXKifiiddj) s 7rAe?crra Kana ttjv tt6\iv i ico i t\ to v s y ey e vr) jx4 vovs, ed&Kpvcrev, X. Cy. 3. 1, 7. 'H 6 p y ?7 Kai ■?? affvveffia dal k a k a I. — ^dofiaros Kd\\os Kai i a x v s SeiAw Kai KaK'jj ^vv oiKovvr a tt peirovT a cpaiverai, PL Menex. 246, e. Evyeveial t« itAi7T7ros i\Gav ruv tpywv Kvpioi, Aesch. 'H Ka\' \iffT7] TTOXlT eia T6 KO.I 6 K O.W I ff T S CL V 7) p AotTTCt Uv 7)fl7v eft? 8ieA&e«', 1 up aw is re Kai rvpavvos, PL Pp. 562, a. (b) Each subject is considered sejiarately and by itself; then the predicate is confined to one of the subjects and $242] AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 311 agrees with it. This construction is also used when one of the subjects is to be represented as more prominent than the others. There are here three positions of the predicate: (a) before all the subjects; (b) after all the subjects ; (c) after the first subject. PI. Lys. 207, d. iAe? vdas ©rjficuos. X. An. 2. 2, 1. aAiVos ^ero iTt<£ SidoKuv elsTriir- Tei. So also with the attributive adjective, e.g. X. An. 1. 5, 6. k-nTa. o/3o- \ovs Kal rnxio[$6xiov 'Att ikovs (the adjective here agreeing with dfioXovs rather than ruuofSSMov). Th. 8, 63. 'Acrrvoxos iTrv&ero rbv 2t po jtt/JtxfSij v Kal r as vavs OTreAijAv^ora, Rem. 2. The verb sometimes stands in the Sing., if several nouns in the PI. denoting things precede, when it is intended to represent those nouns as making up one whole, as a condition, state, etc., e. g. PL S. 188, b. Kal irdxvai Kal % a A a £cu Kal ipvcifiai e/c irXeovz^ias Kal aKOCfiias irepl ^AA7jAa twv toio0~ Tcav yiyvzrai ipwrucay. Rem. 3. When the subjects are connected by ij — rj, aut — aut, Kai — Kai, et — et, ovre — ovre, neque — neque, the predicate agrees with the subject standing nearest to it, if each subject is to be regarded separately and by itself, e. g. r) outos, 7) eKeTvos aA-nfrrj Xeyei, aut hie, aut illc vera dicit; but when the subjects arc not considered separately or as independent of each other, but as expressing plurality, the predicate is in the PI., e. g. Dem. Aph. 817, 12. & ArjiAocpwi' v) ®ripnnri§7]s ex ovo ~ 1 ' Rem. 4. The attributive adjective commonly agrees with the substantive nearest to it, e. g. 'ApcpoTepois ol avrol fpKOi Kal |v n/j.axia KaTeffTr), Th. But where perspicuity or emphasis requires it, the adjective is repeated with each substantive, e.g. Trdvres &vdpes Kal irao-ai yuvat/ces; or the con- structions stated under No. 1 are observed, e. g. 'HpaKXrjs Kal 7jcrevs /ji6i/oi. TlaTfyp Kal ix7)rrip Kal adeAcpol cu'xjiiaAwTOi ye-y e vr\ /jl ivoi, etc. See examples under No. 1. 2. When several subjects of different persons have a com- mon predicate, the verb (which is commonly plural) is in the first person rather than the second or third, and in the second rather than the third. 'Eyob Kal ab ypd ko\ £k€?vos ypa~Xa Kal Xi&os, etc. (3) Abstracts in the plural have a concrete signification, since the plural is used when the separate kinds or circumstances or relations of the abstract idea, are denoted, or the manifestation of the abstract action, as repeated in different places or times : hence also when the abstract idea relates to several persons, e . g. Herod. 7, 158. vfuv fxeyaXai oexv Kal SaXirr], &vfiol, animi ; the (particular) sedition; rb tt pay fi a, the (particular) deed; hence also the PL ot io~riv. Rem. 2. Where the English uses the indefinite article a or an, denoting merely a class, as a man, or an individual of a class who is not distinguished from the others, as some man, it not being determined what man, the Greek omits the article ; hence dvHrpa-rros in both instances. Rem. 3. Common nouns sometimes omit the article, where, accoi'ding to the statement in No. 1, it would be inserted. This is the case: (a) In appellations denoting kindred and the like, where the particular relation is obvious of itself, or is sufficiently definite from the connection or the context, e. g. iraW/p, fj-^rrip, vlos, adeXcpSs, ira7oes, yove7s, avr\p, husband, yvv-fj, wife, etc. Comp. the expres- sions, Father has said it, Mother comes ; (b) When two or more independent sub- stantives are united, forming one whole, e. g. ira7des Kal ywa7Kes (like English wife and child, horse and rider), tt6Xis Kal o'lKiai (city and houses), Th. 2, 72; (c) When common nouns are, at the same time, used as proper nouns ; these being definite from their nature or from usage, do not need the article, e. g. tjXios, obpav- v6s, ao-rv, used of Athens, ir6xis, of a particular city, known from the context. yrj, of a particular country, PaaiXevs, of a particular king, commonly the king of Persia, etc. ; other like expressions are dve/xos, SaXao-o-a, etc. The article is often omitted also with words denoting time, though this is generally the case only in connection with prepositions, e. g. aft r,{iepas, /.cexpi wktos, dfj.a op&pca, irepl rjXiou fivo-fxds, /j.erd 'IXtov aXcco-iv. The omission of the article is altogether natural when a common noun has an abstract signification, or expresses an action, or the manner of an action, most frequently in connection with prepo- sitions, e. g. 7iye7a&ai &eovs, to believe in gods. 'Eirl 5e7irvov eX&e7v, to come to supper, to a feast, X. C. 1. 3, 6. 'Ecp' 'lttttov levai, horse-back. 'Eirl £rf)pav e^ievat (i. e. ad venandum). X. Cy. 1. 2, 9. Ylorepov eivio-rdfj.evov r,viox^7v eirl £evyos Xafie7v Kpelrrov, ^ /j.7] eTriard/Jievov (ad vehendum), X. C. 1. 1, 9. 'EttI vSwp levai (aquatum ire), Her. 3, 14 Rem. 4. The names of the arts and sciences, of the virtues and vices, often omit the article, even where they occur in a definite relation, since, as well- known appellatives, they have come to be used as a kind of proper names, e. g Xldvra /xev ovv e/.ioiye 80/ceT ra KaXa ical rd aya&d aaK-nrd elvai, ov% r\Kio~Ta Si ffaxppoavvr}. X. C. 1. 2, 23. *Eirel olv rd re diKaia Kal rd aXXa KaXa re Ka\ &ya&d iravra aperfj -rrpdrrerai, SqXov elvai, Sri Kal § iKaioavvt] Kal r) &XXr) iraaa iperr) aocpla iarl, 3. 9, 5. 'E ir 1 a r 4] Li 17 dpa trocpia earlv, 4. 6. 7. MaXiara -yc^j $ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 315 efjiefi-nX^Ket outc? iTririKTJs, Cy. 8. 3, 25. The omission of the article is natural also, when an abstract is to be represented actively, e. g. 'Ei> (ptXocrocpla (cocnv, in philosophizing (in philosophando), PL Phaed. 68, c. But where a particular art or science, etc. is to be distinguished from another, the article is used, e. g. 7) p-ni opiK-n, 7] api^fxr,TiK7}. The substantives fieyc&os, 7rXrj&os, v\j/os, e I - oos, pd&os, yevos and the like, are very often found in the Ace. or Dat. without the article, as they are to be received as a kind of adverbial expression, e.g. iroTafxhs KvZuos 6f0fia, evpos Svo TrXe&pwv, two plethra wide, X. An. 1. 2,23. 3. The article is very often used with common nouns to denote what belongs to an object or is requisite for it, what is due to it. X. Cy. 3. 3, 6. 'Ei/ofil(s yap, el eKacnos rb fiepos a^Uiraivov iroiT]e /xtj irapeir} iroXXa, SvvaiT av aXvircos t 7rcu, rb /3 ifi\lov (the book = this or that book). In this relation, the article may be used with material nouns, e. g. Aos /jlol rb yd\a (the milk, which had been pointed out) ; and even when a part only of the material is referred to, the article is employed, tbough material nouns elsewhere are always without the article, as they contain no idea of individuality, e. g. Uiva rod oXvov (of this wine). The article is often used in speaking of persons or' things known and celebrated, where the Latin uses the pronoun Hie, e. g. 6 naXbs -iry Avdwv fia *Zovvlov aKpov, ?; QeairpoiTls 777, 7? Arj\os vrfcros \ tov 'ZKOfj.fSpov opovs, Th. 2, 96 ; tov A'ifxov opovs, Th. 2, 96 (<5 AT/jos) ; 77 BoA/fy Xlfivrj, Th. 1, 58. 4, 103; i) MecSq iroXis, Th. 4. 130. But if the gender (or declension) is not the same, they must be regarded as in apposition with the nouns to which they belong, and are placed before or after them, e. g. t<£ opei ttJ Tepaveia, Th. 4, 70 ; Tijv aKpav Tb Kvvbs (Ttj/jjx, 8. 105 ; Trjs*Idris tov opovs, 10S ; 77 ArjKvkros ri> cppov- piov, 4, 113 : Tb x a> p' LOV a ' L "Ewea 6§oi, 1, 100 ; ttjv ttoXlv tovs Tapaovs, X. An. 1. 2, 26. The' article is seldom omitted, e. g. airb "Afidiipwv TroAews, Th. 2, 97. 8. When adjectives or participles are used as substantives, they regularly (according to No. 2) take the article. The Eng- lish here either employs an adjective used substantively, as the good; or a substantive, as the speaker {=the one speaking); 01 resolves the participle by he who, they icho, that which (=to the Lat. is, qui). This usage is very frequent in Greek with all the participles. 'O aocpos, the icise (man), a wise (man), ot ayaSoi, ol kcucoI, ol SiKafyvres (those who judge), the judges ; ol Aeyoires, the orators; Tb ay a&ov, Tb /caAoV, to. nakd, 6 fSovXojievos, quivis ; 6 tvx&v, whoever happens. 'O TrXelaTa uxpsX&v Tb Koivbv ueyiaTav tiuwv a^iovTai. 'O ir\e7o-Ta u

v avriT^kt Tta&at, vvv airei\ov(nv avTol Ka& eavTobs i/j.fia\e?v els tt\v 'Attik^v. 10. The Greek may convert adverbs of place and time, more seldom of quality, into adjectives or substantives by prefixing the article. In like manner a preposition with its Case may b* made to express an adjective or substantive meaning. H &vw Tr6his, the upper city. 'O /xira^v tottos, the intervening place. Ol eVfraS &v&pcoiroi. or ol ev&a8e. 'O vvv jSacriAevy. Oi iraXat aocpol dvSpes. Ol t6ts, th« men of that time. 'H avpiov (sc. rj/xepa). 'H e|ai^/7js ntTa, t^v it6\iv \4ya>. PI. Rp. 352, d. ov irepl tov iiriTvx^VTOS (de T4 levi) 6 \6yos (corn/), rWa, irepl tov ovriva Tpoirov XP^ Cv v » $ 245. Position of the Article. 1. The article is sometimes separated from its substantive by intervening particles, e. g. p.iv, Se, ye, re, ydp, &rj ; by the indefinite pronoun ns (in Herodotus veiy often), and by avrbs iavrov. Tbv [x\v &v8pa, rrjv 8e yvvaata. When a preposition stands before the article, the prose-writers say either: irpbs Se rbv avSpa, or irpbs rbv avSpa 5e, but not irpbs rbv 8e dvSpa. — Tuv tis Uepcreoov, Her. 1, 85. To7s avrbs avrov TT-fi/xao-i Qapiiverat, Aeschyl. Ag. 845. 2. When several substantives are connected by koll or re — kul, there are two Cases: (1) the article is repeated with each; then the separate ideas expressed by the substantives are con- * 245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 31f sidered independent of each other, or they stand in contrast or (2) the article is not repeated; then the separate ideas ax ft considered as forming one single conception. 1,WKpa.Tf]s irdvra yye'iro &eobs eideuai, rd re Xeyofxeva Kai Trparr6/xeua Kai Td tnyfj (SovXevofxeva (the first two members form a whole, but the last is contrasted with them), X. C. 1. 1, 19. At padiovpyiai Kai 4k rov irapaxpvpa •qSoj/cu, 2. 1, 20. At iirL/xeAeiai ru>v KaXwv re Kaya&wv epycov, ib. Td re cv/xcpepopra Kai Kexap"T- p.eva, 2. 2, 5. Of arpart\yoi Kai Xoxayoi, An. 7. 3, 21. Tb p-eyaXoTrpeires re Kai iXev&epioj; Kai rb raireiv6u re Kai aveXeteepov (here the first two and also the last two form one single conception), X. C. 3. 10, 5. Tobs aypobs robs eavrov Kai oiKias, Th. 2, 13. Ot iraldes re Kai yvvawes (so many MSS.), PL Up. 557, C. 3. When a substantive having the article has attributive expletives joined with it, viz., an adjective, participle, adjec- tive pronoun or numeral, a substantive in the Gen., an adverb or preposition with its Case ($ 244, 10), then the article has a different position according to the idea to be expressed, as will be seen from the two following cases : — (a) The attributive is joined with its substantive to express a single idea, as the wise man = the sage, and is designed to contrast the object denoted by its substantive with other objects of the same kind. In this case, the attributive stands either between the article and the substantive, or after the substantive with the article repeated ; or the substantive stands first without the article, and the attributive follows l with the article. O ayaSrbs avrip or 6 avrip 6 aya&6s or avrjp 6 aya&os (in contrast with the bad man). See Eem. 1. Ot ttXovctloi iroX7rai or ol TtoX7rai ol irXofoioi (in contrast with poor citizens) . 'O 4/j.bs TTari)p or 6 irarrjp 6 4/xos. Ot rpe?s dvdpes or ol dvdpes ot rpeis. 'O rS>u 'Afrnvaiw 5rjjj.os or 6 8rifj.os 6 ruv ''A^vaiav (the Athenians in contrast with another people). Ot vvv 'dv&pwiroi or ol &v&pu>ivoi ol vvv. 'O irpbs robs Uepcras TtSXejxos or 6 ivoXejxos 6 irpbs robs Uepcras (literally the against the Persians tear, i. e. the war against the Persians, in contrast with other wars). 'Airb &aXdo~crns rr)s 'Idbvoov. Tvpavvis i) 4v Xeppovrjcrcp. 'H eV 'SaXapuvi irpbs rbv UepcrrjU vav^a%la, the in 1 Where the attributive expletive consists of several words, or where the expletive is itself qualified by another expletive, it is usually placed after its substantive, otherwise too long a phrase would intervene between the article and its substantive ; such expletives involved the idea of some such phrase as, I mean, etc., e. g. rjvXia&ricrav ev ra?s Kcbpiais ra7s vnep rod Tredlov rov irapa rbv Kevrpirrjv irora/xov (they encamped in the villages [I mean] those above, etc.). Here Kcifj-ais is qualified by virep irediov, and this by ivapa Kevrpirrjv, etc., X. An. 4. 3, 1 Tpiros /nacrrbs Xoiirbs r)v, . . . 6 virep rr)s eirl rep ivvpi KaraXr} tcop appepcop (yeuei), PI. L. 805, d. But in the second position (6 aprjp 6 ayabos), the idea expressed by the substantive is represented as a definite one or one already mentioned, or is contrasted with that of another substantive ; in the third posi- tion [avr,p 6 ayastos), the idea expressed by the substantive is represented as in- definite, but in contrast with another. Ti Siacpepei ap&pcoiro s aKpaTTjS Srrjpiov rod ajeparecTaTou, X. C.4. 5, 11. 'H aperi] avpeaTi p.ep 3-e o?s, cvpeaTi 5e avdpcbiroLS to7s ay a&o?s, 2.1,32. Tb apiarov ov tovs p6p.ovs 4o~tip lax 1 '' eip, ctA\' apSpa rbv peTa xV Kpar lorrrjv rw av&panrq) eve(pvcrev (a soul, as it is the most excellent), X. C. 1. 4, 13. Ot virb tov r\\iov KaraKafxiroixevoi ra xp&F- aTa /xeXavrepa exovv ev rrj 'Xirdprr) reXwv, X. An. 2. 6, 4. On the contrary, the Gen. without the article, is placed either before or after the other substantive, when that substantive denotes only a part of that expressed in the genitive ; the emphasis is then on the governing substantive, e. g. 6 Stj/jlos , h.^r\vaiwv, or ' ASrrjvaiav 6 Srjjxos, the people and not the nobles. Hence, with this position, a partitive and not an attributive genitive is used ; the Athenian people is not here considered in contrast with another people, but a part of the Athenian people is contrasted with another part of the same, viz., the nobles. Compare further, y\ HwKpdrovs (piXo&ocpia or 77 (piXocrocpia rj ~2,wKpdrovs, i. e. the philosophy of Socrates, the Socratic philosophy, in contrast with the philosophy of another, e. g. Plato's, the Platonic, with 77 (piXoaov, v/xuv, v<$v, avTwv, or t)/awv, vfxav, vtipv, avT&v o irarTip, our, your, their (eorum) father. But when the substantive has another attributive joined with it, these pronouns can stand between the substantive and that attributive, e. g. 'H 7ra\ot 71/j.wv (pvais. In the Sing, and Dual, the enclitic forms are always used ; these never stand at the beginning of a sentence ; but in connected dis- course they can stand before the substantive which has the article. The Gen. of demonstrative and also of reciprocal pronouns, have the position of (a), e.g. 6 rovrov (eKeivov) -irari'ip or 6 irar^p 6 rovrov (eKeivov). T77 aKk-nXiav evvoia. The demonstratives ai-e sometimes also found without the article after the substan- tive with the article, e. g. Ot avayKaioi eKeivov, Isae. 9, 10. Ta iepa eKeivov, ib. 36. Tov irarpbs rovrwv, 1C 3. Tp vvv vfipei rovrov, Dem. 4, 3. Rem. 5. The difference between the two cases mentioned is very manifest with the adjectives et«pos, (xea-os, iaxo-Tos. When the position mentioned 322 SYNTAX. [$ 245. under (a) occurs, the substantive with its attributive forms a contrast with other objects of the same kind, e. g. t) /j.4 opei, on the top of the mountain (properly on the mountain where it is the highest) ; eV /near) rfj ir6\ei (seldom iv Tp TroXei /x4o-n), in the middle of the city; iv iaxarr] rfj vr)acp T iv vfjffea rfj eVxaTr?, on the border of the island. 'Ef fxiaois rols iroXeixiois aire&ave, X. H. 5. 4, 33. Kara fxeaov rbv kvkXov, Cy. 2. 2, 3. Oi Uepaai irepl &Kpais rats X e P^ X el P'^ as Sao-etas exovariv, &• 8, 17. Rem. 6. In like manner, the word fi6vos has the position mentioned under (a), when it expresses an actual attributive explanation of its substantive, e. g. 6 fx6vos irals, the only son; on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b), when it is a more definite explanation of the predicate, e. g. 'O irals fx6vos or /x6vos 5 irais Trai(ei, the boy plays alone (without company). Movqv rwv av&pcoTrav (y\S>rrav) iiroir)rra fi6vr] iff rip, %v iiroiycrav o'iav k. t. A., they made the human tongue only, capable of articulating sounds, X. C. 1. 4, 12. Rem. 7. When a substantive has two or more attributives, one of which limits the other (§ 264, 2), one position maybe as an English, e.g. Oi aAAot dya- &ol dv&pwrroi, the other good men ; or the limiting attributive with the article either stands first, and the second follows with the article and substantive, or the limited attributive with the article stands first, and the limiting attributive fol- lows with the article and substantive. 'O vaxnuths 6 rwv fiap fidpwv arpa r6s. At ciAAai at Kara rb ffw/xa rj 8 oval, the other bodily pleasures, PI. Rp. 565, d. 'Et> ro7s &\\ois ro7s ifiois x a p' l0l5 i ^J^- 281. (When 6 aKXos is joined with an adjective used substantively, the article is commonly repeated, e. g. -raAAa ra iroXiriKd, X. Hicr. 9, 5. Oi aAAot 01 Traparvyx&vovres, X. Apol. 11.) 'H ovx r)Kiv rfj 7rTi)v t\\v airb tov t6itov ao~(pa\siav virdpxovo'av tt} ir6\ei, 19, 84. Rjim. 9. When a participle used substantively has predicative expletives joined with it, these are placed between the article and the participle. Thus, for example, irpoTepos, irpuTos, vcrTepos, vo-TaTos (he came first, etc.), becomes : 6 irp6Tepos (irpG>T os, vo~Tepos, vo~TaTOs) av afiapTdvcav; dvdpeTos vo/xi^eTaf. & avSpetos vo/j.i£6fxevos; avTbs aSt/cet: 6 avTbs clSikuv (one doing wrong of his own accord); toiovtSs £o~tiv: 6 r oiovros &v; fi6vos £o~t'iv : 6 fj.6vos &v. When the predicative expletive consists of an adjective and substantive, the substantive is usually placed directly after the participle, e.g. irp&Tos TtTay- (4.4 vos Ta^iapxos (he who had been placed as the first centurion). $246. Use of the Article with Pronouns and Numer- als, with and without a Substantive. 1. The article is sometimes used with personal substantive pronouns in the Ace, either when the personality is to be made prominent instead of the person merely, or, what is more fre- quent, when a person previously mentioned is referred to. On 6 nolos, see § 344, Rem. 3. Tbv kavTbv 877 \4yav fid\a ffsfivG>s Kal iyKwfMidCw (his important person), PL Phaedr. 258, a. Aevpo 5tj, if S 5 '6s, evfrb ijfxuv. Ho?, %, \4yeis, Kal irapa Tivas tovs vfj.as(i.e. Kal tIvcs elalv ovtoi, ovs \4yeis ^uSs), PL Lys. 203, b. 2. The article is used with a substantive which has a pos- sessive pronoun belonging to it, 01 the Gen. of a personal or reflexive pronoun ($ 245, Rem. 4), when the object is considered as a definite one or as relating exclusively to possession ; the possessive is placed between the article and the substantive [I 245, 3 (a)]. 'O e/xc»? iraT-fjp, 6 o~bs \6yos, thy word (a definite or particular one), o ifibs ira?s, my son (a definite one of several, or even the only one) ; also 6 \6yos crov; Tbv creavTov iraTepa or rbv iraT4pa Tbv aeavTov ; on the contrary, the article is omitted when it is to be denoted, that the object named belongs to the possessor in common with others of the same kind, or when the substantive with the posses* 324 syntax. [$ 246 sive is a predicate or in apposition : 4/jhs aSeXcpos or aSeXcp6s fxov, a brother of mine fit not being- determined which); i/xbs irais or ircus fiov: outos io-Ti(v) aZeXcpbs cros or d5eX ixprJTo), X. C. 1. 2, 49. TavT-qv yvwjx-nv exKpd- T7]s. EvSvdruLios ovroa'i, X. C. 4. 2, 3. ~Nucr)pa.Tov tovtov, Symp. 2, 3. Xapfiidrfs ovroai, 2, 19. Avrbv Mevava, An. 1. 5, 13 ; or when a common name is used instead of a proper name, e. g. Avtov fiaaiXews, An. 1. 7, 11. *EttI yr}v T-i]voe rjX&oixev (with the variation iirl rrju yr)v r.), Th. 2, 74. The article occurs but seldom, and then with a demonstrative force. Ti o7]r inelpov rbv QaXr)> &avfj.d£o/j.ev. Ar. Nub. 181. ToVSe rbv 'linrirju p.eTeire/j.\l/d/xe^a, Her. 5. 91. Comp. 8, 27. (c) When the idea of an object is to be expressed absolutely, the substantive without the article is joined with the pronoun avrSs. Comp. § 244, 1. Ai'tt? deairoTeia avrris SovXelas, PL Parmen. 133, d. Avrrjs iirio-Tr)' fjLrjs ov uerexofJ-eu, 134, b. Ovk avrov Seair6rov Stittov, o eari Seo"rr6Trjs, eKeivov oovXos iariv, 133, d. (d) When outoj a vr)p is used to denote emotion, especially scorn or con- tempt, instead of the pronoun av. Ovroal avrip ov iravaerai v, Elire fioi, S> ScoKpares, ovk aiax vi/ V bvoiiara ^rjpevwu: ( = blockhead, why dont yon cease ?) PL Gorg. 489, b. Ok ol5' drra Xeyeis, & S^/cpares, aAA' dXXop rivh. ipura. 2. Outos aj/^p o»x vTro/xeyei wcpeXov^uos (= ypu, oh man can you not l>ear to be benefited ? lb. 505. c. ♦ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 325 (e) In passages like Outoi, ovs Spare, fSdpfiapoi iroXe/Luwrepoi rifuv effovTat, X, An. 1. 6, 16, the relative clause supplies the place of the article. But there are few passages like : 4>epe Xafikv x iT & vas y-ev tovtovoi and the following rovsSe x 4 ™""^ X. Cy. 8 - 3 > 6, where the demonstrative is used like a deictic (that ichich points out) adverb (here, there). The poets very often omit the article where the prose-writers must use it. Rem. 2. When the pronoun ovtos or iKe?vos belongs to a substantive having the article and an attributive, then these pronouns are often placed between the attributive and the substantive, e. g. At tuv UeXoTrovvrjoiuv avrai vriss, Th. 8. 80. 'H (TT6f7? aur t] 686s, X. An. 4. 2, 6. 'O Aifibs e/ceicoj AeW, Ad. H. A. 7, 48. So 6 avrhs ovtos irSXe/xos, Luc. de hist, conscr. c. 14. So also Avith the genitives pod, oov, avrov, etc. (§ 245, Rem. 4) ; likewise with 7r£s, oAos, e. g. 6 aya&os /xov irarrip ; r\ tS>v 'A&rjvalwv iraoa (o\r)) irSXis. 4. A substantive with which toiovtos, tolosSz, roo-ovt os, ttjXlkovtos, are joined, takes the article placed according to $ 245, 3 (a), when the quality or quantity designated by these, is to be considered as belonging to a definite object, one before mentioned or known, or as belonging to a whole class of objects previously named. TAp' ovv dvvaio tov toiovt ov d/j.e[xirTov ov. Ol r at, X. An. 7. 1, 7. El inrb rr)s 'EXXados 7r do"t\s a\iots irr' aperfj &avp.d£ec&ai, rr]v 'EXXada iretpareou eu iroieiv, X. C. 2. 1,28. 6. When eWo-To?, each, every, belongs to a substantive, the article is omitted, as with 7ms in the sense of each, every, when the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as a general one ; but when the idea contained in the substantive is to be made prominent, it takes the article which is always placed according to § 245, 3 (b). Karcis rr)v rj/iepav kKaar-nv, Dem. Cor. 310, 249, or Ka& kKaar-nv tt)v 7)ij.4 pay, every single day, but ovk bxiya iarl Ka& kKaar-nv r)/j.4pav (quotidie, each day, every day, general) roiavra bpav re Kal aKoveiv, X. C. 4. 2, 12. A A eKaarn rjXiKia irposreraKrai iroiziv, SivyriaS/xe^a, X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Ivpavvovv- rai irwb Seita avSpwv, o'i/s Avaavdpos Kar4or-nazv iv eKaarn it 6 A e 1, H. 3. 5, 13 ; but "O ri au iv r rj yfj e Kaarn KaXbv 7) aya&bv y, p.ejxvi)aovrai, in every single land, Cy. 8. 6, 6. Kal r)yep.cov pev r)v 6 Seairbrrjs 4 Kaar-ns rrjs ot/c/as, An. 7. 4, 14. 7. When e/carepos, each of two, a/xc£a> and apLcporepos, both, belong to a substantive, the article is always used, since here $ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 327 only two known, therefore definite objects can be spoken o?. The article is here placed according to § 245, 3 (b). 'EttI tui/ irXevpurv e k arepav, X. An. 3.2, 36, or iirl etcar epav twv vXevpav. To S>ra ap.

v, Glus appeared with others, in contrast with himself; — erepos = one of two (it not being determined which), or it forms a contrast with 6 avr6s and denotes difference or contrast; — 6 erepos = the other, i. e. the definite one of two, e. g. 7] krepa x^P T V * T *P a XPV ral 'i °i erepoi in reference to two parties. (c) The following cases of iro\vs, iroAAot are to be distinguished: (o) When ttoXvs, iroWoi belong to a substantive without the article, as tto\vs ttSvos, itoAAtj o-irovSr), tto\vs \6yos, 7roAAol &v&p r) irXeioiV o'XoXt] tovtwv (Tri/xeXeTa^at, t$ ws iyib vvv, % r$ ws av fiaKapifas diairufxev^ (the greater leisure, considered as a definite thing, or as a definite whole), X. C. 1. 6, 9. El 48l8ov, iirl tovtq 228 syntax. \J 246 hv edidov, faces ifiol dobs jxetov [ify airodoir) vjxiv rb irXe?ov, An. 7. 6, 16. "Ettctcu rfj apery o~Jj£ei } Trept, cis, vrrip ; but the article is here used most frequently, when a preceding substantive with a cardinal number agreeing with it, and without the arti He, is referred to. Oi Twv /3c«nAeW olvoxdoi Sid6ao~i ro?s rpio~\ 5 aKrvXois bxovvres r^v (pidx-nv (with the three fingers, i. e. the three generally used), X. Cy. 1. 3, 8. ^Rv, 8re ereXevra, afxtpl ra irevr^Kovra err) (he had reached about the sum of fifty years), X. An. 2. 6, 15. 'I7r7re?s ej's robs r er paKtsx^'^ov s avveXe- yovro avrcf, Kai ro£6rai els robs fivpiov s, Cy. 3. 2, 3. To7s Kepttvpaiois rebv eXKoai veS>v ob Tvapovcxwv (referring to the preceding words ol KepKvpaToi e'iKOO'i vavo~\v o.vrobs Tpetya.fx.evoi, Th. 1, 49). (/?) But the article is placed according to § 245, 3 (b), when the numeral without any emphasis, is joined with the definite object, merely to define it more definitely, and when the nu- meral had not been previously mentioned, e. g. 'Efxax^a-avra ot fxera JlepiKXiovs orrXXraL ^fXtot or ^lXlol ol fxera II. OTrAirai, the hoplites with Pericles, a thousand in number, fought. $ 247. J ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. 329 Rem. 3. The article is frequently omitted "with substantives which have an ordinal number joined with them, as the ordinal in a measure supplies the place of the article. Tpirov eros rep iro\t/j.a) ireXevra (he died the third year), Th. 2, 103. Comp. 3. 25, 88. $ 247. The Article as a Demonstrative and Relative Pr ono'un. 1. The article 6 77 r6 had originally the sense both of a demonstrative and relative pronoun. 2. In the Homeric poems, the pronoun 6 rj r6 has almost wholly the sense both of a substantive and adjective demonstrative pronoun, which refers to an object, and represents it as known or already spoken of, or brings it before the mind of the hearer, e. g. II. a, 12. 6 (he) yap ^A&e Sroas eVt vrjas 'Axaiwv. 29. r)] v (her) 5' iyw ov Xvaca. Od. k, 74. ov yap p.oi &4/j.ls icrrl K0/u.i{4p.€V ov8' aTrov4fi- ireiv av8pa tov (that man), bs /ce Seoiaiv airex^TTrai jxaKapeaaiv. Hence, in Homer, the substantive is found in very many passages without the article, where later writers, particularly the Attic, would use it. Comp. II. a, 12 seq. with PI. Rp. 393, e. Yet there are, in Homer, evident traces of an approxima- tion or agreement of this apparent article with the real article, which was not fully developed before the time of the Attic writers. Thus in Homer, as in the Attic writers, it gives the force of substantives to adjectives and participles, e. g. 6 apicrros, 6 viK-ftcras, 6 yepaiSs] so also, rb irpiv, rb irpSa&ev (prius) ; it is found in connection with a substantive and an attributive adjective or adverb, the attributive being placed between the article and substantive, e. g. Twv irpo- Tipav eVeW, II. A, 691. Tbv 8e£ibv 'Ittttov i//, 336. Oi evepSe 3-eot £, 274. Tb abv yepas a, 185. Tb abv /x4vos a, 207 ; so it is used in case of apposition, e. g. Od. A, 298. Kal AtjStjv sioov rrjV Tuv8ap4ov irapaKoniv. Od. £, 61. 'avanres ol v4oi; further, "AvTvyes at irepl 8ifii}u (of your father), and denotes what belongs to an object, e. g. Od. o, 218. iyKoa/AsiTe to. T6u%6', IraTpoi, vrft jxeAalvn (the Tevxea belonging to the ship). 3. The use of the article as a demonstrative adjective, is not unfrequent in all the post-Homeric writers (§ 244, 6) ; but as a demonstrative substantive pronoun, it was retained, in certain cases, through every period of the language ; thus : — (a) Tb 8 4 (id autem, or on the contrary), very frequently at the beginning of a sentence; 6 \i.4v (is quidem), 6 34 (is autem), ol 8 4 (li autem) very fre- quently at the beginning of a sentence; irpb tov (it p or ov), formerly ; often Kal t6v, ttjv, et eum, et earn, at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. Kal tov KsXevo-at Sovvai. In connection with Kal, the Greek says in the Nom. : Kal os, Kal % Kal o'l (§ 334), but in the Ace. ko\ rbu, Kal T-nv ; seldom t 6 ye, id quidem, r £, ideo, and the like. (b) In such phrases as, rbv Kal tov, rb Kal t 6, this man and that man, this thing and that thing ; to. Kal to., varia, bona et mala. (c) It is used immediately before a sentence introduced by '6 s, ocros or oTos, which sentence expresses periphrastically the force of an adjecthe, oi 28* 330 syntax. [$24b especially, an abstract idea. This usage is confined mostly to Plato. PI. Phaedon. 75, b. opeyerai rod '6 iffriv tffov (= tov iffov ovtos), he reaches after thai which is equal. Prot. 320, d. e« yys Kal irvpbs fii^ai/Tes Kal tup off a irvpl Kal yfj Kepduvvrai. Soph. 241, e. etTe fj-i/j.-n/xaTav, efre (pavrafffid- tosv avTuv $j Kal irepl t^xvuiv r <£ v, off at irepl ravrd elffi. (d) In such phrases as, 6 jxiv — 6 Se', oi pey — ol Se', the one — the other, some, the others. Isocr. Paneg. 41. els fxkv tovs vfipifrvres, to?s Se SouAerW- res, treating some imth contempt, and being slaves to others. Very frequently rb fiev — rb Se, tcii fxev — ra S e, partly — partly, rfj fiev — rfj Se', on one side — on the other side. 4. In the Homeric language, the demonstrative 6 t\ to, is frequently used in place of the relative. II. a, 125. aKha Ta jxev iroKicav el-en pd&ofxev, ra SeSacrrcu (quae ex urbibus praedati sumus, ea sunt distributa). The relative use was transferred from Homer to the Ionic and Doric writers also ; so the Tragedians take this liberty, though very rarely. Her. 3, 81. t a fieu ""Orav-qs eljre, AeAe'x&w ko.jj.qI ravra' ra S' is to ttXtj^os avcoye (pepeiv to Kpdros, yv(j}\ii\s T7js apiffTrfS yju.dprr)Ke. Comp. Larger Grammar, Part II. § 482. §248. Classes of Verbs. In relation to the subject, the predicate can be expressed in different ways. Hence arise different classes of verbs, which are indicated by different forms : — (1) The subject appears as active, e. g.'O irals y packet, to az^o? ^dWei. — But the active form has a two-fold signification : — (a) Transitive, when the object to which the action is directed, is in the Ace, and therefore appears as pas- sive or as receiving- the action, e. g. Tvirrcd tov iralha, >v iroTa.fj.os i s fidk\ei is t)]v Kifiunv, Th. 1, 46. 'H B6\^t] \t/j,vri ii-lr)- aiv is &d\ao~o~av, 4, 103. 'Eyyvs ^yov ol a E\\i}ues (comp. to draw near), X. An. 4. 2, 15. So also avdyeiv, to go back, to withdraw; 5 i ay e iv, perstare, to continue, are found in prose. — 'EA.aui'eii' or iXavveiu i7r7rw (X. An. 1. 8, 1), to ride; irposeXavveiv, adequitare, to ride up to. — Many compounds of f3d\\<-ii>, e. g. i/xfidWeiv and elsfidWeiv, to fall into, to empty (of a river); iicfid\- Keiu, to spring forth, to put forth (of plants, etc.) ; /xer afidWeiv (like mutare), SiafSdWeiv, to cross over ; it po s /3c$AAe iv rivi, tc make an attack upon ; o~v/i- iSoAAeic rivi, manus conserere, to engage in combat with ; iir i^aXXeiv, to fall upon ; virepfidWeiv, to exceed, to be prominent. — K A t v e i v and its com- pounds, e. g. iirtK\(veiu, to incline to something ; airoicXiveu/, declinare. — T peireiv, like vert ere; iTrirpiireiv, se permittere, to entrust one's self to. — ^rpecpeiv (like mutare) and its compounds. — Tlraleiv, to strike against, to stumble; vposTrraieiu, as /xeyaAws it poster aiaav, they suffered a total shipwreck (Her. 6, 95). \A.7raA- A d t t e t v, to get off, escape. — Compounds of 8 i 8 6 v a i, as it/SidSvat, to discharge itself (of a stream); iiri8i86vai, proficere,to increase, advance. — Compounds of livai, e. g. aviivai, to relax, be remiss; icpievai (sc. kavrhv) lcrx v P c P 7eA»Tt (indul gere), PL Rp. 388, e. Compounds of /xio-yeiv, fxtyvvvai, as , to wrap up, first Aor. edvaa, I wrapped up, second Aor. edvu, I ^.nt in, 1o~Tn\j.i, to place, " earrio-a, I placed, " eo-T7)v, I stood, Xa, I have opened, " avewya, I stand open (§ 187, 6), irpdrra, to do, " 7re7rpa%a, 7 ftaye cfone, " ireirpaya (sc. eu), / Moreover some second Perfects of transitive verbs, which do not form a first Perf, have an intransitive sense : — o.yvvfj.1, to break, second Pf. eaya, lam broken, fi-fiyvvpi, to tear, " eppwya, lam torn, T'fjKOt}, to smelt (iron), " TeTTj/ca, I am smelted, Tr-fjyuv/xL, to fasten, " Treir-nya, I am fastened, a-h-trw, to make rotten, " aeffrjira, I am rotten, tyaivw, to show, " ir£Keiv, ktsIvziv ; &vr) to 9 lve something from one's own means, to furnish of one's self as vavs, hence also to shoiv, e. g. ztivoiav irapex^G^ai ( on tne contrary irap^iv rivl irpdy^aTa, (p6fioi>, etc., to cause trouble, fear, etc., to some- one) ; — airodci^aG&ai ti, e. g. epyou, yvw/.ir)v, Svvafiiv, to show one's own work, etc. ; iirayyeiXa&?i- vai, to form a circle or place one's self in a circle; Tpairea&ai [not Tpfyaa&ai, leeNo. (a)], toturn one's se//*(Th.5. 29, 73) ; iyyvf} {Jxracr&ai, yv [xvaa ar 336 SYNTAX. [$ 251. fiovXeverai kavrw ovofxa koX Svva.fj.iv ire p nro lti a acr&ai (to gain a name and power for himself ) X. An. 5. 6, 17. 'ETreSei|a vro rds avrwv dperds, Isocr. Paneg. 58, 85. 'Pd&vfj.oi' avro7s Kar eo-T-fjcravT o rbv fiioi; 63, 108. TV 4/j.avTov yvu>fj.r]y air ocpaiv 6 fie v os, Id. Permut. 309, 22. Rem. 4. In many verbs, the active and Mid. appear to have a similar sig- nification ; but on a closer investigation, the difference in the meaning is obvious ; the active expresses the action absolutely, or objectively, without any accessary idea; the middle, on the other hand, expresses the same action in relation to the subject, or subjectively. Hence, the middle is employed when the literal meaning is changed into the figurative, e. g. hioineiv of an outward arrangement, dioine?(r&cu of mental ; 6pi£eiv literally, 6pi(ea&ai figuratively ; and -evo/xai, the active form is used absolutely, to be in a certain state ; the middle, on the other hand, signifies, to act the part of that which is indicated by the root, to show one's self as such, to have the tendency or habit, to act as such, e. g. irovnpevw, to be bad, irovnpevojAai, to demean one's self badly : iroXi- reva, to be a citizen, iroXirevofxai, to live and act as a citizen ; Tafxievco, to be a manager, rafj.ievofj.ai, to conduct business, to arrange, especially in a metaphorical sense, e. g. robs vofiovs ; crrpaTevca, to undertake an expedition, used of a general or a state, (TTpaTtvofxai, to engage in an expedition, used of the soldiers. Derivatives in -i^ofiai correspond in sense to those in -evo/xai, e. g. dard'Cofiai, to demean my- self as a citizen ; x a P levT ' l C°/ xa h to act in an agreeable maimer. Still, derivatives in -Ifa, from names of nations, reject the middle, e. g. dopifa, to demean myself or to speak like a Dorian. Rem. 5. Several verbs which in the active have a causative sense, in the middle have a simple intransitive sense, though some of them are constructed with an Ace, e. g. (pofirjcrai, to cause to fear, X. C. 6, 1. 10. Elp£6fie&a (includemur) , X. An. 6. 6, 16. 'H yrj ev v (ppovpovuTcov. Ovk ayvoovvTes, oti iveSpevcroiVTO virb t&v TroXzfAwv, H. 7. 2, 18. Very commonly a S lk r\ cr o fx ai, &p£ofiai (from 'dpx°>i impero), /3Aa^o- fiai, & peij/ofiai. So always aAdoaoixai. Some verbs have both forms of the future, as, e. g. u] " in fine frenzy " and in ecstasy. Rem. 3. It has been shown, § 197, and Rem. 3 (comp. § 250, Rem. 1), that the Aor. Pass, of very many verbs is employed by the Greeks to denote a reflexive and intransitive action, e. g. fiovAo/xai, I ivill, i/3ovAr)^r]v, I willed; tvtppaivui, T. gladden, cheer, ev(ppawojj.ai, I am glad, eu

x^vo-au. Instead of vivo, irp6s with the Gen. is used, when at the same time a strong and direct influence of a person, or of a thing viewed as a person, is to be expressed, e. g. 'ATi/.idCeoSai, adiKs7o-&ai irp6s tivos. Bavav 29 338 SYNTAX. [f 251. 07/cal T6%j/ai €Ik6toi)s ado^ovvTai Trpbs tg>v iroXeccv, X. O. 4, 2; also 7raps eSo&Tj, X. H. 3. 1, 6: in Her., however, 4k is very often used instead of biro simply. The use of ko with the Dat. is almost wholly poetic, e. g. Ba/xrivai vtt6 t i v i ; in Attic prose only in certain connections, e. g. vlbs inrb t $ tx ar p\ Te&paijL/J.4vos, PL Pp. 558, d. Tvyxdvei vtrb Tratd ot pi fir; aya&<£ TreTraidev- p.4vos, Lach. 184, e. When the passive condition is not caused by persons, but by things, the Dat. is commonly used (— Lat. Ablative), e. g. 'H ttSAis iroAAaTs a v ix

, PI. L. 710, d. Mefxiixr]fj.evos (ad imitatio' nem expressus, madelike), Her. 2, 78. Ev ivTefrvfM-nfjLevov (well-considered), PI. Crat. 404, a. N^es ovk ixpy c&'>1 exceptus sum ; ifiiacrdfji'nv, coe'gi, ifSidvr elsaKoixras TrcuSa, %v eKard)£ei it or e, Eur. EL 419. Remark 1. An action is often viewed by the language as present, which belongs, indeed, to the past, but at the same time extends to the present, or in its results reaches to the present. In this manner, the following verbs particu- larly are used: (a) verbs of perceiving, e. g. & re o v o>, irw&dvo pai, alff&d- vofj.ai, yiyycixTKcc, fj.avSrd.vw (like Lat. audio, video, etc., and Eng. to hear, to see, to perceive, to observe), when the object of these verbs is to be represented as still continuing in the present ; (b)

(I am a murderer, have murdered, e. g. S. Ant. 1174), frvfjcrKw (lam dead, have died, S. El. 113), t'iktw, yevvu (lam a father or mother, Eur. Ion. 356. Her. 209), etc. This usage extends to all the Modes and Participials of the Pres. as well as to the Impf. ®e/j.LcrroK\ea ovk anoveis 'dvdpa aya&bv yeyov6ra; PI. Gorg. 503, c. Udura irvv&avo /xevos 6 KpoTcros eirepne es ^.irdp- rr)i> ayyeXovs, Her. 1, 69. Ti Se; orb ineTvo cucf)Koas, '6ri Mvaol real UicriSai ev rfj fia, I am here (adsum), e. g. Mt) Avttov, on 'Apdcriras o%x* Tal eis T0V ^ iroXe/xiovs, that Araspas is gone, has departed (= transfugit) to the enemy, X. Cy. 6. 1, 45. "Ukw veKpwv Kev&ixwva Kal o-k6tov irvXas Xnrtiov, Eur. Hec. 1 . 'T/ae?s [x6Xis acpiKveicbe, ottoi 7]fj.e?s iraAai %KO(iev, X. Cy. 1.3, 4. Rem. 3. But the language often considers an action as present, which is not yet accomplished, but is either actually begun, or is begun in our mind, or pur- pose ; such an action is virtually future, though considered as present. Com- pare the English : I go to-morrow, i. e. I shall go, I intend to go, and the like. This usage also belongs to all the Modes and Participials of the Pres. and the Impf. It specially holds of the Pres. of e J/x i, which, in the Ind. has regularly the mean- ing of the Eut., / shall go; the Subj. includes a Eut. meaning in itself (§ 257, Rem. 4) ; but the Inf. and Part, have both a Pres. and Eut. meaning. "Eire it a rd re vvv ovra ev rq> Trapadeiorcp &ripla 5i5wjj.i o~oi, Kal &Wa iravrodaira cuA- Ae£a>, X. Cy. 1. 3, 14 (BiSwfii, I offer). "EKacrrSs rts eirei&ev aevocpaivra virocrrrivai r^v apxw (persuadere studebat), X. An. 6. 1, 19. MirvAr]va?oi inl M^v/xvav as Trpod i Sop evt) v io-rpdrevcrav (putantes parari ibi proditionem), Th. 3, 18. In like manner often the Pres. Part, after verbs of motion, e. g. 'H irdpakos is ras 'ASrhvas eirXevcrej/, air ay y e Wow a ra yeyov6ra (for the purpose of announcing), X. H. 2. 1, 29. Kal rep piyei divw \ A vfxe&a, Kal X l ^ v ■"■Aeurrrj i\v (we expected to perish), An. 5. 8, 2. — Ovk eb&bs acp^o-co abrbv, ouS' dnsi/xt, oaA' ip-fio- o jnai abrbv Kal i £ e r d ff w, PI. Apol. 29, e. y Eirel 7] MavSdur} trapea- KevdCero ws amovcra iraKiv irpbs rbv dvSpa, iSe7ro abrrjs 6 'Affrvdyrjs KaraKvirei* rbv Kdpov, X. Cy. 1. 3, 13. 29* 342 syntax. [$ 255. Rem. 4. But also actions or events wholly future are sometimes indicated as present, by the use of the Pres. tense, when in the view of the speaker the action or event yet future is vividly apprehended, or when he is so firmly convinced of its occurrence, that it appears already present, e. g. 'Ev jxiS. paxv TTji/Se ti-ju x&pav tt p o s KTaa & e Ktxl exelv-nv /xaWov eAev&e povT e (you gain, v: ill gain, and free), Th. 4, 95. *Hi> Sravijs av, ircus oS' e Kcpevye i popov • gov S" ov £)6\ovo->is Ka.TSo.ve7v, roV5e ktspu), Eur. Andr. 381. 2. The Perfect (Indicative) represents a past action in time present to the speaker ; the action appears as already accom- plished at the present time. Hence the Perf. represents not only a past action, but its present effects or results. Teypacpa ttjv eiriGTo\'t]v, I have weitten the letter, the letter is now WRIT? ten, whether written now, or some time ago ; the writing is the past act, the letter is the result still present. 'H ttoAls eKTio-rai, the city vr as built (in past time), is now built, and there it now stands built. 'AGTvdyns rcov ev Mt]5ols irdvTam deGiroTTjv kavTOV ireiroi-nKev, X. Cy. 1 . 3, 18. OvSev iavi nepdaAewrepov roi viKav ' 6 yap KparSiv a/xo iravra Gvvr\ piraK e, /:at robs avdpas, kclI ras yvvcuKas, 4. 2, 26. Rem. 5. Since the Perf. brings past time into close connection with the present, the Greeks in many Perfects contemplated less the peculiar act of completion, than its result as exhibited at the present moment; and hence they used the Perf, in order to indicate a present condition or state that was occa- sioned by the completion of the action. As such a use of the Perfect does not belong to the English, Ave translate many Greek Perfects by our Present, where the present condition is more prominent than the past act ; the Plupf. of such verbs is then translated by our Impf, e. g. T&v-nKa (I have died), I am dead (Eur. Ale. 557. t e&vaG iv oi Sravovres, those ivho died, are dead); Kenr-n/xai (I have acquired), I possess ; Te^avjxaKa (I have been wondering), I am astonished ; &efiov\ev/j.ai (I have taken counsel with myself ), .1 am determined; Trecprjva (I have shown myself), I appear ; oloa, novi (I have seen), I know : TednjXa (I have blossomed), I bloom; ireiroi&a (I have convinced myself), I trust ; [iefi-nKa (I have taken steps), I am going ; /jLe/nvn/xai, memini (I have called to mind), / am mindful, or remember; Kh\r]ixai (I have been named), / am called, etc. The Pres. and Impf. of many verbs, especially such as express the idea of to sound, to call, are not used at all, or but very seldom, so that the Perf. and Plup. seem to take entirely the place of the Pres. and Impf., e. g. KeKpaya, I cry, properly, I am a crier ; /xefxvKa, I roar. Rem. 6. The transition from the completed action to the condition or state produced by it, is more obvious in the Pass, than in the active. Comp. ^ &vpa KeicXeiGTai, the door has been shut, and it is now shut. So particularly the third Pers. Sing. Perf. Imp. Pass, is often used, when one would command with emphasis, that the thing spoken of should remain fixed and permanent in its condition, i. e. not only that the action should be performed, but particularly that the result should continue, e. g. to ayicvpiov avea^daSw, let the anchor be drawn up and remain so ; XeheicpSw, reliquum esto, let it remain permanently ; ireirei- pdo&co, let it be tried ; vvv Se tovto TeroXixr\Gb(a elire?v. So the Inf. in the Oratio obliqua. X. H. 5. 4, 7. e^iovTes be elirov, ti]v Svpav KenXeiGbai, that it he shut, and remain shut. Rem. 7. The Perf. is used with special emphasis, even of future actions, the occurrence of these being affirmed with the same definiteness and confidence, as if they had already taken place. II. o, 128. biecp&opas! you are lost, will be $ 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 343 lost. So okwAa, like perii, interii, actum est de me. it's all over with me, will b§ etc. PI. Phaed. 80, d. rj ^vxh airaWarTOfievri rov o-co/xaros, ev&bs 8 lair ev to?s piev ayaSrdis evrip.os Kal eAev&epos 6 filos Trapa(rKeva](reTai (should be obtained), t oils Se nanols rcnreivSs re Kal aA- yeivbs Kal aPiooros 6 alwv eiravaKeto-erai (should be imposed upon them), X. Cy. 3. 3, 52. Ol els rr\v fiao-iXiKrjV rexvrjv iraiBev6/xevoi ri Siacpepovai tuiv e| avdyKrjs KaKOTra&ovvTow, et ye ir e ivr) ar ov rpiaKovra &vBpas e\ev, PI. Rp. 506, a. As the Greek Perf. frequently denotes the ■present condition or result of a completed action, so the Put. Perf. frequently denotes the future condition or result of a completed action. Hence the Put. Perf. of those verbs whose perfects are translated by the present tense of other verbs (see Rem. 5), must be translated by the simple Put., e. g. ix^jxvt]- crofiai, meminero (I shall have reminded myself), I shall be mindful, shall remember (but i^v7]ao/j.cu, I shall remind myself) ; KCKTrjcro/j.ai (I shall have acquired), I shall possess (but KT-fjaouai, I shall acquire), etc. Rem. 8. Tbe Put. Perf, like the Perf. (Rem. 7), is used instead of the sim- ple Put., to express a thing emphatically. Here as in the Perf. used for the Put., the speaker looks upon the action as already accomplished ; hence the Put. Perf. often denotes the rapidity and certainty of the action, the process or progress being left wholly out of view, e. g. &pdQe, kcl\ it eir pd^er ai [and it shall be [certainly, immediately] done), Ar. Plut. 1127: (pi\os 7]fx7v ovdels \e\ei\p€Tai (no friend will [certainly] be left us), X. An. 2. 4, 5. So also in the Inf. Avo7v -/j rpiwv 7]fj.epS>u ravra ireirpdi-€(r&aij P>em. 1 9, 74. In the Act. the periphrasis fiefiovXevicoos zcroixai is found. Rem. 9. The Fut. Perf. is used in Greek only in principal clauses, and in subordinate clauses introduced by otl and ws (that), by e I used instead, of on, and by &st€ (so that), all with the Ind. In all other subordinate clauses, the Aor. Subj. (more seldom the Perf.) is used instead of it, in connection with a conjunction compounded of dv, as idv, indv, iweiSdv, orav, irp\v dv, esr dv, is dp, etc., e. g. 'Edu rovro Ae£r? s (si hoc dixeris), d/j-apTTjcrrj. $256. (b) Historical Tenses: Aorist, Imperfect, and Plup e rfe c t . 1. The Aorist (Ind.) expresses past time, in a wholly indefi- nite manner, with no other relation, e. g. typo^a, Iicrote, Kvpos ■n-oXXa ZSvr) evUrjaev. It thus stands in contrast with the other tenses which express past time ; still, so far as it indicates past time indefinitely, it may be used instead of either of these tenses. 2. Both the Impf. and Plup. (Ind.) represent an action as past, but always as having relation to another past action. But the Impf. expresses the action as contemporary with this other past action ; the Plup. expresses the action as already past before this other past action. $ 256.] HISTORICAL TENSES. 345 'Ev 3 o~v eirai£es, iycd eypaTa.Ta i fiaxovr o. 'EttciSt; oi "Ehk-nves iTreArjXv^eo'au, ol Tro\4p.ioi aw ex ecpevyeo-av. "Ore ol av/xuaxoi e 7r A. 77 , ol 'A&yvcuoi tovs Tlepffas iveviK-ftKscrav. 'l'.yeypd Kal i£aTrtv7)s a/j.(poT£pu>&ev tovs 'Afrnvalovs &opvfir}- Svjvcu' Kal to jxkv evwvvfiov tcepas avTa>v, oirep $)/ /cat 7rpo/cexwp7j/cet, ev&bs airopoayeu e 8e|ia>, TiTpcoffKerai' Kal 7repai/| koX ttju twv ^.kvSivwv, 4.8,1. 'Arap, ct> troupe, ap" ov t65s ^ v rb Sevdpov, iTov aTpaTiwTas i /3 ia(er leval, Clearchus endeavored to compel his soldiers to advance. (b) The Aor. is often used in general propositions which express a fact bor- rowed from experience, and hence what is customary ; here a single fact which has been observed to be time in many instances, but not established as universal, is stated to be generally true, — the truth frequently observed in regard to a single event, is considered as holding in the case of other similar events. In such cases the Aor. is usually translated into English by the present, or by the verb is wont, is accustomed, with the Inf. II. p, 177. alei re Aibs Kpeiao-cou v6os aly 16x010, 6'sTe Kal IxKkijxov avSpa cpofiz?, Kal a

(were accustomed to impose a penalty upon them). Dem. 01. 1(2). 20, 9. '6tov in w\eove£las Kal irovripias tis, Sosirep ovros ($i\nriros), lo~xvo~ri, y Trpwrr) npdcpaats la\ piKpbv 7TTa?xpds T * l jLlv efAe irapeids ■ &s air is Ka& ftfiiXov eov Tpcdcov dyepcox&v (sc. Ylapis). II. it, 482. tfpiire 8', cos ore ris opvs tfpiirev. (d) The Tragedians often use the Aor. in dialogue as an impassioned or emphatic expression of a decision or determination, which has respect, indeed, to the present time, but which the speaker wishes to represent as having been previously established and settled in his own mind. The English often trans- lates such Aorists, in a very imperfect manner, by the Pres. Here belong especially verbs expressing strong feeling or passion, e. g. direirrvffa (I do abhor), eyeXacra (I cannot help laughing), eir-p veffa, tpfj.co£a, eSrav/jaffa, a ir co ,u o Taodra, oi>xl fa f.Lev reixv (pvXaicfj ix v pd eiroir) cr as (why therefore have you not made the walls strong by a guard ? = at once make them, etc.) ; PL Phaedon. 86, d. e: olv ris vfiav eviropcorepos ifxov, ri ovk direKpivaro,- (is quam celerrime respondeat, let him answer at once) . The Pres. is also so used; yet the expression is then far weaker, e. g. Ti ovv, i\ 8' os, ovk e peer as; (stronger than ipcara, but weaker than Tt ovv ovk ypcor-ntTas or tfpov;) PI. Lysid. 211, d. Ti ovv ov CKOTTOVfXeV, X. C. 3. 1, 10. (f) The Aor., like the Perf. (§ 255, Eem. 7) is used, when the speaker confi- dently considers a future event as already taken place. II. 8, 160 — 162. e'iirep yap re Kal avr'iK ''OXvfj.irios ovk ereXeffffev, eK re Kal tye TeAel, ovv re /aeydXeo hirer iff a v ffbv crcpfjcriv KecpaXrjffi yvvai^i re Kal reKeeffffiv (then have they paid a heavy penalty, then shall they pay). Eur. Med. 78. air to X 6 /a e ff & tip, el KaKov irposoLffOfxev veov iraXaLcp (then ice shall perish, if, etc.). (g) The Aorist is very often used in all its forms to denote the coming into a condition; this the Ind. alwsys represents naturally in the past. BairiXevw, 1 343 syntax. [§ 257. urn a king, i fiaa iAevcra (not I ivas a Icing, but) I came to be a king, ivas made a king, /3 a 257.] SUBORDINATE MODES. 349 Ae| p s , afiapT^arj (si hoc dixeris, if you shall have said). Comp. the exam- ples under §§ 333, 3. 337, 6. 339, 2, II. (b). The Impf. and Aor. Opt. hag the sense of the present or future in clauses which express a supposi- tion, conjecture,*or undetermined possibility, in prose commonly with aV, in hypothetical clauses with el ; the Opt. in this sense is found in clauses denoting a wish, in final clauses, and in direct interrogative clauses, particularly in deliberative questions. Tovto padlas av yiyuoiro or yevoiro, this might easily be done. See §§ 259, 3 and 6, and 260, 4. Ei tovto \4yots or A e £ e t a s , a/xaprdvo is or a /xdpT ois &v, if you should say this, you would err. See § 339, II, (a). Ex&e tovto yiyvoiro or yzvoLTo, that this might be! See § 259, 3. (b). "EXeyov, 'Iva fiav&dvois or /xd&ois , ut disceres. See § 330, 2. Tis ToiavTa viroXap.- fidvoi or vir o\d$oi; who would suppose such things ? See § 259, 3, (e). Ovk elxov, oivoi rpeir oi/j-n v or t pa.Troi/j.Tii' , I knew not what I should do. See § 259, 2. The following case also belongs here : When the subordinate clauses in §§ 333, 3. 337, 6. and 339, II, (b), arc made to depend on an historical tense, and the Opt. without av takes the place of the Subj. with bs av, oTav, eVeiSaV, eav, etc., the Opt. has a future sense. Ovs av tdoi! to. Ka\a 4TriT7]devovTas, tl/xtjctoj (quos videro). *E € v •) e flee. Aos and SiSov p.oi to fiiP\iov, give. Mr) &opv /3 e It e , S> dvSpes 'A&7]va7oi, &AA' 4 fifie ivaT 4 fioi, oTs 45er)^7]v v/xobv, fii) Sopv&e?v 4(p > oTs h.v \4ya (the principal fact is here 4/jL/xelvaTe, the more definite explanation &opv{SuTe) PL Apol. 30, c. ^Eireiddv diravra aKOvarjTe, npivaT e , p.r) ivp6- Teoov TrpoXafxfidveT e. Dem. Ph. 1. 44, 14. 'AAA 1 , d> ^.wKpaTes, eri tea) vvv ifj.01 Trei&ov Ka\ a do St 7] t i PL Crito 44, b (= 4p.ol TreL&6p:evos aw&7]Ti t i. e. by a process of persuasion, save yourself). In precepts respecting the rules of life. etc. the Pres. is the natural and usual tense. Tovs fxev &eobs oltc4ras ' okcos Se eX&oiev aurai, robs TleXacryobs vnb vfipios fiiaaSrai crcpeas k. r. A. (Oratio recta: i^xdcrafiev ol yap UeXaayol r\D'iKovv rdde ' icpoiruv, etc.) Her. 6, 137. The Inf. Aor. has a past relation only after verbs of saying or thinking, and in the construction of the Ace. with the Infinitive with the article. "Evrav&a \4yerai 'Air6xXcav i k § e tjo ai Mapavau /cat rb Sep/xa k pe fidffai iv tw dvrpco, X. An. 1. 2, 8 (cutem detraxisse — suspendisse, to have flayed, and hung up). Comp. No. 2, (c). Qavixacrrbv (paiverai /jlol rb 7re icr&rivai rivas, us ~2,wKpdrrjs robs v4ovs 8i4vai TroXiopKia, fi4yio~r6v ecrri cry]\xe1ov rod dia rovrovs it e icr&4 vr as robs vrai, a^ovcriu (iicelas), ev&ev e£ou av yvc&pifxoy (kiW t'S 77), ao"rrd£erai, kclv jiiTjSej/ irdeiroTe vir' avrov aya&bv -KUTrovSri (whomsoever he recognizes, he greets, even if he shall have received no favor from him), PI. Pp. 376, a. 'A7rexeo-(d-e rwv aXKorpiuiv, %v ao*v MtjSqcv e KTreirXrJx&cu iroXvu 877 Tiva xpovov i-irl rw KaWei rod Kvpov (stood or continued amazed), ib. 1. 4, 27. Comp. § 255, Rem. 6. (d) The Aorist Participle with the Perfect Participle ; comp. airo&avdov with re&urjKdos, Plut. Aem. Paul. c. 36. extr. Ilepcreus jxkv e%et teal veviK-n- /xeuos (even though vanquished, in the condition of one vanquished) tovs iraiSas, AlpiiXios Se robs avrov (sc. iraTSas) viking as air4fia\€i/ = vevinfirai fiev — e%et Se — , £vlicriv dirdvTcav eiroirjcras, Lys. Agor. § 32 (credo te negaturum). After verbs of saying, thinking, hoping, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. with dv, is often used in nearly the same sense as the Inf. Put. without dv. See § 260, (5), (a). $258. B. A more particular Vieiv of the Modes. The Indicative, the Subjunctive (Optative) and the Im- perative Modes \h 253, (b)], are distinguished as follows : (a) The Indicative expresses a direct assertion, an actual fact Tb podov IbrdWei. 'O irarrjp yey pa oVoi t pdirw/xai, nescio, quo me vertam. Ovk e?xoy, ottoi r pairoi[X7]v, nescie- bam, quo me verterem. Aeyca, 'iv eldrjs, dico, ut scias, in order that you may know it. "EAe^a, 'Iv eldeins, dixi, ut scires, in order that you might know it. (c) The Imperative denotes the immediate expression of the will, being used in commands, entreaties, etc. $ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 353 Tp&tyov and ypdcpe, twite. BpaSeW jxkv (piXos yiyvov, yej/6/j.evos Se ireipu Sia/xe- i/eiv : Is. Dcm. 7. Tpatydrca and ypafperu, let him write (§ 257, 1. b). The com- mand expressed by the Imp. is not always to be understood as a strong com- mand, entreaties, exhortations, and counsels, being also expressed by the Imp. Eemaek. The Modes exhibit the relation of an expressed thought to the mind of the speaker. Hence they denote nothing objective, i. e. they never show the actual condition of an action ; the Ind., in itself, does not denote something actual ; nor the Subj., in itself, something possible; nor the Imp., something necessary ; the language represents these ideas by special expres- sions, e. g. aA-n&ws, 5wa etc - T ne modes express subjective rela- tions solely, i. e. the relations to the mind of the speaker, showing how he conceives of an action. A mental operation is either an act of perception, an act of supposition or conception, or an act of desire. The Ind. expresses an actual perception ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents as a reality, whether an actual, objective fact, or a conception ; even the future, which, in itself is something merely imagined, can be conceived by the speaker as a reality, and hence is expressed by the Put. Ind. The Subj. expresses a conception ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents as a conception, whether it has an actual objective existence, or is a mere mental conception. The Imp. expresses desire ; it denotes what the speaker conceives and represents as something desired, whether it be an actual objective necessity or not. $259. Use of the Subjunctive, Optative and Im- perative. 1. The Subj. of the Principal tenses, the Pres. and Perf., as well as the Sub. Aor., ahvay relates tofuturetimQ [$ 257, 1, (a)], and is used in Principal clauses : (a) In the first Pers. Sing, and PL in exhortations i and warn- ings, where the Eng. uses let, let us, with the infinitive ; the negative is here /«}. (b) In the first Pers. Sing, and PI. in deliberative 2 questions, when the speaker deliberates with himself what he is to do, what it is best to do ; here also the negative is /my. "Iayier, eamus! let us go, suppose we go ! M-)? tco/xev. "Kye (cpepe, ea) tw/nev. 4?epe /fSw (come noiv, let me see), Her. 7, 103. <£epe 877, -rj §' os, it e 1 pa&£j -rrpbs vfxas a.iro\oyr\ffa(r&ai, PI. Phaedon. 63, b. Such an exhortation is very often ex- pressed in the form of a question preceded by fiovtei; yet in this case, the subjunctive is a subordinate clause dependent on fiovXa, e. g. BovXei ovv, Sm dSr] &w pity irei&ovs ; (do you then loish that we propose two kinds of persuasions == let us propose), PL Gorg. 454, e. Tt iroi^fievj quid faciamus ? what shall we do? Ei-ircofieV) v) (Tiycifiev; Eur. Ion. 771. In no? ris cppouridos eA&y; S- 1 This use of the Subj. is called Conjunctiva adhortativus. 2 Conjunctivus deliberativus. 30* 354 syntax. [$ 259 3. C. 170, tis is used instead of the first Pers., where shall one go? ( — izol eA&c* or eXStojj.ev, like irot typevtov eA&w; 310). M77 epto t uai ; shall 1 not ask? X. C. 1 2, 36. "Oca 0: oXiyoi tovs iroWovs p^] ireio'avTes, aAAci KparovyTes ypdtyovai, 7tot- e/joy )8tW (ptofxeu, 7) ,ur? cpto/xeu elvaij 45. So also in indirect discourse, and in all persons. Oi»;< ex&>, oitol t pdirto/x^v (I know not, whither I shall turn myself, what I shall do). Ovk e^ovariu eiceivoi, oitol (pvywcri, X. An. 2.4, 20. Ovk oT5' el 8 to (to eKTrw/xa), I do not know whether I shall give the cup, Cy. § 8. 4, 16. Remark 1. In the second and third Pers. the exhortation takes the form of a command or wish, and hence is expressed by the Imp. or Opt. Od. %, 77. eA&co^ei/ 8' ava lxcttv, fior] 8' cokhtto, yevoiTo. Yet there are also passages in which the second Pers. Subj. stands in connection with aye and used in principal sen- tences, to denote deliberative questions (i. e. snch as express doubt and propriety), but differs from the Subj. in such ques- tions in referring to past time. Theocr. 27, 24. ttoXXo'l p epvwovTO, voov 5' epbu ovtis ea8e ' — kcsI tl, (piXos, p e^aijJLi; ydfj.01 ir\i]drov(Tiv aulas, i. e. quid pacerem 1 sc. turn, quum multi nup- tias meas ambiebant, sed eorum nuUus mild placebat, what could I then do ? The deliberative Opt. is very frequently used in indirect questions, in relation to an historical tense in the principal clause. 'EirrjpeTo 6 2ewhjs Tbu Trai8a, el iraiaeiev *vt6v, X. An. 7. 4, 10 (whether he should put him to death). Oi 'ETTiSd/xuioi irep- tyai>Tes is AeXcpobs TtV Sebv eirripovTO, el tt apa8 otev Kopu/friois t)]v tt6Xlv, Th< 1, 25 (whether theg should surrender the city). $ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 355 Rem. 5. In the principle given in No. 2, the act of supposition or conception belongs to the past, and this is the common use of the Opt. (the Subj. of the historical tenses), in subordinate clauses. But the Opt. is also used, where the act of supposition or conception is a present one. When a present conception is expressed by the subjunctive, e. g. Icc/xev, eamus, rl eX-Kcofiev ,■ quid dicamus ? then the realization of the conception may be assumed or expected from the present point of time. But when a present conception is expressed by the Opt. (Subj. of the historical tenses), the speaker places himself back, as it were, out of the present and the vivid connection, which exists between the present and the actual accomplishment, and represents the conception as one- separate from his present point of time. Hence a present conception expressed in this way, very naturally suggests the subordinate idea of uncertainty. Thence arises the following use : 3. The Opt. Act. and Impf. (Subj. of the historical tenses), is used, in principal clauses, of present or future time in the following cases : (a) To express, in a general manner, a supposition, a present or future uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, presumption or admission. The prose-writers here commonly use the modal adverb av with the Opt., $ 260, 2, (4), (a), but the poets very frequently use the Opt. without av. A negation is here ex- pressed by ov (ovk). *0 8e avrb ai/Tcp av6/xoiov efy /cat Sidcpopov, o~x°^V ye irov to> aWcp 0/j.oiov $) (plXov yevotro (that would scarcely be like or friendly to another, as one would readily admit), PL Lysid. 214, d. 'Airo\o/j.€V7]s 8e ttjs tyvxrjs tot ijdr) t)]v (pvcrtv ttjs ao-&evetas en iSeiicvvo l Th ffwjxa /cat Tax" oraTrev SioixoiTo (animo exstinctc turn vero corpus imbecillitatem suam ostendat et intercidat, it is natural to suppose or assume, that the body would give signs of iveakness), Phaed. 87, e. (b) To express a wish. A negation is here expressed by fxr> II. %■> 304. fj,T] fxau aairovbi ye /cat a-KXeitos air o\oi /xr] v, may 1 not perish! S. Aj. 550. 3) iral, yevoio irarpbs evTvxecrTepos, to. 8' aAA 5 '6[xolos ! /cat yevoi av ov k Zed /xeyuTTe, Xa&etv fxoi yevono clvt6v, cos eyu> /3ovAo,uat, may I be able to take him. The wish is com- monly introduced by ei'd-e, d ydp (in the poets also by et alone). Od. y, 205. el yap ifxol Tocrcrf)v?>e &eol Svuafj.iv irapa&e7ev! X. Cy. 6. 1,38. et yap yevoiTo! (In poetry ws is used like Lat. utinam. Eur. Hipp. 407. a> s a 7r 6 X o t r o ivayKaKws ! ) B,em. 6. When a wish is expressed, which the speaker knows cannot be realized, the Ind. of the historical tenses is used, e. g. Etd-e tovto eyiyveTo ! eiSe tovto eyeveTo ! utinam hoc factum esset ! O that this were done, or had been done ! So axpeXes ypd^/ai ! O that you had written ! ( but I know tha t you have not). X. An. 2. 1, 4. ctAA' &s dxpe\ov, e s, e(v) with 366 syntax. [$ 259 the Inf.. particularly in poetry. On the wish expressed by ttws dv with the Opt, see § 260. 2. (4), (d). On the infrequent use of the Subj. to denote a wish, sea Rem. 3. (c) A command is also expressed in a milder way, in the form of a wish. Od. £, 408. Tctx'0"T<£ fj-oi eydov eraipoi elev, let my companions come within. II. rf^puf tis ol %ttolto yepaiTepos, let some herald follow. Arist. Vesp. 1431. epdoi tis %v eKaaTos elSeir} Texvnv. X. An. 3. 2, 37. el fiev ovv &\Xos ris (SeXTiov opa, dhXws 4x* Ta ' e * $* hV> Xeipiaocpos fxev 7)yo?ro. (d) The Optative is used to express a desire, wish, and inclination, in a general manner, without expecting the realiza- tion. A negation is here expressed by fir}. Theocr. 8, 20. ravrav (t)]v o-upiyya) k aT be it] v (1 would be willing or desire to place)' to Se too irarpbs ov Karafrnaw. Her. 7, 11. /at) yap eirjv e/c Aapeiov yeyovws, jj.$i Ti/j.(ap-ncrd/j.evos AStjv aiovs, I should not be descended from Darius, unless, etc. (e) In direct questions the Opt. is used, when a mere admis- sion or supposition is expressed. (a) In Homer the interrogative clause then forms, in a measure, the protasis to the conditioned clause, i. e. to the clause depending on the condition ex- pressed by the question. II. 5, 93, seq. ^ pd vv /xoi ri irl&oio, Avudovos vie Sai'cppov ; TActiTjs k ev MeveXaa eiriirpoefxev Taxvv lov, iraffi 8e Ke TpMeacri x° L P LV kcu kvBos apoio, ic ill you now listen to me, i. e. if you will, you would dare, etc. (the same as el ri p.01 iri&oio, rXairjs Kev, etc.). Here iri&oio, etc. is the in- terrogative clause containing the condition, and rXairjs, etc. the conditioned clause depending on the preceding. When the question has two members, the first, expressed by the Opt. without dv, contains the condition, the last, ex- pressed by the Opt. with dv, contains the conditioned clause. II. £, 191. ^ pd vv fxol r fl&oio, i> iroi-naov oooe, e'/TOi ctpeV/ce*, ret iyca Xeyw KOLTiaov twv dopvcpopuv iirl irao-nci rfjcri irv\rj, ws /xoXis avra nal eyco a v avrbs evpiaKoo, I have so many things that I with difficult y find them, indeed if I should seek for them myself I should not find them. Nor is dv used with the Imp. For what the speaker expresses as his immediate will, cannot be considered as dependent on a condition. The few passages referred to in proof of the use of dv with the Imp., are all, criti- cally considered,, questionable and prove nothing. (2) "Av is used with the Ind. of the historical tenses : the Aor., Impf. and Plup. : (a) To denote that something might take place under a cer- tain condition, but did not take place, because the condi- tion was not fulfilled. The condition is then expressed by et with the Ind. of the historical tenses. El tovto eXeyes (eXej-as), fj/xdp raves (% p.apres) dv, i. e. if you said this, you were wrong, or if you had said this, you would have been wrong, but now I know tha*t you did not say it, consequently you are not wrong; Lat. si hoc dixisses, e?rasses (at non dixisti ; ergo non errasti). Ei" ri e\'xo/J.ev, ediSofxev (eSopev) dv, if we had anything, we would give it to you, or if we had had any- thing, we would have given it to you ; si quid habuissemus, dedissemus. Also with- out an antecedent clause, e. g. ixdp-ns dv, laetatus fuisses (scil. si hoc vidisses). Rem. 2. Here belong also the expressions, cp 6 u.t\v dv, eyvca ns &v, ■p cr 3- e t o Tij dv, (per6 tis dv, and the like, as in Latin, putares, crederes, diceres, cerneres, videres, you (one) would think, or you (one) would have thought. Here et irapriv, el eXeyev, el eiSev, el iSvvaro, and the like, as conditioning antecedent clauses, are to be supplied. "Ev&a 877 eyvic 7 is av robs ojxotlixovs TreTraiSev/ue- vovs, ws 8e? (turn ver<$ videres, then one might see, were he present), X. Cy. 3. 3, 70. "Ev&a S77 671/ w ns dv, oaov d£iov e'ir] ?b / uicraj' ras a,uct|as (celerius, quam quis crederet), An. 1. 5, 8. 'Eireppdtxr&r) S 1 d v ns KaKeiva ibwv (one might be encouraged if he saw those things), Ag. 1, 27 Rem. 3. With the Ind. of the historical tenses, dv is often omitted. Then the speaker has no reference, in his representation, to the condition contained in the protasis or antecedent, on account of which the action expressed in the apodosis or conclusion could not be completed, but he emphatically represents the predicate 0s an actual fact. X. An. 7. 6, 21. Efaoi S77 tis dv' Ovkovv alaxvvn ovtco jxcopoos e^aTvardifxevos ; Nal /J.a Ala 77 cr X vv ' & t x ' ( \ v p-evroi, el virb iroXejxiov ye bvros i^r)waT7i^r7]v " (piXcp 8' ovti i^airarav atax^ov jxoi doKe? elvai, 7) e^airaraa^ai. Lycurg. Leocr. p. 154, 23. el fxev ovv £a>v ervyxavev 6 'A/xivras, eKelvov avrbv irape ix<$- fj.7]V vvv 8e vfiiv KaXS> robs crweiSoTas. The ellipsis of dv is most frequent in expressions which denote the idea of necessity, duty, reasonableness, possibili- ty, liberty, and inclination, e'. g. xpv v i edei, &cpeXov; with verbal adjectives va tcos; with irpo 57) k e, icaipbs 7) v, eitebs $ v, KaXbv % v, alffxpbv $ v, 360 SYNTAX. [$ 260. a^iov %v, KaX&s e?x e,_ e| 7} j/, virripx^v, e/j.eXXev, e/3 o vX6/j,t]v. Lys. 123,3. XP^v Se ere, et7rep ^crd-a XPVO'TOS, iroXv (mXXov ixt)vvtt,v yeveoStai' vvv Se 5e?, irposriKei, KaX&s ex<=£, etc., is used of things which can yet take place. Comp. possum commemorare, which implies that I still can do the act, and poteram commemorare, which implies that I cannot do it. Rem. 6. "Av is very naturally omitted, if in the apodosis there is an Ind. of an historical tense of the verb klvSv vve iv, to be in danger, to seem, since the verb by itself implies that the action expressed by the Inf. connected with.it, did not take place ; for what is only in danger of occurring, actually does not occur. Th. 3, 74. 7] ttoXls i Kivdvvevffe iracra Siax olos t' eaotjaL ovS' iyyvs TovTcuv obSev KaXbv elirelv, vit" 1 alffx&viis bxiyov air oS pas o5 x 6 /J. 7} v, et ttk] eJxov, I had almost fed for shame, if. Without a protasis, e. g. X. Cy. 1.4, 8. Ka'i irecs diaTTTjb'oiv avT<5 6 'lttttos Triirrei eis yovara, KaX fiiKpov Ka.Ke7vov e |er paxv A i- c e v. Comp. the Lat. prope (paene) cecidi, I came near falling. (ft) To denote that an action takes place (is repeated), in certain cases, and under certain circumstances. The his- torical tense in the principal clause is then commonly the Impf. The condition under which the action is repeated, is expressed by a subordinate clause with et, ore, etc. and the Opt. ; the condition, however, is often omitted. Elirev av, he was accustomed to say, he would say as often as this or that happened, as often as it was necessary, and the like. X. C. 4. 6, 13. el Se ris airy ivepi tov avT iXeyo i, eirl ttjv vno&eaiv iw avrjyev av irdvT a tov x6yov, as often as one contradicted him, he would (he was accustomed to} carry back the whole argument to the original proposition. 1.3,4. el Se ti S6£eiev avT§ ('SuKpaTei) arifxalveo-' § 260.] MODAL ADVERB dv. 361 &ai irapa twv &eu>v, tjttov av eTrela&r] irapa ra o-ri/j-aivofxeva Troirjaai, T] et ri. avrbv eTre&ev ooov AafieTv rjyefx.6va TvcpXbv — olvt\ fiSXeirovTOs. An. 2. 3, 11. eX ru ai/T$ doKoir) twv trpbs tovto TeTay/nevcov fiXaneveiv, e irate v dv, he would beat him. 1. 5, 2. oi /j.ev ovoi, eVei ris Sicokol, Trpo5pa/x6vTes av ear atfav, as often as any one pursued them, they would stop (the Plup. having the sense of the Impf. $ 255, Rem. 3). 3. 4, 22., 6it6t€ Se dido'xoiev at irXevpal rod -KXaiffiov, tq fieffop tlv e^eirifiiiXao'av. 3. With the Subjunctive, to represent the future conception, which the Greek expresses by the Sub. [$ 257, 1, (a)], as con- ditional, and depending on circumstances. The following cases are to be distinguished : (a) The deliberative Subj. \k 159, 1, (b)], takes dv, though but seldom in direct, more frequently in indirect questions, when a condition is to be referred to. Ti iror av ovv Aeycc/xev; ( what shall we therefore say, if the thing is so 1 ) etc. PI. L. 655, c. ey& yap tovto, 5 HpoTay6pa, ouk ^^.-nv SidaKTbv elvai, o~ol Se KeyovTi ovk ex« forcws av airiffTco (i. e. ei av Aeyeis), I know not howl could disbelieve it, if you say so, Prot. 319, b. *Av 5' av rj/j-eTs viKwfxev, \e\vfxevrjs tt\s yecpvpas oi>x e^ovaiv eicelvoi, ttirov av (pvycoa iv, X. An. 2. 4, 20. Et Se aoi fify So/ce?, aKetyai, eav (i. e. et av) T^Se aoi jjlciKXov ape a Ktj, C. 4. 4, 12. (b) The Subj., which is often used in the Homeric language instead of the Put. Ind. (§ 259, Eem. 4), is frequently found with 'av, which is to be explained in the same manner as with the Put. Ind. [No. 2, (1)]. Et Se' «:e fx^ dwuaiv, e'yw Se Kev ai>TOs e\ca/j.ai II. a, 137, then I myself will [without doubt) take it, less direct than the Put. Ovk dv toi xpaL°~F-V xifrapis, II. y, 54. (c) In subordinate clauses. In this case, dv usually stands with the conjunction of the subordinate clause, or combines with the conjunction and forms one word. In this way originate edv (from el 'av), endv (from eVel dv), orav (from ore dv), dirSrav (from SirSre av), irp\v dv, ev& 'av, o&i dv, ov dv, oirov av, 61 'dv, '6ttol dv, rj &v, oirn dv, o&ev dv, 6ir6^ev as, etc., l bs dv (quicunque or si quis),6tos dv, oirolos 'dv, (Laos dv, oiroaos dv, etc. In all these expressions, a possible assumption is de- noted ; it is assumed that something is possible in the future ; the future occur- rence of it depends upon the assumption of the speaker, i. e. the speaker assumes and expects that it will be, e. g. eav tovto \eyns, if you say, shall say t/iis (viz. according to my assumption, or as I expect you will), a/j-apT-fiav, you will be wrong. (4) With the Opt., but not with the Opt. Fut. (a) The Opt. with dv must always be considered as the principal clause of a conditional sentence, even if the condition is omitted, e. g. ei tl exois, Sot^s &v t 31 362 syntax. [$ 260. if you had anything, you would give it (you may perhaps have something, and then you may give it to me). The Attic "writers in particular, use this mode of expression, to denote firmly established and definite opinions and views of anything, and even to denote actual facts with a degree of reserve, moderation and modesty. A negation is here expressed by ov(k). Her. 3, 82. avSpbs hbs, tov apicrrov (i. c. et dpiffTos elrj) ovDev &/jLeivov av (pave in, nothing would seem better than. 7, 184. &v$pes av elev iv avroTcri recraepes /xvpidBes teal eiKocri, there may have been two hundred and forty thousand men. 5, 9. yevoiro S' av irav iv tw p.fxKpca xpova>, all might happen. X. Cy. 1, 2, 11. frnpuvres ovk av apiar-fi- paiev, while hunting they would not breakfast = they do not breakfast. 13. e7re idav ret, rrevre ical (Hkoctlv %tt) BiareXecroicnv, etnerav fiev av ovtoi irXei6v n yeyovores 7) TrevTrjKOVTa %rr\ arrb yzveas. PL Gorg. 502, d. Arj/j-vyopla apa ris i y ou might go. II. /3, 250. with a degree of irony, Qepcrlr — i'cr^eo — .' ob yap iya> cr4o cpn/j-l x e P ei ^- repov {iporbv uXXov e/JL/JLevai — ' tb ovk av fiaaiXrjas ava cttojx ex w!/ ayopei- 01s, no! crcpiv ovelded re Trpocpepois, v6crrov re cbvXacrcr is! instead of ^77 ay 6peve, etc., you should not harangue, nor be heaping up reproaches, etc. In the form of a question, X. Hier. 1,1. ap av /.loi i&eX-hcrais, 3> 'iepcov, o~L-nyr,cracr&ai, a cIkos eldivai ce £4Xtiov i/xov ; would you be inclined, Y\z.,if I should ask you. With ov in the form of a question, II. e, 456. ov k av 877 rove? dvSpa fiaxv^ ip vera 10 p.eT€XSd>v ; might you not, could you not restrain the man, instead of, restrain him. In a sharper and more urgent tone as an exclamation, II. w, 263. ovk ov Si) p.01 dfxa^av icporrXicrcraiTe rdxt-orra, ravrd Te iravT iiri&elre, "va 7rpji ZeO, — it as av tov aljJLvXdoTaTov . . oXeacas t4Xos &6.voi/Xi kovt6s ; how might, could, would I die ? instead of, that I might die ! Eur. Ale. 867. Trias av oXoifj.nv; PI. Euthyd. 275, c. tt&s av KaXcas coi 5 inyncal- finv ; how can I appropriately describe to you ? that I could! Rem. 9. But the Opt. in itself, as the expression of a wish, does not take the conditioning adverb av [§ 259,3, (b)]. II. £, 281. &s k4 ol av&i ya?a x^" 01 is not properly expressed as a wish, but as a doubtful condition, thus (&s = ovrcas) the earth should then open for him. (5) The Inf. and Part, take av (zee), when the finite verb, which stands instead of the Inf. and Part., would take it : (a) The Inf. with &v after verba sentiendi and declarandi, consequently the Inf. Pres. and Aor. with &v, instead of the Ind. Pres. and Aor. with &v, or instead of the Opt. Impf. and Aor. with &v in direct discourse ; the same principle holds when the Inf. is used as a substantive. The Inf. Perfl with &v instead of the Ind. and Opt. Plup. with 'av, is more seldom. The Inf. Fut. with av is rare in Attic ; instead of it the Inf. Aor. or even the Pres. with &v is commonly used. E? ti elxev, tcpn, Sovvai 'av ( Oratio recta : e'/ ti e?xov, eSco/ca 'av), he said that if he had anything, he would have given it, dixit, se, si quid habuisset, daturum fuisse. Ei ti ex°h £(£77, Sovvai av (Or. recta : e?Ti '4xoip-i, Soiyv &v), dixit, se, si quid haberet, daturum, esse. 5 E7c\> SokSj deicaKis a v Kara, ttjs yr\s KaTaduvat y'lSiov, $) oc/>fr?}- vai ovtw TaireivSs, X. Cy. 5. 5, 9 (Or. recta: Senatcis av airo&dvo i/.u r)8iov, fj 6 yap fielfa Svvafiiv e^ei >? apxhi roaovTca /xaWov av 7]yf)(raT0 avrrjv Kal Kar airX'h |e iv robs iroXiTas, R. L. 8. 3. Uws exets irphs rb e&e\eiv av ievai &k\t)7os eVl helirvov; (the same as ?ra>y ex e ' s Ttpbs tovto Sn i&e\ois av lei/ai v Xeyoifii, ev oils', on drifi'nyope'iv dv fie s ovk av fiel£ovos KaKov r\fv aZtKiav Travaovr e s [existimantes se non gravioris mali metu injuriam COERCITUROS FORE, thinking that they could deter from crime by the fear of no greater evil). Th. 6,38. ovre ovra, ovre av yevSfieva Xoyoiroiovci. i. e. a otfre io*Tiv, ovr av y evo it 0, they fabricate what neither is nor will be). Isocr. Phil. 133. ES I0S1 firjdev dv fie rovrcav eir ix GL P'h ~ avr & cre Trs'&ti-v, el Svvao~- reiav fiovov Kal ttXovtov eccpoov e| avrwv yevnaofievov (= on eir e xeipV °~ a dv). PI. Phil. 52, c. SiaKeKpifie&a X 00 ?^ Tc * s T6 ^a^apas T]5ovas Kal ras crx^bv aKct&a/>- rovs op&cas av Aex^6io-as(= Kal at ffx^bv aKafraproi op&a>s av \ex&e7ev). So, also, with the case absolute : X. An. 5. 2, 8. eo~KOTre7ro, izSrepov e'l-n Kpe7rrop airdyeiv Kal robs Siafiefin^Tas, 7) Kal robs oirXiras o~iaf3if3d£eiv, ws d\6vTOS av rod x Cl >P'- ou ( — vofxifav, on rb x (a P L0V a\olr\ dv). $ 261. Position and Rej^etition of av. "Av luithout a Verb. 1. With the combination mentioned in 260, (3), c, as os dv, irplv dv, small particles like Se, re, fiev, yap, sometimes come between, e. g. hs 8' dv. 2. As dv represents the predicate as conditional, it ought properly to be joined with the predicate, e. g. Xeyoifii dv, eheyov dv ; yet it commonly follows that member of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, e. g. PI. Crito. 53, c. Kal ovk oXei do-xVf^ov av ws yap dv, el Trei&OLfAi v/xas, freobs av StSdcrKoifii fify 7)ye?o~&ai vfxas elvai. Eur. Ti*oad. 1244. a&pwiroi, avf)p, auSpes, ywr), yvvcuK.es, xp^i"oc, XP'hl JLa - Ta > ^pay/Atx, irpdy/JLara, r)/J.epa, yr), %a>pa, fxoipa, o$6s, %ei/>, yvccfx.7], tyrjcpos, rixvn, 7r6\efios, etc. ; those omitted Avith the attributive genitive are : var-ftp, /j.rjT7)p, vlos, ircus, ^rvydTnp, a8e\(p6s, avr)p (husband), ywr) (wife), olicia, 6!kos, x^P a > 7V (land). The substantive is omitted with the following classes of words : a. The attributive adjective, adjective pronoun, and participle. (a) Such as denote persons : ol $7/771-01, mortales; ol o~opa), the enemy' 's country ; 77 (ptXia, a friendly country ; 77 oiKOv/xevn (77?), the inhabited earth; 77 dvvdpos (yr\), a desert; 77 ev&e?a (586s); rrjv raxicrriv, quam celerrime ; ttjv Kar\v (ixotpav) airodidovai ; 77 Treirpa/Aej/ri (/xo?pa) ; 77 8e£id, 77 apio-repd (%eto); r) viK&cra (yva>i/.r)) ; ttjv ivavriav (rpr)(poy) Ti&ea&cu) 77 prjTopiKr) (rexvn). (b) Abstracts: to KaX6v, to ay c&6v, or Taya&Sv, the beautiful, the good; to £vtvx*s, good fortune ; to avaiaSrriTov, want of feeling ; to koiv6v, the common wealth ( e. g. tu>v 'S.ajxiwv) ; to Srapaovv, confidence. (c) Collective nouns denoting persons: to svolvtiov, the enemy ; to viv-nKoou, the subjects. Adjectives in - ik6u especially belong here, e. g. to -koXitlkov, tlu citizens; to ottXitikov, the heavy armed; to oIkctikov, the servants; to 'EXXtjulkop, to PapPapucSv, Tb Ittttik6u, etc. The plural of adjectives of this ending is often used to denote a number, collection, or series of single events, e. g. to Tpcai'icd, the Trojan war ; to 'EXXrjvucd, the Grecian history; to. vavTiicd, naval war. but also naval affairs. $ 264.] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 367 b. The attributive genitive also is used without the governing substantive, e. g. 'AXe&vopos, 6 QiXiirnov (vl6s), Mcua fj ''ArXavros (frvydrrip) ; then with the prepositions iu, els and e/c with the Gen. of a person to denote his abode, e. g. ev adov {o'lko}) elvai; els qdov (oIkov) eAd-elV ; els StSacr/cciAcoz/ (poiruv, to go to the t< etcher's ; els YlXdrcavos (poirau, ireiiireiv, to go or send to Plato's ; eK didao-naXow airaWarreaSrai, PI. Protag. 326. c. to leave school; els rrju Kvpov (yr)v) eA&eiv; to. rr)s tu%tjs, the events of fortune ; ra rrjs ir6\ecos, the affairs of state ; ra rod TroKefiov, the whole extent of the war ; ra 'AS-nvaioov (ppoveiv, ab Atheniensium par- tibus stare; ra rrjs opyrjs, ra rrjs ep.ireipias, to t&v eTri&v/j.ia>i> (that which pertains to anger, the nature or essence of anger, etc.) ; rb rap iraidcop, the custom of boys; rb roop aXiewv. c. The attributive adverb is used without a substantive, e. g. ol vvv, oi rore, ol nd\ai, ot ep&dde ('dpfrpairoi), ra o'ikoi (irpdy/nara), res domesticae, r) e£r)s, (yfiepa), the following dag, etc. d. The attributive substantive or substantive pronoun with the preposition jy which it is governed, e. g. ot /cafr' Tinas, ol i y r)p.5iv, our contemporaries ; — oi afi(pi or irepl riva, e. g. Tixdrwpa, signifies (a) a person with his companions, followers, or scholars ; ot afx(pl Xleio'lo'rpa.rov, Pisistratus and his troops ; ot a/jupl ®aXr)p, Thales and other philosophers of his school ; T Apa Xeyeis rrjv roov &eap KplffLV, 7]v ol irepl Kenpoira 5t' aperrjp inplvav, which Cecrops and his tribunal on account of their excellence, decided, X. C. 3. 5, 10. — (b) more seldom the com- panions, followers, or scholars alone, without the person named. — Further, ol must in certain cases be translated into English by substantives. Rem. 3. Many personal nouns which denote an employment, station or age, are treated as adjectives, and the word avi)p is joined with them, if the man is to be considered in relation to his employment, station or age ; but 368 syntax. r$ 264, the word avrjp is omitted, if the man is considered as merely performing the duties of a particular office or employment. Thus avrjp jxavris signifies a man who is by profession a prophet, and itavTis without avrip, a man who, for the time being, acts as a prophet ; thus av s np fiao-iXevs, av7]p rvpavvos, au^p ttoi- utjp, av^p prjTcop, av)]p TrpzcrfivTns, av^p veavias, ypavs yvvrj, etc. ; also in the respectful form of address among the Attic orators and historians, e. g. avdpes SiKaa-rai, 'avdpes arpariwrcu. So likewise with national names, e. g. avyjp 'A&tj- valos, 'ApS-npirris. This usage is still more extensive in poetry. See Larger Grammar, Part II. § 477. 2. When two or more attributive adjectives belong to a sub- stantive, the relation is two-fold. The relation is : (a) coordinate, when each adjective is equally a more full explanation of the substantive ; then the adjectives are commonly connected by nut, re — ko.L\ where there are several adjectives, the con- nective is used only before the last ; (b) subordinate, when a substantive with one of the adjectives forms, as it were, a single idea, and is more definitely denned by another adjective. In this case there is no connective between the two adjec- tives. The subordinate relation occurs particularly when pro- nouns, numerals, adjectives of time, place, and material are joined with other adjectives. 1,o0KC3iT7}s aya&bs Kai aov av&pdoTroou ; to. arrovSa7a ruu irpay^aTwu. b. The adjective which becomes a substantive is sometimes in the Neut. Sing., sometimes also in the Neut. PI. Th. 1. 118, ol 'A^vua?oi i-irl jx4ya ixwpyo'av Bvud/jiecos (= iirl fxeyaX-qv hvvafxiv), had attained a high degree of power. Thus many phrases with irav, e. g. els irav kclkov {in omne genus ailamitatis) a& v fipe.us iXr]Xv&ev. c. The substantive is made to depend upon the adjective in the Sing, which takes the gender of the substantive which it governs, instead of being in the v &prav robs ijfMlaeis. Th. 7, 3. rr]V ir\eio~r7)v rrjs err par las irapira^e : so iroWr} rrjs X(*> pas, rbv ir\€t. Also, irpcaros, rrp6repos (of two), vararos, vcrrepos (of two), uicos, reXevralos, irXayios, uerewpos, &Kpos, frvpalos, &a\d eic -t especially those in -a To s, e. g. devrepalos, rpira?os, etc., XP^ V10S (after a bng time), etc. II. a, 497. ijepir) S 1 avefirj ueyav ovpavov instead of r)pi, she went early. X. An. 4. 1, 5. 8e elirev. Th. 1, 137. ®€(iiv, Wacois), tt6A£oos being here in apposi- tion with 'A^TjvaTos which is equivalent to 'A&rjvwv. On the expressions d ^jLteVepos, vfj.eT€pos, a irdXis [AeyaArj, 6vo/j.a 8' avTrj Kopawr^, X. An. 1. 5,4. ib. 2. 4, 13 and 25. Tavr-p rrj twoiKia i&efie&a -iroXiv ovo/xa, PI. Rp. 369, c. (to this community we gave the name city, called it a city). 'AvripTrevrjs Kal dyy-OTiubs e/cTTjcaro t\\v fiao-iXiKwrd- rnv Kal freiordrnv irposyyopiav, rbv At Kaiov, Plut. Ar. 2. (received the surname,the Just). (The Gen. also is used in the same phrase : ^cck'lwv iKr-ija-aro rty rod Xprjarou Trposrjyopiav, Plut. Ph. 10. The Nom. also occurs: 'Avyp yevSfxevos TrposeiXr) iyeivaTO, KreTvcu, irpbs ovx airavras ei/'/fAeiai' 4pov (a deed that brings no fame), Eur. Or. 30. Kal Srj irapelrai (solutum est) aa>[xa, aol /xev ov cpiXov Suppl. 1070. Rem. 3. The Inf. also is sometimes used as a clause in apposition with a word, especially with demonstrative and relative pronouns, so as to define more exactly an idea before expressed in a general manner. Ov yap inl towtw K.d&T)Tai o St/cacTT^s, e7ri t ef k a t a x a P ' C e °" & a l T « 8'iKaia PL Apol. 35, c, the judge does not sit for this, viz., for the purpose of compromising justice for favor. *A S77 irposreTaKTai ttj /xavTiKrj, in ia kott e?v rovs ''Epwras Kal iar- p eue iv, Symp. 188, c. 3. With a substantive, expressing the idea of plurality, one substantive or even several substances denoting the parts of that plurality or whole, are often put in apposition, instead of being in the Gen. according to the natural construction. This may be called distributive or partitive apposition. Here belong especially the words e/cao-To?, eKarepos, 77-as [every one), 61 /xeV— ol Si, aAAos aWov [alius alium, one this, another that, one another, or mutually), a\\os akXoSev (alms aliunde, one from one place, another from another, or one on one side, another on another). The subject, which denotes the plurality or whole, maybe implied in the verb. This kind of apposition is used when the whole is to be expressed with the greater emphasis, while with the Gen the p arts are to be made more prominent. Od. a, 424. h)] r6re KaKKeiovres efiav 6!k6u5s eKaffTos (in suam quisque domum sese contulerunt, they went each one to his own house). Her. 3, 158. e/xevov iv T7? ecovTou Ta£t %Ka w\7]pei av&pwircov eKacrrov e&vos iwopev ero. The parti- tive appositive is often accompanied by a participle. X. Cy.3. 1,25. evioi tpoPov/xevoi, /lit] \-n(p&evres airoxrdvwaiv, iirb rod (pofiov Trpoairo&v7)xaCov, hoy i£6[x.ev o t koI ot eKeivoov ctt part)yo\ /j.^ avriwaXov eivai av, Od. a, 64, what a word escaped thee, thy lips! where ep/cos the part is in apposition with ere, the whole. Up was 8e rp6/j.os alvbs vw}]Xv&e yv7a e/eacfT ov, II. v, 44. 5 Axato?cr iv 5e fxeya a&evos €,itj8a\' e/cacTTa? KapSiri &XX7)ktov woXefxi^eiv 7)5e /^a^ecrd-cu, II. f, 152, sq. CHAPTER III. § 267. The Objective Construction. A.s the attributive construction (§ 262) serves to define the subject, or in general, a substantive idea, more fully, so the objective construction serves to complete the predicate, or define it more fully. By object, is to be understood here everything which, as it were, stands over against (objectum est) the predicate, i. e. everything which stands as the com- plement of the predicate and defines it more fully : (a) f 268. J THE CASES. 373 the Cases, (b) Prepositions with their Cases, (c) the Infini- tive, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb. Eemakk. The object completes the idea of the predicate, when the predicate necessarily requires an object, e. g. 'ETn&v/xaj ttjs apeTrjs. BovAojxai ypdcpeiv. The object defines the idea of the predicate, when the object is not necessarily required, e. g. Tb podov ai/&e? iv t$ K7]ira>. The predicate is thus defined by the specifications of time, place, degree, means, manner, and instrument. §268. I. The Cases. 1. All the relations, which the Greek denotes by the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, were originally consid- ered relations of space. 2. The action of a verb, with which the substantive object is connected, is contemplated under the idea of motion. In this manner the object of the verb appears in a three-fold aspect : first, as that from which the action of the verb proceeds ; secondly, as that toicards which the action of the verb tends ; thirdly, as that by or ivith which the action of the verb takes place. In this way three Cases originate : the Genitive, denoting the motion or direction ivhence, the Accusative, ivhither, and the Da- tive, ivhere. 3. The relations of time were viewed in the same man- ner as those of space. Thus the Gen. (the whence-case) denotes the time from which an action is conceived as proceeding ; the Ace (the whither-case), the time to which, or over which the action is conceived as moving ; and the Dat. (the where-case) the time in which an action is con- ceived as existing. 4. The relations of causality, also, were regarded as relations of space. The cause (the ground, the origin, the author), was conceived as a local outgoing of an action from an object (Genitive) ; the effect (the result, the con- sequence), as a motion towards an object (Accusative) ; the means (the instrument), as the resting of an action with or in an object (Dative). 32 374 syntax. [$$ 269, 270 $ 269 Remarks on the Nominative and Vocative 1. The Nom. and Voc.. so far as they do not express objective relations, cannot be considered as Cases ; the Nom. is the form for the subject, and the Voc. is the form which is used in calling to or in a direct address to a person or a thing. But also the predicative adjective or substantive, which is joined to the subject by the copula eiyai, is expressed, as in other languages, accord ing to the laws of agreement, by the nominative ; and even the objective rela tion of an effect or insult with the verbs mentioned in § 240, 2, is viewed in the Greek and Latin as a relation of agreement, and is expressed by the nominative. Remark 1. With the verbs buofxd^iv, 6vo/ji.d(ecr&ai and the like, the Inf. ehai is often added to the Nom. or Ace, and thus in some degree the relation of tbe effect or result is indicated. Her. 4, 33. ras bvoiid&vai ArjMoi elvat 'Tirtpoxw Te xal AaoSi/cTjf. 5, 99. (TToar^'yovs aKKovs a7re'5e£e (instead of cbre- 5a|e) Mi\r]aiwv elvai. Rem. 2. On eluai, and yiyveafrai with an abstract word, see § 284, 3 (9). Rem. 3. Since the Nom., as the Case of the subject, denotes an object as independent, the Greeks use it not only in the case mentioned in § 266, Rem. 1, but even with verbs of naming in the active. Her. 1, 199. Mi/Aitto Se KaKiovai t)]v 'Kcppohirriv 'AcravpLoi, the Assyrians call Aphrodite, Mylitta. 2. Sometimes the Nom. seems to stand instead of the Voc. in a direct sum- mons or call; but in all instances of this kind, the Nom. contains an explana- tory exclamation, which takes the place of a sentence. Here belong particu- larly the following instances : (a) Ovtos either alone, or in connection with the Nom. of a proper name, is ofteJ used when one calls out to another, in the sense, ho there ! heus tu : PL Symp. 172, a. 6 $a\7)pevs, e(p7j, ovtos 'A7roAAo5 w po s, ov irepifxei/e?s: which means, see ! this is that Apollodorus, the Phalerean, who comes there ! (b) Very often in this way, the Nom. with the article, is joined as an apposi- tive to a call or direct address. PL Symp. 218, b. ol Se oIk&tcli, Kal tf tis d\\os io~r\ fi4t5-r)\6s re Kal aypo?- kos, irvKas irdvv [xeyaXas ro?s aalu £iri£re(T&e (the same as, fyte?s 8e, oIkctcii ovres). X. Cy. 4. 5, 17. ?&l fiev ol>v av, e ay olv to i/r} 8iopi£eiv; acpievai, a 4p7]fxovv, Siacpepeiv, a/xapTd- veiv, ccpdxXecr&ai, iJ'euSecr&cu, etc. ; Sie'xetz/ and o.tt4x^ lv i t° be distant, etc. Her. 2, 80. ol uewrepoi avTecov ro?v apyvpeiwv r) iyyvTCLTa ttSXis Meyapa iroXv ■nXe'iov twv irevTaKoalccv crra- Slav (is distant from the silver mines). PI. Menex. 246, e. iirio-T^fir] x (a P l C°- \i4vn SiKato vvv-qs (knowledge apart from justice). Havofxai x^ov (1 cease from anger). Ava, aira.XX6.TT 03 Tiva Katcwv (I free one from evils). Her. 3, 81. yv6fir]s tt)s apiffTns i) fxdpTrjKe (he has mistaken the best view). 5, 62. Tvpdvvccv 7)X*v'?€pct>&r] crav. X. Hier. 7, 3. So/ce? fj.01 tovtco 8iav, t<$ Ti/xrjs opdyea^ai (to differ from other ani- mals). — ipevdo/xai, (T(pdXXo[i.ai iXirlSos, 8 6£r)s, ti>xv s (t° be cheated, to be deprived of hope, etc.). 'A (pi rip I Tiva ttjs aWias. J Air oq-t e pa> Tiva tuv ayaSwv. Trjs fiatriXelas eVr e pr} fiai. Comp. § 280, Rem. 3. Remark 1 . Many of these verbs are often constructed also with the prepo- sition air6, e. g. iXev&epovv, airaXXaTTeiv air6 (of persons, as eXev&epouv t\\v 'EXXaSa airb t&v Mf)8av), Xveiv, efyyetv, aneipyeiv, 4pr)Tveiv. 3. In like manner, the Gen. of separation is joined with ad- jectives, adverbs, and substantives which express the same idea as the above verbs, e. g. eAct^epo?, piovos, KaSapos, kcvos, 'iprjfxos, yvpvos, oo<£avo?, i/aAo's — Stdcpopos, aAAorpio? (with the Dat., disinclined) 3 dAAotos, hepos; with many adjectives compounded of a priva- tive ; with avev, X^pfe) TrArjV, e£(ji>, ckcxs, 8t^a, iripav, etc. 376 syntax. [$$ 272, 273. S. El. 3S7. at Se adpKes at Keval v aydXjxar ayopas zlaiv (bodies without minds). Her. 3, 147. anab^s KaKuv (without suffering evils, i. e. free from). Th. 1, 28. cpl\ovs iroie'icr&ai erepovs tu>v vvv ovrav (to make friends other than, different from the present ones). X. C. 4. 4, 25. irorepov robs &eovs vyr} t& SiKaia vofxo&ereiv, ^ &X\a to>v S iKaicov. Cy. 3. 3, 55. aTraidevros fiov ■yeWjaeo'i&e. 4. Here belong verbs of beginning and originating, e. g ap^ecrS-at, ap-^tv, VTrapyzw, Karapyeiv, e^ap^etv. v A/j%€tr3-oi rivos, e.g. rov TroXe/xov, means simply to without any other relation: 2w ro7s &eo?s ct-pxeabai xph tto-vtos zpyov (to begin every work with the gods) ; but Spx«" / > virapx^i-v, Kar apx*tv have a relation to others beside the subject, i. e. they signify not merely to begin abso- lutely, but to begin before others, to do something first or before others, to begin first, hence to be the cause or author: Tovs iSreXovras (pvyrjs ftpx*'" ""<>*•" Kpelrrov vvv Tots TroXefj-iois rarTOfxevovs, 3) iv rfj rj/xeTepa rd£ei, opav (it is better to see those disposed to begin the fight [set the example of fight] in the enemies' ranks than in ours), X. An. 3. 2, 17. 'H j]fx4pa to?s "EXX-ncri /xeyaXcav KaKwv &p£ei (will begin, be the cause of great calamities), Th. 2, 12. 'T7rapx et,/ o.Sikwv epyuv, evepye&tas. Rem. 2. "Apx^o-^ai a7r<£ twos (or irohiv) means, to proceed from a thing and to begin with it, e. g. &pxecr&at airo ruv aroix^iov, to begin with the first prin- ciples. k 272. B. Causal Relation. The Gen. in the causal relation signifies, also, an outgoing, but not, as in the local relation, a mere outward relation, but an inward m\A activ one, since it expresses the object by whose inward power the action of the subject is called forth and produced. $ 273. (a) The active Genitive, or the Genitive as the general expression of Cause. 1. The active Genitive stands in the first place, as the Gen. of origin or author, and is connected with verbs denoting to originate from, spring from, produce from, be produced from, e. g. yCyveo-Sai, fpvew, <}ivvai, elvat. Genitive of origin or author. Her. 3, 81. apto-rcov avSpwv olubs dpicrra fiovXevfiara ylyvea&ai (it is reasonable that the best designs should originate with, from the best men, the av$pit> ♦ 273.] CAUSAL GENITIVE. 377 being active in, o: the cause of the result). X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. irarphs /xlv 8^ Keyercu 6 Kvpos yevicr&ai Kafifivo- ov, Hepawv fiaaiXews (to be the son of Camhjses)' 6 be Kafifivo-ns ovtos tov Tlepcreibcov yevovs i\v (sprung from the ract of Persidae)' (j.r}Tpbs he ojxoXoyeiTai Mavbdvns yeveo~$rai. PI. Menex. 239, a. fiias fJt,7)Tphs irdvres abe\v i^e\rjo-r]Te yev eo-&ai (to be your own masters), non ex aliis pendere. Also elvai twos, alicujus esse, alicui addictissimum esse, to belong to some one, to be earnestly devoted to something, e. g. elvcu QiXiittcov ; elvcu tov JSzXtIo-tov (studere rebus optimis). X. Ages. 1, 33. tV 'Aaiav eavT&v iroiovvTai. (they bnng A. under their power). Isocr. Paneg. 46, 29. rj iroAis rj/xav Kvpia yevop.evn toiovtuv aya- &wj' ovk i(p&6vT]o~e to?s &A\ols (having become the possessor of such advantages). X. An. 4. 5, 35. 'rjKovaev clvtov (tov "ttttov) lepbv elvcu tov 'H\iov (sacred to the sun). 5.3, 13. 6 iepbs x&P 0S T V s 'Apr e /xib os. Dem. 01. 1. 26,28. ol Kivdwoi t&v i[jL7)s eTvai, ejusdem sententiae esse, to be of the same opinion. ( A\Ki/3id8r)s) a\- Aot6 aXKwv earl Xoywv, PI. Gorg. 482, a (is of different words at different times, uses different ivords, etc). Rem. 3. Here belong also the expressions fiye?ar&ai, iromcr&ai, frewai irok- \ov, 7tA6icttoi/, bxiyov, e^axicrou, etc. (to considei of great importance, etc.), the worth of a thing being considered as a property Usually, however, the preposition irepi is joined with the Gen. 3. The active Genitive stands, in the third place, as that ob- ject which embraces one or more other objects as parts belong- ing to it; the Gen. represents the 'whole in relation to its parts. Genitive of the whole, or the partitive Genitive. This Gen. stands : (a) With the verbs, elvai and yiyveo-Sai (to belong to, to be of the number of, to be numbered among) ; n^e'vat, Ti#eo-$ai, tto tela Sou, yyeto-SoLL (to reckon or number among), and with many others. Tk. , 65. «al avtbs ^&eAe t £>v jxevourwv elvai, to be one of those remain- ing. X. An. 1. 2, 3. -f\v koI b ^o}Kpdrr\s twc afxpl M[\7]tou err par evo/nevcap (was among those who carried on war around Miletus, crpaTevofxeucav here denoting the whole, of which Socrates is a part). Cy. 1. 2, 15. oil av av iv rois TtXeiois (avfipdai) 8iay4vtovrai aueivix-nTrroi, ovtoi tS>u ye pair e pay yiyyovrai (are reckoned among the elders). Dem. Phil. 3. 122, 43. 7) ZeXeid iari r 9j s "Aalas (belongs to Asia, is a part of). Plat. Phaed. 68, d. rbv Sravarov r t yovvTai irdvres ol a\\oi Toiv ixeyia-Twv KaKwu e? vai (among the greatest evils). PL Rp.376, e. uou/j.aros jxipos ; if with the name of a place, the country where it is situated is mentioned, the name of the country as denoting the whole, stands in the Gen., and usually befoi*e the name of the place denoting the part, e. g. 'O arparbs acpiicero rr\s ' At tiktjs is OlvSrjv (into Oenoe, a part or city of Attica), Th. 2, 18 (never es rrjs 'Attlkyis OIvqtjv). (b) With substantive adjectives, in the positive, comparative, and superlative, when it expresses the highest degree ; with substantive pronouns and numerals : ol xpjCTot rSiv avSpdmav, ol ev T *J * T)~KiK.ias (late in the day, late in life). Tpls r-Tjs Tifispas. UoWaKis rrjs 7](iipas. Rem. 5. By means of an abbreviation of the expression (comp. § 323, Rem. r f , the partitive Gen. stands also with a superlative which belongs to the predi- /ate. Her. 7, 70. ol e/c rr/s Aifivys Al&io-rres ovK6r ar ov rpix^l^-OL ex ovo ~ l 7r «* / - toov a v & p <*> ir <*) v (properly instead of ov\6rarov ruv rpix^jJ-drwv a irdvres frvfrpooiroi ^xovaiv). X. Cy.3.1,25. irdvroov rS>v Seivwv 6 (poBos /j.d\io~T « /caTa7rA7jTTei ras i|/u%as. (b ) With words which signify : (a) to take part in, partici- pate in, share in, e. g. /xere^etv, /xereo-Tt fxoi, SuSovat, /xeraSiSoVcu, TrposSiSoVai, StaStSovat, Koivoivelv, koivov/eo~<3ui (to ad' 380 syntax [$ 273, here to, be next to, to border on), avr-, irepie^crSaL, yXt^ecr^at, e7rt^coptos, dSeAc^os (seldom with Dat.), StaSo^o? (often also with Dat.), e£}?, e<£e£>}s (more rarely with Dat.), 7rpoo-#ev, Ip^vpoa-^ev, o-mcrSev, fxera^v, and many other adverbs ; — (y) to acquire aiK 1 attain, e. g. ruy^ctveti/ (to acquire and hit), Aay^aveiv, e£-, icpcKvei- o-Soll, KXrjpovofjLelv (with Gen. of the thing, to inherit; with Gen. of the person, to be the heir of some one ; with Ace. of the thing and Gen. of the person, to inherit something from one), 7rpo<5rjKu (fioi rtvos, I have to do with something, have part in) ; — (§) to strive to acquire something, e. g. ooeyeo-^ai, icpUaSac, avTL7roL€Lcr$ai, IvrpeireaB-at (to turn one's self to something, to give heed to, to respect); o-To^a^eo-^at {to aim at something). Most of the words included under this rule have a partitive idea. Besides the Gen. several of the above verbs take also a Dat. Dem. 24, 49. rols &kovo~iv ajxaprduovai fiereari cvyyvd fxr) s (those icho err unwillingly obtain pardon ) . PL Pol. 322, a. 6 oLv^pcairos Sreias fxereax^ fioipas (participated in divine destiny ). X.E. L.1,9. rod p.ev yevovs Kal rrjs dvud- uecos KOLvoovovcri, tup 8e xp' n f jLa ' TU}V ovk avr iir o tovvr at (who share in the same origin and power, but do not lay claim to their property). Cyr. 7. 5, 78 sq. &d\Trovs fxev Kal tyvxovs Kal crlrcav kcu ttot&v Kal virvov avdyKt) Kal ro?s SovXols jH€Ta5i5o'yai, it o Ae jxikt) s 8' e it i v eavrov (shared his effects with). Cy. 1.3, 7. rv Kal fieyi frcov aya&a>v opeyo/ievovs a^ieiraivord- rns reXevrr) s TuxelV (that they, desiring to obtain the most noble and val- uable acquisition, should meet a most honorable death). 4. 8, 18. %» 6 Qepaavopos ov jjlovov av\7]Ti]s aya&6s, aAAa Kal aXKrjs avr eiro ie?r o (ad fortitudinem eni- tebatar). Th. 1, 8. e Tobs elvai rod koi- vov ay a&ov (thinking that they are coadjutors in the common interest). PL Symp. 181, c. v^peas 6,/u.oipos (without sharing in insolence). Menex. 241, c. epyov Kotvhv AaKeSai/xovicov re Kal 'A&vvaioov (common to the Laced., etc., like communis alicujus rei). "Airr ojxai r?isx €t P^ s ' Her. 1, 93. \i/j.vr) e%eTa* rov o-JijAaros /xeyaXi] (borders on). 3, 72. epyov e% <£/**& a (opus aggredia- mur). Uepiexo/xai rivos (cupide aliquidamplector). Th. 1,140. rrjs yvw/u-ws rrjs abrqs ex^iJ-ai (I hold to the same opinion). 4, 10. avSpes oi ^vvapd^evoi rovde rod Kiydvvov (who have taken part in this danger). PL Pp. 2, 362, a. %\T\Seias ix^H-^vou (cum veritate conjunctum). Dem. 01. 1, § 20, ea>s earl kw ? 273. J GENITIVE CASE. 381 p6s, avr iAo/3ecr<$-e twv irpayfiaTow (capessere). Isocr. Xicocl. 22, b, (, iireiSh &vt)tou a ci!> y. a t o s ervx^s, afravdr ov 8e tyvxvs, ireipco rrjs tyvxys a&d- varov fj.vf]/j.r]v KaTaAnre?!/ (since you obtained a mortal body, but an immortal soul). Tvyxdveiu, Xayxdveiv XPVf^dTcnv, evrvx'tas — Tu%eiV TeXevrrjs, 6v6fjiaTOS, etc. X. C. 2. 1, 20. at Sia Kaprepias i-jri/xeAeicu (studia assidua) r wv naXwv re icaya- buv epywv £I;lkv s?(r&ai iroiovaiv (make them attain noble and illustrious deeds). Isocr. Paneg. 80, 187. ovk iv vuerepav ayaS&v. PI. Georg. 465, a. rov f)b4oso~To- xd^erai dvev rov fieXricrTov. Rem. 6. With ve-bs expressing participation, sometimes the word denoting a part stands in the Ace, e. g. X. Hier. 2, 6. ot rvpawoi tuv fxeyio-Twu aya&wv n\e7o~Ta fie*r e'^ow cri. An. 7. 8, 11. 'iva f^ [act ad oteu to /xepos xpvpd- roiv. According to the analogy of verbs of touching, verbs of entreating and supplicating, are connected with the Gen., which denotes the person or thing, by whom or by which one entreats or supplicates, e. g. A.iWecr&cu, iKereveiu, iKveia- &cu, since the suppliant, touching the knee or the image of the divinity, utters his prayer. Od. /3, 68. Xiaa-ofiai r]/xhv Z-qvbs 'O\v/j.iriov 7?Se ®4/j.icttos (I supplicate Zeus). So Xio~o~eo-&ai irarpbs, tok-^ccv. Comp. II. k, 454 sq. 6 [j.iv [juv e/ieAAe yeveiov X el P^ ' Ira X ei V tydfxsvos Xiaarta&ai. Rem. 7. The poets connect many other verbs with the Gen., among which ai-e those mentioned under (b) ; so any verb may govern the Gen., when its action refers not to the whole of an object, but to a part only. II. 77, 56. /*e«r- o-ov Sovpbs kXcav (having seized the middle of the spear). Od. y, 439. fiovv b* ayerrju Kepdcov (took by the horns). II. a, 197. £av&?is Se ko/xtjs e\e Hr)\ei(i>va. In phrases, like Aafie7v yovvwv, aTTTecrSrai riva yevdov, etc., the knee and beard are conceived as the objects, on which the person who touches and lays hold, hangs, and, as it were, depends. Here belong, also, in poetry : (a) Verbs denoting both physical and intellectual tasting, grasping, reaching to, and hence of striving after an object, e. g. iirifialeo-frai crKoireXou, ddepuv, v6arov (to seek the rock, gifts, a return). (b) Several verbs, which properly express the idea of a hasty motion towards an object, and then metaphorically are used to express an intellectual effort, and longing, e. g. eVefyetr&af, 6pfj.acr&aL, iirifidWea&ai, iiraiao'eiv (rushing upon something, etc.). II. t, 142. iirc iy6 (iei/6s irep "Aprjos (hastening to, desiring the contest). II. |, 488. cbpp.7}&r) 8' ^Atcdnavros (he rushed upon Acamas). II. £ 68. /jltjtis vvv ivdpwv iirtfiaXX 6 ixevos [X€T6irio-&cv ixi[xveT(a. (c) Verbs signifying to take aim, e. g. ro^eveiu, aKovrl^Lv (in prose with els, and with the meaning, to hit, to wound, with the Ace). II. p, 304. "E/crcop 8' ah-' Atavros o.k6vt 1a e dovpl cpaeivtp (aimed at Ajax). II. 1//, 855. ^ s 6.p 5 kvcayei t 1 e v e 1 v. Rem. 8. According to the analogy of the above-named verbs of aiming and striving, so we find Kara x&ovbs o/j-fxara Trrj^ai (to fasten the eyes upon the ground) ; irXeiv iivl ~Xd/xov, to sail towards Samos, as if setting out for it (on the contrary, eirl ~2d/xov, to Samos). — The Gen. of aim accurs in the attributive relation, e. g. with o86s, v6aros tottov tiv6s (way, return to a place). 382 syntax. [$ 273 Rem. 9. There also being here : (a) the adverbs eudu (Ion. fov), straight forward to something, /u-exPh t°-> U P t° >' — (b) verbs of meeting and approaching, which, however, in prose, are commonly connected with the Dat. ; — (c) also adjectives and adverbs of meeting, approaching, nearness, e. g. avrlos, iuavrios (though in Attic, only with the meaning contrarius, opposed to), irapairK-haios, which, however, are oftener joined with the Dat. ; avriov, ivavriov {before, in the presence of) ; Zyyvs and irX-ncriov with the Gen. of local nearness, but in a metaphorical sense with the Dat. Her. 6, 95. %xov (dirigebant) ras peas lfri> tov 'E Wrj stt6ptov teal rrjs Qprjitcns (directly to the Hellespont). 2, 34. 7] MyvivTos rrjs ope iv t\ s KiXinlas /xaXicrrd kt) aprir] Keerai (lies opposite to Cilicia). Dem. Ph. 3. 117, 27. irX-naiov Q-nficop ko). 'A.Sr)pS>p (near Thebes). 4. In the fourth place, the active Genitive denotes the place where, and the time when, an action Happens. The action or event belongs, as it were, to the place and the time, proceeds hi a measure from them, and is produced by them ; hence the time and place are considered as causing or producing the action, or at least as the necessary condition of it. (a) The Gen. of place is almost exclusively poetic. II. p, 372. pecpos §' ov (paiuero irdtTTjs yalrjs, ouS' bpecap (not a cloud appeared on the plain, nor on the mountains). II. i, 219. avrbs 6° olptlop t(ev 'OSi/cnr/jos freioio roixov rod krepoio (by the other wall). Hence, especially, in Epic poetry, with verbs of going and motion, the space or way upon which the going or the motion takes place, and to which, as it were, this action belongs, stands in the Gen., e. g. II. £, 801. epxoprai ireSioio (go through the plain). %> 23. &eeip ireSloio. v, 64. 7re 8 I o i o diwueip opveov (to pursue over the plain). So the prose, lepai rod TrpAato (to go over the forward way, to go forward). Rem. 10. In this way are to be explained the adverbs of place, ov,irov, ottov, avrov, ov5ap.ov, aWaxov, etc. : and on the same principle also it is to be ex- plained that adverbs of place with the suffix 3-ej/ stand, apparently instead of adverbs of place with the suffix &i, e. g. epSoSrep, eyyv&ep, rr\\6&ep, eKroa&ep, e. g. II. p, 582. "EKTopa 8' eyyv&eu icrrajxepos wrpvpep ^AttoWcop. (b) The Gen. of time often occurs both in poetry and prose. Also the space of time withiv, ivhicli something happens, as pro- ducing the action, or the condition of it, may be expressed by the Gen. The Gen. expresses time indefinitely, denoting merely the period ivithin which or in the course of which the action takes place, whi]e the Dat. expresses definite time, a point of time. "hvS-n SaWei rod eapos, the spring is conceived as producing the flowers, and hence as the cause of them. Thus bepovs, in the summer time ; ^ei/wos, in the win- ter ; ritMepas, in the daytime, in the course of the day, by day ; pvkt6s, by night ; SeiATp, oircbpas; as Eng. of a morning, he did it of a fine morning ; also /xrjyos, per month, monthly ; ipiavrov, yearly, etc.; with attributives, e. g. tov avrov, rod irporepov, ei«i.o~- rov, eiovs, the same, the former year, etc. ; ~r\s abr?\s rj^spas, on the same day ; rys $jriovo'r\s vvkt6s : ~iv eniyiyvop.epov frepovf ' avrrjs rrjs f]/x4pas, in the course of this day $ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 383 (but Dat. ravrr/ rfj ri^pa, in that day). Hence the adverbial expressions apxys, at the beginning, and rod Xolttov, for the future. Her. 4, 48. "larpos 'Zeros aet avrbs ica'vrS peei Kal &4povs ical x^ l l x ^ vos {always flows equal to itself in summer and winter). 6, 12. rov Xoittov [xt] Trei&a>(j.€&a avrov. PI. Phaed. 59, d. i^XSro/j.€v rod 8e(Tfj.coT7iplov e o*7re pas {at evening). Ov jxaKpov xP^ V0V i crvxvov, ttoXXov, irXziarov, bxiyov XP 0>V0V {^ n i 'within a short, long time) ; ttoXXoov 7)/j.€p£>v, irS>v {within many days, years), etc. Her. 3, 134. ravra bxiyov XP° V0V eo-Tcu reXevpeva. X. An. 1. 7, 18. fiacriXevs ov /xax^rai deica 7]/j.eqS)v. PI. Symp. 172, c. tv o XX gov ircov 'Ayd^uv iv&dde ovk iTrtSe8i]fj.r}Kfv. Rem. 11. By the Gen. of time, the Gen. absolute may be explained, e. g. rod Kipov fSacr iXe v ovtos iroXXa re Kal KaXa, ipya virb ru>v Hepacov iirpax^V' Rem. 12. Prepositions are often used to define the relation of time more exactly, e. g. e/c ttoXXov xp^ vov i "#' 4o"ir4pas, iirl Kvpov, Cyri aetate, diet. ttoXXov Xp6vov, ivr6s or etrw ttoXXov xpovov. Comp. the remarks on the prepositions. Rem. 13. The Gen. as well as the Ace. denotes continued or protracted time, but with this difference, that the Gen. denotes the time within any part of which the action may take place ; whereas the Ace. of time implies that the action is in progress during the whole of the time mentioned, e. g. ravrrjv rrjv rifj.4- pav avrov T)bxi£ero, he encamped there during the whole of that day ; but with the Gen. the meaning would be, that, in the course of that day, sometime in that day, he encamped there. Comp. § 279, 6, in regard to the difference between the Gen. and Ace. of time and place. 5. The active Genitive, finally, denotes the material of which anything is made, formed, and, as it were, produced, or the source from which something is drawn; the material being viewed to some extent as the cause of the result. This Gen. stands : (a) With verbs of making, forming, and the like. Her. 5, 82. x a ^ K °v iroi4ovrai ra ayaXfxara {are made of bronze) . 2, 138. earpw/jLevr] e'eri 6b~bs Xi&ov {is paved with stone). Th. 4, 31. epv/xa avroSti "f\v Xt&cov Xoyddrjv tt eir o it] /x4v ov. In the attributive relation : eKTrca/xa £ u A o u {a drinking cup [made] of wood) ; rpdirefa apyvpiov, (rr4cpavos vaKivfrovv. Rem. 14. This relation is very often expressed by the Dat. also, and more definitely by the prepositions e£ and air6, also Sid with the Gen. (b) With words of fulness and want, e. g. irX^etv, rrX-qpovv, 7rtfji7r\avo.L, yipuuv, /3ptS€tv ', vacrcretv, crarrew, evTroptiv, etc. ; aTropuv, iriveaS-ai, SeioSai, Sa, cnravit^w, XP 1 ?' e ^ c> '■> ^Xios, TrXrjprj^, /xeo-Tos, tt\ov(tliv Xo- yav {are full of these sayings). 'EviropeTv, atropeiv, TTevea&ai, o-7ravl(eiv rwv Xp-nndroov {to abound in, to be destitute of means). X. Cy. 3. 1,3. Sia&eSvroov Kal iXavv6vrwv rb irediov fxecr 6 v {full of persons running about). An. 2. 4, 384 syntax. [§ 273. 14. dav ir avr o 5 air a>v fipca/xaTajr (to taste the various kinds of food). 1.3,10. KalriSr], 5 Kvpe, raXXa fufiov/xevos rbv^aKav, ovk aire ftp 6- v aXXv Kpewv (so sweet was the smell of swine's flesh to me). Rem. 16. In poetry many other verbs are constructed with the Gen. of the material, e. g. airoffri Xfie 1 v aXeicparos, (veKvas) irvpbs fxe iXicrae \xev, Xovecr&ai ivppeios TroTa/xolo. See Larger Grammar, II. § 527, Rem. (e) With expressions of remembering and forgetting : fxifju/rjcr- KOfzcu, to remember, //.i/^o-kw (rtva twos), to remind one of some- § 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 365 thing, iwqiusV) afjLvrjfJLuv, i7n\av$dvojxaL, to forget ; hence also with \d$pa, Aa^ptws, and Kpva ; also with, expressions of being ac- quainted and unacquainted with, of experience and inexperience ; of ability, dexterity or skill in anything, e. g. e//,7ra/oos, airaposy iTTKTTrjpujiV, i7ri(TTapL€vo<$, ^evws e^co ; with adj ectives in - 1 k o s (derived from transitive verbs) which denote skill, aptness, etc.; also with 7r€tpw/xat, to make trial of something. X. C. 2. 1, 33. Oi yepairepoi TjSews tojv iraXai&v irpd^twv /j.4 [xvnvTai (remember the past achievements). Antiph. II. a, 7. 'H iTn&vfxia tt\s Tijxwpias aixvrifxova twv kivSvvoiv ko&'hjtt) omt6v (rendered him forgetful of dangers). X. O. 16, 8. Tl6&ev ovv ySouAet &p^oofj.ai ere ttjs yetapyias vtto pi fivh cnceiv (to remind you of husbandry) . Cy. 8.3,3. Tov v avfrponrivwv tt pay fiaT av (pardoning, not knowing, human errors). — 'Aireipwy ex^y Tavrrjs t 77 s r e % z> 77 s (to be unacquainted with this art). 'Airoir <=ip£> fiai yvojfirjs (I make trial of an opinion). With the poets this use of the Gen. is still more extensive. II. 0. 411. t4ktovos, bs pa. tc irdcrns ev etS?; ffocpi'ns (who is well acquainted with all skill). X. 3. 1, 6. irapacr Keva- jxevo>. tov adovros oj{jlvvgtg cfSeiv dpicrra (not hearing the voice of the singer). Her. 1, 80. chs o v or oti Te(%l(o(6J'). X. An. 1. 10, 4. fiaaiXevs ¥iKOvo~e T io~ a a

o , K€iv, iiricTT affS ai, elSevai, i v&v [J.e7cr&a i, etc. ; irvv&d- vecr&at, fiav&dveiv, Kpiveiv, i^erd^tiv, Xeyciv, orjAovv, etc.: ano- Se'xeo-^-at (to receive the opinion of one, to agree in opinion with one) ; &yao-&ct i, §av[Aa(eiv, iirai v civ, jxi ficp € cr&ai, ty 4y e iv. The Gen. denotes the ob- ject (commonly a person) in respect to which one perceives, sees, obserres. knows, judges something, some action, external indication, or some single c'u- $ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 387 cumstance, etc. ; or of whom one learns, hears, affirms something ; or in whom one admires, praises, or censures something. X. C. 1. 1, 12. Tlpurov fx\v avTwv (~2,coKpdrr}s) iff kott e i, ir6repd irorr VOjAiffavTzs luavcos 7^877 rav^pdoTriva eiSeuai epx ( " /Tal inl rb rrepl roiovrcov P at/ Ka ^ o'lav exoiev (attentively con- sidering with respect to them, what a country they had). Cy. 7. 2, 18. eyva kclI [xd\a aroira 4 pod iroiovvros (he perceived in respect to me, that I ivas doing an absurd thing, or eyvco 4 pod, '6ri aroira iroioiriv). PL Gorg. 463, d. ap" ovv av fxaSroLs airotc p ivafi4vov ; (instead of ap ovv av fxov jid&ois, a airoKpivQ/JLai , will you then understand my answer, i. e. learn from me what I answer ?). 465, e. A €- y out 6 s fxov ppaxsa ovk ifxdv&aves (you did not understand me when I spoke briefly). The Gen. of the person alone. Ph. Phil. 51, c. d pov fiav&dveis instead of ei' jjlov fxav&dveis-, a x4ya> (if you comprehend me, understand what I say). Th. 4. 6. iirvfrovro rrjs IlvXov nar e i\r) ixfx4vns, instead of 4ttv&. rrjs IlvAov, on KaT€i\r)fx/j.ev7) ^v (when they learned that Pylus was captured). 5, 83. ijff&ovro reixi-C<>VT(av, instead of rjff&. avra>v, Uri rsixK 0l * v (learned re- specting them that they were building the walls, i. e. learned that they were building, etc.). X. C. 3. 6, 16. 4vSv fxov rwv 'aWav, ir6repd ffoi Sokovctiv iirl rols roiovrois 4waivov paKXov 77 -ty6yov rvyx&veiv (observe respecting the others, whether). ("E.v&vixe'iffSai with the Gen. of the thing, for example rrjs 8>pas, X. Ven. 8, 6., rS>v tSttwv, ib. 9,4, signifies to have a regard for something, and belongs to § 174, 1 (b) ; 4j/&v[xe7ffSaL with the Ace. of the thing signifies to reflect upon, consider something, aliquid secum reputare.) PL Protag. 324, c. air oh 4 xo vrai oi ffol TTO\?TCU KCU %oAKf6)J Kot ff KVT OT 6jX0V ffVflfiovXtVOVrOS TO. TTOXlTllcd (receive the opinion of the brazier and shoemaker). Her. 6, 76. dyaff&ai rod 'Epaffivov ov ir poS 106 vr s robs iroXi-firas ( to admire Erasin us because he did not betray the citizens). Th. 1, 84. rb fipadv teal peXXov, b p4fj.(p ov r ai paXiffra 77 n&v, fii] alffxvveffhe (for which they chiefly complain of us). X. Cy. 3. 1, 15. « &yaffai rod irarp6s, 77 off a /3e/3ouAeuTat, '/) Off a it 4ir pax*? irdvv ffoi ffvfi^ouKeixa rovrov fxifi^ff^ai (if you admire my father either for the measures he has devised, etc.). Ages. 2, 7. rdd' avrov fryapai, on irapeffKevdffaro (1 ad- mire this in him). 8. 4. 4ycb Kal rovro 4iraiv5> 'Ayy cr iXdov, rb irpbs rb ap4ffKeiv ro?s "EXXi\ffiv inrepideTv rr\v f}affi\4oos £eviav ( I praise Agesilaus for this also). PL Men. 95, c. Yopyiov paXiffra ravra dya/xai (1 particularly ad- mire this in Gorgias, or Gorgias for this). Theaet. 161, b. '6 SfavpdCo) rov eralpov, r6de iffriv (what I admire in a companion is this) . Criton 43, b. cod irdXai &avy.d£a>, al ff&av6 pevo s, &s f)b'4oos Ka&evdsis. Pp. 383, a. Tr6\\a 'Ofi-fipov iiraivovvres aAAa rovro ovk 4iraiveff6fj.^a (though ice praise many other things in Homer). Rem. 21. In themselves, the above verbs take the Ace, e. g. 6p5> nva or n, OKorcS) nva or ri, iiraivS), \\i4y iXeeiv and oiKTecpeiv (with the Ace. of the person and Gen. of the thing) ; (d) Anger and indignation : Spyi&o-SaL (with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), ^cuVcttcus cpepuv; (e) Envy : (pSoveiv (with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), £7ricp$6vu)s SiaKeio-^cu ; (f) Admiration, praise, blame; 3avpLa£eiv and ayaoScu (with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, sometimes also with the Gen. of the thing and the Gen. of the person, winch is governed by that thing, see Rem. 2) fyjXovv, et>&u//,o- vuQs.iv, hraiv&v, /xe/xccr^at (all with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing). PI. Rp. 403, a. 6 op&bs epcas irecpvKe koct/xlov re Kal KaXov creoeppoveos re Kal fiovaiKws ipav (to love what is well ordered and beautiful). 438, a. ouSets ttotov iir i&v [M€?, aWa. % p 77 c t ov wot ov, Kal ov a ir ov, aXAa. % p 77 o" t v airov iravrts yap &pa twv aya&wv iir t&v p. ova" iv (no one desires drink, but wholesome drink, etc.). Symp. 181, b. 01 (pavXoi tojv avSp&irwv twv o'cof/.d- tu>v [laXXov, f) Tv (is very fond of the beautiful). X. Cy. 3. 3, 12. (Kvpos) KaKetvovs iirotr)o~ei> ipx t)ttov zviai tqov (pvaewy, 7} dXXai twv ctItwv re Kal ttotojv (thirst for praise not less than others for food and drink). Attribu- tive, e. g. epws, iTTi^v/ji.ia aper^s (amor, cupiditas virtutis, love, desire for virtue). Th. 6. 14. K-hdeo-frai tt)s iroXews (to be anxious about the city). Her. 3, 151. iiroXi6pKte (BafivXowtovs) (ppovri^ovras ovdeu rrjs iroXiop kit) s (having no concern about the siege). 3, 159. tov o'ltov irpoopav (to have a care for, to provide food). X. Symp. 8, 33. oi ip6yov acppovT ict el> idri£6/j.eyoi ovk alfrxvvovTai a\a\p6v ti iroieiv (those accustomed to be indifferent to censure). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. riepaw v6p.oi (&pxovTai) tov koivov aya&ov iir 1 fie- Aovfxevoi (having a regard for the public good). MeAet fioi twos (1 have a care for something, some one). PL Crito, 44, c. ti j)p.?i' ttjs twv ttoXXQp $6^r)s fie\ei; (why do we care for the opinion of the multitude?). 5. 1, 21« $ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 389 Toofipva ireipdao/Aai rroieiv p.r)irore p.er ap.e Xrj crai rrjs rrpbs ep.e 6Sov (that Gobryas shall not repent of his journey to me). Id. C. 1. 2, 9. virep opav errolet rav Ka& ear droop v6p.oov robs aw6vras (made his associates despise the ex- isting laws). Th. 4, 124. BpacriSas rrjs Mevorjs ir e p Lopw p.e vos (solicitous about Mende). X. H. 5. 4, 1. &eol ovre rd>v dfrejSouyrwy, ovre rwv av6tfia iro lovvrwv afie\ov(ri (are regardless neither of the wicked nor the profane) Cy. 8. 7, 15. eavrov Kr) Serai 6 ir povo 5>v a.Se\(pov (he who takes thought for a brother is anxious for himself). X. Ag. 7, 1. 'Ayr]ov re&vr) kot s, H-dywv S/Se elirev (grieving for her dead brother). Symp. 4, 37. rovrovs oiKrelpw rrjs dyav %aA. ex^s v6o~ov (I pity them on account of the disease). Attributive, e. g. &\yos eralpuv (de amicis, for, on account of friends) ; moreover with adjectives also (though only in poetry), and especially with exclamations with or without interjections. Eur. Or. 413. olp.01 icoyp.a>i/, ots e\avi>op.ai rd\as! (alas the vexations!). X. Cy. 3, 1,39. p.r]u exe^, 81a. rb r)ye7a&ai duovras avrovs apiaprdpeiv (to be angry on account of the same ivrongs). (In poetry, the Gen. is much more frequent with verbs expressing anger, e. g. II. £, 266. 'Hpaic\rjos irep ix<*>' craro, iraidbs eolo (wasangry on account of Hercules, his son). Od. a, 69. (UoaeiSdoov) KvkXcottos K€X^ UTa h u ' / os oiaiceTa&ai (it is not just that we should be so much envied by the Greeks on account of our sovereignty). So also in poetry, p. e ya I p w, e. g. Aesch. Prom. 627. ov p. ey alp 00 rovSe aoi 8upr)p.aros (I do not envy you because of this gift). Attributive, e. g. (having admired him on account of his gentleness, education, etc.). Symp. 4, 45. £r}\c0 ere rov irKoirov (I envy you on account of your wealth). PL Symp. 194, e. SoKovai irdvres robs avSpooirovs evS aip.ovl£eiv ra>v ay a- &a> j/, Sjv 6 &ebs avrots aXrios (to consider men happy on account of the good things^ which, etc.). Ion. 530, b. iroKhdicis ye i(i)\wv hsyovTuv. So with ad- jectives, e. g. PI. Phaedon. 58, e. evSai p.cov [xoi 6 avrjp icpaiveTo Kal tou Tpoivov Kal twv \6yav, &s adea>s nal yevvaiws irsAsvTa (the man seemed to be happy on account of his habits and remarks). Remark 1 . The Gen. with the above verbs is often governed by preposi- tions, especially "irspi, e. g. iiriixeXeTcrSfai, os, X. C 1. 1, 11. 4. 7, 6. to be anxious for something, but (ppovTi^eiv r t, scrutari, investigare ; — irpovoelv, it poo pap n (to perceive beforehand, to consider beforehand); vir e po pav ri and tivos, despicere, in the same sense. In poetry, /j.4\ei sometimes takes for its subject a noun denoting a thing, in the Nom. ; but in prose, it takes only a Neut. pronoun in the Nom. The verb is then used personally : MsX-hvova iv b* ifiol 'liriro:, II. k, 481. TauTa fiev ovv &e£ (j.eAr)arei, PI. Phaedr. 238, d. Rem. 2. The verbs Sravjxd^ iv and &yaa&ai have the following con- structions : (a) the Ace. of the person or the Ace. of the thing alone, when the wonder or admiration extends to the whole person or thing, or to the whole nature of a person or thing, e. g. fravfidfa tov CTparnySv (I admire the general) ; Sravfxdfa tt\v aocpiav (I admire the wisdom) ; — (b) the Gen. of the person and the Ace. of the thing, when one admires something in a person (Rem. 20), e. g. &av/j.dfy HioKpaTovs ttjv o-ocpiav (I admire the wisdom in S crates, or the wisdom of Socrates) ; — (c) the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, when one admires a person on account of some quality, e. g. &avfji.d£w ^.wKpdTr] ttjs aocpias (I admire Socrates on account of his wisdom), see 1, (f ) ; — (d) seldom Gen. of the thing and the Gen. of the person depending upon it, when I wonder at the quality of a per- son, or admire the quality of a person, e. g. gravp.d(co ^uKpaTovs ttjs aocpias (1 admire the wisdom of Socrates), see 1, (f ) ; — (e) the Ace. of the person, and in- stead of the Gen. of the thing, a preposition, commonly iiri with the Dat., e. g. &avfjt.d£(o HuKpaTTi iirl tj? cofyia (I admire Socrates for, on account of his ivisdom). 2. With verbs signifying to requite, to revenge, to accuse and condemn. The Gen. represents the guilt or crime as the cause of the requital, revenge, etc. Thus with rijacopeio-^ai (with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), also with judicial verbs of accusing and condemning, e. g. alrtaaSai, iTrauriaaSai, Sioj- K€iv, dsdyeiv, vira.ye.iv, ypafaoSai, 7rposKa\eio-$ai (all With the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), hr^ikvai, iyKaXetv, eTno-Krpr- reo-^ai (all three with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. of the thing) ; s, per picas, and the like, also with cos, it Sis, Sir cos, rj, oiTT], ovtcos, « 5 e, cosctvTcos, connected with the verbs ex**!' and %Keiv, sometimes also with eluai and other intransitive verbs, the object by which a condition is caused or occasioned, is put in the Gen. K a Aw s e%« irodcou (lam well in respect to my feet). Her. 6, 116. 'A&tjvcuol, cos tto- dcov e?xo^, rdx^crra ifiorj&eov is to &o~tv (as they were able with respect to their feet, i. e. as quickly as their feet would carry them). 5, 62. xpt]\xci.T cov ev tjkov- Tes (well off for, to have a plenty of, means). So tv, tcaKcos, [xeTplcos ^% eLV &' L0V > eppevcov, yivovs, Swd/xzcos (to be well off" as to the means of living). Ot "EWrjves ovtcos eTx°" ofiovoias irpos aXXr]\ovs. X. Cy. 7. 5, 56. ovtco TpSiroi, «X €tJ (y ou are thus in respect to circumstances, you are in suck circumstances). H. 4. 5, 15. cos Tax ovs eKeurTos elxej/ (as each was able in respect to swiftness, as quickly as each was able). 392 syntax. [$ 275. $275. (c) Genitive denoting ceitain Mutual Relations. The third division of the causal Gen., includes the Gen. by which certain mutual relations are expressed, e. g. the relation of the ruler to the subject. As a ruler necessarily supposes a subject, and a subject a ruler, an inferior, a superior, etc., the one may, in a measure, be considered the cause or occasion of the other. Hence the Gen. is used : 1. With verbs of ruling, superiority, excelling, surpassing, sub- jection, inferiority : apyeiv, Kpareiv, Seo-7ro£eiv, rvpavvetv, rvpaweveiv, c-TpaT7ryeiv, i7riTpo7T€veiv, iirio-TOLTZLV, (SaatXeveiv, f)yep,oveveiv, rryuoSai, etc.; with the adjectives iyKparrjs, aKpanjs ; — also with ^poi^ecy, avk^iv, Trepielvoa, TrepcytyvecrSaL, TrpodTaruv, v7rep/3aW€LV, virepcpipew, 7rpuoTeveLV, 7rpeo-(3evetv, irpoKpiveiv, TrpoTL/xav, ttX^ov^ktuv, etc. ; — rjTTci- a$ai, vcrrepetv, vcrTepi^eiv, iXarrovcrSai, pLeiovcrScu, juetoveKretv, varepov elvai, rjTTOva elvat, etc. Her. 7, 97. tov vavr ikov 4gt par-ny eov oi'Se (these had the command of the naval forces). 3,15. iirirp oire v e iv AIjvtttov (to be the governor of Egypt). Th. 1, 69. 6 Xoyos rod epyov eKparei (the report exceeded the thing itself). X. Cy. 1. 1,2. apxoPT es jxiv elcri Kal ol fiovKoXoi rwv fiouv, Kal ol imrtxpopfiot tu>v 'lirircav, Kal irduTts Se ol KaXovp.€voi vo/xe7s, v iiri^v/xiajv aKparrj io-Ti (depraved men are subject to, not able to control all their passions). Her. 6, 61. KaXXiCT ev o~e i to TraiSiov iracriav tS>v iu ^Trdprr) yvvaiK wv (wdl surpass all the Spartan women in beauty). Th. 1, 81. ro7s oirXois ahrCov Kal t<5 nX-rfcei. v7re p(p e pojxev (are superior to them in arms, etc.). X. Ag. 5,2. 'AynalXaos rjy g7to apxovT i Trpos-fiKeiv ov /j.aXaKia, aXXa. Kaprepiq, twv ISlwtwv irep ie?vai (that the commander ought to excel the privates, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 19. rdx^t ire- oieyevov avrov (you excelled him in despatch). PI. Gorg. 475, b. aKe^/w/xs^a, Apa Xvttt) virz p fiaXXe i to aSwelv tov ct$ t k e? a& a i, Kal akyovcri fxaXXov ol aStKOvvTts, f) ol adiKov/xevoi (the Ace. is more usual with virepfiaAkeiv). L. 752, e. TTpeo-peve iv t£>v ttoXXwv iroXtwv (to take the preceaence of many cities). So also av4x ev (to permit domestic affairs to be neglected) . lw 6 £4- o $ 275.] GENITIVE CASE. 393 ouk acexeTat rod &\Aa Xeyovros. 'Hrrao'&at ruv £tti&v/j.iu>i/ (to be sub- ject to one's desires). Dem. Cor. 308, 244. ovda/mov r)rr7)&e\s airrjA^ou r up irapa &i\iirirov ir p e a j8 e u v (being overcome by or yielding to the envoys). X. C 1.3,3. %uKpdrr\s frvtrlas frvoov fiiKpas airb jxiKpuu ovdev r)ye?ro fie iovo~&a t rut airb iroKKwv koli fieydhuv iroKka /cat fieyaXa Sfvovruv (did not think that he was inferior to those making many great sacrifices, etc.). Hier. 4, 1. fieyd\ov aya- &ov fie 10 veKre? (comes short of a great good). 'To-repeiv rr)s fidxv s (to come after the battle). 'Terr epl£e tv ruv naipuv (to be behind opportunities, to fail tousethem). "far epi^eiv ruv epyuv. X. Hier. 1, 18. ravrrj rfj eveppoavvn rrjs iXiriSos fieiove Krova i rvpavvoi ruv ioiuruv. 2, 1. fie love tcrovvras teal airuv /col iroruv koX 6\puv (coming short of food, etc.). Remark 1. 'Hyefioveveiv and r)ye?o-&ai in the sense of to go before, to show the way, with bh°6v expressed or understood, govern the Dat. ; Kparelv in the sense of to conquer, regularly governs the Ace, but in the sense of to be master of potiri, to rule, have the command of the Gen., e. g. Kpareiv robs iro- \efiiovs (vincere) ; Kpareiv rrjs xcSpas, rrjs ir6\eus, ruv evavriuv, ruv err t&v/iiuv, r ov opovs (all in Xen.). Rem. 2. That in which one excels another, in prose, is usually put in the Dat., but is often expressed by prepositions, e. g. ev rivi, eUs ri, icard ri, iirl tim. — With riTTaa&ai \>ir6 is often joined with the Gen., e. g. Th. 1, 62. rb o~rpar6iredov rjaaar o virb r u v 'A&rjvaiuv. 2. The Comparative and adjectives in the positive with the force of the Comparative, e. g. numerals in -ao-tos and -ttXovs; Sevrepos, TrepvrTos, etc., take the object by which the comparison is expressed in the Gen. Genitive of Comparison. X. An. 7. 7, 41. ovdev vofii^u avdpl KaWiov elvai KTrjfia ovde \afiir par epov aperrjs leal oiKaioo~vvT)s ical yevvai6rr\r os (I do not think that man has any possession more beautiful than virtue, etc.). X. Cy. 7. 5, 83. ov 5r)irov rbv dpxovra ruv apxofievuv irovr)p6r epov irposr)K.ei elvai (it does not become a commander to be more base than his subjects). Eur. Med. 965. XP V ; 7r v ttovwv irwKov aiv r]jxiv irdvra Taya& oi &ecu (se# all good things to us for toils). Cy. 3. 1, 36 av d4, 3> Tiypdvr), \4%ov fioi, Tr6aov av irpiaio, costs rf)v ywaiica airoXafiefr [what would you pay to regain your wife). 'Eycv pev, ecp-n, S> Kvpe, xav tt)s tyvxvs it piatpTjv, &sre f/.i]iroTe Xarpevaai ravr-nv (I would buy her at the expense of my life). H. Ci 236. reux e> dpei^ev, XP V0 ~* a X a ^ Ke ' luJ/ > eKarojx^oi ivveafioiav (was exchanging arms, golden for brazen, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 37. Ka\ av 8e, & AftueW, airdyov ri)v re yvvtuica /ecu avrovs iraioas pyfiev avrcov Karate is (nulla re pre iis deposita, having paid nothing for them). Ql aya&ol oiiSevbs av k4 poovs ttjv Tf/s irarpiSos iAev&epiav av r aWaj-aivro (the good would exchange the freedom of their country for no gain). II. X, 514. l-nrpbs yap avrjp rroWuv avrd^ios aXXwv (is worth as much as many others). Her. 3, 53. 6 Avicoippcov ovde av a- Kpicrios 7) 1 1 w ae rbv Trois elvai rov t S> v la (av t6v re icaKov Kal aya&bv a£iova$ai. Tipav rivl rivos and rivd tlvos, e. g. S e k a to- \dvruv, rod fravdrov (to fine one ten talents, to sentence one to death, to con- sider one worthy of punishment). So the Mid., used of the accuser : t maa&ai tivi apyvpiov, fravdrov, to impose a fine, or penalty of death upon one ; com- monly, however, Siktjv is here supplied. Rem. 4. With verbs denoting to barter, to exchange, the relation is usually considered like a relation of space, and is denoted by avri with the Gen. Rem. 5. The Gen. with substantives (attributive Gen. § 262, b.) expresses a much greater variety of relations, than the Gen. with verbs. For where two objects are immediately connected with each other, there is always a mutual relation between the ideas they express ; the one depends upon the other, seems united with it, to proceed from it or in some way to belong to it. Hence the rule : When two substantives are connected with each other, the substantive which completes the idea of the other and defines it more fully, is put in the Gen. As ad- jectives or participles are, in their nature, nearly related to the substantive, many adjectives also govern the Gen., when the verbs from which they are derived, take the Ace, e. g. Kpariarov irarpbs 'E\\f)vcav r pa) ; 6 Trjs aperrjs zpus, vir- tutis amor, the love of or for virtue (ipca Trjs apeTrjs) ; evvoid tivos, good-will towards one (evvovs elfxi tivi) ; iiri/xeKeia t£>v ir t\e/j.iK(ov epyav, cura rerum bellicarum (iiri/j.e\ov/xai twv iroAtfUKtov epyccv). 'H tS>v UAar aieoov itrio'Tpa- vela instead of irpbs tovs II., the expedition against the Plataeans. Th. 1, 108. iv aTrofido-ei rrjs yr\s instead of iirl ttjs yrjs, in disembarking on the land. (c) It is called the Passive Gen., when it originates from the passive object of transitive verbs in the Ace, i. e. when it takes the place of the object of a transitive verb, and so denotes the thing affected or caused by the transitive action, e. g. r\ Tr\s -n-oAeccs kt'htis (from Krlfa tt\v ir6kiv), the city being that which is possessed. 'O rrjs iirio-ToXrjs ypcupevs (from ypdcpei iirio-To\r]v), the iiritr- ro\-n being the object acted upon. 'H twv Ka\s),hv ol cpavXoi j&v avfrpwiraiv ipuxrip (which bad men love). PI. L. 680, e. fiacr iXeiav irac uv SiKaioTaTr/v fSacri- Aeuo fxevoi (ruling a kingdom). Prot. 325, c. e7ri/ie Xovvrai irdcrav iiri/xe' Xeiav (they care for with all care, bestow all care upon). Dem. Aph. 845,4 deo/j.ai vja&v SiKaiav 5 4r]criv. X. An. 1. 3, 15. Tvxy V-a (were fortunate in this good fortune, obtained this advantage). Id. H. 7. 1, 5. irXeicrTovs Ka\ fxeyiarovs ay wv as yywv io-jj. 4 vot Kara bo.Xa.TTav iXax i(TTa ^ v a.iroTeTvx'hKaTe, irXeicrTa Se Karroop^wKare (having contended in the greatest contests). Andoc. Myst. 5, 31. apacrd/j. ev oi toss /xeyicr- Tas a pas vpuv. So KaXas irpd^LsirpaTTeiv) £pyd£ecr§ai epyov KaXov ; &px*w SiKaiav apxw '■> alo~xP au SovXeiav SovXeveiv j fieyav irSx^ixov TroXe/xeiv ] xaAe7T7j^ voaov vocreTv. 'Ek5t]/j.ovs (TT paTeias i^yecrav (like e^oSov i£i4vai). Th. 1, 112. AaKedai/x6- vioi Tbv Upbv KaXoijxevov it 6Xe/xo v £ctt pa.T ev cr av (like o~TpaTelav CTpaTeveiv). So opKOvs bixvvvai, aoSevsiv voaov, £r)v fiiov. X. Hier. 6, 7. iroTov 54 Tiva virvov £kol/j.co. If the idea of the verb permits, the passive construction also can be used, e. g. 'O ot/ce?oy rjpuv tt oXe /xo s ovtws iwoXe (ati^t) (our intestine war zvas so warred, so managed), PL Menex. 243, e. KaXal irpd^eis irpaTTovrai. So also with adjectives, e. g. KaKol iracrav Katctav, PI. Pp. 490, d. In certain phrases, such as cpvXanas cpvXaTTtiv, excubias agere, cpbpov (cpbpovs) cpepeiv, tribu- turn solvere, iro/xiryv irofxireiv, pompam ducere, the substantive can stand without an adjective, because here the substantive is used in a special and pregnant sense. 2. In place of the substantive from the same stem as the verb, or of a similar signification with it, an attribute of such cognate substantive, can also be used ; in this case, the verb frequently has a pregnant sense, since it contains, at the same time, an additional idea. II iKav jxaxyv = viK-qv p.dxns (to conquer a battle, i. e. to win a battle) ; so O X v pL ir i a (= 'OXv/xiriwv viK-nv) v iKav (to conquer in the Olympic games), Th. 1, !2G. "Nikuv vavfiaxias — v'iktjv vavpiax^v (to gain a naval victory), 7, 66. f 278.] ACCUSATIVE case. 397 uncap yvdfATjj/, sententiam vincere, vinav oiicrjv (to carry one's opinion, one's suit, triumphantly); like frvpa &veiv is: ra iiriviicia (Upd or frvfxara), evayy4' Aio, oia^arrjpia, yev4&Xia, ra, Aii/cam, ydfiovs &veiv (to offer a sacrifice on account of victory, a festive offering, etc., i. e. to celebrate the victory, etc. by a sacrifice); rb Tlepainbv wp% e ' T0 (danced the Persian dance), X. An, 6. 1, 10; ravra (crvv^ri^ara) crv v 3-e fj.€ vo i (having made these agreements); ravra ( = opicovs rovrcov) 6fj.6crapres (having taken these oaths) ; rapdrreiv TToXe/jLoy = rdpayfia ttoX4/j.ov (to stir up war, turbando bellum concitare, as it is said, bellum miscere), PI. Up. 567. a. Passively, iroXefios irpbs robs 'A/u. rwv rerriywv xs ( looking fire, flashing fire ). So /3 A e 7r e i v, oepiee- v • b /cat p.e yyjs inre^eirefx^av. PI. Prot. 310, e. aAA' ah to. ravra vvv tjkco iraph (re (on this very account). 4. The Ace. denotes also the effect merely arned at, the de- sign of the action ; yet almost always with neuter pronouns or adjectives merely, whereas with substantives a preposition, as e£s, 7rpos, i-n-t, is commonly used. The following verbs, in partic- ular, belong here : Xp-qo-frai tiv'i ti (originating from xpv^ai tivl xP^«.u),to use something for something; irei&eiv (originating from irei&eiv two, ireiaip), eiraipe iv, 67TOT pipe iv, irpo KopeLV, iTrnpoircviLv (to provide with a $ 279.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 399 guardian)] KoAa/ceueiv, 37r€vew (^co7rretv Poet.), 7rpo, '6ri /xot SoKe? raj roov heiav evepyecrlas 0118' av els irore av frpcoirav al-iais x&puriv a/j.ei /3eo~&ai. Her. 6, 138.e\6xv 9, koikws Xiye.iv, ehrelv, aTrayopevew. S. Aj. 1154. frvfrpooire, pr) dpa robs re^vqKSras KaK&s (do nut injure the dead). X. Cy. 1. 6, 29. KaKovpyetv robs .ev6s ye Kal ev \eyeiv rbv ev Keyovra, Kal e5 iroietv rbv ev iroiovvra; rbv fievroi Kal \6ya} Kal epyzo ireipci/xevov efie aviav ovk av 5vvaifir]v ovr ev \eyeiv, ovr e3 iroieTv (know- ing how to speak well of one who speaks well of me, and to do good to one who does well to me ; but I should not be able to speak well of or to do good to one who, etc.) In- stead of the adverbs el and kukus with iroie?v, etc., the Greek uses also the cor- 400 SYNTAX. [ $ 27i?. responding adjectives ; hence ica\a, naica iroieTv, Xeyeiv rivd (to do gooa or evil to one, to say good or evil of one). See § 280. 3. Verbs signifying to persevere, to await, to wait for, and the contrary, e. g. p.kvaiv (like manere), rve.pip,kveiv, Sappexv, Kaprepelv ■ (pevyecv, a.7ro(p€vy€tv, cbroSiopacrKecv, 8pa7reTeveiv. Mt) (pevye rbv Kivdvvov (do not fiee from danger). QappeTre Srdvar ov (fdenti animo expectate mortem). X. An. 3. 2; 20. ras fiev fidxas &ap peire (bravely stand or endure the battles). Cy. 5. 5, 42. et rives ere rificco'iv, avracrird^ov kcl\ evd>x^ avrovs, 'tva ere kcu &ap p-fjffw a iv (that they may confide in you, ut fiducia te complectantur) . 'O oov\os air eo pa rbv o e cr it 6 r t\ v (ran away from his master). PI. Syrup. 216, b. o pairer eva> oZv avrbv teal (I run away from him, etc.). Dem. I. Phil. 50, 37. ol rwv irpayfidrav Kaipol ov fievovo t r)]v 7} fieri - oav fipadvrrjra (do not wait for your sloihfulness). Rem. 3. After the analogy of c/> e v y e i v, other verbs also, which contain the idea of fleeing, e. g. those signifying to turn back from, to retreat from, to abhor, are constructed with the Ace, though but seldom, e.g. v it o % a p e 7 v rbv ox^-ov (to retire from the crowd) ; 4 k err r\ vai Kivdvvov (to shrink from, shun fear) ; eKrpeireo'^ai, vTreKrpeTrecr&ai, vire£ epxedd-ai, airo&Tpe'pecr&ai. Qap pe7v nvi signifies to have confidence in something (fidere aliqua re). 4. Verbs of concealing and being concealed: XavSavew, Kpxnr- t€lv (celai'e), Kpvirreor$a.L; — also the verbs fpSdvetv (antevertere), Ae Lire iv, £7rtAet7retv (deficere) ; — verbs or particles of sivearing, the person or thing by which one swears being in the Ace. PI. Pp. 365, d. &eovs ovre \av&dveiv, ovre fiidcrao'&ai dvvarou (to escape the notice of be concealed from the gods). KpvTrreiv rivd ri (to conceal any- thing from any one), see § 280. Her. 6, 115. irepieirXwov 1,ovviov fSovXo/xevoi (p&rjvai rovs ""AStt] v aiov s aTritcSfievoi is to acrrv (wishing to anticipate the Athenians). 'E-rriXe lire i fie 6 XP^ V0S > V V^pa (fails me). X. An. 1. 5, 6. rb cr pdrev fia 6 in the sense of to need, are constructed with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing or person, of which or whom one is in need ; this construction, however, belongs only to poetry, c. g. Od. a, 124. fivfrnceai, '6rreo ce XP"h (y ou **B tell of what you are in need). Aesch. Pr. 86. avrhv ydp yap % y fio\ xp"h 7 e T ^ s5 ' fy>X et * X.&ov6s. 5. Many verbs denoting a feeling or an affection of the mind, e. g. x wj (pofiovjAej/ot tttt} o~ ^h ty time, gradually), vvura, r\p.ipav (during the night, day). Her. 6, 127. i) ~2v/3apis y^Kpa^e rovrov rbv XP 0V0V P-dKiffra (was flourishing 34* 402 syntax. [$ 279 during mis time). X. An. 4. 5, 24. KaraXaufidvei t^jv hvyarepa tov Kcc/xdpxov ivva.T7]v 7]jjl4 pav yeyaixrmevnv (who had been married nine days). Cy. 6. 3, 1 1. Kal x& es 8e Kal Tp'nr\v rj/xepav rb avrb tovto eirparrov. Dem. Phil. 3. 116, 23 Xaxvcrav Se ti Kal ©7jj8a?oi robs reXevraiovs tovtovot! xp^vov s fx.era t)]v ii> AevKrpois /xcixw [during these last times). Her. 1, 31. aradtovs irevre Kal r ever epaKovra SiaKo/xiaavTzs airiKovro is rb lp6v (having passed over forty-Jive siades). 6, 119. cbrexeiz/ SeKa kcu 5 ir\ Koaiov s — ^ tc *> through, e. g. 5ia Scauara fiaiveiv, 5ia vi)K.ra ; — fiera. ravra, postea ; — irpbs eairepav, towards evening. Rem. 8. Prom this use of the Ace. to denote space, time, and quantity, very many adverbial expressions have originated: (a) tt\v rax^rr\v (6S6v), celerrime ; rrjv irpdor^v, primum ; t V ewd-eTai/, recte, straightforward ; fiaKpdv, far ; aXXt]v Kal aXXrjv, sometimes here, sometimes there, etc. II. i//, 116. rroXXa 8 a v au- ra, Karavra, irdpavrd re, 86xu l °t- r ijXfrov (they passed over many up hills, down hills, straight and cross ways ; — (b) o-fjuepov, to-day ; avpiov, to-morrow ; apxv^j tV apxw, properly, at first, omnino ; reXos, rb reXevTaiov, finally ; veov, lately ; irpSrepov, TrpcoTou, rb Trpcorov, rb irpiv, rb avr'iKa, rauvv, rb iraXai, rb iraXaiov, rb Xonr6v, etc.; — (c) TroXXa, saepe; to. iroXXa, plerumque ; iroXv, /J.eya, fieyaXa, fxe- yiaTa, bxiyov, jxiKpov, uiKpd, «ru%i/a, uaKpd, Xcrov, roaovTO, iravra, etc. So also urJKOs, irXrj&os. 7. Finally the Ace. is used with intransitive or passive verbs and intransitive adjectives of eveiy kind, to explain and define their meaning more fully. Here, also, the Ace. represents the object as acted upon or suffering, since it denotes the object to which the intransitive action of the verb or adjective, refers or is directed. This Ace. is used most frequently in specifica- tions relating to the body and the mind. This is called the Ace. of more definite limitation, sometimes the Ace. of synecdoche. 9 280.] DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 403 Her. 2, 111. Ka/xveiv robs 6fj.-nv e/j.rjv. Her. 6, 83. KXeavSpos yevos ecbv QiyaXevs air* 'Ap- KaSi-ns (being a Phigalian by birth). 7, 109. Xifj.vn eovcra rvyxdvei wsel rpirjKovra crraSioji/ r-ijv -jrepiodov (in circumference). X. An. 2. 5, 1. fxerd ravra axovv vfias. Especially with verbs of naming, after the analogy of ovo/xa bvop.d(eiv rivd: X. 0. 7, 3. koAoS- ffi p.e rovro rb ovo/xa (they called me this name, by this name). PL Pp. 471, d. avaKa Xovvres ravra ra. ov6p.ara eavrovs. Remark 1 . Instead of the substantive denoting the thing effected, the Ace. of a pronoun is frequently used. X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. raXXa p.ip.ovp.evos rbv 'S.aKav. An. 5. 7, 6. rovro v/uas e|a7raTfj wcpeXetv, fSXairr eiv, adiKe7v riva. 2. Expressions of saying or doing good ox evil (which generally contain an Ace, or its equivalent in an adverb, of the thing said or done), take the object to which the good or evil is done, in the Ace, e. g. ayaSd, KaXd, KaKa 7rotetv, irpdrTeiv, epya£c- (r^ai, Aeyetv, et7retv, etc. tlvol (to do good, etc., to some one). X. O. 5, 12. 7) yrj robs dpiara & e pair e v o vr as avrrjv nXetar a aya&a avr in out (returns the greatest advantages to those who cultivate it best). Her. 8, 61. t6t€ Sri 6 ®e[MO-roK\eris Ketvov re Kal robs Kopiv&iovs TroXXd re Kal KaKa eXeye (said much evil of him and the Corinthians). X. Cy. 3. 2, 15. ovdeTTdoiroTe inavovro iroXXd KaKa 7) p. as ir 1 v v r e s (never ceased to do much injury to us). Rem. 2. Instead of the Ace. of the object acted upon or suffering, the Dat. '13 sometimes used, which is considered as the Dat. of advantage or disadvan- tage (Dativus commodi or incommodi). Dem. Aphob. 855, 37. ri c 1 iroir)crwo-ip ol jxdprvpes ; (quid tui tibi prosint testes?) X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. irpoo-Koirei, ri a 01 ■Koi-naovoiv ol apx^vevoi (consider what your subjects will do for you) ; on the con- trary with ae (what they will do TO you). An. 4. 2, 23. ndvra iiroi-naav ro7s inro&avovo~iv (showed all honors to the dead). Cy. 7. 2, 27. r)v ravrd p. 01 iroiijo-ns a Xeyeis (if you -perform for me what you promise). So also in the sense of, to do something with some one, as PL Charm. 157, c. ovk av exotp-ev, 6 ri noidl- $ 280. j DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 405 fiev a- 01. But the Dat. often depends upon the adjective, e. g. Dem. Cor. 243, 55. SiareXe? irpdrrcev Kal Xeyav ra f3eXr icrra rep Sr]fia< (continue to do and say what is best for the people). 3. With verbs : (a) of entreating, beseeching, desiring, inquir- ing, asking : alretv, airavreLV, TrpdrreLV (to demand), elsTrparreiv, TrpaTTCcrSai ; ipwrav, ipiarSai, e^era^etv, laropeTv, avurropeiv ; — (b) of teaching and reminding : SiSacnceiv, TraiSeueiv, avauipivr)(rK€Lv, vtto- fALpLvrjo-Kew (with both of these the Gen. of the thing is more usual) ; — (c) of dividing and cutting into parts : SaUarScu, Sicu- puv, Tip.v€w, Siave/yieiv, Karave/xctv ; — (d) of depriving and taking aivay : (rrepeiv, arrocrrepeiv ; crrepLcrKeiv, avXav, arpaipeicrSaL ; — ( e) of concealing or hiding from: Kpxnrrew (kcvSclv Poet.) ; — (f) of put- ting on and off, clothing and unclothing, surrounding ivith : iv- 8vclv, e/ v/ias Kal robs KivSvvov s(2 will remind you of the dangers). Hier. 1, 3. vire fivno~ds fie ra iv t<£ ISiwtik^ yStw. Her. 7, 121. rpe?s fioipas 6 Eep|7js Sao~dfievos iravra rbv ire^bv o~r pa- r6v (having divided all the land army into three divisions ). T e fiveiv, 5 la ipelv r i fie pr\, fioipas (to cut, to divide something into parts). X. Cy. 7. 5,13. 6 Kvp<>$ r b ar par evfia Kar eveifie ScoSe/ca fieprj (divided the army into twelve parts). PL Polit. 283, d. 8 teXwfiev avrrjv (rrjv fier prjr iktjv) Svo fiepr). X. Cy. 4. 6,4. rbv fi6vov fioi Kal (ptXov 7rcu5a acpelXero r\\v y\ivx"hv (deprived my only child of life). Eur. Hec. 285. rbv irdvra 8' oXfiov r)fiap ev fi axvf jia (I conceal the misfortune from you). Eur. Hipp. 912. ov fi^v v irdvruv 5ie?\ev (he divided ah the Lydians into two parts), Her. 1, 94; passively. 5c65e/ca Uepcrcov cpvXal diyp-nvrai (the Persians are divided into twelve tribes), X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Verbs of depriving and taking away, have the following constructions : (a) air o(Tt e petv and d, aiirovs 8e rrjs ucpeKeias, X. Ven. 6, 4. (d) av) Dem. Cor. 232, 22. E? ri fiovXovrai eirirno'eveiv KaXwv, ovSevbs air ocrr epe'i (to, Kvvnyetria), X. Ven. 12, 8. "Ostis, fir] aWcav eavrbv diro o~t e pa>v, dcrcpaXeias 8e7rai (properly, aliis se subducens, i. e. ab aliis desciscens ; eavrbv is here to be considered as the Ace. of the thing), Th. 1, 40. Rem. 4. On the double Accusative with the verbs -n-el&eiv, eirorpvveiv, eirai- peiv, TzpoKaXelabai, dvayicd^eiv, see § 278, 4. 4. Aii Accusative of the object acted upon, and an Accusa- tive of the predicate (which is often an adjective), is used with the verbs mentioned under § 240, 2, when they are changed from the passive to the active ; hence two Accusatives stand with verbs signifying to make, to constitute, e. g. 7roteti/, nSevou, reddere; to choose, to appoint, e. g. aipeicrSai, creare, etc.; to consider, represent, and regard as something, to declare, to knoiv, e. g. vo/xc- £civ, ^yeio-.^at, etc. ; to say, to name, to praise, to chide, e. g. Aeyctv, oVo/Aa£eiv, koXCiv ; to give, to take, to receive, e. g. -n-apaXa/Selv Si- \€ tlv\ t'})v (pvXaKi)v). 5, 37. ol Koplv&tot TavTa eir e ctt aXfxev oi b.vex&povv {having been commanded these things) ; 1, 140. el ^vyxoopyareTe, nal &XXo ti [xe?- £ov ev&bs eir iTax&V create (you will be commanded something greater). X. An. 2. 6, 1. ol o-TpaTrjyol air o t jx 77 & evTes toj KecpaXas eTeXevT-naav. § 282. (3) Dative. 1. The Dat. is the Where-case, and hence denotes : (a) in a local relation, the place at or in which the action of the subject occurs; — (b) in a causal relation, the object upon which the action of the subject shows itself or becomes visible — the ob- ject which shares in or is concerned in an action. — This object is : (a) a person, or a thing considered as a person, e. g. fioySw rots 7roAtrats or rfj 7roA.et; (/3) a thing, or an object considered as a thing, e. g. dydXXofxac ttj vlkt}. In this way the Dat. may be treated under three divisions. In the first, the Dat. is regarded as a local object, in the second, as a personal object; in the third, the object is a thing, and is called the Dat. of the thing or instrumental Dat. § 283. A. Local Dative. 1. The Dat., as a local object, designates the place in {by, near, at) which an action occurs. This use of the Dat. is al- most exclusively poetical ; in prose, prepositions are commonly joined with the Dative. II. 1, 663. avTap 'AxiXXevs evSe /xvxv KXtffli\s evirnnTov (slept in the corner of the tent), ?r, 595. 'EXXaSi oWia vaicav (dwelling in houses in Hellas). 0, 210. Kvjxa Tro\v(pXoicrf3oio fra.Xdo'o'rjs atyiaXw fxeydXco fipe/xeTai (roars upon the shore). S. Trach. 171. (ecpri) tt\v iro.Xaib.v (p-nyov avSrjaai rroTe AuSwvi (that the beech tree once uttered an oracle at Dodona). Here belong the Locative forms very common in prose, viz., MapaSoovi, 'EXevalvi, IlvSro?, 'lo-fr/xo?, oIlkol, 'Afrf]vri humi, humum; so, likewise, the adverbs in -rj, e. g. oAA?? those in -a, e. g. 'dva, Karoo, etc. ; those in -o i, e. g, iredoi, humi, humum; ivrav&ji, hue and hie (but of, '6ttoi, ttoI, always denote the direction whither). 3. Most verbs, which take the personal Dat, as the objec* sharing or participating in the action, express the idea of associa- tion and union, e. g. SiSoVai, TtapLyzw, V7ria"xyeia3ai, apiraXfiiv tl tlvl. The following classes of words, therefore, govern the Dative: — (1) Verbs expressing mutual intercourse, associating with, mix- ing with, participation. — Dative of communion, e. g. 6/xtAeti/, txiyvvvai, fxtyvv cr 3 at, kolvovv, KoivovcrSai, Kowoivelv, oV, KaraXXarretv (to reconcile), Si-, KaTaAAarreo-^ai (to reconcile one's self to), £evov- aSac, cnrivSeaSai or aTrovSas iroieio-Sai, TrpdrreLV (agere cum aliqud) ] elrreLV, Xeyetv, StaXiyea^at, ev^ecrSai, KarapacrSai, etc. ; also adjec- tives and adverbs, sometimes even substantives which express $284.] DATIVE CASE. 411 a similar idea, e. g. kolvos, (rvvrpcxpos, e£rjs. X. Cy. 8. 6, 13. rovrwu wv (instead of a.) vvv vp.lv rrapaK eAeuo pat ovdhv rols SovXois ffpojTOTTw [I enjoin upon the slaves none of these things which I now command you). Her. 3, 88. 'Apdfiioi ovSapa Karri Kovffav iirl dovXoavvr) Yl4po-rio-i [never obeyed, were never subject to the Persians). 6,14. ivavpdx*oi> ivr]KOV(rTr)0iV0<5, (TVV(0$6 ia&rjTa (Tldv&eia). 7. 5. 65. 6 ai$T]pos aviaot tovs aa&eveis ro?s lo*x v ~ po?s iv t$ TToXefjLw (makes the weak equal to the strong). Isocr. Paneg. 43, 13 XaXtTrov icrnv tcrovs tovs Xoyovs tcS fj.ey4&<~i twv epywu i^evpuv. Th. 1, 49. 7] vavjxaxio. ir e £o /x ax^y t p o cr

x 6/xoicas Tre-rroi-hKao-i Kal "Ofxrjpos. Comp. similis ac, atque. There also occur, particularly in Attic prose, the particles of comparison, &s, cisirep with Xaos, 6 o.vt6s. Dem. Phil. 3. 119, 33. tov clvtov Tp6wou, cosirep, k. r. X. (5) Expressions signifying to be becoming, suitable, fitting, to please, and the contrary, e. g. Trp4rcs.iv, ap/xoTTetv, 7rpos^/ceiv (with an Inf. following), 7rpe7r6Vr(os, d7rpe7TGJS, etKos 1eo-^ai (to reproach, $ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 413 fjLe/jL Kvpq> Kal to?s M-ndois r§ KaraXnr6vras avT0v ipT\\iov o^x^^ al ( was wroth with Cyrus, etc.). (7) Verbs of helping, averting, and being useful, e. g. aprjyeLv, dfJivv€LV, aXi^uv, riftcopeii/, /Sor/SeLV, lirLKOvpelv, aTroXoyeloSaL, Xvip€LV (conducere), crvpvirpdTTtLV, crvvcpyeLV, etc., and many adjectives of the same and similar significations, and the contrary, e. g. xprjo-Lfxos, fiXafSepos (but fiXa-mew with Ace. $ 279, 1.), (pi'Xos, expo's, 7roX£pLLos, etc. X. R. L. 4, 5. aprjl-ovai ry iroXei iravTl a&evei [they assist the city with all their strength). Cy. 3. 3, 67. (ai ywcuices) iKeTevovffi trdvTas p.r) (pevyeiv KaTa\nr6v Tas, aA.\' ap-vvai Kal avTals, Kal r 4kvo is, Kal crcpicriv avTots (to de- fend them, their children and themselves). 4.3,2. tovtois yap (pacriv audyKTjv efoai irpo^vp.ws a\4£eiv (they say it is necessary to defend these). Eur. Or. 922. COpecrTris) ri&4\riff€ t ificape7v irarpl, KaK7}i> yvvaiKa Ka&eov KaTaKTavdov (wished to help his father). PI. Ap. £8, c. et t i/xu pr]cr e is H aTpoKXco t$ €Taipc{) tov i\v [xeydx-n fiaaiXeia, Cyrus had (among other things also) a great kingdom ; the Gen. is used, when it is asked who the possessor is (whose is this ?.), and the possessor is contrasted with other possessors, e. g. K vp ov l\v /xeydx-r) ficxriXeia, to Cyrus (and not to another) belonged a great kingdom. The Dative describes the person as one to whom the possession has been imparted, divided, given, and under whose con- trol it now is ; the Genitive, as one who has gained possession, from whom the possession has proceeded. (10) The Dat. is used universally when an action takes place in reference to a person, or a thing considered as a person, so that the person in some way shares or participates in it. Here be- long the following instances : — (a) In certain formulas, the Dative designates the person to whose judgment consideration, or estimate, an idea is referred, and thus it first gains a definite authority or value ; i. e. the assertion is made in view of the judgment, etc. of the person to whom the matter had been submitted. This Dat. therefore shows when and under what circumstances the assertion is true, e. g. Her. 1, 14. aA.7j&et 5) § 284.] DATIVE CASE. 41t> Acfyw x/>€co/ief a> ov Kopip&lwp rov Z-nixoaiov £s, in order to show that the thought which is expressed, is not a general one, but has its value only according to the opinion of the person named. X. C. 4. 6, 4. 6 ra ivepl robs &eobs p&fiifia eldccs op&ws ccp 7] fi7 p evcrefitys cvpio'p.epos e'lrj (nos- tro judicio, in our opinion). S. O. C. 20. [xaKpap ydp, cos yepopri, irpovo-rdx-ns 6d6p {you went forward a great way, for an old man, as an old man would view it). Ant. 1161. Kpecop yap r\v ^r\X(ar6s, co s i/xoi, ivore {in my opinion). PL Soph. 226, C. raxeTcw, cos ifiol, anetyip eirndTTeis. Her. 3, 88. yd/xovs robs Trpcbrovs eyd/xee Uepo-rjcri 6 Aapelbs {matrimonia ex Persarum judicio nobilissima, con- tracted very honorable marriages, in the judgment of the Persians). Altogether usual in the phrase &£i6s el/xi tiv6 s r iv., or even without the Gen., a £ i 6 s el [ii t ipi {I am of value in the estimation of some one). X. C. 1. 2, 62. 4/j.ol fxep 877 ~XwKpaTr]s toiovtos &>u eSdicei Tt/xrjs ct £ 1 s elpcu rrj tr 6 A e 1 fiaXXop, 7) frapdrov (rather merits honor than death, in the estimation, in the view of the city). PL Symp. 185, b. outos eo~rip 6 rr,s Ovpapias &eov epcos Kcd ovpdpios nai ttoXXov &£ios na\ tv 6 X e t Kai Id id) rot. is. (c) Here belongs the use of the Dat. of a person with /3ouAo/xeVco, ^So^eVco, aa/xepco, iXTTofxiuw, d%^a,uei/a>, TrposSexo^euw and the like, in connection with verbs, most frequently with elpai and yiypec^ai. Such a participle gives definiteness to an otherwise indefinite assertion. El ravrd , olfxai aoi eKeiuovs robs aya&ob* ra irefrna padicas viK'fjcreiu (to gratift YOU, / think I shall easily surpass those skilled in foot exercises). (11) The Dative often stands with the Perf. Pass, (rarely wi1h other tenses of the Pass.), to denote the active person or agent. The Pass., in this case, expresses a state or condition, mid the Dat. represents the author of this condition at the same time as the person for whom this condition exists, while by v-xo with the Gen., the author merely is expressed. Her 6, 123. %s [xoi irporepou S eS-f}\ufr at (as has been before shown by me). Dem. Aphob. 844, 1. Se? 8177777 (raa&ai. ra, tovtco it eir pay fxev a irepl rj/xaiu (it is necessary to describe what has been done by him). 01. 1. 26, 27. ri tt 4-irpaKT at to?s &\\o is : (what has been done by others ?). In this way a Perf. Act., which is wanting, may be supplied, e. g. ravrd fxoi AeAe/crat (I have said this). (12) So also the active person or agent stands regularly in the Dative with verbal adjectives in -tos and -rios, [§234, 1, (i)], both when they are used, like the Latin verbal in -dum, im- personally in the Neut. Sing. : -tov, -t£ov, or PL -rd, -ria ($ 241, 3.), or when they are used personally, like the Latin participle in -dus ; those d3rived from transitive verbs, i. e. such as govern the Ace, admit both the Impers. and the Pers. construction ; but those dem 3d from intransitive verbs, admit only the im- personal. The impersonal verbal Adj., in addition to the Dat. of the agent, governs the same Case as the verb from which it is derived. Tb poavvr\v d iojkt 4 ov k6f3io a.7rr)\.9-ov } . evvota, aSiKta, o7?o), v(3p€t 7roietv tl ; especially with verbs denoting the state of the feelings, e. g. ^aipetv, ^Secr^ai, aydWeoSai, hvaipsar- $ai } \v7T€icr$aL, aviacrSai, aAyetv, Ik-, Ka.ra7rA-^TTeo"<$ai ; $avjxa£uv \ IXttl^lv ; crrepyew and dya7rav, ap£vV ' a t v (are especially pleased with the honors from the most devout). Her. 478. 8 i a i - t?7 ovSa/xws 7) pe(TK€To ^tcv&iicfi (was by no means pleased with the Scythian mode of life). Th. 4, 85. &av/j.d£ r rj airoK\ei(rei fiov tuv irv\uv (I am surprised at the shutting of the gates against me). 3, 97. i\irt£eiv rrj tvx?) (to hope in fortune), ^r4pyco ro7s nap ova iv (I am content with the present things). 'Ayairw ro7s virdpxovcr iv aya&o7s. XaAeirw s (j>4ow ro7s ■n-apovai irpdy fiaff i (I am troubled by the present state of affairs), X. An. 1.3,3. Alaxvyo/xai to7s ireir pay (*4vo i s (lam ashamed o?i account of what has been done), C 2. 1,31. PI. Hipp. maj. 285. e. cIk6tws aoi x a ^ ouvcr lv °' 1 AaKeSaifi6uioi, are iroWa ei56ri. 'Ay aWo/xai rfj vlicy. TIoWol ayavanTovtri t<£ Sa- vdra. A vsx^patuca ro7s \6yois. Dem. 01. 3. 13, 14. ayair-fi aas rois Treirpayfj.ej/oiS7iS (p4p(0 Tl. 418 SYNTAX. [j 285 (2) The means and instrument, by which an action is accom- plished. Hence the Dat. also stands with xPV a ^ aL (uti) and its compounds, and with vofilfceiv (to be accustomed to). V>dXXeiu Xi&ois (to throw with stones = to throw stones). 'Akovt'i&iv alxH-a7s (to hurl with spears = to hurl specws). X. Cy. 4. 3, 21. 6 fxev liriroicipTavpos hvotv b trdvTa rfj av&poiTT ivy yvc&fir], ra7s Se -fcepaXv dirXocpoprjaa}, Bica^ofxai Se tw %ir- 7rw, tov S J evavriov avarpe^a rfj rov 'iitttov pwpLy. X. C. 4. 2, 9. at tS>v afybS* avBpwv yvapai apery irXovri^ovcn robs KeKTrj/xeyovs (enrich with virtue those who possess them). Her. 3, 117. ovroi 3>v, o'lirep efnrpoa^eu ew&etrav Xpav&ai t<£ vSari, ovk ex 0UTes avr^ xP" (r ^ al ) av/xepopi) fxeyaXri Si- aXpf'wi'Tai (those who before were accustomed to use the water, not being able to use it, experienced a great inconvenience). Dem. Cor. 277, 150. tcevfj irpocpdffe i r avTy naTaxpu. But Karaxpy && ai and SiaxRV^^ai in the sense of consumere, to kill, as transitive, govern the Ace. Comp. Her. 6, 135 ; Antiph. 1. 113, 23. With xpy ff & al a second Dat. often stands, by means of attraction, or els with the Ace. or the Ace. of a pronoun or neuter adjective (§ 278, 4), to express the design or purpose, e. g. x/jw^cu povpia Kal els Xoxaytas (will employ you as the most faithful both for guards and commanders). Her. 4, 117. pyo~av rep o~t pary eK rr\s TlvXov-. X. Cy. 1. 4, 17. abros ro7s 'tirirois irposeXdaas Trpbs ra rwu MtjSojj/ (ppovpia Kare- p.eivev (having rode up with the cavalry). An. 7. 6, 29. frappaXews r\\x7v icpeiTovTo ol TroXefj.ioL Kal 'nririKaJ Kal it eXr a err ik $. (3) The following relations also may be considered as the means, and are expressed by the Dat. : (a) the material of which (= with which) anything is made ; — (b) the rule or standard, according to which anything is measured, judged of, or done; hence the Dat. stands particularly with verbs of measuring, judging, inferring, e. g. aTaS/xaa-^at, yiyvoivKuv, eiKa- $ 285.] DATIVE CASE. 419 £,eiv, Kpiveiv, TeK/xaipecr^at ; also in general, to express a more def nite limitation, to denote in what respect a word is to be taken ; thus, for example, with verbs signifying to be distinguished, to excel, to be strong and powerful, and the contrary ; also with very many adjectives (instead of the Ace. of more definite limita- tion, § 279,7); — (c) the measure, by, according to which an action is defined or limited, especially with comparatives and superlatives, as well as with other expressions, which include the idea of comparison, in order to denote the degree of difference between the objects compared; — finally, (d) the way and manner in which anything is done (Hoiu ?). Her. 3, 57. 77 ayoprj kcu to Trpvravri'iov Tlapico Xt&w rjcrK-n/j-eua ( r qu) {were decora- ted with Parian marble). On the Gen. of the material, see § 273, 5. Her. 2, 2. t oiqvt

nai, ravTa Keyeisj (judging by what rule, do you say this?). 3. 3, 19. at fidxai tcpivovrai jxaXXov ra7s ^u %<**$> ^ Tc " s t&v Gwixdrwv pa>p.ais (are decided more by courage, than strength of body). H. 7. 3, 6. ovroi irdvras avSpwirovs vir ep j8e /8A77 nacr 1 toX/at; re ko.1 pnapia (have surpassed all men in daring and brutality). C. 2. 7, 7. tVxuei;/ ro?s (rwfia (to fine one [with] a thousand drachmas, etc.), and the like. Her. 6, 136. 6 $f)/j.os e£v- fiiucre (rbv MiXridSea) Kara rrju adudrjv it eurrjKO vr a r aXdvr ta 1 [Jined him, fifty talents). Th. 4, 73. t (5 fieXrlarai rod ottXitikov fiXacp&rii'ai (jactu- ram facere, to suffer defeat by [the loss of] the best portion of the heavy armed force). II. 7, 2. Tpwes ixkv KXayyfj r ivoirrj t Xcrav, opv&es &s (advanced with a noise and a cry). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. (ol v6p.oi) irpocrrdrrovffi p.7] /3 i a els oiKiav irapievai (forbid to enter a house by force). So Sfopvfiw, upavyfj, fiofj 0-1777 iroieiv ri (to do something with a noise, etc.) ; Sikv, eirt/xeXeia, drj/xoaia (sc. 68:2), iSia (6S<£), ir4£r) (6d£), kolvv (&><£), in common, t<5 r poire? TotySe : Kop.i5rj, properly with care, hence, entirely. 420 SYNTAX. ["$ 286 quite ; (nrovSr), with pains, aegre, scarcely, hardly ; &Wrj, ravr-p, Sixfj, duplici modo eiKy, frustra. Comp. § 101, 2, (b). 9 286. II. Substantive Object with Prepositions, or the Construction of Prepositions. 1. As the Cases denote the local relations whence, whith- er, where, and the causal relations, which were originally considered as local relations, so the prepositions express another local relation, viz., the extension or position of things in space, — the juxtaposition of things (by the side of, over, around, with), or the local opposites above and below, within and without, before and behind. Prepositions therefore denote the relative position of the things described by the substantives which they connect ; and the relation expressed by them may be called the relation of position. 2. The Cases connected with the prepositions, show in which of the local relations, whence, whither, where, the preposition is to be understood. Remark 1. Thus, for example, the preposition irapa denotes merely the local relation of near, by the side of, by ; but in connection with the Gen., e. g. fjh& e ira p a r ov /3acri\ev KvXivdov/jLevwv ; (be- hind which, since the trees stood before the soldiers), X. An. 4. 7, 6. (2) (a) 'Avrl iraiSav rwvde . . . iKerevo/xev, sc. ere (for the sake of as it were standing before), S. 0. C. 1326. (b) (Avuovpyos Kareipydcraro) iv rfj iroXei alperc&r epov flvai tov KaXbv ShLvoltov avrl alaxpov fiiov (is better than, is preferable to a disgraceful life), X R,. L. 9, 1. Tr)v reXevry]v avrl rrjs tuv CAvtwv ffur-npias iiXXa^avro (exchanged death for the safety of the living), PI. Menex. 237, a. Tlarrip vtbv avrl irdvrwv ru>v dXXcov XP 7 ) l^dr uv Trpori/xa. So a!pe?cr&ai ri avri tivos, instead of the common tlv6s. Ttjv eXevSepiav eXoi/xrjv av avrl dou %x v, Th. 3, 51. (2) Up b r) jx ep as airriX- Sov. (3) Ila^Tes a£id>crovcri ere irpb avrwv flovXeveafrai (desire you to consult for them), X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. Mdxecr&ai, airoSaveTv irpb rrjs irar pido s, SiaKivSu- veveiv it jb fiaeriXews (for, in behalf of one's country), X. Cy. 8. 8, 4. Ai/caio- repov *>p.r}v Kal ndXXiov elvai t pb rod (pevyeiv re Kal air oS iS pder Ke iv vire- X^iv rfj irSXei Mkt)v 'i)vriv av rar~r) (1 thought it more just inpreference to fleeing, etc.). PI. Phaed. 99, a. Upb ttoXXov Troir)cracr&ai ri (to esteem before or above much, i.e. very highly ). Upb iroXXwv XPV p-drwv rijxr\cracrSai ri ( to value before much wealth). (Tovrov) irpb irdvrccv xPVI^-dr cav Kal ir 6 v uv irpiai^v av (piXov uoi elvai, X. C. 2. 5, 3. Tlpb rovrov rehvdvai av /xaXXov eXoiro (for him), PI. Symp. 179, a. 'EiraweTv tt pb 8 iKaioervv t] s aSuclav (to praise injustice before, 'ather than, in preference to justice), Pp. 361, e. Remark. The reason that the prepositions avri and wp6 are not con- nected with the Dat, like prepositions of the same meaning in other languages. $288.] prepositions. — 'A-rro, iK. 423 but with the genitive, is owing to the fact, that the Greek language regards the relation denoted, by before, in front of not merely as local, but implying action, a relation of dependence. The like holds of the prepositions virep, irp6s, Sid, a/xcpl, ire pi, iirl, vtto with the Gen., since the Gen. represents the place as the cause or occasion of the action, and hence likewise, a relation of dependence. See § 273, 4. § 288. (2) \A.7ro, from, and i£, e/c, out of. Preliminary Remark. These two prepositions denote an outgoing, a re- moval, departure, but air 6 denotes a removal from the exterior of an object, while e/c (<= |), always implies a going out from within a place or object ; and in the causal relation, the former denotes a remoter cause, the latter, one more direct. 1. 'A7ro (ah), from, denotes: (1) in a local relation: (a) re- moval from a place or object with verbs of motion, also of free- ing, and the like, e. g. \v€iv, iXevSepovv, also of missing (§ 271, 2), hence, cbro o-kottov ; then it is transferred to mental failures, as in air eA7rioW, airb yvw/jLrjs, aliter ac sperabam, putabam (as if aberrans ab exspectatione, ab opinione) ; (b) distance from a place or object with verbs of rest; — (2) of time, going out from a point of time : from, after ; — (3) causal or figurative : (a) of origin, as with eXvai, yiyvtaScu ; (b) of the whole in rela- tion to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it ; (c) of the author with Pass, verbs instead of vtto ($ 251, Eem. 4), but al- ways with the accompanying idea of on the part of; (d) of the occasion or cause; (e) of the material; (f) of the means and instrument; (g) of conformity. (1) (a) 'Airb rrjs ir6\.}0)S air4v KaraXs i (metu ab hostibus, fear of , from the enemy), X. Cy. 3. 3, 53. 'A(p' kavrov (from his own impulse), (e) TpeQeiv rb vavTinbv airb ir posoSwv (by revenues), Th. 1, 81. (f) ""Airb rwv vfarepwt vixiv iroXefiei ($l\tiriros) av/ifidx^^ (sociorum vestrorum ope), Dem. Ph. 1.49.. 424 SYNTAX. [$ 288 34 ; hence many adverbial phrases, e. g. curb arofxaros, airb yhdirr-ns dirsiv (by heart, by word of mouth) ; airb a-irovZris (zealously), (g) \A.7r' OvAt uttov ovpe- os KaXeovrai Ovkvixirtr)voi (are called from, derive their name from mount Olympus), Her. 7, 74. 'Airb ^vfxfxaxias avr6uo(xoi (by virtue of), Th. 7, 57. 2. 'E£ Ik (ex), out of (opposite of iv, in), denotes (1) in a local relation: (a) removal either from within a place or object, or from immediate participation or connection with a place or object, with verbs of motion; hence an immediate succession of one object after another; (b) distance with verbs of rest: without, beyond (Epic), e. g. Ik /2eAeW, extra telorum j actum ; — (2) of time, immediate outgoing from a point of time; then especially the immediate development of one thing from anoth- er, an immediate succession of two actions ; — (3) in a causal and figurative sense : (a) of origin; (b) of the whole in relation to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it, often with the accompanying idea of choice and distinction; (c) of the author with passive or intransitive verbs, instead of vtto, almost ex- clusively Ionic, used particularly by Herodotus, seldom in Attic prose; (d) to denote the occasion or cause; (e) of the material, (f ) of the means and instrument ; (g) of conformity : according to, in consequence of, by virtue of, after. (1) 'E/c rrjs ir6\ea>s airyjA&ov, e'/c ryjs /xdxvs ev\ e/c irai- 8 ay (from very childhood) ; e £ vffr e p ov (subsequently) ; e/c rov Aonrou. Her. 9, 8. e'| Tj/xeprts is rjfxeprjv avafiaWo/xevoi (ex die in diem, delaying from day to day, day after day). 1,87. e/c 8e al&plys re Ka\ v-qvefxi-qs aweSpa- fxeu i^airlvns ve e - £• e W> , iv <5airi, iv , ip bpyfj etveu. PI. Crito. 43, c. Kal 'd\\oi iv roiavrais £v[j.(popu7s aXia- Kovrai (are taken in, involved in such calamities). Phileb. 45, c. iv toiovtoh i/ o a -f) /j. a (T iv ixo^evoi. Gorg. 523, b. iv Ttdar\ evdai/xovia olKelv (to live in the enjoyment of all prosperity). Her. 2, 82. ol iv iroir)aei yevopevoi (those who have been in poetry = poets). Th. 3, 38. ol iv -repay paai (those engaged in state affairs = the ministers). X. Cy. 4. 3, 23. ol fiev 5t) iv tovtois to?s \6- yois r\aav (were engaged in these discourses). PL Phaed. 59, a. iv (piXoao(pia elvai. Ol iv yeapyiais) iv t4% v V ^' /al - Hence various adverbial ex- pressions have originated, e. g. i v 'ia a> elvai (to be equal) ; iv ydovfj fioi ianv (it is pleasing to me)) so also with ex eiv and iroieiaSrai, e.g.iv o/xola), iv iXacp p tovtco t<$ %povw)iv § (while, during); iv irevre ripe pa is (during, in the space of). — (3) 'Opav, opaa&ai, iv 6(p&a\fio?s, Poet, (to see, be seen with the eyes) ; then in other connections among the poets, iv irvpl Kaieiv, iv oea/j.$ orjaai, iv xepct XafieTv, Horn, (to burn with fire, etc.). In prose, especially in Xenophon, iv is used to denote the means, in the expressions orjXovv, d?jXov elvai, arm-aiveiv ev rivi. X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. otl /xev, Zi 7tcu, ol &eoi ae "keep re Kal ebfieveTs ireuirovai, Kal iv lepols St? - \ov Kal iv ovpavlo is arjfxeiois (is evident both by the sacrifices and the signs from heaven). 8. 7, 3. ia-n fj.r)v ar e fioi Kal iv iepo?s Kal iv ovpavlois o-rifxeiois Kal iv ol Kvpe, d/xeivov elvai, avv t cp aw aya&w ras ri/j. (pl\oi, ovk av Sr] tls ay* bptro&vpriv avafialr) (up to the lofty gate). This use is rare and only poetic ; in prose only in the phrases ava rby Trora/xoy, ava p6ov irXsiv, up the stream (the opposite of nark, iroraixov, down the stream); (b) II. y, 547. ((p\ety) ava vara &4ova ivaffav yrjv teal SrdXarT av elpijvn iarrai. Hier. 7, 9. ava arSfia ex 6a/ ( to nave continually in the mouth). (2) Her. 8, 123. ava rbv iroXefMOv tovtov (throughout). So ava iraarav r^\v 7] [i 4 pav, per totum diem (the substantive must here have the article; without the article ava iracrav rj/xepav, signifies daily, day by day, ava irav eros, every year, yearly, see No. (3) and § 246, 6), ava vvktu- (per noctem, ell night through). 7, 10. ava. x?& vov Hevpoi tis dv (in the time). (3) 'Ava. Kpdros (with all one's might) ; ava fxepos (by turns) ; dvd irav 4ros (quotannis). X. An. 4, 6, 4. "EWtjvgs iiropv&ritTav eirra arTa&fxovs ava Tr4vre it apaa dyy as tt)s r]/j.4pas (five parasangs daily). Remark 1. In the Epic and Lyric languages, ava is constructed with the Dat. also ; instead of it iv is elsewhere used, e. g. ava p.a>, Fapydpa &Kpa) in Homer. So eu'Set 8' az/a aKaimo Aibs alerts, Pind. 2. Ets (es Ionic, Doric, and old Attic) is only a modified form of iv, and denotes the same relations of position as are ex- 428 syntax. [$ 290. pressed by iv, but always in the direction ivhither; hence it is used of motion into t/ie interior of an object, up to, into the im- mediate presence of; in general to denote the reaching a definite limit. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote a local limit; (b) a limit in quantity : about, up to; (c) extension; (d) in the sense of before, in the presence of coram, but with the idea of the di- rection ivhither ; — (2) of time, to denote a temporal limit: till. towards; (3) in a causal sense : (a) of a mental aim, object or purpose ; (b) of the manner ; with numerals either in the sense of about or in a distributive sense ; (c) in general to express a reference to something : in respect to. (1) (a) 'IeVat els r-)]v ttoXiv; so also of persons with the accompanying- idea of their habitation or country. PI. Apol. 17, c. els v/xas elsievcu, i. e. els rb ZiKa.vs (went into the country of the Taochoi). Among the Attic writers, also in a hostile sense: contra, in. Th. 3, 1. eaTpdrevaav es Tr\v 'At t ik4)v (into, against At- tica). With the verbs avXXeyetv, crwtxyeipeiv, a.xi£eiv and the like, the Greeks use els, where we say, to assemble at or in a place. Comp. § 300, 3. (b). Th. 2, 13, twv TleXoirovvnffitov ^vXXeyo/x4uo>i/ re es rbv 'Icr&/j.bv Kal ev 6d$ ovrwv. Comp. 4, 91. 8, 93. So the Latins say: congregari, convenire, etc., in urbem. (b) Th. 1,74. vav s es ras rerpaKofflas. (c)'E/c &aXa(rcr7)s els &aXa 36. H]kovtos as r)]v MiXrirov (ad Milesios). Rem. 2. This as is to be distinguished from that which stands with els, eirt t and irp6s with the Ace. (as els, as eVt, as irp6s riva). This latter as is not a preposition, but it expresses a supposition, just as when it is joined with the par- ticiple, and does not denote an actual direction to a place, but only one sup- posed, and hence intended. X. An. 1. 2, 1. afrpol(ei us iirl tovtovs rb (rrpdrevfia (quasi his helium illaturus, he collects as if against these). Hence this us also stands with the prepositions governing other Cases, e. g. Th. 3, 4. ^KirXovv iiroi^cravro rav veav cos en I vavfiaxiq {as if for the purpose of fight' tng a naval battle). 1, 134. ol Se ironjerdfxevot x a ^ K0 ^ s avlpidvras Svo ws avrl Tlavcraviov avedreaav (quasi essent Pausaniae loco, as if in the place of Pau- sanias). 4. Prepositions with the Genitive and Accusa- tive: Bid, Kara, virip, /xerd. $ 291. (1) Aid, through. 1. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (2) to denote a mo- tion extending through a space or object and again coming out : through and out again, out of (Homer expresses this relation still more distinctly, by uniting the preposition e/c or -rrpo with Bid, e. g. Od. p, 460. Sick fxeydpoto ava^wpetv) ; (b) to denote CX- tension through something, but without the accompanying rela- tion stated under (a) of coming out of the object; on the Gen., see § 287, Rem.; — (2) of time, to denote the expiration or lapse of a period: after, properly to the end of a period, through and out; — (3) in a causal sense, to denote origin (rare) and the author (very frequent) ; (b) to denote quality (possessive Gen.) in connection with eivai and ytyveo-$ai ; (c) the means, both of persons and things; (d) manner; (e) worth (rare); (f) com- parison (rare). (1) (a) Her. 7, 8. fieXXa eXav crrparbv Stefc tt\s Evpair-ns iirl rrjv 'EXXafia. 2, 26. 8 Le£eX&av 8ia irda-ns Eu pdirr] s. 7, 105. etfiXavve rbv (xrparbv Si a rrjs ©pri'ticns iirl tV 'EAAaSa. 3, 145. Siaiciipas Sib. rrjs yopyvpr) s (having crept out through the prison), (b) Od. ju, 335. 5m vl\v, 8ta ire- 5/ou (per campum). X. Hier. 2, 8. 8ia TroXefiias iropeveffSca (to march through the enemfs country). Figuratively in the phrases, Sia Sinaio avvns lev at (to go in the way of justice, to go through justice, i. e. to be just) ; 8 ia rod StKatov •xopevecr&ai; 8ta v (every fifth year, etc., quinto quoque anno) : 5 ta. rpirr)s 7]/m4pas. (3) (a) Aia /SatrtAeW Tre/u.eu, ical § aKovo/xev, 3)Ta,tj St' ov aKovo/xey. (The Dat. denotes the means used, did with the Gen. the active means.) "Ex^iv riva St' bpyrjs (to be angry with) ; S la. x ei P<*> v *X eLV { io work upon, to be engaged in, to handle) , also of persons, e. g. "Eirpa^av ravra Si 1 Evpvfidxo v, Th. 2, 2. (d) Aia cnrovSrj s, S ta rdxovs iroieiv ti (with earnestness, earnestly, etc.) . (e) S. O. C. 584. Si ovSevbs iroiela&ai (to consider of no value), (f) Her. 1, 25. &4t]s &£iov Sia. irdvrwv tSiv avaSr-n jxdr oov (in comparison with, among). II. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation to denote extension through a place or object: through, throughout (only poetic) ; — (2) of time to denote extension through a period of time, throughout ; — (3) in a causal sense : (a) to denote the reason, mediation: on account of ob, p ropier, by; (b) of the person by ivhose means something is effected. (1) (a) Eur. Hipp. 762. Sia -k6vtiov Kvjxa i-n-opevaas ifxav foacrcrav (through the wave of the sea). (2) Aia. v vara. (3) X. An. 1. 7, 6. eari fiev 7][x\u 7] apx^] V irarpcpa Trpbs pXv jxea-rnx^piau p.4xpis °^ $ la Kav/xa ov Svvavrai oIkiTiu dvSpuTroi (on account of the heat). 4. 5, 15. Sia ras Toiavras olv avdyK as iivzAe'nrovTo T.ves twv crpariwrwu. (b) An. 7. 7, 7. Si rj/xas avv 3-eoTs ex eTe i"hvS<= ttjv x°* > P av (ty y°u r means, mediation). KaKol SoKov/iev elvai Sia tovtjv (hujus culpd). $292. (2) Kara, from above, doivn. I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (a) of motion from a higher to a lower place (desuper, deorsuni) ; (b) of a direction towards a place or object situated below : dou-n to, down upon, down under (on the Gen., see k 287, Rem.) ; (c) seldom of rest in, iqjon or at a place or object Q 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in a causal and figurative sense, to denote the cause or occasion. $292.] prepositions. — Kai-a. 431 (1) (a) II. a, 44. $?) 8e kclt Ov\v/j.ttoio Kaprjvoov (down from the heights). pier. 8, 53. eppiirreou ecovrobs Kara rov reix^os k6.tu>. (b) Her. 7, 6. a4voi kclt a tovs tc re Ka\ 7}\iov ava- roXas is baXaacrav. (b) Her. 3, 109. al Zx^vai KaTa. iracrav t))V yrjv e«n. Kara yrjv, Kara &aXao~o-av iropeveafrat (through, over, by), (c) Th. 2,30 432 syntax. [§ 293. k€?tcu 7] Ke rivos, despicio aliquem. An Ace. very frequently stands with these, e. g. Kar-nyopeiv ri rivos, to accuse one of something, Karayiyv&o-Kziv ri (as avoiav, kXott^v) rivos, KaraKpiveiv rivbs Srdvarov, Kara^iKa^iv rivbs bdvarov, KaratyT)v KaX fieyaXoov kivSvvcov. (b) Isocr. Archid. 129, 66. robs v6fiovs, fie& a> v olnovvres evhaifiovecraroi rwv 'EXhyvav ^aav {agreeably to which, ruv vofiwv ix^fievoi, legibus quasi adhaerentes). PI. Ap. 32, c. fiera rod v6fiov icai rot fiainaiov ojfirju fiaXXov fie Se7v diaKivfivveveiv, t) fie& vfi&v yeveo~&ai fi)] Zinaia fiovXevofxevuv (in conformity with law and justice). II. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) (Poet.) to de- note a direction or motion into the midst of something, a striv- ing to be united with a person or tiling, in a friendly or hostile relation, and generally to denote a succession in space ; (b) to denote a local extension between two objects, in the prose phrase /xera ^ei/xis c^av n, to have something in hand; — (2) (prose and Poet.) to denote succession in time and in order: after, next to, next in order ; — (3) in a causal sense (only Poet.), to denote purpose and conformity. (1) 'iKecr&cu fie ra. Tpwas kou 'Axaiovs (to come into the midst of the Tr and Gr.). II. p, 460. aiffawv cost cdyviribs ftera xv vas (among the geese). Seldom used of things. II. £, 376. os fie fier airpijKrov s epiSas Kalveiicea fiaXXei (into the midst of contention). Brjvai fiera N e (for, after a chariot). II. o, 52. ru> Ke Yloaeib'dcov ye . . . atya fxeraarptyeie v6ov fiera abv koL ifibv Krjp t (agreeably to, according to, your desire and mine). Remark. MeTa is constructed with the Dat. only in poetry, particularly m the Epic, to denote merely local union or association in place ; in prose, ev and avr are used instead of it. It commonly stands with the plural, or with the singular of collective nouns ; the words with which it stands may denote per- sons, or things considered as such, and the parts or members of animate things, e. g. fier a&avdrois, with, among; fiera arparop ; fiera x € pc' l ,iToa', yevvffi, yafMpi)- Xa?s (in the midst of), between, fiera (ppetriv, in the mind, uera vnvffi, Kvfiaai; fieri wvotrjs aveuoio, Homer. $ 295. 7 prepositions. — 'Afjicf>i } TTcpL 435 5. Prepositions with the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative: d/*,t, 7repi, £ttl, napd, 7rp6t and irepi. 1. The prepositions Sl/x^l and ire/at express nearly the same relations of position: around, about; d/x<£t, on both sides, rrepi, on all sides; they also agree in their use, though the use of aficfii is rarer, and is more Ionic and poetic than irepl, which ex- presses a far greater variety of relations and has a more gen- eral application. 2. 'AfjiffiL denotes in general the surrounding of something (on both sides), the being near and close to something. I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote re- moval from that which surrounds (Poet.) ; (b) to denote dwell- ing or rest around something ($ 287, Rem.), though but seldom; — (2) in a causal sense, to denote the occasion or cause : about, for, on account of, though but seldom in prose, -rrepC with the Gen. being generally used instead of it. II With the Dat. (1) in a local relation (Poet, only), to de- note rest around, at, near, among ; — (2) in a causal sense (very seldom in prose, indeed not at all in Attic prose) : (a) to denote the cause or occasion, as with the Gen., with this difference, however, that with the Dat, the relation of causality is con- sidered as "wholly local; (b) to denote an internal and mentac reason (Poet.). III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation, to denote local extension : about, around, on; — (2) to denote time and number approximately or indefinitely ; — (3) in a causal and figurative sense, to denote a mental dwelling upon an object, taking pains, and being employed about it. 1.(1) (a) Eur. Or. 1460. ajx Savarcf avTTJs Si^bs Xeyercu \6yos. (bj 'A/xcpl (prae melu, for, on account of); afjKpl &vijl$ (prae ira). III. (1) X. Cy. 6. 2, 11. (avXXeyerai) ib (rrpdrevpa afKpl rbv Tlaicr wXbv ttot a p. 6 p. 2. 4, 16. re&rjpaKa b.[X(pl ra '6 pi a (around, on the borders). Hence also of the persons around any one, as in ol a/xcpl riva, see § 263, d. (2) 'Apupl rbv x* l P-& va (about winter): ap. 'lirirov?, &pp.ara. 3. Ilept signifies all round, round, in a circle. I. With the Gen. ( 1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling ot rest around an object. This use of it is confined to poetry, and even here is very rare ; comp. § 287, Rem. — (2) in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote the cause or occasion, a respect, in a great variety of connections : about, concerning, for, on ac- count of, in respect to ; — (b) to denote a mental cause : for, from, on account of prae, though but seldom ; (c) to denote the rela- tion of a person or thing to that which belongs to them, which, as it were, surrounds them and refers to them (Geii.-^of the possessor) ; (d) to denote ivorth and superiority. (1) Od. e, 68. avrov rerdvvaro irepl aireiovs yXacpvpolo rj/xepls (there the vine was stretched around the cave). 130. rbv p.ev iycbv eadwffa it epl r p6ir ios fiefiaujra. (2) (a) MaxfC^a/, airoSravetv irepl rrjs irarpiSos (for, on account of) ; with verbs denoting a physical or mental perception, aicoveiv, elSevai, etc.. with verbs of saying and asking, e. g. Xeyeiu irepi twos, \6yos irepi rivos, with verbs of anxiety, fear, and such as express all other affections, e. g. fiar i oppcaSai. PL Phaed. 114. d. Sappelv irepi tivi (to be of good courage about something), (b) (Poet.) Uepl XapfJ-ctTi, waning or resting on the oath), (b) KaXeia&ai iirl tivos (to be called after one). Her. 7, 40. Nio-aloi KaX4ovTai "iriroi iirl rovSe (fortius reason). 74. iirl AvSov tov "At vo s io~xpv tt\v iiroiwixi-nv. T^\v iiruvvfilav iroieTo-frai iirl tivos (to be called, to take a surname from one) . 'Ecp 1 iavrov (of ewe's own accord, sua sponte) ; e7rl irpocpdoeas (simulatione, under pretext). A4yeiv iirl tivos (dicere de aliqua re). PL Charm. 155, d. iirl tov naXov x4ywv irai5 6s. (c) Z7)Te?j> ti iir'LTivos, Kplveiv ti iirl tivos, CKOireiv ti eiri ti- vos, X4yeiv ti iirl tivos, €7rt8eT|ai ti iirl tivos, etc. (to judge something accord- ing to a thing or person, as it were resting upon). PL Rp. 597, b. fiovXei ovv, %v (by themselves). 4, 114. olKeoo/xev iir" r)/i4wv ah twv. Here seems to belong the phrase so frequently found in the Attic historians: 5 E^>' ev6s, iirl Tpioiv, t stt dpwv Terax^ot, ot^vck, one, two, three men deep or in file, properly to be placed or rtand on one, the row resting or leaning on one, etc.). Dem. Phil. 1.42,7. hv Kal v/xus iirl t r, s ToiavTTjS i&cXr)o-r)Te yev- fo&ai yvdfirjs (firmiter adhaerere huic rationi). 9. (QiXiiriros) oi>x oT6s t iffTiv, $296.] prepositions. — Eot. 43& €Xw & Karlcrpairrai, fiiveiv iirl rovrav (cannot remain with, satisfied with, those things which he has conquered). Phil. 2. 66, 3. KeoXvcratr ttv iiceTuov irpdr- reiv ravra, ifx?u 4 cm (rovrovs) KoAaCeiv (penes vos, it is in your power, etc.). (b) 'Eirl rovrep, eV ovSevi (hac, nulla conditione, mdlo pacto, on this condition, etc.). Her. 3, 83. iirl rovrep {nre^io-ra- fiai rrjs apxysjiir' cpre vif ovSevos ifxecau dp^ofiai. Hence of price, e. g. iirl fiMT&cp (on condition of for, a reward) ; 4ttI fieyd\ois tokols davei£e(r&ai (to borrow on high interest) ; e w \ irocrep (at what price). ( c ) Her. 1,68. iirl kcckco av&pwTTov aiSripos avevprjTai (in perniciem hominis). So iirl rovrep (hoc con- silio, for this purpose, with this design). X. S. 1,5. Upwrayopct ttoXv apyvpiov 848ecKas 4irl ' kviripav {until evening); (b) 4ttI iroXXas 71/j.epas, e<^' T\\x£pav. Th. 4, 1. rb 'P-hyiov 4tt\ ttoXvv XP^ V0V £o-Tao~ia£s { for a long time) . 94. ol 5irX7rai iirl oktcI) irav rb arparS-iredor ird^avro {by eights, eight in file). 'EttI fxiya, iroXb, irXeov, /J.ei£ov t fiaXXov, f.iawp6v, 4irl t6o~ov, ifi ocrov (greatly, especially, much rather, etc.). Terdx- &ai iirl ttoXXovs {many in file). (3) (a) Her. 1.37. iirl &r)pav Uvai {venatum ire). 3, 14. iirl vdwp Uvai {aquatum ire). Hence e7r2 tI; wherefore? In a hostile sense, e. g. arparevso-^ai 4ttI AvSovs {upon, against the Lydians) ; 4Xav- veiv e7rl Il4p eras] (b) err' jcra {equally, in the same way). Her. 3, 71. rr)v 4irixelpr]o-tv ravrrjv /xr] ovra cvvrdxvve ajSovXus, a XX' 4ttI to cr w

297.] PREPOSITIONS. — Ilaoa. 441 ir a pit. fiacr iKrjos (comes from the king, with the accompanying idea that it was done by his direction). So -rrapd is regularly used of ambassadors, e. g. dyy e\oi, irp* aarnpiav avrots (constabat, in hoc iis positam esse salutem, that their safety depended on him). Her. 8, 140. Trvv&dvecr&G t\\v vvv irap' i/xe iovaav Svvaptv (is in my power, with me), (b) Her. 7, 20. qostg yu^Te rbv Aapeiov (o~t6\ov) tov iirl ^Kv&as ■wap a tovtov (sc. tov (tt6\ov) pndev a, &sirep fceot, oi av&pwiroi fiioTev- ovo~i (in comparison with, beyond, other animals), (c) 'Opw, gkottoo ti trap' &X\o t i (to consider something in conformity with another thing, in comparison with it, properly, holding it near to something). Dem. Aph. 1.824,34. irapa tov \6- yov, bv airo(p4povo-iv, iiriSeil-w (in conformity with, properly, holding an object near to another.) (d) Dem.1.43,14. ovSh $t\nnros irapa ttjv avrov p co/xnu tovov* tov irrev^nTai, ocrov Trap a tijv 7]/jlct4 pav ajx4\e lav (on account of his own strength). So irapa tovto, propterea, irap' '6, quapropter. $ 298. (4) Up 6s, before. Tip os (formed from 7rpo), denotes before, in the presence of. I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote a direction or motion from the presence of an object, especially from the situation of a place ; — (2) in a causal relation, to denote an active person, as it were an outgoing from the presence of a person exercising power, or of an object considered as a person, (a) of derivation ; (b) of a person or thing to whom or which something belongs {quality, peculiarity) [$ 273, 2, (c) (a)] ; (c) of th i author or cause, (1) Her. 3, 101. olneovcri irpbs v6tov av4fiov (toward the south, properly from the south). Comp. a meridie instead of ad meridiem. 107. irpbs peanp' Pplvs 'Apa^in iari (lies towards the south). X. An. 2. 2, 4. eVeo-fre t<£ r)yov/x4- vq>, to. fxev vrrofyyia Kxovtcs irpbs tov iroTapov (towards, on). (2) (a) Trpbs iraTpos, npbs pn]T p6 s (on the father's or mother's side), (b) Tlpbs yvvain6i eVrt (it is the manner of women) ; irpbs SIktjs Iot'iv (it is conformable to justice). X. An. 1. 2, 11. ovk r)v irpbs tov Kvpov Tp6irov, %x ovra H-h airodi56vai (was *ot in accordance with the custom of Cyrus). Antiph. 2. 121, 2. t) pkv 86£a tuv ^298] prepositions. — IIoo's. 443 TrpaxSrsvTGov irpbs tG>v \eyeiv dvuafJLeuwu iariy, i] 8e aA-fi&eia irpbs ra>t Siicaia koL '6v emuvov iroKvu irpbs v/xwu aireiropevS/xrjy (having much praise from you). Her. 1, 61. aTt[id£e(T&ai irpbs Tieiar icr pdr ov. X. An. 1. 9, 20. v (per deos, properly, before the gods). II. With the Dat, to denote dwelling or rest near or by an object; also of being busily engaged in or with a thing; finally, in the sense of besides, in addition to (praeter). Th. 2, 79. is /J-dxw Ka^icrTavrai ofA&rjvcuoi irpbs avrfj ry ir6\ei. Eli/cu, ylyveaSai irpbs irpdyfiaai Tlpbs tovtco, irpbs tovtois (praeter ea). III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation: (a) of the situation of a place : towards [where the Gen. also maybe used, see No. I, (1)] ; (b) of the direction to persons, or things considered as persons, sometimes also to places, both in a friendly and in hostile relation; (c) of extension; — (2) to denote time indefi- nitely ; — (3) causal and figurative : (a) to denote the purpose- ox object; (b) conformity ; hence (c) the reason or cause {prop- ter) ; (d) a comparison, for the most part with the accompanying idea of superiority ox preference (prae, praeter); (e) in respect to, (1) (a) Tlpbs /jL€&rjvai /3ovX6fj.e&a irpbs ttju 'EAAo8a(i.e. irpbs robs "EXXrjuas, to go in safety to Greece). Aeyeiv, ayopevew, e^erd^eiv t t irpos tip a (to speak before, to one) \ airovdds, (rv/xfAtzxiav iroie?o-&cu irp6s tip a (with one); pidx^cr^ai, iroXefxeiv irp6t riva (against one). These phrases everywhere imply the meaning to come into the presence of, before the face of any one ; also, Xoyi^ecr&cu, crKetyacr&ai, ctko- ireiv, i^v/j.e?cr^ai irpbs eavrov (secum reputare) ; likewise, (Scokp^ttjs f)v) vpbs x el l J -to va ' Ka ^ &epo s koI irdvras irSvovs KapTepucdoTaros (against)^ X. C 1. 2, 1. (c) 2w/fpaT7js ye /cat irpbs rovs &XXovs au& p&irovs k6y vpbs to 7i8v, irpbs Tb aya&6v. Also, irpbs (Slav (violently, against the will), irpbs cv a 7 kt\v, irpbs i}hovnv, irpbs aKpifie lav (accurately, in conformity with accuracy, etc.). (c) Tlpbs ravra (properly, in accordance with this, hence for this reason, therefore), (d) X. 3. 5, 4. i] t&v ' 'Afrnvalav So£a (reTairsiywrai) irpbs robs Boicer ov s (in comparison with the renown of the Boeotians). So also to denote an exchange, e. g. PI. Phaed. 69, a. rjSovas irpbs ijSovas Kal Xviras irpbs Xviras Kal v) Xa@wv (Sovv virb a/xd^rjs acpayiacrdjj.- ei'os ifiorjSei. (b) II. &, 13. eXdov fjav ptyca is Taprapov . . .i)X L Pa&iVTOv virb X&ov6s io-TL fiepe&poj' (under the earth). 'Tirb 777s oliteiv. (2) (a) KTejVecr- &ai i>ir6 Tiuo:, airoSraveiv vir6 rivos (to be slain by one), (b) X. An. 5. 1, 15. A^iiriros aireSavtv virb NindvSpov. 7.7,23. /xeya (jloi Sokz7 ev aKoveii> ■jirb av&pwiroov (to hear himself well spoken of by men). 3. 4, 11. airwXeaav r)\v apxV virb Uepo-wv M^Sot (lost the government by tlie Persians = spoliati .< nit imperio a P.). 7. 2, 22. alriav e%w inr6 rivos (= accusor ab aliquo). Her. "». 104. iiirb rov Kav/xaros 01 /xvpfjLrjKes cupavees yivovrai virb yrjv (under the in- fluence of the heat, on account of the heat). Th. 2, 85. virb avefxwv Kal virb airXoias ivBierpupzv ovk bxiyov %p6vov (on account of the winds, etc.). "Tir' avdyKi]s (from necessity). "Tirb /x4^r)s fialveaSrai, PI. 'Tirb piyovs. Her 1, 85. virb 8 e ovs KaX ko. kov (pwv^v cpp7j|e (spoke from fear and grief ). So virb x a P" s J (p&ovov, bpyr]S, aire iplas, cr w

\a> (at the foot of Tmolus). 'Tirb r <£ 'T fir) cr crw. (2) (a) Aa/u,^aL vir6 tivi, iriirretv vir6 tivi (to be conquered by one, etc.), Horn, (b) 'Tirb Papfiirca x°P*vsiv, v7r' avX§, etc. (to dance to or by the music of the lyre), (c) Tloielir ti vtt6 tivi (to subject something to one), and iroieTafrul ti v($> eavTbv irdvTas, Kal irpbs Kpolffov. 6.2. 11. 6 cvXKoyos twu vnb /3 a a i A e a fiapfidpoov. $ 300. Remarks on Peculiarities in the use of the Prepositions. 1. The proper prepositions were originally (except ws, to) adverbs of plac« (§ 286, Rem. 2), i. e. they denote the local relation of an action ; in this way nearly all are very often used in the Homeric language. This use is also fre- quent in Herodotus, but in good Attic prose, only irpbs 8e, kv. B, 305. a(x though very seldom, are connected with the proper prepositions, as in Eng. on account of, for the sake of, airb fiorjs eveica (for the cry's sake). Lys. Evandr. 793. 7repi rS>v ev oAryapx'? ap^durwv ev e k e v . 2. Since pi-epositions in composition retain their original meaning as ad- verbs of place, and as the older language habitually uses the prepositions as adverbs of place, it follows of course, that the ancient language often employs the simples, and separates the preposition as an adverb from the verb, where the Attic writers regularly use the compounds. The two following instances must be distinguished : — (a) Tliose instances where the preposition is separated from the verb. II. 7, 34. vir6 re rpSfios eAAa/3e yv7a. y, 135. irapa. 8' eyx^a H-o-Kpa ir e ir tj 7 e v. 8, 63. e'7rl 8' etyovrai &eol &XX01. 8, 161. en re Kal otfe reAe?. &, 108. ovs ('lirirovs) wot air Alveiav eXo^rfV (eXev&ai rivd ri, II. 7r, 56). Rem. 3. Here belongs, especially, an abridged mode of expression, where several sentences follow each other, which consists in using the compound, which should stand in each sentence, only in the first, while in the others the preposition merely is repeated, e. g. II. \p, 799. Kara, ixev SoXlx^otkiov eyxos 3-^/c' is ay u>va (pepwv, Kara 8' acririda Kal rpvcpaXeiav. Often also in Her., e. g. 8, 33. Kara fxev e Kav aSdvaroi fidWovd. II. A, 743. yjpnre 8' iv Kovir\(Tiv (fell into the dust and lay there). In prose, n&evai iv x*P a '' lv like the Latin, ponere et collocare in manibus. X. H. 4. 5, 5. first: is 8e rb "Upaiov Kar4(pvyov y and then 01 8' iv rep 'Hpala KaTaireQevySres H-yeo'av (those who had fed and were then in the Heraeum). PI. Eutliyd. 292, e. iv rairrj rrj airopia iveireirr&Keiv. (Caes. B. G. 5, 10. naves in littore ejectas esse. Sail. Jug. 5. in amicitia receptus). — Also with dp. (pi and ire pi with the Dat. instead of the Ace. II. A, 17. Kvnp.7Sas p.hv irpoora ire pi Kvb prj- (Tiv HdnjKev (he put the greaves around his legs, so that then they set fast to them). Od. &, 434. dp.v &p.wv Kpe fxdfie voi (hanging upon the shoulders and depending from them ) . So avaprav ti etc tivos. Her. 4. lO. e/c twj/ £co o~tt) pa v (popelv tw diaKeiixai. — PL Phaed. 82, e. (rj xpvxv avayKa(eTai) &sirep St' elpyfiov Sia tov cdifiaTOS fficoireTff&ai to. ovTa. 6. The natural position for prepositions is directly before their substantive, or before the attributive belonging to a substantive, e. g. irpbs tov 'dvdpa, irpbs rbv o~ov 6/xoyvlwj, oItqi iri&eo-&ai. So in Latin, per te deos oro. (c) The preposition sometimes follows its substantive, though it then is sub- ject to anastrophe ; in Attic prose, this takes place only with irepl when con nected with the Gen., but here it is very frequent. PL Rp. 469, b. irpurov fxh avS pair oh iff ixo v ire pi; it is also separated by other words. Her. 6, 101 tovtov o~(pi efxe\e irepl. PL Apol. 19, C. wv eyib ovdev ovre fxeya ovre ctuih obv ire pi eiraiu. See § 31, IV. W 301, 302.] pronouns. 45j CHAPTER IV. § 301. The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, At- tribute, and Object. The subject, predicate, attribute, and object are expressed by pronouns, when these members of a sentence are not designed to represent objects or qualities themselves, but when it is to be denoted merely, that an object refers either to the speaker himself, or to the person addressed, or to another person or thing. 2. All the rules which have been given on the substan- tive and adjective, apply also to substantive and adjective pronouns ; still, some remarks are here subjoined on the use of the pronouns. $ 302. I. Personal Pronouns. The substantive personal pronouns, as the subject (in the Nom.) : eyw, arc, fjixds, etc., and also the adjective (posses- sive) pronouns, as attributives, e. g. i^bs irarrjp, are used in Greek, as in Latin, only when they are specially emphatic; hence particularly in antitheses, but also, for the sake of per- spicuity, e. g. Kat av ravra en-pa^as. Kat 6 cros 7rarr]p ajri^avcv. 'Eyo> fxkv airtLfu, av Be fxive. But where this is not the case they are omitted, and the substantive pronouns are expressed by the endings of the verb, and the adjective (possessive) pro- nouns, by the article prefixed to the substantive, e. g. Tpdv apxas 5i kavrS>v KT-r\(Ta(j.4v(cv.- Ay. Nub. 384. hrb aavrov iyw tr« 8t5a|co (per te ipsum). (3) The reflexive pronouns may also be used in Greek, as in Latin, in the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive and of the Participle ; also in such subordinate clauses as stand in a close relation to the principal clause, particularly in clauses expressing design, and in dependent interrogative clauses, as well as in all other subordinate clauses which do not contain the sentiment of the speaker, but the sentiment of the subject of the principal sentence. Also in this case the reflexive refers either to the subject or to an object. When the subject of the principal clause and the subject of the subordinate clause (or of the Inf.), are different, the reflexive may refer either to the former or to the latter, its particular reference being determined only from the context. In the cases men- tioned under this rule, the English often uses the personal pronouns him, her, it, etc. instead of the reflexive. 'O t 6 paw o s VOfxlfa robs iroKiras vir-nperelv kavrcp. X. Cy. 1. 1, 5. Ta>v ehuoov ruvrcw i)p£ev (Kvpos) ov& kavrcp ojxoyKoorrwv ourrav, ovre ctAAVjAois. C. 1. 2, 8. eiricrreve (2 co k p a r rj s) rcov £vi>6vrwv kavrw robs airode£afj.evovs, tiiirep avrbs edoKi/jLa^ev, els rbu iravra fiiov kavrcp Te Kal a\\i)\ois (pikovs ayaSrobs eaecrSai. 52. 6 narriyopos ecpr) rbu 2ai k pdrrju avairei&ovra rovs veovs, ws avrbs elrf ao'panaros re Kal &AAovy iKavdiraros iroiriaai ffocpovs, ovrca diari&evai robs eavr to avv6vras, wsre /j.7)da/j.ov Trap' avrols robs aWovs eluai irpbs eavr 6 v (in comparison with him). Th. 2, 92. ra vavdyia, ova irpbs rfj kavriav (yrj) i\v, avei- \ovro (= Ta vavdyia ra irpbs rfj eavr wu yfj ovra). Her. 8, 24. oaoi gov arparoi rod kavrov i)arav veKpol e^ra^e. Comp. the examples in Rem. 3. «" 302.] pronouns. 4f53 4. On the contrary, the oblique Cases of the pronoun avros, -Yj, -6. viz., anoS, -yjs, avrw, -rj, olvtov, r)v, -o, avTihv, or even those of a demonstrative pronoun, are universally employed, when an object does not stand in contrast with itself, but with another object, e. g. 6 irarr]p aura) {to him, the son) c'Scokc to /3l/3\lov. Srepyco olvtov {him). 'A7re^o/xat olvtov {from him). The pronoun avrov, etc. is merely the personal pronoun of the third person, but is much weaker than the demonstrative ovto?; wherefore, it does not, like ovtos, usually stand first in a sentence. Eem. 3. The personal pronoun ov, of, etc. has commonly a reflexive sense in the Attic winters (but, in the Ion. writers and in the poets, also the meaning of the personal pronoun). But it is regularly employed, only when the reflex- ive relation has respect, not to the nearest subject, but to the remoter one. It is in general much more freely used than the compound reflexive, since it is also employed where the connection with the principal clause is much looser, e. g. 'O rvpavvos vofiiC^i tovs iroXiras vir-opzTziv ol (but not 6 Tvpavvos x a P' L C eTa ' 1 ol). X. An. 7. 5, 9. 'HpaKXcidrjs elsayayuv robs &XXovs o-Tparriyovs irpbs 'Snev&T]!' X4yeiv eweAeuef avrobs, '6ri ovZ\v av i)TT0V o~u (SE ducturos esse). Th. 5, 73. ol 'A&r)va?ot us i^eKXtvep (6 "Ay is) enrb atpcop rb (Trpdrevfia, Ka& ^avyiav icrca&rjo'ap. 6, 32. j-vpeirei>xovTO Kal 6 &XXos, OfitXos, twu T€ ttoXitwp Kal e? Tis dXXos evpovs iraprjp acpicri. Even after ydp, e. g. X. II. 1. 7, 5. oi crrpar-qyol fipax^a etccurros aireXoyrjo-aTO • ov yap Trpovre&r} a (pic i \6yos Kara rbv pS/jlop. But Thucydides and some later writers use it, also, in relation to the nearest subject, e. g. Th. 7, 5. 6 rvXnriros eretx'C 6 T0 ? s *-&ois XP^^ V0S ^ ovs ol 'A 3- i]v a 7oi TrpoTrapefiaXopTo crci rivas eV auToiij iXavpopras (contra Se). C. 4. 7, 1. TV eavrov ypcv/ATjp airecpaivero ~Xcok- odrrjs irpbs tovs dfiiXovpras a«rf Apol. 33. (twKpdrr}s) zyvw rod in (r)P rb r&vdvai avr <£ Kpe7rrop elvai. 454 syntax. f? 302. 6. In compound reflexive pronouns, the pronoun avros eithei retains its exclusive force, or loses it, i. e. it is sometimes em- phatic, and sometimes not. (a) Isocr. Panath. 16, 242. SiKaiov ecrn cpiXovs fxev iroieiabai robs dfxoiws ah- toj* re (or iv \pr\ii.dr'j}v col twv e/xwv Kixpyfu» c. Nausim. 11, 993. fiiKaiorepov 8-fjirov ra i) /xerepa ijfxas eariv %X elv > % rovrovs. C. Boeot. 2, 1010. v/xe?s airav- res robs v/xer e povs iraiSas ayairare. Ot iroX7rai to o~otli the substantive and adjective (possessive) personal pronouns, whether its exclusive power be retained or lost, c. g. rj/xap avr&p, vp.7p avro7s, acpas avrois, 6 bfxerepos avr&p irar-ftp, etc. In the Attic writers the exceptions to this position are extremely few, e. g. X. Cy. 6. 2, 25. pvp ra emr'f}8eia {v/nas) Set els r\\p bhbv crvcTKevd^ecrbai abrols re t}h7p, Kal oirScrois rerpdirocri x/><^ue&a. But in other writers, also, such exceptions are quite rare, e. g. Her. 5, 91. avyyipcctTKo- /xsp abrotai rjfilp ov iroiT\s. This position is never found with the third Pers. PL, consequently never avrobs crcpas instead of crcpas avrovs. But when the Pers. pronouns are used without their reflexive force, then avrSs, in its exclusive or emphatic sense, may either precede or follow the personal pro- noun: (a) avrov ep.ov [fxov), avrcp e/xoi (fioi), avrbp e/xe (/Ue), avrobs 7)/xas, etc., e. g. PL Phaed. 91, a. avrcp e/xol on /xaXicrra 86£ei ovrccs exeip. Symp. 220, e. crvpdiecrcocre Kai ra oirXa Kal avrbp e/xe. X. C. 2. 9, 2. f)5ews y &i> (sc. &pe- ipai/xi rbp &p$pa), ecpr], el (x$i (pofiol/xriP, oirws ^tJ e7r' avrop jxe rpdiroiro. — (b) ifxov avrov, ifxol avry, ere avr6p, tjjxuiv avrcop, etc., e. g. Dem. 01. 3, 36. irfoep aXXo&ep lo~x^pbs yeyopep 77 trap t}(xwp avrap $l\nnros; X. C. 3. 8, 9. rod Sepovs 6 t^Xios virep tj ficop avrap Kal reap areyevp iropevS/xepos ctkiccp irapex*i- Cy. 5. 5, 20. v 5 Isocr. Pan eg. diereXecafxev aarraffiacrroi Trpbs acpus avrovs. X. H. 1. 7, 19. evpr)crere o~(pas avrovs 7]fj.aprrjK6ras ra [le- yiara is &eo!bv\iv fiovXevoire fiera o-cpio-iv (instead of fie& v/xiv). Od. 1, 28. ovroi e7''"V€ fjs yai-ns b'vva/j.ai yXvuepdorepov IxXXo lh*e yeyove (by what follows). Th. 2, 34. wde fjiev SdirTovo-i (in reference to what precedes). But often ode, Side, etc., are so used that they represent an object as present, as it were before our eyes, e. g. X. Cy. 3. 3, 35. iyw de ifuv fiev irapaivaiv, Troiovs rivas XPV eTwM iv r<$ rotude, alo-xwoifxriv ^ (— w praesenti r«ram sfaiu), Regularly, however, ovros precedes the relative clause, e. g. svr6s ianv, $ 303.] pronouns. 457 t>v elSes &vSpa. — "When ovtos and eKeTvos are used in opposition to each other, the latter refers to what is more remote, the former, to what is nearer, though the reverse is sometimes the case, as with the Latin hie and ille. 2. The adjective demonstratives are often used in poetry, especially in Epic, and sometimes in prose, instead of the adverbs here, there, according to § 264, 3. Od. a, 76. aXA" 'dyeS?, 7]/xe?s o73e irepi f-^v yevofxevnv avTolai ahirju ov uaXa e^epa \a(3eiv. (2) In the oblique Cases, it is used for the third person of the personal pronouns (§ 302, 4). (3) In connection with the article (6 clvtos), it means the same, idem (§ 246, 3). On the position of the article with o-vtos in connection with a substantive, see $ 246, 3. Rem. 3. Horn, and Her. often use o.vt6s in the place of the reflexive pro- nouns of the three persons. Od. 8, 247. &XXa> 8' avTbv (instead of kavTbv) 39 458 SYNTAX. [$ 303 $wt\ KaTafcpuTrrccv zicrKev. £, 27. crol 8e ydfxos (instead of Tov (%a>KpdTovs) ToidSe tis ■fiv (haec fere, ivas nearly, was for substance this). 3. 6, 5. xQov, it 6 a a i Tivis eltri (sc. at irpSsoSoi ttj irSxei), tell vie about how much the revenues are. So ovtoo ti, or ovtqo, «8e ircas (sic, fere, nearly thus) ; Tpsis Tives (about three, some three or so). Rem. 5. The regular position of the pronoun t I s, as an enclitic, is after the word to which it belongs, e. g. awt]p tis, ko.x6s tis dvrip. But sometimes, in con- nected discourse, it precedes, e. g. itrr-i to'lvw t i s ev^^rrjs x6yos. On the rela- tive and interrogative pronouns, see under adjective and interrogative sentences. Rem. 6. The indefinite pronoun one, any one, is usually expressed in Greek . (a) by t\s, e. g. Ouk 'dv tis evpoi dvSpa crocpdoTepov (one would not find t etc.) , (b) by the second Pers. Sing. Opt. with dv, and the Ind. of a historical tense with dv, when it is intended to represent the subject as indefinite, e. g. (pai-ns dv (dicas, one may, can say); vo/xi^ois dv (credas, one might suppose), €?8e s &v (videres, one might have seen); r)yf)v x4ev axXvv, IlTjXeiSri 'A%tA7)i'. II. cu, to have been advised or to be advised, etc. (b) It retains the government of the verb, i. e. it governs the same Case as its verb, e. g. Tpdfaw liria-roXriv, i-n-LSv/xecv rf}<; apcTTJs, /xct^eo-^at rots iroXepAois; (c) It has an adverb for its attributive expletive, and not, as in the case of an actual substantive, an adjective, e. g. KaAoos aTroSaveLv (on the contrary, koAos Sdvaros). The Inf. will first be considered without the article, and then with it. $ 306. 1. The Infinitive, as an Object, without the Article. 1. The Inf. is used, as the complementary 1 object in the Ace, to express something aimed at or effected: — (a) With verbs of willing and the contrary (verba voluntatis), e. g. j3ovXofxaL, i$£Xo), fiiXXo), l7n3vfxCi, ol^lio, Sikouco, , Trpo^vfxov- fjiai, 7rp6$vjA6s elpa, e7rt^etpo), 7reipw/£ai, j3ovXevop.ai } 7rapacrK£vdt,opaL, prj)(avioixo:t, roA/xto, vTTOjxevoy, eloiSa, etc. — Seo/xac (to entreat), iKerevu), irapaivk), 1-TnriXXoi, 7rapo£vva), 7T€t-9(o, , Kare^a), kwXvo), etc. ; — - rjcrvyiav, Trpdyfiara, aoyaXtav, o^Xov Trapi^oi tlvl, l^ovaiav ScSovat, and the like. BovXo fxai y pd ras ws aXrj^ws alnas X4yeiv. Dem. 01.3.16, 25. tis av abrbv eri /co>/\vXiav avT$ (t<£ f3ao~iXe7) irape £eiv o-Tpareisiv £it\ robs "EXXrjvas. Dem. Chers. 102, 53. i) a v %t av •Koiovcriv itce'ivcc irpdrreiv, o ti fiovXeTai. Remark 1 . On the difference between the Inf. and the Part, with alo-xv- veo~&ai, aiSetcrdxu, irepiopav, &pxe, SiaTrpaTTO/JLOLL Karepyd^op^at, KaracrKevd^o), etc. — Setvo? (powerful, capable, fit), iko.v6sre. PI. Prot. 348, c. aSv var ov vfjuu, wsre IJpwraySpov rovbe aoepwrepov nva e \ecr&ai. So often in Plat. iKavbs cisre. X. Ag. 1, 37. eiroii}cr ev (sc. Agesilaus), Sjsr 1 dvev avayKaiov, Slkcuov, ox^eAi/xoV ecrnv and the like ; after verbs of giving, taking, going, sending, and many others ; after adjectives of various significations, e. g. a£ios, oYkcuos (worthy, worth), f)&vs, pa&ios, xaAe7ros and many others ; after abstract substantives, es- pecially in connection with eivai and ytyvecrSai, as dvdyK-q, eX7rts, axoXrj, wpa Ictt'lv, to express a purpose or determination, a result or effect. Th. 4, 61. TrecpvKe rb avSp&ireiov Sia iravrbs dpx^ lv fxeu rov e"iKOvros, (pv* hdacreo-&ai Se rb eiriov {men are so constituted as always to rule those who yield, but to guard against those who assail). "H/co/iey pt.av^rdv e iv (ad discendum). Th. 2, 27. rots Alyiurjrais ol AaKeSai/xSuioi edocrav Qvpeau oIk€?v Kal rfy yr\v v e/j.e ff&ai. PI. Apol. 33, b. 6/j.oiws Kal irXovaiw Kal irevnri irapex^ efxavrbv epurav. X. An. 5. 2, 1. rb rj/jucrv rod crrparevfxaros Kar e\iir e "Eeuocpcop (pvXarreiv rb o~rpar6ireb'ov. "A.£i6s icrri &av(xd{e o*&ai. Her. 4, 53. Bopva&ei/ris ivivecr&ai r)Sicrr6s eari (dulcissimus ad bibendum). . 6, 112. recas ■f]v roltn "E\\7) /xtji/ eldori rr]v aA'fi&eiav. So ^ooKpdrrfs irao'i irapeiyev havrbv epcardu {he yielded himself to all to question, i. e. he permitted all to question him). Rem. 11. Prom the use of the Inf. after verbs of willing, wishing, entreati-\g, and imploring and the like, the following peculiarities in the use of the Inf. i.re to be explained : a. The Inf. is very frequently used in the Epic writers instead of the second person Imperative, sometimes also instead of the third person ; instead of the second person, not seldom also in other poets, and even likewise in Herodotus and in the Attic prose-writers. The Inf. must then be considered as the object depending on the Imp. of a verb of willing, which is to be supplied, e. g. e&eAe. Hence when predicative expletives are joined with the Inf., these, inasmuch as they refer to the subject av contained in the omitted Imp., are put in the Nona. The Imp. is also often interchanged with the Inf. Od. a, 290, sqq. z/octttj- cras 877 eireira (piXrjv is irarpioa yaiav (rrifxd re 01 xeucu, Kal iirl Kr4pea Kre- p e i £ a 1 . . . Kal dv4pi p.r\T4pa oovvai {and then having returned to your dear father- land, heap up a mound, etc.). II. /3, 75. v/xe7s 8' &K\6&eP aWos epyrveiv iir4eoe 84 ris elireaKev, looov els obpavhu evpvw Zev irdrep, 77 A'lavra Aax 6 *^ ^ TuSe'os vl6v, 3) abrbv /3 a crt A 77 a iroXvxpv i4vai eXacppav evfrrjra eirl rb Kwny4(rioi', rbv 8e dp Kveapb v eiteG&ai. c. Hence the Inf. is sometimes used in reference to the first and second Pers., in questions denoting indignation. Her. 1, 88. 5 fiaffiAev, K^repou \4yeiv Trpbs 464 syntax. [$ 307 ae ra voewv Tiyxdvoo, rj ffiyav ev Tcp irape6vTi XP^V '■> [shall I speak or be si- lent?). Od. k, 431. d SetAot ir6a Xp.ev ; t'l kclkSiv IjxeipeTe tovtwv ; (whither to go, i. e. whither are you to go?). d. Finally, the Inf. is used instead of the Opt., with cCl yap, ei&e, as the ex- pression of a wish. Od. co, 375, sq. a? yap, Zed re irdrep . . , to?os e~orpvvio ere fjid^eaS^cu. Remark 1. So also KeXeveiv, which signifies to impel, to urge, hence to command (jubere), in Attic prose, is always constructed with the Ace. and the Inf., e. g. KeXevu ae ypdcpeiv (jubeo te scribere), 2. When predicative expletives, consisting of adjectives or sub- stantives, and referring to the personal object of the govern- ing verb, are joined with the Infinitive, they are either put by attraction in the same case as the personal object, or in the Accusative without attraction. (a) Gen. with Inf. Aeop.ai crov irpo&vp.ov elvai (I beg you to be zealous). Aeojxcu aov it p6&vp.ov el vat. X. H. 1. 5, 2. Kvpov iSeovro cbs ir poSv plot dr ov irpbs tov ir6\ep.ov yeveo~&cu (begged C. to be as zealous as possible in the war). Her. 6, 100. 'A 3- t] v a i wv iSerj^-ncrav acpio-i fiori&ovs yevecr&ai (requested the Athenians to aid them). If the Gen. is fol- lowed by the Inf. accompanied by a more definite ex- pletive, this expletive is always put in the Ace, e. g. Lys. 118. Seofxcu vp.wv KaTayp-ncpicracr&at. ®eop.vf]o~Tov, eV- &v fxov/xevov s, oaos p.oi 6 ay&u eo~Tiv (I pray you to condemn Th., considering, etc.). Th. 1, 120. avopwv ay a 3-wj/ etJTiv, ad 1 kov fi ev ovs e| elprjPTjs iroXep.e'iv (it is tht characteristic of brave men, ichen injured, to exchange peace for ivar). (o) Dat. with Inf. ~2,v[xfiov\evw croi irpoSv p.u> elvai (I advise you to be zew* ous). '2,u/x^r>v\eva} croi ir po&v jxov elvai. X. An. 2. 1,2. e5o|€ Tois t£>v "EWtjvwv o~t p aT-ny o? s crvo-Kevaaap.- evois a elxov koX e | o ir A. i o~ e ir p 6 & v p o v elvai. KeAevw a e irp6&v jj.ov eivat. Rem. 2. The ^.cc. in the examples under (a) and (b), may be explained by considering the object of the governing verb, e. g. Seofxcu vllwv, as being at the same time the subject of the Inf., i. e. this object stands in a two-fold relation, being both the object of the governing verb, and the subject of the Inf. (see Rem. 3), e.g. A 4o/xai vllojv \yLias\ fio-n&ovs yeveoScu (I beg you that you icillaid). Rem. 3. Verbs which take the simple substantive object, in the Gen. or Dat., sometimes take, in the construction with the Inf., this object in the Ace, the object of the governing verb and the subject of the Inf. being united in one. This construction is used when the whole action of a person and not the person himself, is made specially prominent. Lys. Fragm. S. 3, p. 144. 5eo- Hai ovv vfxas o-vyyvw/xriu exetv (/ beg therefore that you would pardon). Th. 4, 97. Trpoayopevw avrovs 4k rov Upov air i6ur as airo>, irposrdrrco, StaKe\evo/xai ere atrievai. X. C. 4. 7, 1. ^coKparrjs avr ap/ce is iu ra7s irposrjKov- vais irpd^triv avrovs (robs 6 fj.i\ovvras avr$) eivai 4 it e ll e A e 7 r o. So also the verbs e I it e 7v, \4yeiv,

v e 7 v in the sense of jubere, are con- structed with the Ace. and the Inf., in the Attic poets. S.Ph. 101. \4yca a' iyw d6\co $i\oKrr)r-nv \a@ e7v. Also ir p o s rj k e i, irp 4ir et, ei-ecrrt, ffVLifiaivei, £vLi irp4iroi ye iir i\4)o~ jxova eivai paipaSb v dvdpa (it would not be fitting that a rhapsodist should be forgetful). 3. Besides the case already mentioned, the Ace. ivith the Inf. is used in Greek, as in Latin, in the following case also. When a subject with its predicate, as 'O ayaS6Trwv vofxifxa, airoK- reivavras KrjpvKas, avrbs (ipsum instead of se ipsum) 5e ravra ov Troi7)o~eiv. Th. 4, 28. KA.ewj/ ovk ecpt] avros, a\?C eKe7vov (Nucleus) arpaTriyelv. So also by means of attraction the personal pronouns iydo, av, ridels, vfxels, creels, are joined with the Inf. 'Etto/jlvvco cot. . . rf jxt}v £y& /3ou\eu iv tt) ir6\ei, Th. 8, 76. — Sometimes the enclitic pronouns are used without any special emphasis. PI. Pp. 400, b. ol/xai fx e aKt\Koevai. — When the governing verb has an object, and this object is at the same time the subject of the Inf. also, then the Inf. merely (without the Ace.) is used, but the predicative expletives are put in the same case as this object. OuS 5 av tovtois iiriarevov i fx- u6vois eo-ea&ai, X. Cy. 3. 3, 55 (I would not even trust these that they will be steadfast). OvSevl av&pcaircav ixpei/xriv av ovre (ZeAriov ov& riSiov ifxov /8e- fiioo k evai, X. C. 4. 8, 6 (to no one would I grant that he had lived better, etc.). When the object of the governing verb is also the object of the Inf., this also is used only in the first place, but is omitted in the second. ^coKpdr-ns, ev vvv Avklcou cpafxevcov AavSiwv elvai ol iroXAoi elcri eir-hAvSes (eorum Lyciorum, qui se Xanthios esse dicebant). X. Cy. 6. 1, 34. (Kvpos aveyeKavev) inl ra Kpelro- vi rod epcoros vir i (T% v elr o avroTs oAi- yew r)fj.epocv eKrrXewu ir ap4 ff eff&ai, X. An. 7, 5,9. Tbv jxkv Ka\bv kol- ya&bv 'dvo pa evSai/iova eluai (xev ov ra rwv ivoXiruv eiriKivovvws irdvra KeKrrjff- &ot, X. C. 2. 3. 2. Rem. 5. With the impersonal verbs and expressions above mentioned, the Ace. with the Inf. is not to be regarded as the grammatical object, but as the grammatical subject of the sentence ; but logically, i. e. in respect to the sense, the Ace. with the Inf. must even here be regarded as the object, and the im- personal expressions as transitive verbs, e.g. Ao/ce? /toi {= vofiifa) Kvpov (ro(p(i)TaTOj/ yev4oSai. Thus it can also be explained why the Greeks and Lat- ins in quoting a phrase, e. g. evdaipova thai, felicem esse, fiaffiXea elvai, regem esse, use this construction. Rem. 6. The Greeks are fond of changing the impersonal construction into the personal, by elevating the object into a subject, making the impersonal expression personal, and referring it to the person of the subject. By this construction, the subject is rendered prominent ; while in the construction of this Ace. with the Inf. the whole idea of the sentence is made the principal thing. This is the case: (a.) with x4yer ai, ayy4xXerai, 6 /u.oXoye7r at and the like; (b) with SoKe7, it seems; (c) with avpL^aiv et, accidit ; where this last verb is used personally, the subject stands before it. while with the Ace. and the Inf., it follows the verb; (d) in the phrases oiKaiov, al-iov, i'lrioo^ov, o war 6v, afx-r\x avov i X a ^ elT0V 4sre with the Inf. or Ind. (tantum abest, ut — ut) so far is it from, and iroXXov 5ew with the Inf. A4yerai rbv jSatriAea airo] /j. er 4 pa viroipia. PI. Phaed. 74, a. ap' ov v ov Kara irdvra ravra ffvjx^aivei r tjv avd- pLVT) ff i v elvai /xev acp" bjxoiwv ktX. 67, C k d&ap ff i s elvai ov rovro ^vfxfiaivei. — Ai Kaios el /a i rovro irpdrreiv instead of 8'iKaiov effri /j.e rovro irpdrreiv. A ( - Kaios eifx.i elvai eXev&epos. Her. 6, 12. eirldo^oi ravrb rovro ■xtiarea&ai elai. X. Cy. 5.4, 19. 'd^io i y4 e a fj.eu rod yeyevT)iJi4vov nvpayixaros rovrov airoAavcrai ri &70&M'. Isocr. Paneg. 76, 168. r off ovrov o4ovffiv eAeeTu, Sisre Kal fxaWou ■Xaipovoiv iirl to?s aX\i)Kwv KaKoTs (so far are they from pitying, that they rather rejoice even, etc.). Rem. 7. The personal construction with the verbs SokcIv, ioiK4uai, \4yeo-frai and the like, extends also to clauses with w s, expressing comparison, as is the case in Latin with ut videor, ut videris, etc., instead of ut videtur. PI. Rp. 426, b. ovk iiraiperrjs el, ecp-nv eyca, ws eoiKas, rwv roiovrcci/ ai/dpwi/ {you do not praise, as it seems [instead of as you seem] such men). X. An. 1. 10, 18. ftffau §' avrai, ws e\4yovro, rerpaKocriai a/j.a£ai {these chariots were four hundred^ as it was said), 6. 3, 25. ot iroKeixiOi 8e, & s y y)puu iS6Kovy, rovro Seurarres airrjAbov. 468 syntax. [§ 308. Rem. 8. On the Ace. with the Inf. in exclamations, see § 308, Rem. 2. On '6ti and ws after verba sentiendi and dicendi, see § 329. f 308. II. Infinitive ivith the Article. 1. The Inf. with the article is treated in all respects like a substantive, and, indeed, is such, since, by means of the article, it can be declined through all the Cases, and is capable of ex- pressing all the relations, which are indicated by the Cases of the substantive with and without prepositions. On the contrary, it here also, as in the Inf. without the article [§ 305, (2)], re- tains the nature of a verb. (a) Tb ypd(petu, to ypdxpcu, to yeypcKpeuai, rb yp&peiv. (b) Tb £itio~to- Xtjv ypdcpeiv, to rrjs aperris £iri&v/u.e?v, to to?s iro\e fiio i s fidxeo-&ai. (c) Tb Ka\ws ypdepew, to Kahcos aitobaveiv (honorable death). Yet pronouns in the Neut. Sing., as attributive adjectives, are joined with the Inf., e. g. Plat. aurb Tb hiroSviio-Keiv. By prefixing the article, whole sentences can be represented as one extended substantive -idea. 2. When the Inf., whether as a subject or object, has a sub- ject of its own and predicative expletives, both the subject and expletives, as in the case of the Inf. without the article, are put in the Ace, because the Inf., even as a subject, is considered dependent ($ 307, Rem. 5). When, however, the subject of the Inf. is not different from the principal subject of the sentence, it is not expressed, and the predicative expletives are put, by attraction, in the same Case as the principal subject of the sentence, i. e. in the Nom. (a) Nominative (subject). X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. Tb afiaprdveiv av&pwirov s out as ovdev, olfiai, Srav^acfTov (that men constituted as they are should err, is not strange) ; here Tb a/xapTauetv which is the subject of cVti, has av^pdnrovs for its own subject, and opTas as its predicative expletive. 7. 5, 82. ob Tb fi r )j Aa- $e?u to. o.ya&a ovtw ye xaXeiroV, &sirep Tb \afi6vTO. o~t ep-qSrjv ai Xv- TT]p6v. (1)) Genitive : (a) as the object of verbs and adjectives or as an attributive jf a substantive. X. An. 1. 3, 2. KAeapxos fjaKpbv i^eepvye tov /xr] KaraireT- pw&TJvai (just escaped being stoned to death). Cy. 1. 4, 4. o>y 8e irpoijyev 6 XP&vos avTbv (jbv Kvpov) crvv t<£ fj.eye&ei els 8>pav tov tt po sn) j8 ov yevecr&ai (as time advanced him to the period of [becoming a man] manhood) ; here the Inf yevecrdcu, which is used as an object in the Gen., has its predicative expletive "*4sri8ov in the Ace. 1.5, 13. ti ovv es

v fiacriXewv olpoj^ooi els ri]v apiarepdv (oXvov) eyx*djxe~ voi Karafipocpodcri, rod drj, el (pdp/xaKa iyxeoiev, fx.ii Xvff ir eXe?v avro7s (in order that it may not be well for them, if they mingle poison with it). 6, 40. ro v /jlt/i 5 ia without, ftexpifj), until. Th. 1, 69. avrl rod eireX&e'tv (invadere) avrol a.fivveo'&ai fiovXefffre fxaXXov eiri6vras. X. H. 3. 4, 12. 6 'AyrjaiXaos avrl rov iirl Kapiav lev at, ev&bs ravavrla airoarpe^as eirl &pvyias iiropevero. Hier. 4, 3. dopvcpopovo'iv eirl robs nanovpyovs virep rov fi 77 5 e v a roiv iroXircov fiialca 8ravdr Cv v eari ri ivavrtov, fcsirep ru} iyp7)yopevat rb Ka&evdeiv ; [is there something opposite to living, as sleeping is to waking). X. Hier. 7, 3. BoKeT rovra> Biacpepeiv avi]p rS>v dXXcuv £d>oi)v, r $ rifx.rjs op eyea&ai (seems to differ from other animals in this, that). (/3) With prepositions : e v, in, e ir i, on the condition that, in order that, because, ir p6s, besides. PI. Gorg. 456, e. irapeBoo'av eirl rep BiKaiws XPV °~& al tovtois (rots ottXois) irpbs robs iroXefilovs (they put them [arms] into their hands in order that they might use them aright). S. Aj. 554. iv r dp (pp ove?v — riBiaros fitos. (d) Accusative : (a) Sometimes as the object of transitive verbs. PI. Gorg. 522, e. avrb rb airo&vr) criceiv ovBeTs cpo(3e?rai (no one fears death itself). (/3) With prepositions: iiri, els, irp6s, in order that, in order to, in relation to, Kara, in relation to, irapd, in comparison, especially Bid, on account of, because that. X. C. 1. 2, 1. ^wKparrts irpbs rb fierpiav Be?o~&ai ireiraiBev/xevos (?jv) (was trained to have moderate desires). Cy. 8. 1, 3. fxeyiarov ayabbv rb irei^apx^v (palverai els rb tear air pdrr e iv ra aya&d. With attraction : X. Yen. 12, 21. 7/ aperi] iravraxod irdpecri Bia rb elvai a&dvaro s (on account of its being immortal, because it is immortal) ; here a&dvaros is attracted into the case of aper-f), instead of being in the Ace. Cy. 1. 4, 3. 6 Kvpos 81 a rb (piXo ■ ua&i)S elvai iroXXa robs irap6vras avnpcara, nal oo~a avrbs inr aXXcov (sc. avrj' oorra.ro), Sia rb ayx'ivovs elvai raxb airetcplvero (because he ivas fond of learning). Remark 1. Many verbs and verbal expressions, which are commonly con- structed with an Inf. merely, sometimes take also the Inf. with the article t 6, 40 470 SYNTAX. [$ 309 even when they would have their object, if a substantive, in the Gen. The addition of the article gives greater emphasis to what is expressed by the Inf. X. C. 3. 6, 6. to ivkovaiooTepav ttiv it6\iv iroie7v avaf3akovfie&a. Th. 3, 1. rhv irkeiffTov ofxikov T&V lpik&v el p yov to fir) to. eyyvs ttjs rrokeoos Katcovp- yelv (etpyeiv two. twos). But when a preposition precedes an Inf., the article can never be omitted, because then the Inf. becomes an actual verbal substan tive. Eem. 2. As the Ace. of a substantive, so also the Inf. with the Ace. of the article, is used in exclamations and questions implying indignation. In poetry, however, the article is sometimes omitted with the Inf. X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. iice?i/os iravb avia&eis elite irpos eavT6u • Trjs tu%7js, Th ifie vvv Kkrj&evTa devpo t u% e iv ! (that 1 have just note been called hither !). Without the article : Aesch. Eum. 835. ifie ira&e7v Tade, (pev, 4 fie irakaioeppova kotol yav oIkcTv, arte' Toy, (pev, fivaos ! Rem. 3. There are many phrases, used as adverbial expressions, in which the article t6 is placed before the Inf. elvai which stands in connection with an adverb or a preposition and its Case. These must be regarded as adverbial Accusatives. See § 279, Rem. 10. The Inf. elvai denotes a state or condition, e. g. to vvv elvai, the present state, condition, and as an adverbial expression, with respect to, or according to the present state of affairs, pro praesenti tempcris conditione ; Th T-nfiepov elvai, pro hodierni diei conditions. X. An. 1. 6. 9. Th KaTa tovtov elvai (so far as he is concerned). H. 3. 5, 9 ~h fiev eir' eneivois elvai awokdokaTe (so far as it depends on them). $309B. The Participle. 1. The Participle represents the idea of the verb as an adjective idea, and is like the adjective, both in its form and in its attrib- utive use ; for it has three genders, and the same declension as the adjective, and cannot, more than the adjective, be used in- dependently, but must always depend upon a substantive, and hence agrees with it in Gender, Number, and Case. The Par- ticiple denotes either an active or passive condition, but the adjective, a quality. 2. On the contrary, the participle differs from the adjective, in retaining, like the Inf., the following properties of the verb : (a) The participle has different forms to denote the different circumstances of the action : duration, completion, and futurity \ e. g. ypdcjxov, writing, yeypas, ypdif/as, one who has ivritten, ypdif/- cdv, one who will ivrite (§ 257, Rem. 3) ; (b) The participle has Act., Mid., and Pass, forms, e. g. ypd\\r- as, ypaiJ/dpLtvos, ypaoiv, the writing boy ; or in connection with ekt, as a predicate ($ 238, Rem. 5), e. g. to pooW o,i/#ot5i/ lanv {the rose is blooming). (b) As the complement of the -verb, e. g. 'Opto rov iralda rpi^ovra. (c) To denote such an attributive qualification of the sub- stantive as is expressed in English by placing the participle after the substantive, or by the relative who, which, and the verb, e. g. Yvvrj ns opvtv ci^e koS iKacrrrjv rjpepav cow avrfj tlktov- aav (a hen laying, or which laid an egg daily). (d) To denote, adverbially, subordinate qualifications of the principal action, e. g. Kvpos yekiov et-n-ev (said laughing, or laughingly). Remark. As the use of the participle, mentioned under 3, (a), is explained in \\ 264, 1. and 238, Rem. 7, and as No. (c) has no further difficulty, only the usage mentioned under 3, (b) and (d) now remains to be considered. $310. 1. The Participle as the complement of the verb. 1. As the participle is an attributive, and consequently ex- presses an action as already attached or belonging to an object, only those verbs can take a participle for their complement which require, as a complement, an action, in the character of an attribute, so attached or belonging to an object, that this object appears in some action or state. The action or state de- noted by the participle is, therefore, usually 'prior to that denoted by the verb with which it is connected, sometimes coincident. 2. The construction is here evident. The Participle agrees in Case with the substantive-object of the principal verb, this object being in the Case which the principal verb re- quires. 'Akouco ^oiKpdrovs and rjKOvcra 7rore ^WKparovs 7repi (fiiXoiv SiaAeyop-evov. Xaipco cot and ^atpoy croi iX&ovrL. Opto av&pa)Trov and op co avS pa>7rov xp^ovra. 3. But when the subject of the principal verb is at the same time its object also, as OtSa (e'yco) e/xavrov Bv-qTov ovra, then the per- sonal pronoun, which would denote the object, is omitted, and the participle is put, by means of attraction, in the same Case 472 SYNTAX. f$ 310. as the subject of the principal verb, i. e. in the Nom. (Comp. § 307, 4), e. g. oTSa Svrjrbs &v. For more examples, see No. 4. Remark 1. Yet the Ace. of the personal pronoun and participle, as the object of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is to be made emphatic. Comp. § 307, Rem. 4. X. Cy. 1. 4, 4. oux, a icpeiTTaiv ijdei &>v, ravTa 7rpovKa\e?TO tovs ffvvouTas, aA\' 'direp ei> rjSei kavTbu r\TTOva out a, ravra i^rjpxe. 5, 10. irepieldov avrovs yfjpa adwdrovs yeyo/u,4vovs (they permitted to become enfeebled by old age). Rem. 2. With trvvoiZa, crvyyiyj/ctxr kco i/xavTcp, the participle can either refer to the subject contained in the verb, or to the reflexive pronoun which stands with the verb ; if the participle refers to the subject, it is put in the Nom., if to the pronoun, in the Dat., e. g. avvoiha (avyyiyvcao-Kta) ifxavry eS 7roffiaas or avvoiBa £/j.avT

a oi ffv- uo id a e7rt p.eu KOi/xaSuv &eav Kai irdvv irpcot a v io~t djiev ov, /ecu irdvv uiKpau 68bu /SaSi^ovra Kai ip.e av aivei&ovT a Trpo&v/j.ws o-vv&eav&ai. Also \ai&duco i/xavrbv ttoiwv ti (I conceal myself doing something,!, e. I do something secretly). X. An. 6. 3, 22 (ol tirireis) eAa^oy avTous iirl t$ \6cpu> yev6 pitvoi (reached the height unobserved). — With iomevai, to appear, to seem, to be like, and ojxoiov slvai, the participle in relation to the subject, sometimes stands in the Nom., though more frequently in the Dat., and with o/xoioy sivai, in the Dat. almost without an exception. X. H. 6. 3, 8. eoiicaTe rvpavvi ere t pi%ovT a. 'Akovgii/ with the Gen. when one hears with his own senses, or with the Ace. when one learns by hearsay. X. C. 2. 4, 1. ^Kovffa Sco/cpa-rous irzpl u S ia\eyo p. evov (I heard Socrates discoursing concerning friends). H. 4. 8, 29. tficovo'e tov 0/joctu- fiovXov irposiovTa (he heard that Thrasybulus was coming). Cy. 1.4,25. Kap.fivo-r)S tftcovcrev avhpbs tfSrj epya 8 ia% * tp * (df* zvov Tbv Kvpov. OlSa &vr)Tbs &v (I know that I am mortal). OlSa &v& pwir o v frvnTbi ivTa. Her. 3, 1. 3> PaaiAev, 8 lafiefiAriiJ. 4vo s virb 'Ap-do-ios ov jiav&dveis [do you not see that you have been deceived?). 40. r]Sv irvv& a vea&a 1 &v$pa ? 310.] THE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 473 ai vei ai over a (the soul appears to be immortal). Her. 6, 21. 'Afr-nvauoi drj\ov iir 01770- av vire pax&zo-&evre s rrj MtAi/Tou aA<*Scret (made it evident that they were exceedingly grieved on account of the capture of Miletus). Isocr. Evag. 190, d. ro7s iroir)ra7s robs Sreob s oT6v r iarl ir oirj a a t h al d laXeyo fxivovs Kal o'vvay&vi^o/j.evovs, ols av f3ov\i]§a>- 8e (pair] (pi\os elvai, rovrw e j> 5 77 A s iylyvero i it t j8 ovKevtav (he ivas evident loving no one, i. e. it was evident that he loved, etc.). PI. Apol. 23, d. /caTaSyjAot yiyvovrai irpos- iro lov [xev 1 /xev elSevai, elSor e s Se ouSeV. (c) Verba qffectuum, i. e. verbs which denote an affection or State of the mind, e. g. ^atpeiv, rjSeoSai, dyaAAeo-#ai, ayairav (to be content), d^ecr^cu, ayavaKTziv, alhucrSai and ala-^yvea-^ai (to be ashamed) , p.erap.eXelcr3aL, /xera/xeXet, opyi^toSai, /3apvveor$ai, paSioos, ^aAe7rtos (peptiv, etc. X. II. 6. 4, 23. 6 &ebs iroWaKis x ai P ei tovs fJikv fiiKpobs /.ceyd^ovs iroia>v, robs 8e fj.eyd\ovs fxiKpovs (rejoices to make the small great). Hier. 8, 4. 8 taKey 6 /x- €Uoi re ayaAAoVe&a ro7s irporeri/xriixevois fj.a\Kov, 77 ro7s iie rod Iffov tjluv ovai (we are proud to converse ivith those preferred in honor, etc.). Th. 1, 77. d 5t- kov /xevo t ol dv^pwivoi /xaWov opyi^ovrai, 77 /3 ta^o/xevo t (men are more indignant when they are injured than when they suffer violence). 4, 27 (oVP>J&T\vaioi) /xer efxeXovr o ras airovSas ov Se^d/xevot. 5.35. robs e/c rrjs vt)o-ov Secr- fiwras j.iere fxeXovr o a.7roS ed w k6 r e s. Eur. Hipp. 8. t t /x(t> [xevo t x ai ~ p v a j v (ol §eo\ ) b.vSpu>iru>v vtt6 (rejoice to be honored) . Xalp co o~oi 4\&6vr 1 (I rejoice that you have come). PL Rp. 475, b. virb o~y..Kporeptov Kal fxe&a (let us delight ourselves in feasting). II. a, 633. iirel t a p ir t] a a v is aWrjkovs 6p6v Kv^/xeav eoovrbv Aw fi&fxevos (began to mutilate himself). Tlavca a e dSiKovvra (1 cause you to cease doing wrong). Havofxai ae aoiK&v (I cease to do wrong tc you). X. 0.1,23. (at iirifrv/xlai) al k i£6 fxe v ai to acafxara twv avfrpdnrcav Kal ras ipvxas Kal tovs oIkovs ovirore Ariyovaiv, esT av &px<^o'iv avT&v (never cease to torment). Kal &\\a ye §77 fxvpia iir lAeiirw Xeywv (to omit in speaking). 'O aya&bs ovic iWetireraL ev ttolcov tovs evepyeTovvTas eavrSv (does not fail to do good to his benefactors). PL Phileb. 26, b. 186, b. 'dp^ofiai airb ttjs laTpiKrjs Key (a v. Menex. 249, b. tovs Te\evT7\aavTas Tifxcaffa ovSetroTe iliXeiirei \rj tt6\ls). ! 310. J THE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 475 (g) Verbs signifying to be fortunate, to distinguish one's self, to excel, to be inferior, to do well, to err, e. g. tvrvyziv, vlkolv, Kpa- tuv, rrrraoSai, ev iroitiv, ap.apTa.vav, aStKelv, etc. Her. 5, 24. e3 eTroirjaas clttikS fievos (you did well in coming, that you came). Th. 1, 53. a 5 i k e It e iroXe/xov apxovr es koX crirovZas Xvovtgs (you do wrong in beginning tear, etc.). 2, 71. ov 5 inaia tto telY e is yr\v tt)v UXaTaiewp o~t parevoyres. 'A/xa pr a ve is ravra it o iu>v (you are in fault in doing this). PI. Phaed. 60, c. ev y iiroiricras a v a fj. v 77 v, ov /at) aoi dvvoevrai avrix eLV 0T o us iroXefXT](TovTes (were preparing to wage tear). Without ws: 18 (ol UeXo-jroi/- vf)0~ioi) irposfroXas irapeCKevd^ovTO iroirjo'ofj.evoi. X. H. 4. 1, 41. irape o~ - Kevd^eTo iropevo-ofieu os. Her. 7, 158. 6 TeXoov iroXXbs iv 4 ice it o X4ywv (spoke urgently). 9,91. iroXXbs ij v Xiogq jxevo s 6 J~tivos (entreated earnestly, was all entreaties). 1, 98. AtjXSktjs i\v iroXXbs tnrb iravTbs avSpbs alve6fjievos (was much praised). 7. 10, 3. iravToto i iyivovT o 2/cifocu Se6 fjLevoi ''l&vuv Xvcrai Tbv ir 6 pov (earnestly entreated the Ionians to break down the bridge). (i) Certain expressions, mostly impersonal, e. g. it is fit, use- ful, profitable, good, agreeable, shameful, it is to my mind, and the like. ripe7ret /ioi aya&$ ovti and aya&$ elvai (it is proper for me to be good). Th. 1, 118. £irr\ptoT(i>v Tbv &e6v, et (sc. avTots) ir oXe fj.ov a iv d/xeivov ecrai (whether it will be better for them to engage in war). PI. Alcib. 1, 113, d. o-kottov- oiv, diroTepa awo'ia e t v pd\aa iv. After these expressions, however, the Inf. is more frequent, since the action of the dependent verb is not considered as already attached or belonging to the person, but as first resulting from the action implied in the above impersonal expressions. (k) The verb e'x et|/ > m the sense of to be in a condition or state, has an active, middle, or deponent participle joined with it, ir 476 SYNTAX. [$ 310 order to express the continued condition of the action (similar to the Latin aliquid pertractatum habere). Her. 3, 65. 5oA

(pSrdveiv followed by /cat, Kal ev&vs, may be translated by scarcely — when, nc sooner — than, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. 58, 86 (ol AaKe8aip6vioi) ovk ecp&Tjoav irv- bopevoi tov irepl ttjv ""Attik^v ivoXepov, Ka\ irdvrwv to>v &XXcav apeXijcravTes t\kov i)plv apwovvres (the Lacedaemonians no sooner heard of the war in Attica, tJian they left everything to come to our defence, or they scarcely heard when, etc.). So in the phrase, ovk av (pSrdvots rroiwv r t (you should do nothing quicker, i. e. you cannot do it too quickly, or do it quickly). X. C. 2. 3, 11. ovk av & avoir , '4erceive,to observe, to understand, to learn ; with the Inf. to think, to imagine (opinari). At a&dvo fiat s aaefiw Ka.Tah.voov rds Svaias (ex ALUS audivi). X. H. 1. 4, 11. avyx&ri eirl KaraaKoirij tuv rprnpoov, as eirvv&dve' ro AaKedaifJ.oviovs avrd&i irapao~Kevd£eiv. Th. 5, 55. 7r v &6p.e • vol robs AaKedaifioviovs e^earpaTevcr^ai. 7. Me/j.vr)cr&ai with a Part, to be mindful, to remember ; with the Inf. to con template doing something, to intend, to endeavor. Me/mv-nixai eZ irofnvas robs iroXiras (I remember to have done good) ; ev iroiyvai (I strive, wish, to do good). X. An. 3. 2, 39. p.e/xvn (r&oo avrjp aya&bs elvai (remember, strive, to be a man). Cy. 8. 6, 6 (ot aarpdirai) o ri av iv rfj yf] eKdxrrr) KaXbv r) aya&bv fj, p,e fivh aovrai Kal devpo air ore e p.rt e iv. S. 4, 20. p.e fivhar) diaKpi&rivai irepl rod KaXXovs (thou wilt prepare to contend with me). 8. 4> ai veer 3- ai with a Part, to appear, apparere, to show (trie's self; with an Inf. to seem, videri. 'Ev eoiKas fiacriXevs elvai. 10 'A77eAAeij' with a Pai't. is used of the annunciation of actual events ; with an Inf. of the annunciation of things still uncertain, merely assumed. Dem. 01. 2. (3). 29. 4. air r\yy eX^rj $iXnriros vpTiv ev QpaKT) rpirov $) re- Taprov eros tovtI 'Hpa'iov Te?x os ToXiopK&v (a settled fact). X. Cy. 1. 5, 30. 6 "Aaravpios els rrjv x^P av e fxfidXXe iv ayyeXXerai (whether he had made an actual irruption or not, is uncertain). 11. AeiKvvvai and arrocp aiveiv with a Part, to show, to point out; with an Inf. to teach. "ESei^d o~ e yeX&vr a (1 represent you laughing). Tloiu) a e yeXav (I cause you to laugh). PI. Symp. 174, c. aKXrjr op i-K oi-q a ev ('0/j.7]pos) eX&6vra rbv MeveXeiav eirl ttjv Soivqv (represent* J 311.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PA3.TICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 479 Menelaus coming unbidden to the feast). X. An. 5. 7, 9. iroiw 8 1 v fills i ^airaT-n^e vt as Kal KaTayoT)Tev&evTas vtt i/xov r/Keiv els «!>Sv 7roAe^iW 7r o \iopKovfj.4yn). Instead of the Part., the English often uses either a suhor dinate clause with the conjunctions when, after, while, since, because, as, inasmuch as, in order to, if, although, or a substantive with a preposition, e. g. Kvpos tV tt6\iu e\ibv av?ik&ei> (after Cyrus had taken the city, he returned, or after taking the city, etc.). 2. In English we often translate the participle by a verb, connecting it with its own clause by one of the above-named conjunctions, using as a subject either the word with which the participle agrees, or a pronoun referring to it. Oi iroKefjuoi (pvyovTes invo twv ttoX^jj-iosv eSiwx^Tjcraj/ (when the enemy fled, they were pursued by the enemy, or the enemy fled and were pursued). To?? Tlep aais ets ttjv yr\v elsfiaXovaiv of'EWrjves rjyavricaStrjffav (when the Persians made an irruption into the country, the Greeks went out against them). 3. In the examples given under No. 2, the participle always agrees with a substantive or pronoun which is connected with the principal verb, either as subject or in some other relation, and may then be called the dependent participle. But very often the substantive with which the participle agrees has no connection with any verb, but stands alone in the Genitive. This is called the Genitive absolute or independent, because it has no gram- matical connection with any other word in the sentence. X. O. 4, 2. t5>v ff ccfidr wv &T)\vv ofxewv, kol\ al ipvxal tto\v appcocrrSTepcu yiyvovTai (when the bodies are exhausted, the animal spirits become weaker). Remark 1. The Genitive absolute can never be used when the action refers to the subject ; in this case the participle must always be made to agree with the subject. It is otherwise in Latin, on account of there being no active par ticiples in the past tense ; the Latin must, therefore, use the Abl. Absolute, even when the action refers to the subject, e. g. oi a-rpaTiwrai tj)v iroKiv /ca&e- \6vt€s els rh pr\v Trpoa&ev atretxovTO Kepfi&v, alo~xP a vo/xl^oj/res elucu, tovtcov ovk airexovrai (after wasting their money, after, when they had wasted). An. 'A k o v tw rp6ivu> i£r)pl&fj.7ivtos Kal itrl x& 0i/ l dtpKOfievoio crol KoiXys irapa V7]vV-evos, in the beginning, origi- nally. Th. 4, 64. airep Kal apxo fi^vos el-rrou. (This is to be distinguished from ap^dfieuos air 6 tlvos, which may be translated, especially, before all. The Part, ap^dfievos agrees, for the most part, in Number, Gender, Case, with the substantive which is more exactly defined, e. g. PI. Ep. 600, e. ovkovv riStw- fiev airb 'Ofirjpov ap^afieuov s tt auras robs tto it) t ikov s fiifirjras eldco' Xcov apeTjjs thai, (that all the poets, particularly Homer, etc.). Sometimes, how- ever, the Part. ap^dfievos agrees with the subject of the sentence. PI. Symp. 173, d. SokzTs /J.OL aTex v &s irdvras av&pcvirovs a&Xiovs rjyelcr^ai ivXty ~%(»>KpaTovs, airb a fier some time, after a ivhile, subsequently, or SiaX. iroXvv, bxiyov xp., iir ictx^ 31 ' "xoxbv Xp^vov, p.iKp6v. PI. Phaed. 59, e. oi> ivoxbv ovu xp° vov * "" * °~ X ® v %**• Eem. 4. The Part, in the Gen. sometimes stands without a subject, when the subject can be readily supplied from what goes before, or when the subject is indefinite, where a demonstrative pronoun, or the words irpdyfiara xpVfJ- aTa ^ tv&pooiroi, etc., used in a general sense, may be understood. Th. 1, 116. Ilepi- 41 482 SYNTAX. [§ 312, kXy/s w'x 6T0 Kara rdxos iirl Kavvov Kal Kaplas, isayy 6 A 3- ivr oov, oti^oivhtctcu f^cs eV avTovs 7rXeovaiv (it having been announced that Phoenician ships were sailing against them). X. Cy. 1.4, 18. a ■*) p.av&evTo> v o\ tu 'AffTvdyei, on iroXepaoi eicriv eV t?7 %wpa e'|e/3o77&ei Kal auTos irpbs ret opia {it having been signified to Astyages), 3. 1, 38. S iacr kvv ovvtcov Se (sc. avT&v) fj.era rb delirvov, iiriipera 6 ¥.vpos. Also in the Sing. Th. 1, 74. cra|eTo (after the slaughter made at Marathon). See § 294, II, (2). The relation of indefinite time expressed by about, nearly, is indicated by vir6 with the Ace, e. g. inrb t))v izp&T-nv iireX&ov aav vvKra [§ 299, III, (2)], the coincidence or contemporaneousness of one thing with another, is expressed by dpi a with the Dat., e. g. a p.* rjp.4pa 8 ia aKp.d£ovT i (simulac frumentum adul- turn est). Pem. 6. In order to determine more exactly the relation of time, temporal adverbs are often used with the dependent participle and the Gen. absolute : avTiKa, ev&vs, i£ai irai^wv dsepx^Tai (while he played). Phaed. 77, b. '6-koos p.r) dp. a air o& vt)p.aTa KaXd iroieiYe (paivea&ai (collecting from many the most beautiful features of each, in this way you make the entire forms appear beautiful). (b) A cause or reason, where the English often uses subor- dinate clauses with since, because, as, inasmuch as, or a substan- tive with a preposition. X. C. 1. 2, 22. ttoXXoI Td %p-if\p.aTa dvaXu>cravT€s, Siv ivp6cr&ev direlxovTO Ktpdwv, alffxpd vop.i£ovT es elvai, tovtuv ovk airexovTai (many having squandered their estates, did not abstain from those gains from which they before abstained, because they accounted them base). Tct eVtr^Seia %x oieu * K r V s X&? as i noXXrjs Kal dyc&rjs oft an s (they might obtain supplies from the place, since, because, inasmuch as, it ivas extensive and fertile). (c) A motive, purpose, or object, where the English uses the Inf. with to, in order to, or a finite verb with that, in order that, so that. Generally, only the Fut. Act. Part, is used to denote this relation; sometimes also the Pres. Act., (§255, Rem 3) $ 312.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PAETICIPLE. 483 This usage occurs most frequently with verbs of going, coming sending. Her. 3, 6. rovro epxop-a-i- (ppdcruv (I have come to say this). 6, 70. is Aex cpobs xp7}p:evos robs iroXep.iovs iv'iK-^aev (conquered the enemy with great tact). Kem. 9. Here belongs the phrase X-npels ex^v, or in a question, ri 484 SYNTAX. [$ 312. X 77 p e Ts i%u>v ; i.e. ?/om fceep trifling so, or w% cfo ?/ow /cet;/) trifling so ?, ex os, and v used intransitively, summo studio, maximo impetu, dedita opera, with verbs of motion. Her. 8, 91. '6kcos 5e lives tovs 'A&nvaiovs Siacpvyoiei/,

v, (pep au, \a$wv, where the English may use the preposition with; %xav is used both of animate and inanimate objects, which may be in the possession of any one, dywv of animate objects, (pepwu of inanimate, Xafidov of both, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 3, 1. epx eTat V MavSdvq npbs rov iraTepa nal rbu Kvpou tov vibu exovcra (with her son Cyrus, etc.). So 6 Kvpos £i $*pu>v, Xafidiv, and dywu with verbs of giving, placing, etc., in order to present the idea of the action that preceded the giving and placing, graphically, as it were, before the eyes of the hearer. II.77, 305. Soke £ivi (bringing he gave, he brought and gave a sword studded with silver). 5. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Accusative is also used, but for the most part only when the Part, has no definite sub- ject, consequently where the verb from which the participle comes, is impersonal, e. g. e£ov (from e^eo-rt, licet), quum liceat, liceret, while, when, since it is or ivas allowed; or with impersonal phrases, e. g. alaxpov 6v {quum turpe sit, esset, while, because, since it is or was shameful.) The idea of extension in time, which is expressed by the Ace. ($ 279, 6), is, in this construction, trans- ferred to the state or condition of an object; the conjunctions while, when, express this corresponding relation. (a) Accusative absolute. PI. Menex. 246, d. rjfxiv i£bv (rjv ^ KaX&s, KaXws alpov/jLeSa /j.aXXov TeAevrav (since it is not in our power to live honorably). Protag. 358, d. OTav avayKao~&fj Svo7u ko.ko?v to eTepou alpe?o~&ai, ovdels Tb fJ.e?^ov alp'f)0'€- tch, i£bv Tb iXaTTov (alpeTa&ai), no one will choose the greater, when it is in his power to choose the less. Her. 1, 129."Apra7os, irapehu avTw fHacriXea ysvea&ai, &XXw irepie&r)Ke to Kp&Tos (when it was in his power to become a king). 5, 49. napexov (quum liceat) ttjs Ao-'itjs Trdarjs dpx^iu ^ireTews, 'aXXo ti aip-rjereo-^e ; Th. 5. 14. (ol 'A3-77i>a?ot fxcTefxeXovTO, oti [asto, ra iv XlvXw (yevo/jLeva), KaXws ira- > a o~x & v, ov £wefir]o-av (when a favorable opportunity presented itself). So v tt dp • Xov, quum liceat, liceret; Ziov, quum opus (necess*) sit, esset ; 8 6 £av clvtois (quum iis visum sit or esset, when it pleased them, when they had decreed) ; don ovv (quum videatur, videretur) ; 7rpos77K:oj/ (quum deceat, deceret). Passive participles: Th. 1 125. 8 ed oy fxe vov Se avTois, ev&vs fxev dSvvaTa $\v iirixeipeiv airapcuT* kcihh , oIo-lv (and though they had determined, it was not possible for them, etc.). E t oij ? 312.] THE PARTICIPLE. 485 jievov (quum dictum sit, esset). Adjectives with 6v, e.g. SrjXov 6v (quum appareat, appareret) ; aSrjAov 6v, dvvarbv ov, aSvvarov ov. Also some* times without ov, Q. g. SrjAov, avay KaTov. (b) Accusatives absolute. Though the participles of impersonal verbs usu- ally have no subject joined with them in the Ace. Absol., yet a neuter pronoun. not a substantive, may be joined with them as their subject. Her. 2, 66 ravra y iv6fiev a, rcev&ea fieyaXa robs Alyvirrlovs Kara\a/ifidvei (when this is done, the Egyptians are filled with great grief). Th. 4, 125. f/5?7 afi v rovru v. Cy. 4. 5, 53. r ovrov o~w$okovv- tos (acc. to the best MSS.). 4.5,53. r ovrov ovras ex ovT0S - Also 5o£- av ravra (from e5o£e ravra) occurs. X. An. 4. 1, 13. 86%av ravra, itch- pv^av ovra iroielv (when this ivas approved, they gave orders by the herald to do ac- cordingly). With such impersonal verbs as contain the subject in a measure in themselves, the Gen. is used, e. g. vovros, a-akiri^ovros [§ 238, 5. (b)]. Elsewhere the Gen. but very seldom occurs with impersonal verbs and phrases, e. g. X. Hipp. 4, 2. a 5 7] A ou ovros, el kt\. 6. The particle of comparison w?, is connected both with the dependent Part. (§ 312, 3), and also with the Gen. and Acc absolute, when the idea expressed by the Part, is to be in- dicated as a representation, as a subjective view, opinion, o? purpose of the actor or speaker. This ws has the same signifi- cation as a Part, of a verb of thinking or saying, followed by an Inf., or Acc. with an Inf. The English can express this ws by the expressions thinking, intending, ivith the intention of, saying, or by as though, as if under the pretence that, because. (a) Simple Participle. X. Cy. 1. 1, 1. olrvpavvelv eirixeip-fio-avres, kav 6nro- covovv XP^ V0V 'dpxovres Siayevcavrai, &avfid£ovrai, ws ffox iKavrjs ovarjs rrjs 'Attiktjs, airoiKias e^eirejxtyav (i.e. vofii^ovres ovx iKavw eivai) (afterward sent colonies to Ionia, thinking that Attica was not large enough). (c) Accusative absolute. X. An. 5. 2, 12. o Se ro7s ireXTao , Ta7s irucri iraprjy- yeXXe 8i7]yKvXufj.evovs Uvai, us, birorav o-n/x'fjvr], aKOvrl^eiv Serjaov (he com- manded all the peltasts to advance, ready to shoot, saying, that it would be necessary for them to hurl their javelins, etc.). PI. Pp. 425, a. to7s rifieTepois iraialv ev- vofxuTepov ev&bs iraiSias fxefreKTeov, us, ira.pav6jj.ov yiyvofj.evr]S avrrjs, ivvojxovs re Hal awovSaiovs dvSpas av£dvecr§at aSvvarov 6 v. Sows e|oV, us irapov, etc. (d^, Accusatives absolute. X. C. 1. 2, 20. Sib Kal robs vle7s ol iraTepes airb tuv irovypuv au&puiruv e'ipyovcriv, u s tt)j/ p.ev tuv xP' n0 ' Tai/ b/xiXiav do~K7]crtv ovaav tjjs aperrjs, tt]v Se tuv Trovnpuv KaTaXvffiv (assured that, knowing that, the intercourse with good men leads them to practise virtue). 3, 2. evx^To ~Zuk- parr/S irpbs robs &eobs airXus rayc&a SiSovai, us robs &eob s KaXXicrra elSSras (thinking that, convinced that, the gods knew what was best). This con- struction is very common, and is not limited to a pronominal subject, like the one mentioned in No. 5, (b). Perhaps this construction is not absolute, but depends upon a verb of perception to be supplied, indicated by us. Rem. 12. A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connection with us, oc- curs with the verbs elSevai, eirlo-Tacr&ai, voe7v, %x* LV yv&p.T\v, Sia- jxe7s, ovru ?r)c yvdov-nv e%eTe (as if then I shall go, etc., seeing then that I shall go, so form your opinion, i. e. be assured that I shall go wherever you go, me iturum esse, quocunque etiam vos, statuite). Cy. 2. 3, 15. us ovu 4/j.ov ye Kal ayuviov/xevov Kal, oirolos dv ris u, Kara t^v d£iav p.e Ti/mav di-KocovTO s, ovrus, e t vyx&v 0U(r> '& 6f V' v vv. — (c) Geni- tive. Her. 4, 132. Aapeiov 7} yvw/x-n eyv (= iyiyvcoo-Kev) eiK&Qwv. Th. 4, 23. ra ireol TlvXov vir ap.(p or 4 pav Kara Kpdros eiro A e/xe ?ro (=== ra irepl IT. a.fj. v i]rop). 458, sq. r<2 k4 ol iyKecpa\6s ye b~ia aiveos &\Avdis aAA?7 £-6 ivo /.lev ov paiono irpbs ovSe'i. II. £, 140. 'ArpelSri, vvv 8-f) irov 'A % f A Atj o s oAoby K?ip yrj&ei ivl o~T7)&eff(ri (povov /cat V0V (I know not how long). With conjunctions and other particles, it signifies : (a) even, precisely, e. g. ws 8 77, "va 877, indeed, just exactly, just even; (b) truly, assuredly, when a thought is to be expressed with assurance and decision, e. g. % 877, 7) jxdXa 877, Kal 877, 8 77 7rou, certainly indeed, assuredly, ov 87^ ttou, yet surely not at all, certainly not, yap 877, for surely. 3. A 77 to, which is formed from 8 77, serves like 877, only in a higher degree, to render prominent, and more exactly define the word, which stands before it. It may be joined with all the parts of speech, in order to define them, whether it be to extend or restrict them. It is very often used after inten-ogatives, e. g. rt 8771-', iireiSav touto ysvtyrai ; (quid tumdemum dicetis, quum hoc factum erit ?). It is also quite frequently employed in answers (even so, precisely so, certainly so). Also, 7) drjT a, yes, forsooth, ov Srjra (minime vero, no, by no means), ^77 drJTci \fiay, do not), e. g. /r)? 8 ?]t a Spdans Tama ; Kal 8 tJtcc (and forsooth, and truly). 4. The enclitic &i\v is a Doric particle, but it also appears in the Epic Ian 490 SYNTAX. [$ 3t6l guage. In Homer, &t)v has always an ironical sense, like the Attic Stjttov, without doubt, certainly. II. )8, 276, ov &t)v jxiu tt, orav /xev iirl rod 'linrov yeva>i*ai, to rod 'nnroKtvTavpov Stjttov&gv SiaTrpd£ofxai (I shall, as I hope, act the part of a centaur). 7. Aai is a lengthened form of Si) (as vai of vi)). It is nsed only in the phrases ti Sal; ttws Sat ; it expresses the idea of surprise, wonder (what then? Jww so ? airt tu ? itane ? itane vero ?). § 316. B. Confirmative Adverbs. 1. M?)c (Dor. and Ep. pdv) expresses, like vero, confirmation, assurance, as- severation, truly ; often also, like vero, it is used aduersatively : still, but. But it cannot stand as the first word in a sentence, as it commonly depends on another word, and that the most important in the sentence, particularly on particles. Its use with particles is as follows: (a) ? H \xt\v, surely, certainly, hence used particularly with oaths, asseverations, or solemn promises. X. Cy. 4. 2, 8. ra ■kktto. SiSuxTiv aurols, ?) /xtjv &s 87), quite certainly, yea indeed; always in the phrases 7) uei/Sfa $ 317.J EMPHATIC SUFFIXES Trip, ye, rot. 491 ou /xevSr), d\Aa /xeud-f], nal fj-evS-n, ye fieu — Stj instead of ^ p^v di) t etc. On the concessive piv, see § 322, 3. 2. ? H expresses confirmation (profecto). In order to strengthen it, jx-hv is often joined with it. ^H irov, surely indeed, often ironically. The Epic ^toi like ^, expresses assurance : surely, certainly. 3. N v in Epic, expresses also an asseveration, but generally in an ironical or scornful manner (like the Attic drfirov), indeed, forsooth, certainly, nempe. 4. N t], the Lat. ??ae, expresses an asseveration, but only in affirmative sen- tences, e. g. j/fy rbu Ala, in truth, surely. — Erom vt] is formed the lengthened v a i (as Sat from 817), which has the same meaning, and is often used with pd. — M a likewise denotes an asseveration ; in affirmative sentences : u a I /u.a rbu Aia ; in negative : ob p. a rbu Ala. But where pa Ala stands without a nega- tion, then a negative clause precedes or follows, or it is clear from the context and from an accompanying adversative particle, that the sentence is to be un- derstood as negative, like X. C. 3. 13, 3. § 317. C. Emphatic suffixes Trip, yi, roi 1. Hep is the enclitic, and hence the abridged form of the adverb -nipt, through and through (Lat. per). The radical meaning of irip is through and through [throughout), nip agrees with ye in that, like the latter, it gives empha- sis to the word with which it is joined, but it differs from ye, in making the emphasis extensive (consequently denoting the measure, size, the extent of the idea) ; ye, on the contrary, makes the emphasis intensive (consequently de- noting degree, the inward strength or force of the idea). In the Common Language, irip is not used alone, but in relation to another thought. Hence it is often connected with conjunctions and relatives, e. g. osrrep, throughout, en- tirely, the very saim who, oaosirep, altogether as great as, precisely as great, otos irep, entirely, exactly of such a character as, etc., ottov irep, just where, wherever, o&ev irep, just whence, whence soever, ecus irep, tip to the very time, as far as, until, eVet wep, since, eVeiSry irep, forasmuch, seeing that, whereas, ehtep, if indeed, if even. In Eng. the meaning of both particles is often given by merely emphasizing the word to which they belong. 2. r e denotes intension, an inward force, certainty, assurance, and thus ren- ders an idea emphatic and distinguishes it from others ; it may be used either to augment or restrict the force of a word, e. g. eysre either with the Ind. or Opt. ; (g) in adjective clauses, with os, Ssris, etc., Avhich denote a concrete, objective attributive explanation ; (h) when an absolute negative meaning is to be given to a single word in a sentence, e. g. ok ayaSros, ov /ca/ccSs ; in this case ov sometimes changes the idea of the word to an opposite sense. (a) Tovto ov ylyverai, ovk eyevero, ov yevT]orerai. Tavra ovk av yiyvoiro. — (b) Ol5a, oil nravra ovk eyevero. "'EAeyef, ori tovto ovx ovrcas e?%er. — (c) Tis ovk alcrxvveTai (or ovk au alo~x vvOLTO ) «aKa Xeyap rbv aya&bv avdpa; — * Ap" ov fravjxd^eis top ~2,toKpdTn ; — Ob dpdcreis tovto; — Ov irepijxeue7s (§255, 4). — <£??s, v) ov ; or avdyKt] Si)irov ce ayvoelv, Kev6v ye tivra Ttdo"ns (ppovhaecos. Isae. 5, 14. ov Set vpas e/c twv tov ks vp?v KeivTai, r) ^77, aAA.' e'/c tu>v vopwv robs tov KarrjySpov \6yovs, el op&ws vpas diSd^ovai 7b irpaypa, r) ov. But in those dependent questions, in which there is merely & distinction between what is, and what is not, pi) is used, when the predicate of the first member is not repeated, but must be supplied ; but v as well as p i), when it is repeated. Dem. Cept. § 142. \oyio~ao~&e irpbs vpas avTovs, ri re o~vpfii)creTai KaTetyrjcpto-pevots vp7v tov v6pov Kal ri fir]. X. C. 3. 6, 10. olcr&a, 6ir6ffat Te oS>/xa r)fxas eVn-MjTTet &STe fxr) dvvacr&ai inr'' avrou KaSopav Ta\r)&es. — (g) PI. Ap. 21. a fxr] olda, ovde oXopai elh~evai (^ ei' Tiva fxij aiiSa). Hence '6 t 1 pi), unless, nisi (properly ovbev '6ti pi), then generally instead of ei ixi)), '6aoi pi), except those who not. Her. 1, 32. iv t$ paicpcp xP^ ur P noWa pev eVn 42 194 SYNTAX. [$318 iSeW, to(=&) pr) tis 4&4\ei (multa, quae ita sunt comparata, ut, one can see manj things of such a nature that he would not wish to see). Andoc. 3, 41. iprjcpicrao-d* roiavra, e£ u>v pr/S 4 it or e vpuv p,eTapeAr)o-€i. — (h) M77 Te&i/rjKev 6 rrarrip ; (my father is not dead, is he ? = is it not to be feared that my father is dead ?) Qofiovpai, p.r\ 6 ttolt^p T4Si>T}Kev ; (I fear that my father is dead, I am anxious to know whether my father is dead). Mr? Spdtreis tovto; (you will not do this, will you?). Mr) Sei\ol eoS/xe&a ,- (we shall not be cowards, shall we? shall we be cow- ards?). Mr) voaeis ; ^Apa pr) vocrzis ; (you are not sick, are you?). — (i) Ar. Eccl. 999. pa T7)v 'AcppodiTrjv . . p.r) 'yea 0' a(pr)occ (I will not let you go, the thing shall not be). Aor. 194. pa. y rj v . . p. r\ '70b vonpa Kopip6repov r)Kovcrd irca, Beware! 1 have not listened. Mr) is not unusual with the Inf. X. An. 7. 6, 13. bpvvw iplu &£Ovs airavras Kal irdaas prjdkt. 4pol Idia vtt4o'x^to 'Zev&rjs ^X eLJ/ ' Remark 1. In all the instances above given, except (a) (b) (g), ov is used when a single word in the sentence is to be made negative, e.g. Oi p,ev ; negemus? Isocr. Paneg. 71, 6. \af36vres 4£aKisx^i-ovs r5>v 'EWrjvwv, ot iv rous avTuv ovx otoi t r)oav Cr)v (nequirent) ; hence in the combinations ovdels Ssris ov; ouSevbs orov ov, etc. (§ 332, Rem. 12); so also in ovk eKpdT7)V 7repi tovs hzobs p. r) »j>s ovk eluai &eobs 4vop.i£ev; X. C. 4. 8. 2. 6 p.o \oye?rai ovZ4va ira twv pvnpovevop4vwv av- bp&irwv KaKKiou bdvarov iveyKtiv. More frequently pr), as: Isocr. Phil. 109. wpoKoyovv prjdevbs irdnroTe toctovtov irpdyparos h'lapapTciv. Id. Dem. 22. vopi^e pr]S4v elvai twu avfrpooirivoov /8e/3atoj/. Rem. 3. When an abstract substantive or substantive adjective stands in- stead of the Inf., then either ovk or pr) may be used, according to the nature of the clause into which the substantive or the substantive adjective may be resolved, e. g. Ar. Peel. 115. Seivbv 8' 4v Kal pr) Seivcov avdpela icrriv, PL Ol5a ce ravra v itovi\o~avra. "HyyeiAe r\\v tt6Xiu v iroXiopK7}^e?(rav. Protag. 360, d. used in philosophical definitions of an ideal assumption ; on the contrary to. ov Seivd objective, used of actual dangers. X. Cy. 1. 2, 7. ov au yvGxri dwdfiei/ou /xhu %°-? lv cwroSiSoVai, jit ^ airodidovrafih, KoXa^ovci rovrov lo~xvpol>s (= £dv Tiva ktX. ) (whoever they knew capable of repaying a kindness, if he did not repay it, they, etc.). 3. 1, 16. ri yap av . . xp^°" atT ' 'dv ris Icrxvpy $1 avdpeiw [x ^ o~oj ovSenore els aXn&rj ici(ero, 8>sre fi)) y\o-vxd(Taa a av£r)&r)i/ai (i.e. &s7e /j.^ i]0~vx° LO ~ al Kc ^ M^ 496 SYNTAX. [$ 318 a.i). "Where the negative is so placed, it must be considered as belong- ing to the whole sentence, and not to a single word. 7. Ov jxt) with the Subj. or Put. Indicative, is elliptical, since with o'ok «'i verb denoting anxiety or fear, which is sometimes also expressed, must be sup- plied, and (XT) must be referred to this verb. Hence ov /xr) is used, when the idea to be expressed is, it is not (ov) to be feared that (/xr)) something will happen, e. g. oh (p7j ovk awo^dvp (ne non mo- riatur, I fear that he will 7iot die) ; iSeSoiKeiv, (XT] ovk airo&dvoi (ne NON morere- tur, I feared that he would not die) ; SeSoiKa, /xrj ov Te^urjKev (ne non mortuus sit, that he is not dead). 1 In expressions of fear, there is always a double idea in the mind, the fear, that something will take place, and the hope that it Avill not. This double idea both the Greek and Latin seem to indicate by using a negative after verbs of fear, the negative being referred to a verb of hoping understood ; but as the idea of fear only is expressed in English, the negative is rendered that. Hence Aedoi- <*, ny airo&dvr) (metuo, ne moriatur, I fear that he will die, but hope ilvit he will not) $ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND {Jirj. 197 9. Even when, instead of the Inf., the conjunctions on, us with the finit< verb follow expressions of doubt and denial, the negation is sometimes repeated m the dependent subordinate clause by ob. X. R. Ath. 2, 17 apv €?a&ai ro?s aWois, on ob uraprjv (to deny to others that he was present). PL Meno. 89, d. Sn §' ovk ecrnv iiriarr]pr], aKetyai, edv cot Soku eiK6rus amo-relv (but consider whether I seem to you justly to doubt that this is knowledge). Dem. Onet. 871, 14. us S 5 ovk eKe?vos iyeccpyei rrjv yr\v, ovk ydvvar dpvn&rjvai. (he could not deny that he cultivated the land). Isoc Archid. § 48. obdels av ToAp.Tjo'eiev dvr e lively, us ob r^y ep.Treipiav paKkov tuv aXkuv exop.ev. Rem. 7. So even after ob p.dKXov (or when the clause in which paXXov stands, has a negative sense), ob is sometimes used, which in English is pleo- nastic. Comp. the Erench, where after a Comparative que ne is regularly used, e. g. II donne plus que vous rC avez donne, for the purpose of giving em- phasis to the idea of diversity (consequently a negative idea), which is contained in the Comparative (the gift of one is different from, not like that of the other). Her. 4, 118. rjKei 6 Heparjs ovdev ri uaWov eV Tjpeas, 7) ob kcl\ eirl vpeas (does not come against us more than against you) . X.H.6.3, 15. ti olv Set (= ob 5e?) iKelyoy rbv xpovov dvap.eveiv, ews by virb irXrj^ovs kcikuv dveiirup.ev, paXkov, 7) v x us Taxio-fct- tV elpr)vr)v iroirjaao-^ai ; in Th. 3, 36. the negation is contained in p.erd- void rts i\v abrols (they repented = they no longer approved). HXt}v ob is some- times used in a similar manner. X. R.L. 15, 6. edpas ivdvres vTravlcrravTai fiaaiXeis, ttK^v ovk e%i (i]pds) v/3pt(op.evovs dirobavelv (what hinders us from dying after being treated with insult); Vect. 3, 7. ov ovseXiris elp.i ib pA} ou^l irpo&v- ixus av robs itoXiras els rd Toiavra els(pepeiv (I am not without hope that the citizens would contribute for such purposes). Cy. 2. 2, 20. aiaxp° v ('— ob KaXbv) ov dvnXeyeiv, p.7] ou%i rbv ivXetara koX irovovvra Kal ucpeXovvra rb Koivbv, tovtov koI p.eyio'Tuv d£iovo~&ai. Rem. 8. It is seldom in this case that pi) is used instead of pa] ob with the Inf. With the real negative expressions, b dvvapai, ddvvaTos, obx olds t el/j.1, obde [j.ia p.7)Xv'n eo~ri (=oi» dvvar6v ecniv),ov irei&u, obx oo~i6v ea t iv, ovk z\k6s iff t iv (it is not pr'obable), ov (so that all were ashamed [= none were willing] NOT to be busy). — Sometimes jxt) ov occurs after negative sentences with participles also, in the sense of if not, except, instead of the usual ixj). PI. Sys. 212, d. ovk Zvti (pixoi, tS) (piXovvri ovShu p.)] ovk avricpiXovv (nothing is lovely in the eyes of the lover, except that which returns love). SE CTION II. SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. CHAPTER VII. § 319. A. Coordination. When two or more sentences stand in a close connection with each other, there is a two-fold relation to be distin- guished. They are either so related to one another as to exhibit a unity of thought, though each is, in a measure, independent of the other, e. g. Socrates ivas very ivise, Plato also was very ivise ; or so, that they are wholly uni- ted, the one defining and explaining the other, the one being the dependent member of the other, e. g. when the spring comes the roses bloom. The first kind of connection is called Coordination, the last Subordination, and the sen- tences Coordinate and Subordinate. . In coordinate sen- tences, therefore, the members are independent of each other, but in subordinate sentences, one member is de< pendent on the other. I came, I saw, I conquered. — Coordinate. Wlien I came, I conquered. — Subordinate. ^ 320, 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 499 Remark 1. The coordinate as well as the subordinate conjunctions are properly used only to connect whole sentences ; but when several sentences have single members in common, these common members are usually expressed but once. In this way the sentences are either contracted into one sentence, the subject or predicate common to the sentences being expressed but once ; or there is at least an abbreviation of the sentences, each sentence having its own separate subject, but the predicate common to the sentences being expressed only with the subject of one sentence. O I "E A A 77 v e s to?s iroXefiiots £ire& eu- ro Kal Ka\£)s i jxax^°' a VT 0. ~Zo}KpaTr]s Kal Yl^aruv o'ocpol i\aav. Ot fx\v "EA- kr\ves irapa.Tovirorap.6u, 01 Se Ylepaai eV opecriv iffTpaToire?>evo~avTo. Rem. 2. In respect to the grammatical form of connection, all coordinate sentences ai-e alike ; they are all treated grammatically as principal sentences ; but in respect to their meaning and logical relations, they may be different. For every thought which forms a complementary member of another thought, can be expressed in a coordinate sentence, as was always the case, in the ear- liest use of language, e. g. Tb zap i|A&e, Kal to. p6da av&e?, instead of ore to zap ^ A3- e, to. p. a. (the spring came and the roses bloom, instead of when the spring has come the roses bloom). $320. Different forms of Coordination. Coordination consists either in expanding, contrasting, or ex- cluding a thought. The first is called copulative coordination, the second adversative, the third disjunctive. Sentences alsc which stand in a causal relation to each other, may be coordi- nate, and are called causal coordinate sentences. § 321. I. Copulative Coordination. 1. A copulative coordinate sentence is one in Avhich two or more thoughts which are considered independent, are so united together, that the thought ex- pressed in the coordinate sentence, gives a greater extent to the thought of the preceding sentence. A copulative coordinate sentence is either annexive or enhansive ; in the former, a second thought or clause is merely joined to a pre- ceding one ; in the latter, the statement made in the sentence applies with more force to the second member than to the first. An annexive coordinate sentence is made : — (a) By Kai, et, and, more seldom in prose by the enclitic re, que, and; Kal and re have, in general, the same difference of meaning as et and que. Kai connects members of a sentence equally important, or those in which the one following is stronger than the one preceding ; hence it often strengthens or enhances the idea of the preceding member or is a more full explanation of it (ac, atque, et quidem) ; re appends some addition which belongs to the preceding member ; in prose, words are seldom connected by a simple -re, but sentences much oftener. — (b) in a more emphatic and definite manner by Kai — Kai, *t — et, both — and, not only — but also, more seldom by t e — re; the difference between the two in this case is, that with the former ( Kai — km) the single members appear more independent and forcible, than with the latter (re — t«) : 500 SYNTAX. [§ 321 hence the former is used, when the members are of different kinds or are anti thetic ; — (e) by t 4 — k a i, both — and, not only — but also, when it is to be indi- cated that the connected members stand in an intimate connection with each other; by the stronger k a i, the second member is emphatically joined to the first ; they often correspond with the Lat. quum — turn, when the discourse pro- ceeds from the general to the particular and more important. ~2,a)KpaT7)S Kal Uxdrccu aocpol i\ffav. PI. Apol. 23, a. -q av&pwrrivr) (T0p KaKwv eyiyveTO. Remark 1. Kat has this strengthening, intensive force also, when it stands at the beginning of a question, where the interrogate/ takes up, with surprise, the remark of another, and from it draws a conclusion, which shows the nul- lity or absurdity of the other's statement. X. Cy. 4. 3, 11. aXX' etiroi ns &i>, otl ircuSes ovTes epdvSavov ; — Kat iroTepa Tra?Ses elai cppovLpcuTepoi, wst e pa&e7v Ta Kal Xeovres Kal Kairpoi k al irapSaXeis • al Se eXacpoi Kal SopKaSes Kal oi dypioi uies Kal oi bvoi oi dypioi do~ive7s elcnv, (e) Te' — Te, etc., Kai (Epic.) Od. y, 413. 'Exe(ppcov Te ^Tparios Te Uepaevs t 'AprjTos t e Kal avribeos @papa, ire pi re elpfyys Kal iroX4/xov, 2w«poT ovs re ao(pia Kal apery. If Te belongs to the whole sentence, it is usually joined to the first word of the sentence. Her. 6, 123. o'irives e(pevy6u r e rhu irdura XP 01,0V tovs rvpdvvovs, 4k /j.t]X av y 5 * e rr\s rovrcau i£4Xiirov ot Heio-icrr parioai r))v rvpavvloa. It is, also, often joined to the predi- cate of the sentence, if that precedes, although it would stand after another word. X. C. 3. 5, 3. & (qua re) iroXXol iiraip6/j.evoi irporp4irovrai re apery's iirifj.eXe7 ^al avr'iKa, Kal vvv or en Kal vvv — Kal ws, Kal ovrcos (vel sic), — Kal p.6vos, Kal els. With questions, e. g. Dem. Phil. 1, 53. rl xpy Kal irpos- Sokolu; (what is only to be expected even?) (= nihil plane expectandum. est) In Homer, after a temporal protasis, this k a I often introduces an apodosis, and may then be translated by immediately. II. a, 478, ^p.os 8 1 ypiy4veia SOfe SYNTAX. [$ 32. s ovSe ri/xccpias. Th. 3, 14. eirafivvare . .Kal /j.7] irp6't)cr&e rj/xas. PI. Lysid. 207, e. eucriv dpa ffe a fiovXei iroielv Kal ovSev eTrnvX-nrrova-iv, ovde diaK0t}\vovv av eTr&v/j.r]S. — Oi)T6 &eol, ovre avdrpancoi. — X. An. 2. 2, 8. &ixocrav . . jxi]re irpod^ffeiv aXX-fiXovs crv/jL/xaxol re ecrecr&ai. 5. 1, 6. ovre ayopd ear iv licavf), % re x&pa iroXe/nla. Th. 1, 118. ol AaKeSai/x6vioi aloSo/j.- evoi ovre eKooXvov, el /xtj enl (Zpaxv, T\a-vx a ^°' v T e T ^ ^Aeoj/ rod xp^ov. Rem. 6. The following connective forms are more rare, and belong mostly to poetry, viz., oijre — ov, ov — ovre; re ov — r 4 ; ovre — re ov ; in the two last forms ov combines with the verb and forms, as it were, one thought. Th. 2, 22. 'EkkAtjctiW re ovk eno'iei . ., tt]v re ttoXiv efyvXaao-e (he called, no assembly and guarded the city); 1, 126. oire eKeivos en Karev6-nx ottws — aXXa /cat, not only not — but even, or ovx ottws or fi)j '6tvu)s — a A A' ovSe,not only not — but not even. ('Oirws = hoiv, I say not or ( Imp. ) say not how, which involves the idea, I say not or say not, that not.) Also py tin (followed by &A A' ovSe) is used in the sense of not only not, when both clauses have a common predicate, and this stands in the last clause. Dem. Cor. 271,1. o b x finus X° L P iv <*vto7s (Tols'A&wvatois) ex^LS aXXa fxia^doaras aeavrbv Kara, rovrcovl iroXirevr} (non modo non — sed etiam). Dem. Phil. 2, 67. [robs Gnfiaiovs fjyelro) ovx ^ 7rcy ^ avriirpd^eiv Kal SiaKuXvaeiv, aAAa Kal o~vgt par evcreiv. Isocr. Plataic. 586. ovx otwj rrjs koivTjs eXev&eptas fj.erexofJ.eu, &AA 5 ovSe SovXelas fierplas 7i£L(&frnfj.ev rvx^v (non modo non — sed ne — quidem). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. U7) '6 ir cas bpx^a^at ev pv&fjt.q>, a A A 5 ovfi' op&ova&ai eSvvaa&e (non modo non saltare poteratis, sed ne rectis quidem pedibus stare). Isae. 10, 1. eyb /x^ Sri iirep &XXov, a A A' ovSe inrep efiavrov irdtiroTe Slktiv 15'iav e'lprjKa (as in Latin: non modo de alio, sed ne de me quidem unquam causam dixi, instead of non modo non, the Latin using non modo — sed ne — quidem, instead of non modo non — sed ne — quidem, when both the clauses are negative, and the common predicate of both is in the latter clause). Pvem. 9. When ovx 8t* — dAA' ovSe has the sense of not only — but not even, the predicate of the first member contains a negation, or at least has a negative sense. Th. 2, 97. Tavrn (rfj Z£kv&wv tVxui") advvara (sc. icriv) e|- tarova&ai ovx '6tl ra ev tj? ~Evpctnrr), dA A 3 obftevrrj 'Acia e&vos. (Scytharum potentiae non modo Europae imperia exaequari non possunt, sed ne Asiae quidem gens). Dem. 702. ovx #ti tusv ovtwv air ear epi)fi'nv 'av, a. XX' ouS' av e(nv. (In airecTT epri/xvu is contained the idea: non haberem.) Also fit) or i followed by dAA' ovSe is used in a similar manner, since a negative precedes ^ on. X. C. 1. 6, 11. tt)V oiKiav t) &XXo ti wv KeKrrjcrai, vofiifav apyvpiov d^iov elvai, obdevl av fir] on irpoiKa doiws, dAA' ouS' eXarrov Trjs a£ias Xafiwv (you would not only not give your house to any one gratuitously, but not even for a less price, ijian it is worth ; properly you would give to no one, not to say, gratuitously, nay not eeen for a less price, etc.). (c) Ov(k) — aXXa Kal, not — but even; ov(k) — dAA 5 ovSe, not — nay *iot even. Dem. Mid. 24. ov irovnp6s, aAAa Kal irdvv xpvo"r6s. X. C. 2. 3, 8. rbv Kal \6yq> Kal epyw ireipdofievov ifie aviav ovk av dwaifinv ovt' ev Xeyeiv ovt ev iroielv, dAA' ovSe ireipdo-ofxai. An. 1. 3, 2. (SapeiKobs) Xafi&v ovk els rh fdiov Kare^e/j.r]v efxoi, aAA' ovSe Ka^r}5vird^r)cra, dAA' els vfxas eSairdvcav. (d) OvSe — p.)] '6ti, not even — not to say, much less (ne-quidem — nedum). X. Symp. 2, 26. Kal ovSe avairveiv, fxr] 8rt Xeyeiv ri 8vvricr6fj.e&a (we shall bf able not even to breathe, to say nothing of speaking, or much less to speak). 504 syntax. [$ 322. $ 322. II. Adversative Coordinate Sentences. 1. An adversative coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses that stand in opposition to each other, are united and form one thought. la) The opposition is of such a nature, that the thought expressed in the coordinate clause either wholly abrogates the thought of the preceding clause, since another thought is substituted for it ; this is done : (a) by placing the conjunction aXXd (but) in opposition to a preceding negative; (b) by placing the conjunction aXXd together with the negative ov in opposition to a pre- ceding affirmative ; in the last case, aXXd may be translated and, or be wholly omitted: (a) ov% ol irXovcnoi ev5ai[xov4s elcriv, a A A 1 oi aya&oi. (b) 'E/cel^ej/, a A. A.' ov k eVd-eVSe rjpTrdcrSfri (he was seized there, and not here, or not here). ((8) Or the opposition is of such a nature that the thought in the coordinate clause merely limits or restricts that in the preceding clause. The limitation is expressed by 54, aXXd (but), clt dp (avTap, Epic), Kairoi, /x4vtoi, o/xccs. 2. A e most generally has an adversative force, and hence can express every kind of contrast or opposition. In respect to its signification, it ranks, like the Lat. autem, between the copulative connectives (t4, Kal) and the adversa- tive (aXXd, etc.), since it contains both a copulative and adversative force, and hence either opposes one thought to another (adversative), or merely contrasts it (copulative). Hence it is very frequently used in Greek, where the English uses and. The new thought being different from the preceding, is placed in contrast with it. 3. The mutual relation between the concessive and adversative clauses, is commonly expressed by the concessive /x 4 v, which, as it denotes concession and admission, points forward to the limitation expressed in the second member by 5 4. As 54 can denote both a strong and slight contrast, so the signification of fxiu is sometimes stronger and sometimes weaker. 4. The original signification of (x4v (arising from fxrjv, § 316, Eem.) is truly, in truth; yet its signification is not always so strong as this ; indeed, in innu- merable places its force is so slight, that it cannot be translated at all into English. To jx e v u> 5 4, to. \x4v — to. 5 4 and tovto fx4v — tovto oe, partly, — partly, on the one side — on the other, both — and, not only — '~)ut also, o fiiv — 6 54, hie — ille. (b) When several predicates belong to the same object, and also, when sev- $ 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 505 eral actions refer to the same object. S. Ph. 239. iyoo y4vos p.4p el/xi rrjs irep- ippvrov "SiKvpov, tvX4oo S' is oJkop, avSoofxai 5 e ttcus "KxiXioos NeoirrSXepos. So also in a principal and subordinate clause. Her. 1, 103. o l l is4/3aXop pep is rrju 'Afflrjp, Kippepiovs iicfiaX6pres iic rr)s Evpojirrjs, rovroicri 8 e iiri Kpircov, Kvvas Se rpecpeis, 'Iva (Toi robs Xvkovs airb rcov irpo- SdroDu airepvicooa-t. ; (you are umvilling to support a man who could protect you from your enemies, and tet do you keep dogs ?). Or, Se' has a copulative force and continues the question which had been interrupted by the answer of the other, e. g. X. C. 3. 5, 2. ovkovu oloSa, epa 8 e, 6ir6re — 8 e, ews — 8 e. X. An. 4. 1, 2. eVel Se acp'iKOVTO, ev&a 6 piev Tiyprjs irorapbs Travrdiraaiv airopos l\v Sia to f3d£ros Kal fi4- ye&os, irdpodos (transitus) Se ovk t)v . . , eSo'/cet Se rots crpa.rKarais Sja rail/ bp4 aitTovs, 4irl ttju eipfynv, a A A' virrjpx^ airao'iv. 'AAA' iirl rov iroAefxov ; dAA J avTol ivepl eip7)vr]S iPovAevecr&e. Eur. Med. 325. \6yovs avaAols • ov yap av Treicrais ttot4. "'AAA' 6|eAas p.e, KovSev at'SeVot Airds ; " very frequently a A A' i) — ,• but really — ? X. An. 7. 6, 4. ical o'L elirov 'AAA' t) dn/J-aycoye? 6 avrjp robs avdpas ; Rem. 9. 'AAAa is used in negative, non-concessive clauses, when by it the gen- eral signification of the preceding negative clause is to be restricted by an excep- tion. Here dAAa is the same as irK-f]u or ei /j.-fj, nisi, and can be translated into English by except, than. In the first member, aAAos (eVepos) is commonly placed, e. g. ovSels 'aAAos, dAAa, and this aAAos points forward to the following dAAeJ, corresponding with it. X. An. 6. 4, 2. eV tw fiea-cp &AAtj jxkv ttoAis ovSe- /nia ovre (piAia, ovre 'EAAwvis, aAAa &paKes Kal Bi&woi (between there is no other friendly or Grecian city [there are none] except Thracians and Bithynians). Rem. 10. In the frequent combination of a A A' % after a preceding nega- tive, or after a question implying a negative, or even after the addition of dAAos, eVepos to the negative, consequently, ovk, ovShv a A A' tf; ovSev 6.A- Ao, a A A' ^'; ovdev erepov, a A A' 77 ; ri &AAo, aAA'fj; &AAo r i (with a pre- ceding interrogative pronoun), dAA' jj, — a A A' seems to be merely &AAo, but on account of its close connection with 77, it appears to have changed its ac- cent (aAAb ¥i) and to have lost it (dAA' ij). X. An. 7. 7, 53. apyvpiov fxhu ovk €%co, dA A' 7) fJLiKpSv rt. 0. 2, 13. ovre &AAos ttwttot4 jxoi irap4o~xz to, eavrov Sioi- Kelv, a A A 5 7/ crv vvvl i&eAeis irap4x^v. PL Phaed. 97, d. ovdev &AAo 07co7ret> Trpos'f)KGii/ av&pc&ira), a A A 5 7) to 'dpicTTOu Kal to jSeArjcrroy. Rem. 11. Also the following elliptical expressions are to be mentioned: ov fi^jv aAAa or ov /j. 4 vtoi aAAa, yet, veruntamen, ov yap a A Ad, then certainly, certainly. These must be completed by joining with the negative the verb of the preceding clause, or in place of it, such expressions as tovt iyevi- to, tout' iariv. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. 6 'liriros iriirrei els ySvara, Kal /xiKpov KaKeluov ££eTpaxv^io'w ov /X7]u (scil. i^Tpax^Ata-eu) dAA' iTr4fietveu 6 Kvpos jj.6Ais ttcds, Kal 6 '(ttttos i£ai/4o-Tr). Rem. 12. 'AAAd* is, moreover, used to denote a transition to a different or an opposite thought ; this is the case in exhortations and exclamations, in general, when the discourse is suddenly interrupted, and something new is quickly in- troduced, e. g. dAA' ewTuxotTjs • (well then !) — dAA' &va (well now) — dAA' e?a! — also when one answers or replies quickly and decidedly, e. g. dAAd PovAo/xai, well, I will. 7. Erom the adverb av, on the contrary, again, rursus, and Up a, igitur, have originated the Epic av t dp and the prose ardp. They always stand at the beginning of the sentence, and have the signification of Se or dAAa, but ; yet, as it seems, with this difference, that, on account of their composition with dpa (igitur), they are more closely and intimately connected with what precedes. — m4vtol has been already treated (§ 316, Rem.). Kalrot, yet, verum, sed tamen, atqui (§ 317, 3), is used especially, when the speaker wishes to correct something he had said; the Latins use quamquam in the same way, e. g. Ka'iToi t[ (prjfii ; (quamquam quid loquor?, and yet why do I speak?). "Ofiwt 508 syntax. [$ 323 (from 6fi6s, equal, like), nevertheless, yet, however, places the second clause, as an unexpected one, in opposition to the first. Th. 6, 50. Aa.fj.axos fiev ravra elir^p ifictis 7rposefre70 Kal abrbs rfj 'AAKifiidSov yvoifxrf. 'AAA 1 ofxws is Still stronger. $323. III. Disjunctive Coordination. 1. A disjunctive coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses composing the entire sentence, are united into one whole, one of which excludes the other ; hence the one can be considered to exist only when the other does not. This disjunctive relation is denoted by : — "H, or, aut, vel, or more emphatically and definitely by 77 — 77, and when the first member is to be made emphatic, ¥jtol — 77, aut — aut, vel — vel, either — or ; etre — etre (with the Ind.) or idvre — idvre or 'dvre — 'dvre (with the Subj.), sive — sive, whether — or, when the speaker wishes to indicate, that he does not know whether he should decide for the one or the other ; on the mode, used in these hypothetical disjunctive clauses, see § 339. 'O irarrip, $i 6 vlbs abrov aire&avev. — *H 6 irarrjp, 7) 6 vlbs abrov aire&avev. Th. 4, 118. el 8e ri vfjuv elre KaKKiov, etr e 8iKaiorepov rovrcov SoKe? eivai, ISvres is AaKe8aifxova 8i8do-Kere. PI. Kp. 493, d. eJV iv ypa, etc. PI. Phaed. 64, a. obdev &AAo abrol iiriT7)8evovo~iv, 7) b.iro&vno'Keiv re teal re&vdvai. Rem. 3. The comparative ¥1 is sometimes used after the omitted fxaAAov or after a positive. This is the case after expressions of willing, choosing, and the like, because these contain the idea of preference ; thus after fiovAe cr'Stai, i&eAeiv, ai peTa&ai, a'ipeaiv Sovvai, ctt idr vfxe?v, 8 e x*o-&ai, £r)Te?v, Ave ire A' t7v ( = potius esse). II. a, 117. ftovAofi iyh Aabv cr6ov efx/xevai, i] &7roA.e acrtrw rod irarp6s (instead of t) 6 Trarr)p, or properly instead of rrjs rod tratpSs). Rem. 4. With irXeicov, ixdrrcav, irXeov, eXarrov, jxe7ov, when they stand in connection with a numeral, jj is commonly omitted, without change of construction, i. e. the Case is the same as if there was no comparative in the sentence (comp. decern plus or amplius homines). PI. Apol. 17, d. vvv eyca irpa- rov iirl SiKaari)piov avafiefiriKa, err} yeyovks irXeiw efiSojxiiKOvra (annos plus septuaginta natus). X. An. 6. 4, 24. 01 '{mreis airoKTtivovai rwv avSpccv ov [xe7ov TrevTaKocriovs. Th. 6, 95. 77 Xeia eTrpd&r) raXavrccv ovk eXarrov irevre ical e5f/co- aiv. X. Cy. 2. 1, 5. limeas jxkv ci|ei ov /xe?ov dicr/xvplccv. With the Nom. and Ace. TrXeov, eXarrov, the numeral specification can also stand in the Gen., e. g. *'Ex« ov TcXeov (eXarrov) SeKa raXavrcav. The Greek can consequently say : (a) TvXeiovs (eXdrrovs, fxeiovs) $j SeKa ripLepai ; (b) TrXeiovs deKa rj/nepuiv] (c) nXeov 1) SeKa T)p.epai ; (d) irXeov SeKa rj/xepai. It will be observed from several of the above examples that irXeov, fxe7ov, etc. stand as mere adverbs in the Ace, with substantives of a different gender and number. Rem. 5. Sometimes, also, the particle rf is found with the Gen. Such exam- ples are to be explained in a two-fold manner. The Gen. either expresses its own appropriate relation, being wholly independent of the comparative, e. g PI. L. 765, a. fj.7] eXarrov vj rpiaKovra yeyovws ercov [just as the Greek saya ylyveoSrai rpiaKovra eru>v § 273, 2, (c)] ; or the Gen. is a preparative demonstra* tive pronoun, with which the clause introduced by ^ may be regarded as an 43* 510 SYNTAX. [$323 appositive or explanatory clause. Od. (, 182. ov fx\v yap rod ye ipe7(rv Xapircay). Comp. the examples under § 284, 4. This mode of comparison, though not strictly correct, is frequent in English, e. g. he has an expression like his father, instead of like his father's. 4. When two attributes or predicates (adjectives or adverbs), belonging to the same object, are compared with each other, then both are put in the compar • ative, and the last is annexed by %. ©drrwv, f) ao Tlep'iKXeis, r6re o , vveyev6jxif]V i '6 re Se iv6raros a avrov ravra fjoSa (when you surpassed yourself in these things, when you had the highest distinction in these things, higher than at any other time). 6. The following is a peculiar mode of comparison : When an object in re- lation to some quality is compared, not with another object, but with a whole thought (sentence), this thought is compressed into one substantive idea, and this substantive is put in the Gen. depending on the comparative. Here, also. the other mode of expression by jj, does not occur. Her. 2, 148. % 5e t£ rvpdvpco i\v aSeA^eos vtto/j.- apy 6r epos (hebetioris ingenii, very dull of perception, a little crazy). 6, 108. 7jfj.e?s eKaar 4 pea oi k 4 /xgv (we dwell too far, very far from you). So particu- larly the neuters &fieivov, fSeXriov (better than is right), KaXXiou, /xaXXov, x^poy, aiarxiov, KaKiov ; also vec&repov, more seldom Kaiv6repou,( since tcaivos is used synony- mously with vedorepos) and the like, especially with a negative, e. g. ov KaXXiov, ovk d/xetvov, ov Kaxiov, ov Kpeirrov, ov x^p ov ^ °" pS.01/ (not so easy, as it seems), etc. Her. 3, 71. iroieeu/ avriica jxol Sofceet Kal jj.t) virepfiaX4o-&ai' ov yap dp.eivov (for this would not be better, than if we did it immediately). PI. Phaed. 105, a. TrdXiv Se ava(xi[A.vr)crKov • ov yap x e ^P 0V "foKkdnis atcoveiv. Finally, also, when antith- eses are compared with each other, e. g. To; x e ' l P ova noXXols irXeia io-rl rfav a/x e t v 6 v a v (the worse is more in number than the better) . $ 324. IV. Causal Coordinate Sentences. 1. Einally, those sentences are coordinate, the last of which denotes either the ground, cause, or consequence of the preceding sentence, or the conclusion from it 2. The Greeks denote the ground or reason by yap, which is never the first word in a sentence, but is commonly placed immediately after the first word. T dp is compounded of ye and dp a, and hence denotes proof, confirmation, (y4, yes, certainly), and at the same time, an inference, or conclusion (dp a, igitur % now, therefore). Hence, according as the one or the other meaning prevails, 512 SYNTAX. f$ 324 ydp may express : (a) a ground or reason, (b) an explanation, (c) a confirmation or assurance; and hence it may be translated - (a) by for, (b) that is, for ex- ample, (c) indeed, certain It/. PL Phaedr. 230, b. vtj rr\v "Upav, KaXrj ye tj Karayooyi] • H] re yap rrXaravos aurif] /xaA 3 a/j.(piXav Kpiaiv %v oi irepl Kenpoira 5i' ape- tV ettpivav ; — Aeyo; yap, yes, certainly. 10, 2. 4k ttoXXwv avvdyovres ra e| eKacr- rov KaXXivra, ovrcas oXa ra, acinar a KaXa iroielre cpaiuecr&ai; — Hoiovy.ev yap, ecpr), ovrws [certainly, we do so). — In addresses, ivishes, commands, and ques- tions, the meaning of yap, as denoting inference or conclusion, clearly appears. Arist. Kan. 251. rovrl irap' vjx&v Xafxfidvw ; Aeiva, yap ireio~6(j.e- &a! (ami so treated by you ? well! then we shall have hard things to bear ! ) Ka- kqjs yap 4£6Xoiol may you perish then! So, el ydp, e'tSt e ydo. X. C. 1. 7, 2. otl 8' aAw&ri eXeyev, wde eSiSacr/cei/ * tv^v/j.d!>fxe^a yap, ecpy), eX rts fxi] thv aya- &bs av\r)T7]s ZoKetv jiovXoiro, ri av avrto iroirjTeov elrj ; (now then let us consider). 1, 4, 14. ov yap iravv aoi KardSr]Xov, on Trapd ra aXXa £wa wsirep &eol av&pcoTroi Biorevovai ; is it not then clear to you ? (nonne igitur — ?). II. or, 182. ^Ipi &ed, rts yap ae 3-ecw efiol ayyeXov rjKev ; (therefore who then has sent you?). X. C. 2. 3, 17. Kal 6 XaipeKpdrrjs eTirev 'Eau ovv, 4/j.ov ravra iroiovvros, eKeiuos fM7]Sev [SeXrioov yiyvnrai ; Tt yap aXXo, ecpr) 6 ^coKpdr-ns, r) Kivdvvevareis, k. r. X. ; (what else then will happen except that you will run the risk, etc.?) Dera. Ph. 1. 43, 10. yevoLTO yap av ri KaivSrepov, -jr} MaKeSwv av^p 'A&rjvaiovs KaraTroXe/ULUv ; (why, can there be a greater novelty ?). So, Ti yap; quid ergo? Kal rl yap ; and how then ? Has yap ,• and iro&ev yap; as an emphatic negative answer = by no means. Hu>s yap oil; (instead of it, ir6&ev Se ov is used with an antithesis) as an emphatic affirmative answer. X. C. 4. 4, 13. ovkovv 6 jxev ra Si/ccua irpdr- rwv 8'iKaios, 6 Se ra adiKa 'ddiKos ; IT cos yap ov ; (is he, therefore, who does what is just, just, but he who does what is unjust, unjust ? to be sure, how not?). Remark 1. The explanatory sentence with yap very often precedes the sentence to be explained, particularly in Herodotus, e. g. Her. 6, 102. Kal, ?iu yap 6 Mapa&oov 4irir7)de(*)raTov yjap'iov rys 'ArriKrjs evnrTvevaai, 4s rovro o~ ira7Ses, &s &pa e olvox^, ov eyib jxaXiarra Tifxw, ovdev SiSws ," 'O Se 2a/cas 'dp a k 1,dKa, cW^AcoAas* e/c£aA<£ ere in ttjs ri/xrjs' ra re yap ctAAa, , Kal ouk iKiriojiai avrbs rbv oivov • ol 5" &pa rwv /3acnAeW olvox^oi — Karappcxpovcri. Dem. Cor. 232, 22. eV^A/tcc Xeyeiv, Zos dpa eyw — iceKooAvKcbs d-qv ttjv it6\iv (t)]v eiprjurju) Troi-fiaaoftai (that 1 indeed, that I, as it seems). Hence the use of ydp and the strengthened form ya^ &pa. — E t dp a and e I n^ dpa correspond to the Latin si forte, nisi forte, if perchance, unless perchance, the inferential force of dpa being reduced to a men conjecture, and are often used ironically. X. C. 1. 2, 8. iru>s av ovu toiovto. dvrjp 8iav), which commonly has the second or third place in a sen- tence, means, consequently, hence, therefore {ergo, igitur) ; it appropriately points out the effect of a cause, the necessary consequence of what precedes, and is ac- cordingly far stronger than apa, but is also used in a more general sense. Rem. 6. O v v is used as a suffix to pronouns and conjunctions, and in this case also, retains its conclusive sense : bans ovv, osirep ovv, oaoi ovv, fiev ovv, yovv, 6° oZv, a.W' ovv, efr' ovv, yap ovv. It expresses a conclusion, a setting aside of every- thing else, and a persisting in that which is affirmed ; hence it may express also confirmation and assurance. So o , therefore, and yap) corresponds to the Latin ergo, therefore, but is poetic ; still stronger is roiydproi, just on this account, -precisely so, and roiyapovv, on this account then. They commonly stand as the first word in a sentence. $ 325. Asyndeton. 1. In certain cases sentences are connected without any conjunction (ao~vv- ierws). Only some of the more prominent instances will be mentioned: — (a) In pathetic and impassioned discourse, e. g. II. %> 295. (of Hector) art/ le KaTa(p{]cas, ouS' aAA' e%e p.ei\ivov eyxos • Ari'icpofiov §' e'/caA.et XevKao-irib'a, /ua/c- phv aiiaai jtee fj.iv d6pv p.aKp6v. — (b) Asyndeton is very common in explana $ 326.] PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 513 tory clauses, which are elsewhere connected by &pa (therefore, then, that is) and yap. The second clause gives a more exact explanation of what was stated only in a general, indefinite, indistinct manner in the first. So particularly when there stands in the first clause a preparative demonstrative, e.g. tovto, r65e, ovtws, aiSe, etc. X. An. 3. 2, 19. 4 v I pAvcc irpoexovcrij/ tjixcls ol lirireTs' cptvyeiv avrols a, o-ivoi Tpeiru fxai (rpd 7ra> fx a 1), non habeo, quo me vertam. Ovk elxov, '6irot Tpiiroijxriv (Tpairui- fiyv), non habebam, quo me verterem. Oi iroxijjuoi irdvTas, otw av £ v t v x<* o 1, kt eiv ova iv. Ol iroXefiiot Travras, otco ivTvxoiev, e/cr e ivov. 2. But it is to be observed that the Greek confines itself less regularly to the above rule, than the Latin, but has much greater freedom. Very often in lively narration, the Greeks refer the predicate of a subordinate clause directly to the present time of the speaker, without any regard to the principal clause, so that, therefore, an historical tense in the principal clause is followed by the same mode ( Subj.) and the same tenses whicl; 44 Ol8 SYNTAX. [$ 327. accompany the principal tenses. The dependent clause or dis- course then assumes the character of independent or direct dis- course (an objective mode of expression) ; the speaker, in hia lively conceptions, brings the past into present View ; the past becomes present to him. See § 345, 5. § 327 b . Use of Modes in Subordinate Clauses. The use of modes in the different kinds of subordinate clauses, will be considered in treating these clauses each by itself. Here, only those characteristics will be noticed which are common to several kinds of subordinate clauses. 1. There is very often an attraction of the mode, a subordi- nate clause which forms an intermediate member of another clause, taking the mode of this clause. (a) This occurs with the Indie, of the historical tenses in those subordinate clauses, which form an intermediate or accessory member of a hypothetical proposition with el and a preterite Indie, in the Protasis, and a preterite Indie, with av in the Apodosis [§ 339, 2, I. (b)]. X. C. 1. 4, 14. (avSpwwos) ovre (3obs av i%b)V (twiaol, av&pdoirov de yvcx>/j.r)v, eSvvar av irpdrreiv, a i fiovAer o (as in Lat. efficere posset, quae vellet). 3.5,8. et ifiovAo/xe&a x? 7 )l x ^ TU>v wv ol aAAot €?x o v avTiiroielcrbai (si vellemus expetere opes, qaas alii haberent). Isocr. Paneg. 19. ixpyv {tovs pr]Topas) fir] irporipovivepl t&v 6fj.oXoyovfj.evcov (rvfj.(3ovAeveiv, it p\v irepl Tcov a/A(pisfir)Tovp.evc0v rj/nas ioioa^av (oportebat . . priusquam . . docuissent). PI. Gorg. 506, 6. rjdecas av KaKKiKXei tovtw en 8 i e A eyofxr) v, ecos ai>T$ . . awe own a (usque dum reddidissem). From this maybe explained the use of the Indie. Imperfect or Aorist in final clauses after an Indie, of an historical tense with or without av. See § 330, 5. (b) Very often with those subordinate clauses which are intermediate or ac- cessory members of optative clauses, i. e. clauses expressing a wish ; hence with adjective, adverbial, or final clauses, as members of a clause expressing a wish, or as intermediate members of an optative proposition expressed conditionally? II. p, 640. e?r) 8' ostis ercupos awayyeiAeie rdx^ra TI-nAelSy (0 that there were a friend to announce as quick as possible). Ar. Vesp. 1431. epSoi ris, r)v eKaaros e 1 8 e i tj rexvnv. PL Phaedr. 279, c. to xpverov ttXtj&os eXi] /xoi,'6(rot> /x'/jTe (pepeiv, {jlt)t dyeiv Svvair aWos, 3) 6 craxppoov. II. 8e dvvaifXTjv v6crcpiv awoKptyai, ore fi.iv fxSpos alvb^ ik 6. voi. — X. S. 8, 17. 'tis fjucreiv Svvair av, v

vra wdvra reStvdvai ica\ /j.r)8ev (rjv } 327.] MODES IN SUBORDINATE CLAUSES 519 X. O. 1, 13. etris XPV T0 T § apyvpiw, wst€ kclkiov rb crw/xa %X°h "*&* &v * Tt rb apyvpiov avrq) wcpeXi/xov eir\ ; S. Ph. 325. &v[xbv yevoiro X 6 '^ -rXripwcral irore, Iv at MvKijvai yvo7ev..,oTixV ^xvpos avSpwv aXKi/xwv ixr)Tr\p ecpv. Eur. Troad. 698. n a?8a r6vhe ira&bs eK&pe\paLs x olSv re ecrrai el;eX&e7v. Remark. But in substantive-clauses with Sri or ws, that (§ 329), and in dependent interrogative clauses, after a conditioning or conditioned Ind. of the historical tenses, the Ind. of the principal tenses remains ; also after an optative principal clause, since these clauses have but a loose connection with the principal clause, and hence they readily assume the form of direct discourse. X. An. 5. 1, 10. el fxev rfir ictt d/xe^a aaepws, ore '/i^ei Xeipicrocpos, ovSev av edei wv /xeXXw Xeyetv. (So in the best and most of the MSS. instead of ^|ot.) Dem. 19, 40. ey paepov av Siapprjdrjv, rjXiKa v/xas ev w o ir) riva XP?) ^T^cr^ai (ducere) rod TrXaurlov, . . ovk av . . fiovXevecr&ai ri/xas deoi. 2. The Subj. and Opt. are used in subordinate clauses to de- note indefinite frequency or repetition ; the Subj., when the prin- cipal clause contains a principal tense (Pres. or Fut), the Opt., .when the principal clause contains an historical tense (usually the Impf.). This relation in Greek is regarded as a conception, inasmuch as the idea of repetition arises from bringing single actions together in conception. The conjunction or relative of the subordinate clause is translated by as often as. II. )8, 391. ov he k iywv airdvev&e fxdx"ns iSeXovra vor)aw /xijxvd£etv Trapa vi)vff\ Kopwv'icnv, ov ot eivena dpKiov ecrereiTai (pvyeeiv Kvvas 7/5' olwvovs (as often as I shall observe). X. Cy. 3. 3, 26. oir 6 Tav (ol fidpfiapoi fiacriXeTs) o~t par owe • BevwvTai, Taeppov irepifiaXXovrai evirerws b*ia rrjv iroXvxeipiav. C. 3. 1, 1. '6 tj f**v (~XwKpdT7js) avrbs elSeir), irdvrwv irpoSv/xoraTa ebiSacTKei , otov he avrbs '"520 syntax. [ft 328, 329 a.TT€ip6Tepos e'(r), irpbs robs imcrTa/xhovs i/yep avrovs. An. 6. 1, 7. oitotc o, "EW-nves to?s TroXe/xiois eirioiev, pqdicos airecpevyov. 4. 5, 30. oirov g,svo irpos- -ra^avTi Kakas vivn perrjcr e lev, ovSevl irdoiroTe axd>pio~Tov e'larre t^v irpo&vuiav. $328. I. Substantive-Clauses. Substantive-clauses are substantives or infinitives expand- ed into a sentence, i. e. they have the force of a substantive, and stand as the subject, as^well as the attribute or object of a sentence. Comp. $ 326, 3. $329. A, Substantive-Clauses introduced by on o? cos, that. 1. Substantive-clauses introduced by oft and to?, that, express the object of verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. bpav, olkov€lv, voelv, ixavSaveiv, yiyvoxTKetv, etc. ; Aeyeiv, SrjXovv, SeiKvvvai, ayyiXXetv, etc., [§ 306, 1, (b)] ; in the second place, subordinate clauses introduced by on, express the object of verba affectuum, e. g. S^avjxa^etv, ax#eo-#ai, ayavaKTzlv, alcrxvveoSai, [AeLujieoScu, etc. ; on is also used to introduce a subordinate clause, which con tains an explanation of the principal clause, or of a single word in it. Remark 1. 'Hs, properly, how, differs from on, in expressing the thought more indefinitely and undecidedly, than on ; hence us is used particularly after verbs of believing, thinking, and after negative verba sentiendi and declarandi. — After verbs of believing, thinking, judging, hoping, promising, swearing, denying, the Inf. or the Ace. with the Inf. usually follows, very seldom or i or o> s ; after verbs of saying, mentioning, and the like, both constructions occur with equal frequency ; after verbs of knowing, showing, and the like, either otj or ws follows, or a participle, or, under certain conditions, the Ace. with the Inf. See §311. Sometimes, also, oircos and the Poet, ovveita., also 63- ovvena in the- Tragedians, are used nearly in the same sense with on, that. Rem. 2. When a subordinate clause refers to a Pass, verb or to an imper- sonal phrase with iarrlv, e. g. Srikov, deivov, oXo-%p6v iTcp airiSvTa &appelv, oti tt apecrr at avTO?s oXtyov xp6vov wsts opav crot i^iffTat Kav fiovXr) acrnap- Sa/xvKTei. Hence ort maybe used, when the exact words of another are quoted in the same form in which they were spoken by him, when in Eng., a colon or marks of quotation are used, e. g. X Cy. 3. 1, 8. el^e S\ oti- Els Kaipbv %Keis ecprj, he said: "you have come at the right time." An. 2. 4, 16. Upo^evos elirev, or t • Avtos ei/M, ov Cw^s. It is used even before the Imp., e. g. PI. Criton. 50, C 1o~ws av e'tirotev (ot v6/xot), OTf ^Xl ~S,wKpaTes, /x^ &avfxa(e to. Xey6/xeva. 5. The Opt. with av is used, when the statement is to be represented as a conditional supposition, assumption, conjecture, or as an undetermined possibility [§ 260, 2, 4, (a)]. X. An. 1. 6, 2. KaraXXayels 8e outos Kvpw, elirev, el ai>T(2 doir) tirireas %tA» ovs, o r i robs TrpoKctTUKaiovTas tTnreas 7) k Trajv, OSTts /x-f], ott6t€ iv airSpots e'/rj, ToVe KoAaKevot, a\\' ore to. aptcFTa frpaTTOt, t6tz /JtaXtcTTa twv &e£>v p.efxv(aT0 (osrts fir] kt\. instead of e% Tts frf, jtrA.). Dem. Aphob. 851, 22. oiSa, on fcdvres 'av 6 (ioAoyf)o~atT€. 44% />22 SYNTAX. [$ 329 C. The Incl. of the Hist, tenses with av is used, when the affirmation is to be represented as a condition, whose actual existence or possibility is denied [$ 260, 2, (2) (a)]. Dem. Aphob. 830, 55. el p.ev 6 irarijp 7]Trlo~Tei tovtols, dr]\ov, ot i ovt av raWa eir er peirev, ovt av rav^r" ovtoo KaraXiircbv avTols es. This construction seems to have arisen from an ellipsis, as rod xpovov, e. g. p.epv -qpai (tov xp<^ou), oVe TavTa e\e£as, as in Eng. / remember very well when the war broke out. X Cy. 1. 6, 8. p. e p. v 77 p. a 1 Kal tovto, '6t e, gov XeyovTos, avveSoKei Kal e/xol vireopey- e&es elvai epyov rb KaAws apx^tv. Dem. Ol. 2(3), 29, 4. p. ep.vq a&e, '6t airijy- ye\&r] s, are often followed by a subordinate clause introduced by a conditional or interrogative el, if, whether, when the object of admiration, etc., is not to be represented as actually existing, but as merely pos- sible, or as still a matter in question, e. g. &avpd(a>, otl ravra yiyveraL and ei TavTa ylyveraL. Attic politeness, which often blends in its language a coloring of doubt and a certain indeterminate manner of expression, frequently employs this form even in settled and undoubted facts ; in this case el has the force of in. Aeschin. Ctcs. ovk ayaira, el p.^ 5'lkt]v e8u)Kev (he is not satisfied, that). PI. Lach. 194, a. dy avaKTco el ovrwal a vow p.)] oXos t elfxl elireiv. Rp. 348, $330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 523 e. r6Se ifravpatfa, el ev dperr^s Kal (Tocptas rforjs pepei r)]v aSudav, ri/v Be Si* Kaiocrvvnv ev rois evavriois. Dem. Mid. 30, 548. ovk y c% vvS-n, el roiovro Kanbv endyei rep {that he brings such a calamity upon one). Rem. 8. Instead of on ovr cos, the relative &> s, that, is often used, and instead of 'Sri roiovros or or i r 6pa, Poet), lva [Kr\, (OS {XTj, OTTOiS {XTj. 2. The mode in final clauses is commonly the subjunctive or optative, since the purpose or object is something merely imagined or conceived. When the verb of the principal clause is a principal tense : Pres., Perf., Fut, or an Aorist with the sig- nification of the present [$ 257, 1, (a) and (b)], then the final conjunction, i. e. the conjunction expressing the purpose, etc., is followed by the Subj. ; but when the verb of the principal clause is an historical tense : Impf , Plnp., Aor., then the final conjunction is followed by the optative (but never by an Opt. Fut). Tavra ypdcpco, yeypacpa, ypdipco, 'lv eX&ys {ut venias, that you may come). Ae£ov (with the sense of the Pres.), 'Lv elSco (die, ut sciarn,that 1 may know). Tavra eypacpov, eyeypdcpeiv, eypatya, 'lv eX&ois (ut ve- nires, that you might come). II. X, 289, sq. aXX' fobs eXavvere ficivvxas 'lirirovs Icp&ifuov Aavacov, 'lv vireprepov efyos ctpycT&e (ut gloriam vobis paretis) ; but, II. e, 1 — 3. ev& a3 TuBeiBv AiopL-fjBe'C YlaXXas 'A&rjvr) BcoKe /xevos Kal frdperos, 'Lv eKBt]Xos fiera, iracriv , ApyeloiTcov naprjprfTai Kal rerpapx'ias KaT e t f)o~ ev, 'iva fir) fx6vov Kara n 6- Xeis, aAA.ec Kal Kara e&vv 5 vXevcoa iv. PL Crit. 43, b. eirhrjSes ere ovk eyei- pov, 'iva cos tjcWtcc 8 1 a y rj s. Rem. 2. On the contrary, a preceding principal tense, or an Aor. with Pres. sense, is sometimes followed by an Opt. : (a) when the present of the principal clause is an historical present, or when, in the use of the Pres., the speaker has at the same time contemplated a past action ; Eur. Hec. 10. noXvv 8e tTiv eir) natal fxr) crndvis fiiov. X. An. 4. 6, 1. tovtov 8' 'En itr&eve 1 . .napaotdootri x ov eveKa Tives otov- Tai Ka& itTTacr iv, %va Trj p.ev to crccfj.a frepanevo 1 vto, ttj he tt\v y^vxw; (the view of the lawgiver, i. e. his purpose). X. An. 2. 4, 4. foas Be nov (fia- aiXevs) r) anocTKanTei ti 7) c\noTeixK* l i <° s dnopos eir] 7) 656s (the view of the king), (c) when in the principal clause, the Opt. stands with or without &v m 259, 3, (a) and 260, 2, (4), (a)], then an Opt. commonly folloAvs, for the con- ceptions in the principal and subordinate clause are represented as separated from the present time of the speaker (§ 259, 3) ; still, a Subj. may follow by attraction of the mode, since the present sense of the Opt. is assumed. See § 327b, 1. (b). Theogn. 881. elpr)vr) Kal nXovTos exoi n6Xiv, oeppa fxeT aXXccv k OfindCo l/u. 1. Soph. Aj. 1217, sq. yevoifJ.av,'iv'vXaev enecri n6vTov npofi- Xr)[M aXiKXvo-Tov — , tc\s Upas on cos nposeinoi/j.ev 'A&r)vas. 3. When two or more final clauses follow each other, the Subj. sometimes interchanges with the Opt. The two clauses are then placed in a kind of antithesis to each other, the former representing the result of the purpose or aim as certain, $ 330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 525 the latter, without this accessory idea, and consequently as uncertain, undetermined, or only derived from what precedes. II. o, 597, sq. "EKTopt. yap ol &v/j.bs ifiovXero Kudos ope^ai Tlpiatj.lb'r), 'iva vnvcl Kopwvicri freo-iu$aes irvp ifxfiaXr] aKd/xaroi', ©eriBos 5' i£aio~ioi/ aprju ivacrav iivi- Kpr\veie. Her. 9, 51. is tovtov St) tov x®P 0V i$ov\evo~avTo jxeracnrivai, 'iva Ka\ vdari ex^o~i xP& 8e Se e'iveKev avr\yov (ol Tlepo~ai) ras vrjas, 'iva 877 rolai "E\\7}at. fj.r]8e (pvyeen 4£jj aAA.' diroXaLMp&evTes iv rfj ~2aAa/x?vt So?ev rtaiv tu>v in 'Apre/uatca. 4. The modal adverb av, referring to a conditioning clause (generally not expressed), is sometimes joined with the final conjunctions d»s and ottws (more seldom Iva). Od. 6, 167, sq. irefx^/w Se roi ovpov oirtcr&ev, ws «e fid?C aaK-fiSrvs o~r\v iraTptd? ya?av i'/c 77 at, aX /ce &eoi y e&eAoxrt. &, 20, sq. Kai jxlv LiaKporepov Ka\ irdo cova SrTjKe ISecrfrai, &s Kev ^air\Keaai (piKos Travreco-i yevono (sc. el irpbs rov\ QairjKas acpinoiTo). Her. 3, 44. iderjSrt], okus av Kal Trap' ecovrbv 7re/j.\pas is 2a llov deoiro ffrparov (ut, si opus esset, exercitum a se peteret). X. Cj. 5. 2, 21. 5ta rr\s o~r\s x^P as d^eis 7)/J.as, oircos av eld u Lie v, are Set cpiXia Kal iro\e/j.ic vo/xl(eiv (in order that, when we set our foot on the land, we may know, etc.). H. 4. 8, 16. edooKe xp^l jLaTa 'AvraXKiSq., '6ttcos &v, it A 77 p w& e uto s vavr lko u virc AaKedaifMOvicov, o'i re 'A&r]va?oi Kal ol av/j.uaxoi avrwv fxaXkov rrjs elpTjvrji irpo s 5 e ivr 0. 5. The final conjunctions Iva and o>s (more seldom oVcd?), are connected with the Ind. of the historical tenses, when it is to be indicated that the intended purpose is not accomplished, or is not to be accomplished. In this case, in the principal clause, the Ind. of an historical tense stands both with and without av. See § 227 b , 1. (a). Ar. Pac. 135. ovkovv ixpv v °~ e Unyaffov £ev£ai irrepov, oircos icpalvov ro?s &eois t pay ikcct epos. PI. Criton. 44, d. et ydp &u aKovaavres rahrj^rrj paSlojs eyueare ra diKaia. C. Verbs which express care, anxiety, considering, endeavor- ing or striving, effecting, and inciting, e. g. eTn/xeAeto-^cu, ^povn- t,€iv, SeSiemi cfivXarreLv, crKOTrelv, crKeif/acrd-ai, /3ov\€vecrSat, bpav, Trotetv, 7rpdrT€LV {curare) , /jirj^avacrS^aL, TrapaKaXelv, TrapayyeWzw, Trpoenreiv, aiTCLo-Sai, d^tovv, dye {up then), and the like, are followed by the conjunctions 7rct>« (o7tojs ixrj), sometimes also by w?, either 526 SYNTAX. [$ 331. (according to No. 2) with the Subj. and Opt., or with the Fut Ind., when the accomplishment of the purpose is to be repre* sented as something definitely occurring and continuing. X. Cy. 1. 2, 3. ol IlepcrLKol vSjxoi ei ifxi Kovt at, ottcos t^\v apxh v p.)) roiov* tol effoiTai ol ttoATtcu, 0T01 (= costs) irovnpov v) altrxpov epyou icpietrSai. 3. 2, 13. w 9 6e KaAcos ei-ei ra vp-tTepa, $)v (pi\oi yewna&e, i/xol p. e A 77 air cos av apicrra &7 co vi £o ip. e&a. $331. II. Adjective-Clauses. Adjective-clauses are adjectives or participles expanded into «\ sentence, and, like adjectives, serve to define a substantive oi substantive pronoun more definitely. They are intro- duced by the relative pronouns os, ^, o, osris, tjtis, o t-<, oto s eiroi-qcras, bs ravra eirpa^as. Rem. 3. The demonstrative, to which the relative refers,- is often omitted and not only when the Cases are the same, but when they are unlike, if the pronoun has no special emphasis ; hence especially when the omitted demon- strative denotes some indefinite object, and is equivalent to rls, some one, or when the relative os, osris, may be resolved into siquis. Eur. Or. 591, 3. ydixoi 8' ocrois fxev ev ir'nrrovcriv fipor&v, (rovrois sc.) [xatcdpios aldiv • oh Se fx^ iciirrov- criv ed, (ovt 01 SC.) rd r evSov elcrl rd re &vpa£e Svsrvx^'is. Th. 2, 41. ovSev TTposSeo/xeyoi ovre 'OpA]pov eiraiverov, ovre (nubs SC.) 6sris eirecri fxev rb avr'iKa. Tep^/ei ktX. Rem. 4. When the relative is used substantively, i. e. when it refers to a sub- stantive pronoun, either expressed or understood, then the adjective-clause, like the adjective standing without a substantive, has the meaning of a sub- stantive, e. g. ^HA&ov o'i 'dpi err 01 tfcrav = -fjA&ov ol &picrroi (sc. &vSpes). — Here belongs also, the formula ecrriv, o'i, &v, oh, ovs, a. This formula has be- come so fixed, that commonly neither the number of the relative has any effect on the verb ecrri, nor does the tense undergo any change, when the dis- course relates to past or future time : thus it has assumed entirely the charac- ter of a substantive-pronoun (evioi), and also, since ecrriv may be connected with every Case of the relative, has a full inflexion, e. g. Nom. ecrriv o'i (=evioi) airecpvyov Gen. ecrriv 3>v (=evlcav) airecrx^ro Dat. ecrriv oTs (=eviois) ovx ovrcos eSo^ev Acc. ear iv ov s (= evio v s) direKreivev. The Nom. ecrriv o'i is rare, for example, X. Cy. 2.3, 18; in place of it, commonly el crli/ o'i. Th. 2. 26, K\e6irofXTros rrjs irapa&aAacraiov ear iv a eSywcre. So in the question, ecrriv o'irives; X. C. 1.4, 2. ecrriv ov sriv as dv&pwiroov re&ai>(x.aKas eirl crocpia ; in Xenophon i\v also occurs. An. 1. 5, 7. ? H v Se rovrwv rwv crra&- (xuv ovs irdw fxaicpovs ¥j\avvev (and some of these marches which he made, were very long, or he made some of these marches very long). H. 7. 5, 17. rwv TroXe/micov ^v ovs inrocrirSvSovs aireSocrav (there was some of the enemy which they restored by truce, or they restored some of the enemy by truce). 528 SYNTAX. [§ 332. Eem. 5. In like manner, the following phrases, formed with icrnv, are used wholly as adverbs with reference to all relations of time. eariv '6 re = ivi6re, est quando, i. e. interdum, e. g. etrriv ore eXe^eul ecrnv %va or o7rou, est ubi, i. e. aliquando ; ecrnv ov or ei/&a, est ubi, someivhere, in many places ; oh k eir^' owov, nunquam ; ecrrtv r\ or ottt), quodammodo, in many places ; ovk etrriv ottcos, nullo modo, ovk etrriv Sir cos ov, certainly. etrriv o Trees; in the question. Is it possible, that? $332. Agreement of Hie Relative Pronoun. 1. The relative agrees in Gender and Number with the sub- stantive or substantive pronoun (in the principal clause) to which it refers; the Case of the relative, however, depends on the construction of the subordinate clause, and hence is deter- mined either by the predicate, Cx Dy sorrio other word in the subordinate clause, or it stands as the subject m the Nom. 'O aur)p, b v eldes, tp'iXos /jlov etrriv. 'H ctperr), t) s irLvres ol ayaSrol iTri&v/j.ov- triv, fxeya ayab6v etrriv. Oi arparicerai ols ifxax^trd/xeSra, avdpeiSraroi r)trav. ^av^d^ofiev ^.ccKpctTT], ov i) crocpia fxeyitrrrj i\v. '"E.Tri&vp,ov\i.ev rrjs aperr)s, r) Trrjyr) eem rravrcev rcev KaXcev. 2. The person of the verb in the adjective-clause is deter- mined by the substantive or substantive pronoun (expressed or implied) to which the relative refers. When the relative is connected with the first or second person, then the English uses the form, I am the one ivko, Iivho, Thou who, etc. 'E7c6, b s ypdepec, trv, b s ypdtpeis, 6 avr)p or eKe7vos, bs ypdtpei. Th. 2, 60. e/j.ol roiovrqj ctvdpl opyifctr&e, bs ovSevbs olo/xai Tjtrtrcev elvai. Isocr. Paneg Trees ovk Tjdr) SiKatSv etrriv i)fias eiraiveTv, o'irives rrjV h.pxr\v Karatrx^iv rjb'vvri&TiiJ.ev; X. Cy. 5. 2, 15. Kal olicia ye iro\.v /j.el£tov r) v jxer e pa rrjs ifxrjs, o'l ye oIklo. xpyo-& e yfj re Kal obpavec. Hence after the Voc, the second per- son is regularly nsed, e. g. ctvSpceive, bs 7}fJ.as roiavra KaKa eiroi'ncras. 3. When the relative refers to two or more objects, it is in the plural, and agrees in Gender with the substantives, when they are of the same Gender; often, however, it is in the neu- ter, when the substantives denote inanimate objects. Comp § 242, 1, (a), (ft). Th. 3, 97. 7} fxdxf), SLcd^eis re Kal virayccyai, iv ols afxtporepois rjtrtrovs T)trav ol 'A&r)va7oi. X. Cy. 1.3, 2. (Kvpos) bpwv (rbv Trdirirov) KeKOtr/xTjinevov Kal bcp&aXfiwv inroypacprj, Kal XP&fAaros evrpfyei ical icofxais irpos&erois, a 877 v6[xi[xa r)v ev Mr)Sois, $ 332.] AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 529 Isocr. Panath. 278, b. ravra elirov, ov irpbs r\v evae/3eiav, ovBe irobs ttjv Sikcuoctv- vt\v, ovSe irpbs tt]V v dvSpdnroov. Dem. Cor. 317, 273. ihiriScav Kal (r]\ov Kal rijxwv, & irdvra irposTJv ro?s rore irparrofAevois vir ep.ov. PI. Apol. 1 8, a. iv eKeivr} rfj (pavp re Kal r<$ rp6ivw 4v olsirep ire^pdjj./j.7]v. Sometimes, also, the rela- tive takes the gender of the last substantive, e. g. Isocr. 1. d. 163, a b. fjv Se r\v elp-!]Vi)v Troir](rct>/Ae&a, fierd iroWrjs do~v 'A&rjvaioov vavr ik6v, oi wpfiovv iv rfj MaXeq. PI. Phaedr. 260, a. TrXri&ei, o'inep SiKdaovcn. Remark 1. The following cases belong here : — (a) The substantive to which the relative refers, is in the Sing., but the rela- tive in the PL, when it does not refer to a definite individual of the class, but to the whole class, and in this way takes the signification of ohs. This usage, however, is more frequent in poetry, than in prose. Od. /n, 97. ktjtos, a fxvpta /SoV/cet aydarovos 'Apcpirptrr). PL Rp. 554, a. avx/J-Vp^s ye ris &iv Kal cnrb iravrbs irepiovo'iav iroiov/xevos, frrjaavpoiroibs dvf]p, ovs 5rj (cujusmodi homines) ical eiraivei rb ttXtj&os. (b) On the contrary, a relative in the singular refers to a PL substantive, when the relative has a collective signification, e. g. osris, bs 'dv with the Subj.. quisquis, quicunque. II. A, 367. vvv av robs dXXovs ewieiaouai (persequar), ft v ks Kixeicc. So in particular, irdvres, '6sris or bs dv (never irdvres o'inves, but always irdvres offoi or osris), e. g. Th. 7, 29. irdvras e£rjs, orco evrvxoiev, Kal iraldas Kal yvvawas Kreivovres. PI. Pp. 566, d. do-ird^erzi irdvras, & av irepirvyxdvy. Rem. 2. The relative is put in the Neut. without reference to the gender of its substantive, when the idea contained in the substantive is not to be con- sidered as a particular one, but as general (§ 241, 2), or when the relative is not so much to be referred to the substantive alone, as to the whole sentence. S. O. T. 542. dp' ovxl yoopov icrri rovyxeiprjixd crov, dvsv re irX^ovs Kal v) an ivaKTjv KtAeovffi. PI. Phaedr. 255, c. 77 rod 5ev/j.aTos ifcs'ivov 7777777, b v 'i/xepov Zeus TavvfxrjSovs ipuv coi/6v iroXecav a>v e7reiO"e (= rwv 7reicrfrei(rwu) arparidv. X. Cy. 3. 1, 33. crbv r o7s frrj Gavpots ol s 6 irar^p Kar4\iirev (= ro?s inrb rod irarpbs KaraX^KpSreio'iv). 2. 4, 17. oirore ob irpoe\rjAv&oir)S o~bv fj k'xois v v d fx e 1. 3. 1, 34. iyeb viriaxvovfj.ai, ? l)u 6 frebs e5 8j8<£, aufr' S> v av i/xol daueio-ps &AAa ttAcio- vos a^ia ebepyer-fjcreiu (instead of avrl rovrwv^'d). PI. Goi'g. 519, a. orav ra ao- Xv o~v vvv 877 8177 A&e?. Isocr. Paneg. 46, 29. 5>v eXa/Bev airaaiu pLzreSwKtv (instead of rovrwv a). Evag. 198. roiovr 01s e freer iv o'iois Evayopas fj.ev zlX (iV ' Th. 5,87. ix ru>v irapSvroov koI u> v dpare (instead of Kal e'/c rovrwv, a Spare). The preposition is frequently $ 332.] ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE IRONOUN. 53} repeated, e. g. Dem. Chers. 96, 26. aft tov aye'ipei Kal irposatTci Kal Scwet^ieTai, awb tovtwv dLayei (instead of airb tovtwv didysi tov ayeipei or aft cat ayeipei — didyei without airb Tovrcau). Rem. 4. By attraction, the adjective-clause acquires entirely the nature of an adjective or participle, which combines with its substantive to form a single idea, and which also agrees with it in form, e. g. x^P^ ru?s iiv tar oAals aTs eypatyas (= x a 'P w T0 " s u7ro °" ^ ypacpeiffais iirHTToXals). The blending of the adjective-clause with its substantive by attraction, is still more clear and beautiful, when the adjective-clause is transposed and stands in the place of the substantive, e. g. %aioa> ats eypatyas i ir ktt oAcus. Rem. 5. When predicative substances or adjectives belong to an attract- ed relative, these also must be attracted. Dem. Cor. 325, 298. i/xh ovre icaipbs irposriydyeTO w v eKpiva 8 (Kal ay Kal ffv /x(p e po vt to v rfj irarpidi ovdkv irpodou- vai (instead of a ittpiva 8'iKaia Ka\ cru/xcpepovTa). Ph.2. 70, 17. ols ov v (for eKeivtov, ols) r)iri(TTei ttoAAovs (i. e. secum duxit multos suorum, et Jidorum, quibus delectabatur, et eorum, quibus diffidebat). Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, also, sometimes suffer attraction, the relative adverb taking the form of the demonstrative adverb, or, when instead of the demonstrative adverb a substantive precedes the form which expresses the direction denoted by the substantive. Th. 1, 89. 8ieKo/xi(ovTo ev&vs (sc. iurev- &ei>) ofrev (instead of ou, ubi) vire^&svTo 7raidas. S. Ph. 481. iixfiaAov [x oirt\ freAets 'dytov, is avrAiav, is irp&pav, is ir pv jj.vt)v oxot (instead of ou, ubi) i)KiGTa /xeAAoo tovs irap6vTas aAywelv. 7 . The relatives o To s, o o- o s, osnsouv, rjXtKos, are attracted not only in the Ace. bnt also in the Nom., when the verb etvcu and a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause, e. g. 0105 crv et, otos €Keti/o? or 6 %oiKparrj^ ka7oi elcriv). Lucian. Toxar. c. 11. ov cpavXov rb ipyov, dvSpl o'la> vol ttoX- f/xio-rrj fj.ovofiaxvo'cu- PL Soph. 237, C o'la ye efiol TravTairacriv diropov (sc. ecrri, instead of t<3 toiovtw, oTos ye eyu> elfii, diropov ecrriv). Her. 1, 160. hrl fj.io-&$ oau) Stj (mercede, quantulacunque est). PL Rp. 335, b. ecrriv dpa Sucaiou dvfipbs fixdirreiv Kal ovt iv ov v dv&pdnrwv (instead of av&pwirwv Kal ostisovp £ o'lea fxvje Xvire7crSrai fxi\T bpyiCtcrSai. The demon- strative is commonly omitted. X. C. 1. 4, 12. fx6vr,v ttjv twv dvSrpwirwv (yXwTTav) eiro'n]crav [ol &eol) o'lav ap&povv re ttjv cpwvr]v, k. t.X. Rem. 9. When the adjective-clause has the signification of a substantive (§ 331, Rem. 4), the article is sometimes placed before the attracted oTos, tjX'ikos, and in this way, the adjective substantive-clause acquires entirely the force of an inflected substantive, e. g. Xom. 1 o olos av dvrjp ol oioi vfiels dvdpes Gen. i rod o'lov crov avSpds TOiV o'lwV VfxS)V CLvfipOOV Dat. I t<5 o'lu> o~ol avdpi rols o'iois v/x7v avdpdcriv Ace. 1 rbv oTov ere dvSpa robs o'iovs vfxas dvdpas. X. Cy. 6. 2. 2. ol oToi irep v/j.e7s dvo pes iroXXaKis Kal to. fiovXevofxeva Kara.' uavSdvovaiv (men like you). H. 2. 3, 25. yvovres rols o'iois o)fx7v re Kal vfj.7v x a ^ €W h 1/ iroXireiav elvat or)fxoKpaTiav (such men as we and you). Ax. Eccl. 465. eKeivo deivbv to7civ tjX'ikoio- i vSv (instead of ttjXikovtois^ tjX'ucoi ycf ia/xey). Rem. 10. A similar kind of attraction occurs also in such modes of ex- pression as Savfj.ao'Tbv ocrov Trpovy^p7\cre = Savfiao-rov ecmv oaov irpovx^' prjae (mirum quantum processit, instead of minim est, quantum processerit). Even in PI. Rp. 351, d. /xera idpwros & avfiacr ov oaov (instead of &avfj.ao-r6v i&riu iAe& ocrov). Hipp. M. 282, c. xPW ara eAa/3e bavfiao-Ta o or a (instead of *javfxaG'r6v 4o~tlv, oaa). Her. 4, 194. ol 8e (sc. 7riS7)K0i) crept dcp&o vol o cr o i iv ro7s ovpecri yivovrai. Also in the adverbs hav fiacrr ws us, &av fxacricas us, etc., e. g. Sravfxacrico s a> s a&Xtos yeyove (instead of Sravfidai6v 4cttiv, d>s &&Xios yeyove). PL Phaed. 66, a. i-rrepepv a> s ois aXrjSri Xeyeis. Symp. 173, C. inr € p

aXXois, o'l Trap' 'Aactiirov poas fA-evovaiv %voirXoi yr)s 'AShjvalwy Kopoi. Ar. Ran. 889. erepoi yap elo~iv, olaiv evx^fJ-ai freoTs; Rem. 15. A word in apposition with the substantive to which the relative clause refers, is sometimes attracted into the subordinate clause, and depends upon that clause for its government. In this case also, the transposed apposi- tive serves to explain more fully the adjective-clause. Od. a, 69. KvkXwttos Ace^AwTcu, o v bcp^raXjxov a.Xawo'ev avri&eov TloXixpT) pc v (whom Ulysses blinded, although he was the god-like Polyphemus). PL Hipp. Maj. 281, c. ti ttotg to oXtiov, on ol iraXaiol e/cetVot, &v ovoixara [xeyaXa Xeyerai iitl o~o(pia, HirraK ov Kal Biavr o s, (paivovrai cnrexofxej/oi tuv itoXitikuv irpa^wv ; 9. When the adjective -clause has another clause subordinate to itself (or a participle used instead of such clause), the two are commonly united, the relative, instead of taking the con- struction of its own adjective-clause, taking that of the subor- dinate clause, i. e. the relative has the construction which the omitted demonstrative of the subordinate clause would have had; in such cases there is no relative connected with the ad- jective-clause. Isocr. de Pace p. 16, 168. avfrpwirovs af'povfXe&a rovs /u.ev airSXiSas, robs 8' avro- p,6Xovs, ols 6ir6rav ris irXziov a fAia&bv Si§v, ovdev ex°' ej/ i (instead of o'l, ££bv avroTs — , obSev %Xoiev). Dem. Phil. 3, 128, 68. iroXXa av etVe?»/ e%oiej/ ""OXvv&ioi vvv, a t6t el irpoeidovT o, ovk av airwXovTO (instead of o'l, el ravra r6re irpoeiS., ovk av air.). S 333. Modes in Adjective- Clauses. 1. The Indicative is used, when the attributive relation ex- pressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as actual or real, e. g. f] 7roAis, r) KtiZjetai, rj cktict^t;, rj KTicr^o-erai. The Flit. Tnd. is very frequently used (even after an historical tense, $333.] MODES IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES 535 § 327, Rem. 2), to denote what should be done or the purpose (§ 255, 3), e. g. orpavqyovs alpovvTCU, ol toZ - o-tv (^ey choose generals who should carry on ivar, or to carry on war). Also after negatives, the Greek employs the Incl., where the Latin has the Subj., e. g. irap i/xol ovSeis, osn? jxrj Ikclvos ia-Tiv tcra iroiziv ifioc {nemo, qui non possii). 2. The Incl. is also used, as in Latin, in such adjective- clauses, as are introduced by the indefinite or generalizing rela- tives, e. g. ostls, quisquis, octtls 8rj, quicunque, Sons $rf 7rore, oo-os 8r}, ooos ovv, quantuscunque, ottoo-os, birooosovv, etc. Her. 6, 12. SovXTji'-qv virofxelvai, t\tis % a r a t, qualiscunque erit. X. An. 6. 5, 6. eSraiTTOv, 6tt6govs cir eXafifi avev rj arparid. Here the idea of indefinite- ness is denoted by the relative ; but it is otherwise, when this idea is contained in the predicate, see No. 3, and 4. Remark 1. The Fut. In d. with k4 (only Epic) is used, when it is to be denoted, that something will take place in the future under some condition [§ 260, 2. (1)]. II. i, 155. 4v 5' dvZpes vaiovcn iroXvpprjves, iroXvfiovTai o'i it 4 i hwTivriai &ebv &s r ifi-fjo- ov cr iv (who will honor him, if he shall come to them). 3. The relative with av, e. g. os av, rj av, o av, osrts av, etc., is followed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is a principal tense (Pres., Perf, or Fut), if the attributive rela- tion expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as one merely conceived or assumed. Hence it is also used in in- definite specifications of quality or size, and also to denote indefinite frequency (as often as, § 227 b , 2). The adjective- clause can commonly be considered as a conditional clause, i. e. as one which expresses the condition under which the action of the principal clause will take place ; and the relative with av can be resolved into the conjunction idv "with rh or any other pronoun followed by the Subj. X. Cy. 3.1,20. ov s av ( = idv rivas ) fieXrtovs rivhs eavrobv r)yr\a~ tavr ai, tovtois ttoAAcLkis Kai 'dvev avdy kt]s i&4Xovoi Tret&ecr&ai. 1.1,2. 'dv&punvoi iir oi>B4vas /aaXXov ffwiaravrai, -/} iirl tovtovs, ov s av (= idv rivas) a'l a & oovt a i apx^w avrccv iiriX' eipovvras. 7. 5, 85. ov s av o pw to KaXa, Ka\ raya&a iiriTrfdevovras, tovtovs Tt/nij- crco, 8. 8, 5. d/xo7oi rives yap av oi irpoo'TdTai Set, roiovroi Kal ol vir avTovs ws e7ri to ttoXv yiyvovrai. Her. 6, 139. rj Tlv&ln o~cp4as (iteXevei) 'A^vaioicri dlitas SidovaL ravras, ras (= as) av avrol 'A&7]va?oi 8 lit a o~ co ct (QUASCCJNQUE — constituerint) . II. /3, 391. tv Se k iyebv andvev^e fiaxys i&4XovTa vorjo'ta HifjLvdfciv irapb. vnvo-\ Kopcavtcriv, ov ol eTretra dpKiov eVcetTat st€ Ats 7]vy4j/eios, ov pa Kvves re teal dvopes diro araxruolo Siccvrai. Rem. 3. The modal adverb a v is so closely united with the relative, as to form with it one word, as in orav, iirdv, etc., § 260, 2. (3) (d), and hence should be separated from the relative only by smaller words, such as Se. This dv is very frequently omitted in the Homeric language, often also in the Tragedians, and sometimes in Herodotus, seldom in the Attic prose-writers. 4. The relative (without av) is connected with, the Opt., in the first place, with the same sign incation as when followed by the av and the Snbj. (No. 3), but referring to an historica,, tense in the principal clause. Hence it is used in general and indefinite statements; also in expressing indefinite frequency ($ 227 b , 2), — in which case the verb of the principal clause is usually in the Imp/, or in the Iterative Aor. Here, also, the adjective-clause may be resolved by a with the Opt. Th. 7, 29. irdvras k^r)s 0T(p (=eiti«) lvrvx oiev i koI 7rcu3as Kal yvvalnas Kreiuovres. II. /3, 1 88. o v r i v a ( = e'L riva) [x\v fiaaiAija Kal 'i^oxov dvlpa Kix^it] rov 5' dyavols iweeaaiv e pi\r v a acr k e irapaards. 198. %v 8' av Sr)/j.ov r avdpa Jf Sot, poowvrd r icpevpoi, rbv aKrjirrpca eAacr aa k e. Th. 2, 67. irdvras yaf 5/? Kar apx^s rod iro\efj.ov ol AaKedaipovioi, taovs (== ei rivas) AajSotep £p rfj ^aXaaarj, wj iroXe,uiovs diety&eipov. X. Cv. 3. 3, 67. Ixerevovai (Hist. Pres.), orca ivrvyx^vo lev, P% e ^7 etz/ - 5. In the seco?id place, the Opt. (ivithout av) is used without reference to the tense of the principal clause, when the attrib- utive relation expressed by the adjective-clause is to be repre- sented as a mere supposition, conjecture, or assumption. Then, the adjective-clause is to be considered as an uncertain, doubt- ful condition \h 259, 3, (a)]. X. Cv. 1. 6, 19. rov fkv abrbv Aeyeiv, a /jlt) aatycos eldeir], (peiSea&ai Set (he must beware of saying anything, which he does not know, or if he does not know it). For examples of Optatives used by means of an attraction of the mode, see § 327b, 1. Ar. Yesp. 1431. epSo t ris, t)v eKaaros etSet77 rix^nv (any one can practise the art with which he is acquainted (= if he is acquainted with it). 6. The Opt. ivith av is used, when the attributive relation ex- pressed by the adjective-clause is to be represented as a condi- tioned supposition, conjecture, assumption, or undetermined possi- bility [$ 260. 2, (4) (a)]. ? 334.] ADJECTIVE AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 537 X. C. 1. 2, 6. 2tAetTO — dvfip, bv edttUjUa^o/zei/ kolL (bv) iravres iirzcro-i ) Aibs 6/xfipos ae|et. Isocr. Panath. rbv Xoyov, bv oXiyca fj.lv irpoTepov fiefr TjSovrjs dirjA&ov, fiiKpq} 5° varepoy ^ueAAe ue Avirrjo-eiv (and which was to grieve me). Lys. Dai'dan. 166. oTs v/xels xap'e"^ /cat (sc. ous) irpofrv/jLOTepovs 7ronjcreTe. Bern. Cor. 252, 82. clvtuv, ovs 7] flip ir6his ods ix&povs . . dirr)\ao'e, aol Si ijcav cpiAoi (sc. o'l). X. An. 3. 2, 5. 'Apicuos 5e, bv 7]/J.e7s 7]^e\ofX€V /3acnAea /ca£ho"TaVaf /cat (sc. £)) iSa>Ka.fj.ev /cat (sc. irap' ov) eXa^Ofxev iriffrd . . , r)fj.d: robs Kvpov ' ov (since) ; irptv, irplv rj (jpriusquam) , ecos, ecos ov, eis o, esre, ^XP l or ^XP 1 °^> ^XP l ° T0V > fie^pt (^7/, until). 2. On the use of the modes, the following points are to be observed : — 3. The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented as a fact; hence in speaking of actual events e r facts. Her. 7, 7. &s aveyudocrSfr] aep^rjs o-rparevear^ai iirl tt]v 'EAAaSa, iv&avTa (TTpaTrj'irjy 7roteerat (when Xerxes was persuaded, etc.). 1, 11. &s v^pV rdx^ra 4yey6vee (quum primum, as soon as). X. H. 1. 1, 3. 4p.axovTo, fxexpis oi 'A&rjvcuoi a vetvXe vtrav. An. 1.3, 11. kol\ ecos fj. e v o /a e v avrov, crKeirreov fioi SoKei efocu, oircos cos dcrcpaXea-rara fieyov/xev. 4. The conjunction ecos (till), is followed by the Ind. of the historical tenses, when an object is to be represented as unat- tained or not to be realized. Comp. § 327 b , 1, (a). PI. Gorg. 506, b. rjSecos av KaXXiKXei rovrw en Si e Xey 6\xy\ v, ecos avrcp aireocoKa ( us que dum reddidissem ) . 5. The Subj. is used, when the statement is to be indicated as a conception or representation, and must be referred to the predicate of the principal clause, the verb of which is in one of the principal tenses. In the Common Language, the con- junctions take the modal adverb dv, e. g. orav, b-rrorav, tjvlk dv, hrdv (lir-qv), e7raSdv, iv co dv, irplv dv, ecos dv, p.ixP L dv, ksr dv [§ 260, 2, (3), (d)]. 6. Accordingly the Subj. is used with the above conjunctions from orav to irplv dv, when the statement of time is also to be represented, at the same time, as the condition under ivhich the predicate of the principal clause will take place. But with the conjunctions which signify until, the Subj. expresses a limit expected and aimed at. The Subj. is also very frequently used, to denote indefinite frequency (§ 333, 3). PI. Prot. 335, b. 4 ire iS av av j3 o u A r; diaXeyea&ai, cos eyco Zvva[xai eirea&ai r6re trot 8 1 a A e £ o /x a i (whenever you wish to, if at any time you wish to discourse. 540 syntax [$ 337. etc.). Th. 1,21. ol dv&panroi, iv S> dv iroAe/xaxri, rbv irap6vra iroXenov ae\ [xeyiarov KpivovcTLV. X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. iroXiv ouirca eu pan as dvnrarrojji.evr]P npbs tt6Xlv erepav, '/jtls, e 7r e id dv rjrrri&rj, Trapaxpv^ Tavrn dvrl rov /xd- Xeo&cu TrsiSea&ai i&eXei. 3. 3, 26. oirorav (ol fidpfiapoi BaaiXe?s) arparo ireB eva vr ai, rdcppov tt ep i BaXXovr ai evrrerus diet, r\]v iroXvxzipiav (as often as). Dem. Ph. 3. 128, 69. ews av a d> £rjr ai rb cudcpos, rore xP'h Kc ^ Tavrr)i> Kal KvBepvr\rr\v irpoSrvp.ovs elvai (dum servari possit). Remark 1. The Subj. is also used in the Epic language, when the adver- bial clause forms a member of a comparison, since a case is then supposed (comp. § 333, Rem. 2). II. |, 16. as o° ore it o p cp v p rj neXayos . . &s 6 yepav ap/u.aive. o, 624. iv 8' eirea, us ore KV[xa &ofj iv vrjt it e a y a i v. Rem. 2. On the Subj. after an historical tense instead of the Opt., and on c 6rav, i-xdv, ir p\v dv, etc. with the Opt. in the oratio obliqua, see § 345, Rem. 4. Rem. 3. The mode of connection by ore, Snore, irpiv, etc. without dv with the Subj., occurs only in the Epic language frequently, sometimes also in Ionic prose, and not seldom in the Attic writers with fxexpi an ^ Tpiv. 7. The Opt. is used with conjunctions of time, without av, just as the Subj. is, but referring to an historical tense of the princi- pal clause. When the Opt. is used to denote indefinite fre- quency {h 327 b , 2), an Impf. or an Iterative Aor. usually stands in the principal clause, and the conjunctions ore, i-n-ec, etc. (ex- cept those which signify before and until), are translated by as often as. II. k, 14. avrap or is v?jds re tSoi Kal Xabv 'Axcuav, iroXXas e/c necpaXr/s irpo beXv/xvovs eXKero x a ' lTas { as often as). Her. 6, 61. oicas (= ore) eveineie 7] rpocpbs (rb ivaib~iov), irpSs re rayaX/xa 'Lara Kal ixiffffero rr]v &ebv diraX- Act|cu rris dvs/xopcpirjs rb iraiS'iov [as often as). X. An. 6. 1, 7. on or e ol"EXX7]ves ro7s iroXe/xiois iirioiev, padtcos iir etpevyov (as often as the Greeks made an at- tack, whenever they made an attack). Od. e, 385. S> pae 8' iirl Kpanrvbv Boperjv, irpb 8e KVfxar ea^ev, has oye QairiKeo-ffi (piXriper/xoici fxiyelr] (but opvvcri Bopevv Kal dyvvai KVfxara, eccs av . . IJ-iyy)- PI. Phaed. 59, d. irepiejxevofxev eKacrrore, ecus avo ix& e ' 7 7 T0 Bea^iariipiov. Rem. 4. On dv in the principal clause, see § 260, 2. (2), (B). 8. Moreover, the Opt. without av is used with conjunctions of time, without reference to the time of the principal clause, when the statement of time is to be represented as an uncer- tain and doubtful condition, as a mere supposition, conjecture, or assumption; also, generally, when the subordinate clause forms a part of a principal clause expressing a wish. PI. Amat. 133, a. 6ir6re rb (piXocrotpelv alaxpbv rjynar al\xr\v etvai, ovd' ai' dvSpojTTov vofiio-ai/xi i/xavrbv elvai (when I shall assume, if I shall ever assume). X. Cy. 3. 1, 16. was av r6re irXeiarov d^ioi yiyvoivr ol dv&paivoi, oirSre dSiKOvv- 6 337.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 541 res aAlffh.dU'To (when they are, if they are, convicted of acting unjustly) ; — II. it, 465. at ydp jxlv fravdroio Svstjx^os &>8e Svvaifxriv voacpiv airoKptyai, ore fi.iv Hopos cuvbs Ik 6. vol. 9. The conjunction irpiv (irpoTtpov r/), besides the construc- tions already mentioned, is also followed by the Inf. The dif ferent constructions of rrplv are to be distinguished as follows : (a) When a past event, one that has actually occurred, is spoken of, the IncL of an historical tense is used (No. 8). The principal clause is negative ; yet it is sometimes also affirmative, when irplv signifies until ; thus often in the Tra- gedians and Thucydides (in the latter irplv 5r) and irplv ye 5f)). (b) When a future, merely conceived action is spoken of, which can be con- sidered as the condition of the principal clause, the Subj. is used, when the sub- ordinate clause refers to a Pres. Perf. or Put. in the principal clause ; but the Opt., when the subordinate clause refers to an historical tense in the principal clause (No. 5 and 7) ; yet only when the principal clause is negative, Cfc contains a question implying a negative. (c) But when v/e action is to be represented only as a conception, a conceived limit, not as an independent occurrence, but only as a subordinate matter, and a casual or incidental designation of time, the Inf. is used (= irp6 with the Gen.). Hence the Inf. can stand both for the Ind. of an historical tense, and for the Subj. or Opt., both after an affirmative and a negative principal clause, when it does not serve to define more fully the subordinate clause. Isocr. de Big. 348, b. ov irporepov eiravaavro, ir plv t6v re irarepa e/c roi TrparoireSov /xereire fx\pavr o, leal roov fid\ca (= idv /j.7) irporepov o~e e'/cySaAco ) . X. An. 5. 7, 12. /XTj aireAfr-nre, irplv av aKovvnr e. II. s, liret, quoniam, puisque, because, since, zTrethr), quoniam, and oirov, quandoquidem. In these adver- bial clauses, the Ind. is the prevailing Mode ; but the Opt. with av may be used according to § 260, 2, (4) (a), and also the Lid. of the historical tenses with av, according to § 260. 2, (2) (a). 11.0, 95. /xr) /ue Krelv, eirel ou% S/j.oydcrrpios"EKrop6s e 1 fx i (quoniam sum). X. An. 3.2,2. xa\e7roi ra vrapovra, SirSre avSpobv arpar-qyuv roiovrcov erre- pSfte&a kcu Xox&y&v KaX arpariwrwu (since we are deprived of such generals, etc.). Dem. 01. 1, in. ore ro'ivvv rav& ovroos e^et, izposr]KeL Trpo&v/j.ws i&e\eii/ aKoieiv. X. C. 1. 4, 19. ~2,ui k parr] s ov \xovov robs avv6vras eSoKei iroie?v, Snore virb rwv av&pwiraiv Spqvro airex ea & aL ra/v avoaiav re kcCl adiKccv, aAAa Kal Snore eV eprj/xicf eiev, eireiirep i}yt]0'aiuro /xij^ev &u Trore av irpdrroieu &eovs 8ia\c&e?v. — PI. Prot. 335, d. Seofxcu ovu cod Trapa/xe?yai tj/jUV, w s iycb ou§' c\ v evbs ifiiov c\kov - ffaifxi $j Gov. — II. o, 228. viroei^ev xeTpas e/xds, e7ret ov nev auidpwrl y' ire\- eaht] (since, if he had not escaped, the thing would not have been accomplished with- out effort). Remark. 5 E it e i also introduces interrogative and imperative clauses, where we must then translate it by for. Por the explanation of this use. see § 341, Pern. 4. 2. Such adveibial clauses as express the ground or cause in the form of substantive clauses by the conjunctions on and Sioti (arising from Sua tovto, on) and the Poet, ovvzkol (arising from tovtov eveKa, o) or oSovvckol (instead of orov eVe/ca, o). The Ind is here, also, the prevailing mode, when the statement is not conditional. PI. Euthyphr. 9, e. apa rb oo'iov, fri oo~i6v eari, , ¥/, on 84a- iroTa, ovk eo~Ti tovto. d\r]&4a, okois (= on) kot4 Got ~%p.4p8is d8eAv dirofrave'i- t ai. (b) The Protasis has et with the Lid. of the historical tenses, and the Apodosis, also, the Ind. of an historical tense with av; then the reality, both of the condition and con- clusion is to be denied. This form is used only of the past, or where there is a reference to the past; here it is affirmed that something could take place under a certain condition, but did not, because the condition was not fulfilled. The use of the tenses is the same as in simple sentences. See $ 256. Here the negation of the reality is not contained in the form of Expression 544 syntax. [$ 339 itself, for the Ind. of the historical tenses necessarily always denotes a past occurrence or fact ; the negation is merely an inferred one, that is to say, it con- sists in this, that a conclusion or inference is drawn from the past and applied to the present, and a reality in the past is opposed to what is not a reality in the present. The past reality expressed in the conditional clause stands in opposition to another present reality (either expressed or to be supplied from the context), which contains precisely the opposite of that past reality, e. g. if the enemy came, we were destroyed, i. e. if the enemy had come, we should have been destroyed, but now the enemy has not come ; from this contrast it is now inferred, that the assumed fact if the enemy came, did not take place. Ej tovto eAeyej, r) \xdpT av e s 'dv (si hoc dixisses, errares, if you said this you erred, or if you had said this, you would have erred ; but you have not said it consequently you have not erred). PI. Apol. 20, b, c. rts, r)v 5' eyco, kcu TroSa- tt6s ; Kal tt6(tov SiddaKei ] Evtjvos, e(p7], d> H,a>KpaTes, Ildpws, irevTe llvuv. Kal iyia tov "Evrjvov ey.aKapia'a, el ws aXrj^cos e% 61 TavTTjv t\\v Texvw Kal ovrws e/xfxeXccs Siddo~Kei' eyii) yovv Kal avTbs e KaXXvv 6 [xrjv ts Kal i) /3 pvv6 (xr)V dv, ei f)iricrTdfX7]V ravra' aXX' ov yap £iri(rTap.ai, & 'dvSpes 'A&rjvaToi (here also something past is spoken of, as is evident from i/xaKapLcra). 31, d. el iyd irdXai e7re^etp77(ra irpaTTeiv ra iroXiTiKa irpdyfj-ara, irdXai av an oXcbXrj Kai ovt av v/xas wv TcoXe/xlcov) lovres viravTeo/Aev avrois (here also a past action is spoken of: as long as Ave were unarmed, and therefore were in greater danger in a hostile than in a friendly country, it was necessary for us to remain here ; but now, since we are armed, the danger here and there will be equal). 8. 3, 44. aXr)&r), ev irev7}Toov (in reference to the preceding conversation). An. 7. 6, 9. r)/xe7s fxev, fi> AaKedai/xovioi, Kal ivaXai av ij /xev irap vfx?v, el jxr] aevorpuiv Sevpo rj/xas neia'as dirrjyayev. Lys. defens. Call. 102, 1. et p.ev 7repl 'aXXov Tivbs v) tov aco/xaTOS KaXXias i)yccvi£eTO, el-TjpKei 'dv [xoi Kal to. irapa twv aXXoov elptjueva' vvv de fxoi 5 o k e t alo~xpbv elvai fir] f3o7]&7)st etc rod irX-npecrTepov els tqv Kevunepov pelv r)/j.wv, edv airT&fxe&a aXXi)- Xcav • et yap ovtccs e%et Kal rj erocpia, iroXXov Tijxapiai t)\v irapa erol KaraKXieriv. Lysid. 206, c. et p.oi e&eXf)erais avrbv irofqerai els Xoyovs iX&e?v, tcroos av Sv- vai\xi\v eroi 67rt5e?£at, a xph olvtw diaXeyecr&ai. Menex. 236, a. Kal ri av exois elireiv, el deoi ere Xeyeiv; Hipp. Maj. 282, d. et yap eldetrjs oerov apyvpiov e'lpyaerp.ai, ^ravjxder ais a v. Ion. 537, e. et ere epolfxr)v, el (whether) rfj avTT) Tex v V yvyv&erKop.ev rfj dpL^/xrjTUcfj rd avra eya re /cat crv, r) dXXrj, (pair] s av dr)irov rfj avrfj. 5. 6, 9. Kal 6 Tlap&evios ct/3aros • iep' bv eX&oire av, el top "AXvv StaySatrjr e. 6.2,21. et KaraXnrSvTes to, erKevt] ev t£ epv/xvca x^P'V ws els fxdxw TrxpeericevacrfAevoi foifiev, "eras av ra lepa /jlccXXov irpox^poir] rjfuv. (Of the assumption of something past, in Herodotus [§ 260, (4) (a)] 7, 214. eldeir) &v ical ewv pr] MrjXievs ravTTjv ttjv arpairbv 'Ovf)TT)s, el rfj X&PV iroXXa w fit X ri koj s e'ir„ Onetes might have known this way , if he had been very familiar with the country). (b) The Protasis has lav (jjv, av) with the Subj., and the Apodosis also, the Ind. of a principal tense, commonly the Fu- ture (also the Imperative). By this form, the condition is rep- resented as a conception or supposition, the accomplishment of which, however, is expected by the speaker, and is regarded as possible. The conclusion resulting from the subordinate clause, is represented as certah) (necessary). Rem. 2. As the Greek Subj. always refers to the future, edv with the Subj almost wholly corresponds to e I with the Eut. Ind. ; the only distinction is, that by e I Avith the Fut. Ind., the form of the condition implies that the action will actually take place in future : but by edv with the Subj., the form of the condition implies that the actual occurrence of the action is merely assumed or expected by the speaker. The reason for the use of the Subj. is not to ba found in the conditioned relation itself which it is necessary to express, but in 46* 046 SYNTAX. [§ 339 the fact, that, aside from this relation, it is used to denote a concession expected by the speaker (§ 259, "Rem. 4). 'Ehv tovto Xey-ps, afiapr^crr}, if you say this, shall say it, you will err. (Whether yon will actually say this, I do not yet know ; but I expect, I as- sume that you will say it, and then it is a necessary consequence that you err.) — 'Eav tovto Xe£r)s, a p. a p r, r) a 77 {si hoc dixeris, errabis) . Deni. 2, 14. 'divas hoy os, av a.irrj to, izpdy\xaTa, fiaTaiov ti tpalveTcu Kal Kev6v. PI. Rp. 473, d. eav p.)] r) ol (piXScrocpoi fiacriXevcrao- iv iv tcus TrdXecriv, r) ol fiaaiXrjs Te vvv Xeyop.' evoi Kal SuvdaTai

a i yvncrim re Ka\ iKavus, Kal tovto els tovtov ^vpLTT ear}, diva/xls Te ttoXltlkt] Kal cpiXoa'ocpia, ovkcctti KaKwv iravXa Tals ir6Xe' ol. Lysid. 210, c. eav (xev &pa aocpbs yevrj, 8> ira?, irdvTes croi (ptXoi Kal irdvTes aoL oiKeioi effovrai. X. An. 1. 8, 12. Kav tovto, epa Kal tcls frvarlas airofiXeir- ov e X 1 7] v. (/3) X. Apol. 6. t)v 8e ala^dvufiai x e 'P a " / yiyv6p.evos Kal Karap-ep.- cpwp.ai ifiavT6v, irSis av eyeb av r)deas /3 lot ev l jii] PI. Menex. 239, C. ei» ovv r)fxe7s e-^ix * Lpcop.ev to. avTa Xoycp $iXcp Koajxelv. Tax av Seirepoi (paivot- fie&a {then we should be inferior). (7) E I with the Ind. of the historical tenses is used in speaking of the denial of a fact, and in the Apodosis, the Opt. with av is used in speaking of the past, instead of the usual Ind. of the Hist, tenses with &v. This use is not $ 340.] ELLIPSES OF THE PROTASIS. 547 frequent, and is found only in Homer [§ 260, (4), (a)]. II. fi, 80. el fxev tis rhv oveipov 'Axaioov aXXos ev icnrev, \pevS6s Kev (paTfiev Kal vocrcpi^oifxt §a /xaXXov vvv 8' ISev, hs fiey' 'dpicrTos^Kxaioiv evx^Tai elvai (if another had told the dream, toe should pronounce it false, and not believe it). II. e, 311. Kai vv Kev «/&•' air6Xo it o 'aval; avdpcHv Alvelas, el /a)) dp' b£b v6rjs rdx^r av oirXa eiroiov- fi7}v ivaffi Tlepcrais ro?s irposiovcnv. PI. Ale. I. Ill, e. el fiovXTj&elr] [x ev elSe- vai jx)] fiSvov, iroioi dv&pooiroi elv &eu>v, jxt] ovrca \eye • el Se /x-)] (otherwise), ob Sappovvrd [xe e^eis. 5. When el /x-f] has the meaning of except, another el is sometimes sub- joined, thus el jx)] el, like nisi si, except if, unless, the predicate of el [xi] being omitted. PL Symp. 205. e. ob -yap to eavroov, oT/xai, eKacrroi ao-ird^ovrai, el /x^j c i ris to fxev aya&bv olKeiov KaXel. 6. "Kv in the Protasis with el and the Opt. or the Ind. of the historical tenses. Sometimes 'dv is found, also, in the Protasis, so that it contains a con- dition for the Apodosis, but it is itself dependent on another condition, com- monly not expressed, but implied, e. g. el ravra XeyoLs dv means : If you should say this under circumstances (= in case circumstances require, in case an oppor~ tunity should present, in case one should ask you), etc. X. Cy. 3. 3, 55. robs 5' airaidevrovs rcavrdirao'iv aperrjs frav/xd^oi/x 1 dv, et" nivXeov av oj ra av&pcaTTtov irei&ol- Hyv 'av, ical crol rrei&o/xaL (si ulli alii, si id mihi affirmet, fidem habeam). 7. When Kai is connected with el (edv), the hypothetical Protasis contains a concessive meaning, and the Apodosis, an adversative meaning : the Protasis denotes a concession; the Apodosis, often in connection with' ofxus, tamen, denies the expected consequence, and places another consequence in opposi- tion to that expectation. Kai either follows el, — el Kai or precedes it, — ical el — . In the first case, Kai means also, and refers not merely to el, but to the entire concessive clause, and el Kai means although. In the last case, Kai means even (enhansive), and refers only to the condition, and Kai el means even if, e. g. el Kai &vnr6s el/xi, although I am mortal (conceding what is actu- ally the case, Kai el a&dvaros l\v,evenifl were immortal (conceding what is not the case). S. 0. R. 302. ttoKiv fxev, el Kai /xrj fiXeireis, (ppovels 5' ofxcas, oXa v6o~a> £vvecrriv, etsi (quamquam) caecus es, vides tamen, quo in malo versetur civitas. Aesch. Choeph. 296. Kel /x$) Treiroi&a, rodpyov ear eypacrreov, etiamsi non fido, perpetrandum facinus est. To the el (eav) Kai, the negative el (eav) /xrjde corresponds; to the Kai el {edv), obo* (fxr]&) el (edv). Remark. Concessive clauses are far oftener expressed in an abridged form by the participle, either alone, or in connection with Kai, Kaiirep, etc., § 312, 4, (d) and Rem. 8. ) 341. III. Adverbial Clauses denoting Consequence or Effect. 1. Adverbial clauses, denoting consequence or effect, are adverbs of manner expanded into a sentence, and are intro- duced by the conjunction wsre (more seldom w?), which refers to the demonstrative adverb ovrco(s), either expressed or under* stood, in the principal clause, e. g. ovtw xak-U icmv, wsre Sav 550 SYNTAX. [§ 341 fxd^ecrSox ( = Sav fxaa to*? /caXos eoriv). Yet these clauses often have also the meaning of a substantive or J?2/\ in the Ace. and denoting an effect, and must then be considered as substantive- clauses. In this last case, the relative tosre of the subordinate clause corresponds to a demonstrative substantive -pronoun, either expressed or to be supplied, e. g. rovro, hi the principal clause, e. g. 'AveTreio-e Eep£ea rovro, a>sre 7rot€tev ravra (Her.). 2. The Ind. is used in these clauses, when the consequence or effect, is to be indicated as a fact, something real and actual The negative is in this case (ov, i 318, 2). Her. 6, 83. "Apyos avdpwv ix'np^V ovtu, wsre oi SovXoi avTecov %, kcu &XXovs re ttoXXovs ir ap eXdp. fi ave. 3. The Inf., on the contrary, is used, when the consequence or effect is to be represented as merely a conceived or supposed one, infer red from the inward relation of things, ox assumed as possible. (On attraction with the Inf., see § 307, 4, and on the negative, §318, 2.) The particular cases where the Inf. is used, are the following : — (a) When an effect or consequence is specified, which results from or has its ground in the nature or condition of an object. X. C. 1. 2, 1. en Be vpbs rb fxer- picov de7o~&ai ireTraio'ev/j.evos fjU ^wKpar-ns ovrcos, oisre irduv fxiKpa, KeKry/xevos irdvv paBioos e%eiv apKovvra. Cy. 1. 1, 5. e§vvdo~&-n Kvpos iir&v/j.iav e/J-fiaXeTv roaav- rr\v rov irdvras abrS xapt^ecrS-a:, &sre ael rrj avrov yvwfjun a^iovv Kvj3epvdo~- &at. 2, 1. s r e iravra \xkv tt6vov avar- Xrjvai, irdvra Be k'lvBvvov vtt o [xel va i rov eTraiveloSrai eveKa. For the same reason,-?) Ssre (quam ut) is used with the Inf., after a comparative. Her. 3, 14. £ TraT Kvpov, ra fieu olKrj'ia -f]v pe(a> KaKa, f] 8>sre avaKXaieiv (greater than that any one can bewail, i. e. too great for one to bewail). X. C. 3. 5, 17. (pofiov/j.a; ael, fxy ri pei^ov rj usre (pepeiu Bv v a a Era l Kaxhv rfj ir6Xei o-vjxfifj. Hence Sst6 with an Inf. may also be used to explain a preceding clause, e. g. Th. 4, 23. UeXoirovp-fjaioi eu rjj 7]Trelpw arparorreBevo-dfievoi, Kal TrposfioXas iroiov/xeuoi to) Tei'xei, cTKOiTovures icaipov, ei" Tis 7rapo7recro£, wsre robs dvBpas crucrai (watch- ing for an opportunity, if any should occur, by which their fellow-citizens could be saved). X. C. 1. 3. 6. 'o rots irXelcrrois ipywBearar6u eariv, &sre (pv\d£ao~&ai rh virep rbv Kaipbv i/.nr'nrXao~&aL, t^to pqBicus irdvv ~2,oiKparr)S icpvXdrrero. (b) When the consequence is to be represented as one merely possible. X An. 2. 2, 17. Kpavyriv ttoXXtjv hroiovp KaXovvres aXXrjXovs, Ssre Kal robs voXe/xL 9vs aKoveiv (ut etiam hostes audire possent), &sre ol pikv iyyvrara twv jrcXe/ji- $ 341. J ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 551 oov Kal ecpvyov (a fact's. 1.4, 8. ovre aTroirecpevyaffiv ' e%« yap Tpijipetr, So st « c Xe?v rb iKelvoov irXo?ov. (c) When the consequence or effect includes, at the same time, the idea of purpose or aim. Th. 2, 75. -n-poKaXv/xp-aTa e?%e deppeis Kal Sup&epas, &sTe rob< £pya£op.evovs leal to, £vXa p.7)Te irvp Kvpe, '6ti iyoo, So st e aireXdo*ai XaXdalovs anb tovtoov toov 'aKpoov s iroXXanXaffia av eSw/cct XP"hfACLTa, oov o~v vvv e%eis trap i/xov. (e) When instead of an Inf. alone, the Inf. with SosTe is used for the sake of emphasis. Th. 1, 119. (e'S e-f)frri av) knaffToov lUa, Sostg ty tj (p i a a cr £r a, i Tbv TToXefMOV. 2, 101. avaireifr GTai virb 'SevSov . . , So s t iv t&xsi aireX&eTv. 6, 88. Kal ol Kopiv&toi zv&vs i\\/7)(picravT o avTol irpcoToi, oostg irdcrr) irpo^vfxief ap.vvs.iv ktX. X. H. 6. 1, 9. Kal 'A-fr^cuot Se ivdvTa Troirjo-aiev &v, Sjte 0-vp.p.axoi rip-tv yeveo~&ai. (f) In general, when the speaker, without respect to the objective relation of things, apprehends, in his mind, solely the causal connection between the cause and the effect. In this way, a consequence actually existing may be expressed by Sosre with an Inf. X. An. 1. 5, 13. tfXawev iirl tovs Mevoovos (o~TpaTiooTas), Host eKeivovs i kit eirXrj x& « J Kal ai>Tbv Mevoova Kal Tp4x eLV ^ T ^ SttAo. (g) In oblique discourse. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. (Tbv Kvpov) eb(Txnp.6v(os iroos irpose- veyKelv Kal evdovvai tt]v (piaXrjv tco irdivirai, &st e ttj p.7]Tpl Kal Tcp 'Aarvdyei ttoXvp yeXooTa irap aax^ v ' Rem. 1. When the Inf. connected with wstc depends on a condition, the modal adverb 'av is subjoined to the Inf. [§ 260, 2, (5), (a)]. Th. 2, 49. t« ivTbs ovtoos eKaieTO, So s t e rjSio-Ta av is vZoop i\ivxpbv o~(pas avTovs p I ir r e i v. X. An. 6. 1, 31. Kai p.oi ol &eol ovtoos £v to7s hpo?s io-f]p.rivav, Sostc Kal lSid>T7}v av yvoo- vai, otl TavT-qs ttjs p.ovapxlas airex^cr^ai /xe Se? (i. e. Kai e'/ tis ldidoTt]s eft?). Rem. 2. Instead of &st€ with the Inf. or Ace. with Inf., a relative, particu- larly oTos, So- os, is very often used in connection with the Ace. with Inf., this relative corresponding to a demonstrative, particularly toiovtos, too-ovtos, either standing in the principal clause or to be supplied. PL Crit. 46, b. eyeb — toiovtos (sc. elfil), oT os toov ip.S>v /xrjdevl &XXcp tc e ih e a&ai, ?; Top X6yw. X. Cy. 1. 2.3. ol UepffiKol v6p.oi iirip.eXovTai, firoos tt]V apx^v p^ t o iovtoi eo~ovTat ol 7toA?tc», oT o i ivovripov twos t) aio~xpov tpyov icpiecr&ai. X. H. 6.5, 7. toiov- tos 6 Urdcrnnros ?jv, olos p.r) (Sov Xecr&ai ttoXXovs airoKTi vvvvai toov tto Xitoov. Th. 3, 49. f] p.ev ecpEraae r oo~ovtov, o a ov Hdx'HTa aveyvooKevai Tb i^/i]s eiros elirelv (especially with was and ovSe(s), ut ita dicam, propemodum dixerim, ws avveXovr i elire'iv, ut pancis absolvam, ws ye juot SoKe7v, ut mihi quidem videtur, properly tali modo ut mihi videatur, ws ifie ev jne ixvr\ x6yw elirel v, especially oXiyov, fiiKpov Se?v,ita ut paulum absit, and in the still shorter form, bxiyov, prope, paene. — According to the same analogy, o as elvot Klyvirrov (ut in Aegypto, for Egypt, i. e. considering its whole extent). 4. The Opt. ivith av is used when the consequence or effect is to be represented as a conditioned supposition or firesumption 'J 260, 2, (4), (a)]; finally the Ind. of the historical, tenses is used with av, when it is to be stated, that the consequence would take place under a certain condition \h 260, 2, (2), (a)]. Isocr. Archid. 130, 67. els roffavr-nv a t ui^iav iX-nXv&ao-iv, iis r ol fxev KCKr-nne- voi ras ovaias r'jdiov av els r)]v baXarrav ra crcperep" avrwv e fifiaXXo lev, % ro7s Seo/xevois eirap K e a e i av. PL Menex. 236, d. croi ye 5e? x a p' l ( €(r & a h &sre Kav oXiyov, el /xe KeXevois airoSvvra opxyvacrSaL, %apicraiV 7 7 I/ & v - — Symp 197, a. fxavriK^v 'AirSXXwv avevpev, 'Eiri8rvfj.ias KafEpwros r)yefxovev(Tavros, w sre Kal ovros "EpwTos av ely /ma^rr,*. — Dem. Cor. 236, 30. ovk av wptd(o[j.ev QiXiTTirov, wsre rrjs elprivns av 8 i-rj fj.aprT]Kei teal ovtc av afxcporepa el%e, Ka\ t)]v elpr\vr]V, Kal ra %a>pia. X. Ag. 1, 26. irdvres 7roXeu.iKa oirXa Kareo-Keva(ov, wsre rfyv ir6Xiv ovrws av f, 7770-0? iroXefxav ipyaarripiov elvai. Rem. 4. The Opt. without dv is used only in the case mentioned in § 227b, 1, (b). When wsre is connected with the Imp., or the imperative Subj. [§ 269, l' (a)], the dependent discourse is suddenly changed, with rhetorical emphasis, into the Oratio recta. Dem. Phil. 3. 129, 70. ypd' wre (more seldom is iS-c- A.e6 or o7rw5 av £$e\r] (§ 333, 3), e/caora) (gives to each, as he wishes). Very often ws av or ws7rep a v is used with the Opt. ($ 333, 6). PL Phaed. 87, b. ip.ol yap SokcX o/x-otco? Aeyeo-#cu Tp-h (Tovrai iu avXjj — , &s tS>v vrjdvjuLOS vttvos airb fiXecpapoiiv oXcoXei. p, 434. 5 st e hvepos effT7)Kei. k. 485, sq. ws 8e Xewv /x^Xoiaiv asirep, &sre, an attraction of the Case sometimes occurs, particularly in the Ace. Lys. Accus. Agor. 492, 136. i>v$a[JLod ecrriv 'AySparov 'A&riucuov elvai w strep & p aav /3 ovXov (should be such as Thrasybulus is). But the Nom. is often found, for which a verb must be supplied from the context. Dem. Mid. 363. expw avrbv to. ovtcl avaXiaKuura S> strep iyw, ovtw p.eu acpaipelcr&ai t\\v viK-qv. Rem. 4. An appositive is often used with ws denoting comparison, as in 47 554 SYNTAX. P 343. Latin with ut, for the purpose of explaining the predicate of the principal clause. This oo s, ut, expresses either comparison or limitation, and in the first case is to be translated by as, in the latter by for ; the former occurs, when it is presupposed that the object connected with as possesses in a high degree, the thing affirmed in the predicate of the sentence ; the latter, when it is pre- supposed that the object possesses only in a small degree what is affirmed by the predicate of the sentence, S. 0. R. 1118. Aaiov yap fy, direp ris aXXos, tho- t6s, &s voy.evs avhp {ut pastor, as a shepherd ; the fidelity of shepherds be- ing presupposed ) . But Th. 4, 84. 7> 8e ovdh aSvvaros, &s' AaKeSaifi6pios, elireTv (ut Lacedaemonius, for a Lacedemonian; it being presupposed of Lacede- monians as a thing known, that they were not great orators). $ 343. II. Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting Quantity. 1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quantity, compare the predicate of trie principal clause, in respect to quantity or degree, with its predicate. The compared predicates are con- trasted either as equal or unequal to each other. 2. The equality of the predicates is expressed in the follow- ing manner : — (a) The adverbial clause is introduced by the relative oo-w (oo-ov), which refers to the demonstrative roaovrto (too-ov- tov), in the principal clause. X. Cy. 8. 1, 4. toctovtov Sia % av TrXsica 7, is rra- pabr\rai ra irepnTa rS>v iKavoov, TOffoinw Srua&ov Kopos ifxiriirTei tt\s iSadrjs. Th. 8, 84. '6aa> /xaXiffra Kal eAeu&epot ijaav vavrai, roaovrca tca\ frpaav- rara TvposircaSvres rhv [ua&bv airrirovv. The Superlative may also stand in the first member, the Comp., in the last. Dem, 01. 1. 21, 12. oa-ca yap kroi~ u6rar' aire? (t<£ \6yoj) doKovp.ev ^prjcr&cu, r ocovr a> p.a\XQV airtv. X. C. 4. 4, 13. ov yap aler&avoixai erov, birolov i'6/j.i/j.ov, t) -koIov diKcuov Xeyeis. — In indirect questions, the simple relative is sometimes used, instead of the indirect interrogative, e. g. os instead of ostis, oTos instead of oirolos, etc. Rem. 2. The adverb wot e, like the Latin tandem, is sometimes appended to the interrogative, in order to express the impatience or desire of the inquirer for an answer, or to denote wonder, or emotion in general. X. U. 1. 1, 2. ttoIo) itot' expyo-avTo TeKfiripto) ,• {what proof , I pray , did they bring?) 1. iroA- XaKts iSavjAao-a, rtffi iroTe XSyois 'AS-qvaiovs eireterav ol ypa\pd/xevoi ^WKpaTrfv, &s a^ios eXt] &ava.Tov Trj ttoXei. R. L. 1, 1- i&avfj.aera, OTca iroTe Tpoircc tout iyeueTO. Rem. 3. The article is prefixed to the interrogative, when one of the speak- ers has mentioned an object or quality, in order to define it more exactly, while the other does not expect this more exact definition, but interrupts the dis- course, and, by means of the article referring to that general definition, asks "what that means." PI. Phaedr. 277, a. HooKp. Nvv Srj iKelva tf8r}, & $a?8pe, dvvd/j.e&a Kptveiv, tovtcov w/j.oXoy7i/j.eva>v. 4>. Ta irola; (in reference to the preceding e/cetVa). 279, a. 2a>Kp. Neos eVi, 2> Qcudpe, 'leroKpa.T'ns • b fxevroi fxav- Tevofiai kclt aifTov, Xeyeiv i&eXw. 4>. Tb irolov Sr] ; So Ta irota TavTa Xeyeis ; Prom this mode of expression, that is to be distinguished, in which a substantive with the article or a demonstrative follows an interrogative with- out an article. In this case, the inquiry relates to the nature or quality of an object already existing. II. tt, 440. -koIov tov fxvSrov eeiires ; which the Eng. translates by means of two sentences, " What is that word, that thou hast spoken? " The word is already spoken, and the other now asks Avhat it means. Her. 7, 48. Saifj.6vie avSpwv, KoTa (= irola) tx 7] e7T€t8o*' ti yevqrai; (but what must take place if you are to do your duty?). Hence the elliptical expressions, 'iva rl; us rl; (sc.y4wq- rai) to what purpose, for what object? '6ri rl; (sc. ylyvercu), on what ground? So also in the adjective-clause, e. g. PL Phaed. 105, b. ei yap epoi6 fie, § av r I iv t<£ crdb/jLari iyyeurjrai, &ep/j.bv e air6Kpi Trdirire, TroXefXioi elertv, ot eepearrjKaai rots r)pep.a) HoKe/xioi fiev toi, %s eroi Sokw, e, Si Avert, ercpoSpa (piXet ere 6 irar^p Kal i) pA]Tr\p\ Udw ye, r) S' '6s. Still, r) ttov is also used when the inquirer would express doubt whether the actual existence of a thing is to be admitted or questioned. Eur. Med. 695.^ ttov rerSXpriK epyov aXo'x ia ' TOV T0 '^ e •' (has Jason indeed, actually dared this thing ?). (b) ~*Apa (only post-Homeric) originates from the inferential &pa, igitur [§ 324,3, (a)], and hence implies the idea of consequence, effect ; by frequent use, however, the appropriate meaning (igitur), becomes weakened and ob- scured : hence the inferential particles a pa, ovv are sometimes added to a question introduced by apa. *Apa leaves it undecided, whether the inquirer expects an affirmative or negative answer. Hence, when it is to be definitely Kdicated, that either an affirmative or a negative answer is expected, then in $ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 553 the first case, ap ov (nonne), is used; in the last case, dip a /xr) (num, whether? is it not ?) ; fxr) always expresses solicitude, fear. X. C. 3. 6, 4. ap ecpr] 6 Sco/cpaV^s, u>sirep, cpi\ov oIkov el av^rjcrai flovAoio, irXovo-idorepov avrbv ernxeipoiris av Troirjcrai Udvv /xev ovv, ecpr]. 10,1. dtp a, ecpr], 8> JJappdcne, ypacpiKr) ecrriv r) elKacrlo rwv opw/xevcav ; — 'AAr)&r) Xeyeis, ecpr], 2. 6, 16. ap* ovv olcrSrd rivas, oj dvw- cpeAeTs 6vres wcpeAlfxovs Svvavrai cpiAovs rroieTcr&ai ; Ma Af ov Sr)r ecpr]. 3.13, 3. ap' odv, ecprj, ko.1 olKerai o~ov 'dx^ovrai iflvovris re avrb kcu Kovofxevoi avrcd , Ma rbv At', ecpr) (profecto non aegre ferunt). 4. 2, 22. &p ovv Sia rrjv rod x a ^~ Keveiv a/xad lav rod ovSfxaros rovrov rvyxdvovaiv ; Ou Stjto. 1.5,4. apa 7e a v x? >( ] TravTCL dvdpa, r)yr)crdp.evov rrjv eyKpdreiav dperrjs elvai KprjirTda, ravrr,v irp&Tov ev rrj ^vx? KaracTKevdcracrbai , (nonne certe). 2.6,34. a pa. /xr] diafid\- kecr&ai Sevens vrr e/xov ; 4. 2, 10. ti Se St] fiovAo/xevos dyaSrbs yevecr&ai, ecpr], & Ev- bvSrifxe, crvAAeyeis ra ypdjx/xara ; — T Apa /xr] laroos ; ecpr] Kal 6 Ev&vdri/xos • Ma Ai", ecpr], ovk eycaye. 0. 4,4. dp a p-r? ouff\vv^afieif rbv TJepcrcov fSacriAea ixt/xrjcracr&ai ; Double question : PL Euthyphr. 9, e. a pa to ocriov, '6ri ocriSv ecrri, cpiAe?rai virb rcav 3-eaV, fj, on cpiAe7rai, ocriSv ecrri ; (is then that which is holy loved by the gods because it is holy, or is it holy because it is loved ?) (c) Mav (probably originating from p.r) and the confirmative ovv, § 316, Rem.), corresponds entirely to the Latin num, is it not ? is it so ? whether ? and hence always leads one to expect a negative ansAver. For the sake of perspi- cuity, the particles ovv and /xr) are often added, e. g. pa) v ovv, /x£>v lit). But if the negative ov is added to paV, then the question is affirmative (nonne). PL Lysid. 208, c. aAA 5 opx el T ' s <*ov ; "05e iraib*aywy6s, ecpr]. Mcvv SovAos &v ; (but not a slave, is he ?) Eur. Hec. 754. ri XPVP- 1 * pacrrevovcra ; p G>v eAev&epov alcava frea&ai ; paftiov yap earl croi. Hecuba answered : Ou S^ra* robs KaKovs Se rip.cc- povp.evr] alcava rbv ^v/xiravra SovAevcrai &eA7 fxoi oov avSpwirov bp&bv dvecT-no'av ktX. (and yet do you not think that they do care for men 1 ?). Cy. 2.2,31. Kit-ire it a toiovtov ovra ov s Treirpay/j-eva, hivopeis, iroTepa Tvxns, '/) yv&ixns epya icrriv ; (g) V A AAo ti r\ (arising from tiAAo ti etm or yiyveTai, r\ or yevoiT dv, %) and 'a Wo t i, has the same signification as nonne. X. An. 4. 7, 5. dX Xo ti -if) ovSev KuXvei irapievai ; (does anything else than nothing hinder = does anything hinder ?) PL Hipparch. 236, e. dXXo ti ovv o'L ye (piXoKepdeTs (piXovo-i to Kepdos ; (h) y H, like the Lat. an, is properly used only in the second member of the question ; but often the first member is not expressed in form, but is contained in what precedes or may be easily supplied from it. "H can then be translated by -perchance. X. C. 2. 3, 14. iravT 'dpa crv ye to. ev avSpunrois (piXTpa eirio-Toifxe- vos iraXai aireKpvTTTOv • 7} OKvels, e(p-n, dp£ai, fJ.7) alcrxP os ^ >a - v V s, > ^ v ' ir p6Tepos tqv db~eX(pbv ev Troirjs ; (= i) dpa — direupvirTOV, 77 oKveis — ;) (i) Ei and edv [with the Subj., comp. § 339, 2, II, (b)], whether, is used only in indirect questions, and, indeed, properly only in double questions, and de- notes a wavering or doubting between two possibilities ; but often only one member is expressed, while the other is present in the mind of the speaker. Hence el and edv are especially used after verbs of reflecting, deliberating, inquir- ing, asking, trying, knowing, and saying. The connection must determine whether the interrogative sentence has an affirmative sense (whether — not), or a nega- tive one (whether). X. An. 7. 3, 37. o-Ke\pai, el 6 'EXXrjvwv vo/jlos KaXXiov ex«, (whether — not). C. 1. 1, 8. ovre t<$ aTpaTrjyiKcp drjXov, el (whether) av/icpepei CTparriyelv' oijTe to> ttoXitiko) SrjXov, el (whether) av/xv tovto) tov vovv irpose- Xeti/, el Micaia Xeyca, % /at). — On el after verba affectuum, see § 329, Rem. 7. Rem. 9. Very frequently, especially in Homer, verbs which express some action, are constructed with this deliberative edv with the Subj. and ei with the Opt. (Epic et Ke, a'i /ce), in which case a verb like GKO-rrelv, ireipdaSraiy is to be supplied by the mind. Th. 1, 58. UoTihaiaTai etre/ji^av /xev Kal iraf? 'ASrivaiovs npeafieis, ei ttccs ize'ia eiav (having sent envoys to the Athenians [to see, to ascertain] whether they could persuade them). II. v, \T2.yXavKi6wv S' l&bs (pepe- Tai jxevei, ijv Tiva tt ecpvn dvdpwv. (k) EtTe — eiTe are used in indirect questions like e* — ^', except tliat f 344. j INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 561 by efre — e'lre the indecision and hesitation of the speaker between two possi- bilities, are made more pi'ominent. S. Ant. 38. Kal Sei^eis rdxa, etr eiryej/^s ire, el jaoi £&e\T)o~ais av £!-riyfio-ao-&ai (sc. el (SovAoio). — **Apd ae eiretcra &v (sc. ei, ffoi ravra e\e£a) ; (persuasissemne tibi?) X. Apol. 28. ffb 8e, & (piATare 'ATroAAodoope, [taAAov av efiovAov fxe opav 5iKalws, $) &5t/ca>s airo&vho~KovTa ; (vellesne?) Ovk old eX at e ire i or a 'dv. Hem. 10. On jj.7] (whether — not) with the Opt. after a principal tense, see § 345, Rem. 2. On the Ind. of the principal tenses, and also on the Subj. af- ter an historical tense, see § 345, 5. When the Subj. is followed by an Opt., then the latter, as in final clauses (§ 330, 3), expresses the more remote thought. II. 7r, 650, sq. (ppd^ero &vfx.cp . . p.epixT)pifav, >r) ^877 Kal Keivov. "EicTwp x a ^ K vyoL€V — tovs 7roAe/xtovs aTrocjivyovTCLs; when they express a command, wish, or desire: (b) by the Inf. and in continued oralio obliqua by Setv, xfiV VOLL with the Inf., more seldom by the Inf. alone., (§306), e. g. J 'EAe£e rots o-rpariajTais ezri^eo-^at rots 7roAe/xiois (oratio recta, inc^eaSe) . Remark 1. Intermediate clauses of the oratio obliqua, and particularly such as are connected with the preceding by yap, although they are grammatically principal clauses, frequently stand in oblique discourse in the Opt. without any conjunction to introduce them ; commonly a sentence expressed by oti or &s with the Opt. or by the Ace. with the Inf. precedes. X. An. 7. 3, 13. Z\eyov iroAAol Kara Tabrd y '6ti iraPTos 'ch^'jx Aeyoi 'Xev&rjS • x ei / x ^" / 7 a P e ^Vt kclI ovre o'//caSe airoir\e?v T6J fiovAo/xevco Zvvarcv e'tr), k. t. A. H. 3. 2, 23. airoKpiva/j.ei'ooi/ Se tuv 'HAe'icou, 6tl ov TroiTjaeiav iavTa' iiriAri'idas yap ex olev TasTr6Aeis' (ppovpau ity-qvav oi ecpcpoi. 4. The subordinate clauses of direct discc irse, undergo no change in indirect discourse, except that, after an historical tense in the principal clause, they take the Opt. in the place of the Ind. and Subj., when the indirect discourse is to be repre- sented as such, i. e. when the statement contained in the sub- ordinate clause, is to be viewed as the opinion or sentiment of the person spoken of, and not that of the narrator. "Av, which is joined with the Opt. and Ind. of the historical tenses, still remains in indirect discourse. X. An. 7. 1, 33. (KoipaTad-qs) eAeyev, oti erot/xos etr) r)ye? K6fj.TTos 6 x6yos 6 elpnfievos elr) (whether the statement made was not idle boasting) X. Cy. 2. 4, 17. dv ns eKelffe e^ayyeiXy 871,00 s eyu fiovXoifinv fieydXrjv &i)- pav iroiTJtrai (if any one announces there, that /intended). C. 1. 2, 34. el fiev yap (rrjv rcvv Xoycov rexvnv) &vv rols bp&ws (Xeyofievois elvai vo/j.i(ovres aTrexzoSai KeXevere), dr)Xov on acpeKreov eln rov bpSoos Xeyeiv {if you mean that philosophy is not to be used in reasoning right, it is evident that it was tour view, that ice jnust abstain from reasoning right). Hence if the Greek, after a principal tense, wishes to represent a statement as the sentiment of another person, it must use the Ace. with the Inf. instead of on with the Subj. Thus. e. g. the English phrase, He says that we are immortal, is not to be expressed in Greek by Xeyei, OTi i)fie?s dhdvaroi ibfiev, or on r). a&. elfiev, but by Xeyei r)fids d&avd- t on e tva 1. — In hypothetical Protases with el and the Ind., the Ind. remains. Rem. 3. The oblique discourse is sometimes used even in the subordinate clauses of direct discourse, when the speaker wishes to bring forward an ex- pression or thought, not in his own person, but as the sentiment of another. Her. 7. 2. io~rao~'ia£ov (ol rralSes), 6 fiev "Aprafia{dvr)S, Karon irpeafivraros re 6^77 irais- rbs rod yovou, Kal on vofii^Ofieva ei 7] itpbs iravroov dv&pumwv, rbv 7rpea/3vrarov r)jv apxw eX eLU ' Hep£ijs Se, cos 'Aroaans re irals elr], Ka\ on Kvpos eXn 6 Krno-dp.- evos roiai Tlepcryai ry\v iXev^npivv. Rem. 4. When the Opt. of oblique discourse is used instead of the Subj. of direct discourse, all the conjunctions may be connected with dv. Th. 8, 54. /cal i\p7] s evxapW' roraroi Xoyoi i p. ^XvSrr) a vrai. Comp. § 327, Rem. 2. H. 2. 3, 2. e8o£e r$ S'/?,ua! rpiaKOvra eXeoSai, o'l robs rrarpiovs vofiovs £vyypdipov crept ~2,6\cov Sr r) r a 1. X. Cy. 4. 5, 36. robs linzeas eKeXevae (pvXarreiv robs aya- yovras, e 00 s dv ns at)fidvn. H. 2. 1, 25. Avaavdpos 8e rds rax'^ras rwv veut eKeXevcrev kireaSrai ro7s 'A&r,vaiois ' eireihav 8e eK$G>a 1, KandSi ras '6 Tl voiovaiv, drroiTXe'iv. On on, ws [that), see § 329, 4 and Rem. 3. $346.] ELLIPSIS. BRACHYLOGY. 565 Rem. 5. The Imperfect (seldom the Plupf.) Indicative, referring to the his- torical tense of the principal clause, is sometimes used instead of the Pres. (Perf.), in a subordinate clause which is associated with other subordinate clauses in the Opt. X. An. 1. 2, 2. Kvpos robs (pvydSas e/ceAeixre crbv avrep o~rpa- revea&ai, vTTOffxoiJ-evos avrois, el Ka\a>s Karaivpd^eiev, e' a e arparev er o, pvq irpoofira/ Travaaa&ai, irplv avrobs Karaydyot ofcaSe. (Oratio recta: eav Harare paty, e<£' a. crrparevofxai, ov -rrp. iravao/xai, rrplv av v/xas Karaydycc). Bat the Ind. is also used in the subordinate clauses of oblique discourse, when the narrator intro- duces his own remai-ks and explanations into the statement or thought of another, or when the thoughts in the subordinate clause do indeed belong to the statement or idea of another, but are to be exhibited as definite facts or as general truths, or when the thoughts of the other are to be represented, at the same time, as those of the narrator. In oblique discourse, the Ind. and Subj. are often interchanged with the Opt. Then there is a mingling of the direct and indirect discourse in order to form a contrast between the certainty, reality, fact, and directness expressed by the two former, and the uncertainty, possibility, mere conception, and indirectness denoted by the latter. X. An. 2. 3, 6. eKeyov on et/coTa SoKO?ev \eyeiv ySacriAe?, /cat T^KOiev riye/uovas exovres, °^ avrovs, eav at airovZaX yevcovrai, & poverty, ev&ev e^ovai ra iirirrideia. 3. 5, 13. '6/j.otoi i)o~av &avud£ovres, oiroi irore r pety ovrai oi "EWrjves, Kal ri ev v<£ exoiev. 6. The Greek can also use the Ace. with the Inf. instead of the finite verb, in every kind of subordinate clauses. Her. 6, 117. dvdpa ol SoKeeiv oirXir-nv avrio-rr\vai fxeyav, rod (instead of ov) rb yeveiov rr]v acnrifta iraaau (TKid^eiv. 6, 84. ~2,Kvbas (sc. (paai) robs vo/xdSas, eirel re o~(pi Aape7ov i s fia\e?v is rrjv x<*>pr]V, fxera ravra /xe/xovevai fj.iv rto'ao'- &ai (postquam invasisset). Th. 4, 98. oVh&r)va7oi ecpaaav, el fiev eivnrXeop Svvtj- & rival rrjs eKeivcov KparrjcraL, rovr av exeiv (si ampliorem illorum agri paiiem in suam potestatem redigere possent se earn retenturos). See Larger Grammar, Part II, § 849. Rem. 6. The spirited mode of representation among the Greeks, and the desire to make past events appear as present, often changes the indirect dis- course into direct, or the direct into the indirect. In the first case, there is of- ten an interchange of person, comp. § 329, Rem. 3. X. Cy. 1. 4, 28. ivravfra 877 rbv Kvpov ye\do~ai re e/c twj/ Trp6crhev darepvav Kal elire"iv avrw aruovra frapp'e'iv, or i irapecrai avrois bxiyov xp^vov &sre opav cr o i e^earai, Kav fiovXr], acrKap- Safivtcrei. On the contrary, An. 7. 1, 39. eX&kv 8e KAeavdpos' Md\a /xoXis, es ev irpal-ai riva nv6\iv. So also el or etrrep ris or &\\os tis or efaep irov, eforep irore, etc. Her. 9, 27. tj/aiu ecrri iroXkd re Kal ed exovra, el reoi- ffi Kal &W010-1 'EWr\vo3V. 5. Pleonasm is the use of a word, which, in a grammatical point of view, is superfluous, the idea conveyed by it having been already expressed in what precedes, either by the same 568 syntax. [$347 or by another word. The desire of perspicuity or emphasis is commonly the cause of Pleonasm. X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. o'l, ?)j> eV eKelvovs 7]{xels iAawafxev, vwoTefAovvTai rj/j.as efcel- vol. 3, 15. irtipdaoixai rep it air it a> ayabuiv iirirewv KpaTioros &v iTrirevs o~v[X[x,a- X^if a v t cf. Remark. Grammatical Pleonasm is to be distinguished from the rhetorical, which consists in the use of two or e\en more words of a similar signification to strengthen an idea or make it more palpable (a) A verb with an abstract substantive, as ixdxw /J-dx^cSrai, ir6xep.ov iroXe/xei ; — (/3) A verb with a partici- ple, as (pevywv eTes TrpaoVepct i-o\7rai yevoiv to ; edet is here governed by avu and connected with yivoivio, instead of being in the Dat. depending on edj irdvToSev noir) $ 347.] CONTRACTION OF SENTENCES. 569 ffd/xevoi, &sre dpaa&at ra, oirAa, virb reus ao"Ficriv ind^rivro (instead of kvkXov irofqffdfxevoi. iicd&r}vro). 2. 3, 17. ro?s 5' erepois elirev, '6ri (iaAAeiv Se^voi aval- povfxe vovs ra7s fi&Aois. 3. A very common mode of blending the principal with the subordinate clause, in the manner of attraction, and one which belongs to almost all kinds of subordinate clauses, consists in transferring the subject of the subordinate into the principal clause, and making it the object of the principal clause. (Comp. nosti MarceUum, quam tardus sit, instead of quam tardus sit Marcellus). Her. 3, 68. ovros irpwros vir 6irrevo~e rbv Mayor, ws ovk efy 6 Kvpov 2,uep- 8 is (he first suspected the Magian, that he was not Smerdis the son of Cyrus = sus- pected that the Magian was not, etc.). 80. eXSere r\v Ka/xfivaew vfipiv, eV oo- ov iire^rjX^e {see the insolence of Cambyses what a pitch it reached = see what a pitch the insolence, etc.). 6,48. ane-ire ipar o rwv 'E\K-f]vcav, '6 ri eU vw exoiev. Th. 1, 72. rrjv acperepav ir6\iv ifiovXovro ff7]p.atveiv, '6o~i] e'fy Svva- (xiv. X. Cy. 5. 3, 40. ol dpxovres avrcov iiri/xeKeio-froov, oirws avaKevao-ixevot Siai iravra. In the same way also, when the subordinate clause forms the ob- ject of a substantive in the principal clause, the subject of the subordinate clause is frequently transferred to the principal clause, and is put in the Gen., as the object of that substantive. Th. 1, 61. ^A&e Se teal rots "A8rr\vaiois ev&vs 7] ayyshla rwv ir6\ecov, on a 572 syntax. [$ 348. ject (t6t€ or Tavrtj rrj rnxspa tovs U. iviK7]o-av), the personal object orecedes that denoting a thing, so the Dat. the Ace. (rbv iraiha t\\v y pan/Mar ik)jv StSdV/fw — Tiif TratSt to fiifixiov 5l8co/xi), the adverb of time the adverb of place (tots of TavTj} T7j yfj-epa, iv Mapa&wvi tovs U. iviiaqcrav). The adverb of manner, even when another word is the principal objective, usually stands immediately be- forc the predicate, e. g. ol "EAAyves TavTT) rfj r]p.epq iv Mapa&wvi tovs Tlepcas KaAa s iviKTiaau. 4. The position of subordinate clauses corresponds with the position of the words (substantive, adjective, adverb) whose place they take in the sentence, i. e. the adjective-clause, for example, occupies the place which the adjective would take; and so of the others. PI. Phaed. 50, e. 6 &vpwp6s, o strep tlw&ei viraicovz iv, eiire irepifxivziv. X. Cy. 3. 2, 3. o 8e Kvpos, iv cp a we Xeyo vr o, i&vero' iirel Se Kaka i\v Th lepa avTcZ>, avveKakeae tovs re ru>v Hepacov 7)ye/j.6vas kclI tovs to>v M^Swv. 'ETret Se SfMov ^ffav, eAe£e ToiaSe. Yet the substantive-clauses, even when they express the grammatical subject, stand after the governing verb. Ibid. 1. 4, 7. oi 8' eAeyoy, '6t i &p kt o i irokkov s ^8e ttKt] cr ida olvt as Si ecp&ei- oav. 5. In the rhetorical or inverted 1 position of words, the predi- cate is placed before the subject, the attributive before the sub- stantive to be denned, but the objective, particularly the adverb, is placed after the predicate. 'Aya&bs o h.vt\p. 'O /3a cr i Ae vs Kvpos. 'O -irpbs tovs Tl4po~as ir6\e/j.os. 'E/j.ax£0~a,VT0 Kakus. Th. 2, 64. (pipeiv Te xph T£ * Te SoaptSvia av ay Kaico s, ra Te airb tcov irokefiioov a v S p e i a> s. 6. When the subject is to be specially distinguished, it is placed at the end of the sentence ; and when two words in the same sentence are to be made emphatic by their position, one is placed at the beginning, the other at the end of the sen- tence, e. g. UaaCjy aperwv rrye/xwv iartv f] evcrefieLa. Gener- ally, both the first and the last place in a sentence is considered emphatic, when words stand there, which, according to the usual arrangement, would have a different position. 7. Inversion is still more frequent in subordinate clauses than in the case of the words whose place they take, perspi- cuity often rendering such an inversion necessary. Snbstan- 1 This inverted position is a species of Ilyperbaton, a construction by which the natural order of words and sentences is inverted. f 34 8.]- position of words and sentences. 573 tive-clauses with on, 3erfTr)v) '?.■**■■* — Diiamb (ervTrro/x^v) — * — * Ditrochee (rvTrrijuicrav) " " Antispast (irvcfySrjrov) — " w - Choriamb (ru7rTo/xei/ot;) " ~ Ionicus a minori (ercTtyx/x^j/) — w w Ionicus a majori (Tv\J/ai[jLc$a) _ ~ « v/ £ rs (; Paeon (ru7rro/xevos) ~ - « w second Paeon (e-nJ7rTere) y w - " third Paeon (£t£tv\]/o) w w w - fourth Paeon (€Tt)7ro/x^v) w first Epitrite (ZTVxj/aoSrjv) — " second Epitrite (ai Ti>7rc{)o-ai) — w - third Epitrite (tik/^o-o/xcu) " fourth Epitrite (rvcfaSeLTjcrav) 2. Simple metres are formed by the repetition of simple feet; com* pound, by combining the simple feet with each other. Simple feet consist of but one Arsis, and one Thesis, e. g. * ", ~ w «, ***"", -^ — 4 ", etc. Compound feet consist of two Arses and Theses, of which one Arsis and Thesis, taken together, is considered as a single Arsis or Thesis, e. g. Of the simple feet, only those which have a long syllable in the Arsis and a short one in the Thesis, give natural variety, e. g. — ", - ■ w w , v — , *"-'. Hence the trochee and dactyl, the iamb and anapaest, are consid- ered as the fundamental feet of all rhythm. The other feet may be $ 351.] VERSIFICATION. 57? combined with these by resolving a long into two short syllables, or by contracting two short into one long syllable. 4. Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verses are not measured by single feet, but by dipodies, or pairs of feet, two feet being necessary to make an independent metre or dipody. Hence, four iambs make an Iambic dimeter, and six an Iambic trimeter. Dactylic verse, on the contrary, is measured by the single feet ; six dactyls, therefore, form an hexameter, and five a pentameter. § 351. Caesura. Caesura (a cutting) is the separation, by the endng of a word, of syl- lables metrically connected, — or the cutting of a metre by the ending of a word, before the metre is completed. Remark 1. The design of the Caesura is to give variety and harmony to the verse ; for if each metre or foot terminated with the end of a word, there would be only a constantly recurring monotony. But the Caesura, by pre- venting a uniform coincidence between the ending of the metre or foot, and the ending of a word, promotes the variety, beauty, and harmony of the verse. It is not inconsistent, however, with the rhythm of the verse that the ending of the foot and the word should sometimes coincide ; this coincidence is called metrical Diaeresis. The principal Diaereses are after the first, second, third, and fourth foot. fiff&iov | avrap 6 | ro7-j if two syllables are wanting, catalectic on one syllable, e. g. .'-.vv., Verses in which the last dipody (a pair of feet) wants an entire foot, are called br achy catalectic, e. g. -— T-— |- — - — |- — . Verses which have one or two syllables more than enough, are called hypercala- lectic, e. g. ~-~-|--~-|~- w -~. Remark. When the regular rhythm ot a verse is preceded by an unero W 353—355.] versification. 573 phatic introductory syllable, such syllable is called an Anacrusis, an upward or back beat; when there are two such syllables, forming an introductory foot, they are called a Base. The anacrusis and base belong to lyric verse. §353. Vie iv of the different kinds of Verse. The most usual kinds of verse are those which consist of the repeti- tion of the same foot. Of these the most frequent are the Dactylic, Iam- bic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic. § 354. Dactylic Verse. The fundamental foot in this verse is the dactyl, the place of which may be supplied by a spondee. § 355. Hexameter. The Hexameter was employed by the Greeks at an early period, and is the metre of Epic or Heroic and Pastoral poetry. The Hexameter consists of six feet ; the fundamental foot is the dac- tyl, the verse being formed by five repetitions of the dactyl with a dis- syllabic catalectus. The sixth foot is usually called a spondee ; but when the last syllable is short, it may be considered a trochee. In each of the first four feet, a spondee may take the place of the dac- tyl. The fifth foot is regularly a dactyl ; but sometimes it is a spondee, and the line is then called a spondaic line, as Ov yap iya) Tpcoojj/ eveK r)\v$ov a.l^p.rjrdoiV. - .-i --i - --j_ - i — i--. The principal Caesura in Hexameter verse occurs after the Arsis or in the Thesis of the third foot, and is called the Penthemim ; sometimes also a Caesura occurs after the Arsis of the fourth part, which is called the Hephthemim. This Caesura in the fourth foot is commonly preceded by one in the second foot, which is called the Triemim. The Caesura oc- curring at the end of the fourth foot is called the Bucolic Caesura, from its use in pastoral poetry AAA' 6 fxev At$to7ra<> 1 1 /xereKia^^ rrjX.oS' iovras AvSpa }XOl €VV€7T€, M-OVaa, 1 1 TToXvTpOTTOV O? jU,aAos rjpTracre Aatfiwv Hexam. Ovk 618' €ir dya^tov 1 1 curios, eire Kaxwi/, Pentam. 'KirX-qpoiT 'Ai'Sa, ft /ac v/jmov rjp7racra<5 acfivoi ; Hexam. Ti cr7rct'Sets ; ov croi | j 7ravres o^etAojaev a ; Pentam. § 357. Dactylic Tetrameter . The dactylic tetrameter catelectic on one syllable consists of three feet and a syllable. ncAXa Bporojv Sia/A€i/3o/A.eva. -' -- | -'-*!_<-•• | -. The dactylic tetrameter catalectic on two syllables consists of three feet and two syllables, which may form a spondee or trochee. 4>aiv6p.cvov kolkov oLkojS ayecr$ou. The dactylic tetrameter acatalectic consists of four feet ; instead of a dactyl, in the last a cretic is admissible. { 358 361.] VERSIFICATION. 581 Yttv o8wrj, 'iKTrjpLois kX&Solctlv l^crrc^fxivoi; "AXXoiv aKOveiv, avrbs toS' iXrjXvSa The tragedians admit a dactyl only in the first and third foot ; they ad- mit an anapaest chiefly in the first foot, but in proper names, in any foot except the last. Mei/eAo)? 'EAev^v 6 Se K/Wai/Av^oTpas Ae^os, UoTOLfXWV T€ TT-qyat, TTOVTilJiV T£ KV/XOTCOV Ovk apL${xov aXXo)v aSoopa 1 1 Swpa kovk oy^cri/xa.. The Caesura is often found in the middle of the fourth foot (Hepthe^ mim). 'E7T€t 7rarr]p ovtos o~6s, |[ ov Sprjvets del'. The Caesura at the end of the third foot is less frequent. § 369. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic. The iambic tetrameter is very much used by the comedians. It con- sists of seven feet and a syllable. The Caesura is usually at the end of the fourth foot, but is sometimes omitted. The scheme is nearly the same as the trimeter iambic. The anapaest occurs in the seventh foot only in case of a proper name. / / i i i i i r r r t r r / r r / Ou % r^ $ y«p Off' yiveiat rp yo ■2^& dia <%$> (ha IV. ftfk y e ir) eivai cZv iv Ok bTri ineidrj 'TToU EJ16V uS\ tTlL ?(&) xecpaXatov V. ft? /"« Oioy ^ » Ai ^ yO^ [xsvog Orw ouros Ifr^napa ?£f> nep ir nepl T? no Z3 9° aa eg 06 o5J o&ai G oo cor on OS 6G /J oV xal it VI. ^§> rav&a T f r T7?£ TO TOV TOV TOV CSV TOl/^ ?p TCQV V VI uv vv c \j^r vn & & & X° I. INDEX OF SUBJECTS. N. B. The figures refer to sections. E. is used for remark. Abbreviations, Appendix B. p. 588. Ablative expressed by Dat. 285, 1. Absolute, Case Absolute, sec Cases. Abrogation of clauses by alia 322, 6. Abstracts 39, in PI. 243, 3, (3). Absorption of Diphth. in Crasis, 10, 4,5. Acatalectic verse 352, 2. Accentuation 29 ; change and re- moval of the accent by Inflec, Compos, and Contract. 30 ; in connected discourse (Grave in- stead of the Acute), in Crasis, Elision, Anastrophe 31. Accent, of first Dec. 45 ; second Dec. 49 ; third Dec. 65 ; adjectives and participles 75 ; words ending in vg, act, v 76, II ; wg, uv 78. R. 7, and 29, R. 5 ; ojv, ov 78, R. 9, and 65, 5 ; rjg, sg 78, R. 11 ; verb 118. Accusative 27 6 sq. ; local relation, limit, aim 277 ; of the object pro- duced with a verb of the same stem or one of a cognate signifi- cation (|Ua/?jv tia/tafrai ; tfiv fifov) 278, 1 and 2 ; with verbs denot- ing to shine, to flow, etc. 278, 3 ; object, design 278, 4; manner 278, R. 3 ; of the object on which the action is performed or the 50 suffering object 279 ; with verbs signifying to profit, to hurt, etc. 279, 1 ; of doing good or evil tc anyone, etc. 279, 2; to persevere, to wait for, etc. 279, 3 ; to turn back, flee from, etc. 279, R. 3 ; to conceal, to be concealed, to swear, and with cp&avuv, lunsiv 279, 4 ; with dsl, zqi] 279, R. 4 ; fiuivuv, tiIsiv, etc., which denote motion, etc., with verbs of sacrificing or dancing in honor of any one 279, R. 5 ; denoting an affection of the mind 279, 5 ; of space, time, quantity 279, R. 8; (xalbg xa 0{t[xaT(x, alysl ri]V y.scpalrjv) 279, 7 ; double accusative : tw t« tz'xvu) 241, R. 10, (b). Elision 13 sq. ; in the Dialects 206, 50* 694 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 5 ; elision in respect to the ac- cent 31, m. Ellipsis 346, 1 ; of the subject and especially of the Subs. 238, 5 ; of the copula slvai 238, R. 6 and 7 ; of the Subs, to which the attribute belongs 263 ; of uv 260, R. 3. 6, 7 ; of the Protasis and Apodosis 340. Emphasis in sentences 321, 3. Enclitics 33 sq. ; accented 35. Enliansive sentences expressed by y.al, ov fiovov, alia v.a.1 321, 3- Epicenes 40, R. 5. Essential words 238, 1. 38, 4. Etymology 13. Euphonic Prothesis 16, 10. Expulsion of consonants 25. Factitive verbs 232, R. 1 and (c). Feminine PL with Sing, verb 241, R. 6 ; with the neuter (at fisra- fiolcn Ivjirjoov) 241, 2 ; with a Neut. (to yvvaly.iov ectti y.aXrj) 241, 2, sq. ; Fern. Dual with the Masc. (rovrco xa xsyva) 241, R. 10. Final clauses 330. Frequentative verbs 232, R. 2. Formal words 238, 1. 38, 3. Formation of words 231 sq. Future tense 103 ; Attic 117 ; Doric in aov^ai 154, 3; without a 154, 4 ; in ov[icu with mute verbs 154, 5 ; Mid. instead of Act. (uy.ovu, axovooiiciL instead of ayovaa)) 154, 1, and 198 ; Synt. 255, 3, 4 ; Fut. Inf. after verbs of think- ing, hoping, etc. 257, R. 2. Future Perf. 103 ; in Act. form 154, 6 ; Synt. 255, 5 ; instead of the simple Fut. 255, R. 8 ; the Lat. Fut. Perf., how ex- pressed in Greek 255, R. 9. Gender of the substantive 40 ; first Dec. 42 ; second Dec. 50 ; third Dec. 66 ; of Adj. and Part. 74. Gender of the adjective, etc. in th« const, y.ttxb. avvscriv 241 ; in gen- eral statements 241, 2 ; with sev- eral subjects 242 ; of the Superl. with Part. Gen. 241, 7; of the relative pronoun 332. Genitive, attributive 265 ; used cl- liptically 263, (b). Genitive in the objective relation 270. Genitive, separative, with verbs of removal, separation, loosing, de- sisting, freeing, missing, depriv- ing, differing from 271, 2, 3 ; with verbs of beginniug 271, 4. Genitive of origin and author, with verbs of originating, being pro- duced from 273, 1. Genitive, possessive, (a) with tivm, yiyvEo&cu, (/S) loiog oh.tlog, etc. 273, 2. Genitive of quality 273, 2, (c). Genitive, partitive, with uvui and ylyvEG&cu', xi&ivai, noiua&ai, f]y£ia-&ou 273, 3, (a) ; in attribu- tive relation with substantives, substantive adjectives, substan- tive pronouns, numerals and ad- verbs 273, R. 4 ; with words which express the idea of parti- cipation, sharing in ; with verbs signifying to touch, be in connec- tion with ; of acquiring and at- taining ; of physical and intellec- tual contact, of laying hold of; of hasty motion, striving after an object 273, 3, (b), and R. 7 ; with verbs of entreating and suppli- cating 273, R. 6 ; with the ad- verbs sv{rv, l&v, ftsygi ; with verbs of meeting and approach- ing 273, 3, R. 9 ; Part. Gen. in poetry 273, R. 7. Genitive of place 273, 4, (a). Genitive of time 273, 4, (b). Genitive of material 273, 5 ; with verbs of making, forming 273, 5, INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 595 (a) ; of fulness and want (b) ; of eating, drinking, tasting, enjoy- ing, having the enjoyment of something intellectually, etc. (c) ; of smelling (d) ; of remember- ing and forgetting ; with expres- sions of being acquainted and unacquainted with, of experience and inexperience, ability, dex- terity, of making trial of, with verbal adjectives in -ixog, etc. ex- pressing the idea of dexterity (e) ; with words of sensation and perception (axoveiv, axgoucrirai, aia&avscr&ai, bacpQaivsa&cci (f) and R. 19.; with verbs of hear- ing 273, R. 18; with verbs of seeing, hearing, experiencing, learning, considering, knowing, judging, examining, saying, ad- miring, praising, blaming 273, R. 20. Genitive of cause 274 ; with verbs denoting a desire, longing for (a) ; care, concern for (b) ; pain, grief, pity, with adjectives having a similar meaning, particularly in exclamations, with interjections (c) ; with verbs expressing an- ger, indignation, envy, admira- tion, praise and blame (d), (e), (f ) ; with verbs expressing re- quital, revenge, accusing and condemning 274, 2; rou with the Inf. 274, 3, (a) ; with the adverbs tu, y.alwg, fisiQiajg, wg, Tims, o 7i big, oiiwg, etc. connected with s%eiv, i]y.sn>, sipvu 274, 3, (b). Genitive with verbs of ruling, supe- riority, and inferiority, subjuga- tion, with the adjectives FynoaT^g, ay.qax^g 275, 1. Genitive after the comparative 275, 2 ; use of the Gen. and i\ with the comparative 323, 2 sq. Genitive of price 275, 3. Genitive with substantives and ad- jectives 275, R. 5. Genitive, double, governed by one substantive 275, R. 7. Genitive with the Inf. 307, 2, (a). Genitive with the Part, 310, 2. Genitive absolute 312, 3 ; when the subject is the same as that of the predicate 313, 2; with atg after tidivat, vosiv, etc. 312, R. 12. Gentile nouns 233, 2, (a). Grave accent 29 ; instead of the acute 31. Heter oolites 59, R. 2; 67, (b) ; 71. Heterogeneous substantives 70, B. Hexameter verse 355. Hepthemim 355. Hiatus 8 ; 206, 7. Historical tenses 103, 2 ; 254, 3. Hypercatalectic verse 352, 2. Hypodiastole 37. Hypothetical sentences, see si. Iambic dimeter 367. Iambic monometer 366. Iambic trimeter acatalectic 368. Iambic tetrameter catalectic 369. Iambic verse 365. Imitative verbs 232, 1, (a). Imperative 104, III ; Synt. 258, 1, (c) ; use of the Imp. 259, 4 ; third Pers. Sing. Perf. Mid. or Pass. 255, R. 6. Imperfect tense 103 ; analogous to verbs in pi 196 ; Synt. 256, 2—4. Impersonal construction, see per- sonal construction. Impersonal verbs 238, R. 2. Inclination, see Enclitic. Indeclinable nouns 73, 1. Indicative 104, 1 ; Synt. 258, (a) ; Fut. with av 260, 2, (1) ; Impf., Plup. and Aor. with wV 260, 2, (2) ; difference between the Impf., Aor. and Plup. 256 ; Fut. instead of the Imp. 255, 4 ; ;9G INDEX OF SUBJECTS. with ov, e.g. oxi navvy Xiyow ib.; Ind. of the Hist, tenses with words expressing a wish 259, R. 6; Ind. in subordinate sentences, see the separate conjunctions ; Ind. in oral, obliq. 344, 6. Indirect form of discourse, see ob- lique form. Infinitive 105, (a) ; Synt., the Pres. and Aor. Inf. 257, 1, (c) ; Aor. Pres. and Fut. after verbs of thinking, etc. 25 7, R. 2 ; with av 260, 2, (5). Infinitive 305 ; without the Art. 306 ; with verbs of willing and the contrary, etc. 306, 1. (a) ; with verbs of thinking, supposing, saying 306, 1, (b) ; after expres- sions denoting ability, cause, power, capacity 306, 1, (c) ; with adjectives and substantives, with uvai, iii.cfVY.ivai and ylyvsa&ai with a substantive, after avp(jal- vsi, dti, %Qij and the like, after substantives, adjectives, demon- strative pronouns, after verbs of giving, sending, etc. 306, 1, (d). Infinitive, or Ace. with Inf. differ- ent from Part. 311 ; Inf., or Ace. with Inf., different from oti, wg, that 329, R. 5; in forms express- ing command or wish 306, R. 11 ; in forms expressing indignation 306, R. 11, c ; with al ydg, Ef&s 306, R. 11, (d). Infinitive with Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 307. Infinitive with the Art. instead of the Inf. without the Art. 308, R. 1. ; in Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 308, 2 ; in exclamations and questions implying indignation 308, R. 2 ; as an adverbial ex- pression (to vvv nvai and the like) 308, R. 3. Infinitive Act. instead of the Pass. 306, R. 10. Inflection 38. Inflection-endings of the verb 103 sq. ; Remarks on 116; of verba in (it 171, 172. Intensive verbs 232, R. 2. Interchange of vowels 201 ; conso- nants 202—204. Interpunction-marks 3 7. Interrogative pronouns, see Pro- nouns. Interrogative sentences 344 ; modes in 344, 6 ; connection with a relative sentence 344, R. 3 ; change of a subordinate sentence into a direct interrogative sen- tence (oxav xl TtoirjcrojiTi) 344, R. 6 ; blending of two or more interrogative sentences into one (rig t hog ait log scftl) 344, R. 7. Intransitive verbs 248, (1) (/?) ; as Trans, with the Ace. 249, R. 2 ; instead of the Pass. 249, 3 ; in the Pass. 251, 4, and R. 6. Interrogative sentence with the Art. 344, R. 3. Inversion 348, 5. Iota subscript 4, R. 4. Iterative form in a/.ov 221. Lengthening of the vowels 16, 3. 207 Lenis Spiritus 6. Letters, sounds of 2 a . Limitation of sentences 322, 1 — 5. - Litotes 239, R. 3. Local substantives 233, 2, (d). Masculine PI. with Sing, verb 241, R. 6 ; connected with the Neut. (ol nollol dsivov) 241, 2 ; Masc. with a Neut. (^eiQaniov fort x«- Xog) 241, 1 ; Masc. PI. with Fern. 241, R. 11. Metaplasm 67, (c). 72. 214, R. 1. Metathesis of the liquids 22. 208, 3; of the aspirates 21, 3; verb 156. Middle form 102 ; Synt. 248, (2) ; INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 597 •with reflex, sense 250 ; with the meaning to cause to do 250, R. 2; when an action is performed to the advantage or disadvantage of the subject 250, R. 3 ; with a reflex Pron. 250, R. 3 ; with a subjective meaning, figuratively 250, R. 4 ; with a pass, sense 251. Modes 104 ; Synt. 258 sq. ; in subor- dinate clauses 327 b , 1 ; attraction of 32 7 b ; comp. the separate con- junctions, in Greek Index. Mode vowels 111; summary of 1 1 2 ; of verbs in fie 171 ; in the Dial. 220. Movable final consonants 15. Multiplicatives 96, 1, (d). Negatives, ov, (nj 318; accumula- tion of negatives 318, 6 ; appa- rent Pleonasm of 318, 6 — 9. Neuter of names of persons con- nected with Masc. or Fern. 241, 2, R. 3 ; PI. instead of the Sing, with verb, adjectives 241, 3 ; PI. of pronouns 243, 4 ; PI. with Sing, verb 241, 4. Nominal question 344, 2. Nominative with the change of the Act. construction of the verb with the Gen. or Dat. into the Pass., e. g. ntaTsvoixcu 251, 4. Nominative Case 269 ; with ovo^ia sari pot,, bvofta l/co, with verbs of naming 269, K 3 ; Norn, of an abstract instead of a Lat. Dat. (mihi est honori) 269, R. 2 ; Nom. instead of the Voc. 269, 2 ; in l sq. Synt. 239 ; strength- ening and more exact definition of, 239, R. 2; Gend. with the Part. Gen 241, 7. Syllables, division of 36. Synizesis 12. Dialects 206, 4. Syncope 16, 8. 207, 6; in substan- tives 55, 2 ; in verbs 155. Syntax 238 sq. Tenses of the verb 103 ; of the sub- ordinate modes 257; derivation 128 ; formation of the secondary tenses, use of the same in con- nection with the primary 141 ; Tenses primary and Sec. 103, R. 141. Tenses, Syntax 254 ; sequence of in subordinate clauses 327 a . Tense-formation of verbs in co 127 ; pure verbs 129 ; mute 142 sq. ; liquid 149 ; verbs in pi 173 ; in Dialects 223. Tense-characteristic, see character- istic. Tense-endings 110. Tense-stem 110, 2. Theme of the verb 138, 3. Thesis and Arsis 349. Time, difference between Gen. and Dat. of time, 273, R. 13. INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 60 v Tmesis of Prepositions 300, R. 4. Transitive verbs 248, (a) («) ; with Intrans. or Reflex, signif. (rgsTtca instead of tqsjioikxl) 249, 1, 2 ; with 'he sense to cause to do 249, R. 3. Transition from direct discourse to indirect and vice versa 345, R. 6. Transposition of the attributive adjective and Subs, (ol xgriaxol twv avd-Q(07uav instead of ot /qn- (jTot viv&qojtcol) 264, R. 5. Triemim 355. Trochaic verse 361. Trochaic monometer 362. Trochaic dimeter 363. Trochaic tetrameter catalectic 364. Variable vowels 16, 6 ; in the stem of impure verbs 140 ; change of u into ot 140, 4 ; of s into o 231, 6. Verb 102 sq. 219 sq. ; division of verbs in cu according to the char- acteristic 127 ; barytones 127, R.; pure verbs (and contract) 129—137; Perispomena 127, R; impure 127. 138—141 ; mute 127. 142—148; liquid 127. 149 — 153 ; special peculiarities of verbs (pure and impure) 154 ; anomalous in w 157 sq. ; in yii 168 sq. ; in cu which in certain tenses are analogous to verbs in [it, : sec- ond Aor. Act. and Mid. 191 sq. ; in Dialects 227 ; Perf. and Plup. 193—195 ; in Dialects 228 ; Pres. and Impf. 196 ; verbs De- nom., Frequent., Imitat, Intens., Fact, Desid. 232. Verbs active, with Mid. Fut. 198 ; those which have both an active and middle form for the Fut. 198, R. Verb Act. Trans., Reflex., Recip., Pass., Intrans., Mid. 248 — 251. Verb Jinitum and infinitum 105, R. Verbal adjectives in tog and rsog 234. 1, (i) ; PI. instead of Sing. 241, 3 ; Construction 284, 3, (12). Verb characteristic 108, 5. Versification 349. Vowels 4 ; change 8 — 16 ; weaken- ing or attenuation of 16, 2 ; in- terchange in the Dialects 201; change in the Dialects 205 — 207. Weakening of vowels 16, 2. Zeugma 346, 3. 53 II. GREEK INDEX. Abbreviations. Adv. aiverb ; adj. adjective ; Comp. compare; comp. com- pared ; c. a. with the accusative ; c. d. with the dative ; c. g. with the genitive ; c inf. with the infinitive ; c. part, with the participle ; coll. collective ; con. construction ; Dec. declension ; dec. declined ; euph. euphonic ; ins. instead of; int. intensive ; intr. intransitive ; pers. personal ; prep, preposition ; priv. privative ; R. remark ; trans, transitive. h pure 43, 1, (a) ; a priv., coll., int. 236, R. 3, (b) ; a euph. 16, 10. aya&os comp. 84, 1. hydXXeoSai c. dat. 285, 1, (1); c. part. 310, 4, (c). ayavaKreiv c. d. 285, 1, (1); c. part. 310, 4, (c). ayairuu c. a. and d. 274, R. 1; c. d. 285, 1, (1); c. part. 310, 4, (c). &yaTiAa/J.[}dve)300, 4, (a). airb — evena 300, R. 2. a-rrodex^o'^ai C g. 273, R. 20. aTTodidcxr&aL c. g. 275, 3. aivodiZpda-Keiv c. a. 379, 3. a-rroXaveiu c. g. 273, 5, (c). cnroAoye'i(r&cu c. d. 284, 3, (')■ 'AiroKXav dec. 53, 4, 1, (a); 56, R. 1. aTT07reipci(T&cu. C. g. 273, 5, (g). aTroirpd 300, R. 1. aTcopziv c. g. 273, 5, (b). airo(TTepe7u c. g. 271, 2; Til/c£ Ti, TiVOS Ti, TiJ/(f? nya 280, 3, and R. 3. a.iroe7nis c. d. 284, 3, (5). airrea&cuc. g. 273, 3, (b) &pa 324, 3. apa ins. dpa 324, R. 5. Spa interrogative 344, 5, dpecTKeiy rivd 279, 1 ; ap- eV/ceo-3-ai c. d. 284. 3, (5); c. dat. of the in- strument 285, 1, (1). ap-qyeiv c. d. 284, 3, (7). "Apris dec. 59, R. 2. &pi(TTOS 84, 1. 'ApKTTOfpdvrjs dec. 59, R. 2. apiceTcrSai C. d. 285, 1.(1). apfx6rTeiv c d. 284, 3,' (5). apyeiofrai c. inf. 306, l,(b). dpu6s 55, R. 3. dp£dfj.ei/os dir6 twos, par~ ticularhj 312, R. 3. dpx*w, t° begin, c. g. 271, 4 ; to rule, c. g. 275, 1. apxeo-frat c. g. 271, 4 ; c. part. 310,4, (f); c.part. and inf. 311, 16. apxofxeuos, in the begin- ning, originally, 312, R. 3. haefieiv C a. 279, 1. O.GK.OV, aO~K6(J.7]V 221. ao-fxej/os comp. 82, R. 6. toaa, da-ffa 93. aarrip dec. 55, R. 3. darpdiTTeiv c. a. 278, 3. do-rv dec. 63. 322, 7. aVe c. part. 312, R. 13. aTepos 10, R. 2. "ArAa Voc. 53, R. 2. aTo ins. vto 144, R. 1. arpejttafs) 25, 4, (c). oVtc* and aTTa 93. au, aiiTap 322, 7. avTiKa with part. 312., R.6. auTtk dec. 91 ; Dial. 207, 4, (c). ctuT&r use 302, 4 ; 303, 3 ; with the art. 246, 3, 8. ovt6s in avTols "rnrois, to- gether with the horses etc. 283, 2, (a) ; 6 uvtSs c. d. 284, 3, (4). ai/Tov dec. 88 ; use 302, 2. dcpaipeloSrai c. two a. and Tivd tivos, tiv6s t< 280, 3, and R. 3. 604 GBEEK INDEX. dcp&ovos comp. 82, E. 6. dtyievai., -iecr&ai C. g. 271, 2. &aj/, parentem esse 255, E. 1. yeVos dec. 61 (b). yepaios comp. 82, I, (c). yepas dec. 54, E. 4. yeveiv, 7eu€0"&at C. g. 273, 5, (c). yypas dec. 54, E. 4. yiyvea&ai syncopated, 155, 2 ; with the sense of thePres. 255, E. 1: c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. g. posses. 273, 2 ; c. g. partit. 273, 3, (a); c.d. ^84,3,(9). yiyverai fxoi TiBovAofxevco, iAiro/xevw 284, 3,10, (cj ; yiyverai and an abstract substantive with an inf. 306, 1, (d). yiyvuxrutLv c. g. 273, E. 2C ti nvL 285, 1, (3); c part. 310, 4, (a) ; c. inf and part. 311, 4. yiyvcixTKw c. u>s and gen. abs. 312, E. 12. yiyvdxTKw ins. eyvooxa 255. E. 1. y\-r)X uv dec. 56, E. 1. 7Aixep.r)y with &s and gen. abs. 312, E. 12. SmAe^eo-frcu c. d. 284, 3, (!)• SiaAiirwv XP°' V0V 312. E. 3. ZiaAAarreiv c. part. 310, 4, (f )• SiaXXarTeiv, -aTTeo~&ai C d. 284, 3, (1). SLa/neifSea&ai c. g. 275, 3. Siave^eiv c. two ace. 280, 3. 5iavoe?s c. ind. fut. 330, 6 ; c. us and g. abs. 312, E. 12. SiaTrpaTTeoSai c. inf. 306, 1, (c). Stare Ae?v c. part. 310, 4, (b). Stacpepeiv C. g. 271, 2. Sid c. g. 274, 1. Siconeiv c. g. 274, 2. 5o/ceti> c. inf. 306, 1, (b) ; videri, pers. 307, R. 7. 8 et, JMSZ, si, ib. eia, eias, ete, etay opt. ins. aifii and etc. 116, 9. et'SeW c. g. 273, R. 20 ; c. partic. 310, 4, (a) ; dif- ference between inf. and part. 311, 2; c. &s and g. abs. 312, R. 12. etd-e in wishes 259, 3, (b) and R.3, 6. : c. inf. 306, R. 11. eUd^eiv rl tlvi 285, 1, (3). eiiceiv c. g. 271, 2 ; c. d. 284, 3, 2. elKos, elnoTios C. dat. 284, ,3,(5). elK&v dec. 55, R. 2. eTjitej', etre, etey ins. et?7- juej', etc. 116, 7. elvai as copula 238, 6 ; as an essential word (to be, to exist, etc.) 238, R. 4 ; with adv. 340, R. 4; tlvai with a part. ins. of a simple verb 238, R.5; omitted 238, R.6,7. elvai apparently unneces- sary with bvo/xd(eiv, -eabat 269, R. 1. elvai c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. g. possess. 273, 2 ; e.g. partit. 273, 3, (a) ; c.d. 284, 3, (9) ; elvai and a subs. c. inf. 306, 1, (d). etVe referring to several persons 241, R. 13, (a). elirelu ev, nances riva 279, 2;KaKa,KaAaca.230 ) 2. 51* elirelv c. d. 284, 3, ( 1 | ; c. d. and a. c. inf.307, R. 3. etpyeiv, -ar&ai c. g. 271, 2. els (is) Prep. 290, 2; in pregnant sense ins. 4v c. d. 300, 3, (b) ; with the art. ins. ev (rj \ifxvt) 4kSi8o? is t)\v 'S.vpriv 4s Ai&vrjv) 300,4, (b). els, fj.ia, ev dec. 99, 5. eh with Superl. 239, R. 2. elsdyeiv C. g. 274, 2. eicrav ins. eaav in plup. , 116,6. elsopav, to permit c. part. j 310, 4, (e). [3. elsirpdrreiv c. two.acc.280, elra with Part. 312, R. 8 ; eha in a quest. 344, 5, (e). efre— efre 323, R. 1 ; et— etVe, etre — et Se etc. 323, R. 1 ; in an indirect question 344, 5, (k). elco&evai c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 4k, e'| 15, 3; Prep. 288,2; in Preg. sense inS: ev c. d. 300, 3, (c) ; 4k with the Art. ins. 4v (ol 4k rrjs ay pas av&pcoivoi dire ins. y\ffav 220, 14. eV Prep. 289, 1 ; in Preg. sense ins. els 300, 3, (a)j e.g. 23(b). ey rots, eV tows C. Superl. (e.g. irp&Toi) 239, R. 2. ivavriovy -ios c g. and d. 273, R. 9 and 284,3,(2). cvde-ns e.g. 273, 5, (b). evSo&ej/ with the Art. ins. evSov {t))v evdo&ev rpd- irzfav (pepe) 300, R. 8. cvSueij' e. two ace. 280, 3. ivsSpeveiv c a. 279, 1. evetca, eVe/cer, etVe/ca, ei'- j/e/ce^oi/Ve/ca c. g. 288, R. efeo-Tij/ c. inf. 306, 1, (c). iv&v/JLtTo-frai c.g.273,R.20; c. part. 310, 4 (a). tvt ins. ej>eo-n 31, R. 3. ivvotlv c. g. 273, R. 20. ivoxht?i e. a. 279, 1 ; c. d. 284,3, (6). iyradSi with Part. 312, R. 7. 4i>Tp c. g. 271, 3. eWeW c. d. 284, 3, (4) ; c. inf. 307, R. 7.; c. part. 310, R. 2; c. inf. and part. 311, (9). e6s ins. ifios, 310, 4, (k). eX*"' ew, /cctAcDs, etc. c. g. 274, (3). exetv yvdi^v c. a>s and g. abs. 312, R. 12. exe, possum, c. inf. 306, 1, (c). t^aic Xrjptls, , uem, 255, R. 2. tjXlkos attracted 332, 7. ri/xey— r/5e 323, R. 2. ?jjiu in compos. 236, R. 3, . (b).„ rifjLiv, rifxiv 87, R. 4. T^fiiavs dec. 76, R. 2 ; f] ■ti/xlcreia ttjs yrjs and the like 264, R. 5, c. %Hus 73, 1, (c). frev suffix 235, 3, and R. 1 and 2. frepaireveiv c. a. 279, 1. frepdirccv dec. 68, 5. ^1/315,4. &* suffix 235, 3. ^177^6^ c. g. 273, 3, (b). Svr)v 323, R. 9. Afar' iXalw 68, 9. Xnrape7v c. part. 310, 4, (e). Ais dec. 214, R. 2. AiVo-ea-dat c. g. 273, R 6. GREEK INDEX. 609 hoyl&Tfrcu c.inf.306,l,(b). KoiSope7v c. a. 279, 1. \otdope'io~&al tlvl 284, 3, (6). \ove. vdo-o-eiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). raw dec. 68, 11. 214, 5. viaTos 82, R. 5. vews and iWs 70, A, (a). vy 316,4; j/t> Ala 279, 4. //7]T77 from v4os 82, R. 5. yi/cSi' '0\i>uiTia, yvdour\v 278, 2. j/i/cSi/ with sense of the Perf. 255, R. 1. vikov c. part. 310, 4, (g). vlv (viv) ins. avTovs or auTas 87, R. 3. voe?v c part. 312, R. 12. voulCzw c. two a. 280, 4j c. d. (uti) 285, (2) ; c. inf. 306, 1, (b) ; c. part. 311, 2. voo-s c. d. 284, 3, 4. ^oA^eTi/ c. d. 284,3,(6). i/j.o\oye7Tai c. a. and inf. 307, R. 6. ofioos 322, 7 ; with a part. 312, R. 8. bueiSiCeiv c. d. 284, 3, (6). oveipos dec. 72, (a). bvivdvai, -acrSrai c. a. 279,1. ovofxd icrri fxoi and the like 266, R. 1. bvoixa'£eiv c. two a. 280, 4. ovroov ins. eTwcrav 116, 12. O7no-&ev c. g. 273, 3, (b). oVoi in pregnant sense ins. ottov 300, R. 7. oirorav see orav under 'ore. OTTOTe see ore. ottov in pregnant sense ins. oTi-o! 300, R. 7 ; ottov, quandoquidem see ore. birws with Sup. 239, R. 2. 07rws ins. 8ti 329, R. 1. oirus, ifAotf, t'ft order that, 330 ; oVcos and '6ttws ui) c. ind. fut. ellip. 330, R.4. bircas, when, see oVe. ottws, as 342. opau C. g. 273, R. 20 ; opav a\Kr)v 278,3, (c) ; with verbs of appearing, showing 306, R. 9 ; c. part. 310, 4, (a). bpyi&cr&ai c. g. 274, 1 ; c. part. 310, 4, (c). dpeyear&ai c. g. 273,3, (bj. bpSpios comp. 82, I, (d). op^Scr&cu c. g. 273. R. 7, (b). bpvifroSrhpas dec. 44, R. 2. d>*/isdec.54,(c) and 68,12. bp with Comp. and Sup. 239, R. 1 and 2 ; bcrov, ocra c. inf., e. g. ocrov y efjL et'SeVcu 341, R. 3. 6'0-os ins. on t6ctos 329, R. 8. ocros attracted 332, 7. ocros ins. &sTe 341, R. 2. ocrTeov = octtovv dec.47,1. osTis dec. 93. bcr(s) 15, 2. ovtws, o>s in wishes 342. R. 2. ovtcos with part. 312, R. 7. OU^ 07TCCS (0Tj), OUX OTt, — ctAAct /cat ; ol>x oTo?/ — ctAAa321, 3. 6s and part. 310, 4. (h). Ttapaxuptiv c. g. 271, 2; C. d. 284, 3, (2). jrope/c, ?rape|, 7rctpe|, 300, R. 1. wdpiffTiv c. inf. 306, 1, (c). irapo^vveiv c. inf. 306,1, (a) ttus with the Art. 246, 5. iras ris with the second pers.imp.241,R.13, (c). irdarauv 216, 2. itdaxtw vtt6 rivos 249, 3. ■Kox-np dec. 55, 2. irdrpus dec. 71, B. (c). iraveiv, -ecr&cu C g. 271,2; c. part. 310, 4, (f ) ; c part, and inf. 311, 17 iraxvs comp. 216, 2. irei&eiv Tivd tl 278, 4 ; c. a. 279, 1; c. inf. 306, 1, (a) ; c. ws 306, R. 2. irei&eo-frcu c. g. 273, R. 18 ; c. d. 284, 3, (3). Trcivrju c. g. 274, 1. Tletpaievs dec. 57, R. 2, Treipaa&cu C. g. 273, 5, (e); c. inf. 306, 1, (a); c. part, and inf. 311, 18. ir€Ad£siv, 7reAas c. g. 273, R. 9; c. d. 284, 3. (2). Trevea&ai, tt4vtjs c. g. 273, 5, (b). Trev&iKcos £X* LV c - S- ^74, 1, (c). Treirepi dec. 63, R. 1. 7re7roi&eW C d.284,3, (3). Tveiroov comp. 84, 11. irip 95, d; Synt. 317, 1. irepcuos comp. 82, I, (c). irepav c. g. 271,3. irtpav c. a. 279, R. 5. Trepi Prep. 295, 1 and 3. Trepi — evena 300, R. 2. irepi c. d. in pregnant sense ins. of the ace. 300, 3, (a). Trepi ins. 7r epiecm 31, R. 3. irepifidWeiv c.two a. 280,3. Trepiyiyvea&cu C g. 275, 1. TreptoiSoa&cu c g. 275, 3. irepieTvai c. g. 275, 1. 7re/)texecrftcu c. g. 273, 3, Trepi&eiv see ireptopav. UepiKXrjs dec. 59, 2. irepifxeueiu c. a. 279, 3. Trepiopav c. part. 310, 4, (e) ; c. part, and inf. 311, 15. nepiopao-^ai c. g. 274, 1. Trept irpo 300, R 1. Trepm6s c. g. 275, 2. TrecpvKei>ai c. inf. 306, 1, (d). irrixvs dec. 63. Trietpa 78, R. 8. 7ri/j.7rXr)/jLi c. g. 273, 5, (b). inVeij/ c. g. and a. 273, 5, (c) and R. 15 iriineiv into tlvos 249, 3. ■KiGTsve.iv c. d. 284, 3. (3). iriuv comp. 84, 12. TrXeiv c. a. 279, R. 5. irKeicTou with Sup. 239 ; R.2. nKeiov without rj 323, R. 4 irXeiuu, 7rAeroTos 84, 9. TrAeoj/ ins. 7rAeW 78, R. 5. TrAeV without ff 323, R. 4. TvXeoveKTetv C. g. 275, 1. TrAeo's c g. 273, 5, (b). irAeus dec. 78, R. 5. ttAtj&co e.g. 273, 5, (b). 7rAr)v c. g. 271, 3. TrKr)pr)s, TrXripoco C g. 278, 5, (b). Tr\7)0-id£eiv, irXrjcriov C g. 273,R.9;c. d.284,3, (2). ir\T]o~iov comp. 84. ttx6os = 7rAo0s dec. 47. ttXovctios C g. 273, 5, (b). irveiv c. g. 273, 5, (d); c. a. 278, 3, (b). irvvl dec. 68, 13. TTo&eiv c. a. 274, R. 1. -n-oi in Preg. sense ins. irov {ubi) 300, R. 7. 7roie?i/ c. g. of material 273, 5, (a) ; c. two a. 280, 4. TToielv ev, KaKcas c. part. 310, 4, (g); c. a. 279, 2; aya&d, /ca/cct etc. C. a. 280,2;c.inf.306,l,(c). iroieiv c. part. 310, 4, (b) ; c. part, and inf. 311, 13. 7roie7 elvai, iytceToftcUi yiyvea&ai c. part. 310, 4, (h). ttoAXov Sew c. inf. 307, R. 6. 7toAA&3 with comp. and superl. 239, R. 1 and 2. tto\v with Comp. and Superl. 239, R.l and 2. 612 GREEK INDEX. rroXvs dec. 77. rios C. d. 284, 3, (5) ; c. inf. 306, 1, (d) ; c. d. and a. c. inf. 307, R. 3. TrpeVei c. part. 310, 4, (i). irpecrfieis, irpeafivrris, trpi- (Tfrvs 70, B. Trpeafieveiv c. g. 275, 1. TTpecrfiHTTOs 83, R. 2. vpiavSai c. g. 275, 3. 7iynV, irp\v av, irp\v 77 const. 337. irp6 Prep. 287, 2. •Kpo&X*w c. g. 275, 1. trpohv^ov eluat, irpo^vfxe?ff- frai c. inf. 306, 1, (a) ; c ftiroos c. ind. fut. 330, 6. irpo?Ka 278, R. 2. ■KpoKahzlaSai nvd ti 278, 4. TTpOKpiUdlV c. g. 275, 1. irpovoeiv c. g. 274, 1. irpoolfxiou 17, R. 4. •npoopav c. g. 274, 1. wp6s Prep. 298 ; c. d. in Preg sense ins. c. a. 300, 3, v a). irposfiaWtiv c. g. 273, 5, (d). irposSMvai C. g. 273, 3, (b). Trpos-f]Keivc6. 284,3,(5); c inf. 306, 1, (d); c.d. and a. c. inf. 307, R. 3. Trpos-f]K€i fxoi c. g. 273, 3, (b). vp6s&eu c. g. 273, 3, (b). irposKaAelo-frat c. g. 274, 2. irposicvue7v- c. a. 279, 1. ■npooToadv c. g. 275, 1. 7rposTdTTetJ' c. d. 284, 3, (3); c. inf. 306, 1, (a). Trpoxs ovs dec. 47. 2 omitted 25, 1 ; mova- ble at the end of a word 15; in the for- mation of tenses of pure verbs 131, and 133; euphonic or con- necting letter 237, 1 and R. 2. (rdrreip c. g. 273, 5, (b). cravjov or aeavrou dec. 88 ; use 302, 2. p dec. 68, 15. (xoi ethical Dat 284, 3,(10) (d). g6s ins. gov 302, R. 2. a-rravi^iy c. g. 273, 5, (b). (nrtvfeff&cu c. d- 284. 3, (nrsvoeiv c, a. 279, R. 5. fnrovMfav c. inf. 306, 1 , a (TKu> efxavTy C. part. 310, R. 2. (n/7'vi'a)uwj' c. g. 273, 5, (e). (n»7\«peri/ c. inf. 306,1, (a). (tvXuu c. two ace. 280, 3. avfjt.Paiveu' c. inf. 306, 1, (d) ; c. d. and a. c. inf. 307, R. 3; personal 307, R. 6. (rvufSovXeveiv C. inf. 306, 1, (a). crvfAirpdrTeiv c d. 284, 3, (7). av/xcpepeLv C. d. 284, 3, (7). c. part. 310, R. 2. avvTeix6vTi 284, 3, 10, (a). cvs dec. 62. a(pd\Ae(T&ai C g. 271, 2. (Tz/ c. g. 273, 5, (e). rpiT]pr)s dec. 59, 2. rvyxdvetv c. g. 273,3, (I)); c. part. 310, 4, (1). rvpavvCiv, -veveii/ C. g. 275, 1. rvio-Taa&ai c. d. 284, 3. (2). t>>o~ros216, R. 2. 4>a7e?v c. g. and a. 273, 5. (c) and R. 15. (paiueii/, (palveo-frat C. part 310, 4, (b) ; (palyofiat iroioov ri ib. R. 3. (paiueaSrai c. inf. and part 311, 8. fydvai c. int i 96, 1, (b.) (pavepos el/xi ivoioov ri 310 R.3. (peideoSrai C. g. 274, 1, (b). (pepe, referring to several persons 241, R. 13, (a j. (pepo/xevos, etv c. a. 279, 4 ; c. part, followed bv ^, w/olp ^' 310, 4, (1) (p&4yyea&ai c. a. 278, 3. (j^J-yyos and $$077^ 70, B. ^oisdec. 68, 17. 279, R. 5. XoOs dec. 68, 18. XpaLcrfielu c. d. 284, 3, (7). Xpefo 73, 1, (c). XP«t>s dec. 69. Xp"h c g. 273, 5, (b) ; c. a. and d. 279, R. 4, c. inf. 306, 1, (d); xpv c. d. and a. c. inf. 307, 6, and R. 3. Xprjv&a'i rtvi ri 278, 4 ; c. d. 285, (2). Xpus dec. 68, 19. Xoopuu c. d. 284, 3, v-)- Xoopi(eiv c. g. 271, 2. XwpLs c. g. 271, 3. X&pos and x^P a 70, B. Waveiu c. g. 273, 3, (b). tyeyeiv c. g. and a. 273, R. 20. xPevSea&ai c. g. 271. 2. ^cuStjs comp. 82, II. $i\6s e.g. 271, 3. T n5e with Part. 312, R. 7. Smx|, dim 53, R, 4. «j/e«r&ai c. g. 275, 3. o>s Prep. 290, 3 and R. 2. ws that, see 6Vt. «s u£, in ivishes (utinam) 259, 3, (b). ws, as, so as, const. 342 ; ovtws (&s) — cos in wish- es and asseverations 242 v R. 2; d>s with C Subs, (as might be ex- pected, ccs AaKeSai/u.6- vios, ut Laced, for a La- cedaemonian) 342, R. 4, cos with Superl. 239, R.2, cos c. d., as : us yeooVn, cos i/J-oi, meo judicio, cos ifiy So'|r? 284,3. (10) (b). oos c. part, and case abs. 312, 6 ; c. part. fut. 312, 6, (a). cos ins. on ovrcos 329, R. 8. cos, that, so that 330 ; &s kc, c. opt. utinam 260, R. 9. cos, when, see ore. cos ins. cosre, so that, see COSTS. cos elireiv and cos tiros el- ireiv 341, R. 3. cos els, eVi, irpos C. a., us eVi c. d. 290, R, 2. &>s ri 344, R. 6. ws & Pf. with Att. Red. 124, 2, {b). Dial. 230. ayvoeu 230. &yvv[j.i 187. 1. Dial. 230. liyu, A.I. 7}|a, a£ai in Thu. and Xen. ; A. II. 124, R.2; Pf.I.Act. 124,2; Pf. M. ^7/uoj. Dial. 230. ddu (Poet, aeiSu), P. 0V0- /xat (aeicro/xai), Att. (aeurw, a Char. 143, 6. aldeo/xai, a'tOofxai 166, 1. Dial. 230. alviw, formation of ten- ses 130, (d), 2. afyvfiai 230. cupiw 167, 1. Dial. 230. cupu) see detpco 230. aloSdvofxcu 160, 1. aia-ao) Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 230. Ma Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 230. axaxlfa 230. aKax^vos 230. a.Keojxa.1, formation of tenses 130, (d), 1. aKTjdew 230. aitovco, Pf. with Att. Red. 124, 2 ; F. a.KOvffOjxa.1. Pass, with (r 131, 2. aKpodo/j.a.1, F. -acrouai 129. R. 1. aAaAa^y, Char. 143, 6. dKaoixai 230. dAo7rd<> 223, 5. aXSaiva) 230. dXeictxc, Pfwith Att. Red. 124, 2. dAe£o> 166, 2. Dial. 230. dAeofxai or dAev 162. aAhdacrco, Char. 7. 143, 1. —A.I. and II. P. 141. , 4, (b). akAop.ai, a in format. 149, R. 2. Dial. 230. dAodw, F. -d. 129, R. 1. a.\vKT€co 230. aA'Vtfw 230. aX, -dvoo 230. a,uxpTdvpda? 230. aira(pt, dicTcrc!) 230. avaiva, Aug. 122, 1. 'ATAAZOMAI, Char. 143, 6. AYPAfl, see diravpdw. Comp. 230. av^dvea, av£a, 160, 4. 'ATPI2KOMAI, iiravp.230. d(pLKueofj.ai 159, 2. depvo-aw, Char. 143. 4. 'A*n, dwacpia-Kcc 230. &X&o,uai 166, 4. 'AXn, aucaxitu 230. 'AH, (Ep.) 230. dapro (deipoo) 230. B, Char. 143, 7. BAH, see flaiVw. fieiop.ai, /3eo/xai 230. Pido/uai 230. 8i&d(ca 163, 1. Comp. 0at'j/a> 230 Pij3puo~Kca 161, 6 Dial 230. jSuta 192, .0. fiidtxTKo/xai 161, 3. 0Aa7rr&>, Char. 0, 143, 1 Red. 123, 2. fiAao-rdvca 160, 5. flAao-^juew, Red. 123, 2. j8A«r», A. II. P. 140 R, 1. 0Aitt« Char. 143, 3. PXaxraca 230. jSoow 230. jSoovca 166, 5. 0oi\opai 166. 6. Dial. 230 fipdo-arw, Char. 143, 3. £/>exco A. II. P. 140, 2. jSpffw, Char. 143. 6. Ppvxdo/xai 230. /Bvveco, fivvoixai, /Sua; 1 59, 1 Ta/iew 165, 1. Comp. 230. ydvvjxai 230. TAfi, see yiyvofxai. Comp 230. yeyoovto-Kw 161, 7. Comp yeyava 230. yeivo/xai 230. 7eAd«, formation of ten- ses 130 (c). ydvro 230. TENH, see ylyvo/xai. yeva, A. P. with a 131, 3 77?&e'a> 165, 2. yr)pd«, A. II. P. and Pf. A. 140, 2 and 4. Sexojuai 230. tievw 230. Sew, formation of tenses 130, (d), 2, contraction 137, 2. 5ew, see 8e?. SicuTao;, Aug. 126, 2. SiaKovew, Aug. 126, 2. 5ioA.67o/*oi, Aug. 123, R. 2. Si5c«r/ca> 161, B. AIAHMI 230. didpdcrnto 161, 10. diSco/xi 175. 5i'6?/«m 180, R, 3. Dial. 230. AIHMI 180, R. 3 Dial. 230. 8t 230. eao, Aug. 122, 3. For- mation of tenses 129, It. 1. iyeipco Pf. with Att. Red. 124,2, (b) ; Pf. II. with variable vowel 140, 4. Aor. II. M. 155, 1. Dial. 230. 'ErKH, see cpepw. iyXeipeco, Aug. 126. 5. e5co, see icrbico. k£o/j.ai, see Kft9-i'{«. eSeXco 166, 8 i&i£co, Aug. 122, 3. E©n Aug.l22,3,Dial.230. 'EIAH, see opdte. flKofa, Aug. 121, R. 'EIKfl, Pf. eWu, Plup. itoK&v 140, R. 3 ; Aug. 122, 5. Inflection of eoiica 195, 2. Dial 230. efrcw, eiKoS-oj/ 162. elXeco, elXeco, ei'AAo* and etAAco, see e'/Aco. ei'Auw 230. e/fAco 166, 9. e f >t 181 and 225. elfxi 181 and 226. e'ivvjxi, see afxcpUvvvfXL. 'Einn, see $77,1*1. e'ipyvvjxi 187, 3. dpya 187, 3. Comp. 230. 'EIPOMAI 166,11. Comp. 230. 'EIPTMI, see ipvio 230. elpvco, see ipveo. eipco 230. elect, Aug. 122, 3, Dial. 230. e'ioo&a, see e&i(co. eXavvcc 158, 3. Dial. 230. eXacc, see eXavvcc. iKeyxeo, Pf.with Att.Red. 124, 2. e'AeAi(>, Char. 143, 6. Dial. 230. 'EAEY0f2, see epxofiai. kXicTcrco, Aug. 122, 3.— Pf. with Att. Red. 124, 2. 'EAKTH, see eXtcto. hXKto 166, 10. eKirco, Pf. eoX-rra, Plup. edoXireiv 140, R. 3. Aug. 122, 5. 'EAH, see atpeco. efxeca, formation of tenses 130, (d), 1. 4/jLfj.l 225. i[Xwf]/J.VK€, See 7]/XVCC. ifxivi-KXriixi 177, 5. ivap((cc, Char. 143, 6. ivavco, Pass, with a 131,2. 'ENE0H, see h'i\voba. 'ENEKfl, see epepec. eVeVa>, see cprj/xi. Comp. 230. ivwo&a 230. iviTTTCO 230. ivveirco, see ^77/xi. Comp. 230. kvvv/j.1, see c\fj.(pieuvvij.i. Comp. 230. eVoxAe'u, Aug. 126, 1. ^ot«:a, see 'EIKH. Comp. 230. copy a, see 'EPrn. kopTafa, Aug. 122, 5 eW'w 230. iiravpicTKco 230. i-rreiyo/j.ai 197, R. 2. i7ri&v/j. 167, 3. ecrndo), Aug. 122, 3. evade see avddvco. Comp 230. evSco see Ka&evSco. evpicTKCo 161, 11. evxofJ.ai Aug. 121, R. eX^duofiai see , formation of tenses 130, (1), d. (toi'uvfj.i 186, 1. JlfidffKLo, rifidco, 161, 12. r\yepe&op.ai see a7< f p* Comp. 230. INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 61? fepebopai see aXpca. Comp. 230. ripai 190. Dial. 230. tfpfipoTov see ap.apTa.voo. r)pi 178, R. 3. l/xvw 230. ectrrTO), Char. c/> 143, 1. &eA« see i&eXa). Sepopai 230. &e'« 154, 2 ; contract. 137, 1. Comp. Tpex<0> Sfr]\4w 230. eHnn 230. , formation of tenses 130, (c). brt\ 143, 1. SpJxTKw 161, 14. 156, 2. Dial. 230. Svvca and ftvcu 158, 4. &uw, formation of tenses 130, (b) 2. 'ISjoJw, contract. 137, R. 1. Dial. 230. l£dva) see Ka&ifa. ((w see tcaSifa. 'it]fj.i 180. Dial. 230. iKveopai, t/cco 159, 2. See acpLnveo/xai. Comp. 230. iXacTKopai 161, 15. 'IAHMI 230. %\\(t) see ei'Aw. Ipdcrcra), Char. 143, 3. fcrd^ut 230. 'i(TT7lp.l 175. l(Tx va ' lV(a i a hi for mat. 149, R. 2. tVxfeo^at and to-x^M*" see inri(rxveopai. 'in see elyta. KAA-, KAIA-, see kcu- ua&4(op.aL, Aug. 128, 3. Kct^e5oi;/xat 154, 5. Ka&euSco 166, 13. Ka&7)p.ai, Aug. 126. 3. /ca\h£aVa> see /caS-i^a). Kaivvpai 230. dtofw /edeo 154, 2. Dial. 230. /caAew, formation of ten- ses 130, (d) 2: Opt. Plup. M. or. P. 154, 8; metath. in Pf. 156, 2. Kaixva 149, 5, and 158, 10. Dial. 230. napLiTTco Pf. M. or P. 144, R. 2. KaTTjyopecc, Aug. 126, 5. /caa> see Kaico. KiTfxai 189. Dial. 230. Keipco 230. KEIH see Ke7p.ai. /ceAevo), Pass, with cr, 131,2. /ce'AAco 230. KtXopai 230. Kevrecc 230. Kepdvvvpi 183, 1. Dial. 230. KepSaiVw, d in foi-mat.149, R. 2. Pf. I. Act. 149, 6. Comp. 230. Kev&w 230. kt}8oj 166, 17. Dial. 230. KiSvapai 230. Kivvpai 230. Kipvdw 230. Kr\;aVa>, -Oyuai 230. idxpVL" 177, I- /aa> 230. KXayydva) 160, 8. /, Char. 143, 6, KotXaivca, a in form. 149, R. 2. KoAouo),Pass.with cr 131, 3. kStttw, Chai*. 7r, 143, 1 Dial. 230. Ko; evvvp.1 1 82. Dial. 230. Korea) 230. Kpd(a>, Char. 7 143, 65 Perf. 194, R. Comp. 230. Kpaiva) 230. Kp4p.ap.ai 179, 5. Kpep:dvvvpi 183, 2. /cptVo? Pf. A. and M. or P. and A. I. P. 149, 7, and R. 4. Kpova), Pass.with cr 131,3. KpVTTTO) 143, 1. Kpc&fa, Char. 143, 6. Krdopai, Red. 123. R. 1 ; Subj. Pf. and Opt. Plup. 154, 8. KTeivvp.1 188, 2. KTelvw, F. KTevu. A. I. e«- reiva, (A. II. eKTavop doubtful in pi-ose) ; Pf. A. eKTova 141, 4; Pf. P. eKTapai and Aor. P. iKrd&rjv ( tKTav&riv in later writers) 149, R. 3. Poet, and Dial 230. KTivvvpi sec KTeivvpi. KTvirea) 165, 4. KvXica, Pass with or 131, 2 icvvea) 159, 3. Kvpea), Kvpa) 230. AcryxdVw 160, 15. Dial. 230. AAZTMAI 230. Xapfidva) 160, 16. Dial. 230. ■XavSrdva) 160, 17. Dial. 230. Kdo-KO) 230. Ae'7 w > (a) to say, without Pf. A.; Pf. M. AeAe7- pai. A. P. e'Ae'x^J'.— (b) to collect, and ia compounds Pf. e3fAox«, M. or P. e'tXeypat 140, 5 ; Aug. 123, 3 ; A. II. P. iXeyrjv and A. I. P. 140,R. 1. Comp.AEXfi. Xeiira), A. eXlirov, Pf. II. AeAoiTra 140, 4. A. II, A. and P. 141, 3. cor- responding form 160. 18. Ae7ra>, A. II. P. 140, B.l 615 INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. \evKa'iuoo,a in for.149, R. 2. \evcrcra), Char. 143, 3. \6u«, Pass, with o- 131,2. AEXn 230. Ki/j.irdvci) see \eiirw. XtfiuTTco, Char, t 143, 3. Aia-ao/nai, Char. 143, 3. \ovw, contract. 137, 5. Dial. 230. Kvfxaivafiai Pf. M. or P. 149, 8. \i'o>, formation of tenses 130, (b) 2. Dial. 230 Maii/ofjLai 230. jj.aiou.ai 230. (jurv^dva 160, 19. Dial.230. (xapvatxai 230- /j.aprop4ci) 165, 5. uda-o-oj, Char. 7 143, 1. {ia, fiirjuai, jj.ia.vai 149, R. 2= Pf. Act. /j.eu.iayKa 149, 6. Pf. M. or P. fiefiiafffiai 149, 8. Dial. 230. /wV"/" 18 <\ 5 - Dial. 230. fj.ilxv7} (p^id-cu). Pass, with 143, 7. Eea>, formation of tenses 130, (d) 1. jpipaivu Pf. M. or P. 149, 8. qvpeca 165, 6. £vw, Pass, with a, 131, 2. 'O3a£o, Char. 143, 6. wStWo-frcu see OAT2- SOMAI 230. 6(o> .*t>, 23. olaicifa Aug. 122, 1. o'iyvv/j.L, oiiyw see avoiy. ol5a see opaco. Comp. 230. 160, 9. otKOvpew 122, 2. oljxaL see o'iojjaL. olfidca 122, 2. oi/«$£<» 143, 6. oty/ see ofo/mai and . opaa> 167, 4. 230. bpyaivoj, a in form. 149. R. 2. 'OPEfNTMI 230. opeyoi) 230. opvv/j.1 230. bpvero-co, Char, -y 143, 1 Pf. with Att.Red.l 24,2 bcrcppaivojxai 160, 11. Dial 230. bvcppaoSai see baeppaivo fj.ai. ovpecc, Aug. 122. 4. ovrdca 230. o^efAw 166, 26. Dial 230. 6 230. b(phio~i(dvco 160, 12. riai(>, Char. 143, 7. 7rcuw 166, 27. ■n-aAaiu Pass.with , contract. 137, 2. Tr€K7ecc,Trvov 230. irjiyuvpi 187,8. Dial.230. ■jriXva/iai 230. vifivKrifii 177, 5. Dial.230 7ri(Lt7rprj(Lt: 177, 6. ■7rVw 158, 5. iwriffKO) 161, 19. INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 619 irrnpdffKw 161, 20. TriVrw 163, 3. Dial. 230. ITLTUaCO 230. ir\d(, formation of tenses 154, 2 and 192, 7. 'PEn, see (pnfii. otyvvfu 187, 9. biy4ca 230. a>iy6(a, contract. 137, 3. piiTTca, Char.

222, R. 1. (Tupi^ (crupiTTw), Char. 143, 6. o-(pd£o>}, o-cpdrra), Char. 7 143, 1 and 6. acpiyyw, Char. 144, R, 2. acpvfa, Char. 143, 6. a-Xaco, format, of tenses 130, (c). Char. 143, 5. (tc^co, see 156, R. Dial. 230. rdtro-ca, rdrTw, Char. 7 143, 1. TetVw 149, R. 3. TeAew, format, of tenses 130, (d), 1. r4fxvco 158, 11. TEMXi 230. rep7rco 230. t4t/xoi/, see TEMn. Terpaivco 163, 4. revxo) 230. -Hjkw 140, R. J TIEH 230. TiSrqixi 175. t/ktw 143, 2. rivvvixi 185 ; Comp. 230 rtWo 158, 6. Tirpdw 163, 4. Tirpctxruo) 161, 22. Tio> 158, 6. TAAft, 194,4. rAyjvou 177, 7. TpL-fiyca 230. Tpaxwo Pf.M. or P. 149,8 TpeVw, variable vowel in A. II. Act. M. P. 140, 25 A.I.Act.M.P.141, 3 ; Pf. I. Act. and Pf. M. or P. 140, 5, 6. Verb. Adj. Tpeirr6s and with middle sense TpaTT7]T40S. rp4(po}, Pf. T4rpocpa 140, 4. Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. A. I. P. e&pecp&rji', ra- rer than A. II. P. irpd- (pt]u 140, 2. Dial. 230. verb Adj. &pe7rr6s. rp4xc>> 167, 5. rp4co, format, of tenses 130, (d), 1. rpify, Char. 7 143, 6. rvyxdvco 160, 21. TU7TTC0 166, 31. 'T7T6^j/^/iu/c6 see riixvw 230. vinaxv4opuxi 159, 4. vTTvdoTTa, Char. 143, 3. f/co, formation of tenses with 0- 131, 2. *Arii see e. 167, 6. comp. 230 (psvyo) see (pvyydvca. corup, 230. ?j/*f 167, 7, 178. c/j2rdVco 158, 7. Dial. 230. ^efpa>, A. II. P. 140, 2 Pf.II. 140,4. comp. 230 (p&iyca 158, 8. Dial. 230. (pi\4a) 135. Dial. 230. pdyvv/j.i 187, 10. ) 160, 22. (pvpw 230. 192, 11. eomp. 230. X.d(o/j.ai 230. Xaipu 166, 32. comp. 230. XaXdcc, formation of ten- ses 130, (c). XcvSdvw 160, 23. comp. 230. xd(TKCo 161, 24. Xefc, Char. 5 143, 5 ; Pf. II. nexoSa 140, 4. Fut. Xstov/jlcu 154. 3. A. II. Act. according to the analogy of A. 1. 1 54, 8. Xew, formation of tenses 154, R. 1. 230. x6a, Pass, with a- 131, 2. Xpdoficu, formation of tenses 129, R. 2.; A. P. with , formation of ten- ses 129, R. 2 ; contract. 187. 3 XPV 177, 2. Xpiw, formation of tenses 130, (a). Xp&vvv\u 186, 4. Yavco, Pass, with o- 131,2, \pdco, Pass, with cr 131, 3; contract. 137, 3. yficyu, A. II. P. 140, R. 1. ^X«, A. II. P. 1 41 , R Wi^e'w 165, 7. tcveofxai, Aug. 122, 4 comp. irokwdcu. nr.T 5 - 1950 A A x 0° 0° V -> 6 ;r-:<% ~^e ^o* .*■* / <-/•■ \^ * ^ n ^ /rftig ^ ,# - v * * * " ,■ -^ V % %^ y,^ y t v vt * ^ ^3* ^ tf ^0 V *>^ ^« V > /, v ^e. a: % % ' v.*".*.'''. % & °- ' 3Vr$ ^0 \> °o/' 0^ . ^ ^ V' :Vo ^ kV °^ V*". \> , \,^ J ^\" r 0^ r# "^A 0^ ^o^ ^ ^ ,^^ ^s ^, ^% ' ^» r4f